Cornell University 
 Library 
 
 The original of tliis book is in 
 tine Cornell University Library. 
 
 There are no known copyright restrictions in 
 the United States on the use of the text. 
 
 http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031185857 
 
^iiSSffiHl?!!!..?* "'® "-atin language : 
 
 V gn 
 
 i 
 
 ,. 3 1924 031 185 857 
 olin.anx 
 
GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 Latin Language: 
 
 « 
 
 "WITH EXERCISES AND VOCABULARIES. 
 
 BY 
 
 WM. BINGHAM, A.M., 
 
 Author of " Bingham's Latin Rkadee," " Bingham's Caesar," 
 AND "Bingham's English Grammar." 
 
 REVISED AND IN GREAT PART REWRITTEN 
 
 BY 
 W. GOEDON McCABE, A.M., 
 
 Head Master of the University School, .Petersburg, Va. 
 
 PHILADELPHIA: 
 E. H. BUTLER & CO. 
 

 corn ell x 
 
 university: 
 
 \UBRARV 
 
 Copyright, 1884, 
 BY E. H. BUTLER & CO. 
 
 Wkstcott & Thomson, Shebhan & Co, 
 
 SUeirotypgn and Stereotj/pert, Philada. Printert, PhUada. 
 
PREFACE TO THE NEW EDITION, 
 
 The final test of a school grammar is the test of the class-room. 
 
 Tried by this test, Bingham's Latin Grammar, despite defects in 
 matters of detail, has for nearly twenty years enjoyed a wide popular- 
 ity in the Preparatory Schools and in many Colleges throughout the 
 country. 
 
 Its author, Prof. William Bingham, was a man of clear head, a 
 scholar without parade of learning, and, as a teacher, possessed of 
 notable skill in imparting knowledge. 
 
 His experience of many years as head of a great school, his enthu- 
 siastic devotion to his work as a teacher of Latin, and especially his 
 intimate knowledge of the needs of younger boys, admirably fitted 
 him for the task which he set himself — the preparation of " a 'prac- 
 tical first book in Latin, simple enough for beginners and yet full 
 enough for more advanced students." 
 
 Guided by this practical experience in the class-room, he shaped 
 his book on lines so simple and easy of comprehension as have en- 
 sured its popularity in spite of many palpable deficiencies. Had 
 PKorEssoB Bingham lived, there can be no question that long before 
 this the book would have been thoroughly revised and brought up 
 more nearly to the requirements of modern scholarship. The twenty 
 years that have elapsed since he gave the first edition to the public 
 have been marked by extraordinary activity in the field of classical 
 philology. Much that was regarded as assured when he wrote has 
 been rejected by a more scientific study of Latin, and much that was 
 then clouded with doubt is now settled upon a sure basis. 
 
 The task that would have been to him a labor of love has finally 
 been confided to me by his representatives, and I have honestly trigd 
 to carry out the work, as nearly as has been possible, in accordance 
 with the methods that originally guided him. 
 
 I have carefully avoided lumbering up the pages with a mass of 
 philological matter o jt of place in a practical drill-book of limited 
 scope, steadily keeping in view, in the many changes found necessary, 
 the aim of presenting the results of recent study in the simplest pos- 
 sible language. 
 
 A word as to some of these changes : 
 
 As will be seen, I have adopted at the outset the " Roman Pronun- 
 ciation" as resting on the surest historical basis, and have endeavored 
 to illustrate by English equivalents, as nearly as may be, what the 
 best scholars regard as the true Roman sound of the letters. 
 
 3 
 
4 PREFACE. 
 
 The whole of the Etymology has been carefully revised and, to a 
 very considerable extent, augmented. In this work I have kept con- 
 stantly at my elbow the last edition of Neue's Formenlehre, a book, 
 to which, in common with all Latin students, I am under the very 
 greatest obligations. 
 
 The Syntax has been recast and almost entirely rewritten, still 
 preserving in the main the lines laid down by the author of the orig- 
 inal work. Availing myself freely of the discretion allowed me, I 
 liave added new chapters dealing with syntactical constructions not 
 contained in previous editions of the grammar, and, by carefully re- 
 writing the old 'discussions, I have endeavored to embody in the same 
 compass the results reached by a more rigorous scholarship. To 
 teachers familiar with the old Grammar, this will be especially no- 
 ticeable in the treatment of Case relations, of Causal, Conditional, 
 Temporal, Relative, Interrogative, and Iterative Sentences, Oratio 
 Obliqua, etc. 
 
 In the Appendices much matter has been discarded as of no prac- 
 tical moment. The remaining matter has been simply revised, save 
 that I have added a.brief discussion {Appendix IV.) of the Personal 
 endings of the Verb. 
 
 I have, of course, in my work made free use of the best Latin 
 Grammars — German, English, and American. To all I owe some- 
 thing, directly or indirectly, but I do not know that my obligations 
 to any one of them are such as demand more than this general 
 acknowledgment. Doubtless my presentation of more than one syn- 
 tactical point has been unconsciously influenced by the admirable 
 Grammar of my old master. Dr. B. L. Gildeesieevb, a book which 
 I have steadily used with my own higher classes for the past sixteen 
 years. Certainly, I owe much to his personal teaching, for. which I 
 can never be sufficiently grateful. 
 
 Of other grammars I might also mention the excellent school 
 grammar of Ellendt, as revised (23d ed.) by Dr. Moeitz Seyf- 
 FERT, and, for many apt examples, the AusfiihrUche Qrummaiik of 
 KuHNER and the larger work of Prop. Eoby. 
 
 That mistakes of quantity should occur in a Grammar which un- 
 dertakes to mark both long and short syllables, is wellnigh inevit- 
 able, and, although I have exercised the greatest vigilance in read- 
 ing the proofs, 1 cannot expect it to be otherwise in this case. I 
 will, therefore, take it as a substantial favor if my brother school- 
 masters throughout the country will advise me promptly of such 
 errors as they may from time to time discover. 
 
 W. GOEDON McCAEE. 
 
 UNrVEBSITY SCHOOIi, 
 
 Pkteesi ukg, Tieqinia, July 9, 1884. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY, 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Letters 9 
 
 Diphthongs 10 
 
 Pkonunciation..... 11 
 
 Syllables , 12 
 
 Explanation op Marks 12 
 
 Quantity, Accent 12 
 
 DiVIStON ofWoeds 13 
 
 Nouns 13 
 
 Gender 14 
 
 General Bules 14 
 
 Number 15 
 
 Case 15 
 
 Person 16 
 
 Inflection.. 16 
 
 First Declension 17 
 
 Second Declension 27 
 
 Stems in -Srd 30 
 
 Dative Case 32 
 
 Ablative Case 33 
 
 Third Declension 35 
 
 Class 1 37 
 
 Class II 40 
 
 Class III 44 
 
 Class IV 46 
 
 Class V 48 
 
 Masculine Forms 48 
 
 Neuter Forms 50 
 
 Class VI 52 
 
 Masculine Forms 52 
 
 Feminine Forms 54 
 
 Neuter Forms 56 
 
 page 
 
 Irregular Nouns, Third Decl.. 58 
 
 Summary of Rules of Gender.. 61 
 
 Masculines 61 
 
 Feminines 61 
 
 Neuters 62 
 
 Peculiar Case-Endings 63 
 
 Fourth Declension 67 
 
 Fifth Declension 71 
 
 Variable Nouns 73 
 
 Heterogeneous Nouns 73 
 
 Heteroclites 74 
 
 Defective Nouns 75 
 
 Adjectives 79 
 
 Adjectives of First and Second 
 
 Declension 79 
 
 Adjectives of Third Declension 84 
 
 Numeral Adjectives -89 
 
 Cardinals 91 
 
 Ordinals, Distributives, and 
 
 Adverbs 92 
 
 Comparison of Adjectives 97 
 
 Formation of Comparative 
 
 and Superlative 99 
 
 Irregular Comparison 102 
 
 Defective Comparison 105 
 
 Pronouns 110 
 
 Substantive Personal Pronouns 110 
 Adjective Personal, or Posses- 
 sive, Pronouns 113 
 
 Demonstrative Pronouns 116 
 
 Is, Id^ 130 
 
 Htc, IstS, MIS ;... 122 
 
 5 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Intensive Pdiioud 123 
 
 Relative Pronouns 126 
 
 Interrogatives » 130 
 
 Indefinites 133 
 
 Correlatives 136 
 
 Vkkbs 20, 139 
 
 iloods 21,140 
 
 Tenses 21, 64, 140 
 
 Voices 142 
 
 Persons and Numbers 143 
 
 The Indefinite Verb 143 
 
 Conjugation 144 
 
 Conjugation of M<sS 146 
 
 First Conjugation 22, 148 
 
 Second Conjugation 76, 156 
 
 Third Conjugation 106, 161 
 
 Fourth Conjugation 107, 166 
 
 Table of Endings 172 
 
 Verbs in -i}i of the Third Conju- 
 gation 174 
 
 The Passive Construction 176 
 
 Deponent Verbs 177 
 
 PAOB 
 
 Irregular Verbs 181 
 
 Defective Verbs 191 
 
 Impersonal Verbs 194 
 
 Endings of. 194 
 
 Pakticltcs 196 
 
 Adverbs 196 
 
 Comparison of Adverbs 200 
 
 Prepositions 201 
 
 Prepositions in Cotuposition.. 203 
 
 Conjunctions 205 
 
 Copulative 20o 
 
 Disjunctive 206 
 
 Adversative 207 
 
 Corroborative '. 208 
 
 Causal 209 
 
 Conclusive 210 
 
 Final 210 
 
 Conditional 210 
 
 Concessive 210 
 
 Temporal 210 
 
 Comparative 210 
 
 InteijectioDB 211 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 Subject and Predicate 212 
 
 Agreemekt 213 
 
 Apposition 214 
 
 Adjectives.. 
 Relatives... 
 
 , 216 
 218 
 
 Nominative Case 220 
 
 Genitive Case 221 
 
 Genitive of Quality 222 
 
 Genitive of Property 222 
 
 Partitive Genitive 222 
 
 Objective Genitive and Adjec- 
 tives and Verbs 224 
 
 Genitive of Crime 227 
 
 Genitive of Price 227 
 
 Dative Cask 232 
 
 Dative of Indirect Object.. 232 
 
 Dative with Transitive Verbs... 233 
 I ative with Intrajisitive Verbs.. 233 
 Dative with Compound Verbs... 234 
 Dative with Adjectives 234 
 
 Dative of Advantage or Disad- 
 vantage 235 
 
 Dative of Possessor 236 
 
 Dativus Ethicus 236 
 
 Dative of Purpose or End 237 
 
 Dative of the Agent 257 
 
 Acc!usative Case 240 
 
 Direct Object 241 
 
 Accusative, Double 241 
 
 Accusative, Second 242 
 
 Accusative of Time and Space.. 243 
 Accusative of Place Whither.... 243 
 
 Accusative of Limitation 244 
 
 Accusative in Exclamations 244 
 
 Vocative Case 247 
 
 Ablative Case 248 
 
 Ablative of Separation 248 
 
 Ablative of Origin 249 
 
 Ablative of Limitation 249 
 
 Ablative of Comparison 250 
 
 Ablative of Diflference 251 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 P GB 
 
 AblatlTeof Cause 253 
 
 Ablative of Agent 254 
 
 Ablative of Means or Instru- 
 ment 255 
 
 Ablative with uiOr, etc 255 
 
 Ablative vpitli GpHs and HsHs.. 255 
 Ablative with Verbs of Mll- 
 
 inff, etc 255 
 
 Ablative of Price 26S 
 
 Ablative of Manner 256 
 
 Ablative of Quality 257 
 
 Ablative of Place Where 258 
 
 Ablative of Time When 269 
 
 Ablative Absolute 260 
 
 Kames of Places 261-265 
 
 The Passive Cohsteuotion 270 
 
 The Indefisite Verb 270 
 
 Infinitive 270 
 
 Subject Infinitive 270 
 
 Complementary Infinitive 271 
 
 Historical Infinitive 272 
 
 page 
 
 Gerund and Gerundive ^ .... 273 
 
 Supine 276 
 
 Pkopositiohs, Syntax of 280 
 
 The Moods 231 
 
 Tenses 28S 
 
 Sequence of Tenses 283 
 
 Paeticipial Peopositions 284 
 
 Ablative Absolute 285 
 
 INFIHITIVE PKOPOSITIOlfS 288 
 
 Cadsal Pbopositions 295 
 
 Final and Consecutive Peopo- 
 sitions 298 
 
 Conditional Peopositions 307 
 
 Concessive Peopositions 313 
 
 (JbMPAEATivE Peopositions 316 
 
 Temporal Propositions 318 
 
 Relative Peopositions 326 
 
 Inteeeogative Peopositions 332 
 
 Obatio Obliqua 338 
 
 APPENDICES. 
 
 I. — Gbeee Nouns of the First 
 
 Declension 345 
 
 li. — Greek Nouns of the Second 
 
 Declension 345 
 
 III. — Greek Nouns of the Third 
 
 Declension 346 
 
 IV. — Personal Endings 
 
 .... 346 
 
 v.— Peculiarities of Tense 
 
 Formation 349 
 
 Tenses formed on the Present- 
 Stem 349 
 
 Tenses formed on the Perfect- 
 Stem 350 
 
 Compound Verbs. 350 
 
 VI. The Various Formations of 
 THE Perfect and Supine 
 
 Stems 350 
 
 First Conjugation 350 
 
 Second Coivjugation 351 
 
 Third Conjugation. 354 
 
 Inceptive Verbs 355 
 
 Deponent Verbs, Third Conju- 
 gation 356 
 
 Fourth Conjugation 357 
 
 Deponent Verbs, Fourth Conju- 
 gation 358 
 
 VII. — EoMAN Mode of Beckon- 
 
 INQ Time 358 
 
 VTIL— Prosody .%9 
 
 Quantity 360 
 
 Increments 362 
 
 Singular Increments 363 
 
 Plural Increments 364 
 
 Increment of Verbs 364 
 
 Penults 365 
 
 Antepenults 367 
 
 Final Syllables 367 
 
 Monosyllables 357 
 
 Polysyllables 368 
 
CONTEIfTS. 
 
 PAQE 
 
 Verslflcatlon 370 
 
 Metre and Verses 371 
 
 Figures of Prosody 372 
 
 Hhythm. 373 
 
 Dactylic Metre 373 
 
 Anapaestic Metre 375 
 
 Iambic Metre 376 
 
 Trochaic Metre 377 
 
 Cboriambic Metre 378 
 
 Ionic Metre 379 
 
 FAOE 
 
 Compound Metres..— 380 
 
 Stanzas 381 
 
 Horatian Metres 381 
 
 Metrical Key to the Odes of 
 Horace 382 
 
 IX.— FlOHEES 384 
 
 Figures of Etymology 384 
 
 Figures of Syntax 384 
 
 X.— Models of Analysis 386 
 
 liATIH-ESOLISH., 
 
 VOCABULARIES. 
 
 891 1 English-Latin.. 
 
 , 417 
 
LATIN GRAMMAR. 
 
 § 1. Latin Geammak is the science of the Latin 
 language. It treats of the words of the language, and 
 of the laws by which they are combined into sentences ; 
 of the quantity of syllabl&s and the laws of metre. 
 
 It is divided into Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody. 
 
 ETYMOLOGY. 
 
 § 2. Etymology treats — 1. Of the letters which make 
 up words, and their pronunciation. 2. Of the changes 
 which words undergo. 3. Of their derivation. 
 
 LETTERS. 
 
 § 3. A letter is a mark used to represent a sound of 
 the human voice. 
 
 In the Latin alphabet there are twenty-five letters. 
 They are A, a; B, b; C, c; D, d; E, e; F, f ; G, g; 
 H,h; I,i(J,j); K,k; L,l; M, m ; N,n;0,o; P,p; 
 Q,q; E, r; S, s; T, t; U, u (Y, v); X,x;Y,y; Z, z. 
 
 Remarh. — I and J were originally the same letter ; so also were 
 U and V. K is used only before a, and chiefly in abbreviations. 
 Y and Z are used only in words derived from the Greek, and 
 were added after Cicero's time. H is a breathing, and does not 
 affect the quantity of the vowel before it. The Romans used 
 only the capital letters. 
 
 9 
 
10 DIPHTHONGS, CONSONANTS. 
 
 § 4. Letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants. 
 The Vowels are 
 
 a, e, i, 0, II, y. 
 
 §5. Diphthongs. 
 
 A Diphthong is a combination of two Vowels, which 
 practically become one in sound. U'he Diphtlioiigs are 
 ae, au, el, eu, oe, and ui. 
 
 Ai, oi, and ou occur as Diphthongs in early Latin. 
 
 t 
 §6. Consonants. 
 According to the organ of speech used in uttering 
 them. Consonants are divided into : 
 
 Labials (lip-letters), p, h, ph, f, in, v. 
 lAnguals (tongue-letters), t, d, th, I, n, r, s. 
 Palatals (palate-letters), e, k, qn, g, ch, h. 
 
 The Linguals are often called Dentals (teeth-letters), 
 and the Palatals called Gutturals (throat-letters). 
 
 Consonants are further divided, according to the mode 
 of uttering them, into Liquids and Mutes. 
 
 The Liquids are /, m, n, r. 
 Of these m and n are nasals. 
 jS is a sibilant. 
 
 The Mutes are : 
 
 P-mutes, p, b, ph, f {labials'). 
 
 T-mutes, t, d, th (linguals). 
 
 K-mutes, k, c, qu, g, ch (palatals). 
 
 We further distinguish three orders of Mutes : 
 Smooth (or Thin), p, t, k, c, qu. 
 
 Middle, b, d, g. 
 
 Rough, ph, f, ih, ch. 
 
PRONUNCIATION. 11 
 
 The Eough Mutes were not used in old Latin, and occur al- 
 most entirely in Greek words. 
 The Double Consonants are a; = cs {gs, gus, hs) and Z'=dz, 
 
 §7. Peonunciation. 
 
 1. Vowds. 
 
 a = a in fother. a = a in partook, 
 
 e = e in whey. 6 = e in met. 
 
 i = i in machine. i = i in sit. 
 
 0=0 in lone. . 6 = o in not. 
 
 ii = 00 in boot. ii = u in pull. 
 
 y == German ii in Muller (nearly our Miller). 
 
 2. Diphthongs. 
 
 ae and oe = a in made. 
 
 au = ow in power. 
 
 ei = nearly ei in feint (but with stress on latter vowel). 
 
 eu = eu in {end. 
 
 ui = Eng. we, or French oui. 
 
 3. Consonants. The Consonants are pronounced as in 
 English, except : 
 
 B before s ov t ■= p; e. g. urbs, pronounced urps. 
 
 C always = k, as in keen. 
 
 Ch in Latin words = k (never as in English charter) ; in 
 Greek words ^= k + h (i.e. a rough breathing immediately 
 after an ordinary k). 
 
 G always hard, as in give. 
 
 J = 3/ in year. 
 
 N followed by c, g, qu, and x has sound of ng in anger. 
 
 Qu = qu, as in queen; before u, qu =^ c (e. g. quum = 
 cum). 
 
 R always trilled, as in ferry. 
 
 S always sharp, as in hiss; not the z sound, as in his. 
 
12 SYLLABLES, EXPLANATION OF MABKS. 
 
 T always sharp ; e. g. naM, pron Dunced nah-ti-d, not nay- 
 ahi-o. 
 
 X always sharp, as in axe. 
 V like Eng. W, as in wine. 
 
 Final M was sometimes not sounded, or perhaps pronounced 
 but indistinctly. 
 
 §8. Syllables. 
 
 There are no silent Vowels in Latin ; but every word 
 has as many syllables as it has Vowels or Diphthongs ; 
 as, m&-rS. 
 
 A word of one syllable is called a monosyllable; a 
 word of two syllables, a dissyllable; a word of more 
 than two, a polysyllable. 
 
 The last syllable of a word is called the ultimate ; the 
 next to the last, the penult /the third from the last, the 
 antepenult. 
 
 EXPLANATION OP MAEKS. 
 
 § 9. The marks of punctuation are the comma (,), used to mark 
 the shortest pause; the semicolon (;), used to mark a pause twice 
 as long as the comma ; the colon (:), used to mark a pause three 
 times as long as the comma ; the period {.), used to mark the 
 longest pause; the interrogation point (?), which shows that a 
 question is asked; and the exclamation point (!), used to mark 
 expressions of surprise, grief, etc. 
 
 The marks of quantity are ( ~ ) to indicate a long vowel ; ( " ) 
 to indicate a short vowel ; and {— ) to indicate that a vowel is 
 sometimes long and sometimes short. 
 
 The dimreaia ( " ) shows that the vowel over which it is placed 
 does not form a diphthong with the vowel before it ; as, agr. 
 
 A contracted syllable is simply marked long ( ~ ) ; as, quls for 
 quUmi. 
 
 QUANTITY, ACCENT. 
 
 §10. Rule 1. — ^AU Diphthongs, and all Vowels de- 
 rived from Diphthongs, are long. 
 
NOUNS. 13 
 
 Ruh S. — ^A Vowel before another ^''owel is short; as, 
 dS-Us, 1^0. 
 
 Mule 8. — A Vowel before two Consonants or a double 
 Consonant is long by position ; as, o in propter ; a in 
 cubXs. 
 
 Rule 4- — Dissyllables are accented on the penult ; as, 
 d^'us. 
 
 Rule 5. — Polysyllables are accented — 
 
 (a) on the penult, if the penult is long ; as, IS-o'nifs ; 
 
 (6) on the antepenult, if the penult is short or com- 
 mon ; as, dSm'1-niis. 
 
 DIVISION OP WOEDS. 
 
 §11. I. Words are divided according to their forma- 
 tion into — 
 
 1. Primitive ; i. e. not derived from other words; as, 
 man, king. 
 
 2. Derivative; i. e. derived from other words; as, 
 manly, kingdom, 
 
 3. Simple; i. e. not made up of other words; as, man. 
 
 4. Compound; i. e. made up of other words; as, man- 
 kind. 
 
 II. Words are divided according to their meaning into 
 eight classes, called parts of speech : viz. the Noun, Ad- 
 jective, Pronoun, Verb, Adverb, Preposition, Oonjunctlon, 
 Inteijedion. 
 
 Hem. — The last four are generally mutilated forms of the Noun. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 § 12. 1. A Noun is the name of a person or tiling; as, 
 man, dty. 
 
14 GENDER. 
 
 2. A Common Noun is tlie name of any on( of a class 
 of persons or things ; as, man, city. 
 
 3. A Proper Noun is the name of an individual person 
 or thing ; as, Caesar, Rome. 
 
 4. An Abdract Noun is the name of a quality, action, 
 being, or mode of action or being ; as, goodness, running, 
 sickness. 
 
 5. A 3Iate7-ial Noun is the name of a substance or ma- 
 terial ; as, gold, iron, water. 
 
 6. A Collective Noun is a common noun which in the 
 singular denotes more than one; as, multitude. 
 
 GENDER, NUMBER, CASE, PERSON. 
 
 § 13. 1. To Nouns belong gender, number, case, and 
 person. 
 
 Gender. 
 
 2. Gender means kind, or class. As used by gram- 
 marians, it means the kind or class of a Noun with 
 reference to the sex of the thing which the Noun 
 denotes. 
 
 3. Natural gender is determined by sex; thus, the 
 names of males are naturally masculine. 
 
 4. Grammatical gender is determined, not by sex, but 
 by Declension and termination; thus, mensd, a table, is 
 feminine (though it is the name of a thing without life), 
 because it is of the First Declension. 
 
 5. General Rules of Gender. 
 R%de 1. — Names of male beings, and of most rivers, 
 winds, months, mountains, and nations, are masculine. 
 
NUMBER, CASE. 15 
 
 Rule S. — Names of female beings, cities, countries, isl- 
 cnds, trees, plants, ships, and gems are feminine. 
 
 Eule S. — Nouns which are neither masculine nor fem- 
 inine are neuter. 
 
 Rule 4- — Some Nouns are either masculine or feminine. 
 These, if they are names of living beings, are said to be 
 of common gender ; if of things without life,, of doubtful 
 gender. 
 
 Number. 
 
 § 14. Numher is the variation of form which shows 
 whether one thing is meant, or more than one. 
 
 The Singular number is the form which denotes one 
 thing ; as, stell-&, a star ; the Plural is the form which 
 denotes more than one; as, stell-ae, stars. 
 
 Case. 
 
 § 15. Case is the variation of form which shows the 
 relation of the Noun to other words. 
 
 Latin Nouns have six Cases, viz. : 
 
 (a) The Nominative, which answers the question who? 
 or what ? and gives the simple name of the thing spoken of. 
 
 (6) The Genitive,vih\ch marks those relations expressed 
 in English by of, or the Possessive Case ; as, umbrd, the 
 shade {of whatf), silvae, of the forest. 
 
 (c) The Dative, which denotes that to or for which, or 
 with reference to which, anything is, or is done. 
 
 (d) The Accusaiive, which is the Object of a Transitive 
 Verb, or of certain Prepositions. 
 
 (e) The Vocative, which is used when a person is ad- 
 dressed. 
 
 (/) The Ablative, which marks those relations expressed 
 in English by from, with, in, by. 
 
16 PERSON. 
 
 Person. 
 
 § 16. Person means the character which a Noun or a 
 Pronoun has, according as it represents the speaker, the 
 person spoken to, or the person or thing spoken of. 
 
 A Noun or a Pronoun representing the speaker is of 
 the first person; as, I, Darius, make a decree. Here "/" 
 and "Darius " are of the first person. 
 
 A Noun or a Pronoun representing the person spoken 
 to is of the second person; as, Do you hear me, Robert f 
 Here " you " and "Robei-t " are of the second person. 
 
 Bemark.— Things without life are sometimes addressed, and 
 are then said to be personified, or treated as persons. 
 
 A Noun or a Pronoun representing the person or thing 
 spoken of is of the third person ; as, John runs ; waier , 
 freezes. Here "John" and "water" are of the third 
 person. 
 
 INFLECTION. 
 
 § 17. The changes which words undergo to express 
 their different relations are called inflection. 
 
 The inflection of Nouns is called Declension ; that of 
 verbs. Conjugation. 
 
 There are five Declensions in Latin, distinguished by 
 the endings of the Genitive Singular, or by the final letter 
 (called the characteristic) of the stem. 
 
 We thus distinguish : 
 
 1st Decl., Gen. Sing, -ae ; characteristic 3 (A Declension). 
 
 2d " 
 3d " 
 
 it 
 ) 
 
 it 
 
 t 
 
 tt 
 tl 
 
 -I ; " 6 (0 Declension). 
 -Ts ; " t (or a Consonant) 
 I and Consonant Declension. 
 
 4th " 
 5th " 
 
 tt 
 
 f 
 
 it 
 
 t 
 
 (( 
 it 
 
 -us(uis); " u (U Declension). 
 -ei ; " e (E Declension). 
 
FIRST DECLENSION. 17 
 
 THE FIRST (a) DECLENSION. 
 
 § 18. Latiu Nouns which have -ae in the Genitive Sin- 
 gular (stem-characteristic &) are of the First Declension. 
 The terminations are : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 3 
 
 
 ae 
 
 Gen. ae 
 
 
 arum 
 
 Dat. ae 
 
 
 is 
 
 Ace. am 
 
 
 as 
 
 Voc. a 
 
 
 ae 
 
 Abl. a 
 
 
 is 
 
 Taking mensd, which means a table \ 
 
 [stem mensSr-), by 
 
 changing the final letter of Hie stem into the above endings, 
 
 we have : 
 
 
 
 PAEADJjGM. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. mensa, a table, 
 
 mensae 
 
 I, tables. 
 
 Gen. mensae, of a table. 
 
 mensa rum, 0/ tables. 
 
 Dat.. mensae, to or for a table. 
 
 mensis, 
 
 to or for tables. 
 
 Ace. mensam, a table. 
 
 mensa s 
 
 , tables. 
 
 Voc. mensa, table! 
 
 mensae 
 
 , tables! 
 
 Abl. mensa, with, from, in, by 
 
 mensis. 
 
 with, from, in, 
 
 a table. 
 
 
 by tables. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Latin language has no Article: therefore 
 mensH may be rendered a table, or the table, according to the 
 connection. 
 
 Remark S. — An old Genitive in at sometimes occurs in poetry. 
 
 Remark 3. — The Noun fdmiliA has f&mUids in the Genitive Sin- 
 gular after pdtSr, mater, filiUs, and filid; as, pdierfdmilias, the 
 father of a family. 
 
 Remark ^. — A contracted Genitive Plural in -um is found 
 chiefly in patronymics (Aeneddum for Aenedddrum); in com- 
 pounds of -(^Id, signifying dwelling (caelicolum for ccettcoldr'Hm). 
 2* ^ 
 
18 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 and in compounds of -gend, signifying descent ( GrajuginUm for 
 GrajugSnarum) ; and in the Greek words amphora, a jar, and 
 drachma, a coin. 
 
 Remark 5. — Ded, a goddess, equd, a mare, filia, a daughter, 
 and miild, a she-mule, have sometimes -aifis in the Dative and 
 Ablative Plural. 
 
 So Q,mbo and dtto have in Fern. Dat. and Abl., ambabus and 
 duab&s. 
 
 Remark 6. — The Locative case Sing, ends in -ae, Plural, -Is : 
 Romae, at Rome; AthSnls, at Athens. 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Latin Nouns of the First Declension 
 are feminine. 
 
 Exc. 1. Names of male beings, rivers, and mountains are mas- 
 culine by the general rule (J 13) ; but a few names of rivers and 
 'mountains are feminine. 
 
 Exc. 2. Hadrid, the Adriatic Sea, is masculine ; ddmd, a fallow 
 deer, and talpd, a mole, are cqpimon. 
 
 For Greek nouns of the First Declension, see Appen- 
 dix I. 
 
 EXEKCISE I. 
 
 § 19. Like mensd decline the following Nouns, and 
 commit to memory their meanings: 
 
 Jlqulia,, 
 
 eagle. 
 
 gpistoia. 
 
 letter. 
 
 SquS, 
 
 water. 
 
 nauta,* 
 
 sailor. 
 
 cOlumba, 
 
 dove. 
 
 insiiia, 
 
 island. 
 
 cOronS, 
 
 crown. 
 
 Mna, 
 
 moon. 
 
 ara, 
 
 altar. 
 
 mgdlcina. 
 
 medicine. 
 
 agricOia,* 
 
 farmer. 
 
 poeta. 
 
 poet. 
 
 aia, 
 
 wing. 
 
 reglna, 
 
 queen. 
 
 ancilia. 
 
 maid-servant. 
 
 %a. 
 
 flight. 
 
 injuria,. 
 
 injury. 
 
 pliima, 
 
 feather. 
 
 Belga, 
 
 a Belgian. 
 
 fnia, 
 
 daughter. 
 
 
 * See 2 18. Exc. 1. 
 
 
FIEST DECLENSION. 19 
 
 Translate into English. 
 CSlumbae. (JSronarftm. Aris. Reginam. Filiabtis. 
 Iiijuriis. Belgariim. FfigS,. Alls. Ancillae. Aucillis. 
 Iiijuriariim. CClumbis. 
 
 . o -^ Translate into Latin. 
 
 Of water. For the farmer. Of the maid-servants. To 
 the farmers. By wings. Of feathers. To sailors. The 
 letter. By the letters. In the island. Of islands. Of 
 the moon. 
 
 EXEECISE II. 
 § 20. Rule of Syntax. — A Noun in the Genitive limits 
 the meaning of another Noun denoting a different thing. 
 
 Thus, plumd, means a feather, an)' feather ; but when the Genitive 
 cdluwiae is added, the application of plumd, is limited or confined to 
 the dove : cBlumhae plumd means a dovi's feather, and no other sort. 
 Observe that the feather and the dove are different things. 
 
 Rule of Position. — The emphatic word, whether limit- 
 ing or limited, stands first. Thus, filid, reginae, the daugh- 
 ter (not the son) of the queen ; reginae f ilia, the queen's 
 (not the king's) daughter. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 CSlumbae pMipa. C61umbariim pliimae. Cfilumbae alis. 
 Fills, agricSlae. AgricSlae filiS. Agric61arum filiabii?. 
 Reginariim c6r6nae. C6r6nae reginarttm. Nautae , 6pi<- 
 t8ia. Injuria poetae. Insiila Belgariim. FtigS, ancillae. 
 Ancillarfim fiigS,. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 (Emphatic words are in italics.) 
 In the island of the Belgians. For the altars of the 
 Belgians. A sailor's letter. The queen's letter. By the 
 
20 SUBJECT AND PREDICATE. 
 
 • 
 
 fliglit of the farmer. The flight of the farmer's doves. 
 The injury of the queen's maid-servants. daughters of 
 the queen's maid-servants! The -water of the island. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 Subject and Predicate. Partial Conjugation of Verbs. 
 § 21. I. A Proposition is a thought expressed in words; 
 as, snow melts. 
 
 A Simple 8en.tenee consists of a single Proposition ; a 
 Compound Sentence consists of several Propositions com- 
 bined. 
 
 1. Every Proposition consists of — 
 
 (a) A Predicate; i. e. that which is declared. 
 (6) A Subject; i. e. that of which the declaration is 
 made. 
 
 In the Proposition "snow melts," the Predicate is "meltn," because 
 "melt«" is what is declai-ed or asserted about " mov) ;" the Subject is 
 " snow," because it is the thing about which the declaration is made. 
 What mdts f Snnw. 
 
 2. The Predicate consists of a Verb alone (as melts in 
 the above example), or the Verb to be with a Noun, Ad- 
 jective, or Participle ; as, snow is cold. 
 
 3. The Subject consists of a Noun, or some word or 
 phrase used as a Noun, and may be known by asking 
 the question whof or what? with the Predicate; as, 
 John 7-uns. [Who runs? John.) To play is pleasant. 
 ( Wliat is pleasant ? To play.) 
 
 4. The Subject and Predicate may stand alone, or each 
 may have other words limiting its meaning; as, boys ru7i; 
 some boys run fast. 
 
 II. A Verb is a word which declares or affirms some- 
 thing. 
 
VEKBS. 21 
 
 1. Verbs Lave — 
 
 (a) Moods, or different forms which express different 
 kinds of affirmation. 
 
 (6) Tenses, or different forms to show the time when 
 the thing declared takes place, and whether the action is 
 complete or incomplete. 
 
 (c) Voices, or different forms which show whether the 
 Subject acts (as, John strikes) or is acted upon (as, John is 
 struck) . 
 
 (d) Persons and Numbers, or different forms which 
 correspond to the person and number of the Subject. 
 
 2. These various forms are distinguished from one 
 another by certain endings; and the adding of these 
 endings to the dem is called Conjugation. 
 
 III. 1. The Infinitive expresses the action of the Verb 
 simply, without limiting it to any Subject ; as, Smor-r^, to 
 love. 
 
 2. The Indicative mood declares a thing as a fact, or 
 asks a question ; as, &vi&t, he loves; &mat-nS? does he love? 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 IV. 1. The Present tense expresses incomplete action 
 in present time ; as, dmo, I love, I am loving. 
 
 2. The Imperfect tense expresses incomplete action in 
 past time ; as, dmdb&m, I was loving. 
 
 3. The Future tense expresses incomplete action in 
 future time ; as, Uraabo, I will love, I will be loving. 
 
 CONJUGATIOSrS. 
 
 V. There are, strictly speaking, but two Conjugations 
 in Latin, distinguished according to the final letter (called 
 the charaderiatic) of the Present-stem : 
 
22 ACTIVE ENDINGS. 
 
 I. The Vowel Conjugation (stem ending in -a, -e, and -i). 
 
 II. The Consenant Conjugation (stem ending in a Con- 
 sonant or -&). 
 
 Bern. — As « is a Semi-Consonant ( = v), Verbs having the cha- 
 racteristic -U follow the Consonant Conjugation. 
 
 But for convenience we divide Verbs into four Conju- 
 gations, distinguished by this final letter of the Present- 
 stem (or characteristic). 
 
 Rule 1. — To find the Present-stem, strike off the 
 ending -ri of the Present Infinitive Active: as, &md-rS; 
 Present>-stem, &md-. 
 
 Ride S. — Verbs having the stem-vowel a (long) before 
 -ri of the Infinitive belong to the First Conjugation ; as, 
 ama-ri. 
 
 ACTIVE ENDINGS. 
 
 1. There are six Personal endings belonging to every 
 tense of the Finite Verb, three for the Singular and three 
 for the Plural. These endings represent the Personal Pro- 
 nouns. 
 
 2. The Personal endings for the tenses of the Active 
 Voice are: 
 
 -m (6), 
 
 representing 
 
 J. 
 
 -s 
 
 
 thou. 
 
 -t, 
 
 
 he. 
 
 -mus, 
 
 
 we. 
 
 -tis, 
 
 
 ye. 
 
 -nt, 
 
 
 they. 
 
 Remark. — ^The variations for the Perfect Indie. Act. will be 
 considered further on. 
 
 3. The Tensf-endings are sometimes simply these Per- 
 sonal endings; sometimes they are made up oj certain 
 suffixes together with the Personal endings. 
 
VEEBS. 23 
 
 4. The Tense-endings for the Present, Impcrjed, and 
 Future tenses of the Indicative Active of the First Con- 
 jugation are as follows : 
 
 Present. Imperfect. Future. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 1st Person, 
 
 -0, 
 
 -ba-m. 
 
 -b-o, 
 
 
 2d " 
 
 -s, 
 
 -ba-s, 
 
 -bi-s, 
 
 
 3d " 
 
 -t, 
 
 -ba-t. 
 
 -bi-t, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 . 1st Person, 
 
 -mOs, 
 
 -ba-miis, 
 
 -bi-mQs, 
 
 
 2d « 
 
 -tis. 
 
 -ba-tis, 
 
 -bi-tis, 
 
 
 3d " 
 
 -nt. 
 
 -ba-nt. 
 
 -bu-nt. 
 
 By adding these terminations to the stem ama- (observ- 
 ing that the stem-vowel a is absorbed by o in the 1st 
 person of the Present, and shortened before -t in the 3d 
 person), we have : 
 
 PAETIAL PARADIGM. 
 Infinitive Present, Sma-rS, to love. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 Sing, S,ra-6, / love, or am loving, 
 
 ^ma-s, thou hvest, or art loving, 
 
 3,mS.-t, he loves, or is loving, 
 
 Plur. ama-mus, we love, or are loving, 
 
 3,ma-tTs, ye or you love, or are loving, 
 
 a,ma-nt, they love, or are loving. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Sing. 3,ma-ba,-m, I was loving, 
 
 Sma-ba-s, thou wast loving, 
 
 ama-ba,-t, he was loving, 
 
 Plur. ama-ba-miiS, we were loving, 
 
 ama-ba-tis, ye or you were loving, 
 
 ama-ba-nt, they were loving. 
 
24 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 3,ma-b-S, 
 
 3jna-M-S, 
 
 a,ina-bi-t, 
 
 ama-M-mus, 
 
 S,ma-bi-tTs, 
 
 ima-bu-nt, 
 
 I shall love, 
 thou wilt love, 
 he will love, 
 we shall love, 
 ye or you will love, 
 they will love. 
 
 (The pi-incipal parts of a Verb are the Indicative 
 Present, the Infinitive Present, the Indicative Present- 
 Perfect, and the Supine. These will be given in the 
 vocabularies, thus : 
 
 am-0, Sma-rg, &mav-i, Smat-ttm, to love.) 
 
 Form the Present, Imperfect, and Future Indicative of 
 
 T61-S, 
 
 salt-6, 
 
 cant-8, 
 
 delect-8, 
 
 pir-S, 
 
 laud-8, 
 
 v6c-8, 
 
 occflp-8, 
 
 arm -6, 
 
 aedlfIc-6, 
 
 v61a-r6, 
 
 salta-rfi, 
 
 canta-r6, 
 
 delecta.-r6, 
 
 pSra-rS, 
 
 lauda-r6, 
 
 v6ca-r6, 
 
 occflpa-rS, 
 
 arma-rfi, 
 
 aedlflca-r6, 
 
 v61av-I, 
 
 saltav-I, 
 
 cantav-i, 
 
 delectav-I, 
 
 p3,rav-i, 
 
 laudav-i, 
 
 vOcav-i, 
 
 occttpav-i, 
 
 armav-i, 
 
 aedlflcav-i. 
 
 v61at-iim, 
 
 saltat-flm, 
 
 cantat-fim, 
 
 delectat-ttm, 
 
 pftrat-ilm, 
 
 laudat-iim, 
 
 v6cat-iim, 
 
 ocoiipat-ttm, 
 
 armat-tini, 
 
 aedlflcat-ilm, 
 
 to fly. 
 to dance, 
 to sing, 
 to delight, 
 to prepare, 
 to praise, 
 to call, 
 to seize, 
 to arm. 
 to build. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 § 22. 1. A Transitive Verb is one which requires an 
 Object to complete the sense ; as, poetd regin&m laud&t, 
 the poet praises the queen. 
 
 2. An Intransitive Verb is one which does not i-equire 
 an Object to complete the sense ; as, dqulld vdl&t, the eagle 
 flies. 
 
 3. Rule of Syntax. — The Subject of a Finite Verb is 
 in the Nominative. 
 
ANALYSIS. 25 
 
 4. Mule of Syntax. — The Direct Objev-.t of a Traasitive 
 Verb is put in the Accusative. {Regln&m, above, is the 
 Direct Object of laud&t; i. e. the person to whom the 
 praising is directed.) 
 
 5. Rule of Syntax. — The Verb agrees with its Subject 
 in number and person. 
 
 6. Rule of Position. — The Subject usually stands at the 
 beginning of the sentence. 
 
 7. Rule of Position. — The Direct Object precedes the 
 'Verb. 
 
 8. To analyze a sentence is to separate it into its parts 
 and show their relation to each other. 
 
 9. To analyze or parse a word is to tell its properties, 
 and its relation to other words. 
 
 ANALYSIS OF THE SENTE^TCE. 
 
 Poets, reginJlm laudSit. 
 
 {SaggesLions to the Learner. — We look first for the Predicate, which must be a 
 Verb (see g2], 2); and we find taudS^t, which we see by the ending -i, added di- 
 rectly to the stem (stem-vowel shortened), is indicative-present active, third per- 
 son singular, of lauddrS, to praise. We now look for the Subject, which, as we 
 have learned, must be a Noun in the Nominative (§21, S ; and Hule 3, above) ; 
 and we find by the ending -ti that poets, is in the Nominative. Hence, we translate 
 poSm laudSt, the poet praises, ReglnUm, as the ending -Urn shows, must be in the 
 Accusative Singular ; so we take it as the Direct Object of lauddi^ and translate 
 the sentence, ^^The poet praises the queen") 
 
 This is a simple sentence, because it consists of but one Proposition. 
 
 The Predicate is lauditt, because it is that which is declared or as- 
 serted about the poet. 
 
 The Subject is poeid, becausb it is that of which the praising is 
 declared. (Who praises? The poet.) 
 
 The Predicate is limited by reglnSm, the Direct Object [i. e. the per- 
 son upon whom the praising is directly exerted). 
 
 ANALYSIS OF THE WORDS. 
 PoelS, is a common Noun, masculine, First Declension (here decline 
 it), found in the Nominative Singular, Subject of limdSi. Eide, The 
 3 
 
26 FIEST DECLENSION. 
 
 Svhject of a Finite Verb is in the Nominative. (Here let the teiclier ask, 
 •' Why called a Noun ? Why a common Noun ? Why masculine ? 
 Why of the First Declension? Why accented on the penult?" etc.) 
 
 Begmdm is a common Noun, feminine, First Declension (here de- 
 cline it), found in the Accusative Singular, Direct Ohject of lauddl. 
 Rule, The Direct Object of a Transitive Verb is put in the Accusative. 
 
 LaudiU is a Verb, transitive, First Conjugation, lavd-i, laudd-rS, 
 lauddv-i, lauddt-Um, found in the indicative-present active, third per- 
 son Singular (here inflect the tense), agreeing with poetit as its Sub- 
 ject. Eule, The Verb agrees with its Subject in number and person. 
 (Here let the teacher ask, "Why called a Verb? Why transitive? 
 Wliy of First Conjugation? Why indicative?" etc.) 
 
 Ti-anslate into English. 
 
 AgricSia, poetam am2,t. AquilS, v6labS,t. Ancillae mgdi- 
 
 ciuam pftrabunt. Belgae aras aedificabant. Nautae insulJim 
 
 occtipabunt. COrona reginam delectabit. AgricOlJl f iliim 
 vdcabat. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The maid-servants are preparing the. table. The queen 
 was calling the farmer's daughter. The poets will praise 
 the queen. The sailor's daughter will sing. The farmers 
 are building an altar. The moon delighte the poet. We 
 love the queen. You were calling the maid-servants. 
 
 EXEECISE V. 
 § 23. Vocabulary. 
 
 umbrS., -ae, eliadow. puellE, -ae, girl. 
 
 terra, -ae, earth. copiae, -arQm, forces. 
 
 incQIa, -ae, inhabitant. (copia, in the Singular, means ahun* 
 
 insidiae, -arlim tamhtish, dance/ in the Plural, /orcc«.) 
 
 (need only in Plural), | snares, obsciir-5, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to obscure. 
 
 1. The Subject, as well as the Predicate, may have 
 words limiting its meaning. 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 27 
 
 2, The Pronouns I, thou, we, you, are not usually ex- 
 pressed in Latin, as the endings of the Verb show the 
 person and number. 
 
 3. The words my, thy, his, their, etc., are not expressed 
 in Latin, when the relation is obvious. Thus, Tlie queen 
 loves her daughter, ReglnS f iliSm Smat. 
 
 Translate into English, 
 
 (In analysis of sentences, give the Predicate with its limiters, tlien 
 the Subject with its limiters.) 
 
 Ancilia, reginae agricSlae filia,m vScabit. Terrae umbrS, 
 lun^m obscurat. FflgS, nautarum incSlas insiilae d§lecta,t. 
 Copiae Belgariim insul&m occGpabant. Nautae puellas 
 vOcant. Pliimae cSlumbarum reginae ancillas delectabunt. 
 
 Translate into Latin, 
 
 The flight of the queen delights the Belgians. Farmers 
 love (their) daughters. The sailor loves the queen's maid- 
 servant. The farmer's daughter will prepare the queen's 
 table. A dove's feather delights the sailor's daughter; a 
 crown delights the q%(,een's daughter. An eagle's feather 
 delights the queen's maid-servant; a crown delights the 
 queen's daughter. 
 
 . _ , „ , THE SECOND (o) DECLENSION. 
 
 § 24. Latin Nouns whose Genitive Singular ending is 
 -i (stem-characteristic 6) are of the Second Declension. 
 
 Those which have -tim in the Nominative are neuter ; 
 the rest are masculine. 
 
 Note. — The stem ends in ^ ; to this, weakened into -fl; we add s to 
 form the Nominative for masc. Nouns : m, for neuter Nouns. 
 
28 
 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 
 
 
 Masculi 
 
 lie. 
 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 PUr. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 US 
 
 I 
 
 Nom. 
 
 um 
 
 a 
 
 Gen. 
 
 i 
 
 oriim 
 
 Gen. 
 
 i 
 
 orum 
 
 Dat. 
 
 5 
 
 is 
 
 Dat. 
 
 5 
 
 is 
 
 Ace. 
 
 um 
 
 OS 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dm 
 
 a 
 
 Voc. 
 
 6 
 
 I 
 
 Voc. 
 
 dm 
 
 a 
 
 Abl. 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 Abl. 
 
 
 
 is 
 
 Taking the Nouns ddrMnHs, master (stem dOmlnS-), and 
 regn&m, kingdom (stem regnd-), by changing the final letter 
 of the stem into the above endings, we have : 
 
 
 PABADIGMS. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 dSminds, a master. 
 
 dfimini, 
 
 masters. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 dSmlni, of a master. 
 
 dSminordm, of masters. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 dCmino, to or for a 
 
 dSminis, 
 
 to or for mas- 
 
 
 master. . 
 
 
 ters. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 dOminum, a master. 
 
 d(5minos, 
 
 masters. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 d6min6, master/ 
 
 dSmini, 
 
 masters ! 
 
 Abl. 
 
 dSmlno, with, etc., a 
 
 dOminIs, 
 
 with, etc., mas- 
 
 
 master. 
 
 
 ters. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 regnum, a kingdom. 
 
 regn3, 
 
 kingdoms. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 regni, of a kingdom. 
 
 regnorum 
 
 , of kingdoms. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 regno, to or for a 
 
 regnis. 
 
 to or for king- 
 
 
 kingdom. 
 
 
 doms. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 regndm, a kingdom. 
 
 regnS, 
 
 kingdoms. 
 
 Voe. 
 
 regndm, kingdom I 
 
 regna, 
 
 kingdoms! 
 
 Abl. 
 
 regno, voith, etc., a 
 
 regnis, 
 
 with, etc., king- 
 
 
 kingdom. 
 
 
 doms. 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 29 
 
 MemarJc 1. — Names of trees, plants, gems, etc. are feminine by 
 the general rule.* Alvtts, belhj; carbasiis, linen; cOltls (some- 
 times m.), distaff; hftmtts, ground; and vannfts, fan, are fern.; 
 so, many words of Greek origin, like at6mus, atom; pSra- 
 graphtls, paragraph, etc. Plinthtts, brich, is masc. and rem. 
 
 Viriis, poison, and pSia,g<is, sea, are neuter. Vulgfis, common 
 people, is neuter — rarely masculine. 
 
 Remark 2. — In Proper Names in -i^s, with filiiis, sore, and 
 gSniiis, guardian spirit, the Vocative ending -i is absorbed ; as, 
 TulliUs, Voc. Tulli. But Adjectives and National Names in -iih 
 retain ^ in the Vocative ; as, SelvetiUs, Helvetia. 
 
 Remarh 3. — Me&s has ml in the Vocative — rarely meiis. De&s, 
 a god, has deUs in the Vocative, and in the Plural Nominative 
 and Vocative dm, dii, or dl; Genitive deorUm or deum; Dative 
 and Ablative dels, dils, dls; Accusative deos. 
 
 Remark 4- — The ending -orUm of the Genitive Plural is some- 
 times contracted into -um, chiefly in words denoting measure and 
 money {rnddiUm, t&lenium, etc.) in combination with Numerals ; 
 and often in poetry of other words. Deum is common in poet- 
 ry and prose ; lArUm in poetry, but in prose only in compounds 
 {^daumviram). We also find tiblrum and fMror&m indifferently, 
 and/SfirfiOT in such phrases sa praefectUs fubrHtm. The Genitive 
 Singular -il is often contracted into -5/ as, inghii for ingSnil. 
 
 Remark 5.— Neuter Nouns of all Declensions have the Nomina- 
 tive, Accusative, and Vocative alike; and these cases in the Plu- 
 ral end always in -d. 
 
 Remark 6. — The Locative case Sing, ends in -i; Plur. -Is; Cftr- 
 inthi, at Corinth; Delphis, at Delphi. 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 § 25. Vocabulary: 
 
 ■]- * w - { maitter {of a family), Gallus, -i, ct ffat*?. 
 
 t lord, auxilium, -i, aid. 
 
 servus, -i, aZatJc. ,_ _^^ . \ amhassador, 
 
 legatus, -1, \ ' 
 
 nuntlus, -1, meaaenger, I lieutenant. 
 
 * But acanthiis, Smlantfis, cacttls, cSlamfls, cOtSnfls, and pilliilrjis 
 are masc. 
 
 3» 
 
30 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 Tullius, -I, Tullj. TlcHs, -i, village. 
 
 CrassOs, -i, Giaasru. hoitus, -i, garden. 
 
 oaptivus, -1, captive. lupfls, -i, tool/. 
 
 Helvetius, -i,. a Helcetian. GermanuSj -i, a German, 
 
 rS-T6c-3, -a-re, -av-i, at-um, to call hach, recall, {re- means back.) 
 con-voc-8, -a-rS, -av-i, -at-Qm, to call together, (con- means together.) 
 r5g-o, -a-re, -av-I, -at-um, to entreaty ask for. 
 GIul-S, -a-r5, -av-i, -at-tim, to howl. 
 
 nSo-8, -a-rS, -av-i, -at-um, to murder, to kill (usually ly poiaon, hunger, 
 ■etc., sometimes with a weapon). 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Liipi ultilant. D6mintts servos a,ma,t. Reginae filios 
 S.mant. Crassfis nuiitios Gallorfim convocabit. Tullius 
 agric61ae hortiim occilpabat. Crassfis vicos Helvetiorfim 
 occflpabit. Galli Gerinanoriim legates nficabunt. Ger- 
 man! captivos ngcant. Helvetii legates r6v<5cant. Belgae 
 insfilarum incSlas nScabant. Tullitts serviim v6ca.t. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 Tally's slaves love (their) master. The master calls 
 together (his) slaves. The slaves of Crassus will call the 
 queen's maid-servants. The inhabitants of the island are 
 killing the captives. We -will call together the sons of 
 Crassus. Tully's son loves the sailor's daughter. The 
 ambassadors of the Helvetians praise the queen. He will 
 call together the farmer's sons. The messengers ask-for aid. 
 The Belgians will ask-for aid. 
 
 Stems in -rO and -Sr8. 
 
 § 26. The Nouns of this Declension, whose Nominative 
 ends in -?r, have dropped the usual endings -Us of the 
 Nominative and S of the Vocative ; as, ghi^ (Nom. and 
 Vocative), not g&nSrUs, ghih-S. Most of them drop in 
 
SECOND DECLENSION. 31 
 
 the oblique cases the ^ inserted before r in tne Nomina- 
 tive and Vocative ; as, &g^, Genitive S^rl, not Hg^-^. 
 
 Note. — This 2 is merely euphonic. When it belongs to the stem 
 it is retained. The stem of these Nouns ends in (i)r!i-, but the stem- 
 vowel is dropped, together with s, the sign of the m.isc. Nom. 
 
 
 
 PAKADIGMS. 
 
 
 
 Sincjular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Singvlar. Plural. 
 
 
 (4 son^ti'law.) 
 
 
 {A field.) 
 
 N. 
 
 gSu6r, 
 
 g6nSrI. 
 
 N. 
 
 agSr, Sgri. 
 
 G. 
 
 ggnfirr, 
 
 ggngrSriim. 
 
 G. 
 
 Sgri, Sgrorum 
 
 D. 
 
 gSnSro, 
 
 gSngrlS. 
 
 D. 
 
 agr5, agris. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 g6nSrum, 
 
 gSnSros. 
 
 Ac. 
 
 agrum, agros. 
 
 V. 
 
 gSngr, 
 
 ggngri. 
 
 V. 
 
 aggr, agri. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 ggnSrS, 
 
 gfingrls. 
 
 Ab. 
 
 Sgro, agris. 
 
 Remarh 1. — The following Nouns retain i [which belongs to the 
 stem] in all the cases: &,6iult&T, adulterer; gin&r, son-in-law; LibSr, 
 Bacchus; libSrl, children; Tpu&r, boy; s6cir, father-in-law ; vesp6r, 
 evening; and compounds in -f6r and -gSr; also, the National 
 Names Iber and Celtlber. 
 
 Remark S. — ^Vir, man, has Gen. Sing, liiri, etc. ; so, its com- 
 pounds. 
 
 For Greek Nouns of the Second Declension, see Ap- 
 pendix ll. 
 
 _,/> EXERCISE VII. 
 
 § 27. Vocabulary. 
 
 puer, -1, hoy. liberi, -oriiin, children. 
 
 vir, -i, man.^ equijs, -i, horse. 
 
 sGcer, -en, father-in-law. bellum, -i, war. 
 
 gSnSr, -Sri, son-in-law. folium, -i, leaf, 
 
 magiitSr, -tri, master (of a school). oviim, -i, egg, 
 
 Sger, -gri, field:. aper, -pri, wild hoar. 
 
 infren-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at~um, 1o bridle. 
 
 lani 8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to tear in pieces. 
 
32 SKCOND DECLENSION. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 AgricSla, Squttm filiae infrenat. Apri gSngriim reginae 
 iSniabunt. Ftilia silvae anciliam reginae delectant. Mftgis- 
 t6r pugros coiivOcabSt. Pu6ri magistrflm amant. Tullii 
 filia s8c6rfim amabit. Germani GallOrflm figros occupa- 
 bant. Columbarflm ova libgros delectant. Virl fiquos 
 iufrenabunt. Bellum Germanos delectat. S5c6r gfingrum 
 auDit. Serviis domini fiqufim infrenat. Nauta libfiros amat. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The poet's children love the queen. Crassus praises the 
 fields of the Helvetians. The Germans love war. The 
 wolves will tear in pieces the farmer's children. Wild 
 boars love the shade of the forest. The master will call 
 back the boys. Tally's horse loves his master. The farm- 
 er's slaves are bridling the horses. 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 The Dative Case. 
 § 28. 1. The Dative expresses that to or for which, or 
 with reference to which, anytliing is, or is done. 
 
 2. Rule of Syntax. — The Indirect Object of a Verb is 
 put in the Dative ; as, serv&s ddmtno m^dlMn&mjp&r&t, the 
 servant prepares medicine for his master. 
 
 Ecmark. — The Indirect Object of a Verb is the thing toward 
 which its action tends without necessarily reaching it. Thus, in 
 the above example, the action expressed by pHrlit is exerted di- 
 rectly upon the medicine — medicln&m, — and the point to which 
 it tends is the master — domino, — ^though it does not necessarily 
 reach that point, since it is not implied that the master receives 
 or iises the medicine prepared for him. 
 
 3. Rule of Position. — The Indirect Object precedes the 
 Direct. 
 
SEOOND DECLENSION. 33 
 
 Vooabulary. 
 
 Ill Sr, -bri, hook, agnuB, -i, lamh, 
 
 via, -ae, way, _ haediis, -i, kid, 
 
 taurus, -i, bulL filius, -i, «qn. 
 
 monstr-8, -a- re, -av-i, -at-Um, to. show, 
 mact-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-iim, to sacHJice, 
 
 d-S, da-re, ded-i, dat-um, to give. (The only Verb of the First Conjugation 
 having a (short) in the Infinitive Present. The let peru, aiiig. pree. 
 indie, paaaioef ddr^ does not occur). 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 MSgistSr puSro libriim da,t. PuellS, Crasso viSm mon- 
 straMt. AgricSlS, diis aranj aedificabit. Galli diis tauros 
 mactant. Servi reginae haedttm pftrant. Lttpi agnos ]3,ni- 
 abunt. Agric61ae f ilitts puellae ovfim da,t. Galli Germanis 
 insidias parabunt. Crasstts copiis Galloriim insidias pSrSt. 
 EeginS, agric61ae fiquflm da,t. Galli nautis insttlam mon- 
 strant. Eeginae ancilia, Gallis Germanoriim insidias mon- 
 str3.t. 
 
 Translate into, Latin. 
 
 The queen's father-in-law will give (to) the poet a field. 
 The queen of- the Helvetians is preparing snares for Tally's 
 forces. The inhabitants of the island were sacrificing a 
 lamb to the gods. The master is preparing a book for the 
 boys. The slaves are preparing a way for their master. 
 The master gives (to) his slave a kid. The slave gives (to) 
 the farmer's son a dove's egg. 
 
 EXEECISE IX. 
 
 -The Ablative Case. 
 
 §29, 1. Rule of Syntax. — The Ablative expresses the 
 
 Cause, Manner, Means, or Instrument; as, 
 
 Caectis dvarUid, Blinded by avarice {Cause). 
 
 Hoc mSdo fecit, He did it in this manner {Manner). 
 
 Aqufla dRs vftlat, The eagle flies with his wings {Mexns). 
 
34 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 CaptivQm giddio occidit, He kills tlie captive with a sword (In- 
 sttument). 
 
 2. Eule of Syntax. — The Ablative (usually with the 
 Preposition Tn) expresses the Place Where. 
 
 3. Ride of Position. — Expressions of Oaitse, Time, and 
 Place usually precede the Direct Object ; those of Man- 
 ner, Means, and Instrument are placed after it; and all 
 precede the Predicate. 
 
 Remark. — A Preposition with its case is called an adjunct. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 In (Preposition with Abl.), in. venenum, -i, poiaon. 
 
 terra, -ae, the earth, ground. gladiiis, -i, eword. 
 
 tuba, -ae, trumpet. Marcus, -i, Marcus. 
 
 signum, -i, signal, sign. culler, -tri, knife. 
 
 ar-8, -a-re, -av-T, -at-um, to plough. 
 
 y'ex-S, -a-re, -a-vi, -at-um, to annoy, to trouble. 
 
 vulner-8, -a-re, -a-vi, -at-ujn, to wound. 
 
 ambul-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to walk. 
 « 
 
 Translate into English and Analyze. 
 Marci filitis Gallis signum tuba da,t. {The Predicate is 
 here limited by Gallis, the Indirect Object; signttm, the Direct 
 Object; and tUba, the Ablative of the Instrument.) AgricolS 
 terrim Squis S,ra,t. Captivtis Tullifim cultro vulnfirabit. 
 Poets, in silvis ambiiia,t. Marcfls Helvetios injuriis vexa- 
 bat. NautS, reginae ggnSriim glftdio ngcabit. Germani 
 captives glldiis ngcant. Aquilae alis v61ant. Regin^ 
 filio regniim dit. Ancilia, reginae Crassilm v6nen6 nfica- 
 bit. Umbram silvae &mamtis. DSminiis servos tiiba con- 
 v8cS,t. Regitiae s6c6r filiilm Tullii injiiriis vexJLt. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The farmer's sons will plough the fields with horses. The 
 girls are dancing in the forost. The poet was walking in 
 
THIED DECLENSION. 35 
 
 the garden The slaves of Tully are preparing snares for 
 the ambassadors of the Helvetians in the forest. The 
 inhabitants of the islands will kill , the ambassadors with 
 their swords. The Germans were annoying the Gauls 
 with injuries. Doves fly. with their wings. The farmer 
 will give the sailor's daughter a lamb. Wolves are howl- 
 ing in the forest. 
 
 THE THIRD (l AND CONSONANT) DECLENSION. 
 
 § 30. Nouns whose Genitive Singular ending is -fe 
 (stem-characteristic ? or a Consonant) are of the Third 
 Declension. 
 
 
 CASE-ENDINGS. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 and Fern. 
 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 K s 
 
 es 
 
 -(6) 
 
 a 03) 
 
 G. IS 
 
 urn (iijm) 
 
 is 
 
 dm (iiim) 
 
 D. i 
 
 Thus 
 
 i 
 
 ibus 
 
 Ace. gm (Tm) es 
 
 -(6) 
 
 3(13) 
 
 V. s 
 
 es 
 
 -C6) 
 
 a(ia) 
 
 Ab. e(I) 
 
 ■bus 
 
 6(0 
 
 Tbds 
 
 Remarlc 1. — ^Many masculine and feminine Nouns have no 
 ending in the Nominative, but present the simple stem ; as, 
 honor. The regular ending of the Accusative Singular is -em; 
 that of the Ablative, -e; of the Genitive Plural, -um. 
 
 Remark S. — But few neuter Nouns have a Nominative-ending, 
 most of them presenting the stem alone in the Nominative. 
 
 Remark S. — An old Accusative-ending, -is or -els, is found with 
 stems that take -ium in the Genitive Plural ; as, valhs or val- 
 
 UlB. 
 
 Remark 4. — The Locative case Sing, ends in -i, sometimes in 
 -i; Plural, KbUs; Sulmoni [ct -li),at Sulmo; Gadibfis, at Gades 
 (Cadiz). 
 
36 third declension. 
 
 Noun-classes of the Thied Declension. 
 Nouns of the Third Declension are divided into Six 
 Classes, according to the formation of tlie Nominative 
 Singular: three classes having the Nominative-ending 
 -s; one, the Nominative-ending -S; and two having no 
 Nominative-ending at all, but presenting the simple stem, 
 
 8®" The stem really ends either in 1 or a Consonant, but in the follow- 
 ing division into classes, which has been found to be practically the 
 eimpliist for young pupils, that part of the Noun which remains after 
 striking off the Genitive ending is everywhere called the stem. 
 
 Class I. — Nouns which add the Nominative-ending 
 -s to the stem without any vowel chayge; as, urb-s, 
 [Feminine.) 
 
 Class II. — Nouns which add the Nominative-ending 
 -.s to the stem with a connecting vowel e orl,; as, stem 
 rup-, Nominative rup-e-s, rupes.; stem vail-, Nominative 
 vall-t-8, valltfi. [Feminine.) 
 
 Class III. — Nouns which change the stem-vowel 1 
 into g, and add -s; as, stem milli-, Nominative mllSt-s (t 
 dropped before -s), mi?&. (Masculine.) 
 
 Class IV. — Nouns which have the Nominative-end- 
 ing -S; as, m/ir-S. (Neuter.) 
 
 Class V. — Nouns which have no Nominative-ending, 
 but present the unchanged stem ; as, hdnSr, consUl, calc&r. 
 (Masculine and Neuter.) 
 
 Class VI. — Nouns which have no Nominative-end- 
 ing, but present the stem changed in the Nominative; 
 as," stem virgin-, Nominative virgo. (Masculine, Fem- 
 inine, and Neuter.) 
 
 Rule of Euphony. — A e sound with -s makes x; as, 
 legs, lex; arc-s, arx. A t sound before -s is dropped ; 
 as, fontrs, fans. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 37 
 
 CLASS I. 
 § 31. Nouns -whicli add the Nomiiialive-ending -s to 
 the stem without any vowel change. 
 
 PAEADIGMS. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 City. 
 
 Law. 
 
 PraUe. 
 
 Art. 
 
 Cttadd. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Urbs, 
 
 L5x (15ga), 
 
 Laua (lauds), 
 
 Ara (arta), 
 
 Arx (arcs), 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ui'bis, 
 
 ISgla, 
 
 laudis, , 
 
 artia, 
 
 arcis. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 urbl, 
 
 iSgem, 
 
 laudi. 
 
 arti, 
 
 arci. 
 
 Aec. 
 
 urbSm, 
 
 laudSm, 
 
 artem. 
 
 arcgm. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 urbs, 
 
 15x, 
 
 laua. 
 
 ara. 
 
 arx, 
 
 AW. 
 
 urbS. 
 
 15ge. - 
 
 laude. 
 
 arts. 
 
 arcS. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 urbes, 
 
 ISkSs, 
 
 laudea, 
 
 artes. 
 
 arces. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 urbiSm, 
 
 ISgHm, 
 
 laudiim, 
 
 artium, 
 
 arcium. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 iirbibfis, 
 
 ISgibua, 
 
 laudibiia. 
 
 artibas. 
 
 arclbbua, 
 
 Ace. and Yoc. 
 
 urbes, 
 
 ISgSa, 
 ISgibua. 
 
 laudes, 
 
 artea, 
 
 arces, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 urbibfia. 
 
 laudibus. 
 
 artibus. 
 
 arcib&s. 
 
 Rule 1. — Stems ending in two Consonants, with dos, 
 lis, fraus, ms, faux (Nom. obs.), nix, compes, strix, have 
 -iUm in the Genitive Plural. 
 
 Bule S. — Stems of more than one syllable in -nt and 
 -rt (adding -s), with Names of Nations in -as (originally 
 Adjectives), have -ilkn and sometimes -^m in the Genitive 
 Plural; as, aliens, clientiUm or clientftm; Arpinds, Arpi- 
 ndtiUm; so also the Plurals, Penates, OpUmates. 
 
 Bemarh 1. — Other Nouns in -as, with/ornaa;, and^^ffis, some- 
 times have -iUm. Qwtrls and Samnu have almost always -iUm. 
 
 Bemarh 2. — Pars, part, and lens, lentil, have sometimes -im in 
 the Accusative ; and the same, with sors, lot, and tridens, trident, 
 have -e or -I in the Ablative. BeguiSs, rest, has reguigtem and 
 reguiem in the Accusative. Partim is usually an Adverb. 
 
 Bule of Gender. — Nouns which add the Nominative- 
 ending -s to the stem without any vowel change, are 
 feminine; except — 
 i 
 
38 THIRP DECLENSION. 
 
 3fasculines. 
 
 1. Dens, tooth, and its compounds; fans, fountain; pom, 
 bridge ; mons, mountain ; cHens, client ; torrens, torrent ; riidens, 
 rope (rarely feminine) ; and compounds of as, an as (ending in 
 -aTis or -ens; c. g., se3:tans = ^ of an as, (rie7i3 = ^ of an as) and of 
 uncia (ending in -unx, denoting the twelfth parts of an as ; e. g., 
 deunx = \^ as); pdriSs, wall; pSs, foot; lapis, stone. 
 
 2. Orex, flock ; Greek Nouns in -ax, -ix, -yx, -ps, and -as (Gen. 
 -antls); with cdlix, cup; fornix, arch; produx, twig; sentix, brier; 
 tradux, vine-branch ; and frdoes, dregs of oil. 
 
 MasGvMne or Feminine. 
 
 Many Nouns denoting living beings, with scrobs, ditch; stirps, 
 trunk of a tree; cate, heel; calx, lime; and/rora«, forehead (rarely 
 masculine). 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 § 32. 1. The Ablative is used with Prepositions which 
 imply rest in a place ; as, 'in urbS hdhliiU, he lives in the 
 city ; or motion from a place ; as, ex urbS Squtidt, he rides 
 out of the city. 
 
 2. The Accusative (the whither case) is used with Prep- 
 ositions implying motion to a place ; as, in urbSm v&nlt, 
 he comes into the city ; &d regSm vSnit, he comes to the 
 king. 
 
 3. Caution. — To, when it implies motion, must be 
 translated by &d with the Accusative. 
 
 4. Rule of Position. — A Preposition with its case pre- 
 cedes the Predicate. 
 
 VooabuIa7-y. 
 
 in (with Ace), into; dens, dent-is, tooth. 
 
 (with Abl.), in. pes, pod-is, foot. 
 
 ad (Prep, with Aec.), to, totoards. calx, calc-is, heel. 
 
 e, out of (Prep, with Abl., used only rex, reg-is, Jcing. 
 
 with words beginning with a Con- plebs, pleb-Is, the common peoptt 
 
 ennant) grex, grgg-ie, Jlock. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 39 
 
 ex, oil I of (Prep, with Abl., used be- ferrum, -i, inn, the noord. 
 
 fore Vowels and C jnsonanta). cliens, client-is, clitnt. 
 
 rudens, rudcnt-is, rope. lapis, lapid-is, a atjne. 
 
 nntenna, -ae, sail-yard, malus, -i, mast. 
 
 pilum, -i, javelin. libertas, libertat-i£, liberty. 
 
 Gallia, -ae, Gaul. nobilitas, nobilitat-is, nobility. 
 
 Erermania, -ae, Germany. Orgetorix, Orgetcrig-is, Orgetorix. 
 
 eqTiit-6, -a-r6, -av-i, -at-iira, to ride on horseback. 
 hiem-6, -a-re, -av-i, at-Hm, to winter, spend the winter. 
 serv-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to preserve, protect. 
 TioI-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to dishonor, violate, break (a law, etc.). 
 , habit-S, -a-re, -av-i,' at-Gm, to dwell, live. 
 mand-5, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to intrust. 
 destin-d, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to fasten. 
 
 a or ab, from, by (Prep, with Abl., a being used only before Oonsonants, 
 u& before Vowels and Consonants). 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 OrgStSrix leges Helvetiorfim viSlabSt. Plebs libertatSm 
 ferro servabit. Nautae antennas M malos rtldentibiis desti- 
 nant. PuSr calcSm servi ISpidS vuInfirSt. Crassfls ex urb8 
 &d vicfim Squitit. Copiae Germanoriim in Gallia higmabunt. 
 Galli in Gallia habitant. Eex nobilitati urb6m mandSt. 
 Grass! filiiis clientes ex Sgris in urbgm conv6ca,t. Lflpi 
 dentibtts agnos ia,niant. Galli Crassiim pilis nScabunt. Ger- 
 mani Gallos bellis vexarit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The boys are riding from the village to the city. The 
 farmer's sons live in the forest. The doves will fly out of 
 the fields into the forest. The king was calling together the 
 common people out of the village into the city. The king 
 will give the kingdom to his son. Crassus will break the 
 laws of Gaul. The king's son will preserve the liberty of 
 the common people. The boys are wounding the king's 
 messengers with stones. The inhabitants of Germany will 
 
40 
 
 THIED DECLENSION. 
 
 ■winter in tho island of the Belgians. Hoises walk with 
 (their) feet. A flock of doves is flying out of the forest. 
 The sailor will fasten the yard to the mast with ropes. The 
 king was slaying the nobility with the sword. 
 
 CLASS II. 
 § 33. Nouns which add the Nominative-ending -s to 
 the stem with a connecting vowel (e or i); as, rup-e-s, 
 vall-X-s. 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 Singular, 
 
 Nom. 
 
 riipes, a rock. 
 
 vallis, a vaUey 
 
 Gen. 
 
 riipis, 
 
 vallts, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 rupi, 
 
 valli. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 rflpgm, 
 
 vallSm, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 rupes, 
 
 vallTs, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 rup6; 
 
 Ph 
 
 vallg ; 
 
 red. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 riipes, 
 
 valles. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 rupiutn, 
 
 valliiim. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 riipTbus, 
 
 valltbus, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 riipes, 
 
 valles. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 riipes, 
 
 valles, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 riipTbus. 
 
 vallibus. 
 
 Rem. 1. — The following nouns have -im in the Accusative : 
 
 i. Greek Nouns in -is (gen. ■'Is; e. g., cannabis, hemp, sinapts, 
 mustard, etc.) and names of Rivers and Places. The Greek Nouns, 
 specially names of Persons, have sometimes -Jre also in Accus. 
 Of names of rivers, Scaldis has -cm and -im, and Lirts has -im, 
 seldom im, late -in. 
 
 ii. So, -im in the Accusative — 
 
 (a) Exclusively in : 
 
 Burls, plougli-tail. Mephitis, foul air, 
 
 Cucumls (Gen. -is), cucumber. Ravis, hoameneBt. 
 
THIED DECLENSION. 41 
 
 Sitis, iMrat. ViB, strength. 
 
 Tussis, cough. 
 
 (i) Usually in : 
 
 Febris, fever. Seouris, axe. 
 
 Puppis, tJie poop. Turns, toiver. 
 
 Kestis, rope. 
 
 (c) Sometimes in : 
 
 Clavis, Teey. Praesaepia, stall. 
 
 Messis, liarveat. Sementis, aoioing. 
 
 Navis, ship. Strigllis, ecraper (for the flesh). 
 
 Pelvis, baein. 
 
 (Also in Adverbs in -Mm (Accus. of Nouns in -tls) ; as, partlm, 
 partly; and in S,mussim ; e. g., &d dmussim, according to a rule <>t 
 level, accurately.) 
 
 Bern. 2. — Nouns which have -Jot in the Accusative exclusively, 
 together with names of Months in -gr and -Is, have -I in the 
 Ablative ; e. g., vis, m, Aprllis, Aprill. 
 
 Exc. JBaefis, cannabis, and lanapis have -S or -i. 
 
 Bern. 3. — Nouns which have -Sm or -im in the Accusative 
 have -e or -i in the Ablative ; e. g., turris, turrS, or turri. But 
 resUs has -S only in classic Latin. 
 
 Bern. If. — The following have -Sm in the Accusative, but -S or 
 -i in the Ablative : 
 
 Amnis, ^ 
 
 Canalls, 
 
 Convallis, 
 
 Ignis, 
 
 Sodalis, 
 
 Anguis, 
 
 Civis, 
 
 Corbis, 
 
 Orhis, 
 
 Sordes, 
 
 Avis, 
 
 Classis, 
 
 Finis, 
 
 Ovis, 
 
 Unguis, 
 
 Bilis, 
 
 Collis, 
 
 Fustis, 
 
 Postis, 
 
 Veotis. 
 
 Of these, anguis, collis, convallis, corbis, posfis, and vectis rarely 
 have-?/ edndlis, sordes, ia,rely -S. i^m&s, hunger, has /ame and 
 fdmS in the Abl. 
 
 Bern. S. — Nouns of this class (adding -s with the connecting 
 vowel e or i) have -iiim in the Genitive Plural. 
 
 Exc. CSnls, dog, jiivSnJs, young man, f 6rls, door, mugffis, mul- 
 let, proles, offspring, strties, heap, panis, bread, have -iim; so, gen- 
 erally, sedes, seat, strigills, scraper (for the flesh), vates, prophet, 
 vOlucrls, bird; sometimes also Jtpls, bee, caedes, slaughter, clades 
 (rarely), disaster, monsis, month, stlbSles, offspring, 
 i* 
 
42 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 Rvle of Gmder. — Nouns of the Second Class are fem- 
 inine. 
 
 Exc. 1. PdlumbSs, vdtSs, veprSs (once fern.) are masculine oi 
 feminine. 
 Exc. 2. The following in -is are masculine or feminine : 
 Amnis, river. Canis, dog. Funis, rope. 
 
 Anguis, snake. Clunis, haunch. Scrobxs, ditch, 
 
 Callis, path. Corbia, basket. Tigris, tiger. 
 
 Canalls, pijie. Finis, end. Torquis, cAoiii. 
 
 Of these amnis, cdndHs, finis, funis, scrdbis, and torquis are 
 regularly masculine — rarelv feminine. Tigris is masculine in 
 prose, feminine in poetry. 
 Fines, boundaries, is masculine, except once in Varro. 
 Exc. 3. The following are ma.sculine : — in -Ss, antes (Plur.), 
 Manes (Plur.), gausipes, eerres. and tildes: — in -is. 
 
 Axis, axle. FoUis, hellowa. Postis, poet. 
 
 Burls, plough-tail. Fustis, club. Sentis, brier. 
 
 Cassis, net. Ignis, jire. Sddalls, companion. 
 
 Caulis, utalk. Mensis, month. Torris, fire-brand. 
 
 C"llis, hill. Mugilis, mullet. Unguis, nail. 
 
 Crinis, hair. Orbis, circle. Vectis, lever. 
 
 Ensis, aword. Panis, bread. Vermis, worm. 
 
 Fascis, bundle. Piscis, fiah. 
 
 Aqualls, a wash-basin (properly an Adjective), is masculine and 
 feminine. "'^~-- 
 
 EXEKCISE Xr. 
 
 §34. 1. Conjunctions connect words which are in the 
 same construction ; as, Gaes&r U JBrutHs, Caesar and Bru- 
 tus ; gl&dns plllsquS, with swords and javelins. 
 
 Ml connects things which are separate and distinct, and of equal 
 importance ; qui (always written at the end of a word) connects one 
 thing closely to another as an append.nge, the two making one com- 
 plete idea. Thus, the "swords and javelins" above constitute together 
 offensive armor. Alqui generally introduces something of greater im- 
 portance. 
 
 2. If the Subject cx)nsists of more than one thing, the 
 Verb must be Plural. Hence — 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. - 43 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — A Collective Nouu may have a 
 Plural Vei'b; as, plebs clamant, the people shout. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 ignis, -is, Jire, pars, part-is, part. 
 
 vtdlis, -is, valley. pax, p5c-is, peace. 
 
 Athenae, -arum, Athena. hostis, -is, enemy (§ 13, K. 4), 
 
 cBm, with, in company with (Prep, oivis, -is, citizen (| 13, K. i). 
 
 with Ablative). avis, -is, bird. 
 
 in (Prep, with Abl.), on, in; (with ovis, -Is, sheep. 
 
 Ace), upon, into. elassis, -is, fleet. 
 
 per (Prep, with Ace), through. collis, -is, hill. 
 
 Graecia, -ae, Greece. littera, -ae, letter (of the atphalel), 
 
 Cecrops, Cecrop-is, Ceerops. amicitia, -ao^ friendship. 
 
 Cadmus, -i, Gadmua. sitis, -is, thirat. 
 
 port-S, -a-re, -av-I, -at-um, to carry. 
 
 im-port-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-xim, fo carry in, import, 
 
 formid-S, -a-re, -ar-i, -at-um, to dread. 
 
 vigiI-5, -a-re, -av-i, -at-Qm, to watch. 
 
 festin-5, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to haaten. 
 
 o6nfirm-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to eatabliah. 
 
 vast-o, -a-rc, -av-i, -at-iim, to lay waste. 
 
 nidific-8, -a-re, -a-vi, -at-um, to hnild a neat. 
 
 lev-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-iim, to relieve. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Cadmfls in Graeci^m littSras importSt. Aves in silvia 
 nidificant. AquS, sitim l6va,t. Pons in valle poetam delec- 
 ts. Helvetii agros Germanortim ferro igniquS vastabunt. 
 Galli cttm Germanis pacfim St S,miciti3,m confirmant. Crassiis 
 ex Sgro in urb6m festinSt, Plebs in urb8 nobilitatSm nScJlt. 
 Crassfls copias glSdils pllisquS armab^t. Gives Cecr6pi claves 
 urbis dant. Lttpi fives 6t haedos l&niant. Crassiis in collfi tur- 
 rim aedif ic3,t. Galli naves St copias Germanortim formidant. 
 Crassus partSm plebis cultris ISpidibusquS armabit. C61um- 
 bae p6r silvS-m vClant. Cecrops Athenas aedificabit. C^nes 
 St lupi fives liniant. Eex St regin^ in horto ambulant. Civea 
 in urb^ vigilant. 
 
44 
 
 TUIKD DECLENSION. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Crassus will lay waste the fields of the Belgians with fire 
 and sword (ferro ignlquS). The nobility dread the fleet of 
 Tullius. The nobility will preserve the liberty of the cit- 
 izens with the sword. The maid-servant is preparing a 
 mullet for her master. The queen will walk in the garden 
 with her daughters. The farmer's sons will carry sheep 
 and kids to the city. The nobility will arm their slaves 
 with stones and knives. The farmer's son will show (to) 
 the ambassadors of the Belgians the way through the forest. 
 Tullius will take possession of the hill. Medicine will relieve 
 fevers. 
 
 CLASS III. 
 §35. Nouns which change the stem-vowel K into S, 
 and add -s. 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 Mil& (milet-s), soldier. Princeps (princep-s), chief. 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom. milSs, 
 
 Gen. militTs, 
 
 Dat. militi, 
 
 Ace. militfim, 
 
 Voc. mil6s, 
 
 Abl. militS ; 
 
 Nom. princeps, ~ 
 
 Gen. principTs, 
 
 Dat. principl, 
 
 Ace. principfim, 
 
 Voc. princeps, 
 
 Abl. principfi ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. milites. 
 
 Gen. militum, 
 
 Dat. militJbus. 
 
 Ace. milites, 
 
 Voc. milites, 
 
 Abl. militibiis. 
 
 Nom. principes, 
 
 Gen. prindpum, 
 
 Dat. principtbQs, 
 
 Ace. principes, 
 
 Voc. principes, 
 
 Abl. principlbus. 
 
THIHD DECLENSION. 45 
 
 Rule of Gender. — itTouns of this class which change 
 the stem- vowel I into ^, and add -s, are masculine. 
 
 Exc. 1. Feminine merglSj sheaf; cdrex, sedge; for/ex, shears ; 
 forpex (corrupted from forfex)^ fire-tongs; Kex, holm-oak; pae- 
 leXj concubine ; vitex, the chaste-tree. 
 
 Exc. 2. Masculine or feminine, Meps, grease; forceps, pincers; 
 imbreXj tile ; 6hex, bolt, and, in the poets, cortex, bark ; and dlex, 
 a flinfc-stone. 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 
 §36. 1. A Noun limiting another, and denoting the 
 same thing, is said to be in Apposition with it. 
 
 2. Rule of Syntax, — Nouns in Apposition agree in 
 case; as, J-Ugurihd rex, Jugurtha the king. 
 
 Remarh. — A Noun in Apposition with two or more Nouns ia 
 put in the Plural; as,' JUgurikd U Bocchiis, regis, Jugurtha and 
 Bocchus, kings. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 virtus, virtut-is, valor, hospes, hospit-is, guest. 
 
 a, or ab, from (Prep, with Abl.). obses, obsid-iSj hostage, 
 
 proelium, -i, battle. eques, equit-ia, horeeman. 
 
 N&midia, -ae, Nnmidia* pedes, pedit-is, footman, 
 
 numerus, -i, number. horreum, -i, granary, 
 veles, velit-ia, a light-armed soldier, merges, mergxt-Is, sheaf, 
 
 a skirmisher, cSmes, comit-is, companion, 
 
 Baviis, -i, Davus. caespea, caespit-ie, turf. 
 
 Balbus, -1, Balbns, trames, tramit-is, by-path, 
 Jugurtha, -ae, Jugurtha, 
 
 seC-S, see-a-re, secu-i, aect-um (fut. part, ^ecaturus), to cut, 
 
 postul-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to demand, 
 
 vioI-'S, -a-re, -av-I, -at-um, to maltreat, violate, 
 
 duplic-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to double. 
 
 redintegr-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-iim, to renew, 
 
 explor-S, -a-re, -av-T, -at-um, to explore, search out, 
 
 crem-5, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to burn, 
 
 pr5flig-6, -a-re, -av-i, -at-iim, to dash to pieces, io rouit 
 
 fQg-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to put to flight, to rout. 
 
46 THIED DECLENSION. 
 
 Translate into English, 
 
 Millies giadiis caespitSm sScabant. AgricSU in horrettm 
 mergites portaMt. Tullius a Germanis obsides postuiat. 
 jQgurtha,, rex Nttmidiae, Crasso obsides dat. Daviis St 
 Balbfls, servl agric61ae, dSmiui llbSros amant. OrgStOrix, 
 princeps Helvetioriim, &b Aeduis obsides postiilabit. Hel- 
 vetil OrgSt6rig6m igni crSmabunt. Equites fit pSdites 
 proeliiim rgdintSgrabunt. PoetS, virtutSm Jiigurthae, regis 
 Numidiae, laudSt. Copiae Crassi §quites pSditesqug hostitim 
 profligabant. Velites Tullii tramites p6r silvern explorant. 
 C6mites OrgStSrIgis, principis Helvetioriira, Egros Gallorflm 
 ferro igniqug vastant. Jtigurtha nttmSriim obsidiim duplicJlt. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The farmer is walking with his sons, Davus and Balbus, 
 in the forest. The Gauls dread the ships of Crassus. Davus, 
 the king's slave, will show (to) the boys the way through the 
 forest. Part of the skirmishers will occupy the hill. The 
 Germans will maltreat their guests. TuUy will give the 
 signal to the king's horsemen with the trumpet. The horse- 
 men are bridling their horses. ^ 
 
 CLASS IV. 
 §37. Nouns which add -^ to the stem to form the 
 Nominative. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom., Ace, and Voc. mSrg, the sea. mari3, 
 
 Gen. mSris, marium, 
 
 Dat. and Abl. • marl ; maribus. 
 
 EemarJc. — ^Nouns of this class have -i in the Ablative Singu- 
 lar, -id, in the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural, and 
 -iHm in the Genitive Plural. But mUre often has -8 in the AW. 
 in the poets. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 47 
 
 Exc. Names of Towns in -g have -8 ia the Ablative. Si'S, a 
 net, has almost always -& in Ablative, rarely -i even in the poets. 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns which have the Nominative- 
 61 ding -S are neuter.. 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 terra mariquS, bi/ sea and land. rete, ret-is, net. 
 
 celeritas, celeritat-is, awiftnesa. navale, naral-is, dock-yard. 
 
 crudelttas, crudelitat-is, cruelty. sedile, sedil-is, Beat. 
 
 Marcus, -i, Marcus. monile, monil-is, necklace. 
 
 Lucius, -i, Lucius. Eomanus, -i, Roman. 
 
 Gassius, -1, CaaaiuB. Garthaginiensis, -is, Carthaginian. 
 
 S^phax, Sypliacis, Syphax. dux, due-is, leader. 
 
 cubile, cubil-is, conch. Marius, -i, Marina. 
 
 oppidum, -1, town. Caius, -i, Gains. 
 
 dormitS, -a-rS, -av-i, -at-um, to fall aaleep. 
 
 expugnS, -a-re, -a-vi, -at-um, to storm. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Eeginae filiS. in ctibili dormitabit. Deiis cervis 6t cSni- 
 biis eglSritatgm dSt. Marciis St Luciiis, agricSlae 'f ilii (§ 36, 
 Remark'), Sgros Squis &rabunt. Cassitts in navalibiis naves 
 aedificS,t. Dux Caio aurfim d&t. Syphax, dux Carthagi- 
 niensitim, Romanis insidias pS,rabfi,t. Galli crudelitatSm 
 Germanorfim formidant. MJiritis, dux Romanorum, oppid^ 
 Jtigurthae expugnabit. , Lucius, Romanoriini dux, terra 
 ni2,riquS copias hostifim fttgabit. ReginS, f iliabiis mSnilia 
 dabit. Servi in silva dSmino sSdilS pSrant. Davtis apris 
 retiS, pa,rabit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Syphax, the leader of the Carthaginians, will build ships 
 in the dock-yards. The forces of the Gauls will storm the 
 city. . Jugurtha, king of Numidia, will rout the forces of 
 the Romans by sea and by land. Lucius and Balbus, slaves 
 of Marius, will prepare seats for their master. The queen'a 
 
48 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 daughter gives (to) the poet a necklace. Marius will laj 
 waste the fields of Numidia with fire and sword. The fiaot- 
 soldiers are bridling the horses of the horsemen. Orgetorix 
 dreads the cruelty of the Helvetians. 
 
 CLASS V. 
 § 38. Nouns which have no Nominative-ending, but 
 present tlie unchanged stem in the Nominative. 
 
 Masculine Foems. 
 H6n6r, honor (masc). Pat6r, father (masc). 
 
 
 Singidar. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 h6n8r, 
 
 hSnores, 
 
 patSr, 
 
 patres. 
 
 G. 
 
 hOnorTs, 
 
 hSnordm, 
 
 patrts, 
 
 patrum, 
 
 D. 
 
 hSnorl, 
 
 hCnoribus, 
 
 patrl. 
 
 patribds, 
 
 Ace 
 
 hOnorSm, 
 
 hSnores, 
 
 pttrgm, 
 
 patres. 
 
 V. 
 
 h8n6r, 
 
 hSnores, 
 
 pater. 
 
 patres, 
 
 Abl 
 
 hSnorg ; 
 
 h6noribus. 
 
 patrS ; 
 
 patrTbiiS. 
 
 Remark 1. — Nouns in -ter and -ber drop S in the oblique cases : 
 [imbSr, imhng; pater, patru), except later, lalSris, a brick. 
 
 Bertiarh 2. — ImbSr and vesper have -S or -I in the Ablative [ves- 
 pSn, adv.) ; in puffil, pervigil, vigil, and the like, properly adjec- 
 tives, the Abl. Sing., when it occurs, ends in -I; imbgr, lintSr, 
 venter, utSr, have -ium in the Genitive Plural ; and rSn (used 
 only in Plur.) has -um or -ium. 
 
 Remark 3. — Some names of towns, when denoting the Plact 
 where, have -l in the Ablative : as, Anxurl. (See ? 30, R. 4.)' 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns vyhich present the unchanged 
 stem in the Nominative (except stems in -HI, -&r, and -■ffir) 
 are masculine. 
 
 Exc. 1. (-6e.) ArbOr, tree, is feminine. Ad6r, «pelt, aequOr, sea, 
 and marmOr, marble, are neuter. Masculines in -or have 5 long 
 in the oblique cases; neuters have o short: as, horwris, marmSns. 
 
THIRD DECLESION. 49 
 
 Exc. 2. (-EE.) Lint5r, boat, is feminine (very rarely mascu- 
 line). Cadavgr, corpse/ spinther (only Nom. and Accus.), clasp 
 or bracelet; tubSr, swelling; uhUi, udder; ver, spring; verbSr 
 (rarely used in Sing.), lash; and names of trees and plants in 
 -gr, are neuter. But Idvlr (only Nom. and Accuh.) and tUber, 
 names of trees, are feminine, and siser is neut. in Sing, and 
 masculine in the Plural. 
 
 Exc. 3. Allec, allec-is, brine, and vas, vas-is, vessel, are neuter. 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Caesar, Caesaris, Cctesar. - linter, lintr-is, hoat. 
 
 imperator, -or-is, commander, imber, imbr-is, rain, 
 
 consul, consiil-is, consuX. conjux, conjug-is, liushand or vnife, 
 
 anser, anser-is, goose, ' sagittarifls, -i, archer, 
 
 frater, fratr-is, brother, funditox*> -or-is, slinger, 
 
 mater, matr-is, mother, pastor, -or-is, shepherd, 
 
 sor5r, s5ror-is, sister, venat&r, -or-is, htmter, 
 
 hiberna, -orum, winter quarters, mereator, -or-is, merchant, 
 
 in hiberna eoUScarS, to put into win- telum, -i, dai^t, 
 ter quarters. 
 
 ooUSo-S, -a-rS, -ay-i, -at-Um, to place, put i 
 
 defens-5, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to defend. 
 
 Translate iiiio English. 
 Plebs libertatSm ferro servabit. Imp6rat5r. Squltea 
 pSditesquS conv6cabS,t. Caes3,r S,b urbS in Gallium festi- 
 nab2,t. Agric613. eonjiigSm libSrosquS a,tna,t. Past6r grggSm 
 a liipo defensabit. Crassfis consfil in navalibiis naves 6t 
 lintros aedificftt. AgricSlae ansSres in borto bS,bitanfc 
 Milites impSratorgm a glSdiis telisquS hostiiim defensabunt. 
 Caesar copias in bibernS, oollScat. VenatOr in silva apris 
 retiS. parat. Caesar cttm sSgittariis funditoribusqug ad 
 montSm festinS,t. Kex meroatores conv6cS,t. Balbiis, 
 Lucii gSngr, fratres sOroiesquS am8,t. Imbres agricSlas 
 delectaut. 
 
 5 
 
50 
 
 THIED DECLENSION. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The horsemen will rout the archers and slingers of the 
 enemy. The shepherds are sacrificing bulls and sheep to 
 the gods. The geese are flying into the forest. The sis- 
 ters of Orgetorix are dancing in the garden. The brother 
 of Lucius was defending his mother and sisters with (his) 
 sword. The common people intrust their liberty to the 
 consul. The hunter will show (to) the shepherd a by- 
 path through the forest. Caesar will hasten from the 
 winter-quarters into the city. The slingers are wounding 
 the horsemen of the enemy with stones. 
 
 Neutee Foems. 
 § 39. Nouns which present the unchanged stem in -&l, 
 -&r, -tir. 
 AnimS,!, an animal (neuter). CalcSr, a spur (neuter). 
 
 
 /Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 animal, 
 
 animalia, 
 
 calcar, 
 
 calcaria, 
 
 G. 
 
 animalTs, 
 
 animalium, 
 
 calcaris, 
 
 calcarium, 
 
 D. 
 
 animall, 
 
 animalibus. 
 
 calcari. 
 
 calcarTbus, 
 
 Ace 
 
 animal, 
 
 animalia. 
 
 calcar. 
 
 calcaria. 
 
 V. 
 
 animal, 
 
 animalia, 
 
 calcar, 
 
 calcaris, 
 
 Abl 
 
 animali ; 
 
 animalibus. 
 
 calcari ; 
 
 calcarTbus. 
 
 Note. — Nouns in -i, -iU, -d,r, were originallyAdjectives, the adjec- 
 tive-ending of those in -tU and -Ur having been dropped. Thus, 
 dnim-d, breath ; neuter Adjective dnXm-cUS (dnlmdl), a thing having 
 breath, an animal ; calc-s {cah), the heel ; calc-drS {caJ.a-dr), a thing 
 pertaining to the heel, a spur. 
 
 Remark 1. — Nouns ending in -dJ and -&r have -I in the Abla- 
 tive Singular, Aum in the Genitive Plural, and -iH, in the Nom- 
 inative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural. 
 
 Remark S. — Bacc&r, j&b&r, nect&r, and sal have -i in the Abla- 
 tive Singular ; and fur and lar have -Urn or -iUm in the Genitive 
 Plural. 
 
THIRD DECLENSIOJiT. 51 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns which present iu the Nomina- 
 tive the unchanged stem in -&l, -Wr, -Hir, are neuter. 
 
 Exc. Sal, salt, is masculine or neuter in the Singular, and 
 always masculine in the Plural. Fur, thief, furffir, bran, saiSr, 
 trout, turtfir, dove, vultiir, vulture, are masculine. 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 § 40. Vocabulary. 
 
 j amentum, -i, worh-horse, beast of furfur, furfur-Is, bran, 
 
 burden. stimulus, -i, goad. 
 
 jubar, jubSr-is, mnsMne. tempestas, tempestat-is, tempest. 
 
 vultur, vultur-18, vulture. templum de marmSre, a temple of 
 
 templum, -i, temple. marble. 
 
 marmSr, marmSr-is, marble. de (Prep, with Abl.), from, of. 
 
 dic-8, -a-r6, -av-i, -at-um, to dedicate. 
 
 concit-5) -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to urge on, stir up, arouse. 
 
 rapt-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to snatch away, carry o^. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Crassiis diis templum de marm6r6 dicabit. Vultiires 
 agnos et haedos raptant. Jiibftr nautas delectSt. Agri- 
 cXM, jumentJi stimttlo concit3.t. Cecrops, rex Graeciae, 
 Squum calcaribiis concita,t. ReginS, m insula arSm de 
 marm6r8 aedific3,t. Agric61ae jumentis furffirgm dant. 
 Velites Caes&ris hostifim sSgittarios funditoresquS fflga- 
 bunt. Tempestates miris hostiiim classSm profligabunt. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The boys love the master. Caesar -will lay waste the 
 fields of the Gauls with fire and sword. Tully will rout 
 the forces of the enemy by sea and land. Tully's foot- 
 soldiers occupy the hill. Farmers plough their fields with 
 work-horses. Eagles and vultures build nests in the rocks. 
 Caesar's skirmishers will search out the by-paths through 
 the forests. Jugurtha, king of Numidia, was storming his 
 
52 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 brother's towns. Sailors dread tempests. Horsemen urge 
 ou their horses with spurs. 
 
 CLASS VI. 
 § 41. Nouns which have no Nominative-ending, 
 presei^t the stem changed in the Nominative. 
 
 I. — Masculine Foems op Class VI. 
 
 but 
 
 -n of stem dropped. 
 
 -&r changed into -is. 
 
 -r changed into -s 
 
 SojmS, speec/i (m.). 
 
 Pulvis, dust (m.). 
 
 Flos, flower (m.). 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. sermo, 
 
 pulvis. 
 
 flos. 
 
 G. sermonis, 
 
 pulvfiris. 
 
 florTs, 
 
 D. sermoni, 
 
 pulv6ri, 
 
 florl, 
 
 Ace. sermongm, 
 
 pulvgrSm, 
 
 florgm. 
 
 V. sermg, 
 
 pulvis. 
 
 flos, 
 
 Abl. sermong ; 
 
 pulvSrS ; 
 
 florS ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. sermones, 
 
 pulv6res. 
 
 flores. 
 
 G. sermondm, 
 
 pulvfirum, 
 
 florum, 
 
 D. sermonibus, 
 
 pulvSribiis, 
 
 floribus. 
 
 Ace. sermones, 
 
 pulvfires. 
 
 flores. 
 
 V. sermones, 
 
 pulvSres, 
 
 flores. 
 
 Abl. sermonibus. 
 
 pulv6ribus. 
 
 floribus. 
 
 Bemark 1. — Two Nouns, sanguis, sanguln-is, blood, and pollls, 
 pollln-ls, fine flour, change -n of the stem into -s. 
 
 Remark 2. — Some Nouns of the fifth class, whose stems end in 
 -6r, have an old form of the Nominative in -6s; as, Mnlis, arbOs, 
 for hdndr, arbOr. OHeHmHa {-grts, masc.) is also of Class II. ; § 33, 
 Eem. 1, ii. (a). ^ 
 
 Remark S. — Mas, m&r-ts, and glis, gllr-ls, have -iUm in the Gen- 
 itive Plural; and mus, mUr-is, has generally -iHm; ras, riir-is, has 
 -2 or -i in the Ablative Singular. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 53 
 
 Buk of Gender. — Nouns which drop -n of the stem in 
 the Nominative are masculine. 
 
 Exc. Abstracts in -iS (mostly formed by adding -iS to the 
 Supine-stem of Yerbs) are feminine. BiibS occurs but once as 
 a feminine. 
 
 Eule of Gender. — Nouns which change -er of the stem 
 into -is, -r into -s, or -n into -s, are masculine. 
 
 Exo. 1. Aes, crus, galVtcrus, jus, pus, rus, tus, and os (no Gen. 
 PL), mouth, are neuter, Tellus is feminine. 
 
 Exc. 2. Ginis is masculine or (very rarely) feminine in the 
 Singular ; (Ariirls, ashes of the dead, is always masculine. Pul- 
 vis, dust, is very rarely feminine. 
 
 EXEECISE XVI. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 mos, mor-is, manner, custom, VarFtS, -on-is, Varro, 
 
 oenturiS, -on-is, centurion. oratiffi, -on-is, speech, oration. 
 
 Ie8, -on-18, lion. CioeiiS, -on-is, Oieero. 
 
 mons, mont-is (g 31, Exo. 1), orator, -or-is, orator. 
 
 mountain. more regis, after the manner of a king, 
 
 latrS, -on-is, roiher, apSd, among, with (Prep, with Ace). 
 
 pirata, -ae, pirate. apud Helvetios, among the Helvetians. 
 
 Cats, -on-is, Goto. apud Catonem, at the house of Cato, with 
 
 rebelliS, on-is, rehelUon, Gato, 
 
 trucid-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to slay, 
 
 cen-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to sup, 
 
 rSbellionem concitare, to excite, raise a rebellion. 
 
 Note. — BSbelliS and ordtiS, being abstracts in -iS, are feminine ; but 
 eerdUriS is the name of a male being, and is, therefore, masculine. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 CaesSr, morS regis, obsides a,b Helvetiis postiiMt. Cen- 
 tfiriD turres (§33, Remark 1, ii. (6)) aedific3,t. VarrS 
 consttl in silvis m6r6 latronis h&bit3,t. OrggtOi'ix S,pfld 
 Helvetios rSbelliongm concitabit. Cic6rS oratSr plebSm 
 orationfi delectS.t. Gratis Catonis n6bilitat6m delectJlt. 
 Pars nobilitatis a,piid reg6m cenant. Leones in montibils 
 
 6 » 
 
54 THIRD DECLENSION'. 
 
 St silvls ha.bitant. Latrones in silva filium reglnae trii- 
 cidabant. Rex latrones plratasqiiS trftcidabit. Regis filiae 
 Spfid agric6lam cenant. Nobilitas rgbellionSm itpiid plebfim 
 formidat. Cecrops nobUitatSm coucitJlt. Nautae piratas 
 formidant. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The conversation (sermS) of the poet delights the queen. 
 A lion will tear in pieces the children of Cadmus. The 
 daughter of Cecrops gives flowers to her father-in-law. The 
 common people are breaking the laws of the city. Marcus, 
 the brother of Marius, was building a tower upon a hill. 
 Crassus will sup at the house of Cicero. Caesar dreads a 
 rebellion among the Gauls. Caesar demands hostages of 
 (from) the Germans. The Gauls, after the manner of the 
 Germans, burn pirates with fire. Kings slay robbers and 
 pirates. Part of the nobility dread Cato. The poet loves 
 Cato's daughter. 
 
 II. — Feminine Forms op Class VI. 
 § 42. Nouns which change -^n of the stem into -5 to 
 form the Nominative. 
 
 Virgo, a virgin (feminine ; stem virgin-). 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Nom. virgS, virgines. 
 
 Gen. virglnTs, virginum, 
 
 Dat. virgini, virginibus. 
 
 Ace. virginSm, virgines, 
 
 Voc. virgg, virgines, 
 
 Abl. virging ; virginibus. 
 
 Eule of Gender. — Nouns which change -^)i of thp stem 
 into -8 are feminine. 
 
 Exc. Or^, cards, and turbo are masculine. 2fen^, hdmS, and 
 margS are masculine or feminine. 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 55 
 
 Remarh. — C&'S, flesh, has camls, etc., contracted for e&ftnis, 
 and has -Him in the Genitive Plural. 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 § 43. Rule of Position. — Adverbs usually stand imme- 
 diately before the words they limit. 
 
 Rule of Position. — A Grenitive limiting the Ol^ject of 
 a Preposition usually stands between the Preposition and 
 its case ; as, to CaesWr^ horto. 
 
 Rule of Syntax. — ^Adverbs limit Verbs, Adjectives, and 
 other Adverbs. 
 
 Vooabulary. 
 
 multJtudS, -in-is, multitude. immortalitas, -at-ia, immortality. 
 
 turbS, turbin-is, whirlwind. non (Adverb), tint. 
 
 CrigS, origin-is, origin. de (Prep, with Abl.), concerning. 
 
 ordS, ordin-is, rank. perie&lum, -i, danger. 
 
 consuetudS, -in-is, cuBtomy habit. animus, -i, soulj mind. 
 
 magnitude, -in-is, greatneaa. ex consuetudine, according to cuatom. 
 
 dispiit-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-utn, to diacuae, debate, diapute. 
 
 turb-tS, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to confuaCj diaorder. 
 
 per-turb-8, -a-re, av-i, -at-iim, to throw into great eon/uaion, to confound. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Gratis CaesSris multitudinSm delectS-t. Equites Crassi 
 multitiidinfiin hostiiim fflgabunt. C3,t8 de a,nimi 6rigin6 ciim 
 CicgronS dispfltat. Magnitiido pSriciili consilium perturb^t. 
 Equites copias hostiiim turbabunt. Eex ex consuetuding in 
 Crassi horto ambtilabSt. CicSrD de Snimi immortalitatg dis- 
 piitabSt. PSdites ordines non servabant. Nautae piratas St 
 turbines formidant. Rex captives non nScabit. Luciiis ex 
 agric61ae Sgro in viciim festinat. Consiil multitudinfim hos- 
 tiiim non formidSit. Velites in Helvetioriim agris proelitim 
 rSdintSgra bunt. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The Gauls sacrifice virgins to the gods. The poet, accord- 
 ing to custom, was walking in Tully's field. The king of the 
 
56 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 Belgians is sacrificing bulls and sheep in the queen's gar- 
 den. The Gauls do not debate concerning the origin of the 
 soul. The Helvetians will not burn Orgetorix ■with fire, 
 Caesar will not arm the skirmishers with javelins. Caesar 
 rides into the city after the manner of a king. Tully, ac- 
 cording to custom, demands hostages from the Belgians. 
 The soldiers will confuse the ranks of the enemy. Caesar 
 does not dread the whirlwind. 
 
 III. — Neuter Forms of Class VI. 
 
 § 44. Nouns which form the Nominative by changing 
 
 -tn of the stem into -&i, -dr into -■Sr, -&■ or -Sr into -Us, 
 
 or which change the stem otherwise than as stated under 
 
 masculine and feminine forms of Class VI. 
 
 Note. — Thus, ciipiit, cdpU-ls, forms the Nominative by changing ti 
 into -Ut; cSr, cord-is; far, fair-Is ; f&,fdl-is; Idc, laet-ls; mH, mill-U; 
 
 Ss, OSS-is; and as, ass-is, drop the last letter of the stem. 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 
 
 Carman, verse. 
 
 5piis, work. 
 
 Ca,pttt, head. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. carmgn, 
 
 6piis, 
 
 ciipiit. 
 
 G. carminTs, 
 
 SpMs, 
 
 capitis. 
 
 D. carmini. 
 
 6pSrI, 
 
 capfti. 
 
 Ace. carmgn, 
 
 6pfls, 
 
 capiit. 
 
 V. carmSn, 
 
 6ptts, 
 
 captit, 
 
 Abl. carming; 
 
 Cp&S ; 
 
 capitfi ; 
 
 ' Plural. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Plural: 
 
 N. carmin3, 
 
 6p6ra, 
 
 capita. 
 
 G. carminQm, 
 
 6p&dm, 
 
 capitum. 
 
 D. carminibiis, 
 
 6p6ribus, 
 
 capitibQs, 
 
 Ace. carmina, 
 
 SpSrS, 
 
 capita. 
 
 V. carminS, 
 
 (5pSr3, 
 
 capita. 
 
 Abl. carmintbiis. 
 
 CpgribQs. 
 
 capitTbijs. 
 
^ THIED DECLENSION. 57 
 
 Bemarh. — OcdtpUt has -i in the Ablative Singular; and mil 
 has -2, rarely -I. Os, bone, has ossiUm in the Genitive Plural, 
 and as has assiUm. 
 
 Os, oris, the mouth (§41, Exc. 1), has no Gen. Plural. 
 
 Mule of Gender. — Nouns which change -fe into -&f>., 
 -&• into -Ur, -Sr or -dr into -Us, etc., are neuter. 
 
 Exc. As, dss-ts, pound; ISpHs, UpSr-ls, hare; osdtn, osdtnis, 
 divining-bird (sometimes fem.) ; and pectin, pictin-'is, comb, to- 
 gether with such personal designations as flamin, priest, tUlticin, 
 trumpeter, etc., are masculine. 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 robilr, r3b5r-is, strengtTi. munus, muner-is, gift. 
 
 corpus, eorpSr-18, body, lepiis, Iep5r-1B, hare. 
 
 jus, jur-Is, juBtiee, law (generally foediis, foeder-is, treaty. 
 
 unwritten law, as opposed to lex, onus, oner-is, burden. 
 
 written law). flumen, Qumin-is, river. 
 
 mus, mur-is, mouse. trana-r§, to ewim across, 
 
 porta-re, to carry, Tiberis, -is, the Tiber (§ 33, Rem, 1, i.). 
 
 natura, -ae, nature. nemus, nemSris, grove. 
 tarda-re, to hinder. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 DSminiis robiir servi laudSt. KeginS, ancillis munSrS 
 ' da;bit. Belgae foediis non viSlabunt. LgpSres St miires in 
 agris habitant. Servi reginae in oppidiim 6n6rJl portant. 
 CarminS. poetae impSratorSm delectant. Crasstts TibSrim 
 tranabit. Kobiir corporis multitudinSm delectSt. Robiir 
 S,niini Ca,ton6m delectSt. Equites flumSn tranant. Cic6r8 
 de jiirS legibusquS dispiita,t. PoetS. Caes3,ri carmine, dica- 
 bit. MagnitiidS SpSris consiilgm non tardabit. Puellae in 
 CaesSris nSmSrfi saltant. Cic6r8 de a,nimJ. .Ct corpSris ua tilra 
 dispiitSt. 
 
58 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The poet mis walking with the king in Caesar's garden 
 The boys and girls are dancing in TuUy^ grove. The sol- 
 diers of Orgetorix will swim across the river. Whirlwinds 
 will dash in pieces the fleet of the enemy. The commander 
 praises the valor of his soldiers. The consul is building 
 ships and boats in the dockyards of Gaul. The enemy 
 violates the treaty. The nature of the work hinders the 
 forces of the enemy. Davus and Balbus, Tully's slaves, 
 will carry burdens into the city. 
 
 §45. lEREGULAE NOUNS OF THE THIRD 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 Juppitfir, Jupiter. 
 
 Vis (fem.), 
 
 strength. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. Juppitgr, 
 
 vis, 
 
 vires 
 
 Gen. J6vTs, 
 
 vis (rare) 
 
 virium, 
 
 Dat. J6vr, 
 
 vi (rare) 
 
 viribQs, 
 
 Ace. J6v6m, 
 
 vTm, 
 
 vires, 
 
 Voc. JuppitSr, 
 
 — 
 
 vires, 
 
 Abl. JSvg. 
 
 vi; 
 
 viribus. 
 
 ItSr, a journey (neuter). 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Norn. Iter, itmgra. 
 
 Gen. itingris, Mngriim, 
 
 Dat. Itingri, itingribiis, 
 
 Ace. itSr, itinera, 
 
 Voc. iter, itinera, 
 
 Abl. itinerg ; itineribus. 
 
 Jus jiirandftm, oath (neuter). 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 Norn, jus jurandum, jura jurandS, 
 Geri. jurTs jurandi, 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 59 
 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Dat 
 
 
 JLJailm 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 jus jiftandum, jurS juranda, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 jus jurandum, jura juranda. 
 
 A hi 
 
 
 XXUlt 
 
 
 
 Materf amilias, mother of a family. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Nom. materfamilias, 
 
 
 Gen. matrisfamilias. 
 
 
 Dat. matrifa,milias, 
 
 
 Aec. matremfamilias, 
 
 
 Voc. materfamilias, 
 
 
 Abl. matrgf Emilias. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. matresfS,milias or -fJlmiliarum, etc. 
 
 In the same manner decline p&terfS/milias. See § 18, He- 
 mark S. 
 
 Sfipellex, furniture (fern.), 
 
 Norn, siipellex, 
 
 Gen. sfipellectilis, 
 
 Dat. stipellectilF, 
 
 Aec. siipellectilfim, 
 
 Voc. siipellex, 
 
 Abl. siipellectii6 or -I. 
 
 Jfiefir, liver (neuter). 
 
 Nom. jSeuT, 
 
 Gen. jSeinSrTs or j6c6ris, 
 
 Dat. j6cin6rl or j6c6rl, 
 
 Ace. jSeur, 
 
 Voc. jSeiir, 
 
 Abl. J8cin6r6 or jScSrS, etc. 
 
 Bos, an ox or cow (masculine or feminine). 
 
 Nom. bos, bSves, 
 
 Gen. bSvTs, bCum, 
 
 Dat. b6vi, bobus :>r biibus. 
 
 Ace. b6v6m, bSves, 
 
 Voc. bos, bSves, 
 
 Abl. b6v6 ; bobiis or biibiis. 
 
60 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 EXEECISE XIX. 
 VocaJbulai-y. 
 
 or,m5 15, -3n-is, glutton, tenta-re, to attem},t, 
 
 provincia, -ae, province, per vim, by force. 
 
 aurum, -i, gold. deeora-re, to adorn. 
 
 argentum, -i, silver. vflra-re, to devour^ g Up down, 
 oibuBj -i, food. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Helvetii jurg jurando foedus confirmant. PSterfJlmilias 
 servos ttiba convScftt. ImpgratSr J6vi fives taurosqug mac- 
 tat. Jiigurtha, rex Ntimidiae, J6vi templflm de marmSrS 
 dicabft. Helvetii itSr pSr provinciam pSr vim tentabant. 
 JScinSrS, ans6rttm cSmgdones delectant. Leones incSlas 
 insulae vSrabunt. C6mSd0 cibttm morS c^ms V(5ra,t. Galll 
 templS, deoriim auro 6t argento dgc5rant. Materf3,mi(lias 
 ancillis cibiim dftt. AgricSlS. ggnSro sfipellectil6m da,bit. 
 AgricSia, Sgros bubiis &rat. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The king will not violate his oath. Farmers plough their 
 fields with horses and oxen. Gluttons love the liver of the 
 goose. The queen of the Belgians will sacrifice a flock of 
 sheep to Jupiter. Dumnorix, the chief of the Aeduans, will 
 attempt a journey through the province by force. The Gauls 
 will bring sheep and oxen to (M) Caesar. The inother of 
 the family will give food to her children. Farmers urge on 
 their oxen with the goad. Robbers dread the power (via) 
 of kings. The soldiers of Marias were cutting turf with 
 their swords. The merchants will import swords into the 
 villages of the Helvetians. 
 
THIED DECLENSION. 61 
 
 §46. SUMMARY OF THE EULES OF GEN- 
 DER, AND PECULIAR ENDINGS. 
 
 I. — Masculines. 
 
 1. Nouns which change the stem-vowel (^ into e) and 
 add -s; as, nvil^ (stem milU-), princeps (stem princlp-). 
 Class III. 
 
 Exc. Merges, oarex, forfex, and forpex. Ilex, paelex, and miex, 
 are feminine ; ddeps, forceps, imbrex, Sbex, and, in the poets, cor- 
 tex and Mex, are masculine or feminine. 
 
 2. Nouns which present the stem unchanged in the 
 Nominative ; as, hdndr, consUl, ans&r. Class V. 
 
 Exc. 1. Unchanged stems in -HI, -Hr, -Ur, with &d8r, aeqitor, 
 marmSr, neuter. 
 
 Exc. 2. Arbdr and lint^r, feminine. C&ddvtr, spiniher, t&btr, 
 ublr, ver, verbir, with names of trees and plants in -Ir, are neu- 
 ter. But l&vh- and tubtr (names of trees) are feminine; and 
 ^slr is neut. in the Sing, and masculine in the Plural. AlUa 
 and vois, vdsie, are neuter. 
 
 3. Nouns which drop -n of the stem in the Nomina- 
 tive, without adding -s; as, sermM, sermonts. Class VI. 
 
 Exc. Abstracts in -io, all feminine. BubS occurs once as fem- 
 inine ( Verg. Aen. iv. 462). 
 
 4. Nouns which change -&• of the stem into -fe, -r 
 into -s, -« into -s; as, pulvts, pulv^'-Ks; fids, flor-ts. 
 Class VI. 
 
 Exc. Aes, crus, jus, pus, rus, tus, os {or-'is), neuter ; tellus, fem- 
 inine. Otnis, masculine or (very rarely) feminine in Singular, 
 always masculine in Plural ; puMs, masculine, rarely feminine. 
 
 II. — Feminines. 
 1. Nouns which add -s to the stem without vowel 
 change; as, urbs, lex {legs), ars {arts), avx [aro-s]. 
 Class I. 
 
 6 
 
62 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 Exc. 1. Masculine, dens and its compounds, fom pons, mons, 
 cliens, iorrens, rUdens (rarely feminine), and compounds of as 
 and undid, p&ries, pes, lapis, grex, Greek nouns in ax, ix, yx, ps, 
 and as {-anCis), with cdlix, fornix, produx, sentix, tradux, and 
 fr&ces. 
 
 Exc. 2. Masculine or feminine, many Nouns denoting living 
 beings, with scrobs, stirps, calx; frons, forehead (rarely masc.) 
 
 2. Nouns which insert a vowel (e or {) before adding 
 -s; as, vall-1-s, rup-e-s. Class II. 
 
 Exc. 1. Masculine and feminine, p&lumbes, vdtes, vepres, amnis, 
 anguis, callis, cdnaPls, cdnls, clUnis, corVls, finis (always masculine 
 in Plural), funis, scrdbis, MgHs, torguis, and S,quatts. 
 
 Exc. 2. Masculine, Manes, antes (Plur.), gausdpes, gerres, and 
 tUdes; axis, burls, caulis, casds, collis, crinis, ensts, fasdls, follis, 
 fustis, ignis, mends, mugilis, orbis, pants, piscis, postHs, aentis, a6- 
 dalis, iorris, unguis, vectis, vermis. 
 
 3. Nouns which change -In into -S ; as, virgS, vir- 
 gin-Is. Class VI. 
 
 Exc. OrdS, cards, turb^, masculine. Ifemo, hSmo, margS, 
 masculine or feminine. 
 
 III.-^Neutees. 
 
 1. Nouns which add -S to the stem; as, m&rS, m&r-ls. 
 
 2. Nouns which present the unchanged stem in -dl, 
 -lir, -Ur; as, dnlmdl, d/ntmal-ts ; calodr, calcdr-'is; fulglLr, 
 fulgli.r-'is. Class V. 
 
 Exc. Sal, masculine or neuter in the Singular, always mas- 
 culine in the Plural. Masculine, fur, furfUr, t&l&r, furt&r, 
 vullHr. 
 
 3. Nouns changing -In into -Sra; -8r into -Hr; -?r, -6r 
 into -&, etc. Class VI. 
 
 Exc. Masculine, as, llpHs, oscHn (rarely fern.), pect&n, and per- 
 gonal designations like fia/ni&n, etc. 
 
THIED DECLENSION. 63 
 
 N. B. — Many Nouns, on account of their n eaning, 
 vary from these rules. See § 13, Eules. 
 
 IV. — Peculiae Case-endings. 
 Acousative Singular ; regular ending -6m. 
 
 Class I. — Pars and lens have -8ni or ■4m. EiquiSa has riqui- 
 etim and rlquiim. 
 
 Class II. — Greek Nouns in -i!s (Gen. -Js, as cannSMs, ^napis), 
 and names of Places and Rivers in -?« have -im, sometimes -in. 
 Scaldls has -^m and -tm; Iat^s has -?m, -in, -Im. Burls, c&oUmts, 
 niSphifls, rdvis, siUs, tussts, vis, have -im. So, dmusdm. 
 
 Febris, puppis, resiis, stcuris, and turris have -tm, and some- 
 times -gm. 
 
 Cldvls, messis, ndvis, pelvis, praesaepis, sSmenfUs, strigilis, have 
 -tm, sometimes -^.m. 
 
 Ablative Singular; regular ending -e. 
 
 Class I.— Pare, lens, sors, tridens, have -g or -I. 
 
 Class II. — Nouns which have -i!m in the Accusative exclu- 
 sively, with names of Months in -tr and -is, have -i in the Abla- 
 tive. But Baetis, cannabis, sindpis, have -g or -i. 
 
 Nouns which have -im or -im in the Accusative have -'i or -J 
 in the Ablative. But restls has -g only in classic Latin. 
 
 The following have -g or -i: amnis, anguis, &vis, bills, c&nalis, 
 miits, clas^, eollis, eonvallis, corbis, finis, fustis, ignis, orbis, dvis, 
 postis, sQdaVts, sordes, unguis, veaUs. F&mls has -2 and -S. 
 
 Class IV. — Nouns of this class have -i in the Ablative ; but 
 names of Towns have -i, and reU has -t or -l (rarely -l). In the 
 poets m&ri often has -2 in Abl. 
 
 Class V. — Imblr and vesptr, have -t or -I. P&gll, ifigil, and 
 the like (properly Adjs.), have -i when the Abl. occurs. 
 
 Nouns in -&l and -tir have -i/ but bacc&r^ j-Ubdr, nectdr, and 
 sal have -8. 
 
 Class VI. — OcdpiU has -i, and m^l and rws have -8 or -i. 
 Names of towns denoting the Place Where have sometimes -i/ 
 as, Garthagini, AnxUrl (Locatives). These are probably original 
 Datives. 
 
64 THIED DECLENSION. 
 
 Genitive Plural; regular ending -Qm. 
 
 Class I. — Stems ending in two Consonants, with dos, Us,frau3, 
 vis, faux, nix, compes, strix, have -iUm. 
 
 Stems of more than one syllable in -nt and -rt, with National 
 Names in as, have -iUm, and sometimes -Hm. Other Nouns in -as, 
 with fomax and pilus, have -Urn, sometimes -iUm. QuXrls and 
 Samnls have almost always -Mm. 
 
 Class II. — Nouns of this class have -iHm; but cfefc, jUvinis, 
 fSrti, mugllts, proles, strues, pants, have -Urn; also, generally, 
 sedes, strigills, vates, vdlucrts/ sometimes lip^, caedes, clddes, men- 
 lAs, and sUbdles. 
 
 Class IV. — Nouns of this class have -iUm. 
 
 Class V. — InibSr, lintir, venttr, uttr, have -iHm; ren, fur, and 
 Idr have -Urn or -iUm. 
 
 Neuters in -&l and -S,r have -iHm. 
 
 Class VI. — 3Ids, glls, as, and Os, bone, have -iUm/ mas has 
 -Um or (generally) -iUvi. Cdro has eami&m. , 
 
 Accusative Plural; regular endings, masc, -es ; neuter, -3. 
 
 Nouns which have -iUm in the Genitive Plural have an old 
 form of the Accusative in -eis (-is) ; and neuters in -i, -til, and 
 -&r have -id in the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural. 
 
 TENSES EXPRESSING COMPLETED ACTION. 
 
 § 47. I. The tenses which express incomplete action are 
 the Present, Imperfect, and Future; those which express 
 completed action are the Present-Perfect (Aorist), Past 
 Perfect (Pluperfect), and Future-Perfect. These three 
 tenses are always formed on the same stem, called the 
 Perfect-stem. 
 
 II. The Perfect-stem in the First Conjugation is formed 
 by adding -v- to the Present-stem; as, Present-stem, &ma^; 
 Perfect-stem, dmdv-. 
 
 III. The Present-Perfect tense expresses completed 
 action in present time; as, Pres. cenO, I snp; Pres, 
 
THIRD DECLENSION. 65 
 
 PerJ. cenp,v-i, I have supped. The same form of. the Verb 
 is also used to express an action indefinitely as past, with- 
 out reference to its continuance or completion. This is 
 called the Aorist-Perfeot or Indefinite-Perfect; as, cenav-i, 
 / supped (at some indefinite past time). 
 
 IV. The Past-Perfect tense expresses completed action 
 in past time ; as. Imp. cena-Mm, / was supping; Past- 
 Perf. cenav-SrSm, I had supped. 
 
 V. The Future-Perfect tense expresses action com- 
 pleted in future time; as, Put. cena-b8, I shall sup; 
 Future-Perf. cenav-SrS, I shall have supped. 
 
 TENSE-ENDINGS, INDICATIVE 
 
 MOOD. 
 
 PresentPerf. (Aorist).* Past-Perf. 
 
 Future-Perf. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 1st Person, -i. 
 
 -gra-m. 
 
 -6r-o, 
 
 2d " -i-sti, 
 
 -6ra-s, 
 
 -6rl-s, 
 
 3d " -i-t, 
 
 -gra-t. 
 Plural. 
 
 -eri-t. 
 
 1st Person, -i-mus, 
 
 -Sra-mus, 
 
 -6ri-mds, 
 
 2d " -i-stis, 
 
 -6ra-ti8, 
 
 -6rl-tifs, 
 
 3d " -e-runt, or e-rg, -Sra-nt, 
 
 -6ri-nt. 
 
 By adding these endings to the Perfect-stem, Umav-, of 
 &md-r^, we obtain the following 
 
 PABTIAL PAEADIGM.— INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present-Perfect, have loved (Aorist, loved). 
 
 Singvh/r. 
 
 S,mav-i, I have loved, 
 
 Smav-i-sti, thou hast loved, 
 
 fimav-i-t, he has loved. 
 
 * The variations in the PeraoTud endings of the Perfect {-sii, 2d 
 pers. Sing., -sils, 2d pers. Plur., and -runt {-ri), od pers. Plur.) are 
 discussed in App. IV. 
 
 6* 
 
66 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 amuv-l-mijs, «'e have loved, 
 
 amav-i-stis, ye have loved, 
 
 Smav-e-runt, or -e-r6, they have loved. 
 
 Past-Perfect, had. 
 Singidar. 
 amav-Sra-m, / had loved, 
 
 Smav-Sra-s, tho^i hadst loved, 
 
 Slmav-6r3,-t, he had loved. 
 
 Plural, 
 
 amav-6ra-mus, we had loved, 
 
 &mav-6ra-tTs, ye had loved, 
 
 Smav-6ra-nt, they had loved. 
 
 Future-Perfect, sUall or viill have. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 a,mav-6r-6, I shall have loved, 
 
 a,mav-6r!-S, thou wilt have loved, 
 
 a,mav-6ri-t, he will have loved. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ^mav-Srf-mQs, we shall have loved, 
 
 ^mav-grl-tis, ye mil have loved, 
 
 Jlmav-6ri-nt, they will have loved. 
 
 Remark 1. — A few Verba of the First Conjugation form their 
 Perfect-stem by dropping the stem-vowel and adding H directly 
 to the root; as s&cH-t, he cuts (stem s6ca-), stc-U-lt, he has cut 
 (a dropped) ; or by lengthening the root-vowel; as, j&vH-t (& 
 short), he bdps ; juv-U {u long), he has helped. 
 
 Remark S. — ^The Supine-stem is generally formed in the First 
 Conjugation by adding -t- to the Present-stem; as, dmS, st. 0,ma-, 
 Supine, Uma-t-iim, The ending of the Supine is -■Sot. 
 
FOURTH DECLENSION. 67 
 
 EXEKCISE XX. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 d-8, da-re, ded-i, dat-um, to give. 
 
 nSo-S, neca-re, necav-i, necat-um, io MIL 
 
 lav-S, lava-re, lav-i, lavat-um, laut-um, lot-um, to bathe. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 German! in fluminibiis ia,vant. Rex f ilio regnum dSdit. 
 Princeps captives vSneno ngcavit. Milites caespites giadiis 
 sScuerunt. Org6t8rix leges Helvetiorum viSlavit. Helve- 
 tii itgr p6r provinci^m pSr vim tentaverunt. Priucipes 
 Gallorfim Caes3,ri obsides dfiderant. CaesSr ctim Gallis 
 foedils jurS jurando confirmavSrat. Liipt 6t leones incSlas 
 insulae vSraverunt. JfigurthS, morS regis a Eomanis ob- 
 sides postiilavSrat. Servi Squos infrenavSrint. Crassi copiae 
 in Gallorflm Sgris higmaVSrant. Latrones tramites pSr sil- 
 vS,m exploraverunt. Equites Caesaris hostium funditores 
 fflgav6rant, 6t in victim festinabant. Ma,ritis numSrilm ob- 
 sidttm dQplicavit. Mftgistgr pu6r6 llbriim dSdit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Cicero disputed concerning the origin of the soul. The 
 consul had routed the forces of the enemy by land and sea. 
 The brother of Cicero the orator called together the com- 
 mon people. Balbus, TuUy's slave, brought burdens into 
 the city. The queen had walked in the farmer's garden. 
 Tha king's son had given (to) his sister a necklace. The 
 boys loved the master's children. The ambassadors of the 
 Aeduans had asked aid. The nobility dreaded a rebellion 
 among the common people. Caesar hastened into Gaul. 
 The Gauls prepared snares for Crassus. 
 
 THE FOURTH (u) DECLENSIOlSr. 
 
 §48. Nouns whose Genitive Singular ending is -m 
 
68 
 
 FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 
 (long ; stem-characteristic U) are of the Fourth Declen- 
 sion. The Nominative-endings are -fe and -u. 
 
 RemarJc 1. — These Nouns were originally of the Third Declen- 
 sion, the termination -us of the Genitive being contracted from 
 ills. The a of the stem usually weakens into 1 before -bus in the 
 Dative and Ablative Plural. 
 
 Masculine Endings. 
 
 
 Neuter Endings. 
 
 Sing. Plural. 
 
 Singvlai 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. and V. us us 
 
 U 
 
 ua 
 
 Gen. us uum 
 
 US 
 
 uum 
 
 Dat. ul Tbus (iibus) 
 
 u 
 
 ibus (ubus) 
 
 Ace. iim us 
 
 u 
 
 ua 
 
 Abl. u ibus (dbQs) 
 
 u 
 
 Tbijs (iibQs) 
 
 Taking the Nouns fructus, fruit (stem fruct'ii-) and 
 cornu, a horn (stem corrvw-), by changing the final letter 
 of the stem into the above endings we have — 
 
 
 
 PABADIGMS. 
 
 
 
 Fructiis, fruit (masc). 
 
 Cornu, a 
 
 horn (neut.). 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 N. 
 
 fructDs, 
 
 fructus, 
 
 cornu. 
 
 cornu3. 
 
 G. 
 
 fructus, 
 
 fructuum, 
 
 cornDs, 
 
 cornuiim. 
 
 D. 
 
 fructui, 
 
 fructrbus, 
 
 cornu, 
 
 corn ibus. 
 
 Ace 
 
 fructum, 
 
 fructus. 
 
 cornD, 
 
 cornua. 
 
 V. 
 
 fructus, 
 
 fructus, 
 
 cornu, 
 
 cornua. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 fructu ; 
 
 fructtbus. 
 
 cornu ; 
 
 cornTbus. 
 
 Remark 2. — Some Nouns of this Declension have likewise in 
 earlier Latin the inflection of the Second Declension, espe- 
 cially in the Genitive Singular; as, sUndMs, sinaU, 
 
 Remark S. — A contracted form of the Dative in -u nometimea 
 occurs. 
 
FO0RTH DECLENSION. 69 
 
 Remark 4. — The following Nouns have -iibfig in the Dative and 
 Ablative Plural : 
 
 Actis, o needle. Artus, a joint. Partus, a birth. Specus, o den. 
 
 Arcus, a hoio. Lacus, a lake. Peeu (<ief.), cattle. -Tribus, a tribe. 
 
 PortiU, a harbor, and viru, a spit; have -tbUs or -Ubiis/ gtnu, 
 knee, and tbra.lr'Q.s, thunder, usually have -^IMs. 
 Remarh S. — D6mtts, a house, is thus declined : 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 domus, 
 
 domus, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 domfis, (rarely) dSmI, 
 
 domuum or domornm. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 domul, (rarely) domo, 
 
 domibus. 
 
 Aoo. 
 
 dSmnm, 
 
 d5mus or ddmos. 
 
 Voo. 
 
 dSmfls, 
 
 dSmus, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 dSmo; 
 
 domibus. 
 
 Ddmus in the Genitive Singular generally means 0/ a house; 
 ddml (Locative), at home, is of the Second Declension. The 
 Ablative ddmii is found. Of the forms in the Genitive and 
 Accusative Plural, ddmoriim is poetic, and ddmos far more com- 
 mon than ddmus. 
 
 Rule of Gender. — Nouns of the Fourth Decleusiou in 
 
 -Us are masculine ; those in -u, neuter. 
 
 Exo. 1. The following are feminine : 
 
 Acus, needle. Ficiis, Jig. Quinquatrus (PI.), /es- 
 
 Ddmus, house. Mantis, hand. tival of Minerva. 
 
 Idas (PI.), Ides. Portious, gallery. Tribus, tribe. 
 
 COltls, distaff, is feminine in prose. 
 
 Exc. 2. PSniis, storehouse, is masculine or feminine. S^cUs 
 (indecl.), sex, is neuter. JSp^cUs, den, is masculine, rarely fem- 
 inine or neuter. 
 
 Remark 6. — ^Names of Female Beings, etc. are feminine by the 
 general rule (§ 13, Rule S). 
 
 Remark 7. — ^Names of lYees, such as (MpressUs, ficiis, lauriis, and 
 pinMs, are declined regularly according to the Second Declension, 
 but also have Gen. and Abl. Sing., and Nom. and Accus. Plural, 
 according to the Fourth Declension; AvApimMs is of the Second, 
 Third, and Fourth ; pinUs, -us or -I, masculine and feminine j 
 
70 FOTTRTH DECLENSION. 
 
 p&nilm, -I, and pi7i,iU, -Bris, neuter. Cdl&s has also forms of 
 Second Declension in the Sing, and in Accus. Plur. (Gen., Dat. 
 and Abl. PI. do not occur). 
 Note. — No'Proper Nouns are of this Declension. 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. 
 Vocabulayy. 
 
 fluct&s, -us, wave. Ilhenus, -i, Rhine, 
 
 hSmS, -in-is, man. exerolttts, -us, army. 
 
 Lemannus, -i, Lemannns* adveutus, -us, arrival. 
 
 ex8pect-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to await. 
 cre-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to create. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 AgricSlS. in pgnilm mergites portavSrat. Detis fructus 
 arbSriira creavit. Poeta, in d8mo ambfiiat. AgricSlJi 
 dSmttm aediflcat. Deus tauris cornu^ dgdit. IDetts h6- 
 minibiis S,nimos dfidit. AgricSlS, in dSmfim fructus terrae 
 portat. VenatSr arciim sigittasqug pftrSt. Nautae fluctiis 
 non formidant. Caesar a Iftcu LSmanno &d flumSn Rhe- 
 niim festinavit. Caesa,r adventilm legatorum exspecta- 
 vSr3,t. Impgratoris adventus exercitiim delectftt. Leones 
 in spScfibiis habitant. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The soldiers bathed in tlie lake. The consul will hasten 
 ■with the army to Lake Lemaunus. The master will build 
 houses for his slaves in the field. Marcus -gave (to) his son 
 Lucius a bow and arrows. The boys awaited their father's 
 arrival. The waves will dash in pieces the enemy's ships. 
 The sailors fastened the yards to the masts with ropes. 
 Lions do not dread the horns of bulls. The chief of the 
 Germans lives in a cave. A hunter wounded the censure 
 son-in-law in the king's forest. 
 
FIFTH DECTiENSION. 
 
 71 
 
 THE FIFTH (e) DECLENSION. 
 
 § 49. Nouns which have -el in the Genitive Singular 
 (stem-characteristic e) from -es of the Nominative, are of 
 the Fifth Declension. They are all feminine except dies, 
 day (masc. or fern, in the Singular, and always niasculine 
 in the Plural), and m&ridies, mid-day (masculine). 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 
 Sinffular. 
 
 Plural: 
 
 N. andV. es 
 
 es 
 
 Gen. li 
 
 erum 
 
 Dat. el 
 
 ebtis 
 
 Ace. 6m 
 
 es 
 
 AH. e 
 
 ebus 
 
 Taking the Nouns res, a thing (stem re-), and d^es, a 
 day (stem die-), by changing the final letter of the stem 
 into the above endings, we have — 
 
 
 PAEADIGM. 
 
 
 Ees, 
 
 a thing. 
 
 Dies, 
 
 a day. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Norn, res, 
 
 res, 
 
 dies, 
 
 dies. 
 
 Gen. rei, 
 
 rerum, 
 
 diei, 
 
 dierum, 
 
 Dat. rSI, 
 
 rebus, 
 
 diel. 
 
 diebiis. 
 
 Ace. r6m, 
 
 res, 
 
 diSm, 
 
 dies, 
 
 Voc. res, 
 
 res, 
 
 dies, 
 
 dies, 
 
 Abl. re; 
 
 rebQs. 
 
 die; 
 
 diebus. 
 
 Note — The stem-characteristic e is always shorteaed in the Gen- 
 itive, Dative, and Accusative Singular after a Consonant; rW,, r&, 
 rim. 
 
 Bemarh 1. — Several Nouns of the Fifth Declension have also 
 forms according to the First Declension (e. g., rtmUries. math-i&; 
 moltttiea, molUtiS,), but in such Nouns the Genitive and Dative in 
 
72 
 
 FirTH DECLENSION. 
 
 -ei are rarely found. The Fifth Decl. is regarded as a variation 
 of the First. 
 
 Remark 2.— Dies, day, is rarely feminine, and thus only when 
 it denotes a fixed day or time (generally), and in the poets. 
 
 Remark S. — The Genitive and Dative Singular sometimes end 
 in -e or -I instead of -el. In early writers the Gen. in -as some- 
 times occurs. 
 
 Remark ^.— There are only about eighty Nouns of the Fifth 
 Declension, and but two of these, res and dies, are complete in 
 the Plural. Acies, effigies, SlUvies, fdcies, gl&des, series, spicies, 
 spes,* are found only in the Nominative and Accusative Plural ; 
 the rest are not found in the Plural at all. 
 
 Remark S. — All Nouns of this Declension, except fides, faith; 
 rSs, a thing ; spes, hope ; and plebes, the common people, end in 
 -ies; and all Nouns in -ies are of this Declension, except &bies, 
 dries, p&ries, quies, and riquies, which are of the Third Declension. 
 
 Remark 6. — The Noun respUblicS, (better, respubttcd), the com- 
 monwealth, is compounded of the Noun res and the Adjective 
 pubHed, and is thus declined: 
 
 Singnlar. 
 Nominative, res publicii, 
 
 Genitive, 
 
 Dative, 
 
 Accusative, 
 
 Vocative, 
 
 Ablative, 
 
 rgl pQblicae, 
 T&I piiblicae, 
 rgm pQblicAm, 
 res piiblicft, 
 re publica; 
 
 Plural. 
 Nominative, res publlcae) 
 Genitive, rernm pnblicarum , 
 Dative, rebiis publiclg, 
 
 Accusative, res publicaSy 
 Vocative, res publicae, 
 Ablative, rebiis pnblicls. 
 
 EXERCISE 
 
 sSnatils, -us, senate (§ 48, Remark $). 
 plSbes, -Si, common people. 
 tribnnils, -i, ti'ibnne. 
 acies, -§i, edge, point j' also lijie of 
 
 battle. 
 parens, -ent-is, parent. 
 f S.cies, -ei, face. 
 Tultiis, -us, countenance. 
 ealus, salUt-is, safety, health. 
 noi, noct-Is, night. 
 
 XXII. 
 
 currils, -iis, chariot. 
 fides, -el, faith, promise, 
 spes, -ST, hope. 
 victoria, -ae, victory. 
 progenies, -el, offspring. 
 effigies, -ei, likeness, image. 
 praeda, -ae, booty. 
 scSliis, -Sr-is, crime. 
 diotatSr, -or-Is, dictator. 
 
 * Forms of Gen. and Dat. Plur. of spes and spleies are cited from 
 the later Latin writers. 
 
VARIABLE NOUNS. 73 
 
 TrandaU into English. 
 
 S6natus dictator! s3,lutfim urbis mandav6rSt. Animalia, 
 proggnifim amant. Leones faeiSm vultumqug hSminis for- 
 midant. Spes praedae IStrones ad sc61Sra concMt. Lucius, 
 tribunfls plebis, centiiriones convScavit. Marcus f ilium acie 
 giadii vulngravit. Spes victoriae exercitiim delectavit. Jil- 
 gurtha, rex Nflmidiae, f idSm non servavit. Tribiini liberta- 
 tSm plebSi servaverunt. Crassus consul in templo eifigifim 
 J6vis colIScavit. Helvetii exercitiim Cassii consiilis fuga- 
 verg. parentis proggniSm amant. Kegina poetae currflm 
 SquosquS dgdit. Turbines class6m hostittm profligaverS. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Caesar put his army into winter quarters. The dictator 
 will slay robbers and pirates. Crassus the tribune will not 
 violate his promise. The hope of victory and booty urges 
 the chiefs to {Hd) war. The queen's daughter will set-up 
 (coUocarS) an image of Jupiter in the king's garden. The 
 queen adorned the image of Jupiter with silver and gold. 
 The boy wounded his brother's foot with the point of a 
 knife. The senate committed to the tribunes the liberty 
 of the common people. God created day and night. The 
 waves of the sea dashed in pieces the ships of the enemy. 
 The poet's children loved their parents. 
 
 VARIABLE NOUNS. 
 § 50. Nouns which vary in Gender are called Heteroge- 
 neous; those which vary in Declension are called Hetero- 
 clites. 
 
 1. — HBTEKOGENEOUS NOUNS. 
 
 (a) Masculine in the Singular, and neuter in the Plural ; as, 
 
 Xverniis, a lake in Campania. ■ Ismariis, a mountain in Thrace. 
 
 Dindymtts, a mountain in Mysia. Maenftltis, a range of mountains 
 
 in Arcadia. 
 7 
 
74 HETETIOCLITES. 
 
 Pangaeiis, a mountain in Thrace. Tart3,rfia, the infernal regions. 
 Taen3,riis, a promontory in Laconia. TaygStds, a ridge of moun- 
 tains in Laconia. 
 
 (b) Masculine in tlie Singular, masculine and neuter in the 
 Plural ; as, 
 
 Indbtcs, (the plant) endive ; Plural inflhli and inUbi. 
 JHoSs, a jest; Plural Jdcl and jdcti. 
 
 LdcUs, a place; Plural liici, passages in books, places; Idcd, 
 places. 
 Sibiliis, a hissing ; Plural siblld (in the poets), but sibUi in Cic. 
 
 (c) Feminine in the Singular, neuter in the Plural ; as, 
 CarbHs&s, linen ; Plural carb&sd,; -orUm, sails. 
 
 Margdrttd (rarely marg&riiiim) , pearl ; Plural marg&ritii, -orUm. 
 OstrM (rarely ostrtHm), oyster; Plural ostr&ae, and ostriti, -oriim. 
 
 (d) Neuter in the Singular, masculine in the Plural ; as, 
 ArgSs, Argos, a city in Greece ; Plural Argl. 
 ElysiUm, the Elysian fields ; Plural Elysil. 
 
 OaeMm, heaven ; Plural caeHi. 
 
 Note. — ArgSs, in the Singular, is used only in the Nominative and 
 the Accusative. 
 
 (e) Neuter in the Singular, masculine and neuter in the Plu- 
 ral; as, 
 
 Frenilm, a bridle ; Plural frenl and frenlt. 
 RaatriXm, a rake ; Plural rastri, and rdstrd. 
 (/) Neuter in the Singular, feminine in the Plural; as, 
 BalneUm, a bath ; Plural balneae, seldom balnea. 
 EpUlUm, a banquet ; Plural ipiUa». 
 
 [g) Neuter or feminine in the Singular, and feminine in the 
 Plural; as, 
 DellciUm or delicid ; Plural deliciae. 
 
 2. — HETER0CLITE8. 
 
 Nouns varying in Declension are called HeterocUtes. 
 The variation often results from confusion of stems 
 from the same root. 
 
 (a) See §48, Rem. 7, and § 49, Eem. 1. 
 
 (6) JugSriim, Gen. -I or -?», is declined in Sing, mostly accord- 
 
DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 
 
 75 
 
 ing to the Second Decl.; in Plural, mostly according to the 
 Third. Gen. Plural always jugi.r'um. 
 
 (c) Menda,, -ae, fault, fem. 1st ; mendilm, -I, neut. 2d ; plebs 
 plebis, common people, fem. 3d ; plebes, -6i, fem. 5th ; vas, vasis, 
 vessel, neut. 3d ; vas3,, -oriim, neut. 2d, and others. 
 
 DEFECTIVE NOUNS. 
 
 § 51. Defective Nouns want some of their cases. 
 
 Besides a great number of Verbals in -& (4th Decl.) 
 found as Nouns, some only in Abl. Sing. (e. g., areesMu, 
 ndtu, etc.), others only in Dative Sing. (e. g., desplaatui, 
 dlvlsm,, etc.), the following partial list contains such Nouns 
 as are most defective : 
 
 (a) Amb2,gS, Abl. a round- 
 about way ; PI. entire. 
 
 Astu, craft, found only in 
 Abl. until post- Aug. period. 
 
 ChaOs, Nom., Accus.; chdo, 
 Abl. (other cases not used in 
 class, period), chaos. 
 
 Cass5m, Ace./ cassS, Abl.,- a 
 net; Plur. entire. 
 
 CompSdls, Gen.; a fetter; 
 Nom. and Dat. Sing, not in use ; 
 Plur. compgdes, -iiim, -Ibiis. 
 
 Daps, ^o»i. obsolete ; a feast; 
 Dat. Sing, and Gen. PI. do not 
 occur. 
 
 DIc3,m, dicas, lawsuit, used 
 in AcG. Sing, and Plur. 
 
 Dicis, Gen., in the phrase 
 dlcis gratia, for formes sake. 
 
 jyicionls, power ; occurs only 
 in Gen., Dai., Ace, and Abl. 
 
 Ebtlr, ivory; not used in Plur. 
 
 Fauc6, Abl. (poetic); the 
 throat; PI. entire. 
 
 Fors, Nom.; fortS, Abl.; 
 chance; other cases wanting. 
 
 FOrls, a door, wants Dat. 
 Sing.; PI. entire. 
 
 F6ras, Accus.; fttris, Abl.; 
 out of doors. 
 
 Grates, usually only in Nom. 
 and Accus. PL; Abl. PI. grat- 
 ibfis in Tacitus ; thanks. 
 
 ImpStIs, (?e». / -6, Abl.; vehe- 
 mence. 
 
 Infltias, Aca. PI.; a denial 
 (only in the phrase, infitias 
 irS). 
 
 Ingratiis, Abl. PI. (used ad- 
 verbially) ; against one's will. 
 
 Nauci, Gen. (with non), a tri- 
 fle; in the phrase, non naucI 
 h^berS, etc. 
 
 Nem6, nobody, wants PI.; 
 Gen. and Abl. Sing, rarely used. 
 
76 VERBS, SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Opts, Gen.; -6m, Ace; -S, Eus, the country; used in 
 
 AM. (Dat. very rare); help; PI. ou\y in Nom. and Ace. 
 
 PI. entire. Suppfitiae, iVom./ siippStias, 
 
 OblcS, Abl., a bolt; (obex, Aec.; succor. 
 
 Nom. very rare); PL entire, Q^ontls, Gen. ; -h, Abl.; will, 
 
 except Gen. accord. 
 
 Pessiim, bottom, only in Ac- Sitiis, drought; no PL or 
 
 cus. Sing, after Verbs of Mo- Dat. Sing. 
 
 tion; pesstlm irS, to go to the Yeniim, sale, Ace. Sing, after 
 
 bottom, perish; pessiim d&ri, to ir6, diirS. Tacitus alone has 
 
 send to the bottom, destroy. Dative veno; venui is late 
 
 Pondo, Abl. ; in weight. Latin. 
 
 Prfici, Dat; -fim, Ace; -S, VIcIs, Gen.; -Sm, Ace; -S, 
 
 Abl.; prayer; PL entire. Abl.; change; PL entire, ex- 
 cept Gen. 
 
 (b) Many indeclinable Nouns, used in Nbm. and Ace; as, fas, 
 instar, man6, n6fas, n6cessS, nihil, 6pus, sScils. 
 
 (e) Cor, cos, fax, faex, lux, nex, 6s, pax, ros, sal, sol, tus, and 
 ver want the Genitive Plural. 
 
 VEEBS OF THE SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 § 52. 1. Verbs that have the stem-vowel e (long) be- 
 fore -r? of the Infinitive Present are of the Second Con- 
 jugation ; as, mSne-rS, to advise. 
 
 2. The Perfect-stem in Verbs of this Conjugation is 
 usually formed by dropping the stem-vowel e (character- 
 istic) and adding u; as, mSne-rS, stem mdne; by dropping 
 the stem-vowel we have m6n-; to which add ■&, which 
 gives the Perfect-stem mdnii; e. g., mdnii-1,t, he has ad- 
 vised. 
 
 3. The Supine-stem is formed by dropping the stem- 
 vowel and adding t, with or without the connecting 
 vowel I; as, mdnS-i g. Supine mdn-U-tim '{e dropped and 
 t added, with the connecting vowel t). 
 
VEEBS, SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 77 
 
 TENSE-ENDINGS OF THE INDICATIVE ACTIVE. 
 
 The tehse-endiDgs are the same as tliose in the First 
 Conjugation ; viz. : 
 
 ON THE PEESENT-STEM. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 1st Person, -6, 
 
 
 -ba-m. 
 
 -b-0. 
 
 
 2d " -s, 
 
 
 -ba-s. 
 
 -bi-s. 
 
 
 3d " -t, 
 
 
 -ba-t. 
 
 -bi-t, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1st Person, -mds, 
 
 
 -ba-mus, 
 
 -bi-mus, 
 
 
 2d " -tis. 
 
 
 -ba-tis, 
 
 -bi-tis, 
 
 
 3d " -nt, 
 
 
 -ba-nt. 
 
 -bu-nt. 
 
 
 ON THE PEKFECT-STEM. 
 
 
 
 Present-Perfect [At 
 
 mst). 
 
 Past-Perfect. 
 
 Future-Perfect. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 1st Person, -i, 
 
 
 -gra-m. 
 
 -6r-6, 
 
 
 2d « -i-sti, 
 
 
 -Sra-s, 
 
 -6ri-s, 
 
 
 3d " -i-t, 
 
 
 -Sra-t, . 
 
 -«ri-t, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 1st Person, -i-mus, 
 
 
 -era-miis. 
 
 -Sri-mus, 
 
 
 2d " -i-stis, 
 
 
 -6ra-tis, 
 
 -grl-tis, 
 
 
 3d " -e-runt. 
 
 or-e 
 
 -r5, -Sra-nt, 
 
 -6ri-nt. 
 
 By adding these terminations to the Present-stem 
 mdne- and to the Perfect-stem tndnu- respectively, we 
 have : 
 
 PARTIAL PARADIGM ON THE PEESENT-STEM. 
 
 Present. Imperfect. Future. 
 
 S. m6ne-ba-m, S. m6ne-b-o, 
 
 m6ne-ba-s, m6ne-bi-8, 
 
 m6ne-ba-t, m8ne-bi-t, 
 P. m6ne-ba-mus, P. mSne-bi-mus. 
 
 m6ne-ba-tis, mSne-bi-tis, 
 
 ni6ne-ba-nt, ni6ne-bu-nt. 
 
 Sing m6ne-6, 
 mSne-s, 
 m6nS-t, 
 
 Plur. mSne-mOs, 
 m6ne-tTs, 
 rQ6ne-nt, 
 
 B®°° Observe that the stem vowel e is shortened before -t in 3d 
 pers. Sing. Present ; as, a, becomes d before -( in First Conjugation. 
 
 7« 
 
78 VEEBS, SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 ON THE PERFECT-STEM. 
 
 Present-Perfect {Aorist). Past-Perfect. Future Perfect. 
 
 / have advised (or advised). I had advised. J shall have advised. 
 
 Sing. m6nu-i, S. m6nii-6rJi-m, S. m6uu-Sr-o, 
 
 m?inu-i-stl, m&iu-Sra-s, mOnu-Srl-s, 
 
 mSnu-i-t, m6nu-Sra-t, m<5riu-Sri-t, 
 
 Plur. m6nu-i-mus, P. m5nu-6ra-mas, P. raSnu-Srl-mus, 
 
 m6nu-i-stTs, in6nu-6ra-tTs, m6nu-firI-tTs, 
 
 m6nu-e-runt, or e-r6, m(5nu-Sra-nt, m6nu-Sri-nt. 
 
 EXEECISE XXIII. 
 § 53. Vocabulary. 
 
 impet&s, -us, attack, castrE, -oriira, pL, camp. 
 
 frumentum, -i, corn. frenum, -i, {PL -i, and -a), bit. 
 
 IggiS, -onis (f.), legion. eornu, -us, hont. 
 
 h&be-8, habe-r6, habu-i, habit-um, to Jiai-e, hold, 
 praebe-tS (/or prae-habo-8), praebe-re, praebu-I, praebit-Om, to furnish, to 
 
 offer. 
 Iate-8, late-re, latu-i (no Sup.), to lie hid. 
 terre-S, terre-rg, terru-T, territ-um, to frighten. 
 perterre-8, -e-rS, -u-i, -it-ura, to frighten terrilty, terrify. 
 time-8, time-re, timu-i (no Sup.), to fear. 
 m6ve-8, move-re, mov-i, mot-um, to move, 
 in&ne-5, mEne-rS, mans-i, mans-um, to. remain. 
 morde-S, morde-re, mSmord-i, mors-um, to champ, bite, 
 tonde-8, tonde-re, t5tond-i, tons-um, to shear. 
 vide-8, vide-re, vid-i, vis-um, to see. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Plebs n6bilitat6m timuit. Pu6r taurQm cornibiis ha,be- 
 ba,l, Impgttis gquitum hostes terrSt. PuSr llbriim in manu 
 h&bSt. AgricSIae 6ves t6tond6rant. Ca,nfa anciliam mor- 
 deljit. Rex Germanorum castrS movSrat. Plebs in regis 
 hoi to reginam vidit. Leones in spgctibfis (§48, Remarh 4) 
 latent. MagnitudS pgrictili servos perterrebit. Nautae fluc- 
 tus turbinesquS non timent. Exercitiis Crassi in hibernis 
 mansit. Galli CaesSris exercitui frumentiim praebebunt. 
 EquI frenS. mSmorderS. Hostes impStiim Squitum timebant. 
 MSriiis consttl castrS, a,d collSm movSr^t. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 79 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The chief of the Aeduans feared the cruelty of the Hel- 
 vetians. The attack of the cavalry thoroughly frightened 
 the enemy's archers and slingers. The skirmishers lay hid 
 in the forest. The works of Cicero the orator delight the 
 poet. The farmers had not sheared their sheep. The horses 
 were champing their bits. The king and queen remained in 
 the temple. The Helvetians had moved their camp from 
 the hill to the river. The Gauls furnished corn to Caesar's 
 army. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 54. 1. An Adjective is a word which qualifies or lim- 
 its the meaning of a Noun. 
 
 2. Adjectives are declined like Nouns ; they are either 
 of the First and Second Declension, or of the Third only. 
 
 CLASS I.— ADJECTIVES OF THE FIEST 
 AND SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 § 55. Adjectives of this class have their masculine and 
 neuter endings of the Second Declension (3-stems), their 
 feminine endings of the First (^-stems). 
 
 
 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 B5nus, 
 
 b5na 
 
 i, bSnum, 
 
 good. 
 
 
 
 
 (Steir 
 
 I hdno- 
 
 , bona-, bono-.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Nom. 
 
 hSnds, 
 
 
 
 b6na, 
 
 
 bSniim, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 b6ni, 
 
 
 
 bSnae, 
 
 
 b6ni, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 bSno, 
 
 
 
 bSnae, 
 
 
 b6no, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 h8num 
 
 t 
 
 
 bSnam, 
 
 
 b6num, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 b6n6, 
 
 
 
 b6na, 
 
 
 bSnQrti, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 b6no, 
 
 
 
 b6na, 
 
 
 bQno. 
 
80 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 b6ni, 
 
 bSnae, 
 
 b6n§, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 bSnorum, 
 
 bSnarum, 
 
 b8n5rQm, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 bCnIs, 
 
 b6nls, 
 
 bOnIs, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 bSnos, 
 
 b6nas, 
 
 b6ua, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 bSnT, 
 
 bSnae, 
 
 bOna, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 biJnis, 
 
 bSnis, 
 
 b6nis, 
 
 Remark 1. — Participles and Pronominal Adjectives in -iis are 
 declined like bdn'iia. 
 
 Remark S. — Adjectives in -iSr have dropped the ending -us in 
 the Nominative, and -g in the Vocative; and most of them drop 
 i (inserted before r for euphony) in the oblique cases; as, 
 
 pulchgr, pulchrS,, pulchriim, 
 pulchri, pulchrae, pulchri, etc. 
 
 Remark S. — The following retain ^, which belongs to the stem : 
 Alt6r, the other; aspfir, rough; extSr, foreign; gibbfir, hump- 
 baeked; lilcSr, torn; libSr, free; mlsSr, wretched; prospSr, pros- 
 perous; tfinfir, tender; and compounds of -fir and -gtr; as, cor- 
 nlgSr, horned. Thus 
 
 tSnSr, tSnSrS,, tSnfiriim, 
 tSnSri, tgngrae, t6n6rl, etc. 
 
 Remark 4.— DextSr, ore the right, has sometimes dextfirS, dex- 
 t£r£im ; sSttir, full, has sittirli, sfitiirilm. 
 
 § 56. 1. Six Adjectives in -fe, and three in -h", have 
 their Genitive Singular in -v&s, and their Dative in -i, in 
 all the genders : 
 
 Alius, other. Totus, whole. 
 
 Nullus, no. - Ullus, avi/. 
 
 Solus, alojie. tJnus, one. 
 
 AltSr, -tera, -terum, owe 0/ the two. 
 IJter, -tra, -trum, which of the two. 
 Neuter, -Ira, -trum, neither. 
 
 KoTE. — The I in tlie Genitive -Jfis is sometimes shortened in verse^ 
 except dTiMs, ruTitnis, sofiflf and itriiis. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 81 
 
 2. Ill the same way are declined the other compounda 
 of iit^, — namely, 'Uterqug, each of two; titer GumquS, Mer- 
 llbSf, and Uervls, which of. the two you please, Genitive 
 utrlusguS, etc. ; also altSrUtSi; one of two, Genitive altSr- 
 ut-v)is, but generally altSrlUs utn&s; Dative attSrutri. So 
 aMrUterquS and uvMsquisquS. 
 
 3. The following Pronominal Genitives end in -l&s 
 (j&s): illliis, isti&s, ipslUs, ejus {eiUs), eujUs (cuiUs), hujUs 
 (hui)ls): 
 
 4. Nullus, solus, iotus, ullus, and unus are thus de- 
 clined : 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 Mase. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Kent. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 uniis, 
 
 iina, 
 
 UDum, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 uniiis, 
 
 iinius, 
 
 TinTiis, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 finT, 
 
 iini, 
 
 iini, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 iinum,- 
 
 unam, 
 
 uniim. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 un6, 
 
 una. 
 
 iinQm, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 lino. 
 
 iina.. 
 
 lino. 
 
 The Plural is regular, like that of bdnus. 
 
 Remarh 1. — AliUs has &li&d in the Nominative and the Accu- 
 sative Singular neuter ; instead of the Genitive dliUs, al(&rtUs is 
 commonly used ; often, however, the Adjective tUieniis. 
 
 Remark 2. — When illiiis is repeated, the iirst means one; the 
 second, another/ as, AliHd dlcH, diliiid fdeit,.he says one thing, he 
 does another. AliUs is often repeated with a single Predicate, 
 where in English we use two propositions ; as, AliUs dliUd cla- 
 m1tabO,t, one kept shouting one thing, another another. Attlr is 
 repeated where only two things are referred to; as, alt<&r ISgii, 
 alt&r scribit, one reads, the other writes. 
 
 Remark 3. — Some of these Adjectives occasionally form their 
 Genitive and Dative regularly; as, iUttrae (fem. Dat. Sing.), 
 nullo (masc. Dat. Sing.) in Caesar; but this is rare. 
 
82 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 § 57. Vocabulary. 
 
 altus, -a, -^m, h}y?i, deep. benigniis, -&, -Gm, kind, 
 
 longfis, -5, -iim, long. fidue, -a, -um, faithful. 
 
 latiis, -S, -um, broad, improbus, -a, -unij wicked, 
 
 magnGa, -a, -iim, great, large, iniquus, -a, -um, unjust. . 
 
 multus, -S, -Qm, muchf many, judex, jiidio-is, judge, 
 
 densus, -&, -fim, thick, Thrax, Thraois, Thracian, 
 
 1. Rule of Position, — The Adjective, unless emphatic, 
 usually follows the Noun which it limits ; as, pu6r bOniis, 
 tlie (or a) good boy. 
 
 2. Rule of Syntax, — Adjective words agree -with the 
 Nouns which they limit, in gender, number, and case ; 
 as, pu6r bSniis, the good boy; puelM pulchrd,, the beauti- 
 ful girl; flumgn latum, the broad river. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Eex Thraciim in collfi turres altas * aedif icSt. Fllitts im- 
 prObfis patrgm ia,pW6 vulnSravSr^t. Silvae densae nuntios 
 reginae terruerunt. Venat6r canes fidos amSt. ImprObi 
 homines fa,ciSm vultumqug judicis timent. Plebcs iniquflm 
 iudicfim formid^t. Nubes densae lunS-m obscuravSrant. 
 Equites hostiiim flumSn lat&m tranabunt. AgricSlae filii 
 bobtts magnis agros ^raverS. CaesJlr multS, oppMS, expug- 
 navit. Pufer cultrttm longiim in manu habuit. Pu6ri b6ni 
 pS,rentes 3.mant. MJigistgr bgnignfis b5nis puSrIs libros dgdit. 
 
 Trandaie into Latin. 
 The consul slew many robbers. The kind mother gives 
 food to her children. The wicked consul killed the tri- 
 bunes of the people. The chief of the Thracians lay hid 
 in the king's grove. The shepherd armed his sons with 
 
 * See model of Analysis 2 (App. X.). 
 
ADJECTIVES. 83 
 
 long knives. The enemy's skirmishers swam across a broad 
 river. The faithful servants defended their master with 
 knives and stones. The attack of the enemy did not 
 frighten the general. The great commander slew many 
 captives. The hunter saw many wolves in the forest. 
 Wicked men do not fear the countenance of an unjust 
 judge. The kind master, according to custom, was advis- 
 ing the boys. 
 
 EXEECISE XXV. 
 
 § 58. 1. Rule of Position. — "When a Noun is limited by 
 an Adjective and a Genitive, the Adjective is often put 
 first ; as, fldus TuUii gerviis. Tally's faithful slave. 
 
 RemarJc. — The Genitive usually follows pars, nUmirus, muUI- 
 iudo, etc. ; as, magnii pars nobilitdUs. 
 
 2. Mule of Position. — An Adjective limiting the Ob- 
 ject of a Preposition is often put before the Preposition ; 
 as, magno \n proelio, in a great battle. 
 
 3. Rule of Syntofc. — With words expressing a Part, 
 the Genitive is used to denote the Whole; as, iintis milt- 
 turn, one of the soldi^s; multl ^ultum, many of the 
 horsemen. 
 
 Remark. — This is usually called the Partitive Genitive. The 
 partitive word, if an Adjective, agrees in gender with the word 
 denoting the whole. Un'ils milUUm is equivalent to mils milts 
 mllUiim. 
 
 , Translate into English. 
 
 Magnae hostitim copiae in silva latuerunt. MagnS, pars 
 nobilitatis Spiid Crassiim cenabant. Gives multi magna 
 in urbS habitant. Consul in hos'tiiim castris multos milites 
 vidit. PastSr 6ves multosqug agnorfim tStondgr^t. ImpSr- 
 at6r Hiagntts lino in proelio copias hostidm fiigavit. Alt6r 
 
84 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 fratrfim magniim M oppidflm festinat Unil Rrmanorum 
 iSgiS tottim hostium exercitttm. perterrult. Neutra ancilla- 
 rum cSnes tim6t. Germani in proelio nullum ordlnSm ser- 
 vant. Rex Thraciim nullum rei publicae legSm vi61av6ra.t. 
 Una in urbfi h6mines multi habitant. ImpStus hostittm 
 nullitis Iggionis ordines turbavit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The Thracians will furnish corn to the consul's great 
 army. One of the skirmishers saw the enemy's horsemen 
 in the dense forest. The shepherd's faithful dog defended 
 the sheep from (a) the wolves. The general, after the man- 
 ner of a king, demanded a great number of hostages. The 
 whole army dreaded the cruelty of the general. The in- 
 habitants of the whole village feared the farmer's big bull. 
 Caesar feared no danger. A great multitude of footmen 
 hastened to the camp. 
 
 CLASS IT.— ADJECTIVES OF THE THIRD 
 DECLENSION. 
 
 § 59. Adjectives having two endings in the Nominative. 
 
 Adjectives of this class have,-fe in the Nominative 
 masculine and feminine, and -S in the neuter, and are 
 of the Third Declension. 
 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 
 
 BrSvis, 
 
 short. 
 
 
 Singul 
 
 ar. 
 
 Plura, 
 
 I. 
 
 Masc. and Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. arid Fern, 
 
 Neut. 
 
 N.,V. brSvTs, 
 
 br6v6. 
 
 brgves, 
 
 brfivia, 
 
 Gen. brgvTs, 
 
 brfivTs, 
 
 brgvium. 
 
 brgvium. 
 
 Dat. br6vi. 
 
 brfivT, 
 
 brgvTbijs, 
 
 brSvibus, 
 
 Ace. br6vem, 
 
 br6v6. 
 
 brgves. 
 
 br6vi3. 
 
 Abl. br6vi. 
 
 bi6vl. 
 
 brgvibQs. 
 
 brgvibus 
 
ADJECTIVES. 85 
 
 Remarh 1. — Comparatives may be considered as belonging to 
 this class. 
 
 Remarh S. — Adjectives whicli bave -g in the Nominative neu- 
 ter have -I in the Ablative Singular, -iUm in the Genitive Plural, 
 and -id, in the Nominative, Accusative, and Vocative Plural neu- 
 ter. Comparatives have -um and -&. 
 
 Remark 3. — The following have also -tr in the Nominative 
 Singular masculine; as, dcSr or dens, acrts, acrt. 
 
 acer, sharp. celcber, Tmich frequented, saluber, wliolesome. 
 
 alSeer, brisk. equester, equestrian, Silvester, wooded, 
 
 campester, of the paluster, marshy. terrester, of the earth, 
 
 plain, flat. pcdester, on foot. vSlucgr, winged, 
 
 celer, swift. puter, rotten. 
 
 Also, in certain phrases, names of Months in -btr (no fern. 
 Sing.), 
 
 Remarh ^. — VSlUctr has -fim in the Genitive Plural ; tiiUr has 
 -Him when used as a Noun expressing military ranh, 
 
 EXEECISE XXVI. 
 § 60. Vocabulary, 
 
 fortiSy -e, brave, adventiis, -us, arrival. 
 
 agilis, -e, active. fatlga-re, to weary. 
 
 crudelis, -e, cruel. civitas, civitat-is, state, 
 
 gravis, -e, heavy, severe. locus, -i (PI. -i and -a), place, 
 
 omnis, -e, all, every, levis, -S, light, slight. 
 
 nobilis, -e, noble, piger, -gra, -grum, lazy, 
 
 Remarh. — The Adjective is often used as a Noun, the Noun 
 with which it agrees being omitted; as, b6ni, the good; b6na, 
 good things, property. Masculine Adjectives thus used express 
 Persons,- neuter Adjectives, Things, 
 
 Translate itdo En^jlish. 
 ImpSratSr fortis centiiriones omnes convScavit. MS-gist^r 
 boniis omnes puSros m6nu6ra,t. Servi a,giles taururn cor- 
 nibtis h&bebant. Onfira gravia magnos agricolae boves 
 f atigant. MaterfSmilias libSris servisquS omnibus cibiim 
 salubrgm dSLbit. PuSr manum cultro s6cuit. PMestres 
 8 
 
86 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Carthagiiiiensifim copiae gquites fortes fiigav6rant. BellS 
 longS, multas civitates fe'rro igniqug vastaverS. Princeps 
 iiobilis a,piid regfim cenavCrJlt. Detis omnia, creavit. B6ni 
 grivia, belia formidant. Latrones imprSbi multos elves 
 trucidaverunt. Velites Jtgiles multos silvartim tramites ex- 
 plorabunt. CSnis f idtis p8r totim noctSm vigiiat. Equites 
 paiustria. IScS, timent. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The cruel chief has slain all the captives with the sword. 
 All the citizens dreaded the great cruelty of the wicked 
 king. Lazy slaves love short days and light work. One 
 of the swift horsemen is hastening to {ad) the camp of Cae- 
 sar. The active sailors were fastening the yards to the 
 masts with long ropes. The arrival of the brave consul 
 thoroughly frightened all the chiefs of the Gauls. Lazy 
 boys do not love their books. Caesar's army laid waste 
 many states of Gaul. The farmer's lazy son loves the 
 shade of the thick trees. The brave general fears no dan- 
 ger. Caesar put all the legions into winter quarters. 
 
 § 61. Adjectives of the Third Declension, having mascit- 
 line, feminine, and neuter alike in the Nominative. 
 
 1.— PARADIGMS. 
 
 
 Felix, happy. 
 
 
 Singviar. 
 
 
 Maso. and Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. felix. 
 
 felix. 
 
 Gen. felicTs, 
 
 felicis. 
 
 Dat. felicF, 
 
 felici. 
 
 Ace. felicfim. 
 
 felix. 
 
 Voc. felix, 
 
 felix. 
 
 Abl. felici (or -S) ; 
 
 felici (or -8); 
 
ADJECTIVES. 
 
 87 
 
 Plural, 
 
 Ma.?c. and IVm 
 
 Neut 
 
 Nom. 
 
 felices, 
 
 feliciS, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 felicium, 
 
 felicium, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 felicTbiis, 
 
 felicTbus, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 felices, 
 
 felicia. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 felices, 
 
 felicia, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 felicTbijs, 
 
 Prudens, prudent 
 
 Singular. 
 
 felicibds. 
 
 ] 
 
 Wasc. and Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 prudens, 
 
 prudens, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 prudentis, 
 
 prudentTs, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 prudenti, 
 
 prudenti. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 prudentSm, 
 
 prudens, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 prudens, 
 
 prudens. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 prudentS {or -T) ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 prudentB (or -I) ; 
 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 prudentes. 
 
 prudentia, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 prudentiiim, 
 
 prudentiiim, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 prudentTbQs, 
 
 prudentTbiis, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 prudentes, 
 
 prudentia. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 prudentes, 
 
 prudentia. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 prudentTbiis. 
 
 prudentibiis. 
 
 2. Present Participles are declined like prudens. When 
 used as Participles,jthey have -'& rather than -I in the Ab- 
 lative Singular j but when used as Adjectives, they have 
 -i rather than -g. Comparatives, also, have oftener -g 
 than -T. 
 
 3. Adjectives of the third class have either -^ or -t in 
 the Ablative. 
 
88 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Exc. 1. The following have only -S in the Ablative: 
 
 Caelebs, caelSs, compOs, des5», hospKs, impiSs, impubes, jtlvSnIs, 
 paupfir, princepa, pub5r or pubes, s6nex, sospfia, siiperstSs, and sev- 
 eral compound Adjectives formed from corpils and pes. 
 
 Exc. 2. The following have only -I in the Ablative: 
 
 Anceps, concors, discors, h6b6s, immSmOr, iners, ingens, Inops, 
 m6m6r, praeceps, rScens, rSpens, vigil, and most Adjectives in -x, 
 especially those in -plex. 
 
 Remark 1. — Inerti, r'icentt, and praedlpt sometimes occur. 
 
 Remark 2. — Praesens and IScuples, when applied to Things, 
 have the Ablative in -l; when used of Persons, they have -t. 
 
 4. The neuter of the Nominative and Accusative Phi- 
 ral ends in -id, and the Genitive Plural of all genders in 
 -linn; but vUus, old, has -& and "tim. 
 
 Exc. 1. Those Adjectives that have only -8 in the Ablative 
 Singular have -^m in the Genitive Plural. 
 
 Exc. 2. Compounds of f&cw and c&piS, and of such Nouns as 
 make -um in their Genitive Plural, with comp&r, dtcUr, dlvis, 
 mimdr, immimdr, praepls, supplex, and vigil, make their Genitive 
 Plural in -um. 
 
 Exc. 3. Dis, IScuples, sons, and insons have either -Um or -iUm; 
 par has usually pS,riiim {-Um according to the grammarians 
 only) ; other Adjectives have sometimes -Um instead of -iUm in 
 the poets and later prose-writers. 
 
 EXEECISE XXVII. 
 § 62. Vocabulary. 
 
 dives, divit-is, rich. ingens, -ent-is, huge. 
 
 feiTix, -ac-ia, fertile. ferox, feroc-is, warlike, fierce. 
 
 inndccns, -ent-is, innocent. atrox, atroc-is, (crWi^e, cr«ei, aauaoc, 
 
 pauper, paupSr-is, poor. recens, -ent-is, recent. 
 
 vetus, veter-is, ancient; PI. veteres, civilis, -6, civil, 
 the ancients, 
 
 auge-8, -e-re, anx-i, auct-um, to swell, tncrease. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Imbres rScentes fluminS, omnia, auxerunt. Vlr bSniia 
 paupgribtis cibiim d^bit. PastSr prudens fives agnosqufi a 
 
NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 89 
 
 Ifipis defensabit. Org6t6rix, princeps Helvctiortim, copiaa 
 auxgrSlt. VfitSres J6vi tauros ingentes mactabant. Agri- 
 ctilae prudentes in pSntim mergites omnes portant. Caesir 
 fortes centuriones laudabat. Mariiis, Romanorum impSrator, 
 f graces Nttmidiae Sgros ferro igniqug vastavit. Princeps cru- 
 dells inn6cent6m pleb6m trticidavit. Bella civilia nobilita- 
 t6m 6t Gives divites perterrugrant. Principes fgroces atrocia 
 belia, Smant. Rex fgrox nobilitatgm &d belltim magnum 6t 
 Strox concitavit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 No prudent (man) will give his sheep to the wolves. The 
 happy mother loves her children. The innocent do not fear 
 the face and countenance of a judge. The consul will pre- 
 serve the ancient laws of the commonwealth. The prudent 
 shepherds had sheared their sheep. A terrible lion tore in 
 pieces all the inhabitants of the village. The enemy's sol- 
 diers had laid waste the whole city with fire and sword. The 
 rich dread civil wars. The recent rains have swelled the 
 great river. The poor (man) does not fear the robber. 
 
 NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 
 §63. 1. Adjectives eayressirig' number are called ^m- 
 merals, and are divided into three classes, viz. : 
 
 (a) Cardinals, which answer the question "How 
 manyf"; as, linils, one; du6, two. 
 
 (b) Ordinals f which express order or rank; as, primils, 
 first; sficundfls, second. 
 
 (c) Distributives, which answer the questions "How 
 many to each?" "How many apiece?"; as, singilll, one 
 to each, one at a time, one apiece; bin!, two apiece. 
 
 2. To these may be added Numeral Adverbs, which 
 answer the question "Hoio many times f; as, sSm&l, once; 
 bfa, twice. 
 
 8* 
 
90 
 
 NUMERAL ADIECTIVES. 
 
 CARDratl/. OEDINAIi, 
 
 One, two, etc. Mrst, secoml, etc. 
 
 1 UnQs, Pcimus, 
 
 2 Duo, Secundiis, 
 
 3 Tres, Tertius, 
 
 4 Quattuor, QuartuB, 
 
 5 Qulnque, Quintus, 
 
 6 Sex, Sextus, 
 
 7 Septem, Septimus, 
 
 8 Oct5, Ootavus, 
 
 9 NSvem, Noniis, 
 30 DecSm, DScimus, 
 H Undeeim, Undeoimiis, 
 
 12 DuSdocim, Duodecimus, 
 
 13 TrSdeoim, Tertius deeimus, 
 
 14 Quattuordecim, Quartus decimiis, 
 
 15 QuindScim, Quintus decimiis, 
 
 16 Sedeeim, Sextiis decimilB, 
 
 17 Septendecim, Septimus decimiis, 
 
 18 Duodeviginti Duiidevicesimiis, 
 (OctSdeeim), 
 
 19 Undeviginti Undevicesimus, 
 (N5vendeoim), 
 
 20 Viginti, VloesimiSs, 
 30 Triginta, Trioesimus, 
 40 Quadraginta, Quadragesimiis, 
 50 Quinquaginta, ' QuinquagesimiSs, 
 60 Sexaginta, Sexagesimiis, 
 70 Septuaginta, Septuagesimiis, 
 80 Ootoginta, Octogesimus, 
 90 Nonaginta, Nonagesimiis, 
 
 100 Centiim, Centesimiis, 
 
 200 Diicenti, Diicentesimus, 
 
 300 Treeenti, Trecentesimiis, ' 
 
 40O Quadringenti, Quadringentesimiis, 
 
 600 Quingenti, Quingentesimiis, 
 
 600 Sescenti Sescentesimiis, 
 
 (Sexcenti), 
 
 700 SeptingentI, Septingentesimiis, 
 
 800 Ootingenti, Ootingentesimiis, 
 
 900 "Nongenti, Nongentesimlg, 
 
 1000 Mille; Millesimiis; 
 
 Distributive. Advebbiaii. 
 
 One by one, etc. Once, twice, etc, 
 Singuli, SSmel, 
 
 Bini, Bis, 
 
 Terni, Tgr, 
 
 Quaterni, Quater, 
 
 Quini, Qulnquies(-ens) 
 Seni, Sexies, 
 
 S^teni, Septies, 
 
 Ootoni, Octies, 
 
 Noveni, Novies, 
 
 Deni, Decies, 
 
 tjndeni, Undeoies, 
 
 Duodeni, DuSdeoies, 
 
 Terni deni, Tredeoies, 
 Quatei-nl deni, QuattuordScies, 
 
 Quini deni, Quindecies, 
 
 Seni deni, Sedecies, 
 
 Septeni deni, Septies deoies, 
 
 Duodevioenl DuSdevioies, 
 (Octoni dejni), 
 
 Undeviceni TJndevioies, 
 (Noveni deni), 
 
 Viceni, Vicies, 
 
 Trioeni, Trioies, 
 
 Quadrageni, Quadragies, 
 
 Quinquageni, Quinquagies, 
 
 @exageni, Sexagies, 
 
 Beptuageni, Septuagies, 
 
 I'Ootogeni, Oetogies, 
 
 Nonageni, Nonagies, 
 
 ' Centeni, Centies, 
 
 Dficeui, Biicenties, 
 
 i Treoeni, TrSoenties, 
 
 Quadringeni, QuadringentieSj 
 
 Quingeni, QuingentiSs, 
 
 Sesceni, Sescenties, 
 
 Septingeni, SeptingentiSs, 
 
 Octingeni, Octingenties, 
 
 Nongeni, Nongenties, 
 
 Milleni (Sin- Milliea. 
 gUla mill^) ; 
 
ADJECTIVES. 91 
 
 § 64. Cardinals. 
 
 Remark 1 - The first three Cardinal numbers are declined; 
 From four to a hundred, they are indeclinable; those denoting 
 hundreds are declined like the Plural oiMnils; as, dtlcenti, -ae, 
 -a; -orfim, -arilm, -ordm, etc. 
 
 Remark S. — For the declension of urv&s, see \ 56. TrSi is de- 
 clined like the Plural of hrhfis; Nominative trli, triSt; Genitive 
 triUm; Dative tribUs, etc. I>v,6 is thus declined : 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 duo, 
 
 dnae, 
 
 duo, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 duorum, 
 
 duarvm, 
 
 duoruin. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 dnobns, 
 
 duabns, 
 
 duob^s, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 duos or duo, 
 
 dnas, 
 
 duo. 
 
 Voo. 
 
 duo. 
 
 duae, 
 
 duo. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 duobiis. 
 
 duabiis. 
 
 duSbiis. 
 
 Remark 3. — Duoriim and duarUm, especially when compounded 
 with another word, or when joi'ned with mili&m, are frequently 
 contracted into duum; as, duumvir, duum mlliibn. AmbS, both, 
 is declined like du6. 
 
 Remark If. — TJiiui has a Plural form — 
 
 (a) With Nouns which have no Singular; as, unae nuptiae, 
 one marriage. 
 
 (b) With Nouns which denote several things considered as one 
 whole ; as, v/nS, vesttmentS-, one suit of clothes. 
 
 (c) In the sense of alone or the same; as, unl Ubn, the Ubians 
 alone ; iinu mdrtbUs, with the same mtaners. 
 
 Remark 5. — From thirteen to nineteen inclusive, instead of 
 the compound forms (trUdicim, etc.), the simple Numerals are 
 used, with or without !ity as, dte&m U ires, or d^c^ ires. 
 
 Remark 6. — From twenty to one hundred, the greater number 
 precedes without &t, or the smaller number with M/ as, vigintl 
 uniis, or units U vigintl. Above one hundred, the greater number 
 is put first, with or without U; but U is not twice used in desig- 
 nating the same number; as, dUcentl quadrdginia qulngui, or dH- 
 cenU U quadrdginia qulnqui, two hundred and forty-five. 
 
 Remark 7. — Subtractive forms are more commonly used foi 
 
92 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 eighteen, twenty-eight, etc., and for nineteen, twenty-nine, etc 
 as, duOdlvlginti, diMetnginta, duddeguadrdgin/a^ etc.; undevi- 
 ginfi, undUnginta, etc. Du6 is not declined in these combina- 
 tions. 
 
 Remark 8. — Thousands are usually expressed by the smaller 
 numbers with mllid; as, dictm mlliS, ten thousand ; sometimes 
 by the Distributives with mlliti; as, denS, mllid; and in the poets 
 by the Adverbial Numeral with milli; as, dtdes milU, ten times 
 a thousand, ten thousand. 
 
 Remark 9. — 3IilU is either an Adjective or a Noun. As an 
 Adjective, it is indeclinable and Plural, and limits the name of 
 the things numbered; as, 7nill& hSmtnes, a thousand men; (in 
 poetry) cUm bis milli MmlnibUa, with two thousand [twice a 
 thousand) men ; (in prose, we would have, o&m duobits mlllbih 
 hSmlnum). As a Noun, it is indeclinable in the Singular, and 
 occurs only in Nominative and Accusative; and in the Plural 
 has miliSt, mlli&m, miRb&s, and is limited by the name of the 
 things numbered in the Partitive Genitive ; as, milli hdminiim, 
 a thousand (of) men; iriS, mlliti hQminiXm, three thousand men 
 [three thousand of men). But if a declined Numeral comes be- 
 tween, the Genitive is very rarely used ; as, trid, mllid U tricentos 
 Squltes circ&m se hdbebdf, he had three thousand three hundred 
 horsemen around him. 
 
 Remark 10. — The poets sometimes use the Numeral Adverb to 
 express also smaller numbers ; as, Us dictm for vlgintl. 
 
 Remark 11. — Millions are expressed by combinations of cen- 
 tend mllid (a. hundred thousand); as, dicies centend mllid, one 
 million ; ceniies centenO, mllid, ten millions. 
 
 §65. Ordinals, Distributives, and Adverbs. 
 
 1. Pridr is used instead of prlmUs when only two things are 
 spoken of. AltSr is often used for sieundus. 
 
 2. Between twelfth and twentieth, the smaller number is 
 usually put first; but the greater sometimes precedes, with or 
 without it; as, dieimiis it tertiOs, or di&imUs tertiiis. 
 
 3. In the other intermediate numbers, twenty-first, twenty- 
 second, etc., the larger precedes without it, or the smaller with 
 it; as, guadrageslmUs prlmils, or primus it quadrdgMmUs; but 
 
ADJECTIVES. 93 
 
 instead of prlmUs and sioundUi, unUs and altSr (or du5) are often 
 used, duS being undeclined ; as, unUs M vlcestm&a, one-and-twen- 
 tietli ; altiro (or du6) U vlcSsXmo anno, in the twenty-second 
 year. 
 
 4. For eighths and ninths in the intermediate Numerals, the 
 subtractive- forms are generally used; as, duddevlceslmiis, unda- 
 trlcesim&s. So, also, in the Distributives, and sometimes in the 
 Adverbs ; as, 
 
 duddevlcem, undevlcml; 
 duddetrlcdes, undequadragiea. 
 
 5. The poets sometimes use the Distributives for Cardinals ; 
 as, bind, spiciUd, two darts. They are used in the same way in 
 prose with Nouns which have no Singular ; as, binae litterae, too 
 epistles; but duae litterae would mean two letters (of the alpha- 
 bet). 
 
 6. Some of the Distributives have a Singular form with a 
 multiplicative meaning, chiefly in poetry; as, bitiUs, twofold. 
 
 7. In the Numeral Adverbs the intermediate numbers are 
 expressed — 
 
 (a) Either by putting the smaller first with U; as, s^mU U 
 meies, 
 
 (b) Or by putting the larger number first, with or without U; 
 as, vlcies stmU, or tiJcies U sirriil. 
 
 EXEECISE XXVIII. 
 § 66. 1. Rvle of Syntax. — The Point of Time at which 
 anything occurs is expressed by the Ablative ; as, tertia 
 hora, at the third hour {Ablative of Time). 
 
 2. Rule of Syntax. — Duration of Time, and Extent of 
 Space, are expressed by the Accusative, sometimes by the 
 Ablative ; as, tres horas mansit, he remained three hours; 
 fossS duos pSdes latS, a ditch two feet wide. 
 
 3. Rule of Position. — Designations of Time and Place 
 usually stand near the beginning of the sentence. See 
 §29,3. 
 
94 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 fossS, -ae, ditch. hiems, hiem-is, winter. 
 
 hora, -ae, hour. passus, -us, pace. 
 
 mensis, -Is (§ 33, Exo. 3), month. tempas, -5r-is, ilme, 
 
 dies, -el, day. nostSr, -trS, trum, our. 
 
 annus, -i, year. aestas, aestat-is, eummer. 
 
 una ex parte, on one side. 
 
 contlne-S, -e-re, continu-i, contont-um, to keep, hold in^ restrain. 
 susttne-8, -e-re, sustinu-i, sustent-um, to suatain, to hear. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Servi fidi horas multas yigilavSrant. NuUtts agric61S 
 prudens 6ves hiSmS toudebit. Caesitr, Romanorflm impSr- 
 atSr, tres Iggiones in hibernis * collScavit. Consiil multos 
 annos in urbg habitavSrait. Mons alttts una ex partS Hel- 
 ved 6s continuit. Equites nostri hostiiim impgtttm duas 
 horas sustinuerunt. Past8r prudens aestatS fives omnes 
 tfitondit. Legatfls fortis dScfim dies Caesa,ris adventiim 
 exspectabat. ImpSratOr tertio die castrS, movit. Princeps 
 atrox multSs menses civitatgm perterrebat. Consiil fortia 
 nulls anni tempSrS adventiim hostiiim timeb&t. Rex la- 
 trones omnes brSvi tempOrS triicidavit. Crasstis triS; milii 
 passuftm Squitavit. Consiil millS passus castrS, movit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The great rains had kept our soldiers in the camp many 
 months. In one summer Caesar laid waste many states 
 of Gaul with fire and sword. For many years {Acc.~) the 
 Romans routed all their enemies by sea and land. Caesar 
 moved his camp ten thousand paces from the city. The 
 soldiers of the tenth legion had carried heavy burdens for 
 many hours (Ace). Our skirmishers sustained the attack 
 of the Germans three hours. Lake Lemannus held-in the 
 
 * In hlbemis refers to the resting of troops in winter quarters ; in 
 Kbermi, to the motion of going thither. 
 
PAEADIGM OF ESSfi. 95 
 
 Helvetians on one side. The farmer had a ditch three feet 
 wide in his field. The farmer will have in his fields five 
 ditches, each-three (ternos) feet wide. The master gave (to) 
 the boys four books apiece. A ditch twelve feet wide and 
 six feet deep had hindered the attack of the enemy many 
 days. 
 
 EXEECISE XXIX. 
 
 1 67. 1. PAETIAL PARADIGM OF ^S/S£', to Je. -INDICA- 
 TIVE MOOD. 
 (Stems es- and fn-.) 
 
 Present Tense. 
 Pers. SingvXar, Plural. 
 
 1. sQ-m,* I am, su-mus, we are, 
 
 2. 6s, thou art, es-Hs, ye are, 
 
 3. es-t, he is, su-nt, they are. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1. er-a-m,Iwas, hr-a-miis, we were, 
 
 2. Sr-a-s, thou wast, 6r-a-tTs, ye were, 
 
 3. 6r-a-t, he was, 6r-a-nt, they were. 
 
 Future, shall or will. 
 
 1. 6r-6, I shall be, 6r-T-mus, we shall he, 
 
 2. er-T-s, thotc wilt be, 6r-T-tTs, ye will be, 
 
 3. 6r-Y-t, he will be, 6r-u-nt, they will be. 
 
 Present-Perfect, have been (Aorist-Perfect, was). 
 
 1. fU-i, I have been, 01 was, fu-t-mus, we have been, or 
 
 were, 
 
 2. f Q-i-stl, thou hast been, or f Q-i-stis, ye have been, or 
 
 wast, « were, 
 
 fu-e-runt,or 1 theyhavebeen, 
 Z.m-x-\,hehasbeen,ovwas, ^.j. g ^g^ | ^^^^,.^_ 
 
 * S&m (including its compounds) and inqu&m are the only two 
 Verbs that preserve the original ending -m in the first person of the 
 Present Indicative. 
 
96 PREDICATE NOMINATIVE. 
 
 Past-Perfect. 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. fu-6ra-m, I had been, fu-5ra-mus, we had been, 
 
 2. f u-Sra-s, thou hadst been, fu-Sra-tls, ye had been, 
 
 3. fu-6ra-t, he had been, fu-era-nt, they had been. 
 
 Future-Perfect, shall or will have. 
 
 1. tii-^rS, I shall have been, fu-6ri-mus, we shall have 
 
 been, 
 
 2. f u-6ri-s, thou milt have been, f u-6rt-tis, i/e will have been, 
 
 3. fH-^rt-t, he will have been, tu-M-nt, they loillhavebeen. 
 
 2. A Noun or an Adjective may limit the Predicate 
 as well as the Subject : thus, we may say, CicgrO 6rat6r, 
 Cicero the orator, and CicerO 6rat5r fuit, Cicero was an 
 m-ator; SgSr fSrax, a fertile field, and Sg6r fgrax est, the 
 fi^ld is fei-tile. 
 
 PREDICATE NOMINATIVE. 
 
 3. Rule of Syntax. — A Noun in the Predicate denot- 
 ing the same person or thing as the Subject, agrees with 
 it in case, and is called the Predicate Nominative; as, 
 CfcgrS oratSr fuft, Cicero was an oratm: 
 
 Remark 1. — If the Subject consists of more than one person 
 or thing, the Predicate Nominative is Plural. 
 
 Bemarh Z. — Adjectives in the predicate agree with the Sub- 
 ject. See ?57, 2. 
 
 EXERCISE XXX. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 integer, -grS, -grum, untouched, un- vita, -ao, life. 
 
 hurt, fresh. vclox, veloc-is, awift. 
 
 humanus, -a, -iim, human. oaeciis, -S, -um, blind. 
 
 incertus, -S, -um, uncm-tain. mendacium, -i, tie, 
 
 TErua, -5, -um, true. oorniger, -5, -Km, horned. (See | 5S, 
 tur['t6, -€, haee. Rem. 3.) 
 
COMPAEISON OF ADJECTIVES. 97 
 
 ingenSj -ent-iSj httge, praecIar^B, -a, -Qm, d-is^nguiahed, 
 
 duplex, duplic-i&, double. acl€Sj -ei, line of battle. 
 
 triplex, trlplio-is, triple. renuntiatiS, -on-Ts, repon. 
 yulnfis, vulnSr-is, wound. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Non omnia animalia corniggra sunt. Aquilarfim alae 
 magnae sunt. Non omnes h6mines sSpientes sunt. Kes 
 humanae incertae sunt. VitS, hominiim ineertft est. tJnus 
 Squoriim caectts fuit. CaesSris milites veloces fortesquS 
 fuerunt. Caesar fuit imp6rat8r magntts. Mariiis dux fuit 
 Romanoriim. Regis filitls rex Srit. Rgnuntiatio legato- 
 riim verS, fuit. Ap6r ingens in silva ha,bit3,t. ImpSratSr 
 in proelio intSgSr fuit. VulnSrS, militum sunt grSviS,. 
 Consiil annos multos caectis fuSr&t. CaesSris fteies triplex 
 fuit. Omnes dgcimae Iggionis milites intggris viribus (§ 45) 
 proeliiim rSdintSgravSrant. MendaciS, turpiS, sunt. Cic8r8 
 fuit 6rat8r praeclartts. ImprSborttm (§ 60, Bern.') vita 6ntis' 
 est gr&v6. Gallorum Scies est dttplex. 
 
 Translate irdo Latin. 
 The farmer's oxen are large. Many bulls are horned. 
 All generals are not wise. The inhabitants of the villages 
 dread the huge lion. Cicero was a wise consul and a great 
 man. The wounds of the brave soldiers were severe. Many 
 of the swift horsemen were unhurt. Davus, Caesar's slave, 
 has been blind many years. Our soldiers "in a triple line 
 renew the battle. All human things are uncertain. The 
 shade of the dense forest will frighten the king's swift mes- 
 senger. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 68. 1. The change whicli Adjectives undergo to ex- 
 press different degrees of quality is termed Comparison. 
 
 9 
 
98 (X)MPAEISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 2. Grammarians generally give three degrees of Com- 
 parison, — the Positive, the Comparative, and the Super- 
 lative. 
 
 3. The simple form of the Adjective is usually called 
 the Positive; as, altiis, high. 
 
 4. The Comparative expresses a higher or lower degree 
 of the quality in one of two things, or sets of things, than 
 in the other; as, mons arbOrS attiSr est, a mountain is 
 higher than a tree. 
 
 5. The Superlative expresses a higher or lower degree 
 of the quality in one of several things, or sets of things, 
 than in any of the othei^s ; as, trittm montitim altissimus, 
 the highest of the three mountains. 
 
 Renarh 1. — ^The Comparative does not express a higher degree 
 of quality than the Positive, but represents one thing as having 
 more of a given quality than another. Thus, in the example 
 mons est arbSrt altiSr, we mean, not that the mountain is higher 
 than a high mountain, but higher than a tree ; i. e., there is more 
 height in a mountain than in a tree. 
 
 Remark S. — When two qualities of the same thing are com- 
 pared, both Adjectives may be put in the Comparative, or both 
 in the Positive connected by m&gis — qudm/ as, Aristides justior 
 quSm sSpientifir fiilt, Aristides was more just than wise. Oratores 
 diserti mftgls sunt quSm elfiquentes, the orators are more fluent 
 than eloquent; so of the Adverb ; as, belia forties quSm felicitls 
 gesserunt, they waged wars with more courage than good for- 
 tune. 
 
 Remark S. — The Comparative may often be translated by too 
 or rather with the Positive, especially when one of the things 
 compared is omitted; as, rex clementiOr est, the king is too 
 merciful. 
 
 Remark 4- — The Superlative often expresses a very high degree 
 of a quality ; as, mons altisstmUs, a very high mountain (" The 
 Superlative of Eminence"). 
 
COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. 
 
 99 
 
 FOHMiTIOX OP COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 § 69. 1. The Comparative is formed by adding -i6r for 
 the ma&c. and fem., and -iiis for the neuter; and the Su- 
 perlative by adding -isslmUs, -&, -to, to the stem of the 
 Adjective; as, alt-Us, high, alt-iOr, higher, alt-4s,Hl,mUs, 
 highest. 
 
 Remark. — These endings are added directly to Consonant 
 stems; in Vowel stems the final Vowel (characteristic) is 
 dropped before the endings. Thus, in aliiis, aim, aliUm (stem 
 altd-, altd,-, alid-), the characteristic -d, -d, -6 is dropped before 
 adding the endings -i6r, -iUs, and -isdm&s, etc. 
 
 2. Superlatives are of the First and Second Declen- 
 sions. Comparatives are of the Third Declension, and 
 are thus declined: 
 
 Singular. 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 Nom. diiri5r, 
 Gen. duriorts, 
 Dat. diiri5ri, 
 Ace. diiri5r5m, 
 Voc. diirior, 
 Abl. diiriorS (or -iori) ; 
 
 Plural. 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 Nom. diirlores. 
 Gen. diiriorum, 
 Dat. duriortbus, 
 Ace. diiriores, 
 Voc. diiriores, 
 Abl, durioribus ; 
 
 Neuter. 
 
 duriQs, 
 
 diiriorTs, 
 
 diiriorl, 
 
 diirius, 
 
 durius, 
 
 diiriorS (or -iorl) ; 
 
 Neuter. 
 durjora, 
 diiriorum, 
 diiriorTbds, 
 duriora, 
 diiriora, 
 diirloribQs. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXI. 
 § 70, 1. That with which anything is compared (the 
 aomplement of the Comparative) is connected by the 
 
100 COMPAEISON OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Conjunction qu&m, than, in the same case, or in the 
 Noininative, Subject of est, fuit, etc., understood ; as, 
 fortiorgm vidi nemingm quSm Mariiim, / have seen no 
 braver man than Marius; or, fortiorgm vidi nemmSm 
 quSm Mdrius (est), I have seen no braver man than Ma- 
 rivLS is. 
 
 2. Qudm is sometimes omitted ; then — 
 
 Mule of Syntax. — The Ablative is used with the Com- 
 parative degree when qu&m is omitted, to express that 
 with which something is compared ; as, mons est arbdrS 
 altiOr, a mountain is higher than a tree. (See § 163, Me- 
 rnarks.) 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Banctus, -a, -iim, sacred ; (of a man, pure), fides, -ei, faithj promise. 
 
 durus, -a, -Qm, hard. nihil (indeclinable), nothing. 
 
 nemS {Dat. nSmin-i, Ace. nemin-em),* no regifi, -onis, region, 
 
 man. gens, gent-is, race, nation. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 PriidentiorSm vidi neminSm qua,m Murium, Eomanoriim 
 dtlcSm. Liipi sunt ciinibiis fSrociores. Nulla, rggio est 
 Gallia fSraciSr. Nihil est jur6 jiirando (§ 45) sanctius. 
 Equfis est b6vS velociftr. Germani fuerunt Gallis fSroci- 
 ores. NuUtini bellfim est bello civili atrociiis. NeinO R6- 
 manoriim sancti6r fuit quSm Ca,t6. Consul gent6m fgroci- 
 orSm nullum videbit quSm Helvetios. Caesa,r in exercitu 
 fortior6ni ha,bSt neminSm quS,m Lucifis. Auriim grSvius 
 est qu3,m argentum. Ferrttm est auro duritis. Nihil 
 ineertitis est quSm vitS, hiimanS,. AgricSlS, cS,n6m quJlm 
 liipiim fSrociorSm hS,buit. Equites quSm pSdites sunt ve- 
 lociores. 
 
 * For the Oen. and Abl., nuUiiis hSmlnls and nuUo hOmlnfi must bt 
 Lsed. 
 
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 101 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The general is braver than the soldiers. The consul's 
 son will be more prudent than his father. !No nation was 
 braver than the Helvetians. The king's messengers are 
 swifter than horses. Lions are fiercer than dogs. Nothing 
 is more sacred than the oath of a good man. A good man's 
 promise is more sacred than a wicked man's oath. The Bel- 
 gians were a braver race than the Gauls. No general was 
 more prudent than Caesar. The king's garden is more fer- 
 tile than the farmer's field. Iron is harder than silver. 
 Silver is not heavier than gold. The general is not more 
 prudent than the centurion. 
 
 EXEKCLSE XXXII. 
 § 71. The Partitive Genitive is used with Comparatives 
 and Superlatives ; as, fortidr duor'&m frdtr^m, the braver 
 of the two brothers ; fortissl/m'&s millium, the bravest of 
 the soldiers. 
 
 Vocahulary. 
 
 Jura, -ae (masc), Jura {a mountain). ira, -ae, anger, wrath, 
 
 Italia, -ae, Italy. noster, -tra, -trum, our. 
 
 Roma, -ae, Rome. 
 
 IVanslate into English. 
 JiirS,, mons altissimus (§ 68, Rem. Jf), Helvetios lina ex 
 parts contingt. ImpSrat6r fortissimos militura laudavit. 
 Jiidex iniqutis qu^m latrD est turpi6r. Velitiim velocis- 
 simi omnes silvarttm tramites exploravSrant. PrudentiSr 
 duoriim impgratortim copias hostiiira fttgabit. Portissirai 
 centiirioniim magnitiidingm pgrlciili timebant. OrggtSrix 
 fuit Helvetioriim nobilissimiis. Nostroriim (§60, Rem.) 
 impgtiis fortissimos hostium perterrugrSt. Jfigurtha, h6m§ 
 imprSbissimus fratres trijcidavit. VulngrS, militfim fuerunt 
 gravissimS,. 
 9* 
 
102 lEEEGULAE COMPARISON. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The bravest of the enemy did not sustain the attack of 
 our horsemen. The Rhine, a very broad river, keeps in the 
 Helvetians on one side. The wicked king had slain the no- 
 blest of the hostages. The consul will lay waste the most 
 fertile states of Gaul. On the third day the general moved 
 his camp into the most fertile part of the province. Tiie 
 most wicked of men fear the wrath of God. The greatness 
 of the danger frightened the bravest of our soldiers. The 
 general is wiser than the king's ambassadors. One of the 
 enemy wounded Lucius, a very brave man, with a stone. 
 Davus is the most faithful of all the slaves. Rome is the 
 noblest city of Italy. 
 
 IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 
 
 §72. L Adjectives in -gr form tlie Superlative by 
 adding -rhnUs; as, pulch^, hea.ntifa[, pulchridr, pulcher- 
 rim&s. 
 
 2. Six Adjectives in -iMs form their Superlative by 
 adding -llrnMs to the stem after dropping the character- 
 istic -1; e. g., fdcXlli (stem fdcXlt-, -t dropped), f&c^l-idr, 
 fdctl-ltmUs. 
 
 Facil-is, 
 
 facil-iSr, 
 
 faoil-llraus, 
 
 eanif. 
 
 Diffioil-Is, 
 
 difficIl-iBr, 
 
 difficil-limus, 
 
 difficult. 
 
 Gradl-ia, 
 
 gracil-iSr, 
 
 graoil-llmus, 
 
 slender. 
 
 Humil-Is, 
 
 humil-i5r, 
 
 humil-Iimus, 
 
 low. 
 
 Simil-is, 
 
 simil-iSr, 
 
 Bimil-limiiB", 
 
 like. 
 
 Di88imll-i8, 
 
 dissImil-iSr, 
 
 dissimil-limus, 
 
 unlike. 
 
 TmbeaUlUs or imbecillls, weak, has two forms, imheoil- 
 lisHlmlis and (rarely) imbecilllmUs. 
 
 V^tus, old, has the Comparative vStustidr (archaic form, 
 vStSiidr), Superlative v&errlmUs. MdtHr'tcs, ripe, has Su- 
 perlative usually mdturissimUs, less frequently maturrlmUs, 
 
lEEBGULAE OOMPAEISON. 
 
 103 
 
 3. Compound Adjectives ending in -dtoUs, -flcHs, and 
 -vdMs, together with SgenHs and provld&s, form the Com- 
 parative and Superlative by adding -entidr and -entissimUs 
 to the stem (characteristic dropped) ; as, bSn^dl&s, benev- 
 olent, bSnSvdlentidr, bSnSvdlentisslmUs. 
 
 4. The following have regular Comparatives, but 
 irregular Superlatives : 
 
 Dexter, dexterior, dextimiis, right (as opposed to left) 
 
 Exterus, exterior, extremus or extimus, outward. 
 
 Posterus, posteriBr, postremiis or postumiis, coming after, next. 
 
 Inf eriis, inferior, inf imua or imus, below. 
 
 Superiis, superior, supremiis or summiis, ahove. 
 
 Remark. — Of the Positive forms of these Adjectives, exttr is 
 rare in the Singular; inf^rUm and sUp^r&m occur in neuter Sing., 
 generally with marS (e. g., m&ri vnftr^m, the Lower, i. e., the 
 Tuscan Sea, opp. to md,ri sUptriim, the Upper, i. e., Adriatic 
 Sea) ; posUrUs occurs in the Singular chiefly in expressions of 
 time (e. g., postSro die, on the next day) ; but ext!&r, postirus, in- 
 ftrus, and s&ptrUs are common in the Plural, especially as 
 Nouns; extSri, foreigners; postSri, posterity; sfipSri, the gods 
 jtbove; and inffirl, the dead, or those below. 
 
 5. The following form the Comparative and Superla- 
 tive on a different stem from that of the Positive : 
 
 Bonus, 
 
 meliSr, 
 
 optimus. 
 
 good. 
 
 better. 
 
 best. 
 
 Malus, 
 
 pejSr, 
 
 pessimiis, 
 
 bad. 
 
 worse. 
 
 worst. 
 
 Magnus, 
 
 majSr, 
 
 maximiis, 
 
 great. 
 
 greater, 
 
 greatest. 
 
 Parvus, 
 
 mindr. 
 
 minimus, 
 
 little. 
 
 less, 
 
 —least. 
 
 Multus, 
 
 Multa, 
 
 Multiim, 
 
 
 plurimus, I 
 plurima, > 
 plurimUm, J 
 
 
 
 
 
 mnch, 
 
 more. 
 
 most. 
 
 plus. 
 
 6. Nequ&m (indecL), worthless, has nequiSr, nSquis- 
 simUs; and frugl, frugal, has frugalidr, frygcUisstmiis. 
 
 7. Plus, moj e, is thus declined : 
 
104 lEEEGULAE COMPARISON. 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Masc. and Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 plus, 
 
 plures. 
 
 plurS, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 pluris, 
 
 plurium. 
 
 pluriQm, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 
 pluribus. 
 
 pluribus. 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 plus. 
 
 plures. 
 
 plura. 
 
 Voe. 
 Abl. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Dluribiis : 
 
 rluribus. 
 
 Complures, a great many, is found only in the Plural, 
 and is declined like plures, except in the neuter Nom- 
 inative and Accusative, where we sometimes find com- 
 pluria, but generally complurd. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIII. 
 § 73. The Partitive Genitive is frequently used with 
 neuter Adjectives, such as mult'&m, plus, mMntmim, pluri- 
 m-Hm, etc. ; as, multUm auri, much gold. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Principes Galloriim CaesSris exercitui plurimttm frumenti 
 praebuerunt. Cives in dCmibtis multiim auri hSbent. Min- 
 imtim virtutis est in judicS inlquo. AgricSlae plus frumenti 
 habent qua,m auri. ItSr pgr Alpes diificillimiim est. MSg- 
 istSr optimos pu6r6rum laudabit. CaesS,r maximtis fuit im- 
 pSratorfira Rornanorfim. Multum cibi cOmgdonfim delectSt. 
 Reginae filiS. est pulcherrimJi. AgricQlae bSves pigerrimi 
 sunt. Paster minimos agnorttm non tStondit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The great whirlwinds will dash in pieces very many of 
 
 the ships. The poet's daughter is the most beautiful of all 
 
 the girls. The greatest city in Italy is Rome. The soldiers 
 
 will bring much corn into the city. The commander will 
 
DEFECTIVE COMPARISON. 105 
 
 remain in the camp the whole winter. The consul's soldiers 
 demanded gold from the citizens. The citizens gave (t»j) 
 the consul's soldiers more (of) wounds than (of) gold. The 
 general called together the greatest of the chiefs. Caesar 
 was a greater general than Crassus. 
 
 DEFECTIVE COMPAEISON. 
 
 § 74. 1 . The following Adjectives want the Positive : 
 
 Cit6Tior(citra), citimns, iienrer. Fdtidr, pdtissimus, better. 
 
 Detgrior (de), deterrimiis, Prior (prae), primns, former. 
 
 wome. Propior (prope), proximus, 
 
 Interior (intra), intimns^ inner. nearer. 
 
 Ocidr, ocissimns, swifter. Ulterior (ultra), nltimns, /urf^er. 
 
 Note. — As will be seen from the words in parenthesis, the Positive 
 stem is generally to be found in a corresponding Preposition or Ad- 
 verb. The Positive of ociSr is wanting ; that of pSiitk- is pSIts, able, 
 rarely declined, and used only in poetry, chiefly in the expression 
 pdtU or pStS est (whence possUm). 
 
 2. The following have no terminational Comparative, 
 but prefix m&gts, more : 
 
 Bellas, bellissimns, pretty. Meritus, tngritissimns (very 
 
 Consultas, consultissimns, rare), deserving. 
 
 skilful. Novus, novissimns, new. 
 
 Falsus, falsissimus, false. Par, pdrissimus (very rare), 
 
 FIdns, fldissimns, faiiiifnl. equal. 
 
 Inclntns, incliitissimns, re- Persnasns, persaasissimnm 
 
 nowued. (neuter), persuaded. 
 
 Invictus, invictissimns, invin- Fifis, piissimns, pious. 
 
 cible. SdcSr, sdcerrimns, sacred. 
 
 Invitus,invltissimns,unii>i'%°i!9. V&fer, v^ferrimus, crafty. 
 
 3. The following have no terminational Superlat've, 
 but for the most part prefix maxtme, most : 
 
 Adulescena, Sdulescentior, Arcanus, arcanior, secret. 
 
 young. Ater, atridr, black. 
 
 Agrestis, agrestiOr, rustic. Caecns, caecior, blind. 
 
 &lftc6r, ftlScrior, active. D€sgs, desldior, inactive. 
 
106 THIRD AND FOURTH COKJUGATIONS. 
 
 DiatUTDUs, diuturniSr, lasting. Saiutaris, sftlutBridr, salutary, 
 
 Exllis, exilior, meagre. Sdtls, siiffieient; sfitiiis, prefer- 
 Inflnltns, inflnltior, unlimited. able. 
 
 Ingens, ingeutidr, great. Slltnr, sdtari5r, full. 
 
 Jejuniis, jejanidr, hungry. Segnis, seguior, sIoid, lingering. 
 
 Jav^nis, jnnior, young. Seiiex, s6nidr, old. 
 
 Xiicens, licentior, unrestrained. Seriis, serior, late, 
 
 IiOnginquus,longinqui6r,<2!'8- Silvestris, silvestrior, woody. 
 
 tant. Sinister, sinist&rior, left. 
 
 Obliqnns, obllqnidr, oblique. Snplnns, snpluior, lying on .the 
 Opimns, opIini5r, rich. back. 
 
 Frocllvis, procllvidr, sloping. Snrdns, surdior, deaf. 
 
 Pronns, pronidr, bending down. TSres, tSr&tidr, round. 
 
 Fropinquus, propinqnidr, Tempestlvns, tempestlvior, 
 
 near. seasonable. 
 
 Protervus, prStervior, violent. VIcInns, vIcIniSr, neighboring. 
 
 and many Verbals in-^fe. 
 
 Remarh 1. — The Superlative of jUvSnts and ddUleseens is sup- 
 plied by mlnXmUs natu, youngest ; and that of sinex by maaflmiia 
 natu, oldest. The Comparatives, mUndr ndtu and mdjBr natu, 
 occur rarely. 
 
 4. Adjectives in -Us, preceded by a Vowel, except those 
 in -quUs, form the Comparative and Superlative by pre- 
 fixing m&gis, more, and maxtme, most; as, Idonelis, miigia 
 Idone&s, maxtme tdoneUs, fit, more fit, most fit. This is 
 especially the case with Derivatives in -bundus, -"icus, 
 -Inus, -ivus, -drus, -UmUs, -ulus, -alls or -arts, and (from 
 Substantives) in -dtus and -l,tus. 
 
 THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS OF 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 § 75. 1. Verbs whose stem ends in a Consonant, insert 
 
 ? (short) before -rS of the Present Infinitive, and belong 
 
 to the Third Conjugation ; as, rig-i-rt, to rule. 
 
 Note. — In all tenses formed on the Present-stem in this Conjuga- 
 tion, we find a connecting Vowel inserted after the final Consonant of 
 the stem ; as, rfg--l-t, he rules. 
 
INDICATIVE ENDINGS OF VERBS. 107 
 
 2. Verbs that have the stem-vowel I (long) btibre -ri 
 of the Present Infinitive, belong to the Fourth Conjuga- 
 tion ; as, audi-r&, to hear, 
 
 3. Indicative Tense-Endings. 
 The Tense-endings are the same for both Conjugations, 
 save that in the Present Indicative of the Third Conju- 
 gation the connecting-vowel I (whiSh is absorbed by the 
 final Vowel of the stem in the Fourth Conjugation) ap- 
 pears in full. 
 
 This connecting Vowel i in the Present tense is here, for conve- 
 nience, put in parenthesis in presenting the Tense-ending, but else- 
 where it is always written out in full. 
 
 ON THE PBESENT-STEM. 
 Present. 
 Sing. 1st Person, -6, 
 2d " -(i)s, 
 3d •' -(i)t, 
 Flur. 1st Person, -(i)mOs, 
 2d " -(i)tis, 
 3d " -u-nt. 
 
 4. By adding these endings to the stems rig-, rule, and 
 audl^, hear (stem-vowel ^- shortened before another Vowel, 
 and before -t in the third person Sing, of the Present), we 
 have — 
 
 PAETIAL PAEADIGM.— INDICATIVE MOOD, THIBD 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 -g-ba-m. 
 
 -a-m. 
 
 -e-ba-s. 
 
 -e-s, 
 
 -e-ba-t, 
 
 -6-t, 
 
 -e-ba-mus. 
 
 -e-mds. 
 
 -e-ba-tis. 
 
 -e-ti8, 
 
 -e-ba-nt. 
 
 -e-nt. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I rule. 
 
 / was ruling. 
 Singular. 
 
 I ahaU or will rule. 
 
 rgg-0, 
 
 r6g-e-ba-m, 
 
 r6g-a-m, 
 
 rSg-i-8, 
 
 r6g-€-ba-s, 
 
 rgg-e-s, 
 
 rgg-H 
 
 rSg-e-ba-t, 
 
 rgg-H 
 
108 INDICIATXVE ENDINGS OF VEEBS. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Fature. 
 
 / mle. 
 
 / was ruling. 
 Plural. 
 
 I shall or wUl rule. 
 
 rSg-i-miis, 
 
 rSg-e-ba-miis, 
 
 rSg-e-miia, 
 
 rgg-i-Hs, 
 
 rSg-e-ba-tts, 
 
 rSg-e-tls, 
 
 r6g-u-nt. 
 
 r6g-e-ba-nt. 
 
 rSg-e-nt. 
 
 INDICATIVE 
 
 MOOD, FOURTH 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I hear. 
 
 I was hearing. 
 Singular. 
 
 I shall or wUl hear. 
 
 audi-0, 
 
 audi-e-ba-m, 
 
 audi-a-m, 
 
 audi-S, 
 
 audi-e-ba-s, 
 
 audi-e-s, 
 
 audi-t, 
 
 audi-e-ba-t, 
 
 Plural. 
 
 audi-6-t, 
 
 audi-miis, 
 
 audi-e-ba-miis, 
 
 audi-e-mijs, 
 
 audi-tis, 
 
 audi-e-ba-tis, 
 
 audi-e-tts, 
 
 audi-u-nt. 
 
 audi-e-ba-nt. 
 
 audi-e-nt. 
 
 5. The endings of the tenses formed on the Perfect- 
 stem are the same in all Conjugations. The Perfect- 
 stem* is variously formed in the Third Conjugation ; in 
 the Fourth it is formed by adding -v to the Present-stem ; 
 as, Preseut-stem, awc^vy Perfect-stem, aitdw-/ e.g.,audlv-4, 
 I have heard. 
 
 6. The Supine-stem is formed, as in the other Conju- 
 gations, by adding -t to the Present-stem ; as, duc-gr6, 
 duc-i-ttm; audi-r6, audi-i-tim. In the Third Conjugation 
 this t is frequently changed into s for euphony ; as, c&- 
 dSrS, to fall; ca-s-ttm (for cSd-t-ilm, d dropped before t, 
 and t changed into s).f 
 
 * See App. VI., g 257. f Ibid; I 257, 2, and ? 260, 2. 
 
ADJECTIVES. 109 
 
 EXEECISE XXXIV. 
 § 76. Vocabulary. 
 
 vallum, -i, rampart. tertius, -a, -um (g 6 i, 1, b), third. 
 
 castelliim, -l, tower. de {Prep, with Abl.,, about, concerning; 
 fur, fur-is (§39, Sem. 2), thief. of time, at, in, during; de tertia vi- 
 
 f Inls, -is (g 33, Rem. 6, Bxo. 2), gilia, at or daring the third watch. 
 
 boundary, end. tergiim, -i, back. 
 vigllia, -ae, watch. 
 
 reg-8, reg-e-re, rex-i, reot-um, to rule. 
 
 due-8, duc-e-re, dux-i, duct-um, to lead. 
 
 e-duc-8, e-duc-e-re, e-dux-i, e-duct-um, to lead out, 
 
 re-duo-8, re-duo-e-re, re-diSx-i, r6-diiet-am, to lead bach. 
 
 yert-6, vert-e-re, vert-i, vers-um, to turn. 
 
 miiiii-S, muni-re, muuiv-i, munit-um, to fortify. 
 
 puni-S, puni-re, puniv-i, punit-um, to punish. 
 
 sci-5, sci-re, seiv-i, scit-iim, to knoio. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Detis omnift rSgit. ImpSratSr raagnfis civitates multas 
 rexit. Consttl annos multos (§ 66, 2) provinci&m rexSrSt. 
 Consiilis fratSr exercitus rei publicae ducSt. Princeps fgrox 
 plebSm omn6m Sd bellum ducebS,t. CaesSr de tertia vigilia 
 e castris exercitum ediixit. Marius nostros M victoria,m 
 duxgrat. Hostes tergS verterS. Fures latronesqu6 vultiim 
 regis timent. Imp6rat6r castrS, vallo fossaqu8 munivit. 
 Princeps prudens omnia, Helvetiorttm oppida, munigt. Ma- 
 rius consfil exercitum Sd urbSm rgduxft. Principes Thracum 
 castellS multa munient. Eex fures latronesquS puniebftt. 
 D5ininus pigros servos punit. Daviis nihil scit de legibiis 
 rei publicae. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The centurion has led back many of the brave soldiers. 
 All the horsemen of the enemy are turning their backs. 
 The boy rules his horse with the bridle. Our men knew 
 nothing about the journey of the enemy. Caesar was lead- 
 
 10 
 
110 PEONOUNS. 
 
 ing the whole army through the boundaries of the Aeduans, 
 The consul will lead out the army from the town during the 
 third watch. The great king will punish many thieves and 
 robbers. The prudent general had fortified his camp with a 
 rampart and ditch. One of the consuls has led the Romans 
 to victory. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 §77. 1. Pronouns may be divided into Substantive 
 and Adjective Pronouns. 
 
 2. Substantive Pronouns are Personal and Reflexive ; 
 as, ^g6, I ; tu, thou ; and (the Reflexive) sul, of himself, 
 herself, themselves. They are called Personal Pronouns, 
 because i.()6 denotes the speaker, and tu the person spoken 
 to. The Personal Pronoun denoting the person spoken 
 of is wanting in Latin, its place being supplied by the 
 Demonstratives fe, ilU, and hic, and, wliere reference is 
 made to the Subjed of the sentence or clause, by the ob- 
 lique cases of sul. 
 
 3. Adjective Pronouns embrace — 
 
 1. Possessive; as, metis, tufis, suiis, etc. 
 
 2. Demonstrative/ as, hie, istS, Is, illS, including the Intensive 
 ipsS, and idSm, the same. 
 
 3. Relative; as, qui, quae, qu6d. 
 
 4. Interrogative; as, quis or qui, quae, quid or qu6d. 
 
 5. Indefinite; as, aiiquls, ailquS, Sllquld, etc. 
 
 6. Correlatives, embracing Pronouns, Pronominal AdjectiveSj 
 etc., which answer to one another in form and meaning. 
 
 SUBSTANTIVE PRONOUNS. 
 § 78. The Substantive Pronouns are thus declintd : 
 
SUBSTANTIVE PEONOUXS. Ill 
 
 PEESONAIi. . EeFLEXITE. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 N. 6g5, 1. to, thou. '■ 
 
 G. mel, of me. tui, of thee. sui, of himself, her- 
 
 self, itself. 
 
 D. mUhi, to me. tibt, to thee. sibi, to himself, etc. 
 
 Aec. me, me. te, thee. se, himself, etc. 
 
 V. tu, thou. 
 
 Abl. me, with me. te, with thee. se, with himself, etc. 
 
 Plural. 
 N. nos, we. vos, ye or you. 
 
 /nostrum ) vestrdm | , - . ,, , 
 
 ^- lor nostri, j"-^''-'- or ^esM,]''-^^''- '"'' "-^ ^'^^'^'^'^^'O- 
 D. nobis, to tes. vobTs, to you. stbf, to themselves. 
 Ace. nos, MS. vos, you. se, themselves. 
 
 V. vos, 2/e or you. 
 
 Abl. nobTs, with w. . vobTs, with you. se, uiith themselves. 
 
 liemark 1. — The Nominatives tgS, tu, nos, vos are expressed 
 with the Verb only for the sake of emphasis or contrast; as, 
 igU tqultS, ambalas tu, I am riding, you are walking ; nos vScd- 
 bdmus, rlspondisUs vos, we were calling, ye answered. 
 
 Remark 2. — The enclitic -mU is annexed, for emphasis, to all 
 the forms of the Substantive Personal Pronouns (except tu, 
 nostriim, and vesirUm) ; and also to the forms of the Reflexive 
 (including its derivative suits); sese is frequently used for se, 
 being more emphatic; also iuti and tutim'&t for tu. 
 
 Remark 3. — The forms nostri, and vestri are properly the Gen- 
 itive Singular neuter of the Possessives nostir and vesttr, and 
 denote one whole, without Teference to its parts : they are al- 
 most always Objective; as, bdiUm vestri, hatred of (to) you. The 
 Subjective Genitive is generally represented by the Possessive 
 Pronoun; as, ddiUm vesirUm, your hatred (the hatred which 
 you feel). NostrUm and vestrdm are generally Partitive Gen- 
 itives ; as, qyHs vestrUm'f With omniiim always use nostrUm and 
 
112 SUBSTANTIVE PEONOUKS. 
 
 vestriim; as, nostrum omniiim pdrens, the parent of ua all, — not 
 nostrl omniiim. 
 
 Remark J^. — Swl is called Reflexive, because it refers to the 
 leading Subject of the sentence; as, putr sesl laud&t, the boy 
 praises himself. But where no ambiguity can arise, svl some- 
 times refers to some other word than the leading Subject ; as, 
 praedlcani conMhn sese laudart, they declare that the consul is 
 praising himself. 
 
 Remark 5. — ^The Substantive Personals take the gender of the 
 Nouns for which they stand. 
 
 EXEECISE XXXV. 
 
 §79. 1. Rule of Syntax. — If the Subject consist of 
 more than one, the Verb is Plural. If the Nomina- 
 tives be of different persons, the Verb talies the first per- 
 son rather than the second, and the second rather than 
 the tliird ; as, ^3 &, tit, (= nos) vdlemus, you and I are 
 well ; til &, CiG&rS (= vos) v&lells, you and Cicero are well. 
 
 2. Rule of Position. — The Preposition ewm is always 
 put after the Ablative of the Substantive Pronouns ; as, 
 mecwm, with me ; secum, with himself. 
 
 3. Rule of Position. — The Substantive Personal Pro- 
 nouns, when connected by Conjunctions to other words, 
 stand first ; as, tu &, rex, you and the king. 
 
 Egti always precedes ; as, ^6 U rex, the king and I ; 
 iffd St tu, you and I. 
 
 4. Rule of Position. — Contrasted words are put as 
 near together, or as far apart, as possible. Nos 
 gquttamiis, ambtilatfe vos; or, gqultamtts nos, vos am- 
 btilatfe. 
 
 5. Omnes In vico puh-l, all the boys in the village. 
 (Observe that In mco is placed between omnes and 
 
POSSESSIVE PEONOUNS. 113 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Nos * Squitabiintis, ambiilabitis vos. In urbS magn&m 
 multitudinSm hSminflm videbis. Eg6 6t p&tSr in regis 
 horto cenabimtts. Tu 6t Luciiis nobiscum manebitis. Eg6 
 fit CicerS puSris llbros dabamtis. Rex Thracfim tibi multum 
 auri dabit. Reginae nuntius mihi via,m monstrabit. Tu fit 
 Tullius meeiim ambtilabatis. Ancilia sibi m6diclna,m para- 
 vfirat. Imp6rat(5r fortis multos captives sectim ducSt. Con- 
 sul mercatores omnes ad se convScavSrat. Poetae carmina 
 audiemiis. Sapiens sese non laudat. Eg6 St tu apttd Tul- 
 liiim cenabamtts. Improbi sese timent. Pu6r bSniis in 
 urb8m nos duc6t. Daviis, Catonis serviis, sese cultro vul- 
 ngravit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 In a great city we see many men. (My) father and I 
 sustained the attack of the enemy many hours (§ 66, 2). In 
 a short time Lucius and I will have given books to all the 
 boys. I rode, youf walked. You and Tully will remain 
 many days with us. The general has given (to) one of the 
 soldiers much silver and gold. Wise men do not praise 
 themselves. We shall hear the songs of the great poet. 
 We have punished all the thieves in the province. I have 
 held the fierce bull by the horns. The wicked king does 
 not rule himself. Ye have walked five thousand paces 
 (§66,2). 
 
 ADJECTIVE-PERSONAL, OR POSSESSIVE, 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 80. Erom the Substantive Pi-onouns are derived the 
 Adjective-Personal, or Possessive, Pronouns, so called be- 
 
 * See model of Analysis 3 (Apo. X.). 
 
 f Ymi will be translated by tu when it refers to one ; by vos, when it 
 means more than one. . 
 
 10 * 
 
114 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 cause they are Adjectives and denote possession. They 
 
 ai'e — 
 
 From met, mens, meft, menm, my, mine. 
 
 (Voc. masc. mi, rarely metts.) (Like bdntbs.) 
 From tul, tufis, tuft, tuum, thy, thine, your. (Like bdnUs.') 
 From sul, snus, sua, suum, his, her, its, their, his oxvn, her 
 
 own, its own, their-cwn. (Like bdntis.) 
 From nostrl, nostfir, nostra, ndstrum, our, ours. (Like piil- 
 
 ehSr.') 
 From vestri, vestgr, vestrS, vestrnm, ynur, yours. (Like pul- 
 chSr.) 
 
 Bemark 1. — The emphatic suffixes -mit and -pti are sometimes 
 added to the Possessive Pronouns, especially in the Ablative Sin- 
 gular; rarely in the Genitive Singular and Accusative Plural. 
 The enclitic -ptl with the Ablative of suits is especially common ; 
 as, suopti pSridlrl, by its own weight. 
 
 Bemark S. — Suits, like sul, is always reilexive, referring to the 
 Subject of the sentence in which it stands. But a sentence may 
 be so constructed that the natural Subject becomes the Object; 
 thus, instead of htc a, mvibUs suls ex urbi ejectus est (this man 
 was expelled from the city by his own citizens), we find hunc 
 elves sul ex urbl Ijecerunt (his own citizens expelled this man 
 from the city). 
 
 Bemark S. — ^While sul refers to the leading Subject, su'&s refers 
 to the Subject of the sentence in which it stands. AriovistOi 
 rispondit nemlntm secHm i^nt sua perrdcie oontendissst, Ariovistus 
 replied that no one had contended with him without his own 
 destruction. (Here secHm refers to AriovistOs, and sua, to ne- 
 mtntm.) 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVI. 
 
 § 81. 1. Questions expecting the answer Yes or No are 
 asked in Latin by means of the interrogative particles 
 -n^, nonnS, num. 
 
 2. The enclitic -n^ asks for information, and is always 
 added to the emphatic word. It is not translated. The 
 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 115 
 
 answer may be Yes oi- No. Tu-nS scribfe ? are you writ- 
 ing? Patgr tuOs tibi Squiim dSdit-ng? has your father 
 given you a horse f 
 
 Eemark. — When added to the Verb, -nl is sometimes nearly- 
 equivalent to nonni, and expects an affirmative answer; as, 
 rti&minisfi-nl me dliUrl? you remember my saying, don't you? 
 
 3. Num. stands at the beginning of the sentence, and 
 expects the answer No. It is not translated. Ntlm tu 
 patr6m tuOm nScavisti? have you murdered your own 
 father f 
 
 4. NonnS (placed at or near the beginning of the sen- 
 tence) expects the answer Yes. NonnS 6pist6lam scrip- 
 sisti? have you not written the letter? 
 
 5. The answer Yes is expressed in Latin by repeating 
 the Predicate; as, "Have you seen the king? Yes." 
 
 VldisfZ-nS regSm? Vidi. No is expressed by repeating 
 the Predicate with^ won; "Have you seen the king? 
 No." Vldistt-nS regSmf Non vldi. Hence Questions 
 expecting the answer Yes or No are called Predicative 
 Questions. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 cubiculum, -i, hedcliamher. salas, salutis, safety. 
 
 cantus, -us, singing, tuae salutis causa, for the sake of 
 
 vox, v6c-is, voice. your own safety, 
 
 scrib-8, -6-re, scrips-T, script-um, to write. 
 
 con-scrib-5, -e-re, conscrips-I, C(5nscript-um, to levy, enroll, 
 
 reIinqu-8, -e-re, rellqu-i, relict-um, fq leave. 
 
 veni-5, -i-re, ven-i, vent-um, to come, 
 
 dormi-5, -i-re, dormlv-i, dormit-iim, to sleep. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Audls-nS vocSm pttris mei ? * NonnS magnituds 6pSri& 
 consiilgm sS-pientSm tardabit? NonnS filii impfiratoris in 
 
 * See model of Analysis 4 (App. X.). 
 
116 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS 
 
 castris dormiebant? Nfim serviis tufis totSni noctCm itn 
 silva mansit? Vidisti-n6 magntim 6vium grSgfim in S,gr6 
 meo? Tu-ng regSm nostriim vidisti? Nostri (§60, Rem.) 
 totum diSm impStum hostium sustinufirant. Vestrae siilutfa 
 causa vos mfinui. Tuae sillutis causa in urb6m te duxi. 
 Audies-ng cantum avium ? Num consttl tres iSgiones parvo 
 in vico conscripsit? PulchrS, puellS, manu sua gpistaiSm 
 scribet. V6ni6t-n6 in urb6m impgratSr magniis cflm omni- 
 biis copils ? Conscripsit-ng Caesar Iggiones duas in proviu- 
 cia ? ]Mat6r imprCba, suSm f ilia,m v6neno ngcavit. Mirius, 
 dux Romanus, omnes copias suas ex hibernis eduxSr3,t. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 Will the beautiful queen write the whole letter with her 
 own hand ? Will a kind father murder his own children ? 
 No. Will a wise king break the laws of the state? Shall 
 we sup with (dpUd) Tully's son-in-law ? Will not the brave 
 general lead the forces of the republic to victory? Yes. 
 Has your father seen my slave in his garden ? Were your 
 slaves carrying heavy burdens through the city ? Our kind 
 brother will advise us for the sake of our own safety. Will 
 not the good shepherd defend all his own sheep from dogs 
 and wolves? Yes. Thou shalt sleep in the little bedcham- 
 ber. Will a brave general leave his army in the boundaries 
 of the enemy ? We shall hear the voice of the general. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 § 82. 1. Demonstratives are so called because they are 
 used to point out; as, illS puSr, that boy ; haeo silvd,, this 
 forest. 
 
 2. They are illS, ist6, hic, Is (with their compounds), 
 and ips8, and are thus declined : 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 117 
 
 Ills, ilia, illud. 
 
 (Stem illo-, ilia-, illo-.) 
 
 Singular. ' 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 ISTom. ille, ilia, illdd. 
 
 Gen. illlus, illTus, illius, 
 
 Dat. illT, illi, illi. 
 
 Ace. ilium, illam, illud, 
 Voc. 
 Abl. 
 
 illo; 
 
 ilia; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 illo; 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 illi, 
 
 illae, 
 
 ilia, 
 
 illorum, 
 
 illarum, 
 
 illorSm, 
 
 illis, 
 
 illis. 
 
 illTs, 
 
 illos, 
 
 illas, 
 
 ilia. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Abl. illis. illis. illis. 
 
 !st6 (stem ist5-, ista-, istS-) is declined like iM. 
 
 
 
 Hic 
 
 1, haeo, hoc. 
 
 
 
 (S 
 
 Item ho-, h&-, ho-.) 
 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Kom. 
 
 hie, 
 
 
 haeo, 
 
 hoc. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 hujiis. 
 
 
 hujQs, 
 
 hujiis, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 huic, 
 
 
 huio, 
 
 huTc, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 hunc, 
 
 
 hanc, 
 
 hoc, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 hoc; 
 
 
 hac; 
 
 hoc: 
 
118 DEMONSTEATIVE PEONOUNS. 
 
 Plural. 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 hi, 
 
 hae, 
 
 haec. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 horum, 
 
 harum, 
 
 horum, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 his, 
 
 his, 
 
 his. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 hos, 
 
 has, 
 
 haec, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 his. 
 
 his. 
 
 his. 
 
 Remark 1. — Huio is to be pronounced as a monosyllable. As 
 a dissyllable it belongs to a late period. 
 
 Is, ea, Id. 
 
 (Stem -i and eo-.) 
 Singxdar. 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Nom. IS, ea, id. 
 
 Gen. ejus, ejus, ejus, 
 
 Dat. el, el, el, 
 
 Ace. eiiiTi, earn, Id, 
 
 Voc. 
 Abl. 
 
 60 ; 
 
 ea; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 e5; 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 11, 
 
 eae. 
 
 ea, 
 
 eorum, 
 
 earum. 
 
 eorum. 
 
 ils {or els), 
 
 ils {or eis). 
 
 ils {or eis), 
 
 eos, 
 
 eas, 
 
 ea. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Abl. lis {or eis). ils {or els). ils {or els). 
 
 Bemark Z. — The Dative and Ablative Plural in eis is not so 
 common as ils. In the Dative Singular the e is rarely short. 
 
 3. Jsfic (tsi?-cg) and illlo {iUS-cS) are more emphatic 
 than istS and UlS. Isdc is thus declined: 
 
DEMONSTEATIVE PEONOUNS. 
 
 119 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Norn. 
 
 istic, 
 
 istaec, 
 
 ist5c (or istiic), 
 
 Ace. 
 
 istunc, 
 
 istanc, 
 
 istoc {or istuc), 
 
 Abl. 
 
 istoc ; 
 
 istao ; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 istoc ; 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 
 istaec, 
 
 
 Ace. 
 
 
 
 istaec. 
 
 MUo is declined in the same manner. 
 4. The suffix -dim is annexed to fe, forming Id^, 
 "the same," which is thus declined: 
 
 IdSm, eadSm, idSm. 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 TdSm, 
 
 eadem, 
 
 Idem, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ejusdSm, 
 
 ejusdSm, 
 
 ejusdem, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 eidem, 
 
 erdgm, 
 
 eid€m, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 eundSm, 
 
 eandSm, 
 
 id6m, 
 
 Voc. 
 Abl. 
 
 
 
 
 e5dSm ; 
 
 eadgm; 
 
 eodSm ; 
 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ildSm, 
 
 eaedem, 
 
 eadgm, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 eorundSm, 
 
 earundgm, 
 
 eorundem, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 elsdgm {or iis- 
 
 elsdSm (or iis- 
 
 elsdem (or ils 
 
 
 d6m), 
 
 dgfti), 
 
 d6m), 
 
 Ace. 
 
 eosdgm, 
 
 easdgm, 
 
 eadem, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 AW. 
 
 elsdSm dpr iis- 
 
 elsdSm (or iis- 
 
 eisdSm (or iis 
 
 
 dSm). 
 
 d6m). 
 
 d6m). 
 
120 DEMONSTEATrVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXEECISE XXXVII. 
 Is, Idem. 
 
 § 83. 1. Is, that, is very often used as a Substantive- 
 Personal Pronoun [he, she, it, they, them, etc.) of the same 
 Gender with the Noun for which it stands ; as, OtoSrS 
 multos libros scrlpsU; eos (^. e. llbros) libent^- l&go; Cic- 
 ero has written many books ; I read them {i. e. the books) 
 with pleasure. 
 
 2. (a) His, lier, its, thSir, will be translated by suUs 
 when they refer to the Subject ; (6) if they refer to any 
 other word in the sentence, they will be translated by 
 the Genitive of the Demonstrative, Xs, e&, M. 
 
 (a) Hex filium suum ad se vScat, The king calls hia {own) son to him. 
 
 (6) Rex agricJSl^m St filium ejus The king calls the farmer and his 
 
 ad se vocat, (the farmer's) son to him. 
 
 Helvetii in Aeduorum fines co- The Helvetians had led over their 
 
 pias suds transduxerant^ eo~ forces into the country of the Aed- 
 
 rumquS agros populabantur, uans, and were laying waste their 
 
 (the Aeduans') fields. 
 
 Remark 1. — An idea is repeated emphatically by tt Is or ntc Is; 
 as, una In d&mo, H ea dngusid, in one house, and that a small one; 
 unUm proeliUm, «?c Id diffidtli, one battle, and that not a hard 
 one. 
 
 Remarh S. — Id&m is often equivalent to also in English ; as, 
 CioirS trUt oratdr idemqut phildsSphUs, Cicero was an orator, and 
 abo a philosopher [literally, and the same was a philosopher). 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 seriptSr, -or-is, writer. praestans, -ant-is, excellent^ distiii- 
 
 OvidiQs, -i, Ovid. 'guished. 
 
 Vergilius, -i, Vergil. libenter (Adv.), gladly, with pleasure. 
 
 Plats, -on-is, Plato. Dumnorix, -ig-is, Oumnorix. 
 
 g6i -8, ger-e-re, gess-I, gest-Um, to wage, carry on. 
 « mtend-S, oontend-e-rS, oontend-i, oontent-um, to strive, to fight, to contend. 
 
DEMONSTRATIVE PEONOUNS. 121 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 CaesSr liostes fttgavit, 6t ab iis * obsides multos postiilavit. 
 Romani ciim Gallis contenderunt, atqug in eoriim finibiis 
 bellfim gesserunt. Rex mercatores omnes ad se conv6cavit, 
 atqufe iis muMm auri (§ 73) d6dit. Consiilfe filia pulcher- 
 rima est ; earn in nrbS vidi. DumnSrix eo {that) lempSrg 
 (§66, 1) in Germania belltim gSrebat. In eodfim oppido 
 multi milites fuerunt. Tullifis eundgm serviira ad se v6ca- 
 bit. E6d6m die impgraWr clariis ad castrS, venit. Ovidifls 
 6t Vergiliiis sunt poetae clarissimi; SpgrS, eorflm libentgr 
 iSgimiis. Caesar Labienum 6t ejfis filiiim in Gallia rSli- 
 qugrat. Poetae 6pSra sua laudaut. Poeta clariis impSra- 
 torgm amat 6t ejils virtutgm laudabit. Patgr tuiis filiam 
 suam amat, et ejus libfiris multtim argenti (§73) dabit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 Cicero is a very distinguished orator ; we shall hear him 
 with pleasure. Plato is an excellent writer ; have you read 
 all his works ? Will the queen see her son and his daughter 
 in our city ? The king will not leave Tully and his (Tul- 
 ly's) son in the city. A wise man does not carry all his 
 gold with him. In one day Caesar led the whole army 
 through the boundaries of the Helvetians to Lake Leman- 
 nus ; on the same day he routed very great forces of the 
 enemy. At that time the rains had swollen all the rivers, 
 . and were keeping (eontlneriS) the Germans in their own 
 boundaries. The king loved his faithful slave, and gave 
 him a golden necklace. Have you seen the centurion's 
 beautiful daughter ? I saw her in the king's grove. Cae- 
 sar was a famous general, and also (§ 83, Rem. S) a distin- 
 guished writer. 
 
 * See model of Analysis 5 (A pp. X.). 
 11 
 
122 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 HiC, ISTE, IIjLB. 
 
 §84. 1, Hic, HAEC, HOC, this, points out a thing near 
 the speaker in place or time, and is sometimes called the 
 Demonstrative of the First Person; as, Mo HbSr, this book 
 (near me) ; hoc die, on this day. 
 
 2. IsTE, ISTA, istOd, this, that, points out a thing near 
 the person spoken to, and is sometimes called the Demon- 
 strative of the Second Persov ; as, istS ItbSr, that book- (of 
 yours). 
 
 3. IllE, illX, illGd, that, points out a thing remote 
 from the speaker, and is often called the Demonstrative of 
 the Third Person; as, illS IXbSr, that book (yonder). 
 
 Remark 1. — Sto — ills, and illi — hic, are translated the former 
 — the latter, the one — the other, etc.; as, CaesJir Sr3,t Clcfironi 
 aequalis : Mc impfiratOr clartts ; illi praestans 6r3,t oratOr ; Cae- 
 sar was contemporary with Oicero; the former was a famous gen- 
 eral; the latter, a distinguished orator. But hic generally stands 
 after illi, and refers to the latter person or thing, ill& to the former. 
 
 Remark S. — Hie and ills are sometimes used like ?s as Sub- 
 stantive Personals (he, him, etc.), though generally more em- 
 phatic. 
 
 Remarlc S. — Htc often refers to what follows; as, Oallor&m 
 oppugndtiS est haec, the mode of attack among the Gauls is as 
 follows. Eli is sometimes used in the same way. 
 
 Remark J^.. — Isti often implies contempt; as, is(& hSmS, that 
 fellow. 
 
 Remark 5. — III& often points out something well known or 
 distinguished; as, ilK PUt&cus, the well-known Pittacus. 
 
 Remark 6. — H'c is compounded of the stem hd- and the De- 
 monstrative enclitic -ci {here); hence the -c, retained (after 
 dropping -8) in most forms, but lost in others. In early Latin 
 we find the full form, htcS, etc. Often, however, -cS is added for 
 emphasis to the forms that have not preserved the -c; huJtiseS, 
 hosci, etc. Before the interrogative enclitic -nS, -cS is changed 
 to d; hicinii, hosdlni. (See also |82, 3.) 
 
INTENSIVE PRONOUN. 123 
 
 EXERCISE XXXVIII. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Hie ser\ &s dominttni ama.t. Haec gpistSlS, sSrorSm meStn 
 delectabit. Hoc belliim civilS griivissimum fit atrocissimtim 
 est. , Hie puSr bSnus, illS est iniprobfis. Hie mil6s omnium 
 est fortissimus. IstS tuils gquus pulchriira a,uima,l est. Ista 
 tua oratis rSra publicum servavit. Ist6-nS nos puniSt ? IllS 
 bos magna, cornuS, habSt. lUos milites in eastrS, ducemtis. 
 Equites omnes a,d illiid oppidum festinaut. Hie past5r b3- 
 atis grSgSm servabit. 
 
 Tmnslate into Latin. 
 
 This gpod master gives food to all his slaves. That dove 
 of yours will fly through the thick woods. Those dogs of 
 yours will frighten all the boys in the village. That fierce 
 lion has torn in pieces many sheep and cows. This excel- 
 lent orator will delight the common people with his speech. 
 That maid-servant of yours will prepare medicine for the 
 queen and her (the queen's) daughters. Will you give that 
 beautiful horse to my father ? Has the king punished all 
 the thieves and robbers in this city? These horsemen will 
 urge on their horses with spurs. 
 
 INTENSIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 § 85. The Demonstrative Pronoun ipsfi [Is and the 
 emphatic suffix -psS), IPSX, ipsOm, himself, herself, itself, 
 is sometimes lalled Intensive, because it makes the word 
 to -which it is added more emphatic; as, regSm ipsUm 
 vidi, I have seen the king himself; tn ipsis flumlnte ripis, 
 on the very banks of the river. 
 
124 
 
 INTENSIVE PRONOUN. 
 
 
 IpsS: 
 
 , ipsa, ipsQm. 
 
 
 
 (Stem ipso-, ipsft-, ipso-.) 
 
 
 
 
 Singular. 
 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ips6, 
 
 ipsa. 
 
 ipsiim. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ipsius, 
 
 ipsius, 
 
 ipsius. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ipsT, 
 
 ipsi, 
 
 ipsi, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ipsQm, 
 
 ipsam, 
 
 ipsQm, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 ipse, 
 
 ipsa. 
 
 ipsQm, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ips5; 
 
 ipsa; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 ipso; 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fein. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 ipsT, 
 
 ipsae, 
 
 ipsa, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ipsorum. 
 
 ipsamm, 
 
 ipsoriim 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ipsis. 
 
 ipsTs, 
 
 ipsTs, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ipsos. 
 
 ipsas. 
 
 ipsa. 
 
 Voc. 
 
 ipsi. 
 
 ipsae. 
 
 ipsS, 
 
 AbJ. 
 
 ipsTs. 
 
 ipsls. 
 
 ipsls. 
 
 B®" In early writers the form ipsUs is often found. 
 
 Remark 1. — Ipst, when used reflexively, agrees with the Subr 
 jeot, if that is to be made especially prominent ; as, tgS me ipsi 
 lauds, (literally) I myself praise me {i. e. I do the praising my- 
 self; others do not do it)i On the other hand, ipsg agrees with 
 the Object if that is to be made especially prominent; as, me 
 ips&m laudo, I praise myself {i. e. I do not praise other people). 
 
 Remark 2. — The oblique cases of ipsg are used reflexively for 
 the forms of svl and suUs, to avoid ambiguity or for the sake of 
 emphasis ; as, qui In ipsorUm lingua, Celtae appellant&r, who in 
 their own language are called Celts. 
 
 EXERCISE XXXIX. 
 § 86. 1. Rule of Syntax. — ^The Infinitive is often used 
 as a neuter Noun in t^e Nominative or Accusative, and 
 may be the Subject of a Verb ; as, graium est tedOm atn- 
 
INTENSIVE PRONOUN. 125 
 
 bUldr^, it is pleasant to walk with you. {Subject Infin- 
 itive,) 
 
 2. Rule of Syntax, — The Infinitive is used as a co?/i- 
 plement (filling up) with certain Verbs expressing an 
 incomplete idea ; as^ pdrdt beMin g^^% he is preparing, 
 to wage war. {Complementary Infinitive. See § 181.) 
 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 de (Prep, with Abl.), ahout, concern- vineulum, -i, cliain. 
 
 ii^g- ferreus, -a, -um, of iron, iron, 
 
 "de se ipso, ahou* one's sel/j about iraeundia, -ae, hasti/ temper, 
 
 himaelf. orbis, -is (^33), circle. 
 
 Alexander, -dri, Alexander. orbis terrarum, the world {the circle 
 
 Macedonia, -ae, Macedonia. of the couutrieB). 
 
 inter (Prep, with Ace), between, semper (Adv.), always. 
 
 among. , facinus, -or-is, deed, crime, 
 
 inter se, among ihcmBelveB, with one sua (§ 60, Rem.), hie {own) things, hit 
 another. {own) property, 
 
 praedic-5, -a-rS, -av-i, at-um, to tell, to hoaat. 
 instru-8, -5-rS, instrux-ij instruct-tim, to draio up. 
 constitu-S, -e-re, constitu-i, constitut-iim, to determine. 
 ascend-8, -e-rS, ascend-i, ascens-um, to ascend, 
 vinci-S, -i-re, vinx-i, vinct-um, to bind, 
 vine-S, -e-re, vic-i, vict-um, to conquer. 
 
 Translate into_ IjkSlish. 
 
 1' 
 
 Eg6 ipsS totSm noctSm vigilavL Eex ips8 exercitiim 
 triplici S-cie instruxSrat. NonnS reglna ipsS, in hac domo 
 dormivit ? DScima, ipsS, iSgiS magnltudingm pgricttli time- 
 bat. Tu-n6 te ipsg laudabis ? Me ipsg non laudabD. PoetS, 
 se ipsS laudabat. TurpS est de se ipso praedicarS. Patfir 
 ips6 6t filiiis suus de Sgri finibiis contendunt. Alexander 
 magnus, rex Ma,c6d6niae, orbgm terrariim vinc6rS paravSr&t. 
 AlexandSr se ipsiim non'rexit. ImpSratOr magniis su&m ira- 
 cundiSm non rSgit. Diificillimttm (§ 67, 3, Rem. 2) est mon- 
 tSm altum ascendgrg. Facinus (§ 67, 3) est clv6m Eomaniim 
 11 * 
 
126 EELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 vinciiS. sapiens sempSr se ipsfi rggit. Helvetii suS. omniS 
 secfim portabant. 
 
 ' Translate into Latin. 
 
 Our king has determined to conquer the whole world. 
 Your king is a boy. The common people have bound our 
 king with chains. These soldiers are always boasting about 
 themselves. It is not very difficult to ascend a hill. Noth- 
 ing is more difficult than to rule a hasty temper. Have you 
 read the works of Cicero, the distinguished orator ? Will a 
 father and a son contend with one another about an eagle's 
 wing? No. Am I myself praising myself ? Has not this 
 fellow (§ 84, Rem. 4) always praised himself? It is a great 
 crime to kill (one's) father. The wicked judge is preparing 
 to bind Roman citizens. The common people will bind the 
 judge himself. The greatness of this work will hinder Cae- 
 sar himself The general has determined to put three legions 
 into winter quarters. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 § 87. A. 1. The Pronoun qui, quae, qu8d {who, which) 
 is called Relative because it refers to some vv^ord or phrase 
 going before, called the Antecedent. 
 
 Qui, quae, qufid. 
 
 (Stem quo-, quS-, qu8-.) 
 Singular. 
 
 Maso. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Nom. qui, quae, quSd, 
 
 Gen. cujus, cujus, cujus, 
 
 Dat. cui, cuT, cul, 
 
 Ace. quSm, quam, qu5d, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 Abl. quo ; qua ; quo ; 
 
EELATIVE PEONOUNS. 127 
 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fern. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. qui. 
 
 quae. 
 
 quae, 
 
 Gen. quorum, 
 Dat. quibus, 
 
 quarum, 
 qutbus, 
 
 quorum, 
 quTbQs, 
 
 Ace. quos, 
 Voc. 
 
 quas. 
 
 quae, 
 
 Abl. quibus. 
 
 quibus. 
 
 quibQs. 
 
 1 1. — Cui is to be pror 
 
 lounced as a monosyllable. As a dissyl- 
 
 lable it belongs to a late period. 
 
 2. The other Relatives are qu8t, quails, quarMs, qu6- 
 tUs, and their compounds, with the general Relatives 
 quieumquS or qulcunquS and quisquts, compounds of qui. 
 
 3. The suffix -ounquS or -cumquS (derived from quis- 
 qu&) has the force of -ever or -soever. QuicunquS, who- 
 ever, whosoever, whatever, whatsoever, is declined \\k&qul: 
 
 quiounquS, quaecunquS, quodcunquS, 
 
 cujusounquS, cujuscunquS, cujuscunquS, 
 cuicunquS, culcunqug, cuiounquS, etc. 
 
 Note 2. — The sufEx -cunquS may be used with any of the Eelatives. 
 Sometimes it is separated from the Relative by the interposition of an 
 unemphatie word ; as, qua re cunqui. (Such separation of compound 
 words is called imesis.) 
 
 4. Quisqufe, whoever, is thus declined : 
 
 Singidar. 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Nom. quisquis, quidquTd (or quioquTd), 
 
 Ace. quemqugm, quidquid {or quicquTd), 
 
 Abl. quoquo, quaqua (late), quoquo. 
 
 Masc. 
 Nom. quiqui, 
 Dat. quKbijsquTbQs. 
 
 Plural. 
 
128 EELATIVE PEONOUNS. 
 
 Remark 1 — The Demonstratives, when used as Pronouns at 
 all (i. e. when they stand for a Noun), have Antecedents, with 
 which they agree in gender and number; as, Cicero multoa 
 libros scripM; eos (i. e. I'bros) llbentir llg9. Puelld est pulcher- 
 rimd; eSm (i. e. puelldm) in horto vldl. 
 
 , Bemark S. — Qui is sometimes used for the Ablative Singu- 
 lar of all genders, rarely for the Ablative Plural. It is espe- 
 cially common in combination with the Preposition c&m; as, 
 qulc&m for qudcUm or qudc&m; also as an adverbial interrog- 
 ative; as, qui, how, in what wayf e.g. qui convinlt? how is it suit- 
 able f 
 
 Remark S. — Queis (monosyllable) and qu'is are sometimes used 
 for gw?6«s (rarely in Cicero, but often in other authors of the 
 classical period). 
 
 EXERCISE XL. 
 B. 1. Propositions are either Principal or Dependent. 
 A Principal Proposition makes complete sense when 
 standing alone ; a Dependent Proposition does not make 
 complete sense alone, but must be connected with another 
 Proposition. 
 
 2. A Proposition introduced by a Relative Pronoun is 
 called a Dependent Relative Proposition. 
 
 3. Every Relative Proposition is an Adjective, limit- 
 ing the Antecedent. Thus, "The boy who studies" is 
 equivalent to the " The studiovis boy." 
 
 4. Bule of Syntax. — The Relative Pronoun agrees 
 with the Antecedent in gender, number, and person ; 
 but the case depends upon the construction of the Rel- 
 ative Proposition; ag, 6g6 qui scribo, / who write; vos 
 qui scribitis, you who write; puelM qudm vidi, the girl 
 whom / saw. 
 
 (Here qu&m is. Singular, feminine, third person, because puellS, is 
 the same ; but Accusative, because it is the Object of tho Transitive 
 Verb, mdi.) 
 
RELATIVE PEONOUiJS. 129 
 
 EefmarJc 1. — The Eelative takes the case which the Antece- 
 dent would have in the same circumstances, and frequently 
 agrees with the Antecedent repeated ; as, puelld, quUm puelldm 
 vidi, the girl, which girl I saw. 
 
 5. Rule of Position. — The Preposition e^m is annexed 
 to the Ablative Phiral of the Relative qui, and some- 
 times also to the Ablative Singular; as, qMbusd&m. 
 
 6. Rule of Position. — The Relative generally stands at 
 the beginning of the Relative Sentence, after the Ante- 
 cedent, and as near the latter as possible ; but for the 
 sake of emphasis the Relative Sentence is often placed 
 first. 
 
 7. In general expressions the forms of & are often 
 used merely as the antecedent of a Relative clause ; as, 
 fe stulttis est qui de se ipso praedtc&t, he is foolish who 
 boasts of himself. Hlc is often used in the same way. 
 Is is emphatic when it stands at the beginning of the 
 Principal Sentence. 
 
 8. When the Antecedent is indefinite, it is often omit- 
 ted altogether ; as, qui terti&m partem inodlunt Galll ap- 
 pellantUr, (those) who inhabit the third part are called 
 Gauls. (Compare the English, "Who steals my purse 
 steals trash ;" i. e. any one who, etc.) 
 
 9. As an Adjective, when the Noun which it limits is 
 omitted, becomes a Noun (§ 60, Rem.), so an Adjective 
 Proposition becomes a Noun when the Antecedent is omit- 
 ted. Qui — dncShnt, above, is the Subject of appellantur. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 incSl-S, e-re, incolu-i, to inhabit. 
 divId-(S, e-re, divia-I, divis-um, to separate, divide, 
 . continenter (Adv.), continually. 
 
 trans. (Prep, with Ace), acroes, over, heyoid. 
 
130 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Omnis Galliae sunt partes tres, quarfim* unim inv.61unt 
 Belgae. Trans Rheniim inc6lunt Germani, quibusciim Bel- 
 gae coutinentgr belliim ggrunt. Flumgn Ehentts, qui Sgrflm 
 Helvetiiim a Germanis dividit, latisslmtis est atquS altissi- 
 mils. JurS, qui iina ex partS Helvetios continSt, mons est 
 altissimtis. Caesar ISgiones duas, quae in Gallia hiSmabant, 
 ex hibernis eduxit. Puellae pulchrae, quas Jn horto vidisti, 
 filiae sunt Cic6ronis. Rgcentes imbres, qui fluminS, omnia, 
 auxerunt, 6piis nostriim tardabunt. PuSr cui mSgistSr 1!- 
 brtim dSdit, optimus est puSrorflm. AgricSlS, cujiis c3,ms 
 ancill2,m terruit, in urb6m venit. Helvetii eos, qui leges rei 
 publicae viSlant, igni crgmaut. Qui suJi omnia seciim portJlt, 
 nou sapiens est. Qui sese non rggit, est-nS is vir magniis ? 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Caesar will hasten into the province with three legions 
 which he has levied in Gaul. The centurion has divided 
 his field into three parts, one of which he will give to his 
 son. Have you showed to your father the letter which the 
 queen wrote with her own hand ? The general had placed 
 in winter-quarters the legions which he had levied in the 
 province. The great river which we saw is the Rhine. Will 
 not the general slay the robber who lives in the forest ? Is 
 not he (fa) a fool who holds ithiere) a fierce bull by the 
 horns ? The fields through which we were walking are very 
 fertile. (He) who boasts about himself is a fool. (He) who 
 conquers himself is a brave man. 
 
 INTERROGATIVES. 
 § 88. 1 . The Interrogatives are used in asking ques- 
 tions. They are — 
 
 * See model of Analysis 5 (App. X.). 
 
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 131 
 
 Quis (Substantive)?) „„ . „, . „ 
 rt..ifL- *■ N5 iWhof Which? What! 
 Qui (Adjective) ? I 
 
 Quisnam (Substantive) ? [ (Sponger than qui. and qu€.) 
 
 ^ „ < Who then' Which then? What then? Who 
 
 Qumam (Adjective)? [ ^^^^, ^j^_ 
 
 Cter (Substantive and Adjective) ? Which of the two ? (g 56.) 
 
 Also the following used adjectively : 
 
 Quot? How many? (Indeclinable.) 
 
 Quotiis, -a, -nm? What? (in number; as, QuSta hora? What 
 
 o'clock?) 
 QnaUs, -6 ? Of what kind ? 
 
 Quantns, -a, -um? Sow great? How large? 
 Quantulns, -a, -um? How email? (Diminutive.) 
 Cfljiis? Whose? 
 Cujas (cujatis)? Of what country ? 
 
 BeTnark 1. — Qui and quln&m are declined like the Relative qui. 
 They are almost always Adjectives, but sometimes Substantives. 
 
 RemarJc 2. — Qidi and quisn&m are usually Substantives, but 
 sometimes Adjectives. QuU is always a Substantive. 
 
 2. Quis (quf) is thus declined : 
 
 (Stem quo-, qua-, quo-.) 
 Singular. 
 
 Neut. 
 quid (qu5d), 
 cujQs, 
 cui, 
 quid (quod), 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 quis (qui), 
 
 quae, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 cujus. 
 
 cujus. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 CUT, 
 
 cui, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 quSm, 
 
 quam, 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 quo; 
 
 qua; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 qui, 
 
 quae. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 quorum, 
 
 quarum, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 quTbijs, 
 
 quTbiis, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 quos. 
 
 quas, 
 
 VOG. 
 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 quTbiis. 
 
 quibQs. 
 
 quo; 
 
 Neut. 
 
 quae, 
 
 quorum, 
 
 quTbiis, 
 
 quae, 
 
 quTbQs. 
 
132 INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Note. — Eemember that, of these forms, quis (generally) aud quid 
 are Substantives; qui and quSd, Adjectives. Sometimes the forms 
 quis and quim are feminine. 
 
 3. The Genitive cujtis, whose? is used in prae- Augustan 
 writers, and once in Vergil, as an Adjective agreeing 
 with the Noun, which it limits in gender, number, and 
 case; as, cujiim pfcfis est hocf whose flock is this? It 
 is thus declined : 
 
 Singular, Plural. 
 
 Masc. Fem. Neut. Fem. 
 
 Nom. cujus, cuja, cujum, cujae. 
 
 Ace. cujum, cujam, 
 
 Abl. cuja. 
 
 Remark 3. — The Interrogatives are often exclamatory; as, 
 Quantd sunt praemid viriutlil How great are the rewards of 
 virtue ! 
 
 EXEKCISE XLI. ' 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Quis tecfim in horto ambulaba,t ? Quae rggiS est Gallia 
 (§70, 2) fSraciOr? Qui constil est CicSronfi prudentiCr? 
 Qufim hSminSm vidisti quS,m Balbum (§70, 1) turpiorSm? 
 Qua in terra est poeta Vergilio praestantiSr ? Cuja, ancillS, 
 est haec? Eeginae. Qui puSr calcSm Davi l&pidS vulnS- 
 ravit ? Quid argenti (§ 73) ftpud te hJlbes ? QuinSni rex 
 tibi auriim dabit, Dav6? QuisnSm te vScavit, Tulli? (§ 24. 
 Refill. S.) Qui past6r prudens 6ves hi6m6 tondebit ? Cujiis 
 canis b6v6m metim momordit ? Qua in civitatfi impSratSr 
 iSgiones in hibernis collOcabit? UtSr pu6r6riim Balbum 
 lapidg vuli>Sravit? 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 Who, pray, will show (to) us the way through the king's 
 forest? What enemy will sustain the attack of our war- 
 like soldiers? What is baser than a lie? Who gave (to) 
 
INDEFINITES. 133 
 
 you that (§ 84, 2) beautiful horse of yours? "What citizens 
 were with (^dpUd) Cicero? Who pray has called together 
 all these merchants ? Which of you slept iu the little bed- 
 chamber ? What general will leave his army in the enemy's 
 country (fints)? How great a war will the king wage with 
 the nearest states ? How many legions are (there) in the 
 province ? 
 
 INDEFINITES. 
 
 § 89. 1, The Indefinites are Adjective words frequently 
 used as Nouns (§ 60, Mem.), They are — 
 
 Aliquis (Substantive), some one (I do not know who) ; some one or other ; 
 any one; neuter, aomethingj any thing; stronger than the simple quia, 
 
 Aliqui (Adjective), some (I do not know what); any, 
 
 Qulddm (Substantive), some one, a certain one (implying that I know 
 who, though I may not wish to say) ; Plural, some (unemphatic) j neu- 
 ter, something. 
 (Adjective), a certain, some. 
 
 Quispiflm (nearly equivalent to allqnls), some one, any one, some, any. 
 
 Qnlvis, "» (Substantive), any one (whore all are included), any one you 
 
 Qullib^t) / please; neuter, anything you please. 
 (Adjective), any, any you please. 
 
 Quisqu3,in, any one (where all are excluded); neuter, any thing. Almost 
 always a Substantive, and used in negative sentences or sentences imply- 
 ing negation. Any (where all are excluded) is expressed adjectivally 
 by ullQs. 
 
 Qnis (Substantive), i any, some; (as a Noun), any one, some one; neuter, 
 
 Qui (Adjective), j any thing, something; — used especially in Relative 
 Sentences, and after si, ne, nisi, nUrn, and such Relative forms as qtianto, 
 quo, and cum {qnUm); al&o after the prefix ec~; as, si quia, ne qnis, 
 ecquza, numquts. Except in these combinations the Indefinite qnis is 
 rare. AHqma after ne, si, or a Relative, is more emphatic than qnis ; 
 SI qnis, if any onej si uliqina, if some one. 
 
 Quisque (Adjective), each; (Substantive), each one, every one. 
 
 Unusquisque (stronger than quisque), each, each onej every one. 
 
 Aliquot (indeclinable), some, a considerable number. 
 
 AliquantUSj -ft, -umj somewhat grent, conaiderahle, 
 
 2. All these (< scept quisquUm, dl1.qudf, and dltquantUs) 
 
 12 
 
134 INDEFINITES. 
 
 have qndd and qutd in the nciter : tlie qu5d forma are 
 Adjectives j the quid forms, Nouns. 
 
 3. The Indefinite quTs (qui) is thus declined : 
 
 (Stem quo-, qu9-, 4u5-.) 
 
 SingvJar, 
 Maso. Fem. Neut. 
 
 Nom. quis (qui), qua (or quae), quid (qu5d). 
 
 Gen. 
 
 cujus. 
 
 cujus. 
 
 cujus, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 CUT, 
 
 cul, 
 
 cul. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 qu6m. 
 
 quam. 
 
 quid (quod), 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 quo; 
 
 qua; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 quo; 
 
 
 Masc. 
 
 Fem. 
 
 Neut. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 qui, 
 
 quae, 
 
 qua (or quae), 
 
 Gen. 
 
 quorum, 
 
 quarum, 
 
 quorum. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 quTbus, 
 
 qutbus. 
 
 quibus, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 quos, 
 
 quas. 
 
 qua (or quae), 
 
 Voc. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Abl. 
 
 quibus. 
 
 quibiis. 
 
 quibus. 
 
 4. Observe that the Adjective form qui has qxme or qud 
 (latter more common) in the fem. Nominative Sing., and 
 Nom. and Accus. neuter Plural ; qu6d for qiMd in neuter 
 Nom. and Accus. Singular. Indef. qui, whether Substan- 
 tive or Adjective, is used only after si, ne, vM,, and nUm. 
 
 5. Aliquls, both in its Substantive and Adjective form 
 ipMqut), is declined like g-wfe (qui) ; except that it always has 
 aUqud for fem. Nom. Sing.* and neut. Plural, and in the 
 Dative and Ablative Plural oftener dllquls than dltqulhils. 
 
 Note. — As nemi sometimes stands with a Noun instead of the Adj. 
 nuUUs, so tWlcp. Is is sometimes used instead of iUtqui; as, Oilquis dSus, 
 
 * AHqxme once in Lucretius. 
 
INDEFINITES. 135 
 
 (HiijuXs mit&s, etc. Only in the neuter Singular is the difference be- 
 tween Substantive and Adjective forms observed. 
 
 6. QuilibSt, qmrns, and qmddm are dec] ined like the Rela- 
 tive qui, with the addition of the quid form in the neuter: 
 
 quilibSt, quaelibgt, quodlibSt (or quidlibSt) ; 
 
 cQjuslifbSt, etc. 
 
 In the forms of qmdUm, m passes into n before d; as, 
 quend&m, quand&m, quorund&m. 
 
 7. QuisquS, quispi&m, and quisquWm are declined like 
 the Interrogative quis, the first two having the quM form : 
 
 quisquS, quaequS, quodquS (^or quidqug), and 
 cujusquS, etc. [quioquS ; 
 
 quispiam, quaepiam, quodpiSm, quidpiam, and 
 cujuspiam, etc. [quippiam. 
 
 Qwisqudm, being almost invariably a Substantive, wants 
 the feminine, or rather the masculine includes the fem- 
 inine; but quamqudm is found in Plautus : 
 
 quisquam, quidquam (or quicquam), 
 
 cujusquam, etc. 
 No Plural. 
 
 8. UnusquisquS is used only in the Singular, and both 
 unus and quisquS are declined (and sometimes separated 
 by intervening words) : 
 
 unusquisque, unaquaequS, unumquodquS (or quidquS), 
 unluscujusque, etc. 
 
 EXEECISE XLII. 
 § 90. 1 . After quiddm, ex with Ablative is generally 
 used instead of a Partitive Genitive ; as, quidam ex mi- 
 litibtis, a oertrin one of the soldiers. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Tn urbSm pervenire, to reach the Catilina, -ae, Catiline (a Soman noble- 
 city. man^ 
 
136 INDEFINITES. 
 
 nSque (Conj.), neither, nor. aliqmd novl ( Oen. Sing. neat. o/n5vBs), 
 
 occasus, -us, sluing, some news (§73). 
 
 Bol, sol-is, aim. hereditas, -tat-is, an inheritance. 
 
 soils occasu (§ 66, 1), at anneet. pecuniS., -ae, money. 
 
 mitt-8, -e-re, mis-i, miss-um, to aend. 
 
 per-v6ni-8, -i-re, perven-i, pervent-um, to come through, arrive, come in. 
 
 defen-d8, -e-re, defend-i, defens-iim, to defend. 
 
 disced-8, -e-re, discess-i, discess-um, to depart. 
 
 occid-8, e-re, occid-i, occis-um, to kill, cut down. 
 
 relinqu-S, relinqu-e-re, rSliqu-i, relict-um, to leave. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Clcfiro quenda,m Gallfim M Caesa,r6m misit. Aliquis 
 soils occasu in dSmttm tuSim venit. Quid&m ex milJtibiis 
 se suftquS (§ 60, Rem.) ab hostibtts, defendebant. MatSr 
 bSnignJl unicuiqu6 libgroriim (§ 58, 3) suorfim d&t cibttm. 
 Nostri copias hostiOm fflgaverg, n6qu6 quisquiim omnium 
 (§ 58, 3) in oppidiim pervenit. Luciiis in urbfi ^liquid n6vi 
 audigt. Rex filiabiis suis a,liqua,m partfim regni dibit. Mi- 
 litfis Ca,tilinae exercitttm rei publicae non timuerunt, nSquS 
 quisquam ex castris discessit. Nonng quisquS sese defendlt? 
 Quodvis animal c6r habSt. Hereditas est pgcunia, quae 
 mortS aiicujiis ad quempiam pervenit jurg. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The faithful slaves will watcb all night, nor will any one 
 leave his place. Some one has wounded one of our horse- 
 men with a javelin. Caesar sent a certain one of the Gal- 
 lic ( Gallus) horsemen to Cicero's camp. The cruel chiefs will 
 kill some of the prisoners at sunset. The general will hear 
 some news at sunset. The master gave (to) each of the boys 
 a beautiful book. Not every one {any one you please) will 
 see our king. 
 
 COERELATIVES. 
 
 §91. Pi onouns, ProDominal Adjectives and Adverbs, 
 which correspond to one another in form an 1 meaning, 
 are called Correlatives. Thus: 
 
CORRELATIVES. 
 
 137 
 
 - _ ^ Si 
 
 " g ". I" 
 
 I i »• P 
 
 e 3 SI 
 
 o< iS, s. S' s a S 
 "' = =-"• ~ ~ I S 
 
 g. 
 s 
 
 "»' 
 
 B 
 
 a 
 
 g< p 
 
 g-g 
 
 8 2 
 
 >Q tc »a a e<- lO 
 
 a ff e t3 fjr c 
 
 OC p g 0< 931 pi Pi 
 
 
 , 0( g to 
 
 pi J*' 
 
 ;s p f 
 
 .11 
 
 M " " 
 
 ■^i i 
 
 
 A »o A c: I 
 
 , C £ C C:l I 
 [ o( pi oi pi I 
 
 B s- g S< 
 
 as ? 
 
 a B 
 
 ■fl 
 
 1 ? = 
 
 I s I 
 
 §■■3 I 
 
 « P (to 
 
 B -, 
 ■5, 3 
 
 Si 
 
 g-" a 
 &f i. 
 
 •a ^ ^ s 
 
 g II. 
 
 ^- 
 
 i i 
 
 t r 
 
 PC at pt PC pr p3( p( 
 
 Mt ^ HC MC MC >-■( MC l^t 
 
 p S. o< tai oi Ed P' o( 
 
 S- "5. £r g S ^ * • 
 
 t^ ? P i I 
 
 12* 
 
138 CORRELATIVES. 
 
 Remark. — Except Is and its derivatives, each set is ftrmed on 
 a single root — t- being the Demonstrative prefix, qu- the Inter- 
 rogative and Relative, and Uli- the Indefinite. The Indefinite 
 Relatives have a reduplicated form or add -cumqui. Thus, 
 t-antHs, quantHs-cumqut, till-quani&s. 
 
 EXERCISE XLIII. 
 § 92. Vocabulary. 
 
 vSIuptaa, voluptat-is, pleasure. 
 
 praemiiiin, -I, reward. 
 
 timSr, -or-is, feaVf panic. 
 
 aliquantum agri, a cortaiderable piece of ground, 
 
 Bententia, -ae, opinion. 
 
 opera, -ae, labor, pains. 
 
 tanta opSra, so great labor. 
 
 tantum operae, so much {of) labor. Tantus, meaning so great, agrees with 
 the Noun : meaning so much, it is neuter, and followed by the Parti- 
 tive Genitive. QuantHs is used in the same way. 
 
 Quails est dSminils, talis est servils, aa is the master, so is the slave; or, est 
 being omitted, 
 
 Quulis d5minils, talis serrds, the slave is such as the master is. 
 
 Translate into English, 
 
 Quantiim vSluptatfe virtus praebgt ? Tantiis timSr cen- 
 tiiriones occflpavit. Qu6t homines, t6t sententiae. Quantfis 
 est agricSlae taurfis? QuantS, sunt hiijiis bSvis cornua,? 
 Qu6t ISgiones in castris sunt? Qu6t hSmines, t6tid6m 
 animi. Qualis est imp6rat6r, tales sunt milites. Quanta 
 praemia virtus hSbSt? Quantiim* OpSrae poetae carmin- 
 Ibfis suis dant! Kex huic servo ^llquantum auri dSdit 
 
 * See 2 88, Rem. 3. 
 
VEEBS. 139 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 §93. 1. A Verb is a word which declares or alBims 
 something. 
 
 2. That of which the declaration is made is called the 
 Subject. 
 
 3. Verbs have — 
 
 (a) Moods, or diiferent forms which express different 
 kinds of affirmation; as, Um-8, I love; &mcir-r^m, I 
 might love. 
 
 (b) Tenses, or different forms to show the time when 
 the thing declared takes place, and_whether the action is 
 complete or incomplete; as, &m-S, I love, I am loving; 
 &md-b&-m, I was loving; &iudv-i, I have loved; &mdv~ 
 &r&-m, I had loved. 
 
 (c) Voices, or different forms which show whether the 
 Subject acts (as, John strikes), or is acted upon (as, John 
 is struck). 
 
 (d) Persons and Numbers, or different forms which 
 correspond to the person and number of the Subject. 
 
 4. These various forms are distinguished from one 
 another by certain endings; and the adding of these 
 endings to the stem is called Conjugation. 
 
 6. In respect to meaning. Verbs are either Transitive 
 or Intransitive. 
 
 6. A Transitive Verb is one which requires an Object 
 to complete the sense ; as, poetd regln&m laud&t, the poet 
 prai,=es the queen. 
 
 7. An Intransitive Verb is one which does not require 
 an Object to complete the sense; as, dqulld vdt&t, the 
 eagle i3ies. 
 
140 VERBS. 
 
 8. In respect to form, Verbs are either Regular or Ir- 
 regular. Irregular Verbs vary, in some of their parts, 
 from the usual rule of formation. 
 
 MOODS. 
 
 § 94. 1. There are three Moods, — the Indicative, the 
 Suhjundive, and the Imperative. 
 
 2. The Indicative Mood declares a thing as a fact, or 
 asks a question; as, dmdt, he loves; &m&t-n^? does he 
 love? 
 
 3. The Subjunctive Mood represents a thing not as a 
 fact, but as simply conceived in the mind; as, &mar-r&-m, 1 
 would love. 
 
 4. The Imperative Mood is used in commanding, ex- 
 horting, or entreating; as, hUo v&nl, come hither. 
 
 5. The Indicative, Subjunctive, and Imperative are 
 called by grammarians the Finite Verb, because they limit 
 the action to some particular Subject. The Infinitive, 
 PaHidples, Gerund, and Supine are called the Indefinite 
 Verb, because they express action indeiinitely, without 
 limitation to a particular Subject. 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 § 95. There are three divisions of time, — the present, 
 the past, and the futwre. In each division there are two 
 Tenses — one expressing incomplete action; the other, 
 completed action. There are, 'therefore, six Tenses : three 
 for incomplete action, viz. the Present, the Imperfect, 
 and the Future; and three for completed action, viz. 
 the Present-Perfect, the Past-Perfect, and the Future- 
 Perfect. Thus : 
 
VERBS. 
 
 141 
 
 Time. 
 Pres. Time. 
 Past Time. 
 Future Time. 
 
 Time. 
 Pres. Time. 
 Past Time. 
 Future Time. 
 
 Incomplete Action, Tense. 
 
 S,m-5, lam loving. Present. 
 
 3,ma-b3,-m, J was loving. Imperfect. 
 
 3,ma-b-5, I shall love. Future. 
 
 Completed Action. Name. 
 
 a,mav-i, I have loved. Pres.-Perf. 
 
 S,mav-Sr^-m, / had loved. Past-Perf. 
 
 amav-6r-5, I shall have loved. Fut.-Perf. 
 
 I. The Present tense expresses incomplete action in 
 present time; as, to-5, I love, I am loving. 
 
 Bemark 1. — ^This tense also expresses an existing custom or a 
 general truth ; as, Homdni signUm tuba dant, the Eomans give 
 the signal with a trumpet ; Deiis mundUm rlglt, God rules the 
 universe. 
 
 Remark 2. — The Present tense is often used for a Past to give 
 greater animation to the narrative. This is called the Historical 
 Present; mllUes &d armS, concurrtmi, the soldiers rush(ed) to 
 arms. 
 
 Rermark 3. — This tense, especially with jdm, jamdiH, and words 
 of like meaning, may also express what has existed and still ex- 
 ists ; as, j&m multos annos belium girv, for many years now I have 
 waged war, and am still waging it; or, I have been waging war 
 now going on many years. 
 
 II. The Imperfect tense expresses incomplete action in 
 past time; as, Hmor-bd-m, I was loving. 
 
 Remark 4. — This tense expresses — 
 
 (a) A customary past action ; as, &mdb&m, I used to love. 
 
 (6) What had existed and was still existing in past time, espe- 
 cially with j&ni, jamdiu, and words of like meaning ; as, j&m 
 multos annos bellUrn gtreb&m, I had been carrying on war now 
 going on many years. 
 
 (c) The beginning or attempting of^a thing in past time; Por- 
 s^nS, e&m terreb&t, Porsena tried-to-frighten him. 
 
 (d) In letters this tense is sometimes used (in reference to the 
 time of their reception) for a Present. 
 
142 VEEBS. 
 
 III. The Future tense expresses incomplete action in 
 future time; as, dmor-b-o, I shall love. 
 
 IV. The Present-Perfect tense expresses completed 
 action in present time; as, Umav-i, I have loved. 
 
 The same form of the Verb is used to express an 
 action indefinitely as past, without reference to its con- 
 tinuance or completion. This is called the Aorkt-Per- 
 fect or Indefinite-Perfect ; as, cmav-^, I supped (at some 
 indeiinite past time). 
 
 V. The Past-Perfect tense expresses completed action 
 in past time; as, d,mdv-Srdr-m, I had loved. 
 
 VI. The Future-Perfect tense expresses completed ac- 
 tion in future time ; as, &mdv-Sr-8, I shall have loved. 
 
 VOICES. 
 
 § 96. 1. There are two Voices, the Active and the 
 Passive. 
 
 2. The Active Voice represents, the Subject as acting; 
 as, dm-S, I love. 
 
 3. The Passive Voice represents the Subject as acted 
 upon; as, &m-6r, I am loved. 
 
 Remarh 1. — The same idea may be expressed both by the 
 Active and the Passive form ; as, ptUr ttbrum Ugit, the boy 
 reads the book ; or, libir a puiro ISgitUr, the bools: is read by 
 the boy. The Object in the Active becomes the Subject iu the 
 Passive, and the Subject in the Active is expressed by the Abla- 
 tive with the Preposition a or &b {Ablative of the Agent). 
 
 Remarh 2. — As Intransitive Verbs have no Object in the Act- 
 ive, they have no personal Passive form. (See ? 115, III.) 
 
 Remark 3. — The Passive Voice frequently represents the Agent 
 as acting upon himself; as, ftrSr, I bear myself, I go. This use 
 of the Passive is common in the poets. 
 
VEEBS. 1 43 
 
 PERSONS AND NUMBERS. 
 
 § 97. Verbs have three Persons, the first, the second, 
 and the third ; and two Numbers, the Singular and the 
 Plural. These either correspond to or indicate ike Per- 
 son and Number of the Subject. 
 
 THE INDEFINITE VERB. 
 
 § 98. 1. The Infinitive, Participles, Gerund, and Supine 
 are called the Indefinite Verb, because they express action 
 indefinitely, without limitation to a particular Subject. 
 The Participle is the Adjective -Verb ; the Infinitive, 
 Gerund, and Supine, the Noun-Vei-b. 
 
 2. The Infinitive expresses the action of the Verb 
 simply, without limiting it to any Subject. It is a 
 neuter Verbal Noun in the Nominative and Accusative, 
 the simple name of the action. The other cases are 
 supplied by the Gerund and Ablative Supine. 
 
 Note. — The Infinitive has no idea of time connected with it, but 
 represents the action as incomplete or completed at the time of the lead- 
 ing Verb: 
 
 Dicii me scrtheref He represents me to he writing / 
 
 i. e. He says that I am writing. 
 Dixit me scriberS, He represented me to he writing ; 
 
 i. e. He said that I was writing. 
 Dicit me Bcrtps-iaee, He represents me to have written ; 
 
 i. e. He says that I have written. 
 Dixit me Bcrijoeisaef He represented me to hove written ; 
 
 i. e. He said that X had written. 
 
 The Infinitive Present and Perfect of etssi, with the Future Active 
 Participle, form what grammarians call the Future and Future- Pa-fect 
 Infinitive ; but the futurity is expressed by the Participle, not bj the 
 Infinitive: 
 
 DveU me ease acrXptUriimf He represents me to he about to write ; 
 
 i. e. He says that I am about to write; 
 i. €. He says that I will write. 
 
144 CONJUGATION. 
 
 3. Transitive Verbs have two Participles in the Act- 
 ive, viz. the Present and the Future; as, Hmd-n-s, loving, 
 Umat-ur-^, about to love ; and two in the Passive, viz. 
 the Perfect and the Gerundive (sometimes called the Fu- 
 ture Passive Participle) ; as, dmdt-Us, loved, having been 
 loved ; &mar-7id-tis, to be loved. 
 
 4. The Gerund is a Verbal Noun of the Second 
 Declension, in the Genitive, Dative, Accusative, and 
 Ablative (the Nominative being supplied by the Infin- 
 itive); as, mddiis 6ph-andi, the manner of working. 
 
 5. The Supine is a Verbal Noun of the Fourth 
 Declension, used in the Accusative and Ablative; as, 
 &md-t-Um, to love; Hmd-t-u, to be loved, or to love. 
 
 CONJUGATION. 
 
 § 99. 1. As we have seen (§ 21, V.), there are, strictly 
 speaking, but twp Conjugations in Latin, distinguished 
 according to the final letter (or characteristic) of the 
 Present-stem : 
 
 1. The Vowel Conjugation (stem-characteristics a, e,^nd i). 
 II. The Consonant Conjugation (stem-characteristic a Con- 
 sonant or tt). 
 
 As ■ii is a Semi-Consonant, Verbs having the charac- 
 teristic * follow the Consonant Conjugation. 
 
 2. The Vowel Conjugation embraces what are com- 
 monly known as the First, Second, and Fourth Conjuga- 
 tions. 
 
 The Consonant Conjugation embraces what is com- 
 monly known as the Third. 
 
 3. For convenience, however, we divide Verbs into 
 four Conjugations, distinguished by the final letter (or 
 characteristic) of the Present-stem. This Present-stem 
 
VERBS. 145 
 
 is found by striking off the ending -rS of tlie Present 
 Infinitive Active (dropping in addition, in the Third or 
 Consonant Conjugation, the S (short) inserted before -rS. 
 See §75, 1). 
 
 4. Verbs whose stem-cliaracteristic is — 
 
 a belong to the First (A) Conjugation; as, &md-rS, to love. 
 
 e " " Second (E) " " 7n6ne-re, to advise. 
 
 a Cons. ") „ 
 
 or ft" I " Third (Cons.) " " r&g-S-r&, to rule. 
 
 I " " Fourth (I) " " audl-r&, to hear. 
 
 We thus see that the Present^stem of these Verbs is 
 respectively &ma^, mdne-, rSg-, and audi. 
 
 Exception. — Dd-ri, to give, alone in the First Conjugation 
 has a (short) before -ri of the Infinitive. 
 
 5. Besides tliis Present-stem (on which are formed the 
 tenses expressing incomplete action, together with the 
 Gerund and Gerundive), there is also a Perfect-stem, on 
 which are formed the Perfect tenses of the Active Voice ; 
 and a Supine-stem, on which are formed the Supines, the 
 Future Active Participle, and the Perfect Passive Par- 
 ticiple. 
 
 6. The Perfect^stem is formed in the Vowel Conju- 
 gations (First, Second, and Fourth) by adding v to the 
 Present-stem; in the Consonant (Third) Conjugation 
 variously, but often by adding s to the Present-stem. 
 But in the Second Conjugation only a few Verbs (deko, 
 fleS, neo, and compounds of -pleS and -dle§) follow this 
 regular formation, most of them dropping the stem- 
 vowel e and adding H; so, again, for convenience, we 
 give the rule: 
 
 7. The Perfect-stem is formed for the most part — 
 
 13 
 
146 CONJUGATION. 
 
 In the First Conjugation by adding -v to the Present-stem. 
 
 " Second " " -^ " 
 
 (dropping the stem-vowel (characteristic) ; see § 52, 2). 
 In the Third* Conjugation generally by adding -s to the 
 
 Present-stem. 
 In the Fourth Conjugation by adding -v to the Present-stem. 
 
 8. The Supine-stem is generally formed in all the 
 Conjugations by adding t to the Present-stem; as, Q,m&- 
 t-um, audl-tr^m, etc. 
 
 Caution. — In the Second Conjugation most Verbs drop the stem- 
 vowel (characteristic) before (, and insert I (short) as a connecting 
 vowel. In the Third Conjugation, t is often changed into s for eu- 
 phony. (See ?52, 3, and ?75, 6.) 
 
 § 100. ESSE, to be. 
 PEINCIPAL PAKTS. 
 Indie. Pres. Infin. Pres. Indie. Per/. Fat. Part. 
 
 sQm, ess6, fQi, futuriis. 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Pers. Singular. 
 
 ■ Plural. 
 
 1. 
 
 sd-m, I am, 
 
 sd-mus, we are. 
 
 2. 
 
 Bs, thou art, 
 
 es-t IS, ye are. 
 
 3. 
 
 es-t, he is. 
 
 su-nt, they are. 
 Imperfect. 
 
 1. 
 
 Sr-a-m, I was. 
 
 6r-a-mus, we were. 
 
 2. 
 
 6r-a-8, thou wast. 
 
 6r-a-tis, ye were. 
 
 3. 
 
 6r-a-t, he was, 
 
 8r-a-nt, they were. 
 
 
 Future, shall or will. 
 
 1. 
 
 gr-5, I shall be, 
 
 6r-i-mus, we shall be, 
 
 2. 
 
 6r-i-s, thou wilt be 
 
 1, 6r-i-tTs, ye will be, 
 
 3. 
 
 6r-T-t, he will be. 
 
 6r-u-nt, they will be. 
 
 * For other ways ol forming the Perfect-stem in this Conjugation, 
 Bee App. VI., 2 257, 1. 
 
VERBS. 1 47 
 
 Present-Perfect, hare been (Aorist-Perfect, was). 
 
 Pers. Singular. Plural. 
 
 1. fH-i, I have been, or was, fu-T-mus, we have been, or 
 
 were, 
 
 2. f u-i-stF, thou hast been, or f u-i-stTs, ye have been, or 
 
 wast, were, 
 
 „.„„.,, , fu-e-runt,or\ they have been, 
 
 6. lU-i-X, lie has been, or was, „„ _ „ >• 
 
 ' ' ' Tu-e-re, J , or were. 
 
 Past-Perfect. 
 
 1. fu-^ra-m, I luid been, fu-era-mus, we had been, 
 
 2. f Q-6ra-s, thou hadst been, f u-era-tTs, ye had been, 
 
 3. fu-era-t, he had been, fu-era-nt, they had been. 
 
 Future- Perfect, shall or will have. 
 
 1. fU-^r-o, I shall have been, fu-erT-mus, ive shall have 
 
 been, 
 
 2. fQ-gri-s, thou wilt have fu-6ri-tis, ye will have been, 
 
 been, 
 
 3. f u-SrT-t, he will have been, f u-eri-nt, tliey will have been. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present, may. 
 
 1. si-m, I may be, si-mus, we may be,' 
 
 2. si-s, thou mayst be, si-tTs, ye may be, 
 
 3. si-t, he may be, , si-nt, they may be. 
 
 Imperfect, might, would, or shmiM. 
 
 1. es-s6-m, I might be, es-se-mus, we might be, 
 
 2. es-se-s, thou mightst be, es-se-lTs, ye might be, 
 
 3. es-s6-t, he might be, es-se-nt, they might be. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 1. ^\i-'&?\-m, I may have been, ^^^fx-mu^, we may have been, 
 
 2. fu ^ri-s, thoumaysthavebeen, fii hrVtis, ye may have been, 
 
 3. f u-6ri-t, he may have been, f u-6ri-nt, they may have been. 
 
148 
 
 Past-Perfect, might, would, or should have. 
 Pere. S'mgular. Plural. 
 
 1. fu iss6-m, I might have been, fij-isse-mQs, we might have 
 
 been, 
 
 2. fu-isse-s, thou mightst have fu-isse-lis, ye might have 
 
 been, been, 
 
 3. fu-iss6-t, he might have been, fii-isse-nt, they might have 
 
 been. 
 
 IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 2. 6s, be thou, es-ie, he ye. 
 
 Future. 2. es-to, thou shalt be, es-t5tS, ye shall be, 
 3. es-to, he shall be, su-nto, they shall be. 
 
 INFINITIVE 
 Present. es-s6, to be, 
 Perfect, fu-isse, to have been. 
 Future, f u-tur-us (-a, -dm,) es-s6, or f 6-rS, to be about to be. 
 
 PAKTICIPLE. 
 Future, f ii-tur-us, -a, -dm, about to be. 
 
 §101. FIRST CONJUGATION". 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS. 
 Ir.dic. Pres. Infin. Pres. Indie. Perf. Supine. 
 
 am-6, ama-r6, 3mav-I, amat-um. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present, love, do love, am loving. 
 Sing, am-o, I love, 
 
 ama-s, thou lovest, 
 
 amS-t, he loves; 
 
149 
 
 Present, love, do love, am loving. 
 
 Plm. ama-mus, we love, 
 
 ama~tis, ye love, 
 
 ama-nt, they love. 
 
 Imperfect, was loving, loved, did love. 
 
 Sing, ama-ba-m, I was loving, 
 
 ama-ba-s, thou want loving 
 
 ama-ba-t, he was loving ; 
 
 Plur. ama-ba-mus, we were loving, 
 
 ama-ba-tTs, ye were loving, 
 
 ama-ba-nt, they ivere loving. 
 
 Future, shall or will love. 
 
 Sing, ama-b-0, / nhall love, 
 
 ama-bi-s, thou wilt love, 
 
 ama-bt-t, he will love; 
 
 Plur. ama-bf-mus, we shall love, 
 
 3ma-bt-tTs, ye will love, 
 
 ama-bu-nt, they will love. 
 
 Pj-esent-Perfect, have Ipved. Aorist-Perfect, loved. 
 
 Sing. amav-T, I have loved, 
 
 amav-i-sti, thou hast loved, 
 
 amav-T-t, he has loved; 
 
 Plur. amav-f-mds, tve have loved, 
 
 amav-i-stis, ye have loved, 
 
 amav-e-runt (or -e-rS), they have loved. 
 
 Past-Perfect, had loved. 
 
 Sing, amav-era-m, I had loved, 
 
 amav-Sra-s, thou hadst loved, 
 
 amav-era-t, he had loved; 
 
 Plur. amav-Bra-mus, we had loved, 
 
 amav-6ra-(Ts, ye hod, loved, 
 
 amav-era-nt, they had loved. 
 
 13* 
 
150 VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Future-Perfect, shall or will hare loved. 
 
 Sing. amav-6r-5, I shall have loved, 
 
 amav-6ri-s, thou wilt have loved, 
 
 amav-6rT-t, he will have loved ; 
 
 Plur. amav-Srf-mus. we shall have loved, 
 
 amav-6r?-tT8, ye will have loved, 
 
 amav-6rT-nt, they will have loved. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present, may lave. 
 
 Sing. 3mS-m, I may love, 
 
 ame-s, thou mayst love, 
 
 am6-t, he may love; 
 
 Phir. ame-mus, we may love, 
 
 ame-tTs, ye may love, 
 
 ame-nt, they may love. 
 
 Imperfect, might, would, or should love. 
 
 Sing. 3nia-r6-m, I might love, 
 
 atna-re-s, thou mightst love, 
 
 ama-re-t, he might love; 
 
 Plur. ama-re-mus, ^ we might love, 
 ama-re-tts, ye might love, 
 
 atna-re-nt, they might love. 
 
 Present-Perfect, may have loved. 
 
 Sing. amav-Brt-m, I may have loved, 
 
 amav-6rl-s, thoti mayst have loved, 
 
 amav-6rT-t, he may have loved ; 
 
 Plur. amav-6ri-tnus, we may have loved, 
 
 amav-6rf-tis, ye may have loved, 
 
 amav-5ri-nt, they may have loved. 
 
 Past-Perfect, mighl, would, or should have loved. 
 Sing. amav-issS-m, I might have loved, 
 
 amav-isse-s, thou mightst have loved, 
 
 3mav-iss6-t, he might have loved; 
 
VEEBS, FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 151 
 
 Past-Perfect, might, would, or should have loved. 
 Flur. amav-isse-mus, we might have loved, 
 
 amav-isse-tis, ye might have loved, 
 
 amav-isse-nt, they might have loved. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pres. Sing, ama, 
 
 Plur. ama-tS, 
 Fvi. Sing. ama-tO, 
 ama-to, 
 Plur. ama-t5t6, 
 ama-nto. 
 
 love thou; 
 love ye. 
 
 thou shalt love, 
 he shall love ; 
 ye shall love, 
 they shall love. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present. ama-re, to love, to be loving. 
 
 Perfect. amav-iss6, to have loved. 
 Future. amat-Or-us (-a,-um,) 
 
 ess§, to be about to love, 
 Fut. Perf. amat-ur-iis. (-a,-Qm,) 
 
 f u-issB, to have been about to love, 
 
 PAETICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ama-n-s (Gen. 
 
 ama- 
 
 
 
 ntis), 
 
 
 
 loving, 
 
 Future. 
 
 amat-ur-us, 
 
 -3, 
 
 -um, 
 
 about to love. 
 
 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 Nom. 
 
 (ama-re), 
 
 
 
 loving. 
 
 Gen. 
 
 ama-nd-T, 
 
 
 
 of loving. 
 
 Dat. 
 
 ama-nd-o, 
 
 
 
 for loving. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 ama-nd-um, 
 
 
 
 loving (often with &d and 
 
 Abl. 
 
 ama-nd-o, 
 
 
 
 by loving. 
 
1152 VERBS, FIEST CONJUGATION. 
 
 SUPINE. 
 3mat-0m, to love, 
 
 amat-u, to love, to be loved. 
 
 §102. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 PRINCIPAL PARTS. 
 Jndic. Pres. Infin. Per/. Indie. Perf. 
 
 am-6-p, ama-ri, amat-us sij-in. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present, am loved. 
 
 Sinff. am-5-r, I a7n loved, 
 
 ama-rTs (-r6), thou art loved, 
 
 ama-tur, he u loved; 
 
 Phir. ama-mdr, we are loved, 
 
 ama-mtnT, ye are loved, 
 
 ama-ntur, they are loved. 
 
 Imperfect, was loved. 
 
 Sing, ama-ba-r, I was loved, 
 
 ama-ba-ris (-r6), thou wast loved, 
 
 ama-ba-tur, he was loved ; 
 
 Plur. ama-ba-mur, we were loved, 
 
 ama-ba-mTnf, ye were loved, 
 
 ama-ba-ntur, they were loved. 
 
 Future, shall or will be loved. 
 
 Sing. ama-b5-r, ' / shall be loved, 
 
 ama-bg-rlfs (-rS), thou wilt be loved, 
 
 ama-bi-tup, he will be loved ; 
 
 Plur. 3ma-bi-mur, vie shall be loved, 
 
 ama-bT-mTnl, ye will be loved, 
 
 ama-bu-ntQr, they will be loved. 
 
153 
 
 Present-Perfect and Aorist-Perfect, have been oi was loved. 
 
 Slnff. amat-us (-a, -Qm,) su-rn,* I have been loved, 
 
 amat-Os (-3, -Om,) 6s, thou hast been loved, 
 
 amat-Qs (-a, -Qm,) es-t, he has been loved; 
 
 Plur. amat-i (-ae, -a,) sQ-mus, we have been loved, 
 
 amat-i (-ae, -a,) es-tTs, ye have been loved, 
 
 amat-i (-ae, -a,) su-nt, they have been loved. 
 
 Past-Perfect, had been hved. 
 
 Sing. amat-Os (-3, -Qm,) Sr-a-m, I had been loved, 
 
 amat-Qs (-a, -Qm,) Sr-a-s, thou hadst been loved, 
 
 amat us (-a, -Qm,) 6r-a-t, he had been loved; 
 
 Plur. amat-i (-ae, -a,) 6r-a-mQs, we had been loved, 
 
 amat I (-ae, -a,) 6r-a-tTs, ye had been loved, 
 
 amat I (-ae, -a,) er-a-nt, they had been loved. 
 
 Future-Perfect, shall have been loved. 
 
 Sing. amat-Qs (-a, -Qm,) 6r-6, I shall have been love/1, 
 
 amat-us (-a, -Qm,) 6rT-s, thou wilt have been loved, 
 
 amat us (-a, -Qm,) Sr i-t, he will have been loved ; 
 
 Plur. amat-I (-ae, -3,) 6p-T-mQs, we shall have been loved, 
 
 3mat-r (-ae, -a,) Br T-tis, ye will have been loved, 
 
 3mat-i (-ae, -3,) 6r-u-nt, they will have been loved. , 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present, may be loved. 
 Sing. 3m6-P, I may he loved, 
 
 3me-rTs (-r5), thou mayst be loved, 
 
 ame-tQr, he may be loved; 
 
 * In the tenses for completed action in the Passive, the forms Jul in- 
 stead of sSm, fuirdm instead of ir&m, fuSrS instead of ir!^, fuirlm instead 
 of sKm, fuissSm instead of essim, fuissi instead of essi, are sometimes 
 used, chiefly when we wish to emphasize that the action is over and 
 done. 
 
154 VERBS, FIEST CONJUGATION. 
 
 Present, may be loved. 
 Plur. ame-mur, we may be loved, 
 
 ame-mini, ye may be loved, 
 
 ame-ntur, they may be loved. 
 
 Imperfect, might, would, or should be loved. 
 
 Sing. ama-r6-r, I might be loved, 
 
 ama-re-ris (-r6), thou mightst be loved, 
 
 ama-re-tiir, he might be loved ; 
 
 Plur. ama re mur, we might be loved, 
 
 amare-mini, ye might be loved, 
 
 ama-re-ntur, they might be loved. 
 
 Present-Perfect, may have been loved. 
 
 Sing, amat-us (-a, -um,) sT-m, I may have been loved, 
 
 amat us (-a, -um,) sl-s, thou mayst have been loved, 
 
 amat us (-a, -Qm,) sJ-t, he may have been loved; 
 
 Plur. amat I (-ae, -a,) si mus, we may have been loved, 
 
 amat I (-ae, -3,) sI-tTs, ye may have been loved, 
 
 amat T (ae,.-a,) si-nt, they may have been loved. 
 
 Past-Perfect, might, would, or should have been loved. 
 
 Sing, amat-us (-a, -dm,) es-s6-m, / might have been loved, 
 
 amat-us (-a, -dm,) es-se-s, thou mightst have been loved, 
 amat-ds (-a, -dm,) es-s6-t, he might have been loved; 
 
 Plur. araat-T (-ae, -a,) es-se mds, we might liave been loved, 
 amat-I (-ae, -a,) esse-tts, ye might have been loved, 
 amat-i (-ae, -a,) es-se-nt, they might have been loved. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 Pres. Sing. ama-rS, be thou loved; 
 
 Plur. ama-mTni, be ye loved. 
 
 Fut. Sing. ama-t5r, tho^i shalt be loved, 
 
 ama-tdr, he shall be loved ; 
 
 Plur. ama-nt5r, they shall br loved. 
 
VERBS, FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 155 
 
 Present 
 
 ama-ri, 
 
 to be loved. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 amat us (-3, -um,) ess6, 
 
 to have been loved. 
 
 Future. 
 
 amat dm iri, 
 
 to be about to be loved. 
 
 Put. Perf. 
 
 amat-ds (-a, -dm,) f6re, 
 PAETICIPLES 
 
 to be about to have been 
 loved. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 amat-us, -a, -dm, 
 
 loved, or having been 
 loved. 
 
 Gerundive. 
 
 ama-nd-us, -a, -dm, 
 
 to be loved. 
 
 State the Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number, and mean- 
 ing of the following : 
 
 Amas, Smes, &nia, 3,rnans, &mant, amgr, &m6, a,mSt, 3.mSt, 
 am(5r, a,marS, ftmatis, 3,mari, amabas, amarSr, ftmares, ametis, 
 amabant, Smabis, Smabat, a,mabunt, ameris, a,matur, amatS, 
 3,maris, &mavi, S,mand6, ainautis, Amarent, amabatis, S,ma- 
 rentiir, SmatotS, amabitis, S,mamiir, amabimilr, amaremiis, 
 amavistis, ftmavSris, amaviss6m, a,mamini, amabimiui, Smati 
 gratis, S,inav8rant, amabamini, S,mavissetis, S-maremfis, 3,mav- 
 issS, essg Smatiirfls, Sroatfls sim, ^memini, ^mavSras, S,mare- 
 mini, amati grunt, a,matus sit, 2,matus ess6. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 "We are loved, ye might be loved; they have loved, thou 
 wouldst have loved, ye will love, we were loving, ye loved, 
 I may have been loved, he shall be loved, be ye loved, to 
 have loved, to be about to love, they had loved, he would 
 have loved, we have been loved, we shall love, ye might be 
 loved, they might love, he would have loved,; I would have 
 been loved, of loving, to love, ye were loved, he is loved. 
 
156 
 
 VERBS, SECX)ND CONJUGATION. 
 
 §103. SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 PEINCIPAL PARTS. 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 
 m6ne-8, 
 
 Indie. Pres. 
 
 m5ne-5-r, 
 
 Inf. Prea. 
 
 mSne-rg, 
 
 Infin. Pres.^ 
 
 mSneri, 
 
 Ind. Per/. 
 
 m5nu-i, 
 
 Indie. Per/. 
 
 moMDt-Qs 
 
 Supine. 
 
 mSnit-um. 
 
 
 sum. 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 I advise. 
 
 mSne-o, 
 
 mSne-s, 
 
 mSnS-t, 
 
 m5ne-mus, 
 
 mbne-tis, 
 
 mone-nt. 
 
 / am advised. . 
 
 Sing. m6ne-5-r, 
 
 mSne-ris (-r6), 
 mSne-tur, 
 
 Plur. mone-mur, 
 tnSne-mlfni, 
 mone-ntur. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I was advising. 
 
 Sing, mone-ba-m, 
 mSne-ba-s, 
 mSne-ba-t, 
 
 Plur. m5ne-ba-mus, 
 mone-ba-tis, 
 mSne-ba-nt. 
 
 / was advised. 
 Sing, mone-ba-r, 
 
 mSne-ba-ris (-r5),. 
 
 mdne-ba-tur, 
 Plur. mSne-ba-miir, 
 
 mone-bamTnl, 
 
 mone-ba-ntur. 
 
 Future. 
 
 I shall or will advise. 
 Sing, mone-b-6, 
 
 mone-bT-s, 
 
 mSne-bl-t, 
 Plur. mSne-bi-rnus, 
 
 mSne-bi-tis, 
 
 mSne-bu-nt. 
 
 I shall or will be advised. 
 Sing, mone-bo-r, 
 
 mSne-bfi-rts (-r6), 
 
 mone-bT-tur, 
 Plur. mone bi-mur, 
 
 mSne-bi-mTnl, 
 
 m5ne bu-ntur. 
 
VERES, SECOND CONJUGATTON. 
 
 157 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present-Perfect and Aorist-Perfeet. 
 
 I have advised, or advised. 
 Sing. m5nu-T, 
 
 mSnu-i-sti, 
 
 monu T t, 
 Plur. monu-i-miis, 
 
 monu-i-stis, 
 
 mSnu-e-runt (or -e-r6). 
 
 I %vas or have been advised. 
 
 S. mSntt-us (-a, -dm,) sti m, 
 mbnit-us (-a, -Qm,) 6s, 
 m5nTt-us (-a, -urn,) es-t, 
 
 P. mSnTt I (-ae, -a,) sii mus, 
 m5nit-i (-ae, -a,) es-tis, 
 mSnIt-i (-ae, -a,) su-nt. 
 
 I had advised. 
 
 Sing. monu-Sra-m, 
 m5nu-6ra s, 
 m6nu-6ra-t, 
 
 Plur. monu-6ra-mus, 
 m6nu-6ra-tts, 
 m5nu 6ra-nt. 
 
 I shall have advised. 
 
 Sing. mSnu-6r-S, 
 mbnu 6ri-s, 
 monu-SrTt, 
 
 Plur. m5nu-6rt-mus, 
 m6nu Srt-tTs, 
 monu Sri-nt. 
 
 Past-Perfect. 
 
 I had been advised. 
 
 S. montt us (-a, -um, ) 6r-a-m, 
 mSnit us (-a, -um,) 6r-a s, 
 monit-us (-a, -iim,) Sr-a-t, 
 
 P. montt I (ae, -a,) 6r-a-mus, 
 monTt I (-ae, -a,) 6pa-tis, 
 mSntt i (-ae, -a,) fir-ant. 
 
 Future-Perfect. 
 
 I shall have been advised. 
 S. monit-us (-a, -iim,) 6r-S, 
 monit-us (-a, -iim,) 6r T-s, 
 montt-iis (-a, -iim,) 6r-i-t, 
 '. monit-I (-ae, -a,) 6r-T miis, 
 m5nTti (-ae, -a,) 6rTtTs, 
 mdnitt-i (-ae, -a,) fir-u-nt. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 T may advise. 
 Sing. m5ne a m, 
 m5ne-a-s, 
 mSne at, 
 
 14 
 
 I may be advised. 
 S. mone-a-r, - 
 
 m6ne-a-rTs (-r€), 
 
 m6ne-a-tiip. 
 
158 
 
 VEEBS, SECOND CONJUGATIOlf. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 May adfise. 
 Plur. mfine-a-miis, 
 mone-a-tis, 
 mone-a-nt. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 May he advised. 
 P. mone-a-mur, 
 mSne-a-minT, 
 mSne-a-ntup, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 / might, would, or shovld 
 advise. 
 Sing. mSne-rfi-m, 
 mone re s, 
 m5ne-r6-t, 
 Plur. mone-re-mus, 
 mone-re-tis, 
 tnSne rent. 
 
 I might, would, or should he 
 
 advised. 
 S. m8ne-r6-p, 
 
 mSne-re ris (-r6), 
 
 m6ne re-tQr, 
 P. mone-re-mur, 
 
 mone-re-mini, 
 
 m6ne-re-ntur. 
 
 Present-Perfect. 
 
 1 may have advised. 
 
 Sing. m6nu-6ri-m, 
 monu-Srf-s, 
 m&nu SrI-t, 
 
 Plur. monu-gri-miis, 
 m6nu-6ri-tis, 
 m6nu-6ri-nt. 
 
 / may have been advised. 
 
 S. montt-us (-3, -dm,) sT-m, 
 m6ntt-us (-a , -um,) sl-s, 
 monit-us (-a, -Qm,) st-t, 
 
 P. mSnit i (ae, -a,) sl-mus, 
 mSntt I (-ae, -a,) sT-tis, 
 m6nTt-i (-ae, -a,) si-nt. 
 
 Past-Perfect. 
 
 I might, would, or should 
 have advised. 
 Sing. m5nu-iss6-m, 
 mSnu-isse-s, 
 iTi5nu-issB-t, 
 Plur. mdnu-isse mils, 
 m5nu-isse-tTs, 
 monu isse-nt. 
 
 / might, would, or should have 
 been advised. 
 
 S. m6nTt-us (-a, -um,) es-sfi m, 
 monit-us (-3, um,) es-se-s, 
 m5nTt-us (-a, -iim,) es s6-t, 
 
 P. m6nit-J (-ae, -a,) es-se miis, 
 mSnit i (-ae, -a,) es se'-tis, 
 mSnit i (ae, -3,) es-se-nt. 
 
VEEBS, SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 159 
 
 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 
 PASSIVE VOICK, 
 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pres 
 
 S 
 
 m6ne, advise thou; 
 
 Pres. S. 
 
 m6ne-r6, be thou ad- 
 vised ; 
 
 
 P. 
 
 mone-tS, advise ye. 
 
 P. 
 
 mSne-mTnT, be ye ad- 
 vised. 
 
 Ful. S. 
 
 m6ne-to, thou shalt 
 
 Fut. S. 
 
 mone-tSr, thou shalt 
 
 
 
 advise. 
 
 
 be advised. 
 
 
 
 m6ne-t6, he shall ad- 
 
 
 m6ne-t6r, he shall be 
 
 
 
 vise. 
 
 
 advised. 
 
 
 P. 
 
 m5ne totS, ye shall 
 advise. 
 
 
 
 
 
 mSne-nto, they shall 
 
 P. 
 
 m6ne-nt5r, they shall 
 
 
 
 advise. 
 
 
 be advised. 
 
 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 
 m5ne-r6, to advise. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 m6ne-ri, to be ad- 
 vised. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 
 mSnu-issS, to have 
 advised. 
 
 Perf. 
 
 m 
 
 m6nit-us(-3,-dm,) 
 essB, to have 
 been advised. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 
 m5nTt-ur-us (-a, 
 -dm,) essS, to 
 be about to ad- 
 vise. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 mdnit-um iri, to be 
 
 about to be ad- 
 vised. 
 
 F'd. 
 
 Perf. m5nTt-ur-us (-a, 
 
 Fut. Perf. m5nTt-us (-a, -dm,) 
 
 
 
 -dm,) f iJ-issS, to 
 
 
 fSrS, to have 
 
 
 
 have been about 
 
 
 been about to be 
 
 
 
 to advise. 
 
 
 advised. 
 
 
 
 PAETIC 
 
 aPLES. 
 
 
 Pres. m6ne-n-s (Gen. mo- 
 
 ne-nt-Ts), advising. 
 Fuf. mSnit-ur-us, -3, -dm, 
 
 about to advise. 
 
 Perfect. mSntt-us, -a, -dm, 
 
 advised. 
 Gerundive. m5ne-nd-ds, -a, 
 -dm, to be advised. 
 
160 VEEBS, SE<X)ND CONJUGATION. 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 Nom. (m5ne-r6), advising. 
 
 Gen. m5ne-nd-T, of advising. 
 
 Dat. m5ne-nd-o, for advising. 
 
 Ace. mdne-nd-iim, advidng (often with &d and int^r). 
 
 Abl. m6ne-nd-o, by advising. 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 m5nTt-um, to advise. I m5nTt-Q, to be advised, to advise. 
 
 State the Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number, and mean- 
 ing of the following : 
 
 Monent, mSnens, inSnes, mOne, mSnSt, mfineas, m5nemi1s, 
 monetur, mSnetia, mSnSris, mSnerS, mOneb&t, mOneilt, m5- 
 nergm, monui, monentfir, monendi, m6nuistT, m6nu6ramus, 
 mSneamOs, monet?, mSneri, mSnuissfi, inSnitu, mftnitum iri, 
 mOniturfis fuiss6, mOniti Sratis, mSnebimini, raSnuSrltis, mfin- 
 uistifs, mSnetotS, niSnuSrint, mSnuissemus, moneamini, mSne- 
 bamini, inSniti fuSrImus,* mSnitus fuissfit.* 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 I advise, thou wast advising, thou wast advised, he shall 
 advise, we have been advised, ye are advising, they had 
 advised, ye shall have advised, we advised, he has been 
 advised, I shall be advised, thou mayest advise, he may be 
 advised, we may have advised, ye might have advised, they 
 would have been advised, advise thou, be ye advised, to 
 have been advised, to advise, advising, about to advise, to 
 be advised, of advising. The girls have been advised. The 
 boys may have been advised. 
 
 See foot-note. p. 153. 
 
VEEBS, THIED CONJUGATION. 
 
 161 
 
 §104. THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PAS-IVE VOICE. 
 
 PKINCIPAL PARTS. 
 
 Iiid. Pres. rSg-o, 
 
 
 Indie 
 
 Pres. p6g-6-P, 
 
 Inf. Pres. r6g-6-r6, 
 
 
 Infin. 
 
 Pres. pgg-i, 
 
 Tnd. Perj. rex-I, 
 
 
 Indie 
 
 Perf. pect-Os su-m 
 
 Supine. rect-iim. 
 
 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 
 I rule. 
 
 
 
 I am ruled. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 reg-5, 
 
 r6gT-s, 
 
 reg-T-t, 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 p6g-6-p, 
 p6g-6-rTs (-p5), 
 pSg-i-tup, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 reg-T-mus, 
 
 reg-i-tis, 
 
 rgg-u-nt. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 p6g-T-mup, 
 pggi-mini, 
 p6g-u-ntup. 
 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 
 I was ruling. 
 
 
 
 I was ruled. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 r6g-e-ba-m, 
 
 r6g-e-ba-s, 
 
 rSg-e-ba-t, 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 p6g-e-ba-p, 
 p6g-e-ba-pis (-p6), 
 rgg-e-ba-tup, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 r6g-e-ba-mus, 
 
 r6g-e-ba-tis, 
 
 r6g-e-ba-nt. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 peg-e-ba-mijr, 
 p6g-e-ba-mTni, 
 p6g-e-ba-ntup. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 I shall 
 
 or vAll rule. 
 
 
 I shall 
 
 or will be ruled. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 r6g-a-m, 
 
 pgg-e-s, 
 
 p6g-6-t, 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 peg-a-p, 
 
 p6g-e-pTs (-p6), 
 p6g-e-tup, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 pgg-e-miis, 
 
 pgg-e-tis, 
 
 rgg-e-nt. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 pgg-e-mup, 
 p6g-e-mTm, 
 pgg-e-ntijp. 
 
 14 » 
 
162 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present-Perfect and Aori«t-Perfect 
 
 / have ruled or ruled. 
 Sing, rex-i, 
 
 rex-i-sti, 
 
 rex T-t, 
 Plur. rex-T-miis, 
 
 rex-i-stTs, 
 
 rex-e-runt (or e-r6). 
 
 I was or have been ruled. 
 
 S. rect-us (-a, -um,) sQ-m, 
 rect-us (-a, -um,) 6s, 
 rect-Qs (-a, -dm,) es-t, 
 
 P. rect-i (-ae, -a,) su-mus, 
 rect-i (-ae, -a,) es-tis, 
 rect-I (-ae, -a,) su-nt. 
 
 Past-Perfect. 
 
 I had ruled. 
 
 Sing. rex-6ra-m, 
 rex-6ra-s, 
 rex-6ra-t, 
 
 Flur. rex-gra-mijs, 
 rex-6ra tis, 
 rex-6ra-nt. 
 
 I shall have ruled. 
 Sing. rex-6r-6, 
 
 rex-6ri-s, 
 
 rex-6rT-t, 
 Plur. rex-Sri-mus, 
 
 rex-6ri-tis, 
 
 rex-6ri-nt. 
 
 / had been ruled. 
 
 S. rect-Qs (-a, -um,)6r-a-m, 
 rect-us (-a, -um,) 6r-a-s, 
 rect-us (-a, -dm,) 6r-S-t, 
 
 P. rect-i (-ae, -a,) 6r-a-mds, 
 rect-T (-ae, -a,) 6r-a-tTs, 
 rect-I (-ae, -a,) Sr-a-nt. 
 
 Future-Perfect. 
 
 I shall have been ruled. 
 
 S. rect-us (-a, -dm,) 6^6, 
 rect-ds (-3, -dm,) 6r-i-s, 
 rect-us (-3, -dm,) 6r-T-t, 
 
 P. rect-i (-ae, -a,) 6r-i-mds, 
 rect-i (-ae, -a,) 6r-T-tTs, 
 rect-i (-ae, -a,) 6r-u-nt. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 I may rule. I may he ruled. 
 
 Sing. r6g-3-m, S. rSg-a-r, 
 
 rSg-a-s, rSg-a-ris (-r6), 
 
 r6g-a-t, rSg-a-tur, 
 
VEEBS, THIKD CONJUGATION. 
 
 163 
 
 Plu 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 May rule: 
 . rSg-a-mus, 
 reg-a-ti«, 
 r6g-a-nt. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 May he ruled. 
 P. r6g-a-mQr, 
 p6g-a-minT, 
 rSg-a-ntur. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I might, would, or 
 should rule. 
 
 Sing. reg-6-r6-m, 
 r6g-6-re-s, 
 r6g-6-r6-t, 
 
 Plur. r6g-6-re-mus, 
 reg-6-re-tis, 
 reg-5-re-nt. 
 
 I might, would, or should 
 he ruled. 
 S. rSg-S-rS-r, 
 
 r5g-6-re-rTs (re), 
 rSg-6-re-tur, 
 P. r5g-6-re-mup, 
 r6g-8-pe-mTni, 
 rSg-e-re-ntdr. 
 
 Present-Perfect. 
 
 I may have ruled. 
 
 Sing. rex-6rT m, 
 rex-6ri-s, 
 rex-Sri-t, 
 
 Plur. rex-5ri-mus, 
 rex-6ri-tis, 
 rex-6ri-nt. 
 
 / may have been ruled. 
 
 S. rectus (-a, -dm,) sT-m, 
 rectus (-a, -dm,) sl-s, 
 rect-ds (-a, -dm,) sT-t, 
 
 P. reot-F (-ae, -a,) sl-mds, 
 recti (-ae, -a,) sl-tis, 
 recti (-ae, -a,) si-nt. 
 
 Past-Perfect, 
 I might, would, or 
 should have ruled. 
 Sing. rex-iss5-m, *S. 
 
 rex-isse-s, 
 rex-iss6-t, 
 Plur. rex-isse-mus, 
 rex-isse-tis, 
 rex-isse-nt. 
 
 / might, would, or should 
 
 have been ruled. 
 rectus (-a, -dm,) es-s6-m, 
 rectus (-3, -Dm,) es-se-s, 
 rectus (-a, -dm,) es-s6-t, 
 recti (-ae, -a,) es-se-mus, 
 recti (-ae, -a,) es-se-tis, 
 recti C-ae, -a,) es se-nt. 
 
164 
 
 VERBS, THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 ACirVE VOICE. 
 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pres. S. 
 
 r6g-6, rule thou ; 
 
 Pres. S. 
 
 r6g-6-r6, be thou 
 
 ruled ; 
 
 P. 
 
 r6g-T-t6, rule ye. 
 
 P. 
 
 r6gT-mT-nT, be ye 
 ruled. 
 
 Fut. S. 
 
 r6g-i-to, thou shall 
 
 Fut. S. 
 
 r6g-T-t5r, thou shall 
 
 
 rule. 
 
 
 be ruled. 
 
 
 r6g-T-t6, he shall 
 
 
 r6g-i-t6r, he shall be 
 
 
 rule; 
 
 
 ruled ; 
 
 P. 
 
 r6g-i-t5t6, ye shall 
 
 P. 
 
 pgg-u-ntop, they shall 
 
 
 rule. 
 
 
 be ruled. 
 
 
 rSg-u-ntO, they shall 
 
 
 
 
 rule. 
 
 
 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 r6g-6-r5, to rule. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 pgg-I, to be ruled. 
 
 Per/. 
 
 rex-iss6, to liave 
 
 Perf. 
 
 rect-ds (-a, -dm,) 
 
 
 ruled. 
 
 
 ess%, tohavebeen 
 
 Fut. 
 
 rect-ur-us (-a, 
 
 
 ruled. 
 
 
 -urn,) esse, to be 
 
 Fut. 
 
 pect-um Ipi, to be 
 
 
 about to rule. 
 
 
 about to be ruled. 
 
 Fut. Perf. rect-Or-us (-a, 
 
 Fut. Perf. rect-ds (-a, -dm,) 
 
 
 -Qm,) f u-iss6, to 
 
 
 f 8p6, to have been 
 
 
 have been about 
 
 
 about to be ruled. 
 
 
 to rule. 
 
 
 
 
 PAETICTPLES. 
 
 
 Pres. 
 
 rSg-e-n-s (Gen. 
 
 Perfect. 
 
 pect-ds(-3,-dm,) 
 
 
 rSgentis), rul- 
 
 
 ruled. 
 
 
 ing. 
 
 
 
 Fut. 
 
 rect-up-us, (-a, 
 
 Gerundive. rSg-e-nd-us (-3, 
 
 
 -um,) alout to 
 
 
 -um,) to be 
 
 
 rule. 
 
 
 ruled. 
 
VERBS, THIED CONJUGATION'. 165 
 
 GEKUND. 
 Nom. (r6g-S-r-e), ruling. 
 Gen. rSg-e-nd-i, of ruling. 
 Dat. reg-e-nd-o, for ruling. 
 
 Ace. r§g-e-nd-um, ruling (often with &d and inUr'). 
 Abl. r6g-e-nd-5, by ruling. 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 rect-Qm, to rule. I rect-D, to be ruled, to rule. 
 
 State the Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number', and mean- 
 ing of the following : 
 Rexit, rSgis, rSgat, rggunt, r6g6t, rSgit, rgges, rSgS, rggl, 
 rggant, rSgas, rfigent, rfigeus, rexi, rggSres, rgggrg, rSgerg, 
 rSgitS, riSgimini, rggaminl, rggemini, rggentiir, rSgunttir, 
 rggantflr, rfigetflr.rSgitur, rggatfir, rSgitis, rSgatis, rfigetis, 
 rfigentis, rggendi, rggendo, rggimiis, rggemtir, rSgamiis, rSg- 
 fireris, rggSris, rexgris, rex8ritis, rexisses, rexissetis, rSgeba- 
 mini, rggimini, rggeminl, r6g6reminl, recti Sramfls, recti 
 fuissetis,* recturfls fuissS,* rectos, rectu, rggitotg, rexistis, 
 rexgramiis. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 They may be ruled, ye are ruled, we may rule, he rules, 
 I may rule, thou mayst be ruled, they were ruling, ye would 
 be ruled, we might be ruled, ye were ruled, he was ruling, 
 thou wouldst be" ruled, I was ruled, thou ruledst, thou art 
 ruled, thou hast ruled, he has been ruled, the king will rule, 
 we had ruled, ye had been ruled, they shall be ruled, he will 
 have ruled, ye might have ruled, ye had ruled, rule ye, to be 
 ruled, to have ruled, having been ruled, for ruling, he would 
 have ruled. 
 
 * See foot-note, p. 153. 
 
1 66 VERBS, FOURTH CONJUGATIOK. 
 
 §105. FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 PBINCIPAL PAETS. 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 
 audio, 
 
 Ind. Pres. 
 
 audi-5-r, 
 
 Inf. Pres. 
 
 audl-re, 
 
 Inf. Pres. . 
 
 audr-ri, 
 
 Ind. Perf. 
 
 audlv-r, 
 
 Perf. Indie. 
 
 audit-US sum 
 
 Supine. 
 
 audTt-um. 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE MOOD. 
 Present. 
 
 
 I hear. 
 
 
 
 I am heard. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 audio, 
 audi-s, 
 audi-t, 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 audi-5-r, 
 audi-ris (-r6), 
 audi-tur, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 audi-mus, 
 
 audi-tis, 
 
 audi-u-nt. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 audl-mur, 
 audl-minl, 
 audi-u-ntiir. 
 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 
 I was hearing. 
 
 
 
 I was heard. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 audi-e-ba-m, 
 
 audi-e-ba-s, 
 
 audi-e-b3-t, 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 audi-e-ba-r, 
 audi-e-ba-ris (-rS), 
 audi-e-ba-tQr, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 audi-e-ba-miis, 
 
 audi-e-ba-tis, 
 
 audi-e-ba-nt. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 audi-e-ba-mijr, 
 audi-e-ba-mTnT, 
 audi-e-ba-ntur. 
 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 
 I shall OT will hear. 
 
 
 I shall or unll he heard. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 audl-a-m, 
 
 audi-e-s, 
 
 audi-S-t, 
 
 
 Sing. 
 
 audi-a-r, 
 audi-er-is (-r5), 
 audi-e-tur, 
 
 Plur. 
 
 audi-e-mus, 
 
 audi-e-tis, 
 
 audi-e-nt. 
 
 
 Plur. 
 
 audi-e-mOr, 
 audi-e-minT, 
 audl-e-ntur. 
 
167 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present-Perfect and Aorist-Perfect. 
 
 I have heard or heard. 
 Sing, audiv-f, 
 
 audiv-i-sti, 
 
 audlv-T-t, 
 Plur. audiv-T-mus, 
 
 audiv-i-stis, 
 
 audlv-e-runt {or -e- 
 r6). 
 
 I have been or was heard. 
 
 S. audit-US (-a, -urn,) sd m, 
 audlt-us (-a, -um,) 6s, 
 audlt-us (-a, -um,) es-t, 
 
 P. audit-i (ae, -a,) su-mus, 
 audit-i (-ae, -a,) es-tis, 
 audlt-I (ae, -a,) su-nt. 
 
 Past-Perfect. 
 
 Sing. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 I had heard. 
 
 audiv-6ra-m, 
 
 audiv-era-s, 
 
 audiv-era-t, 
 
 audiv-6ra-mus, 
 
 audlv-era-tTs, 
 
 audiv-6ra-nt. 
 
 / had been heard. 
 
 S. audit-us (-a, -Qm,) er-a-m, 
 audTt-us (-a, -um,) er-a-s, 
 audlt-us (-a, -um,) 6p-a-t, 
 
 P. audit-i (-ae, -a,) 6r-a-mus, 
 audit-i (-ae, -a,) Sr-a-tis, 
 audit-i (ae, -a,) er-a-nt. 
 
 Future-Perfeet. 
 
 I shall have heard. 
 
 Sing, audiv-gp-o, 
 audiv-5rt-s, 
 audiv-6rT-t, 
 
 Plur. audiv-Sri-mus, 
 audiv-Sri-tis, 
 audiv-6ri-nt. 
 
 I shall have been heard. 
 
 S. audit-us (-a, -dm,) 6r-o,' 
 audit-ds (-a, -um,) gr-T-s, 
 audit-us (-a, -dm,) 6p-T-t, 
 
 P. audit-i (-ae, -a,) 6r-i-mus, 
 audit-i (-ae, -a,) 6r-i-tTs, 
 audit-i (-ae, -a,) 6r-unt. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 I may hear. 
 Sing, audi-a-m, 
 audi-a-s, 
 audi-3-t, 
 
 Present. 
 
 I may be heard. 
 S. audi-a-r, 
 
 audi-a-rYs (-rS), 
 audi-a^dr, 
 
168 
 
 VERBS, FOUETH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Plur. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 
 May hear. 
 audi-a-mus, 
 audi-a-tis, 
 audi-a-nt. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 May he heard. 
 P. audi-a-mur, 
 audi-a-mfnF, 
 audi-a-ntur. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 / might, would, or should 
 
 hear. 
 Sing. audi-rS-m, 
 
 audi-re-s, 
 
 audi-r6-t, 
 Plur. audl-re-mQs, 
 
 audl-re-tTs, 
 
 audi-re-nt. 
 
 I might, would, or should 
 be heard. 
 8. audl-r6-r, 
 
 audi-re-rTs (-r6), 
 audl-re-tur, 
 P. audT-re mur, 
 audf-re-mlfnl, 
 audT-re-ntur. 
 
 Present-Perfect. 
 
 I may have heard. 
 
 Sing. audiv-6rT-ni, 
 audrv-Sri-s, 
 audiv-Sri-t, 
 
 Plur. audiv-erf-mus, 
 audlv-gpi-tJs, 
 audiv-6ri-nt. 
 
 / may have been heard. 
 
 S. audFt-u8 (-a, -um,) si-m, 
 audit-US (-a, -um,) si-s, 
 audTt-us (-a, -dm,) st-t, 
 
 P. audrt-i (-ae, -a,) si-mils, 
 audit-i (-ae, -a,) si-tis, 
 audit-i (ae, -a,) si-nt. 
 
 Past-Perfect. 
 
 I might, would, or should 
 have heard. 
 
 Sing. audiv-iss6-m, 
 audiv-isse-s, 
 audiv-issS-t, 
 
 Pliir. audiv-lsse-miis, 
 audiv-isse-tis, 
 audiv-isse-nt. 
 
 I might, would, or should have 
 been heard. 
 
 8. audit-us (-a, -dm,) es-s6-m, 
 audit-ds (-3, -urn,) esses, 
 audit-ds (-a, -dm,) es-s6-t, 
 
 P. audit-i (-ae, -a,) es-se-mds, 
 audit-i (-ae, -a,) es-se-tis, 
 audit-i (-ae, -a,) es se-nt. 
 
VERBS, FOIJRTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 169 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
 
 Pres.S. audi, hear thou; 
 P. audi-tS, hear ye. 
 Put. S. audT-t§, thou shalt 
 hear, 
 audl-tS, he shall 
 hear ; 
 P. audi-totS, ye shall 
 hear, 
 audi-u-nt§, they shall 
 hear. 
 
 INFINITIVE, 
 
 Pres.S. audir^jbethouheard; 
 
 P. aud\-mM,beyeheard. 
 
 Fut. S. audT-tor, thou shalt 
 
 he heard, 
 
 audi-tor, he shall he 
 
 heard ; 
 
 P. audi-u-ntor, they shall 
 he heard. 
 
 Pres. 
 Perf. 
 
 Fut. 
 
 audl-re, to hear. 
 audiv-issS, to have 
 heard. 
 
 audlt-ur-us (-a, -um,) 
 ess6, to be about to 
 hear. 
 Fut. P. audit-ur-Qs (-a, -um,) 
 fu-iss§, to have 
 been about to hear. 
 
 Pres. audi-ri, to be heard. 
 Perf. audit-us (-a, -Om,) 
 
 esse, to have been 
 
 heard. 
 Fut. audit-tini Fri, to be 
 
 about to be heard. 
 
 Fut. P. audit-us (-3, -Om,) 
 f5r6, to have been 
 about to be heard. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Pres.- 
 
 Fut. 
 
 audi-e-n-s (Gen. au- 
 di-e-nt-Ts), hearing. 
 
 audit-ur-us (-a, -dm,) 
 about to hear. 
 
 Perf. audit-us (-a, -Qm,) 
 
 heard. 
 Gerundive. audi-e-nd-Qs (-a, 
 -um,) to be heard. 
 
 GERUND. 
 Nom. (audi-rS), hearing. 
 Gen. audi-e-nd-i, of hearing. 
 Dat. , audi-e-nd-o, for hearing. 
 Ace. audi-e-nd-Qm, hearing (often with ad and int&r), 
 Abl. audi-e-nd-o, by hearing. 
 
 'l5, 
 
170 VERBS, CONJUGATION. 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 au-dlt-um, to hear. I au-dit-u, to he heard, to hear. 
 
 State the Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number, and mean- 
 ing of the following : 
 Audis, audiat, audiens, audient, audiaut, auditis, auditfis, 
 audits, audirSs audiri, audiris, audlres, audivisti, audiverg, 
 audimtir, audiemini, auditotg, audivissetis, audivSrint, audi- 
 vissent, audiremini, auditi fuissent,* audituriis ess6, auditfis 
 fuissS,* audiebamfir, audiremtts, audiebamini, audiuntor, au- 
 diuntfir, audieutiir, audientis, audiatis, audiantur, audiverl- 
 mfls, audiverunt, auditi fuissetis.* 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 We shall hear, he has been heard, they have heard, thou 
 mightest have been heard, ye were heard, ye were hearing, 
 they shall hear, ye have heard, he may have been heard, ye 
 would have been heard, we might have been heard, be ye 
 heard, to hear, to have been heard, by hearing, about to hear, 
 to be heard, we hear, they are heard, they are hearing. The 
 beautiful girl has been heard. Many songs had been heard. 
 
 §106. CONJUGATION OF VERBS.— ENDINGS. 
 —PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 
 I. The table on pages 172, 173 exhibits the endings 
 of the Active and Passive Voices iu all the Conjugations. 
 
 Bemarh 1. — On the Present-stem are formed all the Moods of 
 the Present, Imperfect, and Future Tenses (except the Infinitive 
 Future, Active and Passive), the Gerund, Present Active Par- 
 ticiple, and the Gerundive. 
 
 Bemarh 2. — On the Perfect-stem are formed all the Perfect- 
 Tenses in the Active Voice. 
 
 Bemark 3. — On the Supine-stem are formed the Supines, and 
 the Future Active, and Perfect Passive, Participles. 
 
 * See foot-note, p. 153. 
 
PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 171 
 
 Remarh 4 — The Future and Future-Perfect Infinite Active 
 are compound Tensas, made up of the Future Active Participle 
 and the Infinitive of the Verb sum. The Future Infinitivf Pas- 
 sive is made up of the Supine and the Impersonal Infinitive irl. 
 The Future-Perfect Infinitive Passive is made up of the Perfect 
 Passive Participle and the Future Infinitive f6r6. 
 
 Remark 5. — The Perfect Teiises of the Passive are made up of 
 the Perfect Passive Participle with the forms of ihe Verb sum, 
 the latter designating the time, and the Participle expressing 
 completion passively ; as, dmdtus Srdm, I existed (at some past 
 time) having been (previously) loved; i. e. I had been loved. The 
 Participle, being an Adjective in the Predicate, agrees with the 
 Subject. 
 
 II. THE PEEIPHEASTIC CONJUGATION. 
 
 The so-called Periphrastic Conjugation is formed by 
 combining the 'different Tenses of stim (1) with the Fu- 
 ture Act. Participle (Active Periphrastic); and (2) with 
 the Gerundive (Passive Periphrastic). 
 
 The Active Periphrastic (sometimes called First Peri- 
 phrastic) expresses action that is about to take place or 
 purposed; e.g. amaturus sUm, I am about to love; m5nY- 
 turus 6rat, he purposed advising; and so on through all 
 the Tenses of sfiwi. 
 
 The Passive Periphrastic (sometimes called the Second 
 Periphrastic) expresses action that must or ought to take 
 place ; e. ^. amandus sdm, / mu^st (or ought to) be loved; 
 audiendus fuTt, he ought to have been heard; and so on 
 through all the Tenses of sUm. 
 
 The Tense (person, number, etc.) employed of s&m is 
 the Tense (person, number, etc.) of the combined form ; 
 Smatuitts sum, Pres. Indie; Smaturiis 6ram, Imperf. In- 
 die; Smandtis sim, Pres. Subj.; Smandtts fuSrim, Pres.- 
 Perf. Subj. 
 
172 
 
 TABLE OF ENDINGS. 
 
 £ 
 
 
 .:2 
 
 2-9 
 
 .X 
 
 
 ^2 
 
 (3 d 
 
 o 
 o 
 
 » 
 
 H 
 
 .^ . -'a ta 
 
 
 .-■3 
 
 
 
 IS 
 
 
 IH>H «f 
 
 Si* S 
 « 
 
 ;s''a 
 
 I'? 
 
 U>9 
 
 IV I 
 
 .-2§ 
 
 M) I CD 
 
 1^ Pli 
 
 -3 
 
 a 'g s 
 
 E-1 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 n 
 
 n 
 n 
 
 p 
 12; 
 
 o 
 
 H 
 
 >} 
 
 a 
 o 
 o 
 
 a 
 
 !2i 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 
 o 
 > 
 
 M 
 
 H 
 O 
 <1 
 
 ? ? "B'3 
 
 ■■Si 
 
 . . , a-g 
 
 ' i-re 
 
 'f tJ. 
 
 i „-« °^ 
 
 ■»™^ 
 
 §1 
 
 
 ■£..>- 
 •='• g 
 
 o 
 -.SB 
 
 iS-=.9 
 
 •a 
 
 2 S 
 
 «n 
 
 did <. 
 
 :r>* 
 
 .-J -SiS 
 
 :g,i 
 
 ■ffS 
 
 '_ 
 
 
 _ s 
 
 6!g 
 
 ■^"f.-S 
 
 ^lO 
 
 ^™E|.M 
 
 (N-* 
 
 1 ^1 
 
 rSTi 
 
 c d 
 
 03 OS 
 
 cf ft?2 
 
 *h03 
 
 
 
 
 ■a ■a 
 
 O 
 o 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 a> 
 
 H -5 
 o S 
 
 |2i f> 
 
 
 
 ^4! § 
 
 
 
 
 hW « 
 
 41? 
 
 ill 
 
 Sflil g 
 
 '2>iS 
 
 
 ■ f 
 
 .. ■§ 
 
 
 •-S i 
 
 >Sj! =5 
 
 .a 
 
 CM) 
 
 ■Sf 
 
 Conjugations. 
 
TABLE OF ENDINGS. 
 
 173 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 
 o 
 
 > 
 
 
 
 
 > g 
 
 H £ 
 
 3 
 
 o 
 
 M 
 O 
 
 a 
 > 
 
 M 
 
 s 
 
 "1 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 ■a'S 
 
 1" 
 
 
 -5^ 
 
 «s 
 
 S fi* 
 
 sSss 
 
 
 f^ 1 • 
 
 1 • 2^3 
 
 
 
 . . ;?3m 
 
 
 S rfOJ 
 
 Tfiw H^ 
 
 
 "tf 
 
 rcJ O 
 
 
 - a 
 
 f^ ^ faO 
 
 
 (d 
 
 cT Ph'3 
 
 
 of 
 
 15* 
 
174 
 
 VERBS IN 10. 
 
 § 107. VERBS IN -id OF THE THIRD CON- 
 JUGATION. 
 
 Some Verbs of the Third Conjugation insert I before 
 the ending in some of the parts formed on the Present- 
 stem, as shown in the following paradigm of cdp^S^ to 
 take. The i is dropped before 1, and ^; also before ^ in 
 the Imperative. 
 
 ACTIVE. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Imperf. 
 FuL 
 
 cap- 
 
 c§.p-i- 
 
 cS,p-i- 
 
 -ebam, 
 -am, 
 
 -ebas, 
 -ea, 
 
 -It, 
 -ebit, 
 
 -5t, 
 
 -imus, 
 
 -ebamus, 
 
 -emus, 
 
 -ebatia, 
 -etis, 
 
 -i-unt, 
 
 -ebant. 
 -ent. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Pres. cap-i- -am, 
 Imperf. c&p- -SrSm, 
 
 -as, 
 -eres, 
 
 -at, 
 -Sret, 
 
 -amus, 
 -Sremus, 
 
 -atis, 
 
 -SretTs, 
 
 -ant. 
 
 -erent. 
 
 IMPESATIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 FuL 
 
 cSp- 
 cSp- 
 
 -itS, 
 
 -its. 
 
 -US. 
 -itotS, 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 cEpSrS. 
 
 PARTICIPLE, oap-i-ens> 
 
 OERUND, cS.p-i-e-ndi. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Pra. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Fat.. 
 
 c5p- 
 
 cip-i- 
 
 cip-i- 
 
 -i-OP, 
 -ebar, 
 -Sr, 
 
 -SrYs, 
 
 -ebaris, 
 
 -eris, 
 
 -■(tur, 
 
 -ebatur, 
 
 -etur, 
 
 -Imiir, 
 
 -ebamur, 
 
 -emur, 
 
 -imini, 
 
 -Sbaminl, 
 
 -emini. 
 
 -i-untfir. 
 -ebantur. 
 -entur. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Pres. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 cS,p-i- 
 cap- 
 
 -Sr, 
 -grgr. 
 
 -ana, 
 -greris, 
 
 -atur, 
 -eretur, 
 
 -amur, 
 
 -gremfir, 
 
 -amtni, 
 -eremini. 
 
 -antur. 
 
 -SrentuT. 
 
 IMPEBATIVE. 
 
 Pres, 
 Fat. 
 
 cap- 
 cap- 
 
 -grS, 
 -itSr, 
 
 -itor. 
 
 -imini, 
 -i-emini, 
 
 -i-untor. 
 
 PARTICIPLE, cS.p-i-e-niliia> 
 
VERBS IN lO. 175 
 
 The parts on the Perfect- and Supixie-sttms do not 
 vary from the usual formation. 
 
 EXEKCISE XLIV. 
 {Some Verbs whioh insert 1.) 
 
 cSp-i-8, oap-5-re, cep-i, capt-um, to take. 
 
 rS-oip-i-S, reo!p-e-re, reoep-i, reeept-iim, to take back. 
 
 8e recipere, to take one's self backj to retreat, 
 
 ac-eip-i-5, aocip-e-rS, accep-i, accept-iim, to take to one's sel/, to receive, 
 
 oup-i-8, oup-e-re, ofipiv-i, oupit-iim, to desire, 
 
 fao-i-3, fao-e-re, fee-i, faot-um, to do, to make. 
 
 con-fic-i-S, con-fio-e-re, con-fec-i, confect-um, to Jinisli, 
 
 rap-i-o, rap-e-re, rap-u-i, rapt-um, to seize, carry off, 
 
 di-rip-i-8, dirip-e-re, diripu-i, di-rept-um, to plunder. . 
 
 Remarh 1. — The Imperative Present Active second Singular 
 of fdcia is fdc, and the Passive is supplied by the Irregular Verb 
 ^5 (I 111, 7). The compounds with Prepositions change & into 
 i, and are inflected regularly in the Passive ; as, conficidr, con- 
 flel, confeotUs; compounded with other words, f&do retains the 
 &, and has ■/& in the Passive ; as, p&Ufm, pliU,fitr%, pdtifactUs. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 German! toimalii (§ 39) quae hello cepSrant diis macta- 
 hant. Nostri in hostes impgtiim fecerunt, atqu6 eos (§ 83, 
 1) in fligara dSderunt. Helvetii pSr SequSnorum fines itSr 
 faciebant. Hostes, qui pSr provincia,m itSr tentavSrant, in 
 fines suos se rgceperunt. Caesar &h Helvetiis obsides 6t 
 arm3, aecepSrS,t. ImpSrator aurtim qu3d a regS accepSrat, 
 militibus dSdit. Milites proeliiim f3,c8r6 cttpiverunt. Cae- 
 sar dScSm diebtis pontSm confecit. Eomani'virgines S^bi- 
 noriim ra,puerunt. Hostes atroces t6t3;m urbgm diripient. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The enemy will retreat from the mountain to the river. 
 The king will lay waste the country (agros) which he has 
 
176 PASSIVE CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 conquered with fire and sword. Our horsemen had made 
 an attack upon the enemy's footmen. The forces of the 
 enemy, that were making a journey through our province, 
 plundered many villages. The lieutenant, with five legions 
 which he had received from Caesar, hastened into the bound- 
 aries of the Aeduans. The consul will not finish the bridge 
 in six days. The general desires to make an end of the war. 
 
 For peculiarities of Tense-form ation and Conjugation, and compo- 
 sition of Verbs, see Appendix. 
 
 EXERCISE XLV. 
 §108. TPIE PASSIVE CONSTEUCTION. 
 
 1. The same idea may be expressed both in the Active 
 and the Passive form ; as, Helvetii legdtos mittunt, the Hel- 
 vetians send ambassadors; or, legdtl Sth Helvetils mittuntUr, 
 ambassadors are sent by the Helvetians. 
 
 2. ^The Object in the Active becomes the Subject in the 
 Passive; and the Subject in the Active is expressed by 
 the Ablative with the Preposition a or &b. (Ablative 
 OP the Agent.) 
 
 £emark 1. — If the Ablative expresses, not the Agent, or Doer 
 of the action, but only the Oaitse, Means, Instrument, the Prep- 
 osition is not used ; as, sMmUliis bdv^m conclt&t, the goad urges on 
 the ox ; Passive, hoa sttm&lo eoncttatUr, the ox is urged on by the 
 goad. 
 
 Remark 2. — As Intransitive Verbs have no Object in the Act- 
 ive, they are not used ■personally in the Passive, except with a 
 Cognate or Equivalent Subject. See \ 150, Remarks 1, 2. 
 
 3. Rule of Syntax. — Verbs v^hich in the Active take 
 another case in addition to the Objects Accusative, in the 
 Passive retain that other case ; as, mSgistgr pitiiro librtim 
 dSt ; Passive, llbfir puSro a mSgistro dSttir. 
 
DEPONENT VERBS. 177 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Eegiua a,b ancillis Smatur. MS,gistSr bSniis ab omnibus 
 pugris amabitiir. Tuae saiutis causa (§ 29, 1) mOneris, Pa- 
 tSr a f ilio suo ^mattls est. Templum d6 marmSrS (§ 40) ab 
 impgratorS aedif icatfim est. LeO, qui in silva a servis visiis 
 est, multos hSmines ia,niavSrS,t. Gallia, est omnis divisS, in 
 partes tres. Helvetii una ex partS fluming Rheno, altissimo 
 atquS latissimo continentiir. LSgiones, quae in provincia con- 
 scriptae sunt, a Caesa,r6 ex hibernis educenttir. Quidam ex 
 mllitibiis magnitudiuS pSricttli perterriti sunt. CastrS, tri- 
 bfis diebQs (§ 66, 2) a consttlS mSvebuntfir. ImprSbi omnea 
 a deo punientiir. Haec a nobis audita, sunt. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 (Change each of the foregoing exercises from the Passive 
 to the Active construction.) 
 
 DEPONENT YERBS. 
 
 § 109. 1. Deponent Verbs are such as have a Passive 
 form with an Active meaning. 
 
 They are called Deponent (laying aside), because they 
 lay aside their Active form and Passive meaning. 
 
 2. They are inflected throughout like Passive Verbs, 
 and have also the Gerund, Participles, and Supine of the 
 Active Voice. The Gerundive and sometimes the Per- 
 fect Participle have also a Passive meaning. The Ge- 
 rundive is found only in Transitive Deponents, or used 
 impersonally of Intransitive Deponents ; as, omnlhtis mi% 
 riendUm est, all must die. 
 
178 
 
 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 mTr-5-r, mira-rl, mirat-Qs sum, to admire. 
 
 First (lonjug. 
 
 Second Conjug. fate-o p, fate-ri, fass-iis sum, to confess. 
 ut-6 r, ut-T, US-US sQm, to use, 
 pat-i-6-r, pat-i, pass-us sum, to suffer. 
 
 Fourth Conjug. meti-6-r, metl-rl, mens-iis sum j to measure. 
 
 Third Conjug. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Imperf. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Free. Per/. 
 
 PaalrPerf, 
 
 Fid. Per/. 
 
 mir-S-r, 
 I admire. 
 
 mira-bS-r, 
 / was admir- 
 
 mira-bo-r, 
 I sliaU admire. 
 
 mirat-us sum, 
 / have admivr- 
 
 mirat-u9 SrEm, 
 I had admired. 
 
 mirat-us erS, 
 
 I shall have ad- 
 mired. 
 
 fate-o-r, 
 I confess. 
 
 fSte-lia-r, 
 
 I was con- 
 feseing. 
 
 fate-bo-r, 
 
 / eJiall con- 
 fess. 
 
 fass-i^s sum, 
 / have con- 
 
 fass-us SrHiu, 
 / had con- 
 
 fass-ua erS, 
 
 I shall have 
 confessed. 
 
 ut-5-r, 
 I use. 
 
 ut-e-ba-r, 
 I was using. 
 
 ut-a-r, 
 IshaUttse. 
 
 us-tis S&TO.^ 
 I Iiave used. 
 
 US-US eram, 
 I had lued. 
 
 us-iis erS, 
 
 J shall have 
 used. 
 
 pat-i-o-r, 
 
 Isi^er. 
 
 pSt-i-e-bJi-r, 
 
 I was sv^'er- 
 mg. 
 
 pHt-i-S-r, 
 / shall aVfffer. 
 
 pass-us stim, 
 I have suf- 
 fered. 
 
 pass-us eram. 
 I Juid suffer- 
 ed. 
 
 pass-us Sro, 
 
 I shall have 
 suffered. 
 
 meti-5-r, 
 I measure. 
 
 meti-e-b£-T, 
 
 I was measur- 
 ing. 
 
 meti-£-T, 
 I shall meas- 
 
 mens-{ls siim, 
 I have meas- 
 ured. 
 
 mens-fis erlim, 
 I had measur- 
 ed. 
 
 mens-us Sr9, 
 / shall have 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PresenL 
 
 Tmperf. 
 
 Prea. Perf. 
 
 Pagt-Perf. 
 
 mir-S-r, 
 
 / may admire. 
 
 mira-rg-r, 
 I might ad- 
 
 mirat-i^s sim, 
 
 I mxaj have ad- 
 mired. 
 
 mirat-us es- 
 sSm, 
 
 / miglU have 
 admired. 
 
 fate-£-r, 
 
 / may con- 
 fess. 
 
 fate-r5-r, 
 
 / might con- 
 fe>8, 
 
 fass-us Sim, 
 
 J mm] have 
 confessed. 
 
 fass-us 
 sem, 
 
 / mj^ht have 
 confessed. 
 
 ut-a-r, 
 I may use. 
 
 ut-e-rS-r, 
 / might use. 
 
 us-us sim. 
 
 I may Jiave 
 used. 
 
 us-us essem, 
 
 Imightliave 
 
 used. 
 
 pat-i-a-r, 
 / may suffer. 
 
 pat-5-rS-r, 
 
 I might suf- 
 fer. 
 
 pass-us fltm, 
 
 I may have 
 euff'ered. 
 
 pass-iis 
 sem, 
 / migJU have 
 
 meti-5-r, 
 
 / may meas- 
 ure. 
 
 meti-rE-r, 
 
 I might mea 
 ure. 
 
 mens-fis simv 
 
 Z mxiy hive 
 measured. 
 
 mens-iis es- 
 sSm, 
 
 J might have 
 measured. 
 
DEPONENT \ERBS. 
 
 179 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 ihttm-e. 
 
 mira-rg, 
 admire thou. 
 
 mlra-tor, 
 
 thou shall ad- 
 mire. 
 
 fate-rg, 
 confess thou. 
 
 fate-tor, 
 
 thou shall 
 confess. 
 
 ut-S-rS, 
 use thou. 
 
 ut-i-tor, 
 thou Shalt 
 
 pat-S-r6, 
 eujf'er thou. 
 
 pat-i-tor, , 
 
 thou shaU suf- 
 fer. 
 
 meti-rS, 
 
 measure Hum. 
 
 meti-tor, 
 
 (houshaUmea»- 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 P&rfect. 
 
 Putwre. 
 
 Fut. Perf. 
 
 mira-ri, 
 
 to admire, 
 
 xnirat-iis (-a, 
 -um,) esse, 
 
 to have ad/mir- 
 ed. 
 
 mirat-ur-Ss 
 (-a, -um,) esse, 
 to he about to 
 admire. 
 
 mirAt-UB (-a, 
 'fim,) forS, 
 
 to have been 
 about to admire. 
 
 fate-ri, 
 to confess. 
 
 fass-us (-E, 
 -ilm,) esse, 
 
 to have con- 
 fessed. 
 
 fass-ur-us 
 {-a,-5m,)es3ei 
 to be about to 
 confess. 
 
 fass-us (-a, 
 -iim,) fSrS, 
 
 to have been 
 about to con 
 fess. 
 
 ut-i, 
 to use. 
 
 as-us (-a, 
 ■iiin,) esse, 
 foluweused. 
 
 us-ur-us(-&, 
 -iim,) essS, 
 
 to he about 
 to use. 
 
 us-ils (-a 
 'um,} fore, 
 
 to have been 
 about to use. 
 
 pat-i, 
 to suffer, 
 
 pass-US (-S, 
 
 -um,) esse, 
 to have i 
 fered. 
 
 pas8-ur-us(-a 
 -Gm,) esse, 
 to be about t 
 
 »/- 
 
 pass-iis (■ 
 um,) f orS, 
 
 to have been 
 about to suffer. 
 
 xneti-Ti, 
 
 to measv/re. 
 
 mens-iis (-S,, 
 iim,) esse, 
 
 to have meas- 
 ured. 
 
 mezis-ur-us)-i 
 tim,) essS, 
 to be about i 
 measure. 
 
 mens-Gs, (-s 
 um,) fore, 
 
 to have been 
 about to measure. 
 
 PAKTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Gerwidive. 
 
 mira-n-s, 
 
 admiring. 
 
 mirat-us, -a, 
 -um, 
 
 having admir- 
 ed. 
 
 mirat-uT-us, 
 
 -a, -i3m, 
 
 about to ad- 
 mire. 
 
 mira-nd-tis, -E, 
 um, 
 to be admired. 
 
 fate-n-s, 
 confessing. 
 
 fass-iis, -a, 
 -iim, 
 
 hamng con- 
 fessed. 
 
 fass-ur-us, 
 
 -a, -um, 
 
 about to con- 
 fess. 
 
 fate-ad-us, 
 -a, -um, 
 
 to be con- 
 fessed. 
 
 ut-e-n-s, 
 using. 
 
 us-us, -a, 
 'iim,, 
 
 having used. 
 
 us-ur-us, -a, 
 
 -iSm, 
 
 c^out to 
 use. 
 
 iit-e~nd-ti&, 
 a, -iim, 
 to be used. 
 
 pat-i-e-n-s, 
 
 suffering. 
 
 pass-fis, -a, 
 -um, 
 
 having suf- 
 fered. 
 
 pasB-ur-iis, -a, 
 -iim, 
 
 about to suf- 
 fer. 
 
 pat-i-e-nd-iis, 
 •a, -iim, 
 to be suffered. 
 
 meti-e-n-B, 
 
 measuring. 
 
 mens-ils, -a, 
 iim, 
 
 having meas- 
 ured, 
 
 mens-i!r-iis, -a, 
 iim, 
 
 about to meas- 
 
 meti-e-nd-iis, 
 'EL, -iim, 
 to be jneasvr- 
 
 GERUND. 
 
 mira-nd-i, 
 of admiring. 
 
 fate-nd-i, 
 
 of confessing. 
 
 ut-e-nd-T, 
 
 of using. 
 
 pat-i-e-nd-i, 
 
 of suffering. 
 
 meti-e-nd-T, 
 
 of meojiuriii 
 
 SUPINE, 
 
 mirat-iim, 
 mirat-ii. 
 
 fass-iim, 
 
 fass-ii. 
 
 us-um, 
 iis-ii. 
 
 pass-um, 
 
 pasa-ii. 
 
 mens-um, 
 Imens-u. 
 
180 DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 3. The Verbs awhS, I dare, JldB, I trust, gaudeO, \ 
 delight, and s6le6, I am accustomed, want the Perfect- 
 stem, and form their Perfect Tenses like the Passive; 
 as, aus^ sWm, I have dared ; fisUs stim, I have trusted ; 
 ffdvlsUs sum, I have rejoiced ; sbUius sUin, I have been 
 accustomed. These are called Semi-Deponents, or Neuter 
 
 4. Here may also be observed the Verbs vS,pM8, 1 am 
 beaten ; vg/ieo, I am sold ; exsuW, I am banished (live in 
 exile); and fW, I am made; which have an Active form 
 with a Passive meaning. 
 
 6. Most of the Deponents have a Middle force (that is, 
 they are equivalent to the Active with a Reflexive Pro- 
 noun); as, prdftciscdr, I begin to put myself forward; 
 i. e. I set out; utdr, I employ myself (with a thing); i. e. 
 I use (a thing). 
 
 EXEECISE XLVI. 
 § 110. Vocabulary. 
 
 mSr-o-r, -a-ri, -at-u8 sum, to delay. frumentarius, -a, -um, of com, 
 
 con-6-r, -a-ri, -at-iis sum, 1o attempt. res frumentaria, provisions. 
 
 ^GpvilS-Ty -&~Ti, -sit-u.a Bum, to plunder, publicus, -a, -fim, public, 
 
 hort-6-r, -a-ri, -at-us sum, to exhort, privatus, -a, -um, private, 
 
 Tmit-S-r, -a-ri, -at-us sum, to imitate, mors, mort-is, death, 
 
 tue-S-r, -e-ri, tuit-us and tut-us sum, suppliciiim, -i, punishmcjit, 
 
 to protect. peccatum, -i, fault, sin, 
 
 confite-o-r, -e-ri, confess-us sum, to amor, -or-is, love, 
 
 confess. scelus, -er-is, crime, wickedness. 
 
 sequ-5-r, sequ-i, secut-us sum, to fol- causa, -ae, cause (Abl., for the 
 
 low. sake of; commonly comes after 
 
 ulcisc-o-r, -i, ult-us sum, to avenge. the Gen.), 
 
 pat-i-o-r, pat-i, pass-us sum, to en- pauci, -ae,.-a, few, 
 
 dure, suffer, permit. menti-5-r, -i-ri, -it-us earn, to lie. 
 
 con-gred-i-o-r, oongred-i, cougress-us meti-6-r, -i-ri, mens-Qs sum, to 
 
 sum, to meet; in a hostile sense, to measure. 
 
 contend. 
 
lEEEGULAE VERBS. 181 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Caes3,r in hoc oppido paucoS dies (§ 66, 2) rei frumenta- 
 riae causa mOrabattir. FluminS,, quae rScentibiis imbribtta 
 auctS, sunt (see augerS), multos dies consillSm mCrabuiitur. 
 Helvetii in Aeduoriim fines pervengrant, eorumquS Sgros 
 popiilabantiir. Hostes pSr provinciSin nostra,m it6r fac6r6 
 conati grant. ImpSratSr fortis milites hortatiis est. LibSri 
 non sempgr virtutSm p3.rentiim imitantttr. Qui suos libgros 
 non tuetiir (§ 87, B, 8), h6mS est turpissimtts. TurpS est men- 
 tiri. Nonng scfilSrS, tu^ confessiis 6s ? Equites nostri hostes 
 &d fliimgn sficiiti sunt. Hic latrS gr3,vissimiim suppliciiim 
 pfttietur. Cflm CicSronS saepS in urbS congressiis siim. Hac 
 in re Caesar publicas ac privatas injurias ulttts esft 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 A wise man always confesses his faults. Davus confessed 
 his love for (use Gen.) the maid-servant. The brave son will 
 avenge his father's death. Our skirmishers delayed the jour- 
 ney of the enemy many hours. The prudent consul will not 
 suffer the enemy to lead their forces through the most fertile 
 part of Gaul. To lie is the basest of all things. The thief 
 had confessed all his crimes. The general on the sixth day 
 measured (out) corn to the soldiers. It is easier to imitate 
 vice than virtue. The Aeduans, having contended with 
 AriovistuSj king of the Germans, were conquered. Our men 
 will attempt to follow the enemy through the forest. 
 
 lEEEGULAR VERBS. 
 
 §111. 1. Irregular Verbs do not use (apparently), in 
 some of their parts formed from the Present-stem, the 
 endings of either of the four Conjugations. The forma 
 called irregular are, for the most part, either syu'^opated 
 
 16 
 
182 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 or ancient forms. The Tenses formed on the Perfect- and 
 the Supine-stems are alike in all Ve^-bs. 
 
 2. The Irregular Verbs are, ess6, to be ; vell6, to be 
 willing; ferrg, to bear; 6d6r6 or ess6, to eat; fieri, to be 
 made, to become; Ir6, to go; quirfi, to be able; and their 
 compounds. 
 
 3. V6lo, veils,* v6lul, to wish, to be willing. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Present. v618, vis, vult ; 
 
 vSlumiis, vultts, vSlunt. 
 Imperfect. vSlebam, vOlebas, etc. (regular), 
 future. v61&m, vOles, etc. (reg.). 
 Pres. Perf v61u-i, -i-sti, -1-t, etc. (.reg.). 
 Pad-Perf. v61u-Sr3,m, -gras, etc. (reg.). 
 Fut. Perf. v(5lu-SrS, -8rls, etc. (reg.). 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present, v6IJm, v6lls, vSlit; 
 
 vSlimus, vSIItTs, vSlint. 
 Imperfect, velISm, velles, vell6t ; 
 
 vellemijs, velletTs, vellent. 
 Pres. Perf. v51u-Srim, -firls, -6rit, etc. (reg.). 
 Pad-Perf. v61u-issSm, -isses, etc. (reg.). 
 
 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Present. vell6. Pres. v61ens (reg.). 
 
 Perfect. v61u-issS (reg.). 
 
 JjioT'E.— VBlS is a Verb of the Third Conjugation, the Present-stem 
 being vSl-, which, by root-vowel change, appears as vel-, vUl-, in cer- 
 tain Tenses. The forms vis, vuU, and vulits are syncopated from vSl-U, 
 vOl-it, ai'.d vSl-Uls, interchanging H for d. The ending -iimUs is an 
 old form for -Imiis (of. maxB/mUs and maxlmS^). Veils and vellSm are 
 
 * In the following paradigms the irregular forms are in bold type. 
 
lEEEGtJLAE VEEBS. 
 
 183 
 
 syncopated forma of vgl-Sri and vSl-i-rim, i being elided, and r passing 
 into I for euphony: vil-l-rS, vel-ri, vel-li; vil-l-rSm, velrrSm, vd-Um. 
 The endings -1m, -Is, -It, etc. of the Subjunctive Present are old 
 forms found also in s?m, sis, etc., idXm, Sdls, etc. 
 
 4. Nolo is compounded of non and vOlS. 
 
 N6I6, nolle, nolui, to be unwilling. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Present. nolS, nonvTs, nonvult ; 
 
 nolumus, nonvultTs, ndlunt. 
 
 Imperfect. n61eba,m, nolebas, etc. (jeg.). 
 Future. nol&m, noles, etc. (jeg.). 
 Fres. Ferf. nolu-I, -i-sti, -i-t, etc. (reg.). 
 Fast-Perf. nolu-grSm, -Sras, etc. (reg.). 
 Fut. Ferf. nolu-SrS, -6r!s, etc. (reg.). 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. nolTm, noils, nolit; 
 
 ndlimQs, nolitfs, n5lint. 
 Imperfect. nolISm, nolles, nollgt; 
 
 nollemus, nolletTs, nollent. 
 Fres. Ferf. n6lu-6rim, -Sris, etc. {reg.). 
 Fast-Perf. nolu-issSm, -isses, etc. (reg.). . 
 
 IMPEEATIVE. 
 
 Singular. 
 Present. 2. noli, 
 Future. 2. nSIIto, 
 
 3. nolitS; 
 
 Plural. 
 
 2. nolltg. 
 
 2. nolitotS, 
 
 3. nSlunto. 
 
 PAKTICIPLE. 
 Present, nolens (reg.). 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 . Present. n5ll6. 
 Perfect. nolu-issS (reg.). i 
 
 Note. — The same remarks apply to noli as to it? primitive vHVi. 
 The n and v are dropped, a contraction ensues, md hence the first 
 
184 
 
 lEEEGULAE VERBS. 
 
 Byllalle is always long: n5{n-v)8W, no-SW, i.olS. The uncontracteti 
 form is retained in the second and tliird Singular and second Plural 
 of the Indicative Present. Tlie Imperative endings -I, -Hi, -ito, etc., 
 are irregular, belonging properly to the Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 5. MdlS is compounded of md (the root of m&gls), 
 more, and vSlo. 
 
 Mais, mails, maluT, to prefer, to be more willing. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Present. mala, mavfs, mavult ; 
 
 malumus, mavultfs, malunt. 
 Imperfect. ' maleba,m, malebas, etc. (reg.). 
 Future. malSm, males, malSt, etc. (reg.^. 
 Pres. Perf. malu-i, -i-sti, -i-t, etc. (reg.). 
 Past-Perf. malu-Sra,m, -Sras, etc. (reg.}. 
 Fut. Perf. malu-6r6, -Sris, etc. (reg.}. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. malTm, malls, malTt; 
 
 malTmus, malftTs, mallnt. 
 Imperfect. malISm, malles, mall6t; 
 
 mallemijs, malletTs, mallent. 
 Pres. Perf. malu-6rim, -6rfs, -Srit, etc. (reg.). 
 Past-Perf. malu-iss6m, -isses, etc. (reg.). 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 Present. maU6. Perfect. malu-iss6. 
 
 Note. — MdlS is formed in the same manner as nolS, and its first 
 syllable is long for the same reason. 
 
 6. F&rS is a Verb of the Third Conjugation, which 
 has become irregular by syncopation ; as, fers for fSr-1^; 
 fefr-CUt for /^•-1r-&s; fer-rS for f&r-S-rS; fer-r^ for fSr- 
 g-r&m; /&• for /&•-?; fer-t8 for f^-1r-tg; fer-rSr for ftr- 
 
lEEEGULAK VERBS. 
 
 185 
 
 2-r^r, etc. The Perfect and Supine-Stems are tUl- (t6l-, 
 cf. tolls) and tld-; latum for {fjlatfrni {t{d)ldtUni). 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. 
 F6rS, ferr6, tiili, latttm, to carry. 
 
 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present. f6r-§, fer-s, fer-t ; f6r-am, f&-as, etc. 
 
 fgr-i-miis, -tts, -u-nt. 
 
 Imperfect. fSr-eMm, -ebas, etc. fer-rBm, -res, -r5t; 
 
 fer-remus, -retis, -rent. 
 Future. fSr-am, fSr-es, etc. 
 
 Fres. Ferf. tfil-i, tfil-i-sti, etc. tiil-6rim, tul-6rIS, etc. 
 
 Fdst-Ferf. tfil-fir^m, -6rSs, etc. tul-iss6m, -isses, etc. 
 Fut. Ferf. tul-SrS, -6ris, etc. 
 
 IMPEEATIVE. INFINITIVE, 
 
 Present. 2. fer; Fres. fer-re, 
 
 2. fer-tS. Ferf tttl-issS, 
 
 Future. 2. fer-to, 3. fer-t6; Fut. lat-ur-tis 
 
 2. fer-tote. 3. fer-u-nto. 
 
 PAETICIPLES. 
 Present, fgr-e-ns, 
 Future, lat-ur-tis. 
 
 GEEUND. f6r-e-ndi. 
 
 SUPINE. I!^*-*^""' 
 (. lat-u. 
 
 PASSIVE VOICE. 
 F6r8r, ferri, lattts siim, to be carried. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. f6r-8-r,fer-rTs (or -rS),fer-tup. P/. fSr-imiir, etc, 
 
 Imperfect. f6r-ebS,r, f6r-ebaris, etc. 
 
 Future. fSr-3,-r, f6r-eris, etc. 
 
 Fres. Ferf. lat-fis sttm, etc. 
 
 Fast-Perf. lat-fis ^r&ia, etc. 
 
 Fut. Ferf. lat-tis 6ro, etc. 
 
 3»* 
 
18(^ 
 
 lEEEGULAE VEEBS. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. f6r-a,r, -aris, etc. 
 Imperfect. fer-r6r, -reris or -rer6, -reiiir; 
 fer-remur, -remTnl, -rentup. 
 
 Pres. Perf. lat-iis sinij etc. 
 Past-Perf. lat-iis essSm, etc. 
 
 Present. 
 
 IMPEEAXrVE. 
 2. fer-r6; Future. 2. fer-t6p, 3. fep-t5p; 
 
 2. fgr-imini. 3. f6r-u-nt6r, 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 fer-pl. 
 
 lat-flm iri. 
 
 PAETICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Future. lat-flm iri. Oerundive. fSr-e-nd-fis. 
 
 Perfect. lat-fls ess6 or fiiissS. lat-tis. 
 
 Put. Perf lat-fls fSrS. 
 
 7. Fl-o is used as the Passive of fdclS in the Tenses 
 formed on tlie Present-stem. The other parts of the 
 Passive are formed regularly from f&ciS. It is original- 
 ly an Intransitive Verb of the Fourth Conjugation, but 
 differs from other Verbs of that Conjugation in insert- 
 ing the connecting vowel S in the Infinitive Present and 
 Subjunctive Imperfect, and in these forms the i is short; 
 elsewhere the i is long. 
 
 Fi8, f!6pl, factfls sflm, to be done, to be made, to become. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Present. f i-S, f i-s, fi-t ; 
 
 (fi-mus, fi-tis), fi-u-nt. 
 Imperf. fi-ebS,m, -ebas, etc. 
 Future. fi-Sm, -es, etc. 
 Pres. Perf. fact-fls sflm, etc. 
 Past-Perf. fact-fls SrSm, etc. 
 Fut. Perf. fact-fls SrS, etc. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 fi-S,m, -as, etc. 
 
 f J-6-pem, -6-res, eta 
 
 fact-fls sim, etc. 
 fact-fls ess6m, etc. 
 
IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 187 
 
 lArPEEATIVE. 
 Present, f i, f i-tS. 
 Future. 
 Perfect. 
 Fut. Perf. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 fT-6-rI. 
 
 fact-ttm ill. 
 
 fact-US ess6 or fuissS. 
 
 fact-US f6rS. 
 
 PARTICIPLES, 
 
 f&c-i-e-nd-fls. 
 fact-iis. 
 
 Note. — PUwrtis sJm, fulm-ua essi (fSrS) often supply the place of 
 parts of /i5. 
 
 8.' £d-S-rS, to eat, is a regular Verb of the Third 
 Conjugation ; but, in addition to the regular tens&-forms, 
 it has some forms which, through contraction, resemble 
 the corresj)ondiug tense-forms of essS, to be, -viz.: 
 
 INDICATIVE PRES. 
 S. M-S, Sd-i-s or- e-s, 6d-i-t 
 or es-t ; 
 
 P. fid-i-mtis, gd'i-tis or es- 
 tis, 6d-u-nt. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE IMPERF. 
 Sd-6-rS-m or es-s6-m, S-d-Sr-ea 
 
 or es-se-s, gd-S-r6-t or es- 
 
 se-t. 
 gd-S-re-miis or es-se-mus, 6d- 
 
 S-re-tis or es-se-tis, M-6- 
 
 re-nt or es-se-nt. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 Pres./S. «d-eor P. 6d-i-tS or Fut. S. &d-i-t§ or P. gd-i-t6t6 t-r 
 es. es-te. es-to. es-tote, 
 
 6d-u-nt8. 
 
 INFINITIVE PEES. 
 Sd-fi-r6 or es-sS. 
 
 PASSIVE. 
 Indie. Pres. 6d-i-tiir or es-tur. 
 Subj. Imp. M-S-re-tur or es-se-tup. 
 
 Note. — ^The irregular forms of this Verb are syncopations of the 
 regular ones. Thus, Sd-Ks, ed-s (dropping d before s), es; id-It, Sd-t 
 (changing a! before t into s), est. In ZiS?'2m, etc., i is elided, d before 
 r passes into s, and r of the ending is assimilated with the last letter 
 of the stem, as in vel-lS: Sd-i-rim, ed-rim, es-rSm, essSm. The forms Sdlm, 
 idXs, etc., are found in the Subjunctive Present 
 
188 
 
 IREEGULAE VERBS. 
 
 9. /r?, to go, ID most of its parts has tho endings of 
 the Fourth Conjugation. The radical i is replaced by « 
 in the Indicative Present, first Singular and third Plu- 
 ral ; in the Subjunctive Present ; in the oblique cases of 
 the Present Participle ; and in the Gerund. 
 
 E6, irS, ivi, itttm, to go. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Pres. e-6, i-s, i-t ; 
 
 i-mfis, i-tis, e-u-nt. 
 Imperf. i-ba-m, I-ba-s, T-ba-t ; 
 
 I-ba-mus, etc. 
 Fut. I-b-5, r-bi-s, i-bi-t ; 
 
 i-bi-mus, etc. 
 Pres. P. iv-i, iv-i-sti, iv-i-t ; 
 
 iv-i-miis, etc. 
 Past-P. iv-gra-m, -6ra-s, -6ra,-t; 
 
 iv-6ra-mus, etc. 
 Fut. P. iv-Sr-8, -Sri-s, etc. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. ■ 
 e-S,-m, e-a-s, e-&-t ; 
 e-a-mils, etc. 
 i-r6-m, i-re-s, i-r6-t; 
 i-re-mus, etc. 
 
 iv-Sri-m, -6ri-s, -Sri-t ; 
 iv-Srl-miis, etc. 
 iv-issS-m, -isse-s, -issg-t ; 
 iv-isse-miis, etc. 
 
 IMPEKATIVE. INFINITIVE. 
 Pres. i; i-rS. 
 
 i-t6. 
 Fut. i-t5, i-t8 ; it-ur-iis essS. 
 
 i-totS, e-u-nto. 
 Per/. iv-iss6. 
 
 PARTICIPLE, 
 i-e-ns (Gen. e-u- 
 
 ntls). 
 it-ur-iis. 
 
 GERUND. 
 e-u-nd-T, 
 e-u-nd-o, etc. 
 
 SUPINE, 
 tt-iim. 
 
 Compounds of eS in the Perfect tenses drop v between the two vow 
 els, and have w instead of m, iSrclm instead of Ivlrdm, i&rS iiistearl of 
 ivSfS, etc. 
 
IREEGULAK VERBS. 189 
 
 10. QuirS, to be able, and n^quirS, to be unable, are 
 infleoted like irS, but are rarely used except in the Pres- 
 ent Indicative and Subjunctive. The Passive forms qul- 
 tSr, queuntUr, queaMr, quearMr, quiitis sUm, n&quitur, and 
 niquUd est, occur only with a Passive Infinitive and in 
 early writers; nSquitUr alone is classical. 
 
 11. For the Conjugation of essS, see §100. 
 
 Like essi are conjugated its compounds, except pro- 
 S'&m and possHm,. 
 
 12. ProsUm inserts a d for euphony wherever the 
 simple Verb begins with S; as, 
 
 Tnd. Pres. pro-siim, pro-d-6s, pr5-d-est, etc. 
 
 Ind. Imp. pro-d-eram, pr5-d-6ras, pro-d-6rat, etc. 
 
 13. Poss'&m is compounded of piit- (stem of pdtis), 
 able, and sUm, t before s passing into s. The pdtis is 
 sometimes written separately, and is then usually inde- 
 clinable. 
 
 Possum, posse, potui, lean, lam able. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 Pres. pos-sum, pSt-Ss, pot-est ; 
 
 pos-sumus, pot-estTs, pos-sunt. 
 Imp. p5t-6ram, p5t-eras, pot-grat; 
 
 pot-Sramds, etc. 
 Put. pot-6r5, pot-6rTs, p5t-6rTt; 
 
 pot Srimus, -erttTs, -Srunt. 
 Perf. potui, -i-sti, T-t ; 
 
 p6tu-i-mus, etc. 
 Past-P. p6tu-6ram, -Sras, -6rat; 
 
 potu-Sramus, etc. 
 Fut. P. p5t-u6r3, -6ris, -6rit ; 
 
 potu-Srimus, etc. 
 
190 ■ lEEEGULAE VEEBS. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Pres. pos-sTm, pos-sis, pos stt ; 
 
 pos-simus, pos-sItTs, pos-sint. 
 Imp. pos-sera, pos-ses, pos-s6t; 
 
 pos-semiis, pos-setfs, pos-sent. 
 Perf. p6tu-6rTm, -6ris, -erit, etc. 
 
 Past-Perf. pdtu-issSm, -isses, -issfit, etc. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 Present. pos-s5. Perfect. p5tu-issS. 
 
 The Participial form pdtens is used only as an Adjec- 
 tive. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Pugri pSr silvS,m densiim ibant. ImpSratores clari cap- 
 tivos vgneno ngearS nolunt. Aedui crudelitatSm Ariovisti, 
 Germanorum regis, ferrg non p6tuerunt. "Consul urbSm de- 
 fendSrg non pStSrit. CaesSr hiSmS 6pfis conf icSrg conabitttr. 
 Princeps p6r ftmicos pStens f iebat. Caesar, cum iis iSgion- 
 ibiis, quas ex hibernis edux6ra.t, in Galliam irS contendit 
 (hastened). In hac civitat6 sunt triS, miliS, (§ 64, Hem. &) 
 hSminflm qui armS, ferrS possunt. Imp6rat6r a militibfls 
 rex (§ 67, 3) facttts est. Nemo uno die sapiens fiSri pOtest. 
 Non quivis 6rat6r praestantissimfls fiSri p6test. Poet3, nas- 
 citur, non fit. SuperbiS, nobilitatis a plebS ferri non p6test. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Who can bear the cruelty of such a king? Can any 
 one {numquis) bear the insolence (insSlentiH) of this slave ? 
 AVho is willing to be slain by a robber ? We are unwilling 
 to hold the farmer's bull by the horns. The citizens are 
 unwilling to give their gold to that fellow (§ 84, Bern. Ji). 
 Who is unwilling to become rich and powerful ? Some of 
 the citizens will be unwilling to bear arms. The prudent 
 leader will not go into the enemy's country (/me«). Cicerc 
 
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 191 
 
 was made consul by the best of the citizens. This boy will 
 become a distinguished poet in a few years. Who can suffer 
 so great a punishment ? 
 
 DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 
 
 §112. 1. Defective Verbs are such as want some of 
 their parts. 
 
 2. There are many Verbs which are not used in all 
 the tenses. The following list contains such as are most 
 defective : 
 
 Odi, I hate. 
 CoepS, I have hegrm. 
 MeminX) I remember. 
 XiOf I say: 
 InquSm, I say. 
 
 Fariy to speah. 
 Quaeso, I beseech. 
 Ave, hail. 
 Salve, hail: 
 Apftge, begone. 
 
 Ced5, tell or give me. 
 Confit, it is done. 
 Defit, it is wanting. 
 Infit, he begins. 
 Ov&t, he rejoices. 
 
 § 113. Odi, coepi (for the Present of which indtpiS is 
 used), and m^ml.m are used for the most part in the Perfect 
 tenses, and hence are sometimes called Freteritive Verbs. 
 
 odT, 
 
 odgram, 
 odSro, 
 odSrTm, 
 SdissSm, 
 odissS, 
 osus, 
 osurus, 
 Pass. osus sQm. 
 
 Paet. 
 
 coepi, mSmTnl, 
 
 coepSram, memingram, 
 
 coep&ro, meminerS, 
 
 coepSrim, mSmTtiSrim, 
 
 coepissSm, mSmTnissem, 
 
 coepissS, mSmTnissS. 
 
 ooeptijs, 
 coepturus, 
 coeptus sQm. 
 
 Imp. mSmento, 
 mSmentotS. 
 Remark 1. — The Passive form of coepi {eoeptUs sum, etc.) ia 
 preferred with, a Passive Infinitive; as, urbs oppugnarl eo-rptd 
 est, the city began to be besieged. 
 
 Reimarh Z. — The tenses of odi and ttCtmim, though Perfect in 
 form, express incomplete action; thus, oi^r^m, I hated ; odiri. 
 
 ^{: 
 
192 
 
 DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 
 
 I shall hate ; mgmJrat, I have kept in mind, therefore, I remem- 
 ber; rnimlriirtim, I remembered. 
 
 The Perfects novl and consulvl have a similar meaning; thus, 
 nosc^, I find out, noiii, I have found out, I know; consuesco, I 
 accustom myself, consuevi, I am accustomed. 
 
 3. A-io, / say. 
 Ind. Pres. 
 
 aio,* §is, Sit; 
 
 -, aiunt.' 
 
 Ind. Imperf. 
 Subj. Pres. 
 Imperat. 
 
 aiebam, aiebas, etc. 
 
 , aias, aiat; , aiant. 
 
 ai (rare). Part, aiens (Adj. affirmative). 
 
 4. luquitm, qiMth I, used ouly after one or more words 
 of a quotation. 
 
 Ind. Pres. inquam, inquis, inquit; inquitnus, inquTtts 
 
 (late), inquiunt. 
 
 Ind. Imperf. , , inquiebat. 
 
 Ind. Future. , inquies, inquifit; , , . 
 
 Ind. Pres. Perf. (inqui), inquisti, inquTt; , , 
 
 Imperat. inque, inquTtS. 
 
 5. Fari, to speak. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Pres. , ,fa-tur. 
 
 Put. f a-b-o-r, , fa- 
 
 b-i-tiir. 
 Pres. Perf. f at-ds sum, etc. 
 Past-Perf. fat-Qs 6ram, etc. 
 
 IMPEEATIVE. 
 fa-r6 (poetic). 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 fari. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 fa-nt-Ts, etc., without Nom. (ex- 
 cept in the Plautine phrase, 
 fans atquS infans). 
 
 fat-US, fa-nd-us. 
 
 Geeund. fa-nd-i, etc. 
 Supine, fat-ii. 
 
 * i between two Vowels ( = j) is pronounced like y: a'-yo, a'^yunl, 
 a-ye'-bam. 
 
DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 193 
 
 Some other forms are used in the compouuds, though 
 all of thcra are defective. 
 
 6. QuaesS [old Jorun of quaero), I beseeoh. 
 
 Ind. Pres. quaeso, , quaesTt ; quaesQmus, , . 
 
 Quaesd and quaesumUs are old colloquial forms used 
 generally as a mere intensive expression, prythee. 
 
 7. Ave, haii! 
 
 Imperative, ave, avetfi, aveto. Inf. averS. 
 
 8. Salve, Imil! 
 
 Imperative, salve, salvet6, salveto. 
 
 Inf. salver6. Ind. Fut. salvebTs. 
 
 9. ApSgS, begone. 
 
 This is an old Imperative, used as an Interjection. 
 
 10. C6d6, tell thou, give me. 
 
 Imper. 24 Sing. c6do ; PI. cettg (only in the early poets), 
 contracted from cSditS. 
 
 11. Confit, it is done. 
 
 Ind. Pres. confit. Fut. confiSt. 
 
 iSubj. Pres. conflat. Imperf conf T6r6t. Inf. confTSri, 
 
 12. Defit, is wanting. 
 
 Indie. Pres. defift, defiunt. Fut. defi6t. 
 
 Subj, Pres. deflat. Inf. def iSri. 
 
 13. Infit, he begins. 
 Indie. Pres. inf it, infFunt. 
 
 14. Oy3t, he rejoices. 
 
 Indie. Pres. ovat. Subj. Pres. ' 6v6t. Imperf. SvarSt. 
 Participles. Pres. Svans. Perf. 6vatus. 
 Ger. 5vandT. 
 
 17 
 
194 
 
 IMPEESONAL VERBS. 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 , §114. 1. Verbs used only in the third person, and 
 not admitting of a personal Subject, are called Imper- 
 sonal. 
 
 2. Au Infinitive, or a Sentence used as a Noun, is 
 usually the Subject of an Impersonal Verb in the Active 
 Voice, and in the Passive the Subject is contained in the 
 Verb itself; as, ventum est a GaesdrS, (a coming) was 
 come by Caesar. As the English idiom requires a Sub- 
 ject, the Pronoun it is placed before an Impersonal Verb 
 iu translating. 
 
 Latin idiom. Becomes you to study 1 DScSt te stMerS. 
 English i^iom. It becomes you to study, J 
 
 3. The various tenses of Impersonal Verbs are formed 
 by adding the endings of the Third Person Singular to 
 the proper tense-stem. 
 
 ENDINGS. 
 
 FIRST 
 
 COM. 
 
 BECONB 
 
 CONJ. 
 
 THIKD 
 
 CONJ. 
 
 FOURTH 
 
 Inf. Free. -r5. 
 
 Inf. Prea. -rg. 
 
 Inf. Prea. e-rS. 
 
 Inf. Pre, 
 
 INB. 
 
 StJSJ. 
 
 IND. 
 
 SOTJ. 
 
 IND. 
 
 SUBJ. 
 
 IND. 
 
 -t. 
 
 -hU. 
 -Ht, 
 
 -rft. 
 
 -t. 
 
 -iSt. 
 -Ht. 
 
 -at. 
 -ret. 
 
 .!-t. 
 
 -e-bSt. 
 
 -e-t. 
 
 -S-t. 
 -e-rSt, 
 
 -t. 
 
 -ebat. 
 -it. 
 
 Prea. 
 
 Imp. 
 Ful. 
 
 Ind. Prea. Perf. -Jt ; 
 Btihi. " " -5rit. 
 
 Paat-Perf. -IrSt; 
 " " -isset. 
 
 -at. 
 -ret. 
 
 Put. Perf. -grit. 
 Inf. " -iss5. 
 
 The pupil will add these endings to the stems : 
 
 1st Conj. jtiva-, (Perf. juy-) o/ jtlva-t, it pleases, delights. 
 
 2d " d6ce-, [Per/. d6c-il-) of d6cS-t, it becomes. 
 
 3d " couting-, [Perf. contig-) of conting-i-t, it happens. 
 
 4th '' ev6ni-, {Perf. even-) of evSni-t, it turns out, happens. 
 
 * The stem voTel a, as in regular Verbs, is changed into e before 
 the ending of the Subjunctive Pcaseni. (First Conjugation). In all the 
 Conjugations the stem vowel is shortened before t (ending of 3d Per- 
 son Sing.). 
 
IMPEESONAL VERBS. 195 
 
 § 115. The Impersonab embrace Verbs : 
 
 I. Relating to the weather; as, ningtt, it snows ; tdn&t, it 
 
 thunders. 
 
 II. Relating to the feelings; as, p'&dit, it shames; inlserM, it 
 
 grieves (the Person affected by the feeling is put in 
 
 the Accusative ; me misSret, it grieves me ; I grieve). 
 
 III. The Passive of Intransitive Verbs ; as, currltur, it is 
 
 run (when the Agent is mentioned, it is put in the 
 Ablative with the Preposition a or ab); as, (Act.) 
 Helvetil fortUSr pugnaverunl, the Helvetians fought 
 bravely; (Impers.) )ih Helvetiis fnrtitSr pugnatUm est, 
 it was fought bravely by the Helvetians. 
 
 IV. Many Verbs not strictly Impersonal (which generally 
 
 have an Infinitive or Sentence as the Subject); as, 
 aeeldlt, it happens ; evenlt, it turns out ; pl&e&t, it 
 seems good'; delect&t, jUvat, it delights; decSt, it is 
 becoming. 
 
 EXERCISE XLVIII. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 Tesper, -er-i, evening. acriter, (Adv.), actively, fiercely, 
 
 calamitas, -tat-is, disaster, ab utrisque, by both partiee. 
 
 diu (Adv.), a long time, long. utrimquS (Adv.), on both aides. 
 
 pScunia, -ae, money, a bribe. 
 
 e-5, i-re, iv-i, it-Gm (§ 111, 9), fo go. 
 
 veni-5, Teni-re, ven-i, vent-um, to come. 
 
 consTil-3, -S-re, cousulu-x, consult-um, to consult, 
 
 in-fer-8, in-fer-re, in-tul-i, il-lat-um, to bring upon, inflict. 
 
 pugn-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to fight. 
 
 Remark. — Impersonal Verbs which are Transitive in meaning 
 have a direct Object in the Accusative. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 LibSros dScSt pS-rentes suos Smarg. Reggm non dScSt 
 leges civitatis vi61arS. BelM magnS, gSrgrS Romanes de- 
 
196 PARTICLES ADVEEBS. 
 
 lectalj^t. Diu 6t acritSr ab utrisqug pugnatilm est. Ab 
 liora septima a,d vespSrtim pugnatiim grtlt. E6d6ra die, 
 quo (§ 171) in fines Sequstuorfim ventum est, principea 
 Galliae ad eiim convenerunt. A cousiilibiis de re publica 
 coiisultum est. Cantum Svium audirS poetiim juvSt. Te 
 non dSc6t nobis belliim inferriS. Dclectat-n6 te maximas 
 (§ 72, 5) calamitiites rei publicae intullssG ? 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 It becomes masters to give food to their servants. It be- 
 comes no one (nemS) to do an injury. It delights this wicked 
 chief to burn prisoners with fire. It was fought fiercely by 
 both parties from the fourth hour till (to) sunset. The 
 noble chief will consult (express it impersonally) concern- 
 ing the safety of the commonwealth. It does not become 
 a judge to receive a bribe. This wicked centurion has 
 brought a great disaster upon the army. 
 
 PARTICLES. 
 
 §116. Those parts of speech which are not inflected 
 are called Particles. They are Adverbs, Prepositions, 
 Conjunctions, and Interjections. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 §117. 1. An Adverb is a word used to limit the 
 meaning of a Verb, Adjective, or another Adverb. 
 Some Adverbs also limit Nouns which have the sense 
 of a Participle or Adjective. 
 
ADVERBS. 
 
 197 
 
 2. In respect to form, Adverbs are Primitive or De- 
 rivative, 
 
 3. In respect to meaning. Adverbs may be divided 
 into several classes; as, 
 
 TemporaLj denoting time ; as, h6die, to-day ; cran, to- 
 morrow. 
 Local, denoting place ; as, ?6!, there ; nic^e, thence. 
 Modal, denoting manner ; as, h^n^., well ; niM^, badly. 
 Negative ; as, nbn, not ; ne — quiderrij not even. 
 
 4. As we hav6 seen (§91, table), some Adverbs are 
 Correlative, and such are derived from Pronouns. We 
 tabulate again for convenience^ giving the Derivatives : 
 
 DEMONSTKATIVE. 
 
 fibi, there. 
 
 \ ibidem j'lwi (here. 
 
 Tinde, thence. 
 ■< indid6m,/romWie 
 (_ samejiUice^ 
 
 ea, thai way. 
 
 {eo, thiiher. 
 eodem, to the Bame 
 place. 
 
 turn, then. 
 
 f ubi, where. 
 lubicunquS, wJterever. 
 
 (undS, whence, 
 < undecumque, whence~ 
 (_ soever. 
 
 qua, which way. 
 
 {quo, whUher. 
 quoquo, 1 whUher- 
 quocumque, J soever. 
 
 cum (quGm), when, 
 
 {quando, when. 
 quandoque, ) when- 
 quandocumquS, J ever. 
 
 iiM? where f 
 unde I whence f 
 qua 1 which way f 
 quo ? wMtlier f 
 
 quando ? when f 
 
 INDEFINITE. 
 
 'aliciibi, somew'i ">■('. 
 ubique, everywhere. 
 ubivis, whereve>- 
 
 you please. 
 alicundS, from 
 
 somewhere. 
 undique, from all 
 
 sides. 
 undgvis, from any- 
 where you please. 
 aliqua, some way 
 
 or oilier. 
 .qualibSt, any way. 
 aliquo, snme- 
 
 whitlier. 
 quovia, quolibSt, 
 
 whitltersoever yov. 
 
 please. 
 
 f alTquando, al some 
 \ time. 
 
 5. Derivative Adverbs, if the primitive be an Adjec- 
 tive of the First and Second Declension (ending in ~^s 
 or -^), are formed by changing the -(^ of the stem into 
 -e; as, vHUd^, strong (st vSlidS-); ViiMe, strongly; 
 mfe^, wretched (st. mMrfi-), iriis^e, v? retchedly ; if the 
 17* 
 
198 ADVERBS. 
 
 primitive be an Adjective of the Third Declension, the 
 Adverb ends in -tSr or -XtSr; as, Iit1,-s, light, ISvl-tSi; 
 lightly. 
 
 Uemark. — The ending is -Ur, added both to stems in -i and 
 Consonant stems ; if the stem ends in -c, the vowel i is usually 
 inserted; as,fellx, happy (st./e&-),/enc-i£-<Sr, happily. Stems 
 ending in -nt- drop t; a?, prudens, prudent (st. prudent), pru- 
 den-Ur, prudently. 
 
 6. The neuter Accusative of many Adjectives {of all 
 Comparatives) is often used as an Adverb; aSjfdcilS, easily; 
 muUum, much ; so the Ablative neuter, and less often the 
 Ablative feminine ; as, falso, falsely ; recta, straightway. 
 
 7. Some Adverbs are formed by adding the suffix -tus 
 (meaning whence), some by adding -Um (denoting 'manner, 
 way), usually with a connecting vowel; as,,fund-l-tUs, from 
 the bottom ; grig-d-Um, in flocks. 
 
 8. Many Adverbs are simply case forms of Nouns; as, 
 iiu, by day; noctH, by night; forti, by chance. 
 
 9. The Adverbs derived from &liUs, when contrasted 
 with each other or with forms of AliUs, have the same 
 construction as their primitives. (See §56, Rem. S.) 
 Alitor — SlS^tfir, m one way, — in another ; alias — ^ias, 
 at one time — at another; 3,lit€r Sliis ISquitiir, he talks 
 one way to one, another way to another. 
 
 10. Two negatives destroy each other ; as, non-nulli, 
 some. 
 
 EXEKCrSE XLIX. 
 
 § 118. 1. Rale of Syntax. — Intransitive Verbs, though 
 they do not admit of a Direct Object, may have an Indi- 
 rect Object in the Dative. 
 
 2. Rule of Syntax. — The Dative expresses the person 
 or thing for whose advantage or disadvantage anything 
 
ADVERBS. 199 
 
 is, or is done. (Dative of Advantage or Disadvan- 
 tage.) 
 
 3. Rule of Position. — The Adverb generally precedes 
 the word it limits; but fh-e usually stands between the 
 Adjective and the Noun ; as, omnes /gre hdmlnes, almost 
 all men. 
 
 Note. — Many Verbs which are Transitive in English are Intran- 
 sitive in Latin. 
 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 forti-ter (fortis), bravely. beat-e (beatSs), happily. 
 
 celeri-ter (oeler), swiftly. ben-e (bSuus), well. 
 
 audac-ter * (audax), boldly. fer-e, almost. 
 
 grega-tim (grex), in Jlocha. fSoil-e (faoilis), easily. 
 
 paul-a-tim (paulus), by degrees. saepe, frequently^ often. 
 ne-quidem (the limited word being repent-e (repens), suddenly. 
 
 placed between), not even. praecipu-e (praecipuus), especially. 
 
 gener-a-tim (genus), by tribes. phalanx, phalang-is, a phalanx. 
 
 ac-ced-8, acced-e-re, access-i, access-iim, to come up. 
 
 Tiv-S, -e-re, vix-i, vict-iim, lo live. 
 
 constltu-S, -e-re, constitu-i, constitut-um, to establish, post. 
 
 curr-(S, -e-re, ciicurr-i, curs-um, to run. 
 
 pro-curr-5, -e-re, prociiourr-i and procurr-i, proours-iim, to run forward, 
 
 per-fring-6, -e-re, perfreg-i, perfraet-iim, to break through. 
 
 pare-8, -e-re, paru-i, parit-iim (intr.), to obey. 
 
 indulge-8, -e-re, induls-i, indult-Hm (Intr.), to be indulgent to. 
 
 noce-8, -e-re, noou-i, noeit-iim (Intr.), to hurt, injure. 
 
 credS, ored-e-re, credid-i, credit-flm (Intr.), to believe, trust. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Nostrl totiim diSm fortitfirf pugnavSrant. Hostes rSpente 
 cSlSriterquS procurrerunt. Qui b6nS vivit (§ 87, 8, 9) beate 
 vivit. Omnia, fSre S,nimalia, grSgatim currunt. Imp6rat6r 
 paulatim exercitiim in unfim lOcttm conduceb&t. Nostri 
 f a,cilS hostitim phftlanggm perfregerunt. Filium dScSt pSr 
 
 * Earely auddeit&r. f See model of Analysis 8 ( .4. pp. X.). 
 
200 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 
 
 tri suo parerfi. Galli ciim Germanis saepS contendebant. 
 Ne CaesJir quidSm banc civitatSm vinc6r6 p6test. Milites 
 S,d muros oppidi audactgr accesserunt. Turn Germani copias 
 suas ggngratim constituerunt. Caesar huic Iggioni praecipue 
 indulsgrat. Quis nostrum (§ 58, 3) isti (§ 84, Bern. 4) credit? 
 Nttm (§81, 3) bSniim delectat aiiis nScerg? 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 To live well is to live happily. Wicked men always 
 injure themselves. Our men ran forward suddenly and 
 swiftly, and easily routed the enemy's footmen. The cav- 
 alry of the Thracians came up boldly to the very {ips)i) 
 gates of the city. I will not believe even the consul him- 
 self The prudent general was unwilling to lead his army 
 through the by-paths of the forest. This boy can easily 
 swim across a very deep river. The enemy will not attempt 
 to break through our line-of-battle. 
 
 COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 
 § 119. Adverbs derived from Adjectives are generally 
 compared like their primitives. The Comparative is like 
 the neuter Comparative of the Adjective ; the Superlative 
 is formed from the Superlative of the Adjective by chang- 
 ing Us into e; as, fdcHS, f&cHliiis, f&oilltme; cSlSrXtSi-, cSlSr- 
 ius, cSlerrlme. 
 
 Bemarh 1. — The Superlative of the Adverb sometimes ends in 
 -0 or -Um; as, mi'ritissimo. primMm. 
 
 Remark 2. — If the comparison of the Adjective is irregular 
 or defective, that of the Adverb is so likewise; as, igrag, m&tiiis, 
 opUme; m&lS, pej&s, pessime; pS/rum, min'Hs, mhiime; muUum, 
 plus, plurXmum ; pH&s, prlmo or prlmiim; ocius, ocissime; dUU- 
 ri'ils, deterrime; pdtiUs, pdtis^me or pStisdmUm; m&rito, mSritis- 
 stmo; s&fts, s&ti&s. MUgia, maa^me, has no Positive; and nupir 
 nuperrirrie, has no Comparative. 
 
PEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 201 
 
 Remark 3. — Notice also the following: pr8pS,]yrdpiics, proxlme; 
 dm, diiUiUs, diutissime/ saepS, saepiits, saepissXme; sioUs, seciHs. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 120. Prepositions express the relation between a 
 Noun or Pronoun and some other word. 
 
 1. Twenty-six Prepositions are followed by the Accu- 
 sative : 
 
 &Af to, towards, at. contra^ against. post, after, since. 
 
 antSy before. erga, towards (usually practer, past, besides, 
 
 adversiis, ') against, of friendly relations), prope, iiea;'. 
 
 adversum, j imoards. extra, without, beyond, propter, cm neooimfo/. 
 
 ^T^ViAj at, with. inixSij under, beneath, secundum, a/Ver,nea;I 
 
 circa, *) , int^r, between, among. 
 
 \ around. . ^ - ... 
 
 circum, J intra, wttJnn. 
 
 circiter, abovt, near juxta, next to. 
 
 (chiefly with Nume- 6b, for, on account of 
 
 rals)., p^neSjinthe potoer of. 
 
 CIS, 1 ,. ., fer, through. 
 
 ,, > on this Bide, _ „ , , . , 
 
 citra, i pone, behind. 
 
 S> 1 T. ■ 
 
 > on this si( 
 tra, J 
 
 2. Ten Prepositions are followed by the Ablative : 
 
 to, according to, 
 supra, above. 
 trans, over, beyond. 
 ultra, beyond. 
 versus, towards 
 
 (placed after the 
 
 Noun). 
 
 ab, ^ from, after, by. 
 
 abs, 
 
 absque, but, for, with- 
 out (rare in classic. 
 Latin). 
 
 cor&m , in presence of. 
 
 cum, with. 
 de, down, from, after, 
 concerning. 
 
 e» 1 
 
 \- out of, 
 ex, J 
 
 prae, before, in com- 
 
 parison with. 
 
 pro, before, for, instead 
 ff. 
 sinef withq^ut. 
 tSnuSy up to, CM far 
 
 a8 (sometimes with 
 
 Gen.). 
 
 3. Four Prepositions are followed by the Accusative, 
 when motion to a place is implied; by the Ablative, when 
 rest in a place is implied : 
 
 in^ in, on; into, upon. 
 sub; under, near. 
 
 super^ over, above. 
 subter^ under, beneath. 
 
 Remarh 1. — The Adverb dUm, without the knowledge of, is 
 sometimes used as a Preposition, usually with the Accusati-ve, 
 rarely with the Ablative. 
 
202 PEEPOSITIONS. 
 
 Remark S —Tlniis (with Abl.), like versHs (with Accus.), ia 
 placed after its case; and cum is annexed to the Ablative of the 
 Substantive Personal and Relative Pronouns. Vers&s sometimes 
 follows M'&TnA In; as, &d Alpes versUs; in Sgriim verstis; when 
 used alone with the Accusative, it only occurs in classic Latin 
 with Names of Towns and Small Islands. 
 
 Remark 3. — A and e are used only before Consonants ; &b and 
 ex, before Vowels and Consonants. 
 
 Remark 4- — A Preposition is often used without its case as an 
 Adverb ; as, fit aniS dicttim est, as was said before. So &d, antt, 
 cordm, contra, and post. 
 
 On the other hand, the Adverbs p&l&m, prdcUl, and ^mill, in 
 poetry and later prose, are treated as Prepositions and take the 
 Ablative. 
 
 EXERCISE L. 
 §121. Vocabulary. 
 
 *bene (Adv.), well. uUtls, -a, -uin (g 56), avy. 
 
 *malS (Adv.), badly, unfortunately, neque (Conj.), and — not, neither 
 *paruin (Adv.), little. cultus, -us, civilization. 
 
 *magis (Adv.), more. humanitas, -tat-is, refinement, 
 
 * longS (Adv.), far. tolum, -I, a dart. 
 
 *pr6p6 (Adv.), near. conaiiium, -i, wisdom, prudenci 
 
 dubitatiS, -on-is, doubt. 
 
 place-8, -e-re, placu-i, placit-um, to pleaae. 
 
 dJ8pIice-8, -e-re, displiou~i, displicit-ura, to diapleaae. 
 
 fug-i-5, fug-e-re, fiig-i, fugit-um, to flee. 
 
 comme-S, -a- re, -av-i, -at-iim, to go back and forth. 
 
 de-si6t-8, -e-re, destit-i, destit-um, to cease. 
 
 ab-sum, ab-esse, ab-fu-i, ab-fu-tur-us, to be away, distant, 
 
 con-jic-i-tS, con-jie-e-re, conjec-i, conject-um, to hurl. 
 
 Translate into English, 
 
 Omniiira qui in Gallia habitant, fortissimi sunt Belgae. 
 
 A cultii atque humanitatS provinciae longissime absunt. 
 
 Ad eos mercatores minime saepS commeant. Non mintts 
 
 fortes fuerunt Galli quam Romani. Horas (§ 153) sex 
 
 """ * See § 119. 
 
PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 203 
 
 acritgr utriiuquS pugnatiim grSt (§ 115, III.), nSquS hostes 
 nostrorum impgtiim diutifis sustinerS p8tuerunt. Equitea 
 Ariovisti pr(5piiis accesserunt, ac Iftpides teia,qu6 in nostros 
 conjeeerunt. Ariovisttts magis consilio quam virtutS Aedugp 
 vieit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Without any doubt virtue is a more excellent thing (prae- 
 gtanti'&s) than gold. This song displeases me (Dative, § 118, 
 1) more than that (one) pleases me. The Belgians were 
 farther away than the Aeduans from the civilization and 
 refinement of the Roman province. Through the whole 
 night the enemy did not cease to flee. The boys came up 
 nearer, and boldly hurled stones and darts upon the fierce 
 wild boar. Which of us can fight without arms ? Orgeto- 
 rix was far the noblest and richest (man) among (apvid) the 
 Helvetians. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 § 122. Most Prepositions are used as prefixes, in com- 
 position with other words. The following are called 
 Inseparable Prepositions, because they are never found 
 alone : 
 
 amlj- (am1)o)j aroundf about. ve» not (negatives the positive 
 
 di- or diS", asuudei'. idea in tke word with which 
 
 re- or red-, again, lack, it is compounded, or intensi- 
 
 se-, apartj aside, fies it). 
 
 Eemarh. — C6n, usually classed among the Inseparable Prep- 
 ositions, is only another form of cOm, 
 
 EXERCISE LI. 
 Vocahulary. 
 
 hand (Adv.), not. Generally used reliquiis, -a, -lim, remaining. 
 
 with Adjectives and Adverbp. Belgae reliqui, the rest of the BeU 
 intSr se, among themselves, with one gians. 
 
 another, from one another, aer, aer-Ts, the air. 
 
204 PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 
 
 Qallicus, -a, -um, Oallic. caelum, -i (PI. -i, rare and poetie)i 
 
 phildsopbus, -I, philosopher, heaven, 
 
 jube-5, -e-rS, juss-i, juss-um, to order, 
 
 con-veni-8, -i-re, conven-T, convent-uin, to come together. 
 
 con-duc-S, -e-re, condux-i, conduct-um, to lead together, 
 
 dif-fer-S, differ-re, dis-tul-i, di-lat-um, to differ (Objective). 
 
 dis-scDti-S, -i-ve, dissens-i, dissens-Hm, to differ in opinion, to disatfret 
 
 (Subjeijtive). 
 con-jung-(S, -c-re, conjunx-i, con-junot-um, to join, 
 can-jur-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to awear together, conitpire, 
 8e-ced-8, -e-re, secess-i, eeeess-um, to secede, go apart, 
 Be-cem-tS, -e-re, secrev-i, secret-um, to separate. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 , MS-gistSr hunc puCriim baud miniis qu^m filium suum 
 a,ma,t. Caesftr omnes Galliae principes Sd se conv6nir6 
 (§ 86, 2) jussit. Germani non multum (§ 66, 2) a Gallica 
 consuetudinS differunt. Exercitus unum in 15cum a legat5 
 paulatim conducebStttr. Omnes Belgae in armis sunt, Ger- 
 maniqufi, qui cis Ehenum incftlunt, sese cum his conjunx- 
 erunt. Remi contra p6pulura Eomanum ciim Belgis rSli- 
 quis non conjuravSrant. Aer caeliim a terris secernit. 
 Phil6s6phi de natura deoriim intSr se sempSr dissenserunt. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The general ordered the first line (J&eiia) to retreat to (in) 
 the mountain. The common people frequently seceded from 
 the nobility. The shepherds had separated the sheep from 
 the kids. The Remi differed in opinion from the rest of the 
 Belgians. These wicked citizens are conspiring against the 
 republic. The Germans will not easily break through our 
 line. The enemy's forces are not far from the town. A lion 
 differs much from a dog. The lieutenant had beeii ordered 
 to cross the river. 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 205 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 § 123. Cdnjunctioiis connect words and sentences. They 
 are commonly divided into the following cla-sses : 
 
 1. Copulative, which connect things that are to be 
 considered together — [and) : they are St, -qu)i, atquS (ae), 
 Sti&m, quSquS, and (instead of ^ and the negative) nSquS 
 {nSc). 
 
 Bemarh 1. — Et connects things which are independent of each 
 other, and of equal importance; as, M. Plsont U M. Messalld con- 
 sUlibiis. Et — it is to be translated both — and; as, 6t rex §t 
 regwA, "both the king and the queen." It sometimes means 
 also. 
 
 JRemarh H. — QiCt (enclitic) introduces a mere appendage, the 
 two constituting but one idea, and is rather adjunctive than 
 copulative ; as, glddils plllsqul — {offensive armor) ; or it is added 
 to the second member merely to extend the preceding i<lea ; as, 
 jus pdtestatemqui h&bent. It should be appended to the last word 
 of those connected, as seen in the above examples. 
 
 Remark S. — Atqv-i (used before Vowels or Consonants), con- 
 tracted into dc [used before Consonants only), is compounded of 
 &d aud qu!&, and means and in addition; it usually introduces 
 something of greater importance ; as, In hosfss impUiim fedlt 
 
 atqui, eos fugdvit, " and routed them too." So, in answers ; 
 
 as, oognosti-nt hos verms f do m&mSrit&r, " and tliat, too, by 
 
 heart." This peculiar force is often lost in So, and it is used 
 alternately w'ith U; it is preferred in subdivisions, the main 
 propositions being connected by tt; as, diffi<Att. est tant&m 
 caus&m H dlligentid consSqui, U mimdrid complecil, U ordtioni 
 expromSrS U voci do virlbus sustinert. 
 
 Remark 4. — Nlqui or ntc {and not), compounded of ni and 
 qui, when repeated, is translated neither — nor. Et non is used 
 instead when only one word, and not a whole sentence, is to be 
 negatived ; as, pdtiSr 6t no;i mMeste firo. & non is frequently 
 used also when U precedes. Ntquit n3n {Mc non), the two neg- 
 atives destroying eaph other, is nearly equivalent to M, and is so 
 used (tho words not separated) in later prose, but, in clagsjcal 
 
 IS 
 
20G CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 prose, is used only to connect sentences, and the two words are 
 separated. 
 
 Remark 5. — Etidm [tt-j&m) {also, even) has a wider meaning 
 than qudquH, and adds a new circumstance, while gudgui is used 
 when a thing of a similar kind is added. Eti&m usually imme- 
 diately precedes the word to which it refers, guSquS always fol- 
 lows. 
 
 Eemark 6. — The Copulative Conjunctions are frequently omit- 
 ted in animated discourse ; as, copids suas tn proxim&m colltm 
 subducrtt, dciim inatrult. This omission is called asyndeton (not- 
 bound-together). 
 
 2. Disjunctive, which connect things that are to be 
 considered separately [either, or): they are aut, vil, -vS, 
 su% seu, and the interrogative particle dn. 
 
 Remark 7. — Aut (either, or) expresses an essential difference in 
 things, and ordinarily implies that one thing excludes another ; 
 as, aut vivU aut mortuus est, " he is either living or dead." Aut 
 and -v^ serve to continue a negation, where in English we use 
 nor; as, Verves non Htinorl aut VirtHtl vStil debeb&t. 
 
 Remark 8. — Vtl, on the other hand {akin to velK), indicates a 
 difference of expression merely, and is used where either of two 
 or more things may be taken indifferently; as, conjunctiS tectorUm 
 oppldUm v61 urbs appellatur, — a town or city (whichever you 
 please); v61 imptratart vSl rriHUti, me utiminl, "use me either as 
 a commander or as a soldier." When one of the alternatives is 
 omitted, vU often has the sense of eoen; as, pdpiilUs RomdnUs 
 auctoritdtim sudm vU { = even if necessary) contrd omnes defendtrt 
 pdtesf. With Superlatives vtl is also often used to enhance the 
 meaning : vU maxtmiis, the very greatest. - Vi (enclitic) is merely 
 a weaker form of vil. 
 
 Remark 9. — Slvii (seu) — siv^ {seu) {or if, whether, or), is used 
 when it is uncertain or indifferent which view is to be taken. 
 Thus (Caesar, Bell. Gall.) : siv6 cdsu, siv6 deorum immortdliUm 
 proiAdentid, ; siv5 tiniort perterrltl, slv6 spe s&lutts inductl (" per- 
 haps by one, perhaps by the other, — I do not know by wliich "). 
 
 Remark 10.— An {or) is used in Double Questions, usually after 
 ufrUm 01 the enclitic -ni; as, ntrUm t&ce&m &n praedtchn? or, 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 207 
 
 t&ce&m-nJS &n praedte^mf shall I be silent or speak? Bi t the 
 first part of a Double Question is often omitted; as, cuj'S.m p^cUs 
 est hocf dn Mllibotlf "whose flock is this? (is It somebody 
 else's) or Meliboeus's ?" The later writers use &n in Indirect 
 Questions in the sense of whether without utrUm or -ni; and it 
 is very commonly so used after nescw, hand ado, dUbifim eat, 
 dUbllS, incertHm est, etc., which may in such cases be trans- 
 lated perhaps; as, contlglt tlbl qu6d iaud scio an nemini, 
 " there haa happened to you what has perhaps happened to no 
 one (else)." 
 
 Remnrk 11. — The enclitic -rH is sometimes, but not very often, 
 used disjunctively in the latter part of a Double Dependent Ques- 
 tion instead of O/n; as, nihil intiress'i pUtant v&ledmiis aegri-nt 
 simus, they think it makes no diflference whether we are sick or 
 well. But this is not to be imitated. 
 
 3. Adversative, which express opposition of thought 
 (but) : they are sM, autSm, verUm, vera, at and its com- 
 pounds, iMmSn and its compounds, and aet^rum. 
 
 Remark 12. — SM denotes strong and direct contradiction, or a 
 limitation, and usually sets aside what precedes ; as, ver& dicS, 
 sSd nequidqu&m, quSni&m non vis crldtrt, " I speak truth, but to 
 no purpose, since you will not believe me ;" non beatii, sSd hSmo, 
 " not a brute, but a man." It is also used in transitions when a 
 subject is to be dismissed; as, sM haec parvH sunt; vtnidmUs dd 
 majors.. 
 
 Bffmark 13. — Auttm (postpositive) adds something that is dif- 
 ferent, without contradicting or setting aside what precedes [on 
 the contrary, however, on the other hand, but) ; as, Oyges a, nullo 
 
 videbatur; ipai autSm omni& vtdebdt, " he himself, however, 
 
 saw everything." Frequently it simply marks a transition, or 
 takes up again for special notice a previous statement {moreover, 
 furthermore). 
 
 Remark H. — VerOm [as to the truth, in fact, but) is nearly the 
 same in meaning as sid. It is strengthened by tmlm, vero, <&nim- 
 vero [but indeed, but in fact, but be that as it may). 
 
 Remark IB. — Vero [in truth, assuredly, but, however) does not 
 express as strong oppositi in as verUm, just as autSm is weaker 
 
208 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 than sid; as, t26s ptr exploratores Caei&r certiSr /dc/tSs eit tres 
 Jdm copidrum paries HelvUios Id flUmin transdHxissS, guart&m 
 
 vero parUm citra flumtn, Ar&rim rinquS/m esai, " that the 
 
 fourth part, however," etc.; vero usually stands in the second 
 place and adds special emphasis to the word preceding it. 
 
 Eemark 16. — At (but, on the other hand) does not, like s&d, 
 alter or set aside what precedes, but expresses a contrast, often 
 a strong one ; as,' brivls a, naturd nobis vitd ddtd ^st, a,t mtmSriO, 
 blnl reddltae miae semprtternA, " a short life has been given us by 
 nature ; but the memory of a well-spent life is eternal." It fre- 
 quently follows Conditional Propositions in the sense of at least; 
 as, etsl noti s&pientisslmiis, &t Umlds^mUs, though not very wise, 
 at least very friendly. It frequently introduces a lively retort 
 or exclamation, abrupt prayers and wishes, or an objection, and, 
 in the latter case, tnlm is often added to assign a reason for the 
 objection ; as, at inlm qids rtpr&hendU, guSd in parrtcldds rel 
 publicae decretHm trit. 
 
 Remark 17. — Atqul admits what precedes, but opposes an ob- 
 jection [yes, but yet) \ as, magnUm narras, vix credlblli; atqul slo 
 
 li&bit, " ■ yet such is the fact." It is used in hypothetical 
 
 syllogisms to introduce the minor premise; as, guSdsl virtutes 
 sunt p&res intir se, p&riQ, Sti&m ifUid essS nieesat est; atqui pdrea 
 ess'i virtutes fdctlllme p6test persplci, "now if the virtues are 
 equal to each other, the vices must also be equal ; but it can 
 very easily be seen that the virtues are equal." 
 
 Remark 18. — CeUrUm, literally, " as to the rest," is frequently 
 used in the sense of sSd by Curtius, Livy, and Sallust. 
 
 Remark 19. — T&m&n is properly an Adverb. It is often used 
 in transitions, following sUd, resuming the thought or correcting 
 a statement or inference. 
 
 4. CoEROBORATiVE, which adduce a proof or reason 
 {for) : they are n&rn, namquii, (inim, and StSntm. 
 
 Remark SO.^N&m gives sufficient grounds for a preceding 
 assertion ; tn1m introduces an explanation. Enlm, weaker than 
 ndm, is originally only a Corroborative Adverb [truly, certainly, 
 to be sure, indeed). In narnqut and tdnlm, qid and U repeat the 
 preceding assertion, while ndm and tnlm introduce the proof 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 209 
 
 N&m is put in the first place in the sentence; so commonly 
 n&mquS and Miim; inlm is postpositive. 
 
 5. Causai,, which express a cause or reason {for, 
 because): they are quid, qudd, quSnidm, quippS, eum 
 {quUm), quando, quando-quMSm, slquU^. 
 
 Remarh SI. — Qu6d (Ace. Sing. neut. of qui) means originally 
 with respect to what, in what respect, in that; and hence its causal 
 meaning, inasmuch as, because; as.'quOd omnis GaUid M septen- 
 trionim vergU, maiurae sunt hi&mes, because Gaul lies towards the 
 north, the winters are early. It is very often preceded by prop- 
 i&rea, hoc, db hanc causSm, and similar causal expressions. 
 
 Remark 22. — QuM is very often used, especially with si and 
 nisi, in a subordinate proposition, but one beginning the sen- 
 tence {and if, but if), to connect the thought with what pre- 
 cedes. In such cases it is a Eelative Pronoun, Accusative of 
 Limitation (§155); qu6d si vUtrls contfimeliae obhvisoi vellU, "but 
 if he were willing to forget the old insult ;" quOd si f-iirori U 
 amentia impuMs beMm intUlissU, " but if, impelled by rage and 
 madness, he should have brought on a war.'' 
 
 Remark SS.—QuiS, (Ace. PL neut. of qui)* has the same origin 
 as qudd, but is purely causal {because)., and very rarely has the 
 sense of thai or in that, like qudd. Quid regularly introduces a 
 fact as the ground or reason ; qudd, a fact or mere allegation. 
 Often there is no difference. Frequent is the use of non qudd 
 (non quid) with the Subjunctive, discarding an imaginary rea- 
 son, the real ground being introduced by sid quid {sSd qudd) 
 with the Indicative. Like qiidd, it is often preceded by eo, Ideo, 
 lib edm caiisdm, and like expressions. 
 
 Remark 2Jf. — Qudnidm [qudm + Jdm) introduces a well-known ' 
 reason, since then, since as everybody knows. 
 
 Remark 25. — QuippS is originally a Corroborative Adverb [in- 
 deed), and hence derives its causal meaning. It is frequently 
 united with relative words to express a subjective reason. 
 
 Remark 26. — In ciim (quUm), quando, quandoquldSm, the causal 
 idea is derived from that of time (compare the English since). 
 
 * Quia is regarded by some scholars as originally interrogative and 
 a shortened form for qulam (irom Abl. qui + j&m = whereby now ?). 
 18 « 
 
210 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 *S^ qutiUm is conditional originally; aSj antlquissimiim e doctu 
 gtnus est poUdrUm, siquIdSm (if, indeed, as every one admits, — 
 since) Hdmerus fuU U Uesiodus anti RomS/m condltHm. 
 
 6. Conclusive, which express a conclusion or infer- 
 ence {therefore): they are ergo, eo, ideo, idcirco, Igtttir, 
 tt&quS, proindS, proptSred, and the relative words quor- 
 propt&r, qudrS, qudmobrSm, quocired, und& 
 
 Remarh Z7. — Ergo and igWXr express a logical consequence 
 [therefore], while It&qut expresses a natural consequence [and 
 so). Ergo and eo are Causal Ablatives, and all the other Con- 
 clusives may be considered adverbial expressions of cause or 
 result, limiting the Predicate. 
 
 7. Final, which express an end aimed at — purpose {in 
 order that); or an end reached — result {that, so that): they 
 are -tit, ne, quo, quln, quomXnUs, nevS, or neu. 
 
 8. Conditional, which express a condition {if, unless., 
 provided, only) : they are si, sin, ntsl, nl, dum, m6d6, dum- 
 rnddd. 
 
 9. Concessive, which express something granted {al- 
 though): they are etsi, Hiamsi, tdmetsl, t&mSnetsi, quan- 
 qu&m, licM, quamvts, quantumms, quamllhSt; Ut and G&in 
 {quum) in the sense of although. 
 
 10. Tempoeal, expressing time {when, as soon as, 
 after, before) : they are cum {quUm), dim {quUm) primum, 
 ut, ut primum, Hbl, postqudm, postedqu&m, ant^qudm, 
 priusqudm, quando, qudties, quamdiu, stmitl, sXmUldc, 
 d&m, don&i, quo&d. 
 
 11. Compaeative, expressing comparison {than, as): 
 they are qudm, ut {as), sie&t, vSlUt, praeUt, proM, tan- 
 qu&m, qu&st, idsi, dc si, ceu, with axs and atquS in the 
 sense of ccs or than. 
 
 Remark Z8. — The following Conjunctions stand commonly at 
 
SYNTAX. 211 
 
 the beginning of a sentence or clause, viz. . U, tttiilm, da, dt^ 
 atqui, atqul, rHqu'i, nio, aui, vU, slvi, sin, M, li&m, ver&m, and the 
 relatives gudre, quocircd, qu&mobr&m. 
 
 Remark S9. — Enim, autim, and vero are placed after the first 
 word, or the second if the first two belong together; rarely after 
 three or more words. 
 
 Remark SO. — The other Conjunctions usually stand at the be- 
 ginning, unless some word or expression is especially emphatic, 
 and is therefore placed -first in the sentence. 
 
 Remark SI. — The Copulative and Disjunctive Conjunctions 
 are often repeated when things are emphatically connected: 
 
 St — fet, both — mid. 
 
 et — et — et, not only — but also — and. 
 
 Iieque — et, both not — and. 
 
 et — nSque, both — and not. 
 
 Deque — iigque, i 
 
 nee — nee, 
 
 .^ w „ > neither — nor, 
 
 neque — nee, 
 
 nee — neqnS, J 
 
 et — que, both — and; sometimes used in prose, but only for two 
 
 toords. 
 
 que — quB, both — and/ frequently used by Sallust, Livy, and the 
 
 poets. 
 
 INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 § 124. Interjections are used to express strong or sud- 
 den emotion ; as, vae nobis ! woe to us ! 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 § 125. 1. Syntax treats of the construction of Sen- 
 tences. 
 
 2. A Proposition is a thought expressed in words ; as, 
 snow melts. A Sentence consists of one Proposition, or 
 of several connected together so as to make complete 
 sense. 
 
212 SYNTAX. 
 
 3. Every Proposition consists of — 
 
 (a) A Predicate; i. e. that which is declared, 
 (6) A Subject; i. e. that of which the declaration ia 
 made. 
 
 4. The Predica,te consists of a Verb alone (as, melts, 
 in the above example), or the Verb essS, to be, with a 
 Noun, Adjective, or Participle ; as, nix gSM& est, snow 
 is cold. 
 
 5. The Subject consists of a Noun, or some word or 
 phrase used as a Noun, and may be known by asking 
 the question who? or what? with the Predicate; as, 
 John runs. {V/ho runs? John.) To play is pleasant. 
 {What is pleasant? To play.) 
 
 6. The Subject and Predicate may stand alone, or 
 each may have words or clauses limiting its meaning. 
 Thus, p'lmd lucS, cftm mons d TUo IjQhimo i&neretUr, 
 idUm Considlus, qui cam explordtortbus praemissus Sr&t, 
 Sgv3 admisso, &d Caes&r^m accurrU, at daylight, when 
 the mountain was held by Titus Labienus, the same 
 Considius, who had been sent forward with the scouts, 
 runs to Caesar with his horse at full speed. 
 
 Here the leading thought is Considi&s accurrXt, Con- 
 sidius runs. The Subject is limited by the Adjective 
 irfgm and the adjective sentence qui' — praemissiis ir&t. 
 The Predicate is limited by prima lucS, designating the 
 point of time ^vhen Considius ran ; by cUm mons ihie- 
 retUr, farther specifying the time or circumstances of 
 the running ; by &quo admisso, participial sentence, ex- 
 pressing the manner of the running, — an adverbial lim- 
 itation ; and by &d Caes&rSm, the point to which the 
 running was directed. 
 
 7. A Sentence consisting of a single Subject and a 
 
AGREEMENT. . 213 
 
 single Predicate is commonly called a Simple Sentence ; 
 and cue which consists of two or more Simple Sentences 
 combined, is commonly called a Compound Sentence. 
 
 AGREEMENT. 
 
 § 126. Rule I. — The Verb agrees with its Subject in 
 number and person. 
 
 Remarh 1. — If the Subject consists of more than one, the Verb 
 is PUiral ; as, f&rQr Irdqui mentim praeelpUant, fury and rage 
 hurry on my mind. Hence — 
 
 (a) A Collective Noun may have a Plural Verb; as, pUba cla- 
 mant. 
 
 (b) A Noun connected with an Ablative by dim often has a 
 Plural Verb ; as, Bocchus dim pidUlbUs postrem&m Hd^m inva- 
 dunt, Bocclius and the infantry attack the rear. 
 
 (c) A Plural Verb is sometimes used with Merqui; as, eodim 
 die atergui eorum exerdtUm ex castris educant, on the same day 
 each of them leads out his army from camp. Quisqui (com- 
 monly postpositive) is also very often used in Apposition with a 
 Plural Subject ; as, tricentl dekcti noMlis^mUs quisqut qui Bomdm 
 miiterentUr, three hundred were chosen, each one of the highest 
 rank, to be sent to Rome (^127, Rem. 6). 
 
 Remarh 2. — But the Verb often agrees with the nearest Nom- 
 inative, especially when the Nouns denote things without life; 
 as, Mens tnim U r&iw tt consilium in sSnibUs est, for mind and 
 skill and wisdom are in old men. 
 
 Remark 3. — If the Nominatives are of different persons, the 
 Verb takes the first person rather than the second, and the 
 second rather than the third ; as, si i« U Tulliii v&letis, igS It 
 Cictro v&lemUs, if you and TuUia are well, Cicero and I are 
 well. 
 
 Remarh It. — The Verb is frequently omitted when it may be 
 readily supplied. This is especially the case with the Verb 
 esst after Adjectives and Participles ; as, quU h6mines (sunt) Wt 
 (sunt) senteniiae; Caesdr mim5ria thiebOi L. CaisiUm consUlSm 
 ocdsUm (ess6) exerdtumqul ejus puls&m (essS) U sub jUgUm mis- 
 
214 SYNTAX. 
 
 sUm (essS), Caesar remembered that Lucius Cassius the consul 
 had been slain, and his army beaten and sent under the yoke. 
 
 Remark 5. — ^The Subject is omitted — 
 
 (a) When it can be readily supplied from what precedes; as, 
 Mdsa proflutt ex montS VOstgo U in Oce&n&m injlult, the Meuse 
 flows from Mount Vosegus and runs into the ocean. 
 
 (6) AVhen it is indefinite; as, diunt, ftrunt, they say. 
 
 (c) With Impersonal Verbs, when it is a cognate notion ; as, 
 pugnatum est, (a fight) was fought. 
 
 [d) The Pronouns 'tg6, iu, nos, and vos are expressed only for 
 the sake of emphasis or contrast, as the ending of the Verb 
 sufficiently indicates the Subject. 
 
 APPOSITION. 
 
 § 127. A Noun limiting another, and denoting the 
 same person or thing, is said to be in Apposition with it. 
 
 EuLB II. — Nouns in Apposition agree in case; as, 
 J&gurthd, rex, Jugurtha the king. 
 
 Remark 1. — A Noun in Apposition often expresses Character, 
 Purpose, Time, Cause, etc.; as, CicirS praeMr leglm ManiliS/m 
 gudsU, constll conjurdtionhn Cdfllinae oppressii, Cicero, when 
 praetor (or, aa praetor), advocated the Manilian law, when con- 
 sul, suppressed Catiline's conspiracy. 
 
 Remark S. — The Personal Pronoun is often omitted before a 
 Noun in Apposition with it ; as, consul dlxH, I the consul have 
 said. 
 
 Remark S.—K Noun in Apposition with two or more Nouns is 
 put in the Plural ; as, JUgurthiX It BocchUs, regis, Jugurtha and 
 Bocchus, kings. So a surname, common to two or more per.sons, 
 is put in the Plural ; as, Imcv&s atqv^ Aruns Tarqutnii; or we say, 
 Lueiiis Tarqulni&s atqiii Aruns TarqutniUs. 
 
 Remark 4- — ^The Ablative, commonly with in, is used in Ap- 
 jjosition with the name of a town in the Locative (see ? 176, 
 Rem. 1); Bs, COrinthl Achdiae urbS, at Corinth, a city of Achaia; 
 Albae, in urVk munltd, at Alba, a fortified town. 
 
 Remark 5. — A Noun may be in Apposition with part of a 
 
APPOSITION. 215 
 
 sentence; as, cogltSt Bratortm instUui, — ^rSm arduam, let him » 
 reflect that an orator is training, — a difficult thing. 
 
 Remark 6. — Paetitive Apposition. — Expressions denoting 
 a part are often placed in Apposition with a Noun denoting 
 the whole; as, diiirariae, pars maxlmHb &d AegtmurUm, — dliae 
 advtrsics urbSm ips&m, deldtae sunt, the transports were carried, 
 the greatest part to Aegimurum, — others, opposite the city it- 
 self. So often altjtr — alUr, especially when contrast is to he ex- 
 pressed ; as, du6 consHles IjiXs annl, altlr morbo, altlr J'erro p^riU, 
 (of) the two consuls of that year, one died of disease, the other 
 perished by the sword; &liiis — iUiUs/ as, c&m dliiis &lii subMiMm 
 ferrent, audaoiiis risistirt coeperunt, as they bore aid to one an- 
 other, they began to resist more boldly; so quisqu& in the Nom. 
 Sing. (§126, Rem. 1, c). Quisqu^, without change of case, is 
 sometimes found in Partitive Apposition with the Ablative 
 Absolute ; as, exercltus Herculis, dmisso dUcii dc passim multis 
 stbi quisqut impSriilm pSient'ibiis, brivl dtldbUHr, the army of Her- 
 cules, after the loss of its leader, and since many in different places 
 claim[ed) the command, each for himself, is (was) soon dispersed. 
 
 Bemarh 7. — ^A Proper Name with nomin or cogndmtn may be — 
 
 (a) In the same case; as, rmntn Arcturiis m?Ai est, I have the 
 name Arcturus. 
 
 (fi) In the Genitive ; as, nomtn Arctiiri mlhi est. 
 
 (c) By attraction, in the Dative, if the Verb is followed by a 
 Dative ; as, norri&n Arctiiro mlhi est, I have the name Arcturus. 
 This last is the most common expression, and the one to be im- 
 itated in writing Latin. 
 
 Remark 8. — A Genitive is sometimes used instead of an Appo- 
 sition, especially with such words as vox, verbUm, and the like 
 (Genitive of Definition) ; as, haec vox vdlUptdtis, this word pleas- 
 ure ; mmin insaniae, the word madness. So, sometimes, with 
 Names of Towns; as,Anti5chlae opptdUm, the town of Antioch 
 (not to be imitated). 
 
 Remark 9. — ^When the Apposition has forms of different gen- 
 ders, it agrees in gender with the limited Noun ; as, usUs mdgist^r 
 egrigiiis, experience, an excellent teacher ; pMldsSphiH, m&gistrH 
 vitae, philosophy, the mistress of our life. If Nouns of different 
 genders are connected, the Apposition takes the more worthy 
 
216 SYNTAX. 
 
 gender; as, PtBUmaeUs It CleHpairS, regis, Ptolemy and Cleopatra, 
 sovereigns. 
 
 Remark 10. — Possessive Pronouns take an Apposition in the 
 Genitive of the same gender and number as that implied in the 
 Possessive. (See ? 128, Eem. 8.) 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 § 128. An Adjective may qualify a Noun directly; as, 
 puelld pulchrd, the beautiful girl; this, is called the At- 
 tributive Adjective. Or it may form part of the Pred- 
 icate, being connected with its Noun by means of the 
 Verb essS, or some Verb of similar meaning ; as, pudUi 
 pulchrd est, the girl is beautiful; this is called the Pre- 
 dicative Adjective. 
 
 Rule III. — (A) Adjective words (in which term we 
 include Adjectives, Participles, and Pronouns) agree with 
 the Nouns which they qualify in gender, number, and 
 case. 
 
 Remark 1. — When an Adjective word qualifies two or more 
 Nouns of different genders, the Adjective word, if Attributive, 
 agrees with the nearest ; as, agrl omnes U mdriS,, or S.gn It mdriH 
 omni&, all lands and seas. 
 
 (B) An Adjective word in the Predicate agrees with 
 the Subject in gender, number, and case. 
 
 Remark S. — An Adjective word in the Predicate qualifying 
 two or more Nouns as Subjects is usually put in the Plural; if 
 the Nouns are of the same gender, the Adjective takes that gen- 
 der [but see (c) below] ; as, lUpiis tt agnUs ^ti compuM, a wolf 
 anrl a lamb compelled by thirst. 
 But if the Subject Nouns are of different genders — 
 (a) The Adjecti,ve in the Predicate often agrees with the 
 nearest Subject, especially if the Singular can be used (that is, 
 when the several ideas connected may be regarded as one) ; as, 
 
ADJECTIVES. 21 7 
 
 Cingttdrigl prindtpatUs atqut imp'^riUm est trddttHm, tiie chief 
 command (princtpdius and impiriUm expressing that single idea) 
 was handed over to Cingetorix. 
 
 (b) If the Nouns denote living beings, the Predicative Adjec- 
 tive is Plural and masculine; as, p&f&r miht U mdttr moriul sunt, 
 my father and mother are dead. 
 
 (c) If the Nouns denote things without life, the Predicative 
 Adjective is Plural and neuter; as, Bbertds, praeiired dlvltiae, 
 dicOs, gloria in dculis sitS, sunt, liberty, moreover wealth, honor, 
 (and) glory are set before your eyes. Even if the Nouns are of 
 the same gender, the Predicative Adjective is often neuter if they 
 denote things without life; as, IrH U dvaritid imptrio pStentiord 
 irant, rage and avarice were stronger than authority. 
 
 (d) If Nouns denoting living beings and things without life are 
 combined, the Predicate Adjective is Plural and sometimes neu- 
 ter, sometimes of the gender of the living beings, whichever idea 
 is uppermost ; as, NUmtdae atqu& signd mllUdrid obscurati sunt, 
 the Numidians and their military standards were concealed 
 (here the idea of Persons is uppermost); inlmicS, sunt llbird 
 (Avttds U rex, a free state and a king are hostile things. (Here 
 rex = regid pdtestds.) 
 
 Remark 3. — The Adjective, however, as we have, seen above, 
 often agrees with the nearest Noun; always, if the Noun be 
 Plural and the Predicate stands first; as, Missae eO cdhories 
 quattu6r it G. AnniUs praefectOs, four cohorts and C. Annius as 
 prefect were sent thither. 
 
 Remark J^. — Synesis of the Adjective. — An Adjective 
 word (especially in the Predicate) often agrees with the semse 
 of the Noun rather than with its form {constructio &d spn&^n or 
 d,d sensUm) ; as, pars in flwmtn acta sunt, part were driven into 
 the river. 
 
 Remark 6. — An Adjective word in the Predicate, instead of 
 agreeing with the Subject, often agrees — 
 
 (a) With a Noun in Apposition with the Subject (especially 
 the words urbs, oppidikn) ; as, OdrinthUs, lumAn Oraedae, extinc- 
 tftm est, Corinth, the light of Greece, was destroyed [put out). 
 
 (b) With a Predicate Noun ; as, gens Universd V&nUl appellati, 
 the whole race were called Veneti. 
 
 19 
 
218 SYNTAX. 
 
 Remark 6. — Adjectives are often used in the Plural as Nouns; 
 in the masculine, to denote persons/ in the neuter, to denote 
 things; as, bdnl, the good; bSnS,, property (goods). But when 
 ambiguity would arise from the form of the Adjective {e. g., b6- 
 norUm, masc. and neut.), the proper case of res with u fem. Adj. 
 is used. The poets are free in using the neuter Accusative of Ad- 
 jectives as Adverbs, and even in prose many adverbial phrases are 
 formed by combining Prepositions with Adjectives ; as, de impro- 
 rMO, unexpectedly; cte ijiie^ro, afresh ; «in8 diiiio, undoubtedly. 
 
 Remark 7. — In general expressions an Adjective in the Pred- 
 icate is often neuter ; as, MpUs tristS est siHbulis, the wolf is a sad 
 thing to the folds. The Adjective is here a Noun. 
 
 Remark 8. — A Possessive Pronoun, being equivalent to the 
 Genitive of the Substantive Pronoun, may have an Adjective 
 word in the Genitive agreeing with it ; as, me.a ipsiiis causa, for 
 my own sake; or a Noun in the Genitive in Apposition with it; 
 as, tuiis, viri fortls, glddiUs, the sword of thee, a brave man. 
 
 This construction is especially frequent with the Genitives 
 unliis, soliUs, and ipsiiis. 
 
 Remark 9. — The Adjectives primils, mlidiits, ultimits, exiremils, 
 inHmUs, inflmits, vmOs, summits, supremiis, rMiquOs, and cltlrH 
 express the first part, middle part, etc. ; as, summUs mons, the 
 top of the mountain. They generally precede the Noun. 
 
 Remark 10. — An Adjective denoting the time, place, or circum- 
 stance of an action often agrees with the Subject, but limits the 
 Predicate in meaning; as, proniis ctdidlt, he fell headlong; so, 
 nolens, vdlens, prUdens, imprudent, Mens, inmtUs, mdiHtiniis, ves- 
 perUnUs, totUs, and many others. 
 
 Remark 11. — Where in English we employ a Possessive or a 
 Noun with a Preposition, we often have in Latin a derivative 
 Adjective ; as, tnlls flliA, master's daughter ; pugnS, Cannensds, 
 the battle of Cannae; Hiiro SprdcOsdniis, Hiero of Syracuse. 
 
 RELATIVES. 
 
 § 129. Rule IV. — The Relative Pronoun agrees with 
 its Antecedtnt in gender, number, and person ; but its 
 case depends upon the construction of tlie Relative Sen- 
 
RELATIVES. 219 
 
 tence; as, igU qui senhS, I who virite; voi qui sen- 
 btUs, you who write; puellH quSm vidl, the girl whom 
 saw. 
 
 Bemark 1. — The Antecedent is so called because it usually 
 goes before the Relative sentence. But it also stands — 
 
 (a) In the Relative Sentence, especially when this latter is 
 emphatic ; as, In quSm primUm egressi sunt 16cilm, Trojd vdcatUr, 
 the place upon which they first disembarked is called Troy. 
 
 (6) Both in the Principal and Relative Sentence ; as, Irani 
 omnlno itlnSrS, duU, quKbiU itlnfirlbfis d6mo exlri possent, there 
 were only two routes, by which routes they could go out from 
 home. 
 
 Remark Z. — The Antecedent, especially when indefinite, is 
 often omitted ; as, qw, hint vivH, beaie vlvit, (he) who lives well, 
 lives happily. 
 
 Remark 3. — Attraction. — The Accusative of the Relative is 
 sometimes attracted into the Ablative of the Antecedent; as, 
 Jra his cdlortbUs, qutbils mddd dlxistl, in these colors which you 
 have just mentioned. This attraction is rare in any other case. 
 On the other hand, the Antecedent is occasionally in the poets 
 (especially the comic writers) attracted into the case of the Rel- 
 ative (Nominative and Accusative) ; as, urbim qudm sitiluS vestrH 
 est, the city which I am building is yours. 
 
 Remark 4- — The Relative often agrees with a Noun in Apposi- 
 tion with the Antecedent ; as, flUmin Rhentls, qui agrum Helve- 
 iiUm a Germams diiyidU, the river Rhine, which separates the 
 Helvetian territory from the Germans. 
 
 . Remark 5. — A Relative or Demonstrative usually agrees with 
 a Predicate Noun after the Verb essl or a Verb of Naming, Es- 
 teeming, etc., instead of agreeing with the Antecedent; as, Thebae, 
 qu6d Boeotiae cSpflt est, Thebes, which is the capital of Boeotia. 
 Anim&l quSm vScdmUs hbminSm, the animal which we call man. 
 
 But if the Predicate Noun is a foreign word, the Relative 
 agrees with the Antecedent; as, est g&niis quodddm hdminUm 
 quid Hllotae vSodtUr, there is a certain race of men which i3 
 called Helots. 
 
 Bema"k 6. — A Numeral, Ctmparative, or Superlative, which 
 
220 SYNTAX. 
 
 in English limits the Antecedent, is usually jilaced in the Rel- 
 ative Sentence ; as, noctS qu&m in terns ultlmim egtf, on the las 
 night which he spent on earth. Other Adjectives have some- 
 times a similar position ; as, intir jBcos quos inconditos jHciunt, 
 among the rude jokes which they utter. 
 
 Remark 7. — Synesis of the Relative. — The Relative often 
 agrees with the sense of the Antecedent, instead of its form ; as, 
 Caes&r Squltatiim praemittii qui vldeant, Caesar sends forward the 
 cavalry to see. 
 
 Remark 8. — If the Relative refers, not to a single word, but to 
 the whole contents of a proposition going before, the Relative is 
 neuter, and instead of qu6d simply, we usually find Id quSd or 
 gtiae res; as, Tlmdledn, Id qudd difflctliUs pUtdtur, multo sdpien- 
 tiiU tulit sleund&m, qu&m adversdm fortunS,m, Timoleon bore 
 prosperity far more discreetly than adversity (conducted him- 
 self far more discreetly in prosperity than in adversity), (a 
 thing) which is considered rather diificult. An explanatory 
 Noun is often introduced into the Relative sentence; as, anU 
 cdmUid, quOd tempils haud longe dbirdt, before the election, 
 which time was not far distant. 
 
 Remark 9. — Qui at the beginning of a sentence is often trans- 
 lated lil^e a Demonstrative with or without a connective; as, 
 qulbtls rebus cognitis, these things being found out. Here also 
 observe the idiomatic expression quae est tempiraniiH, or qua ^ 
 temptrantia (Ablative of Quality), instead of pro tud iemph-an- 
 tia; as, tu, quae est tempfirantia, j&m vdles, you, such is your 
 temperance, are already well. 
 
 Remark 10. — A Relative Adverb is sometimes used instead of 
 a Relative Pronoun and Preposition ; as, Idc&s undi venU, the 
 place /rom which he came {undi = a. quo). The Relative Adverb 
 is thus used chiefly of Place, especially after names of Towns and 
 Islands, more rarely oi Persons (except und&). 
 
 THE CASES.— THE NOMINATIVE. 
 
 § 130. 1 . The Subject of a finite Verb is in the Nom- 
 inative, and is called the Subject Nominative. 
 
 2. A Noun in the Predicate denoting the same thing 
 
THE GENITIVE. 221 
 
 as the Subject, after a Verb expressing an incomplete 
 idea, is in the Nominative, and is called the Predicate 
 Nominative; as, Caiiis H LUcius fi-atres fuerunt. 
 
 3. A Predicate Nominative is used with Verbs denot- 
 ing to Be, to Become, to Appear, to be Named, to be Called,, 
 to be Esteemed, etc. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Verb sometimes agrees with the Predicate 
 Nominative; as, dmantiUm Irae dmorls intSgratiS est, the quar- 
 rels of lovers are a renewal of love. 
 
 Remark 2. — If the Subject. is in the Accusative,' the Predicate 
 Noun must be in the Accusative also; as, dic^t Caes3,rSm essi 
 regSm, he says that Caesar is a king. 
 
 Remark S. — When the Subject of the Infinitive is omitted, a 
 Predicate Noun or Adjective is often put in the Dative, if a 
 Dative precedes; as, neminl mgdio essii lictt, no man may be 
 neutral. The Accusative can also be used. 
 
 THE GENITIVE. 
 
 §131. The Genitive case expresses the precise limit 
 within which the meaning of a word is to be taken. 
 
 Thus, in the expression Q,m6r gloriae, the Genitive, 
 gloriae, expresses the limit within which the meaning 
 of dm)ir is restricted. 
 
 K.UI-.E V. — A Noun in the Genitive limits the mean- 
 ing of another Noun denoting a different thing; as, Cfcg- 
 rowfe libri, Cicero's books ; dm6r Di.1, the love of God. 
 
 Remark 1. — When the Genitive denotes the owner, or that to 
 which something belongs, it is called the Possessive Genitive; as, 
 Cictronis Itbrl, the books of Cicero (i. e. which he owns). (For 
 the use of this Genitive in the Predicate, see ^133.) In a few 
 expressions the Noun which the Possessive Genitive limits 
 (chiefly templUm and aedes) is sometimes omitted; as, ventHm 
 ir&t M Testae (supply aedSm), they had come to "the temple of 
 Vesta. 
 
 .■J* 
 
222 SYNTAX. 
 
 Remark Z. — The Genitive is said to be Subjective when it de- 
 notes the Author or Source of the action or feeling contained in 
 the limited word ; as, Cioironls fibrl, the books of Cicero (i. e. 
 of which he is the author). It is said to be Objective when it 
 denotes the Object to which this action or feeling is directed ; 
 as, &m6r Dil, love to God; but Urndr Bll {Subjective) means the 
 love of God (i e. which He feels). A Noun is sometimes 
 limited both by an Objective and Subjective Genitive ; as, vUires 
 Selvetidrum injuriae pdpiill BSmdnl, the old injuries of the 
 Helvetians (done) to the Roman people. This, however, is 
 rare. 
 
 Remark S. — Instead of an Objective Genitive, a Preposition 
 with its case is sometimes used to avoid ambiguity; as, a.m6r 
 In rtm pubtic&m, or ergo, rim publicdm, love towards the state. 
 But this is to be used sparingly, the Objective Genitive being 
 more in accordance with Latin usage. 
 
 Remark 4 — The Genitive of a Substantive Pronoun is usually 
 Objective; as, eUrd mel, care for me ; — while Possessive Pronouns 
 and Adjectives usually express Subjective relations; as, dtrii meS,, 
 my care ; causd regi&, the king's cause. But the latter are occa- 
 sionally Objective; as, meS, injUrid, injury done to me; miitiis 
 hostilis, fear of the enemy. 
 
 §132. EuLE Yl.— Genitive of Quality.— The Gen- 
 itive, limited by an Adjective agreeing mth it, is used to 
 express the Quality of a thing ; as, vXr magnae virtuHis, a 
 man of great valor. 
 
 The Ablative is used in the same way. 
 
 ' An Adjective or dependent Genitive always accompanies the 
 Genitive or Ablative of Quality. 
 
 § 1.33. Rule VII. — The Predicative Genitive of Pos- 
 session and Quality. — The Genitives of Possession and 
 Quality, the -limited Noun being omitted, often stand in 
 the Predicate with the Verbs sftm, /to, and the Passives 
 of such Verbs as pHiS, li&beO, and existimS; as, haee 
 ddmUs (TtaSronts est, this house is Cicero's (house) — 
 
THE GENITIVE. 223 
 
 Genitive of Possession; maxtml (tnl.ml fuU he wis (a 
 man) of the greatest courage — Genitive of Quality. 
 
 Here belongs the use of the Genitive (of Possession) 
 where in English we supply some such word as Duty, 
 Part, Mark, etc. ; as, paupSris est numSrdrS pSous, it is 
 the mark of a poor man to count his flock ; s&pievVts 
 judldis est imprObos punlr^, it is the part of a wise 
 judge to punish the wicked. 
 
 Remark 1. — Observe especially this Genitive with f&c^t in 
 the phrases, f&c&r^ didonis, ffioSri pdiestdtis, to bring under 
 one's sway, to bring under one's power; as, Albani Eonianae 
 dlclonls fact! sunt, the Albans were brought under the Roman 
 sway. 
 
 Bemarh 2. — Here belong such expressions as llbertdUs conser- 
 vandae est, it has a tendency to preserve liberty. 
 
 Remark 3. — Instead of the Genitives mel, tul, sui, etc., of the 
 Substantive Pronoun, the neuter Possessives me&m, tuum, suiim, 
 etc., are used ; as, tutim est vldert quHd Ugat&r, it is your bibsiness 
 to see what is going on. A Possessive Adjective may be used 
 in the same way ; as, humantim est errdri, it is human, 1. e. oha- 
 racteristio of man, to err. 
 
 § 134. Rule VIII. — Partitive Genitive. — "With words 
 expressing a Part the Genitive is used to denote the 
 Whole; as, tiftfe miMXim, one of the soldiers. 
 
 This Genitive is used with Nouns expressing or im- 
 plying a Part; with Adjectives, especially Comparatives, 
 Superlatives, and Numerals; with the neuter Singular 
 (only Nom. and Accus.) of Pronouns and Adjectives of 
 Quantity, used as Nouns; with many Pronouns; and 
 with Adverbs of Time, Place, Quantity, and Degree^ used 
 as Nouns ; as. 
 
 Pars milWivm, part of the ^Idiers. 
 
 Hdr&m prior, the former of these. 
 
224 SYNTAX. 
 
 BelgariXm fortUgtmi, the bravest of the Belgians. 
 
 Uniis regUm, one of the kings. 
 
 TaniUm l&horis, so much labor. 
 
 1 1 hostiUm, those of the enemy. 
 
 Ubln&m, gentium? where in the world (lit. of the nations)? 
 
 Remark 1. — The partitive word, if an Adjective, usually agrees 
 in gender with the Genitive ; but Pronouns and Adjectives of 
 Quantity are used as Nouns in the neuter (only Nom. and Ac- 
 cus.) ; as, qiAd n6vif what news? tantilm aun, so much gold. 
 
 Remark S. — Instead of a Genitive, the Prepositions ex, de, and 
 sometimes in, infSr, are used, especially with Pronouns, Compar- 
 atives, Superlatives, and Numerals; as, qulddm ex miKtib'S.s, inUr 
 omnes fortisdmils. UnUs regularly takes the Ablative with de or 
 ex; so other Cardinals often, and commonly guld&m. 
 
 Remark S. — Here may be noticed a peculiar use of the Gen- 
 itives Idci, Idcor&m, and iempdris with Id, ddhuc, posted, etc. ; as, 
 &d id IdcorUm,, up to that time; adhuc lOcorum, till now; tUm 
 tempSrXs, at the time ; postea IScl, afterwards. 
 
 Remark; 4- — It is to be especially noted that Numerals and 
 such Adjectives as many, few, some, none, when they include the 
 whole of anything, do not take the Partitive Genitive, but agree 
 in case ; as, gm omnes, all of whom ; ed/ve inimlcos qms multSs 
 h&bes, beware of your enemies, of whom you have many. 
 
 § 135. Rule IX. — Objective Genitive with Adjectives 
 and Verbs. — The Genitive is used to express the object 
 to which an action or feeling is directed, with — 
 
 (a) Adjectives expressing Desire, Experience, Know- 
 ledge, Capacity, Participation, Fulness, Memory, Care, 
 Certainty, Fear, Guilt, and their contraries; as, dvl/USs 
 laudls, desirous of praise. 
 
 Remark. — Here also belong Verbals in -dx and Participial 
 Adjectives in -ns; as, t&ndx propSsitl, steadfast of purpose; 
 dmdns pecuniae, fo;id of money. Poets and later writers ex- 
 tend this usage very fai; by analogy, using the Genitive where 
 <he ordinary prose construction would require the Ablative of 
 
THE GENITIVE. 225 
 
 Limitation (?162) or the Prepositions de or In; as, intigtr vltae 
 
 (vita), blameless of life. Notice specially drdmi with Adjecvives 
 
 of Feeling; as, aeg^r dntml, sick at heart (best explained as a 
 
 Locative; PL dnimis). 
 * 
 (6) Verbs of Remembering, Reminding, and Forgetting: 
 
 mSm'ini, rSnvtnisoOr, oblwiscdr, rSoorddr (very rarely), m6- 
 
 neS and its compounds ; as, sempSr hvjus din St Idoi mS- 
 
 min^S, I shall always remember this day and spot; 
 
 quSmquS vHWis dmlettiae comriidnSfedtt, he reminded each 
 
 one of their old friendship. 
 
 The Thing remembered or forgotten is also put in the 
 
 Accusative. 
 
 Remark. — MtrrAm takes the Accusative even of the Person 
 when personal recollection is indicated ; Cinn&m mimim, Sull&m 
 vidi. BtcordSr almost always takes the Accusative. MSneS reg- 
 ularly, and other Verbs of Reminding sometimes, take de with 
 the Ablative. If the Thing remembered or forgotten is expressed 
 by a Neuter Pronoun or Numeral Adjective, the Accusative m,ust 
 be used; hoc miminl; te id un'ti/m mdneo. 
 
 (e) Verbs expressing Pity, Shame, etc.,, — mIsSredr, mfeg»^- 
 eseS, and the Impersonals mIsSr-St, paenliSi, piklSt, plgU, 
 taedSt, and pertaesum est; as, mfeSrescO infelioiUm, I pity 
 the unfortunate ; paenit6t me peoodU, I repent of my' sin. 
 
 Remark 1. — With these Impersonals the Person experiencing 
 the feeling is expressed by the Accusative. 
 
 Remark 2. — The cause or object of the feeling may be ex- 
 pressed by an Infinitive or a Dependent Sentence ; as, paenitU 
 me peccavissi or quSd peccavi, I repent of having sinned. 
 
 (d) Some Verbs of Plenty and Want, after the anal- 
 ogy of Adjectives of Fulness and the contrary ; as, 6g6t 
 (= Sgens est) auxlin, he is in need of help. The Ablative 
 is the more usual construction. (See § 160, Rem. 2.) 
 Remark. — Indigeo takes the Genitive very often ; ig^, campled, 
 
226 SYNTAX. 
 
 and imphs, not fc) ofl«n. The poets extend the construction by 
 analogy to many dther Verbs. 
 
 (e) The Impersonals refert and interest; as, rei publicae 
 interest, U is of importance to the stat«. « 
 
 Remarh S. — Instead of the Genitive of the Personal Pronouns, 
 the forms mea, tua, sua, nostra, veatra, are used with re/ert and 
 interest; as, non tua intSrest, it is not your business; it does not 
 concern you. The difference of construction in the case of a 
 Noun and the Possessive is well illustrated in the following sen- 
 tence : Caesar dicSrfi s61ebat non tSm sua quim rei publicae in- 
 tfiressS lit salviis ess6t, Caesar was wont to say that his safety 
 (that he should be safe) was not so important to himself as to 
 the state. 
 
 Note. — Grammarians are divided as to the origin of this expres- 
 sion, some regarding the Pronoun as a Dative agreeing with re (for 
 rei), mlae rei fe> i, it contributes lo my interest ; others, as Accusative 
 Plural neuter ; while others, perhaps with better reason, consider it 
 an Accusative (m being cut off and a lengthened for compensation), 
 agreeing with rim (which is understood with intSrest, and forms the 
 first part of refert), thus : 
 
 med interest — me&m iniir rSm est. 
 med re-fert = meS/m rSm ferl. 
 
 Remark 4- — The Degree of importance is expressed by the Gen- 
 itives of Value, magni, parvi, etc., by an Adverb or Adverbial 
 Acctisative ; magnl intlrest, vihimentir intirest, nihil intireat, etc. ; 
 the thing which is of importance may be expressed by — 
 
 1. An Infinitive or an Accusative with the Infinitive ; as, in- 
 (Hrest omnium recte f&titrt, it is in the interest of all to do right ; 
 permagnl nostra -inUrest te esst Romae, it is of the greatest im- 
 portance to us that you should be at Rome. 
 
 2. An Interrogative Sentence ; maxime inttreat quim&dmSdiim 
 res audiatur, it makes a very great difference how a thing is 
 heard. 
 
 3. Ut or rie with the Subjunctive; mea magnl intirest ■&( te 
 videdm, it is of great importance for me to see you. 
 
 4. Occasionally the Nominative of a Neuter Pronoun ; guan& 
 Xd refert f what difference does it make? 
 
THE GENITIVE. 227 
 
 The Thing with reference to which something is of importance 
 is put in the Accusative with dd; as, magni &d hdnor^m nostrUm 
 intSrest quftm primflm nos M urbfim vSnir6, it is of great conse- 
 quence to (in the matter of) my honor that 1 should come to the 
 city as soou as possible. 
 
 § 136. Rule X. — Genitive of Orime. — With Verbs of 
 Accusing, Condemning, Acquitting, etc., the Genitive ex- 
 presses the crime or offence charged ; as, servflm furtH 
 acciisat, he accuses the slave of theft. 
 
 JRemark 1. — Instead of the Genitive of the crime charged, we 
 find (1) the simple Ablative, (2) de with the Ablative, or (3) 
 enminS, nomtn'i, and like words with the Genitive ; as, tUiqutm 
 ds v&nefioio acousdri, to accuse one of poisoning ; damnatHs est 
 cnmm^ rlpUundarUm, ceteris crimlnibUs absdlHt'Ss, declared inno- 
 cent of the rest of the charges, he was found guilty of extortion. 
 
 Remark 8. — With damrw and condemno the Penalty is expressed 
 by the Genitive, but oftener by the Ablative; damnari c&pUis or 
 c&pit^, to condemn to death. When the Penalty consists of 
 Money or Land, the Ablative is always used; as, tertia parti 
 Ugri damnatUr, he is fined a third of his land. So multdre, to 
 mulct, always takes the Ablative ; c&pUis dbs6lut&s, plcunid mul- 
 tdt&s est. 
 
 Remark 3. — The Penalty {Place of Punishment) is also expressed 
 by &d or ^n with the Accusative ; as, mulios hSnesil ordinis &d rrCt- 
 tall& et munitiones vidr&m a&t &d besfids condemndiflt, he ' con- 
 demned many (men) of honorable position to the mines and to 
 work on the roads, or (to be thrown) to wild beasts. 
 
 § 137. Rule XI. — Genitive of Price. — ^The Genitive 
 is used to express the Pri^e or Value of a thing indef- 
 nitely; as, magni aesUmcA&t pScuni&m, he valued money 
 highly. {Definite Price is put in the Ablative. See 
 §167,4.) _ , _ 
 
 In this manner are used the Genitives of Adjectives 
 of Quantity, such as magni, parvi, etc., tantl, quantl, 
 pluris, and mtnorts; so nlhXll, "nothing" and {with the 
 
228 SYNTAX. 
 
 negaiive) such Genitives as Jloccl, " a straw " (lit. a lock 
 of ■v\'ool), nauai, "a trifle," assXs, "a farthing," hujUa, 
 " that ;" as, pScunidm viaxlml aestimant, sM rhii puhli- 
 c&m Jloccl lion f&oiunt, they value money very highly, 
 but they don't care a straw for the state. 
 
 This Genitive is to be explained as a Genitive of Qual- 
 ity, agreeing yvith. prStn understood: (rg7?i) magnl {prStii) 
 aesUmdb&t picuni&m,, he esteemed money a thing of great 
 value. 
 
 Remark 1. — To this head must be referred the expressions 
 aequi bSniqut f&ciS, Mm fdciS [ednaUlo), I take in good part, I 
 am satisfied with. 
 
 Remark S. — Aegftmo takes either the Genitive or Ablative 
 (aesfimS magnl and magna) . Verbs oi Buying a.nd Selling reg- 
 ularly take the Ablative {magna, etc.) ; the only Genitives we 
 can use with them are tanti, quanil, pluris, and minoris. 
 
 For the so-called Genitive of Place, see § 176, 8®". 
 For the Genitive with dpits and usUs (very rare), see J 167, 2, Rem. If. 
 For the Genitive with ^mliis (and other Adjectives of likeness, near- 
 ness, etc.), see J 144, Rem. S. 
 
 EXEECISE LII. 
 § 138. Vocabulary. 
 
 patria, -ae, country, native land. CingetSrlx, CingStorigis, CingetoriXm 
 
 Bolus, -a, -iim (| 56), only, alone. prudentia, -ae, prudence. 
 
 peecatum, -i, ain, fault. Hannibal, -bal-is, Hannibal. 
 
 phil5sdphus, -i, philosopher. Sdium, -I, hatred-. 
 
 ultimils, -a, -um (§74, 1), laat. auctoritas, -tat-is, authority. 
 
 imperium, -i, power, command. Sdulescens, -cent-is, young man. 
 
 casus, -us, chauce. career, career-is, prinon. 
 
 arx, are-is, citadel. TulHanum, -i, Tullian (a dungeon 
 
 duleis, -e, ewett. built by King Serviue Tullias). 
 
 decorus, -a, -flm, honorable. spectat-us, -a, -um, (speeta-rS), op. ■ 
 
 turbidus, -a, -um, muddy, troubled. proved. 
 
 amicitia, -ac, friendship. fortitude, -in-is, courage. 
 
 O.'ifiB, -i, Oxua ( River). fides, -ei, faith, promise. 
 
THE GENITIVE. 229 
 
 corrig-B, -e-rS, eorrex-i, oorrect-um, to correct. 
 
 amitt-8, -e-re, amis-i, amiss-um, to lose. 
 
 ag-tJ, -e-re, eg-i, act-unij to lead, drive; (of tivne) to spend, 
 
 mSri-or, m8ri-ri and mSr-I, movtuus sum (morit-ur-iis), to die. 
 
 s!tt-8, -e-re, siv-I, ait-um, to place. 
 
 appell-5, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to call. 
 
 pei--du6-S, -e-re, perdux-i, perduot-um, to extend. 
 
 in-flu-5, -e-re. influx-i, influx-um, to fiow into, 
 
 re-vere-6-r, -e-ri, reverlt-us sum, to respect, revere. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Stulti est (§ 133), It is characteristic of a fool. 
 
 Aduleseentis est (§ 133), It is the duty of a young man. 
 
 Meiim est (§ 133, Eem. 3), It is my duty. 
 
 Tua ipsliis (§ 128, Rem. 8) causa. For your own sake. 
 
 Cujusvis hSminis est. It is every man's duty, 
 Nocte quam ultimam (§ 129, Mem. 6) 
 
 egit. On the last night which he spent. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 SoHus' meiim peccatiim corrigi non potest. Phil6s6phfla 
 noctS, qua,m ultimam' in terris egit, a,mic6s omnes conv6- 
 cavit. Helvetii oppidum qu6d optimum '' h^bebant amisS- 
 rant. CS,t6nis pafgr 6t mat6r mortui' sunt. Regnft, im- 
 pSria, hfliiores, divitiae, in Dei minibus sita sunt. Filitts 
 Alexandri ciim matrS in arc&n missi* grant. DulcS 8t 
 dScortim est pro patria mSri. AmicitiS, bSnum^ est. Ad 
 flumgn Oxiim perventiim est," qui' turbidus sempgr est. 
 Ad locum in- carcSrfi qu6d* Tullianflm vScattir perventum 
 est. AnimSl qui* hSmS vScatiir, sin6 legibiis beatus ess6 
 non potest. CingStOrix, qui a s6natii rex atquS amiciis 
 appellatfls erSt, summae auctoritatis' Spud Galloe fuit. 
 Hannibaiis 6dium contra Romanos'" atrocissimtim fuit. 
 
 » ? 128, Bern. 8. ^ 1 128, Rem. 7. » 1 133. 
 
 « ? 129, iJem. 6. «§ 115, III. ^» P31, Bern. 5. 
 
 3 1 128, Bern. 2, (6). ' 1 129, Bern. If. 
 
 « § 126, 12em. 1, (6). « j i29, Rem. S. 
 20 
 
230 SYNTAX. 
 
 Caesftr a Mca Lgmauno M flumSn Rhenfim, f,)SsSin quin- 
 dScim pMflm' perduxit. Adulescentis^ est parentes suos 
 a,mar6 ac r6v6reri. Cujusvis hSminis' est viriim spectatae 
 fortitudinis r6v6reri. StultP est de se ipso praedicarS. Non 
 meum" est nuutios &d consttlgm mittgrfi. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Your father corrects your faults for your own sake. On 
 the last day which the consul spent in the winter quarters, 
 he called together the centurions of the seventh legion. It 
 is the general's duty to conquer the enemies of the republic. 
 On the next ipostSro) day they reached (it was come to) the 
 river Rhone, which flows into our sea. Rome, which is the 
 capital (Jiead) of Italy, was taken by the Gauls. Is not a 
 friend a good thing? Fabius was (a man) of the greatest 
 prudence. A general of the greatest {summiU) valor does 
 not always lead his army to victory. It is the duty of chil- 
 dren to respect their parents, and of parents to love their 
 own children and correct their (eorilrri) faults. 
 
 . EXEKCISE LIII. 
 § 139. Vocabulary. 
 
 avaruSj -S, -um, covetous. propGsitum, -i, purpose. 
 
 aviidus, -a, -ura, eager, desirous. conscius, -a, -Gm, conscious. 
 
 ferax, ferac-Is, productive. Veritas, -tat-is, truth. 
 
 aiDans,'amant-is, fond. tanti-dem (§ 137), for just so muc\. 
 
 expers, expert-is, destitute. proditiS, -5n-is, treachery. 
 
 imperitus, -a, -Qm, ignorant. egestas, -tat-is, poverty. 
 
 memor, mem5r-is, mindful. cupiditas, -tat-Is, desire, lust. 
 
 immemdr, -6r-is, unmindful. officium, -i, duty. 
 
 insuetue, -a, -um, unaccustomed. floccus,'-i, loch of wool {something of 
 
 impdtens, -er\-is, unable to control. small value, "a straw," "a fig"). 
 
 mis£re-t, miseru-it (Impers.), it pities. 
 
 paenlte-t, paenitu-it (Impers.), it repents. 
 
 pige-t, pigu-it or pigit-um est (Impers.), it troubles, disgusts. 
 
 taedS-t, taedu-it or taes-um est (Impers.), it wearies. 
 
 ' i 132. ' g 133. » i 133, Bern. 3. 
 
THE GENITIVE. 231 
 
 1 Qde-t, pudu-it cr pudit-um est (Impers.), it akamet, 
 
 vend-8, -S-rS, vendid-i, vendit-Qm, to aelL 
 
 Sin-8, -5-re, em-i, empt-um, to huy, 
 
 xn5ne-8, -e-re, mSnu-i, mSnit-um, to warn, 
 
 ad-m6ne-6, -e-re, -u-i, -it-um, to remind. 
 
 memini (g 113, Remark 2), I remember. 
 
 re-fert, re-fer-e-bS.t, re-tul-it (Imperg.)> '^* concernn, is of tmportan e, 
 
 intSr-est, inter-erat, inter-fuit, it is of importance, it interests. 
 
 ao-ciis-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to bring to trial, accuse. 
 
 ab-solv-5, -e-rS, absolv-i, absSlut-Bm, to acquit. 
 
 con-demn-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-iim, to condemn. 
 
 aestim-o, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to value, eateem. 
 
 fac-i-8j -e-re, fec-T, fact-um (§107, Remark 1), to do, to make. 
 
 oblivisc-o-r, -i, oblit-us sum, to forget. 
 
 opjprim-fi, -S-re, oppress-i, oppress-um, to aitppreae, crnah. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 (a) Patiens laborem, Enduring labor. — Participle. 
 
 (6) Patiens laborls, Capable of enduring labor. — Participial. 
 
 (a) The Participle expreases a aingle action at the time spoken of. 
 
 (6) The Participial expresses capability at any time. 
 Miseret me tui, / pity yon. {It pitiea me of you,) 
 
 Mc regis misSruit, ^ / pitied the king. 
 
 Paenitet puerum stultitiae, The boy repents of hia folly. 
 
 Pudet me sceleris, I am ashamed of my wickedness, 
 
 Pxget te vitae, You are disgusted with life. 
 
 Capitis or rex capitalis aiiquSm aceu- 
 
 sare, To accuse one of a capital crime. 
 
 Capitis or capite aliquem condemnare, To condemn one to death. 
 Flocci non facTt^ He carea not a straw — a rush, eto, 
 
 Mea refert. It concerns me (/ am concerned), 
 
 Quanti hoc facis ? How mttch do you value this t 
 
 Translate into English, 
 In hoc oratorS plus el6quentiae ^' est quS-m fortitudjfnfe. 
 Regis frat^r ^vidiis est gloriae,^ patiens l^boris,^ sM impo- 
 tens irae/ verita tis '^ expers, reriira ^ impMtus, atquS multo- 
 rum scSl^rfxm'' conscius. Quanti^ quisquS se ipsS* fS^cIt, 
 tanti* fit Sb S,micis Mercatores non tantidSm^ vendunt, 
 igl34, Bern, 1. , ^ ? 135 (a). » g 137, 4 g 85. 
 
232 SYNTAX. 
 
 quanti' emerunt. Fures veritat6m non flocci' ficiunt 
 B6ni omnes virtutSm magni' aestimant. Quanti' istos 
 6qu6s emisti? Hunc latrongm scSlfiris'' sui nSqug pfid6t, 
 ngquS paenitSt. Me civitatis moriim^ taedfit pigetqug. 
 Civis, qui rei capitalis' accusattts est, tertia partS* Sgri 
 condemnatJis est. Pu6r6s stultitiae^ paeniteMt. Catiliiia 
 aiium (one man) ggestatis/ aiium (another) ctipiditatis' ad- 
 mSnebat. Tua ipsifls causa te officii m6ne5. Cic6r6nis° 
 magni' intSrest conjurationSm Ciltilinae opprimSrS. Non 
 mea' s6d regis refert fures latronesquS punir6. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The general is desirous of money, but more desirous of 
 praise. The farmer's fields are very productive of corn. 
 The consul is fond of war and tenacious (tSnax) of his pur- 
 pose, but ignorant of business (rertim) and destitute of truth. 
 Lucius remembers a kindness and (niqu&) does not forget an 
 injury. The soldiers who were accused of treachery have 
 been condemned to death. Those who (§ 129, Rem. 2) are 
 unaccustomed to navigation (§ 135 (a)) fear the sea. The 
 king cares not a straw for the laws of the state. It is of 
 great importance to us to lead the army into the enemy's 
 country (fines). For how much did you sell your horse ? 
 For the same (tantidPm) for which (for how much) I bought 
 (him). Do you remember the speech of the excellent ora- 
 tor ? The scouts had not warned the general of the danger. 
 The tribune has been acquitted of treachery. Do you pity 
 me? 
 
 THE DATIVE. 
 
 § 140. The Jndired Object is put in the Dative, which 
 expresses that to or for whic^h, or mth reference to which, 
 anything is, or is done. 
 
 • S 137. »§136. 5 ? 135 (6). ' ? 135 (e), Bern. 3 
 
 " 1 135 ic). * 1 136, Rem. S. « 1 135 (e). 
 
THE DATIVE. 233 
 
 Tl.e Dative limits the meaning of Verbs (Transitive and Intran- 
 silive), Adjectives, derivative Adverbs, and occasionally Nouns d& 
 rived from Verbs that take the Dative. Sometimes it limits merely 
 the general idea contained in », sentence. 
 
 § 141. Rule XII. — Dative with Transitiie Verbs. — 
 Any Transitive Verb whose meaning allows, may take 
 a Dative of the Indirect Object along with the Direct 
 Object in the Accusative; as, servvLS ddmlno mMScin&m 
 p&r&t, the slave prepares medicine for his master. 
 
 Bemark 1. — When the idea of Motion is expressed or clearly 
 implied, M with the Accusative must be used instead of the 
 Dative; hune Itbriim &d te mitto, I send you this book. The 
 poets, however, freely use the Dative in this way. Note espe- 
 cially the phrases — 
 
 ddr& Uticul littiras, to give one a letter to take care of; 
 ddrg litUras &d S.ttqu&m, to write a letter to some one. 
 
 Remark S. — For in the sense of in defeiice of is expressed, not 
 by the Dative, but always by pro with the Ablative ; dlctrt pro 
 &l1quo, to speak in defence of some one J pro patria mSri, to die 
 for one's country. 
 
 § 142. Rule XIII. — Dative with Intransitive Verbs. — 
 The Dative of the Indirect Object only is used with many 
 Intransitive Verbs which signify to Believe, Favor, Please, 
 Help, Trust, and their contraries ; also with Intransitive 
 Verbs of Advantage and Disadvantage and those signify- 
 ing to Persuade and Command, to Serve and Obey, to 
 he Angry and Threaten, Yield and Resist, Pardon and 
 Spare, and the like ; as, pu&o credl.mUs, we believe the 
 boy; rex capilms pardit, the king spares the captives. 
 
 JRemark 1. — The Passive of these Intransitive Verbs can only 
 be used Impersonally; e. g. I am envied is not in Latin invidedr, 
 but mtki invidetur. 
 
 t- Remark Z. — Some Verbs, apparently of the same meaning as 
 those named above— ^/itw? and adjUvS, I help; delecto, I delight, 
 20* 
 
234 SYNTAX. 
 
 please ; laedo, I injure ; j&beS, I order ; defUio, I fail, am want- 
 ing to ; vUo, I forbid — take an Accusative to mark a more direct 
 eflFect on the Object. 
 
 Remark 3. — Fido and con/idS, I trust, rely upon, take the 
 Ablative (Causal) as well as the Dative. 
 
 Bemark 4. — Some Verbs — MulSr, I fawn upon, aemWr, I vie 
 with, cdmUdr, I accompany, praestoldr, I wait for— take either the 
 Dative or Accusative, with scarcely any difference in meaning. 
 
 Remark 5. — Some other Verbs — cdvm, cons&lo, convSnio, tirn^, 
 mSiuS, mddirdr, temphS, etc. — take the Dative or Accusative, but 
 with important difference of meaning (owing to the case em- 
 ployed) ; as, cdveo servo, I take precautions for the slave; cCiveS 
 serv&m, I take precautions against the slave ; mttuo servo, I am 
 anxious for the slave; mituu servUm, I fear the slave. 
 
 § 143. EuLE XIV. — Dative with Compounds. — The 
 Dative of the Indirect Object is used with many Verbs 
 compounded with the Prepositions &d, dntS, cdn (c&m), 
 In, irMr, 6b, post, prae, pro, s&b, and sUph" i as, pu^ 
 superfuli patrl, the boy survived his father. Transitive 
 compounds of course retain the Direct Object ; as, Cae- 
 s&r Squttdtui Ldiienilm praefeoU, Caesar placed Labienus 
 in command of the cavalry. 
 
 Remark 1. — If the local relation (Place to, from, or in) is made 
 prominent, the Preposition with its proper case is repeated; as, 
 Ajax ineiibuU in gl&diUm, Ajax fell on his sword. After all 
 these compounds we may use a Preposition and its case to 
 denote the relations more accurately. 
 
 Remark S. — Verbs compounded with c6n {G&m) usually repeat 
 the Preposition ; as, congrldl cum hosHbus, to fight with the 
 enemy. 
 
 Remark 3. — Verbs of Taking Away (compounds of lib, de, and 
 ex) sometimes take the Dative, instead of the Ablative of Sep- 
 aration, especially of Persons (see J 160, R. 5) ; as, omnim mlhi 
 tlmorlm ertpuU, he took away all fear from me. 
 
 § 144. EuLE XV. — Dative with Adjectives. — The Dat- 
 
THE DATIVE. 235 
 
 ive expresses the Person or Thing to or with reference to 
 which anything is Acceptable, Usefui, Friendly, Fit, Like, 
 Near, Equal, and the lilce, with their contraries ; as, Id 
 vei-o mllMbUs fuU pergratUrn, this, indeed, was most 
 acceptable to the soldiers; lOoUs prdpinquHs wibl, a 
 place near the city. 
 
 Remark 1. — Adjectives denoting Usefulness or Fitness take the 
 Accusative with S,d to express the purpose; as, KcHs M inddias 
 aplUs, a place fit for ambush ; the Dative of the Person is, how- 
 ever, regularly used with such Adjectives. 
 
 Remark 2. — Adjectives denoting Friendliness or the opposite, 
 frequently take the Prepositions In, erga, adversUs, with the Ac- 
 cusative instead of the Dative ; as, adversUs deos immoriales impiUs, 
 impious towards the immortal gods. 
 
 Remark 3. — Many of these Adjectives are used as Nouns, and 
 as such take the Genitive. Such are aequalis, affinis, UmlcUs, 
 cogndtUs, communis, contrdrius, /iniflmiis, par, prSpinguiis, pro- 
 pri&s, stmXlis, supersUs, viclnUs, and a few others. 
 
 SlmlUs is construed in the early writers almost always with 
 the Genitive; in the Augustan poets almost always with the 
 Dative. In Cicero and writers of his time the Genitive is reg- 
 ularly used oi Living Beings; the Genitive or Dative of Things. 
 Livy and late writers use the Genitive or Dative indifferently. 
 Observe that dmilts always takes the Genitive of the Personal 
 Pronoun. 
 
 Remark 4- — Prdpidr and proxlm&s (Adjs.) regularly take the 
 Dative, more rarely the Accusative ; prSpiiis and proxime ( Advs.) 
 regularly take the Accusative, more rarely the Dative. Both are 
 also construed with the Preposition lib and the Ablative. 
 
 § 145. Rule XVI. — Dative of Advantage and Dis- 
 advantage. — The Dative often limits the general idea 
 contained in a sentence rather than any particular word 
 (Dative of Advantage or Disadvantage) ; as, flUiis Blaesi 
 mxllMbiis mission&m p&leb&t, the son of Blaesiis applied for 
 dismissal for the soldiers. 
 
236 SYNTAX. 
 
 Remark I. — The Dative of the Personal Pronoun is frequentlj 
 used to iniicate a certain degree of concern or sympathy (Ef.hii 
 Dative). Great latitude in translating is often necessary to give 
 the shade of meaning; as, quid mihi CelsUs &gltf (tell) me {pray), 
 what is Celsus doing f (I am interested in the matter). 
 
 Notice specially the Dative of the Reflexive with velU; as, 
 quid ^bt vult haec ordtiof what does this speech meanf 
 
 §146. Rule ^Yll.—Baiive of Posse-ssor. — The 
 Dative is used with ess^ and kindred Verbs to indi- 
 cate the Possessor, the thing possessed being the Sub- 
 ject; as, est iiithi llbh-, {a booh is to me) I have a 
 book; sunt tibi Ubri, thou hast books; sunt Caio Ubri, 
 Caius has books, etc. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Dative with east is thus used when the fact 
 of Possession is emphasized ; as, Cicironi dOmtls est, Cicero has 
 a house (among other things); — the Genitive with esst is used 
 when the Possessor is emphasized ; as, Clcironis dOmtls est, the 
 house is Qicero's (no one else's). . 
 
 Remark S. — Compounds of esst (except Hhesst and poss'i) take 
 the Dative; as, neu desint tpillis rosae, nor let roses be lacking 
 to the banquet. 
 
 Remark 3. — The Dative is used with s&m and a Noun in the 
 Predicate to denote the relation in which one Person stands to 
 another ; as, Murenii, legdtus Lueullo fvAt, Murena was lieuten- 
 ant to (with) Lucullus. 
 
 Remark 4- — The Dative of Participles used substantively is 
 sometimes employed to express under what circumstances a 
 thing shows itself; ^t& Antic§r& est in Loeridi laevd parti 
 ^nUm CSrinthiiiciim irdrantl, Anticyra is situated in Locris on 
 the left hand as you enter the Corinthian gulf. 
 
 Remark 5. — Notice the phrase (imitated from the Greek, and 
 uaed specially by Sallust and Tacitus), tUiquid mthi vdlentl est, I 
 like a thing; as, jutft niqut plebl milUid vdlenti [esst) pUtdbdtUr, 
 because it was supposed that the common people did not like 
 military service. 
 
 Remark 6. — When the Possession is a Quality, the Possessor is 
 
THE DATIVE. 2^7 
 
 put in the Ablative with the Preposition 5!re instead of in the 
 Dative ; as, ?ra Cl(iiron& magnd, fuU elSqueniid, Cicero had great 
 eloquence. 
 
 Remark 7. — On the Dative with noni&n esst, see i 127, Hem. 7. 
 
 § 147. EuIjE XVIII. — Dative of Purpose or End. — 
 The Verb essS and Verbs of Giving, Coming, Sending, 
 Imputing, Reckoning, and Placing, take a Dative of the 
 Purpose or End, together with a Dative of* the Person 
 Affected or Interested; as, haeo m\h% curae sunt, these 
 things are {for) a care to me ; Pausdnids rex lActdae- 
 mbnior^m vmU Attlcis auxtlio, Pausanias, king of the 
 Lacedaemonians, came to the help (as a help) to the 
 Athenians. 
 
 Remark 1. — Transitive Verbs may, of course, take a Direct 
 Object together with these Datives ; as, miht librttm dono d&dlf, 
 he gave me the book as a gift. Sometimes the Dative of the 
 Person Interested is omitted ; as, paupertas probro h&ben coepU, 
 poverty began to be regarded as a disgrace. 
 
 Remark S. — ^The Verbs most commonly taking two Datives 
 are esst (and its equivalents filri, etc.), dUctr'i,, h&bert, d&rt, ver- 
 tirt, rtlinqu&ri, and Verbs of Motion [mittirit, v^mrl, etc.). These 
 last occur only with auxilio, praesidio, subsidio (so rUinqutrt) ; as, 
 terti&m S,ci^m nostns subsidio misltt, he sent the third line as a sup- 
 port to our men. 
 
 Remark 3. — The Purpose may sometimes be expressed by a 
 Predicate Nominative or an Accusative in Apposition (see 1 127, 
 Rem. 1); as, TurnUs sul culqut plriculi ricens ^rdt d5ctimentum 
 ( = dOcttmento), Turnus was (as) a recent warning to each one of 
 his danger ; cSrontim J6vl don&m mittunt, they send a crown to 
 Jupiter, as a present. 
 
 § 148. EuLE XIX.— DafoVe of tJie Agent.— With, the 
 Gerund and Gerundive the Dative expresses the Agent or 
 Doer; as, tidhlbendd est nobis dittgentid, diligence must 
 be employed by us. 
 
238 SYNTAX. 
 
 RemarJc 1. — When the Verb already governs a Dative, and 
 ambiguity might arise from using another Dative, the Ablative 
 with the Preposition a or &b is employed instead of the Dative 
 of the Agent; as, qulbUs a vobis consUlendUm est, (for whom it 
 must be consulted by t/om), whose interests must be consulted by 
 you. 
 
 Memarh Z. — This Dative really expresses the Person Interested 
 in the doing of the action. In prose it occurs not unfrequently 
 with the Perfect Tenses of the Passive ; as, res mihi told provlsH 
 est, the whole matter has been provided for by me. The poets 
 and later writers use the Dative in this way with almost any 
 Passive form ; as, nJ&qu^ cernUUr ulll, nor is he seen by any one. 
 
 Note. — The Dalive is sometimes used almost like a Genitive, but 
 always with the idea of Advantage, Disadvantage, or Reference ; as, 
 cui corpUt porrlgUiir (compare the English), his body is stretclied out 
 for him. 
 
 EXERCISE LIV. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 similis, -e, like. igDotua, -a, -um, unJcnoicn. 
 
 proximus, -a, -um, ueareity next. impedlmentiim, -i, hindrance. 
 
 aptus, -a, -um, Jit, suitable. dedScus, -6r-is, disgrace. 
 
 aequus, -a, -um, juat. usiis, ««e, advantaf/e. 
 
 blandus, -a, -um, Jlattering. impietas, -tat-is, undutifvlnesB. 
 
 utilis, -e, useful. NiimaDtinus, -I, Numantian. 
 
 oariSs, -5, -Sm, dear. vShementer (.4dv.), extremelt/. 
 
 ingratus, -a, -um, disagreeable. commfidum, -i, convenieticef advan 
 
 faciliB, -5, easJ/. tage. 
 
 per-faoilis, -e, very easy. inquam (§ 113, 4), I say. 
 
 noxius, -S, -um, hurtful. innScentia, -ae, innocence, integrity. 
 
 fkve-6, -e-re, fav-I, faut-um, to favor. 
 st-8, sta-re, stet-i, stat-um, to stand. 
 p»ro-8, -e-re, pgperc-i and (less freq.) para-I, pars-Sm and paielt-iim, to 
 
 spare, to be merciful. 
 pro-sum, pro-d-esse, pro-fui, pro-futurus (g 111, 12), to do good. 
 prae-f io-i-8, praef ic-S-re, praefeo-i, praefect-iim, to put over. 
 oircum-d-S, ciroamd5,-re, cirenmdSd-i, ciroumdat-iim, to put around, to sur- 
 round. 
 cireum-fund-8, -S-rS, fud-i, fBs-um, to pour around, to surround. 
 male-dic-B, -5-r«, -dix-i, -dict-um, to be abusive. 
 
THE DATIVE. 239 
 
 praetEr-e-f, -i-rg, praeterlv-i and (more freriuently) jraeteri-I, praeter- 
 it-Om (I 111, 9), to pass by. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Audiens dioto (? 144), Obedient (attentive to tin word). Never used without 
 the Verb eUm. 
 
 MiM magnS est dolor! (J 147), It is (for) a great grief to me. 
 
 Hibernls (g 143) Labienum praef coit, He put Labienus over the winter quar- 
 ters. 
 
 Regibus (§ 146) manus sunt longae, Kings have lung arms (hands). 
 
 Dil omnibus (§ 148) oolendi sunt, The gods ought to be worshipped by all. 
 
 Urbem muro (-g 167) eiroumdare, \ 
 
 TT-u- fi i^o\ - w . TO w )■ JO surround the city with a wall. 
 
 Urbi (g 143) murum eiroumdare, J "^ 
 
 Terras mari (g 167) ciroumfundere, "I „ 
 
 rr^ - /itA'i\ -^. « .^w y To surround the land with sea. 
 
 lerris (^ 143) mare ciroumfundere, j 
 
 Aptus insidiis (^ 144 and Bern. 1) or ad insldias, Suitable for ambush. 
 
 SimSlis patrSa, Like his father (J 144, Jiem. S). 
 
 Metu5 patrSm, I fear my father, 
 
 MetuS patrl (§142, Rem. 5), I fear for my father ; i. e. for his safety. 
 
 SenatQm consult, / consult the senate ; i. e. take its advice. 
 
 SenatuI (§ 142, Rem. 5) oonsulS, / consult for the senate ; i. e. provide for 
 
 its safety. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Helvetil proximi Germanis^ incdiunt, quibusctim eonti- 
 nentSr belliim ggrunt. L6cS, proximo, Carthagingm ' Nu- 
 midiA appellattir.' In 16c6 insidiis' apto, duas iSgiones 
 collScavit. Nonng* Iflpiis est cani similis ? Ferrfim h6- 
 minibiis' iitiliils est quim auriim. JflgurthS, nostris' vghS- 
 mentgr earns, Numantinis' maximo terrori' fuit. Cuivis' 
 facilS est S,micis suis'faverS. Ventiis noxiiim^. est arbSri- 
 biis. Legatfis cShortes duas praesidio' castris" rSliquit. 
 Milites impgratori' audientes dicto' non grunt. Milites 
 non mflligribtts,' non infantibtts' pSpercerunt. Nemini 
 licSt sui comm6di causa altgri' nScerS. CaesSr iSgion- 
 
 1 i 144. 
 
 » 1 144, Rem. 4. 
 1 130, Rem. 1, 
 
 '281,4 
 5 1 140. 
 « ? 147. 
 
 ' 1 142. 
 
 8 5 128, Rem. 7. 
 
 9 1 147, Rem. 3. 
 
240 SYNTAX. 
 
 Ibfis,' quas in provincia coiisciip3Sra,t, LaLienum praefecit 
 Deus toti orbi' terrarflm marS circumfudit. Caesiir oppi- 
 dum vallo fossaqufi^ circumdSdit. Griivia 6n6ra, gquitibfls' 
 magno sunt impSdimento.* Inu6ceutiae' saep6 plus p6ri- 
 culi° est quam h6n6ris.° Haec mihi' praetSreundS, non 
 sunt. Haedfis, in dSmus tecto stans, liipo^ praetfireunti 
 maiSdixit. Cui liipiis, "Non tu," inquit, "s6d IScus mihi' 
 inS,16dicit." S6nattis a consfilS de foed6r6 consultiis est. Dic- 
 tator rei publicae' consttluit. NonnS libgris tuis' mgtuis? 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The number of the enemy was unknown to the general. 
 The undutifulness of children is a great grief to (their) 
 parents. The tliick woods were a very great advantage 
 (§ 147) to our skirmishers. It is sweet and honorable to 
 do good to the commonwealth. Children are not always 
 like their parents. It was very easy for our men to cross 
 the river. The consul's speech was very disagreeable to 
 the Gauls. The snares of the enemy have been (for) a 
 very great hindrance to our cavalry. God ought to be 
 worshipped by all men. The causes of this rebellion 
 ought not to be passed over by me. It is the greatest 
 disgrace (§ 147) to a soldier to leave his place in battle. 
 The Roman people gave to the king for a gift the fields 
 which he had conquered. Nature had surrounded the 
 town with a broad and deep river. It is lawful for no 
 man to lead an army against his country. Be kind and 
 just to all, but flattering to none. 
 
 THE ACCUSATIVE. 
 § 149. The Accusative case marks the Direct Object of 
 an action ; i. e. the thing actually reached by the action , 
 
 ' ? 143. ' ? 140. 6 J 146. 7 g 148. « § 142, Rem. 5. 
 '^67. *J147. «§134. 8 §142. 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE. 241 
 
 also the limit of Space or Time which an action or motion 
 reaches. 
 
 § 150. Rule 'KH.— Direct Object.— The Direct Ob- 
 ject of a Transitive Verb is put in the Accusative. 
 
 Bemark 1. — Cognate Accusative. — An Intransitive Verb, though 
 it does not require an Object to complete its meaning, may be 
 limited by an Accusative of similar or kindred signification, usu- 
 ally modified by an Adjective or Pronoun ; as, mlrum somnidul 
 somniUm, I have dreamed a strange dream ; vlt&m tutiortm vlv^rS, 
 to live a safer life. 
 
 Bemark S. — To this head of the Cognate Accusative is to be 
 referred the adverbial use of the Accusative of neuter Pronouns 
 and Adjectives with Intransitive Verbs, which is specially com- 
 mon ; as, mllSs idtm gloriatUr, the soldier makes the same boast 
 (lit. boasts the same thing) ; multS, invectOs est in Thebanos, he 
 heaped many reproaches on (inveighed many things against) the 
 Thebans. If the Verb be Transitive, an Accusative of the Person 
 can of course also stand along with this Adverbial Accusative. 
 
 Bemark S. — Akin to the above are such adverbial phrases as 
 magndm partem, to a great extent, id ginHs, of that sort, id tern- 
 p6rls, at that time. Id aetatls, at that age. 
 
 Bemark Jf. — Intransitive Verbs used Transitively. — Many Verbs, 
 properly Intransitive, assume a Transitive meaning and govern 
 the Accusative. Such are especially Verbs denoting Feeling or 
 the Manifestation of Feeling; as, elves rniUm casUm luetHmqui d6lu- 
 erunt, the citizens grieved (for) my misfortune and aflliction; 
 Uxdr calltdd viri jScd rldU, the shrewd wife laughs at her hus- 
 band's jokes. The poets extend this usage freely. 
 
 Bemark 5. — So Verbs signifying to Smell or Taste; as, bUt 
 vlnUm, it smells (of) wine; pisds ipsUm mS/rt s&pU, the fish 
 tastes (of) the very sea. 
 
 §151. Rule XXI. — Double Accusative. — (a) Verbs 
 meaning to Ask, Demand, and Teach, with celdrS, to Con- 
 ceal, take two Accusatives — one of the Person, the other 
 rf the Thing; as, rdgo te nuinmos, I ask you for money ; 
 ddcutt me mus^c&m, he taught me music. 
 ^1 
 
242 SYNTAX. 
 
 Remark I. — The Double Accusative with these Verbs occurs 
 most frequently when the Thing desired is expressed by a neuter 
 Pronoun or Adjective ; as, hoc U rdgo, this I ask of thee ; illHd 
 un&m te interrOgo, I put this one question to you. ' 
 
 Remark 2. — The Thing is often put in the Ablative with the 
 Preposition de after rdgo, interrSgS, dOcm, celo, and sciscitbr; the 
 Person, on the other hand, is frequently put in the Ablative with 
 (U> after posco and fldgUS, always after pito and postMo, and with 
 ex, &b, and de after qicaero. 
 
 Remark 3. — The Accusative of the Thing may even remain 
 with the Passive of ddceo and rdgo. the Accusative of the Person 
 becoming the Nominative ; as, duloes doctH mSdos, taught sweet 
 measures ; sentenHdm rdgdtus est, he was asked his opinion. So 
 sometimes the Accusative of a neuter Pronoun with cU6r. This 
 construction with the Passive of these Verbs is, however, com- 
 paratively rare. 
 
 (6) Second Aoousative. — Verbs meaning to Name or 
 Call, Choose, Show, Appoint, Make, Esteem, or Reckon, 
 take, besides the Direct Object, a Second Accusative of 
 the iVame, Office, or Character; as, urbSm vdcdvU RomSm, 
 he called the city Roms; me consttlgm fecistts, you have 
 made me consul. 
 
 §152. Rule XXII. — Twenty-six Prepositions are 
 
 followed by tlie Accusative. (See § 120, 1.) 
 
 Note. — As a general rule. Prepositions expressing Motion to a Place 
 take the Accusative. 
 
 Remark 1. — Intransitive Verbs of Motion, compounded with 
 trans, circUm, plr, praettr, s&ptr, subtir, and a few other Prep- 
 ositions, become Transitive, and take an Accusative ; as, hosies 
 fliim'in translerunt, the enemy crossed the river ; flhminii micros 
 subterldbvntUr, the rivers glide under (close by) the walls. 
 
 Remark S. — Transitive Verbs of Motion, compounded with 
 droUm and trans, take an Accusative of the Person and an Ac- 
 cusative of the Place; as, Belgas RhenUm iransdaclt, he leads 
 the Belgians across the Rhine (Passive, Belgae RhenUm tmnsdUr 
 cuntUr, the Belgians are led across the Ehine). 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE. 243 
 
 Remark 3, — The Preposition is often repeated Belgaa trans 
 Rhlniim transdudlt. 
 
 § 153. Rule XXIIT. — Accusative of Timt and Space. 
 — Duration of Time and Extent of Spaoe are expressed by 
 the Accusative ; as, tres horas manstt, he remained three 
 hours; fossd duos p6des Idtd, a ditch two feet wide. 
 
 Note. — The limit of time Wilkin Which anything occurs is ex- 
 pressed by tlie Ablative; as, uno anno, within one year. 
 
 Remari: 1. — The Preposition is used for greater precision oi 
 emphasis ; as, ludi pir dtctm dies, games lasting ten days (all 
 through the ten days). 
 
 Remark Z. — Duration of Time is sometimes expressed by the 
 Ablative ; as, pugndtHm est conUnentir horis qulnqui, it was fought 
 steadily /or five hours. But this is rare except in later writers. 
 
 Remark S. — With &besst and disiar^ may be used either the 
 Accusative or Ablative of Specified Measure; as, dbess^ {dis/dri) 
 qmngut mlliU (or milibUs) passuUm, to be (distant) five miles 
 from — . So when it is stated at what distance a thing is done ; 
 as, AriovistHs miltbUs (or mlliiX) passuUm sex a, Caes&rls castna 
 consedtt, Ariovistus went-into-camp six miles from Caesar's 
 camp. Sp&tiUm and intervallUm used in this way are always 
 put in the Ablative ; as, Hannibdl quindi&lm ferme mlliUm spQ,- 
 tid castrii lib T&rento pdsult, Hannibal pitched his camp a dis- 
 tance of nearly fifteen miles from Tarentum. If the place from 
 which the distance is measured is not specified, a or lib is often 
 used before the Ablative of Measure; as, a millb'&s passuUm 
 duobUs castrii pdsult, he pitched his camp two miles off. 
 
 § 154. Rule XXIV. — Accusative of Place Whither. — 
 Tlie names of Towns and Small Islands are put in the 
 Accusative without a Preposition, to express the Pla,ce 
 Whither or To Which; as, Romiim venU, he came to Rome. 
 
 Remark 1. — JDdmum, ddmos, and rus are construed in the same 
 way ; as, ddn iim rtdiit, he returned home. If a Genitive or a 
 Possessive Pronoun limits ddmUm, In may be used ; as, ddmiim 
 me&m or tn dSmiim meUm = to my house; dSm&m Caes&ris or in 
 
244 SYNTAX. 
 
 ddmUM Caesiris = to Caesar's hotise. With other Ailjectives the 
 Preposition must be inserted ; in dSmUm magniflaS.m venlt = ht 
 came into a splendid house. 
 
 Remark S. — A Preposition (in or ad) is used when urbs or 
 opptdUm in Apposition is prefixed to the name of a town; as,, 
 cd7isul pervenil in oppidiim Cirtam, the consul came into the town 
 [of) Oirta; so, usually, when urbs or oppidiim, with an Adjec- 
 tive, follows the name of a town ; as, DcmiXraitis se conlMit Tar- 
 quinios In urbem Mruriae fiOreniissimdm, — to Tarquinii, /Acmosi 
 flourishing town of Etruria. Ad before the name of a town not 
 so limited, denotes to, in the direction of, to the vicinity of (before, 
 in military parlance) ; adfilescentiiliis mil6s &d C&pu&m prOfectiis 
 stlm, I set out a young recruit (to the camp) before Capua. 
 
 Remark S. — ^The Preposition (&d or in) is commonly used with 
 all other Names of Places (Countries, etc.), but it is sometimes 
 omitted in prose, often in poetry, before the name of any place 
 to which Motion is directed ; as, deviniunt speluncam, they come 
 to a cave ; ItaliSm venit, he came to Italy. 
 
 Remark J/.. — The poets sometimes express the Limit of Motion 
 by a Dative; as, it clamor caelo, the shout mounts to heaven. 
 
 As the Accusative expresses the limit actually reached by an action' 
 or motion, so also it expresses the limit to which the truth of a prop- 
 osition extends. Thus, membrd nudOs est, he is naked, — not entirely, 
 but only as to his limbs. Hence — 
 
 § 155. E.UI.E XXV. — The Accusative is sometimes 
 used to express a Special Limitation {Accusative of lAm- 
 itation); as, nudus raembrS, naked as to his limbs. 
 
 Remark 1. — This is a Greek construction, and is rarely used 
 in prose, where we find the Ablative instead. 
 
 Remark S. — The poets often use an Accusative with a Passive 
 Verb in the sense of the Greek Middle; as, PriamUs Inutile 
 ferrtim cingitUr, Priam girds himself with (puts on) the useless 
 sword. 
 
 § 1 56. XXVI. — Accusative in Exclamaiions. — The Ac- 
 cusative expresses the Object of Feeling, with or without an 
 Inteijection ; as, Heu me mls^rum,! Ah, wretched me! 
 
THE ACCUSATIVE. 245 
 
 For the Accusative with pi-dpidr and proxtmUs. see § 144> Rem. 4/ 
 with mU^rSt, etc., see § 135 (c), iZem. J/ with the Infinitive, see § 194. 
 
 EXERCISE LV. 
 §157. Vocabulary. 
 
 Antiocbus, -i, Antinchus, juvcntus, -lut-ih, youth, 
 
 Antiochia, -ac, Autinch. miisica, -ae, music. 
 
 Ancus Martius, -i, ^Mctia Martina, grainmatica, -ae, grammar, 
 
 fourth king of Home. fides, -ium (feui.), strings, a lute, 
 
 Mercurius, -i, Mercury, Socrates, -is, Socrates, 
 
 inventor, -or-iSj inventor, timidiis, -a, -um, cowardlif. 
 
 Antigonus, -i, Antigonua, certiis, -a, -um, eertaiiif sure, 
 
 Gotldie, daily. studiuin, -i,zeal, desire; P\.studie9, 
 
 jucundus, -a, -B,m, delightful. vastitas, -tat-is, devastation, 
 
 servitus, -tut-is, slavery. arbitra-ri, to thiukj deem. 
 
 Regulus, -i, Regulus, 
 
 habe-8, -e-re, habu-i, habit-um, to have, hold, consider. 
 
 cel-o, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to hide, conceal. 
 
 flagit-6, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to ask for, demand earnestly. 
 
 servi-3, -i-re, -iv-i, -it-um (Intr.), to be a slave, to serve, 
 
 trans-duc-o, -e-re, -dux-i, duct-um, to lead over. 
 
 trans-jiG-i-5, -e-re, -jec-i, -ject-um, to throw over, ship over, 
 
 rede-S, -i-re, redi-i, redit-um, to return. 
 
 dis-eed-5, -e-re, discess-I, discess-iim, to depart, 
 
 pon-tS, -e-re, posu-i, posit-um, to put, place. 
 
 sequ-o-r, sequ-I, secut-us siim, to follow. 
 
 per-sequ-o-r, persequ-i, perseout-iis siim, to follow through, pursue, 
 
 doce-S, -e-re, dobu-i, doct-um, to teach. 
 
 edoce-5, -e-re, edocu-i, edoct-um, to teach thoroughly, 
 
 nasc-o-r, nasc-i, nat-iis sum, to be born. 
 
 illio-i-t), -e-re, illex-i, illect-um, to allure, decoy. 
 
 redd-6, redd-e-re, reddid~i, reddit-ura, to render. 
 
 B61e-5, -e-re, solitus sum (§ 109, 3), to be accustomed, 
 
 pr6ficisc-6-r, proficisc-i, profect-iis sum, to set out, 
 
 posc-tS, -e-re, popose-T, , to demand, ask, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Iter omnes celat (J 151)» ^^^ a-^oiceala his journey from all. 
 
 Regem pdeem poBCunt (§ 151), Thr^ Ash the king for peace, 
 
 tjnitis diei iter. One day's journey. 
 
 Annds (gl53) quindecim natus, fifteen years old. {Borr\ fifteen yeara.) 
 
 21* 
 
246 SYNTAX. 
 
 A vita disee JerS, To depart from life) to die, 
 
 A milibus passuum duobus castra 1 „ , , , ., ^ 
 
 *, „ „ , >■ He pitched hts camp two miCee off. 
 
 posuit (§ lo3, Jiem. S), ) 
 
 Milia passuum duQ (Ace), or mil- 
 
 ibus passuum duobus [Abl.) V Two miles from the city. 
 
 (1 153, Rem. S), ab urbe, 
 Me fidibus docult, He taught me to play on the lyre {with 
 
 the strings. Abl. of Instrument). 
 Caesarem certiiirem {§ 151, 6) fa- They inform Caesar {make more ccr^ 
 
 oiunt, tain). 
 
 Translate itdo English. 
 UrbSm, ex Antifichi patris' nomiiiS, Antiochi3,m'' v6cavit, 
 Anctim Martittm pQptilus reggm '' creavit. VfitSres Romaui 
 Merciiriiim omnium inventorSm' artium hJibebaiit. Anti- 
 gSntis it6r exercitus omnes ceiat. CStidie CaesSr Aeduos 
 frumentiim' flagitablit. Nfim timidus vitSm* jucund^m 
 vTvSrg potest? Qui^ auri serviis est, turpissimiim servitu- 
 tSm* servit. Ariovistiis maximas Germanorum copias Rhe- 
 nttm' transjec8ra,t, ngqug multoriim dieriim' itSr* a Caesaris 
 castris abfuit. Quis reggm f idibiis dOcuit ? Alexander men- 
 sSm° uniim, annos" tres 6t triginta natfis, a vita discessit. 
 Ja.m vicesimiim annfim' Italiae vastitatfira patimiir (§95, 
 Rem. 3). Reguliis CarthaginSm '" rfidiit. Consiil in AfricJim 
 prSfectfis, Carthagin6m venit. Consul milia,* passufim du6 
 a,b oppido castra p6suSra,t. CatilinS, juventut6m quftm il- 
 lexSrSt mala, facJnSra' edScebat. Socrates totitts mundi se 
 inc5iam' 6t civfim arbitrabatur. Exploratores de hostiilm 
 adventu eonsulSm certiorSm f aciunt. Jiivgnes Romani Athe- 
 nas'° stiidiorum causa pr6ficLsci sOlebant. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Labienus followed Caesar into Gaul ; Marius returned 
 home. Our cavalry pursued the enemy ten miles. Caesar 
 
 '« 1 154. 
 
 >?I27. 
 
 ♦ 2 150, Rem. 1. 
 
 ' § 132. 
 
 '?151, *• 
 
 <> 1 129, Rem. S. 
 
 8 1 153. 
 
 » 2 151, a. 
 
 ' 1 15?i Rem. 2. 
 
 » 1 153. 
 
THE VOCATIVE. 247 
 
 set out from the winter quarters to Rome. The place and 
 time often render cowards brave. Lust makes (renders) 
 vaea blind. Which of the teachers {masters) taught the 
 boys grammar and music ? My brother taught me to play 
 on the lute. The general led all his forces across the bridge 
 in one night. My brother is twenty years old. Caesar asked 
 the senate for an army. The robbers demanded money from 
 Caius. Are you going to Rome for the sake of study ? Cae- 
 sar was distant ten days' journey from the camp of Ariovis- 
 tus. It-is-characteristic of a good general to throw his forces 
 over a river quickly. A boy twelve years old used to inform 
 the enemy of the approach of our forces. The Germans will 
 pitch their camp ten miles off. 
 
 THE VOCATIVE. 
 
 § 158. The name of the person addressed is put in the 
 Vocative. 
 
 The Vocative has no grammatical connectiou with the 
 sentence, but merely serves to call the attention of the 
 person to whom the discourse is directed. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Vocative usually stands after one or more 
 words, unless emphatic, when it stands first, often after the 
 Interjection 0, which is only used in prose to express strong 
 emotion. In poetry the position varies, and the use of the 
 Interjection marks no special emphasis. 
 
 Remark S. — In poetry and sometimes in prose, we find the 
 Nominative instead of the Vocative; as, audi tu, pdpiUHs Albd- 
 nus, hear thou, people of A.lba ; sometimes, on the other hand, 
 we find the Vocative of an Adjective or Participle where we 
 should expect the Nominative agreeing with the Subject; as, 
 qu5, mSrituri, ruts, whither dost thou rush, (thou) doomed 
 to die. 
 
248 SYNTAX. 
 
 THE ABLATIVE. 
 
 § 159. The Ablative denotes the following relations: 
 
 I. Whence (the Ablative proper). 
 II. Wherewith (Instrumental). 
 III. Where (Locative). 
 
 § 160. EuLE XXVII. — Ablative of Separation. — 
 Verbs and Adjectives signifying Separation and Re- 
 moval are followed by the Ablative with or without a 
 Preposition ; as, signiim 7ion pdtSr&t nidverS I6c6, he 
 could not move the standard from its place; immwriHs 
 militia, exempt from military service. 
 
 This Ablative is used with all words signifying to 
 Remove, Set free, Deprive, Abstain, Cease, and Want. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Prepositions, chiefly lib, de, and ex, are used 
 to emphasize the relation ; if a Person is specified, the Preposi- 
 tion (generally &b) is always used; te S,b illo impr6b6 llbtravl, 
 I have rid you of that scoundrel. 
 
 Remarh 2. — The Ablative with Verbs of Filling, etc., i.s an 
 Ablative of Means (Instrumental). Some Verbs of Plerdy and 
 Want, after the analogy of Adjectives oi Fulness, take the Gen- 
 itive — indiglrt frequently; compleri and impleri sometimes; 
 l&ger!6 seldom (see J 135, d). The poets frequently use the Gen- 
 itive with all words that express or imply Separation and Want; 
 desini quSrelariim, cease (from) your complainings. 
 
 Remark 3. — On the other hand, though most Adjectives of 
 Fulness and the contrary [1 135, a) take the Genitive, some fol- 
 low the analogy of the Verb and take the Ablative; insult 
 rifertH, est divl'tiis, the island is crammed with riches. 
 
 Remark J/,. — Practically, we way observe for writing Latin 
 that nudUs, orbits, and libir have generally the simple Ablative 
 ■of Things, the Ablative with d {&b) of Persons (urbs niida, prae- 
 sldio, but urbs nudi a, mSglstratlbtis. etc.) ; that inants, vtleuOii, 
 
THE ABLATIVE. 249 
 
 inust^s and praedUits have regularly the simple Ablative in gooU 
 prose ; and that r^/erMs takes always the Ablative of the Thing, 
 the Genitive or Ablative of the Person [m&rid sunt rifertH prae- 
 donlbils (or praedonfim), the seas are swarming with buccaniers). 
 Remark 5, — Verbs of Taking away sometimes take a Dative 
 instead of the Ablative of Separation (see ? 143, E. 3). 
 
 On the Ablative of the Plctce From Which in Names of Towns, etc., 
 see ?175; on the Ablative with 6pus and «s&s, see §167, 2. 
 
 §161. EuLE H'KSflll.— Ablative of Oi-ig in.— Par- 
 ticiples denoting Birtli take the Ablative of Origin ; as, 
 Mercurius JovB naius fit Maia, Mercury born of Jupiter 
 and Maia. 
 
 Bemark 1. — With the names of Parents, ex and de are also used, 
 ab of remoter ancestors ; as, Belgae orti sunt &b Germanis, the 
 Belgians are sprung from the Germans. With Pronouns, ex is 
 used regularly. 
 
 Remark 2. — The Material of which a thing consists is put in 
 the Ablative regularly with the Prepositions ex and de (except 
 in poetry and late prose) ; constart sometimes omits the Preposi- 
 tion ; as, ftnimo constdmiis it corp6r5, we consist of soul and body. 
 
 §162. Rule XXIX. — Ablative of Limitation. — Nouns, 
 Adjectives, and Verbs are followed by the Ablative show- 
 ing' in what respect, in accordance with what, a quality or 
 assertion is limited; as, AgesUdils altfiro pSdS claud-As 
 fu% Agesilaiis was lame of one foot; descript/Us &riU 
 pSpul-Hs HomdnUs censu, ordinibtis, aetatibtis, the So- 
 man people were classed according to income, rank, 
 and age. 
 
 Remark 1. — ^To this Ablative, which primarily gives the point 
 of view from which anything is measured, refer the Ablative 
 with dign'&s and indignUs (and the Verbs formed therefrom), and 
 the Ablative Supine (Supine in -«) after Adjectives; aa,plerliqv^ 
 dictti qu&m re sunt jUdliord,, most things are easier in the saying 
 than in reality. 
 
250 SYNTAX. 
 
 Observe specially ndtu, in expressions of age, after grandU 
 (not magnUs), mdjur, maxlmils, mindr, mtnimUs; as, EnniUs full 
 major natu qutim Naeviiis, Ennius was older (lit. greater in point 
 of birth) than Naevius. 
 
 Remark S. — Here belongs the Ablative with f&cio and flo in 
 the sense of do, with, become of; as, quid TuUiOla mea fiU, what 
 will become of my little Tullia? De is also used with these 
 Verbs. 
 
 Remark S. — Such Ablatives as senteniid, Opinloni, judicio, tes- 
 Unwnio, and the like, together with a Possessive Pronoun or 
 modifying Genitive, are used to limit not any particular word, 
 but the general meaning of the sentence; as, Protdgdrds mea 
 sententia illls tempSribiis fuU vU maximOs, Protagoras, according 
 <o my opinion, was the very greatest sophist of those times. Prep- 
 ositions may be employed ; as, ex mea senteniid, etc. ; so ex foe- 
 dtrt, according to the treaty, ex pacts, according to agreement, 
 ex legt, according to law, and many similar expressions. 
 
 Remark Jf. — Instead of the Ablative of Limitation, the poets 
 frequently employ the so-called " Greek Accusative " (see J 155). 
 
 § 163. EuLE XXX. — Ablative of Comparison. — The 
 object with reference to which a Comparison is made 
 stands in the Ablative after a Comparative instead of 
 qa&m with the Nominative or Accusative; as, PatriA 
 mthi vita est cariOr, my country is dearer to me than 
 Hfe. 
 
 Remark 1. — Qudm must be used when the second Noun of 
 the Comparison would stand in any other ease than the Nom- 
 inative or Accusative. Thus, we may say, TullUs HosUliih ftrb- 
 cibr Komiilo ( = quJlm Eomfilfis) fuU, Tullus Hostilius was more 
 warlike than Romulus; nbn tUlU haec clvttds cldriores P. Africans 
 6t C. Laelio ( = quim P. Afrlcaniim et C. Laeliiim), this state has 
 brought forth no man more illustrious than P. Africanua and C. 
 Laelius. But, His (Dat.) qu&m physicis pdtiiis credimOs, we trust 
 these men rather than the scientists. (Exceptions occur in the poets.) 
 
 Remark 2. — ^When the thing compared is the Subject, the Abla- 
 tive is the usual construction ; as, argentUm auro viliiig est, silver 
 
THE ABLATIVE. 251 
 
 is cheajer than gold ; so, in the construction of the Accusative 
 with the Infinitive, the Ablative is used instead of quUm with 
 the Accusative ; as, nlmiri&m CicSronfi USquentiorim fuisst v&Ures 
 judtcdrunt, the ancients judged that no one had (ever) been 
 more eloqutnt than Oicero. When the thing compared is the 
 Object, the Ablative is also used if a negative be expressed or 
 implied ; as, hoc nihil grdti&s f&cirt pSUs, you can do nothing 
 more agreeable than this. Otherwise the simple Objective Accu- 
 sative generally i-etains the qu&m construction. After the Com- 
 parative of Adverbs, qu&m is the regular construction in prose. 
 
 Bemark 2. — When the second member of the Comparison is a 
 Relative, a negative being expressed or implied, the Ablative must 
 be used; as, non admlrbr Cdtonim quo gr&viorim inlmicUm non 
 h&bui, I do not admire Cato, a greater enemy than whom I never 
 had. (Here in English we would use a Superlative in Apposi- 
 tion — "the greatest enemy I ever had.") 
 
 Bemarh If. — After the Adverbs plus, ampliiis, and mhiUs, pre- 
 fixed to words of Measure or Number, qu&m is often omitted 
 without influencing the construction ; as, plus septingenti capti, 
 more than seven hundred were taken; non ampliOs horas sex man- 
 sit, he stayed not more than six hours. So after longiUs, and also 
 after Comparative Adjectives of Dimension, such as majSr, mlnSr, 
 latiSr, etc. ; thus, pu'&r anndr&m dtc&m, a boy of ten years (ten years 
 old) ; pui,r min6r annorUm d^dim, a boy of less than ten years. 
 
 Bemark 5. — The Ablative of certain Abstract Nouns {spe, 6pi- 
 nion&, exspectationt) and of Adjectives used as Nouus [aequo, justo, 
 idlito, dlcto, etc.) is employed with the Comparative for brevity's 
 sake, instead of a clause [qu&m est, <irdi, etc. and a Nominative) ; 
 as, Gaes&r 5pini6n6 c616ritis (quSm 6pini6 fufir^t) venU, Caesar 
 came moff: quickly than was expected. 
 
 Bemark 6. — The Standard of Comparison is often omitted when 
 it can be easily supplied by the sense. The Comparative is trans- 
 lated by too, rather, or quite with the Positive ; as, !iqu1tes paulb 
 longitts proclgsirant, the horsemen had advanced a little too far; 
 stnectibs est natura IfiquaciOr, old age is naturally rather talkative. 
 
 Bemark 7. — Atqui for qu&m after a Comparative is poetic ; so 
 the use of the Ablative after &lviis. 
 
 §164. B.ULE H'XXl.— Ablative oj Difference.— The 
 
252 811 NTAX. 
 
 Degree of Difference is exjjressed by the ^Vblative after 
 Comparatives and words implying Comparison; as, sol 
 multls partlbils majSr est qu&m tei'rd, the sun is Toany 
 times larger than the earth ; multo praestM virtus dlvUils, 
 virtue is far better than riches. 
 
 Ranarh 1. — Especially common in this construction is the use 
 of the Ablative of Pronouns (eo (Aoc), quo), and of Adjectwes of 
 Quantity [tanto, quanto, dliquanto, nullo, paulo, nUhllo, tUtSro tanto 
 = as much again). Observe quo — eo {hoo); quanto — tanto (each 
 with a Comparative) = English the — the; as, quo m&gis conarts, 
 eo longiUs progrldiris, the more you try, the further on you get. 
 Sometimes (poetic and late writers) we find the Accusative of 
 these Adjectives instead of the Ablative [multiim impr6bi6r, 
 dJiquantHm ampli6r, etc.). 
 
 Remark 2. — Sometimes we find the Ablative of Comparison and 
 the Ablative of Difference used with the same Comparative; as, 
 mults dlvitiSr Lucullo, far richer than ImcuUus. 
 
 Remarh S. — Here belongs the Ablative, with the Adverbs ant)i 
 and post, to denote how long before or after a thing happens ; 
 flM idim quSd trlbtia annis ant6 flctr&t, he did the same thing 
 that he had done three years before. There is great variety of 
 expression : 
 
 (a) Sometimes anti and post stand before the Numeral, in which 
 case they are treated as Prepositions and followed by the Accu- 
 sative ; qu6d antfi tres annos fecirSi, which he had done three 
 years before. Ordinals may be used as well as Cardinals, and if 
 ant^ and post stand between the Numeral and the Substantive, they 
 may be regarded either as Adverbs or Prepositions* and the 
 Ablative or Accusative be used indifferently. Thus — 
 
 tnb&s annis post (anti) i f post [a7tti) tres annos 
 tertio anno post [anti) J \ post {a?it&) tertiUm annUm. 
 tribUs post [antS) annis 1 „. f tres post (anti) annos 
 tertio post (anti) anno ) I teriiUm post [anti) ann&m. 
 
 (J) The Ablative is also followed by post {anti) and an Accu- 
 oative, or by postqudm (antSquAm) with a Finite Verb ; as, 
 
THE ABLATIVE. 253 
 
 paudis diebUs post mortSm Afrtcdm, a feiv^days after the death 
 of Africanus ; 
 
 trtb&s annis {tertio anno) postqu3,m venSrSt, three years after he 
 had come 
 
 (or post {ant^) and quUrn may be written separately, in which 
 case the former is treated as a Preposition, and takes an Ae- 
 ons. ; post annUm tertiUm (tres annos) qua,m venSr&t). 
 
 (c) To express how long before the present time, how long ago, 
 use antt with the Accusative [and tres annos), or the Ablative 
 with the Demonstrative hlo [his trlbus annls), or (most fre- 
 quently) abhinc with the Accusative [abhinc annos tres; rarely, 
 abhina tribSs annls) = three years ago; consul fui abhinc annos 
 vlginti, twenty years ago I was consul ; his annis quadringentis 
 Bomae rex fuU, within these four hundred years there was a king 
 at Rome. (This Ablative with hto belongs to Time Within 
 Which, §171, Rem. S.) 
 
 To express the time after an event, we may use, instead of 
 postqudm (see above (6)), the simple Ablative in Relative Sen- 
 tences; as, diebiis d5cBm, quibtis m hlbernS, ventUm est, sedUio 
 ortd, est, ten days after they came (it was come) into winter-quar- 
 ters, a mutiny arose (lit. in the same ten days in which it was 
 come, etc.). 
 
 § 165. EuLE 'XX^n.—Ahlative of Cause.— The Ab- 
 lative expressing the Cause or Motive is used, without a 
 Preposition, chiefly with Intransitive and Passive Verbs 
 of Emotion and with Adjectives Passive in meaning ; as, 
 oderunt peccdrS bdni, virtvMs SniorS, the good hate to sin 
 from love of virtue. 
 
 Remark 1. — Expressions of Trust (fldo, confido; fretiis) and 
 many Adjectives and Participles expressing Emotion (adduotUs, 
 ardens, commot&s, impulses, laetHs, and the like) are especially 
 common with this Ablative; as, incensOs ira, inflamed by anger. 
 The Participle may be rendered in English simply by out of; 
 commottis 8did = out of hatred. 
 
 Remark S. — After a negative Expression the Preventing Cause 
 h expressed by prae with the Ablative; as, solKm prae s&gittnt 
 22 
 
254 SYNTAX. 
 
 rUm multltudlnS vtdert non pois&m, I cannol see the sun for tht 
 cloud of arrows. 
 
 Remark 3. — The Ablatives caasa and gratia, are used with 
 (and, as a rule, after) a Genitive or a Possessive Pronoun in 
 the sense of for the sake of (some person or thing) ; as, med 
 causa, for my own sake [gratia rarer with the Possessive in this 
 sense) ; rei publlcae catisa, for the republic's sake. 
 
 Remark 4. — When the moving Cause or Emotion resides in the 
 Actor [Subjective Cause), the Ablative is regularly used; but the 
 object for the sake of which, on account of which, an action is 
 done ( Objective Cause), is commonly expressed by lib and propter 
 with the Accusative, or by causa [gratia) following a Genitive; 
 as, non tdm Ob praed4m [Objective Cause) qudm Caes&rls 6di6 
 [Subjective Cause) hue fecit Pomp'ev&s, Pompey did this not so 
 much for the sake of booty as from [his) hatred to Caesar. But — 
 
 Remark 5.— Observe here the Ablative of Verbals of the Fourth 
 Declension, used with a Genitive or Possessive Pronoun ; jussU 
 pdpull, at the people's bidding (conversely, injuasu pSp&li, with- 
 out the people's bidding) ; meo rbgatu, at my request ; meo hortatU, 
 at my entreaty ; and the like. 
 
 §166. Rule ^K.'KXlll.— Ablative of the Agent— 
 Passive Verbs and Intransitives with a Passive sense 
 take the Ablative of the Agent with the Preposition a 
 or &b; as, Oaes&r a legatis certidr fact&s est, Caesar was 
 informed by the ambassadors. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Person through whom something is brought 
 about [Indirect Agency) is expressed by jo?r with the Accusative ; 
 as, Caes&r p5r legates certiSr factHs est, Caesar was informed 
 through [by means of) ambassadors [d legdtls means "by the 
 ambassadors in person"). So, sometimes, 5plrd with a Gen- 
 itive or Possessive; as, ClcSronis iinliis 6p6ra res publlcH, con- 
 tervdt& est, through [by the instrumentality of) Cicero alor,e, was 
 the republic preserved. 
 
 Remark 2. — Sometimes Persons are regarded as Things (e. g. 
 bodies of troops), and the construction becomes Inslrumental 
 [hosSba fundltoribfis terrebOi). 
 
THE ABLATIVE. 255 
 
 II. 
 
 § 167. Rule XXXIV. — Ablalzve oj Means or Instru- 
 ment. — The Means or Instrument by which a thing is 
 done is put in the Ablative without a Preposition; as, 
 CornHatts taurl se tviantur, bulls defend themselves with 
 their horns. 
 
 Here belong also the following Ablative constructions : 
 
 1. The Deponents utdr, fricSr, fungSr, pMior, and vescdr, 
 with their compounds, govern the Ablative. So vivU, I live 
 (on a thing), and pascdr, I eat, feed myself with (used of 
 animals and slaves). 
 
 Remarh. — Pdtidr, I possess myself of, sometimes (rarely in 
 prOse) takes the Genitive ; always in the plirase pdtlri rer&m, 
 to make one's self master of the supreme power. 
 
 2. Opus and wsiis, signifying Need, govern the Ablative of 
 the Thing wanted. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Person who wants is in the Dative. Sometimes 
 the Thing xoanted is the Subject, and 6pUs the Predicate ; hence, 
 we may say either dtlcS nobis dpHs est, there is a want to ns of a 
 leader, or dux nobu OpHs est, a leader is a want to us. The latter 
 construction is used always with Neuter Pronouns and Adjec- 
 tives. (We .must say quae dpUs sunt, guSd dpUs est, not quibUs or 
 quo dpUs est.) 
 
 Remark Z. — Especially frequent in this construction is the 
 Ablative of the Perfect Passive Participle (prOpSrato 6p&s est, 
 there is need of haste), and whenever a Negative is expressed 
 or implied the Ablative is regularly used (nihil dpits est simii- 
 lationS, there is no need of deception). 
 
 Remark 3. — The Thing needed, if expressed by a Verb, may 
 stand in the Iniinitive, Accusative with the Infinitive, and 
 sometimes Ht with the Subjunctive. 
 
 Remark 4. — The Genitive is rarely used (tempSris dpUs est, 
 tJiere is need of time). 
 
 3. Verbs of Filling and Abounding, and some of Mixing, 
 
256 SYNTAX. 
 
 Joining, and the like, take the Ablative of the Means by 
 which. 
 
 4. Definite Price is put iu the Ablative (for the Geuitive 
 of Indefinite Price, see § 137). 
 
 Remark. — Mutart and commulare, to exchange, take the Accu- 
 sative of the thing given and the Ablative of the thing received; 
 but in poetry and late prose the construction is often reversed. 
 
 5. To the Instrumental Ablative we may also refer (a) 
 the Ablative of Penalty with Verbs of Condemning (§ 136, 
 Rem. 2) ; (It) the Ablative of the Route by which with Verbs 
 oi Motion; (c) the Ablative of the Victim with Verbs of Sac- 
 rifixiing; (d) the Ablative with nltir (I lean upon), with star^ 
 (abide by), with the Participles assuetHs and assuefaetUs (ac- 
 customed), and the Ablative in such phrases as mact& virtiitS 
 esto, a blessing on thy valor (lit. be increased by thy valor). 
 
 6. When, Means or Instrument is personified, of course it is 
 treated as the Agent, and takes lib. (See also § 166, Rem. 2,) 
 
 § 168. Rule XXXV. — Ablative of Manner or Accom- 
 paniment. — The AblativCj commonly with an Adjective 
 or its equivalent, is used with or without cUm to express 
 Manner, Feelings, and Attendant Oircumstances ; as, 1.d 
 aequo Snimo non f&i-gt clvltas, the state will not bear this 
 calmly; intdUgeb&t maguo ciim pgricttlo provinciae fMH- 
 rurn {ess(i), he perceived that it would be attended with 
 the greatest danger to the province. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Ablative oi Manner regularly takes ciim when 
 there is no modifying Adjective; as, cum cura scribiri, to write 
 with care ; if modified by Adjective, dim may or may not be 
 used; as, magna cura (or magna ctim cura) scriblri, to write 
 with great care. 
 
 Remark 2.— But ciim is never used with [a) Nouns like mddo, 
 rdiioni, mori, etc., which denote Manner in themselves; (6) never 
 with Nouns like UnlmB, mentl consUio, which denote disposition 
 
TUB ABLATIVE. 257 
 
 or intention; (c) never in classical Latin, with Ugt or condHciorii 
 {ea condldorii {leg'6), on that condition) ; [d) nevei svdth parts of 
 the body (nUdo c&piti, with bared head). 
 
 Further, (e) dim is never used with many Ablatives which 
 have become virtually Adverbs, and are used without Adjective 
 or Preposition; such as, fraudi, fraudulently; jurt, justly; inju- 
 ria, without reason ; ordlni, in order ; liitio, unduly ; vi, forcibly, 
 etc. Observe a similar use of plr with the Accusative ; ptr vtm, 
 by force or forcibly ; p^r fraud&m, fraudulently. 
 
 Remark 3. — The English without is frequently expressed by 
 nuUo (-a, -is) and an Abl. of Manner; as, rhn conflcl nuUo 
 nSgotio, I accomplished the matter without any difficulty ; nulla 
 mea culpa, without any fault on my part, etc. Observe that m6d5 
 is used only in general expressions of Manner [hoc mddo, in this 
 manner, stmili mddo, in like manner, etc.), and cannot be used 
 to designate the manner of an action : " to fight in the bravest 
 manner " is not fortissimo mddo pugnarS, but summa dim virtuti 
 pugnarS ; " to lay waste the territory in a hostile manner " is hos- 
 iXlit&r (or hostll&m in mOdUm) agros p6ptllari. 
 
 Remarh If. — The Ablative of Accompaniment regularly takes 
 (Mm; always of Persons, and of a thing which a person has with 
 him or on him (except his dress) ; as, servUs oomprShensUs est ctim 
 giadio (or magno ciim glftdio), the slave was arrested (armed) 
 with a sword (or, with a large sword). So of the troopsin mil- 
 itary movements, if no Adjective is used ; as, ciim exercitu prS- 
 fectHs est, he set out with the army, if an Adjective is used, dim 
 sometimes occurs, but is generally omitted; as, ingenti exercitu 
 (rather than dim ingenti exercitu) db urbt prdfectUs est, he set 
 out from the city with a great army. 
 
 §169. EuLE 'XX.^K.YI.— Ablative of Quality.— The 
 Ablative, always with an Adjective or limiting Gen- 
 itive, is used to express the Quality of a thing; as, hdnio 
 inggnio mSlo pravoquS, a man of a bad and vicious dis- 
 position. 
 
 Remarh 1. — This Ablative may form part of the Predicate 
 like an Adjective ; as, AgedlaiXs staturd fuit hiimlli, Agesilaus 
 was of low stature. In such sentences the same Mea is some- 
 22* 
 
258 SYNTAX. 
 
 times expressed by an Ablative oi Limitation, limiting an Adjec- 
 tive; as, Ageslldils st3,tura /mH biimills, Agesilaus was low in 
 stature. 
 
 Bemarh S. — For the Genitive of Quality see § 132. There is 
 often no difference, but we must observe that the Genitive is 
 always used to define Kind, Measure, Number, Time, and Space, 
 while Transient Qualities are as a rule put in the Ablative. Bod- 
 ily Characteristics are always in the Ablative; as, h6m^ magno 
 cSpItS, Scutis Oculis, orS rublcundo, adm6diim magnis pfidlbiis, a 
 man with a big head, sharp eyes, a ruddy face, (and) very big feet. 
 If the modifying Adjective is of the Third Declension, the Abla- 
 tive is more usual, as the use of the Genitive would often cause 
 ambiguity. 
 
 Remark S. — A Genitive may supply the place of the Adjective; 
 as, est bos cervi figura, there is an ox of the shape of a stag [a 
 stag-shaped ox). 
 
 III. 
 §170. Rule 'K'KXYTl.— Ablative ofPlaoe Where.— 
 The Locative Ablative, usually with the Preposition In, ex- 
 presses the Place Where; as, \n summo jflgo duoLS ISgiones, 
 quds m Gallia conscrips^&t, inslruoM, he drew up on the top 
 of the ridge the two legions which he had levied in Gaul. 
 
 Remark 1. — For the Locative Ablative of the Names of Towns 
 and Small Islands, see ? 176 J8®". 
 
 Remark S. — The Ablative of Place Where with totHs omits Jray 
 as, totis castris fit sllentium, silence reigns throughout the whole 
 camp; so, generally, with cunctUs, omnls, m^diUs, and the like; 
 also with many general words, parti, rlgisni, (with Adj. or 
 Gen.), etc. 
 
 Remark 3. — L6co. used in a figurative sense ( Condition, Situa- 
 tion, Passage in a book), nearly always omits In; as, mSliorS 
 16c6 res nosfrae sunt, our affairs are in a better condition; even in 
 its literal sense, if used with an Adjective or Pronoun, the Prep- 
 osition is frequently omitted; as, hoc 16c6 (as well as In hoe Idcd), 
 in this place or spot. 
 
 Antmo omiti) in with Verbs of Emotion ; periurbari Unimo, to 
 
THE ABLATIVE. 259 
 
 be disturbed in mind. Libro, used of an entire treatise, omita 
 the Preposition; de AmvAtia alio libro dict&m est, Friendship 
 has been discussed in another treatise; but if only a portion of 
 a work is meant, libro takes In; In hoc libro, in this book (refer- 
 ring merely to some passage in a work). 
 
 Remarh J^. — The Preposition is also omitted when Place Where 
 can be regarded as the Means by which (Instrumental) ; as, tecto 
 6t mensa vlctUm rtcepi-t, he received him (though) conquered in 
 his house and at his table; so after Verbs of Motion, when the 
 Ablative denotes the Route by which; as, Appia via prd/ectUs est, 
 he set out by the Appian Way; frumentUm fluminS ArSri ndvtbih 
 subvextr&t, he had conveyed corn in ships up the river Arar. 
 
 Remark 5. — The poets are free in omitting the Preposition 
 with this Ablative; as, lucis dpaols, in shady groves; litSrH curvo, 
 on the curving strand. 
 
 § 171. EuLE X.X:K.YI1I.— Ablative of Time When.— 
 Time When or Within Which is put in the Ablative^ as, 
 bellUm eodgm tempSrS indlxerunt, they declared war at 
 the same time; tribus proxXmis annls, within the last three 
 years. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Preposition 1,n is frequently used to give 
 greater precision, and is commonly employed unless the Noun 
 denoting Time is qualified by an Adjective; so, to express Points 
 within a Period of Time ; as, quiddm 8ves bis In anno tondent, 
 some shear sheep twice in a year; also with Nouns denoting the 
 different Times of Life (Boyhood, Old Age, etc.) ; in pUtrUid, in 
 boyhood ; in stnectUti, in old age (but with modifying Adjective 
 omit the Preposition; prima pUirttia, in early boyhood; extremd 
 sinectud, in extreme old age). But simply hitnii, aestdti, die, 
 noctt, lact, occur. 
 
 Remark 2. — Observe specially the use of the Ablative of Time 
 with hio and ilU to express intervals of time from now or then; 
 as, ergo his annis quadringentis Romae rex tr&t, so within these 
 four hundred years (within four hundred years from now) there 
 was a king at Rome. In Oblique Narration hic becomes illH; 
 as, respondit se paucis illis djs\i^' argentHm mlsisst lAl^haeUm, he 
 
260 SYNTAX. 
 
 answered that he had sent the silver to Liiybaeum within a feu 
 days (a few days before that time [then)). Antl or abhinc with 
 the Accus. is more frequent (see i 164, Rem. S, c). 
 
 Remark S. — The simple Ablative is regular with tnUid, prin- 
 cipiu, "in the beginning," and especially with some Nouns of the 
 Fourth Declension which do not in themselves denote Time, but 
 an event which marks the Time, such as adventu, discessH, adspedu, 
 etc. ; adventu Caes&ris, on the arrival of Caesar. 
 
 Remark 4- — The following expressions should be noted: In 
 tempdrS {or tempSrt simply) means at the proper time; In eo (tall) 
 tempdri, at that critical moment, in those circumstances; whereas, 
 eo tempdrS means simply at that time. To express in any one's 
 time, use tempdribUs or a^tati^ dnciljiis, not tempSri (Singular); 
 as, Caes&ris tempdrtb&s, in Caesar's time; nostra aetdtS (mUmdrid), 
 in our time; bello Punico stcfundo, at the time of the second Punio 
 war, but In bello Puntco shnindo, during (or in the course of) the 
 second Punic war ; at the time of the games, of the elections, etc., 
 ladlf, cdmlHls, etc. 
 
 Remark 5. — In many expressions of time we use the Accusa- 
 tive with &d, in, intir, intra, and s&b ; as, convenerunt &d constUH- 
 tSm diim, they assembled at the appointed day ; sUb nocttm, 
 toward night, etc. 
 
 Remark 6. — The Ablative is rarely used to express Duraiion 
 of Time except in late writers (see ?153, Rem. S). 
 
 Remark 7. — For antS and post used Adverbially with the Abla- 
 tive, or as Prepositions with the Accusative, to express how long 
 before or after, see above, § 164, Rem. 3 and (a). 
 
 ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 § 172. EcLE X.X.XIX.— Ablative Absolute— A. Noun 
 or Pronoun with a Participle whose case depends upon 
 no other word, is put in the Ablative called Absolute to 
 express the Antecedent or Attendant Circumstances of an 
 action, such as Time, Cause, Condition, etc.; as, PytliSr- 
 gdrds, Tarquinio regnantg, 1,n It&li&m vewtt, Pythagoras 
 came into Italy in the reign of Tarquin {Tarquin reigning). 
 
NAMES OP PLACES. 261 
 
 ' Por further discussion of the Ablative Absolute, see under 
 "Participial Propositions," §192. 
 
 NAMES OF PLACES. 
 § 173. Relations of Place, except in the case of Names 
 of Towns and Small Islands (with ddmUs, rils, and a few 
 other words) are expressed by the proper case of the 
 Noun together with a Preposition. Thus, generally, — 
 
 1. The place Whither or To Which is expressed by the 
 Accusative with tid' or in; as, Hd urMm vSniunt, they come 
 to the city ; in Afric&m r&dit, he returns to (into) Africa. 
 
 2. The place Whence or From Which is expressed by the 
 Ablative with &b, de, and ex; as, Hb urM prSfici?eltilr, he 
 sets out from the city ; e Gallia diseessXt, he departed from 
 {out of) Gaul. 
 
 3. The place Where or In Which is expressed by the Ab- 
 lative with in; as, in Caes&ris horto ambtildbat, he was walk- 
 ing in Caesar's garden ; Hannib&Us l&giones in It&lia hiSmor 
 bant, the legions of Hannibal were wintering in Italy. 
 
 Remarh. — The poets freely omit the Preposition in all Place 
 relations. But the names of Towns and Small Islands, together 
 with ddmits and rus, are construed as follows : 
 
 § 174. E0LE XL. — Names of Towns and Small Isl- 
 ands are put in the Accusative, without a Preposition, to 
 denote place Whither or To Which; as, RomSm venlt, he 
 came to Rome.* 
 
 DdmUm {d.6mos) and rUs are construed in the same 
 way ; as, ddmUm rMM, he returned home. So, too, with 
 Verbals ; dOmUra rSdiiUs, ddmUm rMUis, a return home. 
 
 * Eule XL. and its accompanying Eemarks have already been 
 given [l 154 sqq.) to meet the requirements of the exercises. They 
 are repeated here, as it is desirable to present a connected discussion 
 of Place relations. 
 
262 SYNTAX. 
 
 Eemark 1. — If a Genitive or a Possessivo Pronoun limite 
 ddmtim, the Preposition in may be used; as, in ddmiim medm, 
 or ddmiim me&m = to my house ; ddmiim Caesdrts, or In ddmSm 
 Oaesdris = to Caesar's house. With other Adjectives in must be 
 used ; as, in ampldm ddmiim vinirl = to come into a spacious 
 house. 
 
 Remarh 2. — A Preposition (??i or Srf) is used when urhs or 
 opptdUm in Apposition comes before tlie name of a town; as, 
 cons&l pervenit In oppidilm Cirtitm, the consul came into the town 
 of Clrta {&d Ciridm would mean into the neighborhood of Cirta) ; 
 so, usually, when urbs or oppidUm with an Adjective follows the 
 name of a town ; as, Dem&ratHs se contiillt,TaTqutnl6a In urbSm 
 Etriiriae florentissIm3,m, Demaratus betook himself to Tarquinii, 
 the most flourishing town of Etruria. 
 
 Eemark S. — Ad before the name of a town not so limited, 
 denotes to, in the direction of, to the vicinity of, before (in military 
 movements) ; as, itir M Mfitlnam dirigit, he directs his journey 
 toward (in the direction of) Mutina; ad CJtpuamjorfi/'Jeisa = to 
 set out for (the camp before) Capua. 
 
 Eemark J^. — Sometimes the names of Larger Islands and Penin- 
 sulas are construed like names of towns, and the poets often omit 
 the Preposition before the Names of Nations as well as before 
 common Nouns in general ; as, IhUmtis Afros, we shall go to the 
 Africans; LaviniS venit llidrti, he came to the Lavinian shores. 
 
 Sometimes the poets express the Limit of Motion by the Dative; 
 as, it cldmdr caelo, the shout mounts to heaven {in caeMm in prose). 
 
 Eemark 5. — Here belong such expressions as exslquias Iri = to 
 go to the funeral ; infitioi Irt = to proceed to a denial, to deny ; 
 pessHm Irl = to fall to the ground, to perish ; pessUm ddri = to 
 send to the bottom, to destroy; venUm Irt = to go to sale, to be 
 sold [vene^, used as Pass, of vendS) ; venUm dS,r!i = to give to 
 sale, to sell [vendo); and the construction of the Supine in -urn 
 after Verbs of Motion. 
 
 §175. Rule XLI. — Names of Towns and Small 
 Islands are put in the Ablative, without a Preposition, 
 to denote Ihe place Whence cv From Which; as, DemH- 
 ratUs fugit Cfirintho, Demaratus fled from Corinth. 
 
NAMES OF PI.ACES. 2C3 
 
 DSmo, fr<;m home, rurS, from the country, and some- 
 times Mimo, from the ground, are construed in the same 
 way. 
 
 Remark 1. — When urbs or opptdUm is used in Apposition with 
 the name of a town From Which, the Preposition is regularly- 
 used ; as, VerdngWirix ex oppido GergOvia expulsUs eat, Vercin- 
 getorix was driven out of the town of Gergovia. 
 
 Remark 2. — When distance is measured from a Place, &h is reg- 
 ularly used ; as, Ate I6ciis tria milia, passutim a Eoma dbtr&i, this 
 place was three miles distant from Rome. So when removal from 
 the vicinity of a Place is to be expressed ; as, Caes&r a, Oergdvia 
 discesM, Caesar departed from Gergovia (before which he lay). 
 Ab and ex are also used sometimes to give special emphasis to 
 the Whence relation ; as, ab Epidauro PlraeUm advectUs est, from 
 Epidaurus he went (lit. was carried) to the Piraeus. 
 
 Remark S. — We sometimes find the Ablative used to denote 
 the Place from which a person hails, but the Adjective is prefer- 
 able; as, A. OraniUs PtlteSlis, A. Granius of Puteoli (but A. Gra- 
 nitls PiiteSlantls better). 
 
 Remark J^. — The poets often omit the Preposition with the Ab- 
 lative of places other than towns ; as, labi iquo, to fall/rom a horse. 
 
 Remark 5. — If mere Extent is indicated, and there is no Mo- 
 tion, the Preposition is, of course, used ; as, omnls orS, a S&lonis 
 ad Orlcttm, the whole coast from Salonae to Oricum. 
 
 Remark 6. — The simple Ablative of Names of Towns, without 
 a Preposition, is used to denote the Place from which one writes 
 a letter. (So dfimo.) 
 
 §176. Rule XLII.— Names of Towns and Small 
 Islands are put in the Locative, without a Preposition, 
 to denote the place Where or At Which; as, Targul.ni'tis 
 S&perbUs mortuus est Cumis, Tarquin the Pr,oud died at 
 Cumae. 
 
 So the Locatives, ddmi, at home ; fdris, out of doors ; 
 hUml, on the ground; ruri, in the country; and belH 
 (mU^tiae) wheo conibined \^•ith ddrm; as, dSml belliquS, 
 
264 SYNTAX. 
 
 d6mi mlMiaequ^, in peace and in war, at home and in the 
 field (but when in war, in peace, are used by themselves, 
 and not in contrast, we must say, In bello, in militia, fe pdc&). 
 On Unimi, see § 135 (a), Remark. 
 
 JS®" In the First and Second Declensions, Singular num- 
 ber, the Locative is identical in form with the Genitive ; 
 e. g. Romae, at Eome ; C6rinthT, at Corinth ; in the Third 
 Declension {Sing, and Plur.) and in the Plural of the oth- 
 ers (First and Second), tlie Locative is identical in form 
 with the Dative or Ablative; as, Athenls, at Athens; 
 Delplm, at Delphi; TlburS or TlbUri, at Tiber; Gad!tbUs, 
 at Gades (Cadiz) ; C&rlbUs, at Cures. 
 
 Remark 1. — Urbs or oppUiim, in Apposition with the Locative 
 is put in the Ablative, generally with ?»/ milltes Albae consdte- 
 runt In urb6 opportuna, the soldiers halted at Alba, a convenient 
 city ; if either «r6s or oppldum precedes, the Preposition is always 
 used, and the name of the town is also put in the Ablative ; as, 
 Clmon In oppldo CItio ynortwus est, Cimon died in the town of 
 Citium ; if urbs or oppldv/m, accompanied by an Adjective, fol- 
 lows, the Preposition may or may not be used, but is seldom 
 omitted ; as, Archias AntiOchlae natOs est cfilebri quond&m urbS, 
 Archias was born at Antioch, formerly a populous city; eUm 
 NeapSli in c616berr!lm6 oppldo saqaS vld'i, I often saw him ai 
 Naples, a very populous town. 
 
 COldniH, mUnlclpiiim, and often insUlS,, are construed like urbs 
 and opptdUm. 
 
 Bemark S. — Distinguish in dUrno = in the house, and ddmi = 
 at home. 
 
 Note 1. — To summarize the uses of urbs, oppldum, cSlonid, etc., in 
 Apposition with Names of Towns, observe : if they precede, unaccom- 
 panied by an Adjective, we use the Preposition in all the Place rela- 
 tions — Whither, Whence, and Where; if thej foUow, usually accompa- 
 nied by an Adjective or its equivalent, we generally use the Prep- 
 osition in Whiiher relations ; regularly in Whence relations ; while in 
 Where relations we may or may not use the Prejiosition (to), but 
 seldom omit it. 
 
THE ABLATIVE. 265 
 
 Note 2. — Originally Prepositions were ni, t used in anj Place rela- 
 tions. Such relations were expressed simply by the proper cases, 
 and this for all Nouns, Common as well' as Proper — tlie Accusative 
 expressing the Whither relation; the Ablative expressing the Wlience 
 reUitioii ; while for the Where relation a special case, the Locative, 
 was employed. Prepositions were introduced as mere local Adverbs 
 to define more sharply local direction, and gradually their use became 
 the rule, with the limitations stated above. It will thus be seen that 
 the n^mes of towns preserve the original construction. 
 
 EXEECISE LVI. 
 § 177. Vocabulary. 
 
 fretus, -a, -urn, trusting, secundiis, -a, -um, favorable, 
 
 concordlS, -ae, agreement, tumultus, -us, tumult, 
 
 iiscordia, -ae, disagreement. cadaver, -er-is (§ 38, Exo. 2), corpse. 
 
 pleruraque (Adv.), /or the most part, sensus, -us, feeling, sense, 
 
 maeror, -or-is, grief. talentum, -i, talent, 
 
 incredibilis, -e, ineredihle, as, assis (m.), a farthing, a small eoin. 
 
 irorsus, -us, biting, religiS, -on-is, religion, 
 
 anxius, -a, -um, anxious, Neptunus, -i, Neptune (god of the 
 
 natus, -us, birth, sea). 
 
 in-vad-8, -e-re, invas-i, invas-um, to attack, 
 con-f id-6, -e-re, con-fis-us sGrri, to trust (^ 109, 3). 
 cresc-5, -e-re, crev-i, cret-um, to grow. 
 di-iab-6r, -i, dilaps-iis sum, to fall to pieces, 
 inter-eS, -i-rg, interi-i, interit-ilm (g 111, 9), to perish. 
 lSqu-5r, loqu-i, loout-us siim, to speak. 
 1it-6r, -i, US-US sum, to use, 
 fru-or, -i, fruct-us sum, to enjoy, 
 
 veso-o-r, vesc-i, , to eat, feed upon, 
 
 con-f ic-i-S, -e-re, confec-T, Gonfect-um, to finish, 
 tut-o-r,"-a-ri, -at-us sum, to protect, 
 indae-8, -e-re, indux-I, induct-iim, to lead on, induce. 
 im-ple-5, -e-re, implev-i, jmplet-um, to fill. 
 spoli-6, -a-re, -av-i, -at-Um, to strip, rob, deprive. 
 nud-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-iim, to make naked, strip. 
 prS-hlbe-S, -e-re, prShibu-i, prohibit-iim, to keep off, p '■event. 
 ex-pell-S, -e-re, expul-l, expuls-um, to drive out. 
 inter-dio-8, -e-re, inter-dlx-i, interdlot-um, to forbid. 
 mut-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to exchange, to change. 
 23 
 
266 SYNTA X. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Prae maerorf (g 165, Bern. S),, On account of grief. \A Prevent- 
 ing Cause). 
 
 Maj6r nata (J 162, Bern. 1), Greater by hirth, older, elder. 
 
 Re (Abl. of res), In fact. 
 
 Dux nobis i5pu8 est (§ 167, 2, Rem. I), A leader is neceseary for us. 
 Duee (?167, 2, Rem. 1) -aohls (§146) 
 
 opus est, We have need of a leader. 
 Maturato {Part. Pcrf. Pass.) opus est 
 
 (g 167, 2, Rem. $), There is need of haste. ' 
 
 Gives agris (g 160) spSliare, To deprive the citizens of their land, 
 
 Equus miM (| 140) taieuto (J 167, i) The horse cost me a talent {stood to 
 
 stetit, me at a taleitt). 
 
 Denis in diem assibiis (J 167, 4), For or at ten farthings a dag, 
 
 Asse (§ 167, 4) carum. Dear at an as. 
 
 Aqua (§ 160) aliquem interdicerS, To cut one off from water, 
 
 Alicui (§ 145) aquam interdicere, To forbid water to one. 
 
 Alicui (§ 142) aqua et igni (§ 160) in- To cut one off from fire and water, 
 
 terdicere, to banish. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Hostes niimgro' freti in nostros impStfim fecerfi. Dux 
 hostitim natura' ISci confidebat. D6cimae Iggioni^ CaesS,r 
 maxime c6nfideb3,t. Concordia" res- parvae crescunt; dis- 
 cordia' maximae dilabuntflr. Multi oppidanorflm fimg St 
 siti' intSrierunt. Niimidae plerumqug lactS 6t carnS* ves- 
 cunttir. HannibSl victoria* frui quJlm uti maluit. C&tilinS,, 
 cfipiditatS' regni inducttis, conjiirationSm fecit. S&pientis° 
 est aequo animo d6l6rSm ferrS. Cornibus tauri, fipri den- 
 tibiis, morsii leones se tutantur. PitSr tufis noming* mSgis 
 quS,m impgrio" rex fuit. Fratrum maximus natu' fiiit Or- 
 gStSrix. Milites urb6m tiimultu' implebunt. Neptuniis 
 ventis' sgcundis vela implevit. AuctoritatS tua° nobis" 
 6pfls est. Quantiim argenti tibi" 6pus est? Quanti'^istS 
 
 1 § 165, Bern. 1. 
 
 » 1 133. 
 
 9? 167, 2 Rem.l. 
 
 » 1 142. 
 
 « § 162. 
 
 '"> ? 146. 
 
 »?165. 
 
 ' S 162, Bern. 1. 
 
 " ? 140. 
 
 * \ 167, 1. 
 
 » 2 167, 3. 
 
 '' ? 137. 
 
THE ABLATIVE. 267 
 
 Squiis tlb! stgtit? Talento.' Haec victoria, nobLs multo 
 sanguiiig' stgtit. Denis in diSm assibiis' animS, 6t corptts 
 militis aestimantur. Qu6d^ non (5pus est assS cartim est. 
 Divites cives Komani uxores libSrosquS militum tgris^ 
 expellebant. Eegttltis CarthaginS* prSfecttis, Romam* 
 pervemt. Sacerdotes Balbo* a,qua 6t igni interdixSrant. 
 Consiil Roma* discessit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The Britons live mostly on milk and flesh. The general, 
 trusting in the nature of the place, kept his forces in camp. 
 Very many poor (men) have died of hunger and thirst. I 
 cannot speak for {on account of) grief. The townsmen be- 
 sought Caesar with many tears. Orgetorix, the richest and 
 most noble'of the Helvetians, led on by the desire of reign- 
 ing (regni), made a conspiracy of the nobility. The soldiers 
 finished the journey with incredible swiftness. Cicero wrote 
 all his speeches with the greatest care (§ 168, Rem. 1) and 
 diligence. The Belgians attacked the camp with great 
 shouting. It is the duty of a young man to respect his 
 elders. Bocchus was king in name (§ 162), but not in fact. 
 The sailors had loaded the ships with gold. Thou hast de- 
 prived the citizens of (their) land ; thou hast stripped the 
 temples of (their) silver and gold ; thou hast filled the city 
 with blood and corpses ; for these things (86 has res) I cut 
 thee off" from water and fire. We have need of haste (§ 167, 
 2, Mem. 1). How much gold have we need of? This base 
 fellow will exchange faith and religion for money (§ 167, 4, 
 Bern.). Lycurgus forbade the use of gold to his people. 
 The Aeduans were not able to keep ofi" the Helvetians from 
 their country. 
 
 1 ? 167, 4. » i 160. * § 174. 
 
 ' 1 129, Bern. 2. * § 175. = ? 142, 
 
268 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 EXERCISE LVIT. 
 \ 178. Vocabulary. 
 
 etaturS, -ae, stat/tre, height [of a 
 
 man). 
 humilisj -e (§72, 2), loio. 
 exiguus, -a, -urn, emnll, ahort. 
 potestEs, -tat-is, power, 
 perpetuus, -a, -iiin, continual. 
 tyrannus, -i, kingy deapot. 
 genus, gener-is, race, family, 
 spelunca, -ae, cave, 
 pravus, -a, -um, depraved. 
 f igura, -ae, ehapCj figure. 
 
 Hibernia, -ae, Ireland, 
 antequam (Conj.), he/ore, 
 postquam (Conj.), after. 
 doctiis, -a, -tim, learned, 
 ampliis, -a, -um, large, much, 
 dimidium, -i, half. 
 infinitus, -a, -um, boundless. 
 altitildo, -in-is, depth, height. 
 paulus, -a, -um, little. {Usually in 
 
 neuter.) 
 Diana, -ae, Diana. 
 
 ini^nQi {^72, 4), lower, of less value, Lphesiiis, -a, -um, Epheaian, 
 
 inferior, 
 posterior (§ 72, 4), later, of less au 
 
 count. 
 praecipuus, -a, -Rm, especial, 
 VarrSj -on-is, Varro. 
 
 dic-ft, -e-re, dix-i, dict-iim, to say, to call, 
 
 diic-o, -e-r5, diix-i, duct-um, to lead, to deem, 
 
 cup-i-8, -e-r£, ciipiv-i, cupit-um, to desire. 
 
 de-flagr-5, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to burn down, to be consumed. 
 
 Punicus, -a, -iim, Carthaginian, 
 ScipiS, -on-is, Scipio. 
 Africanus, -a, -um, African. {A sur- 
 name of Scipio.) 
 Britannia, -ae, Britniiu ' 
 
 Proelium atrScius quam pro nu- 
 mer5 pugnantium, 
 
 Qu5 (g 164, Bern. 1) longiSr dies, 
 c5 (§ 164, Rem. 1) nox brevior, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 A battle Tnore Jievce than in propor^ 
 
 tion to the number of eombatanta ; or 
 
 than would have been expectedfrom, eto. 
 
 The longer the dal/f the shorter the 
 
 night, {Eo is antecedent of quo.) 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Agesilaiis stS-tura^ fuit hiimili, corporg exiguo. Qui'' p6- 
 
 testatS' est perpStua, tyrannfis liibettir gt dicitiir. Lucius 
 
 C2,tilmS,, nobili gfingrS* natiis, fuit magna vi' St* a,nirui 6t 
 
 corp6ris, sSd ingSnio'^ maio pravoquS. Est bos cervi' fi- 
 
 1 1 169, Rem. 1. 
 » \ 129, Hem. 2. 
 
 '§169. 
 * 1 161. 
 
 ^ 1 123, Rem. SI. 
 « i 169, Bern. 3. 
 
THE ABLATIVE. 269 
 
 gura, cujiis a mgdia' fronts uniim cornu exsistit. SSpientis' 
 est humana, omnia virtut6' infSriora.ducSrg. Be\l6 Punico* 
 quo' nullttm majus Eomani gesscrS, Scipio Africantis prae- 
 cipuain gloria,m tulit. Haec verba sunt Varrouis, quam fuit 
 Claudius doctioris.^ Eo die non anipliiis' tria miJia homi- 
 num occisi sunt.' Gallortim copiae non longiiis milia" pas- 
 suiim oct6 ab castris abgrant. Tribus annis" post bellum 
 civile p6piilus Syphacgm reggni creavit. H5mines quo" 
 plura habent, eo ciipiunt ampliora. VarrO Anti6chiae" 
 vixit. CicSrD stttdiorum causa multos annos Athenis''' ha- 
 bitavit. Qua noctS natus est AlexandSr, eadSm templiim 
 Dianae Eph&iae deMgravit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 It is the duty of a general (§ 133) to deem his own safety 
 of less account than the common safety. Near the city is a 
 cave of boundless depth. This soldier is of low stature and 
 lame in his feet. I have seen no more beautiful (woman) 
 than Tullia. On that day Caesar advanced (procederS) not 
 more than (§ 163, Rem. 4) six miles. More men were killed 
 than would have been expected from the number of combat- 
 ants. Three days after (§ 164, Rem. S (6)) Caesar reached 
 the camp, ambassadors were sent by the Germans. The 
 consul was blind for many years before {ant?,quiim) you 
 were born. The king of the Thracians dwelt many years 
 at Rome. Ireland is less by half than Britain. Cicero 
 was much (§ 164, Rem. 1) more eloquent than Crassus. 
 The (§ 164, Rem. 1) farther the enemy retreated, the more 
 swiftly did our men pursue. Our horsemen pursued the 
 enemy a little too far (§ 163, Rem. 6). 
 
 1 ? 128, Rem. 9. 
 
 5 § 163, Rem. 3. 
 
 » § 153. 
 
 « ? 133. 
 
 § 127. 
 
 " § 164, Rem. 3 (i). 
 
 8 §163. 
 
 ' § 163, Rem. 4. 
 
 "§164, iJem.i. 
 
 ♦§171. 
 23* 
 
 « § 128, Rem. 4. 
 
 " § 176. 
 
270 SYNTAX. 
 
 THE PASSIVE CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 For the change from Active to Passive construction, 
 see §108. 
 
 § 179. Rule XLIII. — Verbs which in the Active 
 take another case in addition to the Object Accusative, 
 in the Passive i-etain that other case ; as, llhhr puSro 
 dtU&r, a book is given to the boy; arbOres fCliis nvdan- 
 tUr, the trees are stripped of leaves. 
 
 Remarh 1. — A Second Accusative in the Active (except with 
 Verbs of Teaching and some Verbs of Asking — § 151, Rem. 3) be- 
 • comes a Predicate Nominative in the Passive; as, urbim v6cavU 
 Kom3,m ; urhs EomS v6cdt&r. 
 
 Remark 2. — As Intransitive Verbs have no Direct Object in 
 the Active, they are not used Personally in the Passive, except 
 with a Cognate or Equivalent Nominative ; as, curs&s curritUr. 
 When they are used Impersonally, the remote object is of course 
 retained ; as, mlhl a te persuadetUr, I am persuaded by you. 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE INDEFINITE VERB. 
 
 The Finite Verb consists of the Indicative, the Sub- 
 junctive, and the Imperative Moods; the Indefinite 
 Verb, of the Infinitive, Participles, Gerund, and Supine. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 § 180. Rule 'KIAY .—Sal^eot Infinitive.— The. Infin- 
 itive is a Neuter Verbal Noun in the Nominative or Ac- 
 cusative, and may be the Subject of a Verb; as, grdtUm 
 est tecum ambiilar6, it is pleasant to walk with you. 
 
 The other cases are supplied by the Gei'Und and 
 A.blative Supine. 
 
 Remark 1. — The InJBnitive, as a Subject or Predicate Nomina- 
 
INFINITIVE. 271 
 
 tive, is used with est and Impersonal Verbs; seldom with 
 others. 
 
 Remark S. — ^The Infinitive differs from other Verbal Nouns in 
 that it has Voice and Tense, is modified by Adverbs and not by 
 Attributive Adjectives, and governs the oblique cases. Orig- 
 inally the Infinitive was a Dative of Purpose. 
 
 §181. E.ULE XLV. — Object [Complementary) Infin- 
 itive. — The Infinitive is used as a complement {filling up) 
 with certain Verbs expressing an incomplete idea; as, 
 s6lent cogitarg, they are -accustomed to think; vincSrS scis, 
 you know how to conquer. 
 
 The Complementary Infinitive is used chiefly with Verbs express- 
 ing Will, Power, Duly, Pui'pose, Knowledge, Oustom, Commencement, 
 Continuance, Cessation, etc. 
 
 Remark 1. — With p&ratHs {ready) and insmtUs [unaccustomed) 
 the Complementary Infinitive is sometimes used by good prose- 
 writers (Cicero more commonly uses M with the Gerund), but 
 with other Adjectives (or Participles used as Adjectives) the 
 Complementary Infinitive is rare in prose. The poets use it 
 freely with Adjectives and Verbal Nouns, and, by analogy, with 
 almost any Verb. So the later prose-writers. 
 
 Remark 2. — In Latin prose the Infinitive must not be used to ex- 
 press Purpose. But the poets so use it, and to express a variety. 
 of other relations (where prose-writers employ a different turn) : 
 (1) Purpose; as, PUc&s egU altos visSrS mantes, he drove his 
 cattle to see the lofty mountains (for Supine visUm, or Ger. dd 
 vlsendos, or at + Subj.) ; (2) Result; as, vlrUm tSt SdirS l&bores 
 impUlU, she urged the man to encounter so many toils (for Ut 
 Odlrit); (3) for the Gerundive; as, S,vidih covcnmi^tii pugnAm, 
 eager for joining in battle (for committendae pugnae) ; (4) for the 
 Gerund; as, cantarS p'&ritiis, skilled in singing (for cantandi). 
 
 Remark S. — If the Complementary Infinitive with coepi, I he- 
 gin, and desHnS, I cease, be Passive, then the Perfect Passive 
 tenses of those Verbs {coeptUs sikn, destt&s sUm), are almost 
 invariably employed; as, urbs aedificari coeptS est, the city 
 began io be built. 
 
272 SYNTAX. 
 
 Remark 4. — Verbs of Wishing and Willing {Resolving, etu.) may 
 take iU with the Subjunctive as well as the Complementary In- 
 finitive ; consUtuit bellum cum Oermdnis gSrfirfi, he resolved to 
 ■urage war with the Germans; but also, constUm tit AqMni mSne- 
 rSm, I resolved to remain at Aquinum. 
 
 Remark 5. — After the Past tenses of Verbs signifying Possibil- 
 ity, Necessity, and Obligation [possum, dport&t, debeo, etc.), a Pres- 
 ent Infinitive is used in Latin where the English idiom generally 
 employs a Perfect ; as, debui vlderS, I ought to have seen. 
 
 The Perfect Infinitive as an Object is rarely used in prose 
 except after vdlS in Prohibitions, or when we wish to dwell on 
 the consequences of an action or to emphasize its completion ; 
 but as a Subject, the Perfect Infinitive is sometimes found where 
 the English idiom employs the Present ; as, prdindi quIessS Irit 
 mSliits, it will be for your advantage then (it will be better for 
 you) to keep quiet. 
 
 Remark 6. — With some Verbs that already have an Accusative 
 of the Person (chiefly dOceo, I teach, assuef&cio, I accustom, _;*6e5, 
 I bid, vUo, I forbid, sino, I allow, arguo, I accuse) the Complemen- 
 tary Infinitive occurs as the Accusative of the Thing; as, dScebS 
 RullUm posthac t^cerS, I will teach RuUus to hold his tongue after 
 this. If the Verb be put in the Passive or Gerundive, the Infin- 
 itive is retained; aa,Rulliis ddcetUr [ddcendUs est) ta,cer6 (cf. 2151, 
 Rem. 3). 
 
 Remark 7. — ^The Infinitive of such Verbs as to Be, to Beccmie, to 
 be Called, etc. (see ?130, 3), will, of course, take the same case 
 after it as before it, if both words refer to the same thing ; as, 
 vdlo ess^ rex, I wish to be king ; nSmlnl mSdio esai licit, no man 
 may be neutral; mlht essS poetae rfu non eoncesseri, the gods have 
 not permitted me to be a poet ; pudU me victiim discediri, I am 
 ashamed to come ofT conquered. 
 
 Note. — The Complementary Infinitive is generally either the Di- 
 rect Object of a Transitive Verb, or an Accusative of Limitation ; as, 
 transirS cunalur, he attempts the crossing; transiri pBtest, lie is able as 
 to the crossing (his ability reaches that limit). 
 
 §182. Rule XL VI. — Ilistorioal Infinitive. — In- an- 
 imated narrative the Infinitive is often used as the 
 
GEEUND AND GERUNDIVE. 273 
 
 equivalent of the Imperfect Indicative; as, cStidie Gae- 
 sdr Aeduos frument-Hm flagftarS, Caesar kept pressing the 
 Acduaus daily for the corn (—fldgltdb&t). 
 
 Bemarh 1. — Only Present Inflnitivea (except odiss'& and mSml- 
 m«s2) are so used. Historical Infinitives generally occur in 
 groups, more rarely alone. (See especially Caesar, Bell. OalL, 
 iii. 4, and Sail., lug., ch. 51.) For the Accusative with the 
 Infinitive after verbd, sentiendi et dealarqndi, see ^194. 
 
 GERUND AND GERUNDIVE. 
 
 § 183. Rule XLVII.— The Gerund is a Neuter Ver- 
 bal Noun, used only in the oblique cases of the Singular 
 (the Nominative being supplied by the Iniinitive). It 
 governs the same case as its Verb, and is modified by 
 an Adverb, not by an Adjective; as, stUdi'&m patrol 
 videndi, the desire of seeing (my) father ; beate vivendl 
 cuptdUds, the longing for {of) living happily. 
 
 The Adjective form of the Gerund is called the 
 Gerundive. 
 
 §184. Rule XL VIII.— Instead of a Transitive Ge- 
 rund governing an Object-Accusative, the Gerundive is 
 commonly used, the Object-Accusative taking the case 
 of the Gerund, and the Gerund (now called the Gerund- 
 ive) agreeing with it in gender, number, and case. Thus, 
 instead of 
 
 ConstliUm e&piendl (Gerund) wrSto (Object- Accusative), 
 we commonly say, 
 
 OdnslUUm c&piendae (Gerundive agreeing) Mr6& (case 
 of the Gerund), the design of talcing the city. 
 
 After Prepositions the Gerundive construction should 
 always be employed ; as, 
 
 Ad oppugnand&m urbSm (not al oppugnandUm ur- 
 
274 SYNTAX. 
 
 bSm), for attacking the city ; in gh-enda re publlfca (not 
 In gh-endo vim piiblXc&in), in governing the common- 
 wealth. 
 
 Remark 1. — But if the Object- Accusative be a Neuter Pronoun 
 or Adjective, the Gerund construction is retained to avoid all 
 doubt as to gender; as, siUdiUm iUlquld Hgendi, the desire of 
 doing something [dlicujUs might be masc. or neuter) ; cUplditda 
 plwrd cognoscendi, the desire of learning more things [pluriUm 
 might be masc. or neuter). 
 
 Remark S. — (Partial Attraction.) — Sometimes the Object-Ac- 
 cusative is attracted into the case of the Gerund, and the latter 
 remains unchanged ; as, exemplorum el5gendi pBtestds, the power 
 of choosing examples. Notice especially the Genitives mel, tul, sul, 
 vesirl with the Gerund, without regard to gender or number; as, 
 sul purgandl causa, for the purpose of exculpating themselves. 
 (This construction is best explained by regarding mel, tul, sul, 
 etc., as Genitives Singular of the neuter Nouns meUrn, tuUrn, 
 suiim, etc., and the Gerund as the regular Gerundive.) 
 
 Remark S. — Gerundives can only be formed from Transitive Verba. 
 We find apparent exceptions in the Gerundives of utSr, frv£r, 
 fungSr, pHtidr, and mSdedr, but in early Latin these Verbs were 
 Transitive, and governed the Accusative case. 
 
 Remark 4- — The following are the chief constructions of the 
 Gerund and Gerundive: 
 
 I. The Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive limits Nouns 
 and Adjectives of incomplete meaning; as, spes urbis delendae, 
 the hope of destroying the city; audiendl o&pidiis, desirous of 
 hearing. 
 
 (a) The Genitive of the Gerund and Gerundive is common 
 with causa, = for the sake of, to express Purpose ; as, vestrl adhor- 
 tandl causa, for the purpose of exhorting you. [Cav^sa is put 
 after the Genitive, and sometimes omitted altogether.) 
 
 (6) Observe the Predicative use of the Genitive of the Gerund 
 and Gerundive with essi in the sense of to be suitable for, capable 
 of; as, quaecumqui obsidionis t6l6randae sunt, whatever things 
 are (suitable) for supporting a blockade. 
 
 II. The Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive is sometimes 
 
GEEUND AND GERUNDIVE. 275 
 
 used with Adjectives and phrases signifying Capability and Fit- 
 ness (but Hd with the Accusative of the Gerund or Gerundive is 
 preferable); as, lignum navlbds aediflcandis aptHm, timber fit 
 for building ships (better, lignttm ad naves xedt/icandas aptttm). 
 (a) The Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive is also used to 
 denote the purpose for which various officers are appointed ; as, 
 (riUrnvtri cdloniis deducendls, triumvirs for planting colonies. In 
 later Latin the Dative of the Gerund and Gerundive is freely 
 used to express Purpose. 
 
 III. The Accusative of the Gerund and Gerundive is used 
 most frequently with the Preposition &d (denoting Purpose), 
 sometimes with intir ( = while) and Sb, rarely with others ; as, 
 missus est fld animos reg'tim persplciendos, he was sent to ascertain 
 {for the purpose of ascertaining) the disposition of the kings. 
 
 (a) After Verbs of Giving and Receiving, Demanding and Hav- 
 ing, Contracting for and Sending, the Accusative of the Gerundive 
 expresses what is to be or ought to be done; as, Caes&r ponttm In 
 Ar&ri faciendum curht, Caesar takes care to have a bridge bmlt 
 over the Arar. The Passive form takes the Nominative; as, 
 urbs mlVLdbus diripiendS, d&tH est, the city was given to the sol- 
 diers to be plundered. 
 
 IV. The Ablative of the Gerund and Gerundive is used as an 
 Ablative of Instrument (rarely of Manner), after Comparatives, 
 and with the Prepositions lib, de, ex, and In, rarely with pro, 
 very rarely with supt,r, never with Unt; as. In expUcandis crl- 
 minibiis magnUm dptr&m consumpsl, I bestowed great pains in 
 setting forth the charges. 
 
 § 185. Rule XLIX. — As Transitive Verbs alone take 
 a Gerundive, the Gerundive form of Intransitive Verbs, 
 with the tenses of essi, can only be used Impersonally. 
 This combination, as we have seen (§ 106, II.), belongs 
 to the Second, or Passive, Periphrastic Conjugation, and 
 expresses Didy or Necessity ; as, 
 
 Mihf eundum est, / must go. 
 
 TibT eundum est, Thou must go. 
 
 Caio eundum est, Gaius must go. 
 
 Nobis eundum est, We nust go. 
 
276 SYNTAX. 
 
 VSbls eundum est, Ye mnat $o. 
 
 Puerls eundum est, The boys must go. 
 
 Miht eundum erat, / had to go, 
 
 Tibf eundum erat. Thou hadut to go. 
 
 Gaio eundum erat, Cains had to go. 
 
 Mih$ eundum Srit, I shall have to go. 
 
 Miht eundum esset, I should have to go. 
 
 Mih? eundum fuisset, / should have had to go. 
 
 Rtmark 1. — ^The object of the action is sometimes expressed ; 
 as, mbla ra,ti6n6 utendUm est, we must use reason. 
 
 Remark Z. — Wilh Transitive Verbs the Personal construction 
 is regularly used ; as, 
 
 Kpistola miM est scribenda, A letter must be written by me, I must 
 
 write a letter, 
 EpistSla tiM est scribenda. You must write a letter. 
 
 Epistola nobis erat acribenda. We had to write a letter. 
 
 Epistola vobis erit scribenda, Ye will have to write a letter. 
 
 Bpistola Caio esset scribenda, Cuius would have to write a letter. 
 
 Remark S. — The Agent is expressed by the Dative (2148); 
 sometimes by the Ablative with d or Hb to avoid ambiguity 
 (iUS,Rem. 1). 
 
 SUPINE. 
 
 § 186. Rule L. — (A) The Supine in -Um (Accusative) 
 is used with Verbs of Motion to express the Purpose of 
 the Motion, and is construed with the same cases as its 
 Verb, but is not modified by an Adverb ; as, vSnio te 
 rOgatiim, I come to ask you. (See § 174, Rem. S.) 
 
 (B) The Supine in -u is used with Adjectives as an 
 Ablative of Limitation (§162); as, fdoW factu, ea.sy to 
 be done {with respect to the doing). 
 
 EXERCISE LVni. 
 I Vocabulary. 
 
 spS,tium, -i, opportunity, time. vSrutum, -i, javelin. 
 dSfessus, -a, -um, wearied. elSqnentia, -ae, eloquence. 
 
 negllgens, -ent-is, careless, magu&nlmus, -a, -uni, magnanimous. 
 
STTPINB. 
 
 277 
 
 cura-rS,,fo attend to. aetas, -tat-is, age, life. 
 
 Arar, or Araris, -is (§ 33, Bern. 1, i.), s^xiis (Noun, Adj,, or Adv.), enough, 
 
 the Saonej a river of Gaul. simul (Adv.), at the a.xme time, 
 
 honeste (Adv.), honorably. cupidus, -a, -urn, desirous. 
 
 Hermlnius, -\,^Eferminiu8. vexilluin, -i, flag, standard, 
 
 praed-o-r, -a-ri, -at-us sum, to plunder. 
 
 frumeiit-6-r, -a-ri, -at-B.8 sum, to forage. 
 
 purg-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to cleanse, excuse, exculpate, 
 
 conserv-3, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to save, preserve. 
 
 pro-pon-S, -e-re, pro-posu-i, proposit-um, to set up. 
 
 ag-5, -e-re, eg-i, act-um, to do. 
 
 ex-ced-8, -e-re, excess-i, excess-um, to go out, retire, 
 
 de-lig-5, -S-re, deleg-i, delect-um, to choose. 
 
 di-rip-i-8, -e-re, diripu-i, dirept-iim, to pillage. 
 
 ad-hibe-S, -e-re, adhibu-i, adhibit-um, to apply, use. 
 
 re-scind-5, -e-re, rescid-i, re-sciss-iim, to cut down. 
 
 disc-5, -e-re, didlc-i, to learn. 
 
 quer-o-r, quer-i, quest-us sum, to complain. 
 
 repet-3, -e-re, repetiv-i, rep-etit-um, to ask back. 
 
 per-cut-i-5, -e-re, percuss-i, percuss-um, to strike. 
 
 hort-6-r, horta-ri, hortat-us sum, to encourage, exhort, 
 
 pro-fug-i-8, -e-re, profug-x, profugit-um, to flee. 
 
 pro-puls-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to repel. 
 
 col-lig-S, -e-re, colleg-i, collect-um, to collect, 
 
 cogit-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-iim, to think. 
 
 de-sili-8, -i-re, desilu-i, desult-iim, to leap down. 
 
 arcess-8, -e-re, aroesaiv-i, arcessit-ura, to send for, eummon. 
 
 cur-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to care for, attend to. 
 
 par-S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to prepare, acquire, buy. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Neither — nor. 
 
 Time for retiring. 
 
 To form a design. 
 
 To have a bridge built over a river 
 
 {to attend to the building of a bridge, 
 
 etc.). 
 Caesar had to do all things. (Literally, 
 
 all things had to be done by Caesar), 
 Sui (§ 184, Rem. B) purgandi causa, For the purpose of exculpating him- 
 
 self, herself, themselves, 
 24 
 
 K"eque — -neque, 
 Spatiura excedendi, 
 Consilium capere, 
 Pontem in flumine faciendum cu- 
 rare (§ 184, Rem. 4, III. (a)), 
 
 Caesari (§ 148) omnia erant agenda. 
 
278 SYNTAX. 
 
 Note. — As we Lave seen (J 184, Remark If), Purpose may be kx- 
 
 [a) By the Genitive of the Gerund or Gerundive, ( ) with 
 causa, gratia (^for the sake of, and put after the Gerund or 
 Gerundive) ; as, me regim belli gSrendi causa credvistl, you have 
 made me king/or the purpose of carrying on war; (2) with tenses 
 of essi. 
 
 (6) By the Dative of the Gerund or Gerundive, (1) with words 
 or phrases implying Fitness, etc. [&d with the Accusative prefer- 
 able); and (2) especially with Names oi Officials; as, DlcimiAros 
 agro Samnitl dividendo cre&t, he appoints decemvirs /or the pur- 
 pose of dividing the Samnite territory. 
 
 (c) By dd with the Accusative of the Gerund or Gerundive; 
 as, missUs est 2,d eas res conflciendas, he was sent for the purpose 
 of finishing up those things. 
 
 (d) By the Accusative of the Gerundive after Verbs of Oiving, 
 etc. (see §184, Remark If., III. (a)); as, urblm mlUfibOs dirlpien- 
 dam didit, he gave the city to the soldiers to plunder {in the 
 Passive, urbs mllUibus dirlpiendS, d&id est, the city was given to 
 the soldiers to be plundered). 
 
 (e) The Supine in -itm after Verbs oi Motion (2186) also ex- 
 presses Purpose; as, legdti res rfipStitilm vtniunt, ambassadors 
 come to seek redress. 
 
 (For other modes of expressing Purpose, see § 200 ; g 233, 1 ; ? 191, 
 3 (6).) 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Germanis nSquS consilii habendi' nSquS armS, cftpiendi' 
 spa,tium datum est. Magnft pars Squitatus -praedandi fru- 
 mentandiqufi causa' trans Eheniim missS, 6rS,t. Ad eas res 
 conficieudas* OrggtSrlx deligitiir. Omnes hCmines plura 
 habendP cflpidi sunt. Multi in gquis parandis" adhibent 
 curam, sSd in amicis deligendls* neglSgentes sunt. Caesir 
 
 > 2 184. ' ? 184, Rem. 4, I. (a). ^ ^ i84_ jjg^_ ^^ j 
 
 • 2 183. « 2 184, Rein. 4,UI. » i 184, Rim. 4, IV. 
 
SUPINE. 279 
 
 in Arari pontSm fa,ciendtim' curavit. CaesSr pont6m, quSm 
 in Rlien) f itciendflm ^ curavSr^t, rescidit. HSminis mens 
 discendo ' ftlitur 6J; cogitando. BrgyS temptis aetatis s3,tis 
 longfim est M bSng h6nestequg vivendtim.' Herminifis intSr 
 spSliandum ' corptis hostis vfiruto percussiis est. .I/5quendi 
 elSquentiS, augetfir iSgendis* oratoribiis §t poetis. Principes 
 civitatis, sui conservandi^ causa, Roma* pr6fugerunt. Fortes 
 6t magnanimi* sunt h&bendi non qui' fftciunt, s6d qui pro- 
 pulsant injuri&m. 1116 ipso die mihl' prfificiscendum' Srftt. 
 Militibiis de navibiis 6rat desiliendiim." Mendaci'" a nullo 
 creditflr." Mihl a te nSceri" non p6test. 
 
 Translate into -Latin. 
 (The A''erb essi is often omitted with Participles. See ? 126, Rem. Jf.) 
 The Gauls had formed the design of attacking the town. 
 Time for retiring from (out o/) the fight was not given to 
 the wearied. The hope of plundering had recalled the far- 
 mers from their fields. The general gave the city to his 
 soldiers to he plundered. The chiefs of the state came to 
 Caesar for the purpose of excusing themselves. The king's 
 daughters had fled from home /or- the purpose of saving them- 
 selves. The Gauls send ambassadors to Rome to complain-of 
 (Supine) injuries, and to seek redress. A short life is long 
 enough to accomplish (§ 184, Eem. 4, HI.) all these things. 
 Qaesar had to do all things at one time (§ 185) : the flag had 
 to be set up), the soldiers recalled from the work; (those) who 
 had advanced a little too far, sent for; the line had to be 
 
 1 ? 184, Bern. 4, HI- («)• ° § 175. 
 ■' 1 184, Rem. 4, IV. ' 1 129, Rem. 2. 
 ' 1 184, Rtm. 4, III. 8 ^ 148. 
 «?184, J2ero.^IV. « ? 185. 
 i^lSi, Rem. 2. w§142. 
 
 * Predicate Nominative after sunt h&bendU ; the 
 ative sentence following. 
 
 nf?115,IV.; 
 
 \n79,Rem.2. 
 " § 181. 
 
 Subject is the Eel- 
 
280 SYNTAX. 
 
 drawn up; the soldiers exhorted; the signal given (§ 185, 
 Eem. 2). The soldiers had at the same time both to leap- 
 down from the ships and to fight with the enemy (§ 185). 
 The Helvetians were desirous of carrying on war. 
 
 SYNTAX OF PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 187. 1. Propositions are either Principal or Depend- 
 ent. A Principal Proposition makes complete sense when 
 standing alone; a Dependent one does not make complete 
 sense ^yhen alone, but must be connected with another 
 Proposition. 
 
 2. Principal Propositions are Declarative., Interrogaiive, 
 Imperative, or Exclamatory ; as, 
 
 Pulr currtt, the boy runs. [Declarative.) 
 
 Ourrlt-ni piUr? Does the boy run ? [Interrogative.) 
 
 Otirrt, putr ! Run, boy. [hnperative.) 
 
 Qudm oiliritir currlt / How fast he runs ! [Exclamatory.) 
 
 3. Dependent or Subordinate Propositions are of ten 
 kinds, viz. : 
 
 1. Participial Projpoaitiona ; i. e. those whose Predicate is a Participle, 
 
 2. Infinitive Propositions ; i. e. those whose Predicate is an Infinitive, 
 
 3. Causal Propoaitiona, introduced by the Gajiaal Conjunctions quddi 
 
 quia, etc, 
 
 4. Final Pi^opoaitiona, introduced by a Final Conjunction. 
 
 5. Conditional Propoaitiona, introduced by a Conditional Conjunction. 
 
 6. Conceaaive Propoaitiona, introduced by a Conceaaive Conjunction. 
 
 7. Comparative Propositiona, introduced by a Comparative Conjunction. 
 
 8. Temporal Propositions, introduced by a Temporal Conjunction, 
 
 9. Jif III five Propositions, introduced by a Relative Pronoun. 
 
 10. Interrogative Propositions, introduced by an Interrogative word. 
 
 4. Every Dependent Proposition is either a Noun, an 
 Adjective, or an Adverb, limiting either the Subject or 
 Predicate, or some other word of the Principal Proposi- 
 tion on which it depends. 
 
THE MOODS. 281 
 
 5. Propositions of the same rank, whether Principal 
 or Dependent, may be connected by Conjunctions, and 
 are then said to be Co-ordinate with each other. Co-or- 
 dination is of five kinds, viz. : 
 
 1. Copulative; e. g., he has lost his property, and forfeited his credit. 
 
 2. Dinjunctive ; o. g., either he has lost his property, or he has forfeited 
 his credit. 
 
 3. Adversative ; e. g., he has lost his property, iut he has not forfeited 
 his credit. 
 
 4. Corrohoraiive J- e. g., he will forfeit his credit, /or he has lost his prop- 
 erty. 
 
 5. Conclusive; e. g., he has lost his property, therefore he will forfeit his 
 credit. 
 
 THE MOODS. 
 
 §188. Rule LI. — The Indicative is used both in 
 Principal and Dependent Sentences when a fact is stated. 
 
 § 189. Rule LII. — The Subjunctive is used when a 
 thing is stated not as a, fact, but simply as conceived in the 
 mind. 
 
 Besides its use in Subordinate Clauses, it is also em- 
 ployed in Independent Propositions, and distinguished, 
 according to its two principal uses, as — 
 
 I. The Optative Subjunctive (representing the action as 
 desired). 
 
 II. The Potential Subjunctive (representing the action 
 as possible). 
 
 Under these two divisions of the Subjunctive, observe 
 the following uses : 
 
 I. The Optative Subjunctive is used : 
 
 (a) To express a Wish; as, elves mei sint ineSlii'mes, sint 
 beaM, may my fellow-citizens be unharmed, may they be 
 happy ! 
 
 24* 
 
282 SYNTAX. 
 
 (6) To express Exhortatioiis, Commands, Prohibitions, etc.; 
 as, Smemiis patritim, let us love our country. 
 
 (c) To express a Concession; as, sit cldrus Scip0, granted 
 that Scipio be renowned. 
 
 (d) In Questions of Deliberation; as, quid f3,ciSni ? what 
 am I to dof 
 
 Remark 1. — As the Imperative has no First Person, a Command 
 or Exhortation in that person must be expressed by the Subjunc- 
 tive ; as, amemiis pUtrid/m, let us love our country. In this use of 
 the Subjunctive for the Imperative, the Present Tense is era- 
 ployed, more rarely the Perfect Tense (except in Prohibitions). 
 The Second Person of the Present Tense is rarely -employed 
 unless the Subject is indefinite ["you" meaning "any one," 
 "one"); as, injarias fortunae def&giendo r61inquas, you (i.e. any 
 one) may escape the wrongs of fortune by flight. 
 
 In Prohibitions the negative is ne, and the Perfect is far more 
 commonly used than the Present (unless the Subject is indefinite 
 — "you" = "any one") ; as, ne. transi6ris HlberUm,, do not cross 
 the Ebro. The use of the Third Person (Singular and Plural) in 
 Mild Commands, etc., is very common ; as, haec infamiH deleatiir, 
 let this disgrace be wiped out. 
 
 Remark 2. — In Wishes the Optative Subjunctive frequently 
 takes iHindm, thai (negative iHMnhm ne) ; in poetry, iit, that, 
 
 SI, if. If the Wish is still attainable, the Present tense is 
 used; if not, the Imperfect or Pluperfect; as, tMn&m ddessi 
 possit frat&r I O that my brother may be able to be present I (he 
 may be able) ; UCln&m Mess'& poss5t fratlr. Would that my bro- 
 ther were able to be present ! (he is not). 
 
 II. The Potential Subjunctive is iised : 
 
 (a) To make an assertion modestly or cautiously; as, v&tlm, 
 
 1 should wish (the Present implies that the Wish is attain- 
 able) ; vellem, I should have wished (the Imperfect implies 
 that the Wish is unattainable') ; nlviiUm forstt&n haee illl nii- 
 rentiir, perhaps those people wiay admire these things too 
 much. 
 
TENSES. 
 
 283 
 
 (6) la Questious implying a Negative Answer; as, quts 
 diibitSt ? who would doubt f (no one). 
 
 (p"' In the Conclusion (Apodosis) of Conditional Sen- 
 tences; as, si id credos, erres, if you were to believe that, 
 yoic would err. 
 
 
 
 TENSES. 
 
 § 190. The Tenses are either Primary or Historical. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 FUTURES. PRES. PERFECT. 
 
 
 amat, 
 
 > amabit, amavit, 
 
 Primary. 
 
 he lovea. 
 
 he will love. he has loved. 
 amaverit, 
 
 he will have loved. 
 
 1 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PAST-PERFECT. AORIST-PERFECT. 
 
 Historical. , 
 
 am a bat, 
 
 amaverat, amavit, 
 
 1 
 
 he was loving. he had loved. ke loved. 
 
 Rule LIII. — Sequence of Tenses. — If there be a Pri- 
 mary Tense in the Principal Proposition, there must be a 
 Primaiy Tense in the Dependent; if there be an Histor- 
 ical Tense in the Principal, there must be an Historical 
 Tense in the Dependent. 
 
 T. 
 
 I come, that I may see. 
 I will come, that I may see. 
 J have come, that I may see. 
 I was coming, that I might see. 
 I came, that I might see. 
 
 Remark 1. — An Historical Present is Primary in form, but 
 Past in meaning; it is, therefore, often followed by Past Tenses 
 in the Dependent Proposition. 
 
 Remark 2. — The Present-Perfect (Perfect with have) is often 
 treated as an Historical Tense, and followed by the Imperfect or 
 Pluperfect Subjunctive in the Dependent Proposition ; as, haee 
 non ut vos excltarSm ISeut'ih sUm, I have not spoken these things 
 thit I might arouse you. 
 
 Remark 3. — The latter part of a long Oblique Discourse, when 
 
 >niNCIPAL. 
 
 DEPENDENT. 
 
 VeniS 
 
 ut videam, 
 
 Veniam 
 
 xA videam, 
 
 Venl 
 
 fit videam, 
 
 Veniebam 
 
 fit viderem. 
 
 Venl 
 
 ut viderem. 
 
284 SYSTx:si. 
 
 the leading Verb is Past, is almost always shifted to tne Present, 
 for the sake of animation. 
 
 PxVRTICIPIAL PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 §191. 1. The Participle is used to abridge discourse, 
 and may stand in the place of a Causal, Final, Condi- 
 tional, Concessive, Relative, or Temporal Proposition, or 
 a Principal Proposition connected by & with what fol- 
 lows. 
 
 2. (a) The Participle may agree with the Subject, Ob- 
 ject, or some other word of the Principal Proposition 
 [Participial Conjunctive Construction); as, Arisildes ,pa~ 
 trio, pulsils L&cSdaemdnSm fugtt, Aristides when driven 
 from his country fled to Sparta. 
 
 (6) Or, it may stand with a Noun or a Pronoun in the 
 Ablative, without grammatical connection with any word 
 in the Principal Pi'oposition ; as, his rebtis constitiitis, 
 consM discessH, these things being determined upon, the 
 consul departed. (Ablative Absolute.) 
 
 3. Here may be noted some peculiarities in the use of 
 the Participles. 
 
 (a) The Participle in -rils is used with the various tenses of 
 the Verb essS to represent the Agent as about to perform, or in- 
 tending to perform, an action ; as, LSouturiia fuit, he was about 
 to speak, or intended speaking. [First Periphrastic Conjugation. 
 See 1 106, II.) 
 
 (6) The Participle in -r'&s, especially with Verbs of Motion, is 
 used in later Latin to express a Purpose; as. Ad J5vtm Ammo- 
 nimperglt consiilturtis rfe dnglnt sua, he goes to Jupiter AmmoD 
 to consult about his origin. 
 
 (c) The Perfect Passive Participle agreeing with a Noun is 
 often used like a Verbal Noun in -io or -Us limited by a Gen- 
 itive; as, db urbi condlta, from the building of the city; post 
 proelium factiim, after the fighting of the battle. An Adjective 
 
PAETICIPIAL PEOPOSITIONS. 285 
 
 limiting a Noun may often be translated in the same way [i. e. 
 like an Abstract Noun with a Genitive) ; as, improvisa rt oom- 
 mbti, alarmed by the suddenness of the thing. 
 
 [d) Instead of the Perfect Tenses in the Active, the Perfect 
 Passive Participle is sometimes used with hdbeo; and' the com- 
 pound form thus obtained is generally stronger than the simple 
 Perfect, emphasizing that the result is continued ; as, Bomani in 
 Asia picunids magnets collQcatas habent, the Komans have invested 
 large sums-of-money in Asia (and still hold the investment). 
 
 § 192. Rule LIV. — Ablative Absolute* — A Noun or 
 Pronoun with a Participle, whose case depends upon no 
 otiier word, is |)ut in the Ablative called Absolute, to ex- 
 press the Antecedent or Attendant Circumstances of an 
 action, such as Time, Cause, Manner, Means, Condition, 
 etc.; Pyth&gbrds, Tarquinio. regnantS, In It&li&m venlt, 
 Pythagoras came into Italy in the reign of Tarquin [Tar- 
 quln reigning). 
 
 Remark 1. — Two Nouns or a Noun and an Adjective are often 
 used in the Ablative Absolute without a Participle, the Parti- 
 ciple e«s of essi having become obsolete; as, naturd diici {= du- 
 cenU), under the guidance of nature [nature being guide); Manlio 
 cmsHU ( = cum ManliUs consUl ess&t), in the consulship of Manlius 
 [when Manlius was consul) ; patri invito, against his father's will. 
 
 Remark S. — The Ablatives of such Participles as audita, it 
 having been heard, cognlto, it having been ascertained, comperto,- 
 it having been found out, nuntiato, It having been announced, 
 and the like, are sometimes used without a Substantive, the fol- 
 lowing dependent clause being regarded as a neuter Noun in the 
 Ablative; as, Alexander, audito Daretim movissS &b EcbS,ta,nis 
 fUgienMm instqul pergit strenue, Alexander, it halting been heard 
 that Darius had set out from Ecbatana, promptly proceeded to 
 press him in his flight. The Ablative of some Participles 
 (auspicdfo, consulto, etc.) stands alone, without any dependent 
 clause, but such Participles are virtually Adverbs. 
 
 * For convenience of reference in the exercises, this rule has been 
 anticipated (J 172). 
 
286 SYNTAX. 
 
 Remark S. — ^The Ablative Absolute occurs with nIA after a 
 negative ; as, nihil praecepfd vdlent nisi adjttvantfe natura, pre- 
 cepts avail nothing, unless nature helps. 
 
 Reinark 4- — The Ablative Absolute is very rarely used when 
 the Subject of the Participial Proposition is the same with the 
 Subject or Object of the Principal Proposition. 
 
 EXERCISE LTX. 
 § 193. Vocabulary, 
 
 repentiQus, -a, -um, sudden. despera-re, to despair. 
 
 tempestas, -tat-is, time. Athenieusls, -is, an Athenian, 
 
 ulterior (g 74, 1), farther. Messalla, -ae, Messalla. 
 
 Dionysius, -i, Dionysina. PisS, -on-ia, Piso. 
 
 Syracusae, -arum, Syracusej a city Persa, -ae, Pemian. 
 
 of Sicily, ex sententia, according to one^a notion^ 
 
 poUicitatitS, -on-Ts, promise, or liking^ satisfactorily, 
 
 erra-re, to err, to wander, 
 
 arrip-i-S, -S-re, arnpu-i, arrept-um, to snatch up. 
 nancisc-S-r, nancisc-i, nactus aiid nanct-us sum, to obtain. 
 progrSd-i-5-r, progred-i, progress-us sum, to go forward. 
 cS-liort-5-r, -a-ri, -at-us sum. to encourage, exhort, 
 cond-tS, cond-e-re, condid-i, condit-um, to found, build, 
 com-mitt-8, -e-re, com-mTs-i, commiss-um, to Join, 
 deIe-8, -e-re, delev-T, delet-um, to destroy, 
 aggred-i-6-r, aggred-T, aggress-u8 sum, to go to, attack, 
 vere-5-r, vere-ri, verit-us sQm, to fear, 
 ad-duc-5, -e-r5, addiix-i, adduct-um, to lead on, 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Caesar, having called a comhciY, "l Caesar concilio convocato,cen(t*n5nes 
 sharply censured the centurions, i vehementer irtcuadvit. 
 
 (None but Deponent Verbs have a Perfect Participle with an Act- 
 ive meaning ; the Perfect Active Participle in English must there- 
 fore be translated by the Perfect Passive Participle in the Ablative 
 Absolute, unless the Verb is Deponent.) 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Nostri, rgpentina re' perturbati, armS, arripiunt. Bar- 
 ba,ri, multituding' navittm perterriti, a lIt5rS discessSrant, 
 
 ' ? 165, Rem. 1. 
 
PARTICIPIAL PEOPOSITIONS. 287 
 
 Nactiis idoneSm M navigandttm' tempestatSm, teitia fSre 
 vigilia" gquites in ultSriorSm portiim progrgdi jussit. Hia 
 rebils ex sententia confectis,' impSrator milites cShortatiis 
 proeliilm commisit. Viginti annis* antg Catongm natttin^ 
 pat6r metis vita^ discessit. Anno quadrag&inao primo &h 
 urbg condita* Nttma rex' creatiis est. Hand multis annis* 
 post CarthaginSm deletam* Jtigurtlia natus est. Dianysitis 
 tyrannils, Syracusis* expulsiis, Corintlii* puSros docebSt. 
 Legatiis signiim militibiis non d6dit cupientibfis.' Natura 
 diicS"' iiunquam errabimfis. His rebiis constitutis" legati 
 regSm de rebtts suis desperantgm multis poUicitationibiis 
 aggrgdiuntiir." Hac re st^tim pgr spSciilatores'' cognita, 
 CaesSr, insidias vSritus, exercitum castris " continuit. Alex- 
 ander in Asia,m contendit regnfim Persarfim occfipaturiis.'* 
 Caesa,r in ItS,liS,m prSfecturus '^ principes civitattim &d se 
 conv6ca,t. Consfil eollfim occiipaturfis est." Athenienses 
 legates miserunt oractiliim consulturos.'^ Marco Messalla 
 6t Marco Pisong consulibus," OrggtSrix, ctipiding'* regni 
 adductiis, conjiirationSm nobilitatis fecit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Who will err under the guidance of nature? Who, pray, 
 will not err under your guidance? In the consulship of 
 Manlius the Gauls sent ambassadors to Eome. These things 
 having been determined upon, the line of battle having been 
 drawn up, the signal having been given, our men commenced 
 battle. Both parties fought (§115, III.) bravely. Th*^ con- 
 sul, fearing the enemy's cavalry, kept his forces in camp 
 (§ 170, Bern. 4) (for) three days. Two years before (§ 164, 
 
 1 § 184, Rem. 4, TTT, 
 
 ' i 130, 2. 
 
 " § 166, Rem. 1. 
 
 ' 1 171. 
 
 " 1 176. 
 
 " 1 170, Ran. ^. 
 
 3 i 192. 
 
 9 1 191. 
 
 " 1 191, 3 (6). 
 
 « ? 164, Rem. S 'b). 
 
 i» 2 192, Rem. 1. 
 
 " § 98, 3. 
 
 »? 191, 3(c). ' • 
 
 " § 192. 
 
 " § 191, 3 ». 
 
 « 1 160. 
 
 12 I 95, Rem. S. 
 
 " ? 165, Rem. 1. 
 
288 SYNTAX. 
 
 Rem. S, h) the destruction C§ 191, 3, c) of Carthage the Nu- 
 midians sent ambassadors to Rome to the senate. The gen- 
 eral is going-to-attack the enemy at sunset. In the reign of 
 Tarquin the Proud many noble citizens were murdered at 
 Rome. The general, having called together his lieutenants, 
 ordered them to commence the battle. The Athenians, hav- 
 ing consulted the oracle (§ 192), returned home. Adherbal, 
 (when) expelled from Numidia, fled to Rome. These things 
 having been satisfactorily arranged, Caesar set out to Qin) 
 Britain. 
 
 INFINITIVE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 194. Rule LV. — 1. Active Verbs of Saying, Think- 
 ing, Knowing, and Feeling ( VerbA Sentiendi et DeddrandJi) 
 take as their Object a Dependent Proposition introduced 
 in English by that, and expressed in Latin by the Infin- 
 itive and a Subject Accusative ; as, d'lcU montgm Sb hos- 
 tibils tSnerl, he says that the mountain is held by the enemy. 
 
 2. So also equivalent expressions, such as famd est, there 
 is a report ; tesUs sUm, I am a witness ; auctdr sUm, I ad- 
 vise ; certiorhn dliquSm f&oiS, I inform any one ; and the 
 like ; as, te In Syriam prOfecturiim essS fam& est, there is 
 a report (it is reported) that you will go to Syria. 
 
 Remark 1. — ^The Passive of these Verbs is used Personally 
 and Ijnpersoually. 
 
 (a) In the Tenses for incomplete action the Personal construc- 
 tion is generally employed, in which case the Subject Accusative 
 of the Infinitive is changed into the Nominative like any other 
 Object of an Active Verb. Thus, Tradunt Caes3.r6m fortisslmiim 
 ftdssS, they say that Caesar was very brave (Active construction), 
 becomes in the Passive [tradunt being a Tense of incomplete 
 action), TrddUUr Caes3,r fortissimtls fiiiss6, Caesar is said to have 
 been very brave. 
 
 (6) In the Tenses for completed action (Compound Tenses with 
 
INFINITIVE PROPOSITIONS. 289 
 
 essi) the Impersonal construction is generally employed (with the 
 Gerundive it is the regular construction). In this case the Ac- 
 cusative with the Infinitive is retained, and becomes the Subject 
 clause of the Impersonal Verb ; as, Trdditum est Caes^rSm for- 
 tissimiim fiiissS, it is said by tradition (tradition hath it) that 
 Caesar was very brave. 
 
 Remark 2. — The construction of the Accusative and Infinitive 
 further occurs — 
 
 (a) After Verbs of Willing and Wishing, Permitting, Bidding 
 and Forbidding. (But these Verbs, except jubeS, I bid, and vUt, 
 I forbid, are also followed by iU (rae) with the Subjunctive. Mb^, 
 vMS, ^no, impiro, and prSMbeS, take only a Subject Accusative 
 with a Passive Infinitive. For the Active Infinitive, see § 181, 
 Mem. 6.) 
 
 (6) After Verbs expressing Amotion {Joy, Sorrow, etc.). (But 
 these Verbs are also followed by dependent clauses introduced 
 by qudd.) 
 
 (c) After Verbs of Hoping, Promising, and Threatening (usu- 
 ally Future Infinitive. (But sometimes, as in English, these 
 Verbs are followed by a Complementary Infinitive only.) 
 
 (d) In Exclamations; as, Te sic vexari, that you should be so 
 worried I 
 
 (e) As the Subject of a sentence, the Predicate of which is (1) 
 a Noun or Neuter Adjective with sUm, or (2) an Impersonal 
 Verb ; as, turpS est civtm Bomanum vinciri, that a Eoman cit- 
 izen should be bound is disgraceful. (But observe that after 
 Impersonals, HcU, n&cessS est, etc., which take an Indirect Ob- 
 ject, the Predicate Adjective after the Infinitive essi is put in 
 the Dative; as, mih! n6gl6genti es«2 non UcuU, it was not allowed 
 me to be negligent. Sometimes, however, the Accusative is re- 
 tained. See 1 181, Bern. 7.) 
 
 Remark S. — The Subject of the Infinitive is sometimes omitted 
 when it is a Personal or Kefiexive Pronoun, or can be readily 
 supplied by the sense. In Compound Forms, ess& is also some- 
 times omitted. 
 
 Remark J^. — After Verbs of Perception, we find, instead of the 
 Infinitive, the Present Participle with the Accusative, when the 
 perception is actual [i. e. when one actually sees, hears, etc., the 
 
 25 
 
290 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 object engaged in an action, or in the state or condition Indicated 
 by the Participle) ; as, saepi audivi te contUmeliose d& me Iflquen- 
 t6m, I have often heaj-d you speaking contemptuously of me (but, 
 audio te contUrneliose de me 16qui, / hear (leam) that you are 
 speaking contemptuously of me). 
 
 So Verbs of Representation (by pen or pencil)— /&ci5, I repre- 
 sent, pingo, I paint, etc.; as, Apelles pinxit AlexandrUm Mag- 
 niim fulmin t5nentSm, Apelles painted Alexander the Great 
 holding a thunderbolt. 
 
 § 195. The Infinitive expresses an action as incom- 
 plete, completed, or future, with reference, not to the pres- 
 ent time, but to the time of the leading Vei-b. That is, 
 while the form of the Infinitive represents the action as 
 incomplete, completed, or future, the time of the action 
 is determined by that of the leading Verb. 
 
 (a) Infinitive in Object Clauses dependent on Prin- 
 cipal Tenses: 
 
 he aaye 
 he will Bay 
 he will have 
 said 
 
 Dicit (Pres.). 
 Dicet (Fut.). 
 Dixerlt (Fut. 
 
 Perf.) 
 Dixit (Pres. 
 
 Perf.). 
 
 ■ me ecrXhere, 
 
 ■ that I am writing. 
 
 he has said 
 
 me eeripsisse that I have written^ or virote, 
 
 me scriptHriim ease. thai I will write, ov am go- 
 ing to write. 
 
 me scripturUm faisse. that I would have written, 
 
 or was going to write. 
 
 epistolam scribi that the letter is being writ- 
 ten. 
 
 epistolam scriptam essS. that the letter was written, 
 
 epiatdl&m ecript&m fiiisse. that the letter had been lorit- 
 
 ten. 
 
 Spiatolam scriptHm %rl that the letter will be writ- 
 ten, or is going to be 
 written. 
 
 ib) Infinitive in Object Clauses dependent on Historical 
 Tenses : 
 
INFINITIVE PEOPOSITIOKS. 
 
 291 
 
 Diceh&t (Im- 
 perf.). 
 
 (Perf.). 
 
 . that [was untinj. 
 
 he was say- ' 
 ing 
 Dixit (Aorist). ■ me seribere. he said 
 Dtxerat (Past- 
 
 he had said 
 
 me scrzpsisse.. that I had written, 
 
 me scriptUruin esse. that T would write, or was 
 
 going to write. 
 
 me seriptHrum fuisse. that [would have written, or 
 
 had been going to write, 
 
 epistdl&m aerihi that the letter was being 
 
 written, 
 
 Spistol&m ecriptam esse, that the letter was already 
 
 written, 
 epistSlam scrXptam fUisse.,,,. that the letter had been writ- 
 ten, 
 epistolam scr%ptum iri that the letter would be writ- 
 ten, or was going to be 
 written. 
 
 Instead of the regular Future Infinitive, tlie Periphrastic 
 form fiUurUm essi {f6ri) tit, with the Present and Imperfect Sub- 
 junctive, is often employed, especially in the Passive. If the 
 Verb has no Supine or Future Participle (in -rits), it must be 
 employed. 
 
 From the above paradigm ilr will be seen that after a 
 Primary Tense (a) the Infinitive is translated like the 
 Indicative of the same tense ; i. e. an Infinitive Present 
 like an Indicative Present, etc. ; after an Historical Tense 
 (6) the Infinitive Present is translated like the Indicative 
 Imperfect; the Infinitive Perfect, like the Indicative 
 Past-Perfect; the Infinitive Future, like the Subjunc- 
 tive Imperfect (should or would)-; and the Infinitive 
 Future-Perfect (fUissS scrlpturum), like the Subjunctive 
 Past-Perfect {should have, would have). 
 
 Bemark 1, — M^minl, I remember, generally takes the Present 
 (sometimes the Perfect) Infinitive of past events concerning 
 which, the Subject has actual personal knowledge; otherwise, 
 
292 SYNTAX. 
 
 the Perfect Infinitive is used ; as, Triimtni eum dicfirS, I remem- 
 ber his saying ; mimlm eHm dixissS, I remember he said. 
 
 Remarh 2. — The Accusative with the Infinitive Future Pas- 
 sive is properly the Object of the Supine, the Infinitive Present 
 Passive In being used Impersonally ; as, dlclt tpistdlUm scnptUm 
 iri, he says that it is gone to write the letter ; i. e. that some one 
 is going to write it, and, hence, that it will be written. (See § 195, 
 
 JRemark 5.— The Passive construction is preferred with Tran- 
 sitive Verbs where ambiguity would arise, both Subject and 
 Object being in the Accusative; thus, aio te hostes vinciri possi, 
 may mean either " that you can conquer the enemy,'' or " that 
 the enemy can conquer you." But diS hostes a te vincl possl re- 
 moves all doubt. Generally the sense obviates ambiguity. 
 
 Remark If. — Verbs meaning to Wish or Desire are followed by 
 a Complementary Infinitive, or an Infinitive with a Subject; as, 
 Caes&r clemens existlmdri vult, or Caes&r se exisftnidrl cUmentlm 
 vult, Caesar wishes to be esteemed merciful. 
 
 Remark 5. — An Infinitive Proposition is always a Noun-Prop- 
 osition, the Object of an Active Verb of Saying or Thinking, etc., 
 the Subject of an Impersonal Verb, or in Apposition to a Noun 
 or Pronoun. With an Impersonal Verb an Infinitive Proposi- 
 tion is hgically (i. e. according to the manner of speaking) de- 
 pendent, but grammatically the Subject. 
 
 EXERCISE I.X. 
 § 196. Vocahulary. 
 
 jHgum, -1, yoke. familiaris, -S, pertaining to the family. 
 
 biennium, -i, two i/ears. res familiaris, property, 
 
 Victor, -or-is, conqueror. apes, -ei, hope. 
 
 prSd-itor, -or-is, traitor. facultas, -tat-is, means, opportunity. 
 
 neg-fi, -a-re, -av-I, -at-um, to say no, to deny. 
 
 com-par-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to acquire. 
 
 Iargi-5-r, largi-rl, largit-us Bum, to bribe. 
 
 negleg-5, -e-rS, neg^ex-i, neglect-um, to neglect. 
 
 con-sid-8, -5-re, consed-i, consess-iim, to encamp 
 
 c5n-sl5-t, con-sta-bat, con-stit-it (Impers.), it is ivident, etc 
 
INFINITIVE PKOPOSITIONS. 293 
 
 nosc-!S, -S-re, nov-i, nof^iim, to find out, to hnow. 
 
 oonjIc-i-8, -e-rg, conjec-i, conject-um, to hurl. 
 
 pollice-o-r, pollice-ri, poUieit-iia sum, to promise. 
 
 sper-3, -a-r6, -av-i, -at-um, to hope. 
 
 re-nuiiti-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to bring bach word, 
 
 pell-S, -e-re, pepul-I, puls-um, to beat, drive. 
 
 mtn-S-r, -a-rl, -at-us sum, to threaten. 
 
 confirm-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to declare, assert. 
 
 red-d8, redd-e-re, reddid-i, reddit-um, to give back, retuim. 
 
 animadvert-8, -e-re, animadvert-i, animadvers-um, to perceive, 
 
 opprim-S, -e-re, oppress-i, oppress-um, to oppress. 
 
 sub monte, at the foot of the mountain. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 (a) Caesarl nuotiatur, Word is brought, it is announced, to 
 
 Caesar, 
 
 {b) Rex se negotium confectHrum pol- The king promises to finish the bus- 
 
 licetur, iuess. 
 
 (c) Latrones ee regem occisHros esse The robbers threatened to slay the 
 minabantur,' king. 
 
 (d) ImpSratSr se regem futuriim spe- 
 
 rabat, The general hoped to be king. 
 
 (Observe (? 194, Bern. S (c)) that after Verbs of Hoping, Promimng^ 
 and Threatening^ the Romans use an Infinitive Proposition (Future In- 
 finitive), while in English we use simply a Complementfiry Infinitive; 
 but a Complementary Infinitive occasionally occurs in Latin with these 
 Verbs ; as, yollXeentUr-obstdes ddrS, they promise to give hostages). 
 
 (e) MemSria (§ 170, Mem. 4) tenere, To remember. 
 
 (/) Caesar negat se posse, Caesnr says that he cannot {denies 
 
 that he can). 
 {g) Turpe est regem mentXrl, It is base for a king to lie {that a 
 
 king lie). 
 (A) Constat inter omnes, All are aware {it is evident among 
 
 all). 
 (i) Traditur Cyrus rex aequus sapi- Cyrus is said to have been a just and 
 ensque fuisse (§ 194, Rem. 1 («)), ^mse /-?■«(/ (Personal Construction), 
 
 (Sometimes, also, Traditur Cyrum regem aequum sapientemque fuissS.) 
 Iraditum est Cyriim regem uequum It is said {tradition hath it) that Cy- 
 sapientemque fuisse (^ 194, Rem. 1 rus was a just and icise king (Im- 
 (6)^, personal Construction). 
 
 25* 
 
294 SYNTAX. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Exploratores dicunt oppidXbin S,b hostibiis ihierl. CaiQs 
 fratrem suiim magno in pSricfllo ess& ftnimadvertil;. Cae- 
 sari' notum est Dumndrigem Helvetiis' f&vere. Reglnae 
 iiuntiabo te venisse. Galba &h exploratoribus certiSr' factfls 
 est Gallos omnes discessissS. GaesS.ri nuntiattim est Gallos 
 pr5pius aeeedSrS ac lS.pides telS,qu6 in nostros conjicSrS. 
 Nuntius pollicetur se nSgotiiim ex seutentia confecturtim 
 esse.* Principes sperabant se totius Galliae^ p6tiri possS. 
 Equites rSnuntiaverunt oppidum expugnai^m essi. CaesS.r 
 mSmOria* tSneba,t Lucium CassiUm consulgm occisiim,'' exer-- 
 citHviquS ejus &h Helvetils puhUm'' St siib jfigtim misa'&m? 
 Caesar nggavit se Helvetiis it6r pSr provinciam dJlrS poss&. 
 Ad eas res conficiendas ° Helvetii bienniilm sibi' sfttis essS 
 duxerunt. Aequtim est vietdr&m pare&r& victis.' Non sinS 
 causa dictum est dlvUids alas hiberg. ConstJtt intSr omnes 
 nemlnSm siuS virtut6 poss& beatfim^" essS. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 The cruel chief threatened to slay (§ 194, Rem. 2 (c)) the 
 women and children. Ariovistus declared that he -would 
 not return the hostages. Caesar said that he wa% not lead- 
 ing the array against his country. This base traitor will 
 say that he has not announced our plans to the enemy. 
 "Who can assert that he has never violated the laws of 
 God? Dumnorix asserted that he was about to seize the 
 kingdom. All were aware that the robbers had slain the 
 merchant. It is not just for a rich man to oppress the poor. 
 It is said that in Africa men eat human flesh. The Bel- 
 
 >§140. ^§367,1, Bern. » § 144. 
 
 ' § 142. « 1 170, Rem. Jf. '» 1 181, Menu 7. 
 
 » 1 128, B. ' \ 194, Rem. 3 (end). 
 
 « § 194, Rem. 2 (c). « \ 184. 
 
CAUSAL PEOPOSirioJsrs. 295 
 
 gians are said to be the bravest of all the Gauls. Word 
 had been brought to Caesar that the enemy had moved 
 their camp, and had encamped at the foot of the moun- 
 tain. Caesar had said (dlc&rS) that he would not neglect 
 the injuries of the Aeduans. The chief thought that he 
 would compel the nobility by force. The consul hopes by 
 these things to increase (§194, Bern. 2 (c)) his property, 
 and to acquire means for QSlcL) bribing. 
 
 CAUSAL PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 197. Causal Propositions are introduced by the Cau- 
 sal Conjunctions quid, quOd [because), qudnidm, quando 
 (since), cum (as, since), and by the Relative qui (as he) — 
 the last two being frequently strengthened by prefixing 
 at, utpdiS, and quippS. 
 
 §198. Rule LVI. — (a) Causal Propositions intro- 
 duced by qu6d, quid, quHni&m, and quando, take the 
 Indicative when the reason assigned is stated as a fact 
 and endorsed by the speaker or writer ; as, Q,u6d spira- 
 tis, qu6d vocSm mittiftfe, indignant&r. Because you breathe, 
 because you speak, they are indignant. 
 
 (6) They take the Subjunctive when the reason assigned 
 is not stated as a fact, but as the assertion or opinion of 
 some one eke; as, Socr&tes accusaMis est qu6d corrumpgrgt 
 j-Hveniut^, Socrates was arraigned because {as was alleged) 
 he corrupted youth.. 
 
 (e) Causal Propositions introduced by cum or the Rel- 
 ative qui (alone or strengthened by Ht, utpdtS, quippS), 
 generally take the Subjunctive in the best writers; as, 
 olim vlt& slnS dmlcls instdidr&m plend sit, dmldttiOs com~ 
 pdremUs, Since life without friends is full of snares, let 
 us contract friendships. 
 
296 SYNTAX. 
 
 Remark 1.--A Verb of Saying or Thinking is sometimes ex- 
 pressed, and the Subjunctive still retained by a species of at- 
 traction. What would have been the Predicate of the Causal 
 Sentence becomes the Accusative with the Infinitive ; as, TratHs 
 est Cai&s qu6d dicSr6t leges essi vidldtds, instead of IrdtHs est CaiiU 
 quOd leges essent vidldtae, Caius was angry because [as he alleged) 
 the laws had been violated. 
 
 ■Bemark Z. — Causal Propositions introduced by e&m or qui 
 {?197 (c)) will take the Indicative when the statement is 
 regarded as a fact. In Cicero the mood with quippt qui is 
 the Subjunctive; in Sallust, the Indicative. 
 
 Remark S. — ^Verbs of Emotion are followed by the Accusative 
 with the Infinitive, as well as by qudd. (See 1 194, Rem. 2 (b).) 
 
 Remark ^. — Non quo, non qu6d (rarely non quid) are often 
 used with the Subjunctive to state an alleged reason ; when the 
 real reason follows, it is introduced by s8rf quid {std quOd) with 
 the Indicative. 
 
 Remark 5. — Dependent Causal Sentences are Nouns, usually 
 limiting the Predicate like a Causal Ablative. The Causal Con- 
 junctions qv^d, quid, etc. are Relative wor^s. 
 
 EXEECISE LXI. 
 § 199. Vocabulary. 
 
 Liscils, -i, Lteeits. cause (as everybody knowa — intro- 
 
 gravitcr, severely. ducing any casual circumstance), 
 
 quod (Conj.), because. unde (Rel. Adv.), whence, from which. 
 
 tarn (Adv.), ao. praesens, -ent-is, present. 
 
 necessariue, -a, -um, necessary, cri(- religio, -on-is, religion, a vow. 
 ical. BuperstitiS, -on-is, auperatition. 
 
 prCpinquus, -a, -um, near. concilium, -i, council. 
 
 HSrudes, -um, the Harudiana. partim (Adv. § 31, Rem. 2), partly. 
 
 quia, 6eca«8e (of the determining praeter modiim, unduly, beyond nn ■«- 
 
 reason). ure. 
 
 qu5niam (quum -{-jam), since, be- ratio, -on-is, plan, reason. 
 
 accus-S, -a-re, -a-vi, -at-um, to censure, accuse, bring to tr\ il. 
 
 sub-lev-5, -a-r6, -av-i, -at-ilm, to relieve. 
 
 incus-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to blame, cenaure. 
 
 intro-duc-8, -E-re, -dux-I, -duct-iim, to introduce. 
 
 corrump-S, -e-re, corrup-i, ?orriipt-iim, to corrupt. 
 
CAUSAL PEOPORITIONS. 297 
 
 rS-prehend-8, -e-rcj repr5hend-i, rSprehena-iim, to rehuhe. 
 tSo-S, -a-re, -av-i; -at-um, to he unoccupied, 
 jact-(S, -a-re, -av-i, -at-?im, to toaa about, to iiiacuBB, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Res Ita se habet, Tliia is the case {the thing tlms has itself). 
 
 Multis praeBenttbus (§ 192), In the presence of many. 
 
 Civitati (g 142) consulere, To consult for, look to, the state. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Caesar, principibfls convocatis, DivitiScttm St Liscfim grJU 
 vitSr accusat qu8d tS,m ngcessario temp6r6, tSm pr6pinqu!a 
 ]iostibfls' &b iis non sublSvet&r ;' multo^ 6tia.m gravius, qu6d 
 ab iis slf destitutus quSritfir. Aedul legates miserunt ques- 
 tiim' qu8d Harudes Sgros eorflm pSpiUdrentiir. Socrates 
 nScattts est, non qu8d jflventutSm corruwpfrSt^ gt nSvas sii- 
 perstitiones introduc^rU, sSd quiH Athenienses de scglSribtts 
 r&prShendeb&t.^ Id ea rations Caesar fecit; qu6d nolebSt 
 eum 16cum undg* Helvetii discessSrant vftcarS.' Dumn6rix 
 se in Gallia rSlinqui' v61eba,t, partim qu6d insuettis navi- 
 gandi* ma,rS UmerU,^ partim qu^d rgligionibils impMiretiir.' 
 Caesa,r, concilio convScato, centiiriones omnium ordinttm' 
 vShgmentgr incusavit qudd de rebiis minime M eos perti- 
 nentibus'" sententiftm dixissent. Qu6ni3,m civitati consiilSrS 
 non possflm, mih! consfllam. Qu6nia,m res itS, se habSt, in 
 iirbgm rSdSamiis.'' 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 Caesar cut down the bridge which he had built (see p. 
 277, examples) over the Rhine, because he was unwilling 
 
 ' ? 192. 
 
 s ? 198, Revi. 4. 
 
 » 1 132. 
 
 ' i 198 (6). 
 
 8 § 129, Bern. 10. 
 
 w \ 191, 2 (o). 
 
 » i 164. 
 
 ' 1 194, Item. Z (a). 
 
 " \ 189, Hem. 1. 
 
 ♦ 2 185 (a). 
 
 « 1 135 (a). 
 
 
298 SYNTAX. 
 
 for the Geimans to follow him into Gaul. "Was not Aris- 
 tides banished from his country because (as men thought) he 
 was unduly just? The Aeduans complained that {because) 
 Ariovistus had (as they alleged) led a great army of Ger- 
 mans across the Rhine. Caesar, because he was unwilling 
 (a fact) for these things to be discussed in the presence of 
 the ambassadors, quickly dismissed the council. The con- 
 sul said that, since he could not consult for the state, he 
 would look to his own safety. You desire to slay me, not 
 because (as you allege) I have violated the laws of the com- 
 monwealth, but because (§ 198, Rem. Jf) I have rebuked you 
 severely for your crimes. Tlie shepherd blamed his son 
 strongly, because he had neglected to shear the sheep. 
 Since this is the case, let us set out. Liscus said that, 
 since such was the case, he would speak a few things. 
 
 FINAL AND CONSECUTIVE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 200. Rule LVII. — Subjunctive of Purpose. — (a) 
 Final Clauses expressing Purpose are put in the Sub- 
 junctive. 
 
 (6) Final Clauses are introduced by U, that (Negative 
 ne, thai not, lest), quo = ut eo, that thereby, in order that 
 (especially with Comparatives), the Relative Pronoun 
 qua = ■fii fe (see § 233), and the Relative Adverbs fifil, 
 vndS, etc.; as, 
 
 lido fit vivSm, non mvS fit 6da,m, I eat to (in order that 
 I may) live; I do not live to eat. 
 
 Ch-vus fugli ne a c&nlitls corripgretfir, the stag fled 
 that he might not be caught by the hounds. 
 
 Gaes&r pontSm, fedtt quo f&cHiUs flumSn traasirgt, Cae- 
 sar built a bridge thai he might the more easily cross the 
 river. 
 
finaij and consecutive peopositions. 299 
 
 Ckustir SquHes praemisU qui (= ■K< ii) vitXm explorarent, 
 Caesar sent the cavalry in advance to examine the road. 
 
 LSoUm libl c6nsid6r6t delegU, he selected a place where 
 he might encamp (that he might, etc.). 
 
 Remark 1. — Ut nl is sometimes used instead of m, but not 
 after Verbs of Negative meaning. 
 
 Bemarh Z. — After Verbs of Admonishing and Allowing, Bid- 
 ding and Forbidding, Beseeching and Compelling, Resolving and 
 Striving, Willing and Wishing, Final Clauses are Object-Clauses. 
 With these Verbs the Infinitive is frequently used instead of ut 
 with the Subjunctive. (See §194, Rem. S (a).) Here translate 
 at, to, not in order that; and ne, not to. 
 
 Remark 3. — After many of these Verbs Ut is frequently omit- 
 ted. So ne after c&ve. 
 
 Remark ^. — Ut is often preceded in the leading clause by a 
 Correlative, such as eo, on that account, idcirco, therefore, etc. 
 
 Remark 6. — Instead of ne, quomlnus [quo + mhiiXs = that thereby 
 the less) is often used after Verbs of Hindering, Refusing, and the 
 like ; as, nihil Caid obstS,t quomlntts lid te scribftt, nothing hin- 
 ders Caius /yojTi writing to you. The relation is partly one of 
 Purpose, partly Result. (See |201, Rem. S.) 
 
 Remark 6. — After Verbs of Fearing and equivalent expres- 
 sions, ne is translated thai, lest, Ut, that — not, the Final Sen- 
 tence being constructed with reference to the contrary wish 
 implied in the Verb of Fearing ; Ut [ne non) introduces the 
 object wished; ne, that, lest, the object not wished; as, v'&reSr 
 tit rMe&t, I fear that he may not return (I wish that he may) ; 
 vireOr ne ridedt, I fear that he may return (I wish that he may 
 not). After Negative Clauses rie non is regularly used instead 
 of M; as, non vtre6r ne non rMe&t, I do not fear that he will not 
 return. 
 
 Remark 7. — Pure Final Clauses, as a rule, take the Present 
 and Imperfect Subjunctive only. Verbs of Fearing are fol- 
 lowed by the Present and Perfect Subjunctive," and (after Past 
 Tenses) by the Imperfect and Pluperfect. 
 
 For other ways of espressing Purpose, see p. 278; § 191, 3 (J). 
 
300 SYNTAX. 
 
 §201. Rule LVIII. — Subjunctive of Result. — (a) 
 Consecutive Clauses expressing Result are put in the 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 (6) Consecutive Clauses are introduced by 'Hii, tliai 
 (Negative -tit — non, that — not), the Relative Pronoun 
 qui = ■&< fc (see § 233, 2), the Relative Adverbs '&bl, undS, 
 etc., and (after Negatives) quin = 'ut non; as, 
 
 Ep&mindndds paupertdtSm &deo fdctlS perpessUs est fit 
 de re publico, nihil praet&" glori&m cepSrtt, Epaminondas 
 bore poverty so easily that he received nothing but glory . 
 from the state. 
 
 In eo stStu res nostrae sunt fit non possint mUshnores, 
 my affairs are in that (such a) condition that they cannot 
 be more wretched. 
 
 Non fe sum qui (= fit 6g6) mortis pSrlciUo terre&r, I am 
 not such a one as to be terrified by the danger of death 
 (I am not the man to be, etc.). 
 
 NthU tdm dtfMlS est quin (= fit non) quaerendd inves- 
 iigdrl possli, nothing is so difficult that it cannoi be traced 
 out by searching. 
 
 Remark 1. — Consecutive Clauses are used — 
 
 (a) After Demonstratives [talis, iantUs, t&m, iideo, sic, etc.) in 
 the leading clause. 
 
 (b) After Verbs of Effecting [fdcis, eff^ciS, etc.). 
 
 (c) After Impersonal Verbs, such as it Happens, it Remains, 
 it Follows, etc. 
 
 (d) After many Abstract Nouns and Adjectives with esst 
 [consuetudo, mos, jOs est, rUiquUm est, proxfLmiXm est, aequ&m est, 
 etc.). 
 
 (e) With the Relative qui after such Adjectives as dignUs, in- 
 dignOs, idoneiis, etc. 
 
 (/) After qu&m qui or quUm iU following a Comparative. 
 {g) After Indefinite Expressions, such as est qui, there is some 
 one who; sunt qui, there are some who; nemo est qui, there it no one 
 
FINAL AND CONSECUTIVE PKOPOSITIONS. 301 
 
 who, quJs est qui, who is there who — ? etc. But when sunt qui = 
 noiinulll, the Indicative is used. 
 
 Remark Z. — Verbs and expressions of Hindering ami Resisting, 
 Delaying and Omitting, and the like, also of Doubt and Uncer- 
 tainty, are followed by quln and the Subjunctive, but only after a 
 Negative or a Question implying Negation; as, Germani rUinerl non 
 p6Urant quin In hostes telA conjictrent, the Germans could not be 
 restrained from hurling darts against the enemy. F&cirt non 
 possUm, quin cdtldie lltf&ras M tl mittdm, I can)io< help from 
 sending you a letter every day. (For ne and quomtniis, with the 
 Subjunctive after Verbs of Hindering, Refusing, and the like, see 
 ^200, Rem. 5.) 
 
 Remark 3. — After Negative Indefinite Expressions, quln ( = qui 
 non, quae non, qti5d non) with the Subjunctive of Result also oc- 
 curs ; as, nlnw est quin sci&t, there is no one but knows (who does 
 not know). 
 
 JS^° Remember that Negative Purpose is expressed by ne; 
 " that Negative Result is expressed by tit non. 
 
 Note. — As a Purpose has reference to the future and is not a fad, 
 but something conceived in the mind, it should obviously be expressed 
 by the Subjunctive. A Result is a Purpose accomplished, and was re- 
 garded by the Romans not so much in the ] ight of a fact as of what 
 was intended to follow, or would naturally be expected to follow, in 
 the circumstances ; they gave it, therefore, the shape which it was 
 supposed to have before it became a Result; hence the use of the 
 Sub'unctive. 
 
 EXERCISE LXII. («; ne; quo.) 
 § 202. Vocabulary. 
 
 commutatio, -5n-is, change, motus, -us, movement, insurrection. 
 
 alacritas, -tat-is, ckeerfulncsa. coUoqui, -locutua sum, to confer, con- 
 morti-fer,s-a, -iim, mortal, deadly. verse. 
 
 pristTnGs, -a,.jaim, former. ex equis or equo, on horseback, 
 
 communicatiS, -on-is, communica- item (Conj.), likewise. 
 
 tion. Bubito (Adv.), suddenly. 
 
 neu, or neve (Final Conj.), andthat una {parte, § 170) (Adv.), together, 
 
 not, nor {after a Final Sentence), continens, -ent-is, continent, 
 
 ad-due-t5, -e-re, addux-i, adduot-um, to lead atjainet. 
 praeeip-i-6, -e-re, praecep-i, praecept-um, to instruct, ttijoin. 
 
302 
 
 SYNTAX, 
 
 K-dic-3, -e-i'e, edix-I, edlct-um, to issue an edict. 
 
 in-stitu-5, -e-re, institu-i, institut-um, to insti'uct, teach. 
 
 incend-3, -e-re, incend-i, incens-um, to set on fire. 
 
 ex-ur-3, -e-re, extiss-i, exust-um, to burn up. 
 
 in-nasc-o-r, -i, innat-us sum, to spring up. 
 
 time-<S, -e-re, timu-i, to fear {as a coward). 
 
 metu-S, -e-re, metu-i, to fear, to be apprehensive. 
 
 vSre-S-Fj -e-ri, verlt-us sum, to feel awe of, to fear. As timeo and metuo 
 
 hare no Supine-stem, the parts formed from that stem are supplied 
 
 by vereor in either sense.) 
 «6qu5, -e-re, cox-T, coct-um, to cook. 
 pac-fi, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to subdue. 
 lmper-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-tlm (Intr.), to command, order. 
 
 That — not, 
 That — no, that 
 That no one, 
 Thai no one at all, 
 That — never, 
 That nothing. 
 That — nowhere, 
 
 not any. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Negative Purpose. 
 Ke, 
 
 Ne ullus, 
 Ne quia, 
 Ne quisquam, 
 Ne unquam, 
 Ne quid, 
 Ne usquam (necubi), 
 
 Negative Result. 
 Ut non. 
 itt nullus. 
 tjt nemC. 
 Ut nemS omniiim. 
 Ut nunquam. 
 Ut nihil. 
 Ut nusquSm. 
 
 So great ia the power of honesty, that 
 we love it even in an enemy. 
 
 Tanta vis prSbitatis est «( earn vel 
 in hosts diligamuB, ' 
 
 N, B. — In Final Propositions of Hesult, the Subjunctive is translated 
 like the Indicative of the same tense. 
 
 To take care, to give attention to. 
 Instructions were given (^ 115, III.). 
 An edict was issued (^ 115, III.). 
 
 OpSram dare, 
 
 Praeceptum est, 
 
 Edictiim est. 
 
 Pater filio praeeeptt ne unquam 
 
 mentlret^r, 
 Ddminiis servo imperavit tit equum 
 
 infrendret, 
 Domintis servo ImpSravitne Squiim 
 
 infrendret. 
 
 The father instructed hie son never to 
 
 lie. 
 The master commanded the servant to 
 
 bridle the horse. 
 The master ordered the servant not to 
 
 bridle the horse. 
 
 Ti'anslate into English, 
 
 Id mlhl ^c Srit grattim ut gratiiis essS nihil posstt. E^ 
 om M te iri&iUuh'em scripsi, Caesar castellS, communJt, 
 
PINAL AND CONSECtTTITE PEOPOSITIONS. 303 
 
 guo^ fSciIiiis Helvetios pr6hiber§ posM. Oppidani multis 
 cfim Mcrimis impgratorSm obsScrabant ne ' oppidum i icendS- 
 rU. Praeceptflm Sr3,t La,bienor!eproeMum commiW^rgi, Ess6' 
 nos SportSt 'dt vlva/rw&s, non vivSrg ut Sdam'&s. In eo itinSrS 
 OrggtSrix persuasit Castico* iXt regnum in civitatS sua oceii- 
 paret; itemquS DumnSrigi* Aeduo, fratri* Divitia,ci, tti idSm 
 co7iaretiir persuasit. EaurScxs* persuasiim 6ra,t° iUi, oppidis 
 suis vIcisquS exustis,' una ctim Helvetiis prSfldscSrentiir. 
 Consiil edixit ne quisquftm in castris eoctum cibum vendMret. 
 Tantiis timSr omnfim exercitiim siibito occiipavit ut^ omnium 
 &nim6s perturbdrSt. Hac orationS h3,bita,' tantS, commutatio 
 facta, est fii summS, S,lS,critas St ciipiditas belli gSrendi' in- 
 natd e?sSt. LegSm br8v6m essS" fiportSt quo fS,cilius ftb im- 
 pSritis t&nedf&r. Consiil militibiis impSravit ne uMm eiv8m 
 interfic&rent. CaesS-r v6ritus ne ullus motiis in Gallia fi&rU, 
 LS-bienfim in continents rSliquit. Milites mStuunt ne mor- 
 tifSrum" sit vulniis Scipionis. TimeS tti" fratres mei a,d 
 urbSm pervMiant. Caesar milites cShortattts est Ut sttae 
 pristinae virtiitis mSm6ria,m rettnerent, neu perturbdrentUr 
 animo." OpSra d3,batur ne qu5d iis" collSquittm intSr se, 
 nevS communicatis essSt. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The enemy ran forward so swiftly that time was not (§ 201 
 (6)) given to our men for throwing their darts. So great a 
 panic took possession of the citizens that (§ 201, Rem. 1 (a)) 
 no man ivas able to take up arms. An edict has been issued 
 that no one leave the town. Instructions had been given to 
 the horsemen not to pursue the enemy too far. Wise men 
 
 1 ? 200 (6). 
 
 « 5 179, Rem. S. 
 
 " § 128, B. 
 
 = 1 200, Bern. 2. 
 
 ' 2 192. 
 
 " ? 200, Rem. 6. 
 
 »?in,8. 
 
 8 § 201, Rem. 1 (a). 
 
 " 1 170, Rem. S. 
 
 ♦ 1 142. 
 
 9 § 184. 
 
 » ? 146. 
 
 •?127 
 
 ■'» 5 194, Rem. S (e). 
 
 
304 SYNTAX. 
 
 eat to live, but fools and gluttons live to eat. I advise you, 
 my son, never (§ 200, Rei i. S) to believe a liar. Balbus ia 
 such a liar (so lying) tiiat he is never believed (it is never be- 
 lieved to him). I fear that some one has announced our plans 
 to the enemy. Ariovistus demanded that they should confer 
 on -horseback, and not bring more {ampliUs) than ten horse- 
 men apiece to the conference. The Belgians, fearing (having 
 feared) that if all Gaul were subdued (Abl. Abs.) the army 
 of the Romans would be led against (&d) them, collected 
 great forces. The citizens feared that the auxiliaries would 
 not reach the city. Caesar commanded (imp&rdrS) the sol- 
 diers to run forward swiftly, and not give the enemy time for 
 collecting themselves. Ariovistus said that he feared that 
 snares were pr^ared for him. It has been said that brave 
 men do not fear death. The consul thought that Catiline 
 had formed the design of setting the city on fire. An edict 
 was issued that no bread (nothing of bread) should be intro- 
 duced into the camp. 
 
 EXERCISE LXIII. (guin; quomlniig.) 
 § 203. Vocabulary. 
 
 dubiiis, -a, -um, doubtful. custos, (justod-Ts, guard. 
 
 compella.-re, to reproach, upbraid, itaque (Conj.), and ao, there/ore, ac- 
 dubita-re, to doubt. cordingly. 
 
 conjunctitS, -oii-iB,/ricn(£«Atp,in<i- haud multum (§153), not much, not 
 
 macy. far. 
 
 av6ca-r5, to call atony, separate. ParmeniS, -on-iB, Parmenio. 
 mvestiga-rg, to investigate. ia€dicu6, -i, physician. 
 
 Cimon, -on-is, Cimon. mSdicamentum, -i, doae of medicine. 
 
 lIe-8, fle-re, flev-i, flet-um, to weep. 
 obst-8, obsta-re, obstit-i (obstaturus) (Intr.), to stand in front of, hinder, 
 
 prevent. 
 impedi-8, -i-re, -iv-i, -it-iim (Tr.), to tangle the feet, hinder, prevent. 
 de-terre-8, -e-re, deterru-i, deterrit-iim, to frighten off, deter, prevent. 
 praeter-mitt-S, -e-re, -mls-i, -miss-um, to pass by, leate undone. 
 circum-veni-S, -i-re, -ven-i, -vent-um, to surround. 
 bib-8, -e-re, bib-i, biblt-um, to drink. 
 
FINAL AND CONSECUTIVE PROPOSITIONS. 305 
 
 ad-spio-i-S, -g-ie, adspex-T, adspect-um, to lonh at. 
 im-pon-S, -e-re, imp5su-I, impSsit-um, to pnat, place. 
 fru-o-r, fru-I, fruot-Ss sum, to enjoy. , 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 l?;s,T nKn «xt».t - ,---,(■'' oannot he that he is not goiag to 
 rieri Don potest juM? ucit(ur?tfl e*M 6 5" 
 
 (3 201 Bern. 2) 1 """"^ ^'"' *^"' ** " ^""'^ *° ™'"«)-'" 
 
 V (. he is certainly going to come. 
 
 Nunquam Balbum adspexit guin He never saw Balbua without upbraid- 
 
 eum fratrioidam compelldret, ing him aa a fratricide. 
 
 Milites retinere non possiim qmn I cannot restrain the soldiers from rush- 
 
 longius procurrant, ing forward too far. 
 
 FaoerS or miM ■) 
 
 . X - - ( °°° possum j«tH fleam, I cannot help from weeping. 
 
 Qmn is often best translated by from or without with the Verbal in 
 -imj. 
 
 Non est dfibium | qxnn (§ 201, Rem. ) There in no douht ] that God 
 Negari non potest \ 2) Deus mun- \ It canot be denied > rules the 
 Quis diibitat _ J dum regat, ) Who doubts J world. 
 
 After expressions of Do'ubt, quln is best translated by that. 
 
 Nihil praetermisi qmn (J 201, Rem. S) I have left nothing undone to como 
 
 ad te veniam, to you. 
 
 Nihil Caio obstat quommua (3 200, ) ,^ , . „ 
 
 n -X '.- .-. [ Nothing hinders Caiua from com- 
 
 iicTH: oj veniatf ?• _ 
 
 Nihil obstat quommOa Caius venidt, j °' 
 
 Per me stat quomlnHa vinida, /0'**ny/aw/( (i.e. through my hin- 
 
 drance) that you do not come. 
 Quid te impedivit quonnnUa venires, What prevented yon from coming? 
 Minimiim (^ 153) abfuit quln caderet, He was very near falling. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Non diibifim est qmn virtus summura sU bSnttm.^ BalbOm 
 
 nunquam adspexit quln eiim proditorSm ' compellaret. Fi6ri 
 
 Don potest quln Slii a nobis dissentiant. Non dubitavit Ad- 
 
 herba,! quln JiigurthS, etim interficSrS condret&r. Quia dti« 
 
 1 g 128, Hem. 7. ' 1 151 (i). 
 
 26 » 
 
306 SYNTAX. 
 
 bitarS p6test qvm multo' turpitts sU fallSrS' quS,m fallif 
 Germrini rgtineri non potuerunt quln in nostros telS, conjic^ 
 rent. Pgr Considium stStit quomtniis CaesSr Helvetios cir- 
 cuinvenirSt. OrgfitSrix non dflbitit quln br6vi temporg' 
 totifls Galliae regnfim occtipaturfls sU. Altitude fluminis 
 hostes deterrebS,t quomUniis trausirg cbnareni&r. Nihil prae- 
 termisit Cic6r8 quln Pompeiiim a Caesa.ris conjunctions cmi- 
 cartt. Nihil ta,m 'difTicilS est quln quaerendo investigari 
 possU. Cimon nunqua,m in hortis custodSm impSsuit, ne 
 quis impMlretiir quomtnus fructibus* fruiret'&r. ParmSnis 
 audivSrSt vSueniim a Philippi mSdico regp pilrari;' it&quS 
 fipistOla scripta' efim deterrerfi voluit quomlnits mSdicamen- 
 tiim bibSr&t qu6d mSdiciis d2,rS constituSriit. 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 
 It cannot be denied that Caesar was (a man) of the great- 
 est courage. Who can doubt that our men are able to sus- 
 tain the attack of the enemy (for) many months? The 
 general will certainly relieve us in a few days. It cannot be 
 denied that your son was born many years (§ 164, Rem. 3 
 (b)) after the building (§ 191, 3 (e)) of the city. I never 
 converse with you without becoming wiser. What hinders 
 us from persuading Marius not to storm the town ? It was 
 not Cicero's fault that Pompey was not separated from inti- 
 macy with (of) Caesar. The army was not far from being 
 beaten and sent under the yoke. The soldiers could not be 
 restrained from rushing forward with a great shout. Orge- 
 torix was not far from getting possession of the government 
 of all Gaul. There is no man but knows (§ 201, Rem. 3) 
 that all things are ruled by God. The queen could not 
 help weeping. 
 
 >?164. '?:?!. ^§141. '2192. 
 
 » 1 180, Bern. 1. ' § 167, 1. ' ? 194. 
 
CONDITIONAL PEOPOSITIONS. 307 
 
 CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 §204. 1. A Conditional Proposition consists of two 
 Clauses, one expressing the Condition, the other the Con- 
 clusion. 
 
 The Clause containing the Condition is called the Pro- 
 tasis. 
 
 The Clause containing the Conclusion is called the 
 Apodosis. 
 
 Condition (Protasis). Conclusion (Apodosis). 
 
 If you speak the truth, I have broken the laws. 
 
 The Protasis is the Dependent Clause (Adverbial) ; the Apodo- 
 eis is the Principal Clause. 
 
 2. The Conditional Clause (Protasis) is usually intro- 
 duced by the particle si, if; — negative si non, if not, nisi, 
 (ni), unless, sin, but if. 
 
 St non negatives the Verb or some special word ; nisi 
 negatives the whole Clause. Sometimes there is no dif- 
 ference. 
 
 Remark 1. — Nid, unless (also nid n, except in case) is regularly 
 used instead of si non after Negatives ; as, Parvl sunt f8rls armS,, 
 nisi est cdndliUm ddmi, of small account are arms abroad, unless 
 there is wisdom at home. But si non, and not nlst, must be used 
 in Clauses that have a Concessive sense. Nisi is often subjoined to 
 Negatives with the meaning but, only, except; as, posthdc nemS 
 nisi siultisslmiis hoc non f&citt, henceforth none but the most ar- 
 rant fool will fail to do this; 
 
 Remark 2. — If a Conditional Clause is followed by a second 
 Conditional Clause opposed to the former one, this second Clause 
 is introduced by sm [sin authn), but if; as, hunc mihl Unwrtm 
 erlpt: n virus est, nt opprtrndr; ain falsHs, ut tandtm Wquando 
 ftniert destndm, rid me of this feeling of fear; if it is well 
 founded, that I may not be crushed by it ; but if (on the other 
 hand) groundless, that now at last I may cease to be afraid. 
 (Negatively, sin tnlniis, sin iUUtr). 
 
308 SYNTAX. 
 
 Remark S. — Nisi forti, unless perchance, nist vuro, unless indeed, 
 introduce an exception. The former is often, the latter always, 
 used ironically. The Mood is the Indicative ; as, Defensio con- 
 tra vim nunqu&m optandd, sM nonnunqudm nUcessarid est, nisi 
 vero iU& dies, quo Ti. Gracchus est caesiis, rim pablic&m non vul- 
 niravXt, resistance to violence ought never to be desired, but 
 sometimes it is necessary ; sinless perhaps that famous day, when 
 Ti. Gracchus was slain, inflicted no wound oh the commonweal. 
 
 Remarh Jf. — Diim, dumm6d6 (negative dUm ne, dummddd ne) are 
 used with the Present and Imperfect Subjunctive in Provisos — ;/ 
 only, provided only; as, diim res mUneant, verbd fingant arbitratU 
 suo, let them invent words at pleasure, provided only facts re- 
 main. 
 
 Remark 5. — Sometimes si is omitted and the Condition ex- 
 pressed by an Independent Proposition; as, n'igHt quis, ntgoi 
 ait, aio, (if any one) says no, I-say no; (if any one) says yes, I 
 say yes. 
 
 Remark 6. — The Condition may be implied in (a) a Phrase, 
 (6) in an Indefinite Relative, (e) in a Participle, {d) in an Im- 
 perative or Interrogative Clause, or (e) altogether omitted (as, 
 Nulld, prdfecto &li& gens tanta molS cladls non obrUttl essU, Surely 
 no other nation would have failed to be crushed by such weight 
 of disaster (i. e. if such weight of disaster had come upon it). 
 
 § 205. Conditions are of three kinds — 
 
 I. The (Indicative) Simple Condition (Indicative in both 
 
 Clauses). 
 II. The (Subjunctive) Condition of Possibility (Present and 
 Perfect Subjunctive). 
 III. The (Subjunctive) Condition of Unreality (Imj)erfect 
 and Pluperfect Subjunctive). 
 
 § 206. Rule LIX. — The Simple Condition. — As.mm- 
 ing as a fact the Supposition, the Simple Condition 
 represents the Conclusion as necessarily following. The 
 Indicative (any tense) is used in both Clauses ; e. g. Si 
 verd dlcSs, leges viSlavi, if you speak the truth, / hav6 
 
CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. 309 
 
 broken the laws. Si non ltceba,t, non n^oess^ SrSt, if it 
 was not lawful, it was not necessary. 
 
 ' Observe that no opinion is .mplied as to the actual truth of the 
 Supposition. What is stated as a fact is simply this: Granted the Sup- 
 position, the Conclusion must follow. 
 
 Remarh 1. — As stated above, the Mood in the Conclusion 
 (Apodosis) is, aa a rule, in the Indicative, but it may also be 
 in the Imperative or Subjunctive, according as a Command, Wish, 
 or Modest Assertion is to be expressed ; e. g. si donrns, expergis- 
 c8r6, if you are sleeping, awake. PSre3,m m&16, si non optl-m&m 
 Hr&t, I wish I may be hanged if it were not the best course. 
 
 Remark 2. — In the expression of a General Truth, we find the 
 Subjunctive (2d person Singular), the Subject Ijeing indefinite 
 (i. e. you = one, any one) in the Protasis of a Simple Condi- 
 tion, combined with the Present Indicative in the Apodosis; 
 e. g. BSniis tantumm6d6 segniSr fit, flbi neglegas, &t m&lUs imprd- 
 bidr, A good man merely becomes more inactive if one neglects 
 him, but a bad man becomes more vicious. So after si guts. 
 
 For the Simple Condition in OrdtiS Obliqnd, see § 245, 4 (1). 
 For OHm used Conditionally, see § 220, Sem. 2. 
 
 § 207. EuLE LX.— T/ie Condition of Possibility.— TUm 
 Condition of Possibility represents the Supposition as 
 purely imaginary, yet as one still possible, and takes the 
 Present or Perfect Subjunctive in both Clauses according 
 as the action is one of continuance or completion ; e. g. 
 Si hoo dicSm, mentiSr, if / should say this, I should be 
 telling a lie. Id si accidSrit, simiis armati, if that should 
 turn out to have happened, we should be ready armed. 
 
 B®" The action is Present or Future. 
 
 Remark 1. — Though, as a rule, the Subjunctive occurs in both 
 Clauses, we often find the Indicative (especially the Future) in 
 the Conclusion (Apodosis) to emphasize a fact ; e. g. transir'i 
 TIMrim U intrdrt, si possim, castrd hosHilm v61S, I wish to cross 
 the Tiber and enter the camp of the enemy if I van. 
 
310 SYNTAX. 
 
 For Indicative in the Conclusion of a General TrUh, see J 206j 
 Bern. 2. 
 
 Remark S. — Non possUm (with an Infinitive) regularly stands 
 in the Conclusion (Apodosis) instead of non posstm, if the Con 
 dition (Protasis) is negative [nlA, si non); e.g. nSqu5 dmlcUi&m 
 tueri posstimiis, nisi aeque dmlcos U nosmSt ipsos dillgamtis, nor 
 could we preserve friendship unless we should love our friends as 
 our very selves. So often the Indicative of other forms oi possi, 
 of vein, etc. 
 
 Remark S. — Sometimes a thing really impossible is, by a trick 
 of rhetoric, represented for argument's sake as still possible ; e. g. 
 Tii si hie sis, dlit^r sentias, if you were in my place, you'd feel 
 diflferently. (In such cases, the Present Subjunctive is used in 
 both clauses.) 
 
 For the Condition of Possibility in Oi-dtis ObUqnS,, see ? 245, 4 (2). 
 
 §208. Rule IfXl.—The Condition of Unreality.— ThQ 
 Condition of Unreality presents the Supposition as con- 
 trary to fact. It takes the Imperfect and Pluperfect 
 Subjutictive in both Clauses ; the Impeifect referring to 
 Present time, the Pluperfect referring to Past time ; as, 
 Id f&cSrSm, n possSm, I would do it if I could (I can- 
 not — Present time — ) ; Idfeciss&fii, st pdtuissSm, I would 
 have done it if I could (I could not — Past time — ). 
 
 _ , «, _ ... ( If he had money (he has not), he would 
 
 Si pecumam uaberet, daret, < . . „ 
 
 I gwe it (nolo — Fresent time). 
 
 r If he had had money (he had not), he 
 
 Si pecuniam habuisset, dedisset, < would have given it {then — at some 
 
 ( PnBt time). 
 
 Sometimes the time is different in the two clauses, each 
 Tense retaining its force of opposition to the Present or 
 Past. 
 
 Remark 1. — The Imperfect is sometimes used in the «i-clause 
 where we should expect the Pluperfect, the action being repre- 
 Bented as continuing from the Past into the Present ; as, hic «t 
 
CONDITIONAL PROPOSITIONS. 311 
 
 menUa essBt, exer(fitUm educirS non austls ess6t, if he ivere in hia 
 right mind (he is not" and was not), he would not have dared to 
 lead out his army. 
 
 Remark S.~l{ the Verb in the Conclusion of the Condition 
 of Unreality denote Power, Possibility, Duty, Necessity, and the 
 like, or if it be inr the Active or Passive Periphrastic Conjuga- 
 tion, or be modified by the Adverbs paent or prdpi, it regularly 
 stands in the Imperfect or Perfect Indicative; as, Defirl pStuit 
 exercitHs, n quis aggridl ausiis essSt, the army could have been (it 
 was not) destroyed if any one had dared to attack (it). Hunc 
 pStrts Idco, si ullQ, in te piUds ess6t, cdUri debebas, this man you 
 ought to have reverenced as a father, if you had had a spark of 
 dutiful affection. In the same way occurs the Indicative of 
 ess& with Neuter Predicative Adjectives and Substantives. 
 
 Bemarh S. — To represent vividly how near a thing came to 
 happening,, which might have happened under a certain condi- 
 tion (yet which did not happen), the Pluperfect Indicative is 
 sometimes employed in the Conclusion ; as, Praecldrl vicSramils, 
 ntd fUgientim LipidiXs rScepissSt Antonium, we had (surely) won 
 a glorious success (we came within an ace of it), had not Lepidus 
 received the fleeing Antony. 
 
 The Imperfect Indicative is employed in the Conclusion (Apo- 
 dosis) when the action is represented as begun, as partially ac- 
 complished and which would have been accomplished but for 
 the action in the Condition (Protasis) ; as, CaerniH circumvS-. 
 niebattir, nl pnm& Ugw se oppOsuissSt, Caecina was being sur- 
 rounded (and would have been surrounded), had not the first 
 legion barred the way. 
 
 In such sentences the nisi — or si — clause usually follows. 
 
 Per the. Condition of Unreality in OratiS OhUquS,, see ? 245, 4(3). 
 JS®" For Optative Subjunctive with iUlnSm, etc., see § 189, I., Re- 
 mark Z. 
 
 EXBECISE LXIV. 
 § 209. Vocabulary. 
 
 praeceptum, i, precept. incita-re, to aroitae. 
 
 inimioitia, -ae, enmity. perpetuus, -a, um, unending. 
 
 adhuc (Adv.), «(iK; yet. invita-re, to invite. 
 
312 SYNTAX. 
 
 mature (Adv.), soojt. vera dlcSrS, to speak liuth (triM 
 
 utinam{lntery), Oh that! I wish that. things). 
 
 stipenditim, -i, tribute, tax. subvenire alicul, to come to one't 
 
 quotannis (Adv.), yearly. aesietauce. 
 
 miuu-5, -e-re, minu-i, minut-um, to make leas, weaken 
 exerce-S, -e-re, exercu-i, exercit-um, to exercise, 
 8ubig-3, -6-re, siibeg-i, siibact-um, to subjugate. 
 lacess-8, -e-re, lacessiv-i, lacessit-um, to provoke. 
 iDJUrla lacesserS, to provoke by injury, to injure. 
 d61e-S, d6I-e-re, dolu-i, dSltt-ura, to grieve. 
 conveni-8, -i-re, conven-I, convent-um, to agree. 
 pcnd-8, pend-e-re, pepend-i, pena-um, to weigh, to pay. 
 responde-tS, -e-re, respond-I, respona-um, to answer. 
 cave-5, -e-re, cav-i, caut-um, to avoid. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 M6m6rii minuitttr ntd e&m exerceds.^ Si haec civitas est, 
 civis sflm 6gS.' Si Helvetii flumSn transir8 conentUr, Cae- 
 silr eos prShibebit.' Caes3,r Aeduis bellum intMissSt, nisi 
 obsides muissent.* Alexander, si diutius vlxiss&t, totiim 
 orbfim terrarfim subegissit.* tjtina,m pa,t6r metis vlvtit!^ 
 UtinS,m rex viviret!^ Caesar &h Ariovisto postulavit ne 
 quSm^ multitudinSm hSminflm in Galliam transducirM,^ 
 .nhii (§202) Aeduos injuria' l&cess&ret'' neve his sociisquS 
 eorum bellum inferrSt;'' "Si id itS, feeSris,"" inquit, "mihl' 
 p6piil6qu8 Romano perpStua SmicitiS, tecum'" erlt." Ad 
 haec Ariovisttis respondit: "Aeduis" injuria' bellum non 
 infSr^m,' si in eo qu6d convenerunt m&neant,^ stipendium- 
 qu6 quotannis pendant."^ "Ni-n te sJttis incitatflm ess6" 
 coiifld&rkn, plurS, scrih'irhn.* RiiiS ferro" figri non possU 
 (it would he impossible') fit Sgri c616renttir. Impgrat6r8 
 
 1 § 206, i2em. ,?. « ? 89. "?141. 
 
 2 1 206. ' ? 200, Rem. 2. " ? 194. 
 
 ' \ 207, Bern. 1. ' 1 168, m.m. 2 (e). '^ \ 204, JJem. 6 (o). 
 
 « ? 208. "l 146. 
 
 s \ 189, 1., 'Bern. 2. " ? 79, 2. 
 
CONCESSIVE PROPOSITIONS. 313 
 
 iiiterfecto' figri non p6test quin exercitiis ppllatiir. Si vis' 
 me flerS, primttm d^lendflm est' ipsi tibi.'' 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 If you speak the truth, Cato has done (toj you a great 
 injury. If this is the case (§ 199, Ex.), I will set out im- 
 mediately to Rome. No man can be bappy, unless his life 
 is ruled by the precepts of virtue. If Caesar had been able 
 to avoid these enmities, he would be still living. If I knew, 
 I would say. If you live well, you will die happily. I wish 
 you had come a little (§ 164) sooner. Ariovistus would not 
 have led his army across the Rhine unless he had been in- 
 vited by the Sequanians. It would be impossible to believe 
 this report if we did not know that the messenger always 
 speaks the truth. If I had known your danger, I would 
 have come to your assistance. If I go to Rome, I will send 
 you the money which you demand. If the Helvetians had 
 endeavored to cross the river, Caesar would have prevented 
 them. Ariovistus would not be waging war on the Aeduans 
 if they had paid the tribute (§ 208, end). Without an army 
 it is impossible to wage war (it cannot happen that war be 
 waged). 
 
 CONCESSIVE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 210. Concessive Propositions, which are closely akin 
 in form and use to Conditional Propositions, express 
 something granted or yielded, and are introduced by the 
 Concessive Conjunctions etsi, tdmetsl (tdm^netst), Stiamsi, 
 quamqu&m, quamvis, quantumvls, quamllbSt, UoU, M (neg- 
 ative ne= granting that not), oUm in the sense of although, 
 and the Relative qui (= cum fe) — all with the general 
 meaning although. 
 
 1 ? 204, 2Jem. 6 (c). ^§206. »§185. *§148. 
 
 2r 
 
314 SYNTAX. 
 
 §211. Rule LXII.— Of these Pariioles, the com- 
 pouuds of s^ {etst, tdnuM,, &,iamsi) take (a) the Indicative 
 if the Concession be represented as a. fact, (6) the Subjunc- 
 tive if the Concession be represented as merely possible or 
 contrary to fact; as, (a) QuM crebro qvMs vl/M, non ml- 
 ratilr, 6tiamsl cur fl&t nescft, what one often sees, he 
 does not wonder at, even though he does not know why 
 'tis done. (6) Etiamsl mors oppetendS essgt, ddnil mdl- 
 iSm, even though death ought to be met, I should prefer to 
 meet it at home. 
 
 The Indicative, however, is the usual construction 
 with these Particles. 
 
 §212. Rule LXIII. — Quamqudm in the best prose 
 takes the Indicative, quamvis the Subjunctive. L\cH, Ht 
 (ne), oikn, and qui (= ctini is, though he) also take the 
 Subjunctive, when used concessively ; as, 
 
 (a) Homdnl, quamquSm W/nSrS H proelio fessi grant, 
 idmSn instructi p-ocedunt, the Romans, though they were 
 wearied by their marching and fighting, yet advance(d) 
 in order of battle. 
 
 (6) MendddUm, quamvis occultettir, tdmSn turpS est, a 
 lie, though it be concealed, is yet a base thing. 
 
 (c) FrSmant omnes Ifcgt, dicdm qudd seniiS, tho%tgh all 
 cry out, I shall say what I think. 
 
 (d) Ut haec concedantiir, rSttqud qui tandSm intellSgi 
 possunt, granting that these things be allowed, how can the 
 rest be understood ? 
 
 Remark 1. — The complement of a Concessive Sentence is an 
 Adversative Proposition introduced by t&mhfi, (see examples 
 above). 
 
 Remark 2. — In later writers we find quamqu&m used with the 
 Subjunctive and quamvis with the Indicative. QyamqvAm ia 
 properly the Accusative Singular feminine of the Oeneral Eela- 
 
CONCESSIVE PROPOSITIONS. 315 
 
 tive quisquls (^ 153). Thus, iji example (a) above, " The Eomana 
 to what extent soever they were wearied," etc. The particles quam- 
 ms, quantumvla, quamllbM, quantumlibtt are merely compounds of 
 the Relative Accusatives qutim and quantum and the verbal forma 
 vis (from vblt) and ttbtt [qu&m + vis = as much as you wish; 
 qiiAm + libit = as much as it is pleasing. By reason of this verbal 
 element they are followed by the Subjunctive. So licit, which 
 is merely the Impersonal Verb, M being omitted. 
 
 Bemarh S. — We sometimes find quamqu&m with the Subjunc- 
 tive in good prose where the general conception requires the 
 Subjunctive. Rarely otherwise (see, however, Cic. Plane. 22, 53). 
 
 Remarh 4- — QuamquSm is often used adverbially, meaning 
 and yet; as, qudmqudm quid ISqudrf and yet why do I speak? 
 So, sometimes, etsl. 
 
 Quamvls used adverbially = however much, as much as you please, 
 is sometimes joined with licit for emphasis; as, qttamvis licit insec- 
 temUr istos, etc., we may attack these men as much as you please, etc. 
 
 § 213. Vocabulary. 
 
 oceulta-re, to conceaL strSuuGs, -S-, -iira, hriah, active, 
 
 fessiis, -a, -Qm, weary. ItalicGa, -i, Italian. 
 
 nondum (Adv.), not yet. penes (Prep.), with, in the power of. 
 
 t3,men (Conj.), nevevtheleBB, yet. dSdititS, -on-is, surrender. 
 
 emolumeutum, -i, advantage. adversa-ri, to resist, object. 
 
 crSbro, (^^iv.), frequently. Bio (Adv.), thus. 
 
 pijta-re, to think. 
 
 CDgnosc-8, -e-re, cognov-i, cognit-iim, to find out. 
 
 aocid-8, -8-re, aceid-i, , to happen. 
 
 con-sSquor, -I, C(5nsecutus sum, to follow, pursue and overtake, attaint 
 
 ne-sci-5, nesei-re, nesciv-i, nescit-um, not to know. 
 
 suade-8, -e-re, suas-i, suas-um, to advise. 
 
 re-or, re-ri, rat-fis sGm, to think, deem, 
 
 trause-S, (g 111, 9), -i-re, transi-i, transTt-um, (o pass away. 
 
 vit-5, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to shun, to escape, 
 
 potiSr, potius {,Superl. potissimus, from potis), letter, preferable. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 Qu6d turpS est, id,' quamins oecuUU^r, hSnestfim fiM 
 nullo rnSdo p6test. Nostri milites quamqu&m itiniirS 6t 
 ip7, 6. 
 
316 SYNTAX. 
 
 proelio fessi erant, tiimgn, consuls impSrani6/ S,(i summfim 
 collSm c616ritSr procurrerunt. CaesSr, etsl noudiim eoriim 
 consilia cognov&rdt, tamfin ffire id quod accidit susplcabatiir. 
 Viri b6ni multa'' ob e&m causam fiiciunt, qu6d dgcfit, etsl 
 nullum consgcuturum emSluraentum vtdent. Qu(5d' crebro 
 quis vidSt, nou miratflr, Uiamsl caus^m nesdtt. LlcSt stre- 
 nuum mStum pfUes essS, volocWr tiimfn spes est. ItiiHci 
 Adherbiili' suadeut ull se et oppidiim Jugurthae tmd&t; a,t 
 ills, t&metsl omnia potior^* fide" Jugurthae rubatur, tamgn, 
 quia, pSn6s ItSlicos, si adversaretflr, cogendi pStestas SrSt, 
 deditiongm fScit. Divitiae, quamvls magnae sint, tSmSn 
 alas habent. QxiamvTs priidens atquS sapiens sis, mortSm 
 vitar6 nullo mSdo p6t6s : sic transit gloria, mundi. 
 
 COMPARATIVE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 214. Comparative Propositions are introduced by the 
 Comparative Conjunctions qudm (than, as), ut, Ml, sigM 
 {sicutl), quhnadmddum (as, so as), v&lilt {just as), proUt 
 {according as), tanqu&m, qu&sl., M si, vSlUt si, da si {as 
 if), and (poetic) ceu {as, as if). 
 
 §215. Rule LXIV. — Comparative Sentences intro- 
 duced by M, 'Htl, sHcut, qu&madmddum (seldomer tanqu&m 
 and quomddo), etc., followed by the Demonstrative Par- 
 ticles 1,t&, slo {so), etc., regularly take the Indicative ; as, 
 iit quisquS optime graece sett, M est nequisslmus, as each 
 man knows Greek better, so is he a greater rascal. 
 
 Remark. — Observe that in sucii Sentences of Comparison as the 
 above, introduced by Hi guisquS, the Superlative in both clauses 
 is translated exactly like the Comparative with an Ablative of 
 Measure. 
 
 §216. Rule LXV. — Comparative Sentences intro- 
 
 > 2 192. 3 i 129, Bern. S. ^ ? 151 (6). 
 
 ' 1 128, Eon. 6. * ? 142. » S 163. 
 
COMPAEATIVE PEOrOSITlONS. 317 
 
 duced by qud.si, tanqu&m, and tanqu&m si, Ut si, vSltct si, 
 and ao si, take the Subjunctive; as, 
 
 Me adsptolMs, quS,ai monstrum sim. You gaze at me as 
 if I were a monster. 
 
 Sequ&ni absenUs Aiiovistl crudelltaMni \^\at si edr&m 
 adessSt, horrebant. The Sequani kept shuddering at the 
 blood-thirstiness of the absent Ariovistus as (they would 
 have shuddered) if he had been present. 
 
 HemarJc. — The Mood is the Subjunctive, because such sentences 
 are really Conditional Sentences of Pom6i/ii!j/ (|207) or Unreality 
 (§ 208), the Apodosis being omitted. Our English translation 
 makes the Comparison an unreal one, and w.e should expect only 
 the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive, according to ? 208. 
 But the Tense of the Subjunctive is regulated by the Tense in 
 the leading clause (? 190). Observe in the iirst example that as 
 the leading Verb is present, the present Subjunctive is used in 
 the Comparative clause (s?m, not essim), though the unreality of 
 the Comparison is implied. 
 
 § 217. EuLB LXVI. — Ao or atqiiS, in the sense of 
 as, than, is frequently used in Comparisons with Avillis, 
 dis^mWis, par, dispar, AliUs, stml.M&i^, pdrtt^-, OM^, and 
 other Adjectives and Adverbs of Likeness and Unlikeness; 
 as, est idem ac fuU, he is the same as he was ; non filitSr 
 sei-lbS ac sentiS, I do not write otherwise than I think. 
 
 EXEKCISE LXVI. 
 § 218. Vocabulary. 
 
 quasi (quam-si), as if. veluti (vel-uti), even eo, just as. 
 
 perinde (Adv.), in the same manner, Graecus, -a, -iim, Greek. 
 
 precisely, just, exactly. littera, -ae, a letter of the alphabet j 
 aliter (Adv.), otherwise. PI. epistle, literature. 
 
 ao or atque (after aliter), than; (af- avide (Adv.), eagerly. 
 
 ter perinde), as. diuturnus, -a, -um, hng, lasting.' 
 
 h5nSr, -or-is, ojice, honor. imperatiim, -i, order, command. 
 27 « 
 
318 SYNTAX, 
 
 hSnores populi, offices given hy the itS (Adv.), so. 
 
 people. ops {Norn. obs. §51), op-is, Tie^p, 
 
 sicuti or Bicut (sic-iiti), so as, just might. 
 
 as. ratio, -5n-i3, plait. 
 
 tanquam or tamquam (tarn, so, sutnma ope, with all one's might. 
 
 quam, as), so as, Just as. silentium, -i, silence. 
 
 peous, -6r-is, fioek, herd; PI. cat- vitam transire, to pass one's life. 
 
 tie. agmen, -in-is, an army on the march. 
 
 ex-ple-o, -e-re, explev-i, explet-Qm, to Jill, satisfy. 
 con-temn-S, -e-re, contemps-i, contempt-um, to despise. 
 nit-o-r, nit-i, nix-ua and nis-us Bum, to strive. 
 du-fer-5, de-fer-re, de-tul-i, de-lat-um, to carry {from one to anothei'), Ij 
 
 report. 
 e-veni-o, -i-re, even-i, event-um, to turn out, result. 
 Bub-sequ-o-r, Bubsequ-i, subsecut-us sum, to follow closely. 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 Graecas littSras sic a,vicle arripuT, quasi diuturnSm sitim 
 explerg cAperim. Mea in dOmo impgratS, tuS, dicfe, pSrindg 
 qii&st dSmlniis sis. HSmines corrupt!' superbia'' itS, aetatSm 
 Sgunt, qutisl p6puli honSres ooniemnant; itS, hos (hSiiores) 
 pStunt qudst hCneste vlxirint. Slcuii d'lxl faciam. PJitSr 
 meus septima hora' rSdibit, swM polllcylt&s est. M^IS, for- 
 tune, tibi accidit, tanquSivi mihl {acAdit). HSinmes summa 
 6p6* nitP dficSt, ne vitiini silentio* transeant' vUUl pSc6r& 
 (vitS,m transeuni). Res evenit non pgrindg atqu&'' pfttavS- 
 T&m. Caesar, gquitatu praemisso,' subsSquebatur omnibfis 
 copiis ; sSd rS,tiS ordSque agminis iilitSr se habeb&t oe' Bel- 
 gae ad Nervios detHl&rant. 
 
 TEMPORAL PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 219. Temporal Propositions define the time of an 
 action, and are introduced by the Temporal Conjunctions 
 cum {quS^n), when, postqu&m (posteaqu&m), aftei-, ■Ht, as, 
 
 >? 191, 2(a). »?171. <■ IIM, Eem. S {e). ' ? 217. 
 
 ' i 167. • g 168. « 2 200. a g 192, 
 
TEMPOEAL PROPOSITIONS. 319 
 
 ^61, when (■tti prlrnMm, Hbl prvmMm, o&m prmvUn, the mo- 
 ment that), slmM dc, as soon as, antSqu&m and priusqudm, 
 before, diim, donSo, and quoM, while, as long as, until, 
 quamdiu, as long as, qudtiens, as often as, etc. 
 The uses of eum (qu6m) are as follows : 
 §220. Rule LXVIL— (I.) (Mm Temporal. — Cam 
 Temporal (= when), defining the mere time of an action, 
 takes the Indicative (any tense) ; as, Ciim Gaesdr In Oal- 
 lidm venit, altSrlus factionls princlpes Srant Aedul, alte- 
 rlus Sequ&nl, When Caesar came into Gaul, the Aedui 
 were the leaders of one faction, the Sequani of the other. 
 
 Remarh 1. — As ci!m is Relative in its origin, the phrases ed, 
 fult, Irit {iempUs) cum are followed by the Subjunctive like est 
 qui, /uii gin (see §201, JBem. 1 [g)). 
 
 Remark $. — OHm Temporal is often used in a Conditional sense 
 (= si, if) generally with the Indicative (Simple Condition), more 
 rarely with the Subjunctive ; as, BridUm cftm convenSrO, persan- 
 b&m omnia, xf (when) I meet Brutus, I will write a full account 
 of everything. 
 
 Remark S. — The Correlatives ciXm — tUm in the sense of both 
 . . . and, take the Indicative ; the eSm-clause presents a general 
 fact, the tUm-clause follows and presents a special fact. But if 
 c&m is used in a Causal or Concessive sense (whereas, although), 
 the Verb in the iirst clause is in the Subjunctive; as, d&mplHri- 
 mas commddUdies dmlcttiti conUne&t, tilm ill& praest&t omnlb&s, 
 etc., although friendship possesses many advantages, yet this sur- 
 passes all, etc. 
 
 § 221. Rule LX VIII.— (II.) Gum Invers^m.—Miiev 
 a leading clause fixing the point or period of time, d&m 
 (= when) follows with the Indicative Aorist or Historical 
 Present, introducing the main fact of the Sentence. In 
 this inversion the Temporal (Subordinate) Clause becomes 
 substantially the Main Clause. This is called Qim Inver- 
 sUm; as, Vix dd te d&dSr&m iWiras, cilm Postiim'&s rS- 
 
320 SYNTAX. 
 
 pente advenit, Hcarcdy had I sent off my letter to you 
 when Postumus suddenly arrived. 
 
 Remark. — The Verb in the leading clause is the Imperf. or 
 Plup. Indie., often preceded by-the Adverbs jdm, vlx, etc. As 
 the event in the cwTW-clause is usually sudden or unexpected, we 
 often find the Adverbs ^hlto and ripenfe used in that clause (see 
 example above). 
 
 §222. Rule LXIX.— (III.) (Mm Histm-ical—Olm 
 (= when) is used in Historical Narrative with the Im- 
 perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive ; as, Caes&rl ctlm 'Id 
 nuntiatttm essSt, mdturdt &b wbS prdftcisci, When this 
 had been announced to Caesar, he hastened to set out 
 from the city. 
 
 Remark. — Often a notion of Cause intrudes. In the above 
 example ciim nuniiatUm easU points out both the Time and the 
 Cause of Caesar's setting out. Usually the dZm-clause comes first. 
 
 §223. Rule LXX.— (IV.) (Mm Causal and OUm 
 Concessive. — (Mm Causal (= since) and (Mm Concessive 
 {= although) take the Subjunctive (any tense); as, 
 
 Quae ciim U& sint, C&tUlnd,, pei'gi quo coepistl, Since 
 these things are so, Catiline, proceed whither you have 
 begun. 
 
 Phocion fuit perpUuo paupSr, ciim ditissimUs essS pos- 
 sSt, Phocion remained steadily poor, although he coukl 
 have been very rich. 
 
 For dim in Sentences of Eepealed or Customary Action, see § 227. 
 
 §224. Rule LXXI. — Temporal Clauses with Post- 
 qutim, etc. — The Temporal Conjunctions postqudm 
 {posted qudm), Ht, 'HM, ut primum, tibi primiim, cUm prl- 
 mUm, slmfd dc [sXmVbl atquS), are used in Histi^rical Narra- 
 tive with the Indicative Aorist or Historical Present ; as, 
 
TEMPOEAL PROPOSITIONS. 321 
 
 PostquSm %d Sniniiidvertit copids silIs OaesSr In prox~ 
 ImUin coU^i subdudti, After Caesar had observed this, he 
 withdrew his forces to the nearest hill. 
 
 Bemark. — Less commonly these particles take the Indicative 
 Imperfeot of Description and the Indicative Pluperfect denoting 
 the result of completed action. 
 
 § 225. Rule LXXII. — AntSqu&m and Priusqu&m are 
 used with any tense of the Indicative, except the Imper- 
 fect and Pluperfect, to express the simple priority of one 
 actual oocurrenae to another ; as. Films convScaM ant6- 
 quSm mortutts est, He called together his sons before he 
 died. 
 
 Bemark. — ^The Indicative Aorist is especially common after a 
 leading Negative Clause containing an Historical Tense ; as, non 
 ants diralsit eiim quam fldtm dGdit, He did not let him go until 
 he pledged his word (observe that the parts of anUqu&m and 
 prius gudm are often separated, as in this example, antS stand- 
 ing in the Leading Clause and quS,m introducing the Dependent 
 Clause). 
 
 § 226. Rule LXXIII. — AnMpi&m and Priusqa&m 
 are used with the Subjunctive (1) when the action is one 
 purposed or desired by the Subject of the leading clause ; 
 (2) when the non-occurrence of the action is implied ; (3) 
 when the action is future or doubtful, as, 
 
 Ilaerens In tergo Romanes priusqua,m fdres portdrum 
 objicSrSntur vU'U agminS uno irrumpU, The Roman hang- 
 ing on his rear, burst in as it were in one body before the 
 doors of the gates could be shut {purposing that they 
 should not be, in order that they should not be, too soon 
 for them +o be, shut). 
 
 Bemarh 1. — Sometimes the Imperfect and Pluperfect Subjunc- 
 tive are used with antSqudm and priusqu&m, just as with c«»i Mis- 
 
322 SYNTAX. 
 
 torical, to express mere priority of time; as, Faucis antS diebU* 
 quilm Sprdcusae cdpfirentur, OtdcUiils In Afrlidm trammlsU, A 
 few days be/ore Syracuse was taken, Otacilius crossed over into 
 Africa. 
 
 Re'inarh Z. — The Subjunctive also occurs vrith these Particles 
 in the statement of a General Truth; as, Tempestas mindtUr, antS- 
 qu^m surgat, The tempest threatens be/ore it rises. 
 
 Remark 3. — Especially common is the Subjunctive of the Sec- 
 ond Person with Indefinite Subject (you = one, any one) ; as, 
 Priusquim inclpias, consults ; iibi consUluiris, mdtUre facto BpUs est, 
 Before you (i. e. any one) begin, there is need of deliberation; 
 when you have deliberated, there is need of speedy action. So 
 in all Temporal Clauses ; cf. ubt consUluirls in this example. 
 
 § 227. EuLE LXXIV. — Repeated or Customary Ac- 
 tion. — The Temporal Conjunctions cum (= whenever), vhi, 
 stmul ac, and the General Relatives gulcumquS, qudtiens, 
 and the like, are used witli the Indicative to express Re- 
 peated or CuLstomary Action. When one action precedes 
 the other, the tenses in the Temporal Clause (Protasis) are 
 those of completed action (Perfect, Pluperfect, and Fut. 
 Perf.), answering respectively to the corresponding tenses 
 of incomplete action (Indicative Present, Imperfect, and 
 Future) in the Main Clause (Apodosis); as, 
 
 (1) Cflm se intSr turmas ins5fnuaverunt, ex essM'is dea1n 
 Hunt (Peef. — Pees.). 
 
 Whenever they have worked their way in among the 
 squadrons, they (are wont to) leap down from their 
 chariots. 
 
 (2) Uostes ttbl Qltquos ex ndvi egrMientes conspexfirant, 
 adOriebantiir (Plup. — Impeef.). 
 
 The enemy whenever they saw (had seen) any of them 
 disembarking, %ised to attack them. 
 
 (3) Hlc puSr qu6tienscumqu6 me vidMt, ing6mesc6t 
 (Fut. Peef. — Fut.). 
 
lEMPOEAL PEOPOSITIONS. 323 
 
 This lad whenever he sees {shall have seen) me, wiU 
 sigh. 
 
 Remark. — So (more rarely) «5 = i/ ever, whenever ; as, SI Qh per- 
 giquendo hosies deterrer^ nSquivSrant, disjectos &b tergo circum- 
 vSniebant (Plup.— Imperf.), Whenever they proved unable to keep 
 the enemy from pursuing, they used [moving-by-the-flank-] io-ai- 
 iack them in rear while scattered. 
 
 Livy and late writers use the Subjunctive in such sentences. 
 
 S 228. Rule LXXV.^ — Dvjm, ddnP,G, quo&d, and quam- 
 diu (== while, as long as), take the Indicative (any tense) ; 
 as, Hoc feci, dtim Ucuit ; intermisi, quoSd non Ifculit, I 
 did this as long as I was allowed; I stopped it as long as 
 I was not allowed. 
 
 Remark 1. — J)Um in the sense of while [in the time that) altaost 
 always takes the Present Indicative in narrative, though the 
 action is past ; as, Diim haeo In colldquio gfiruntiir, Caes&rl nun- 
 tiatHm est ^quites AriovisH l&pldes In nostras eonjlctrl, While these 
 things were (lit. are) going on in the conference, it was announced 
 to Caesar that the horsemen of Ariovistus were hurling stones 
 at our men. 
 
 Remark S. — But in Livy and late prose writers dum (while) is 
 construed with the Imperfect Subjunctive like cUm Historical; as, 
 Rex guattuSr mlli& armatorum, dfim rtcens terrdr, essU, SeSiHsa&m, 
 miMt, The king sent four thousand armed men to Scotussa, while 
 the panic was fresh. (The Mood, however, is usually explained 
 as Partial Oblique Narration — representing here the idea in the 
 king's mind.) 
 
 §229. Rule LXXYI. — BUm, donSc, and quodd (= 
 until) take — 
 
 (1) The Indicative in simple statement of a fact; 
 
 (2) The Subjunctive, when Purpose is to be expressed, 
 or the action is future or doubtful; as, 
 
 Mils ?n sSnatu fuU eo. die, quofid sSnatiis dimissiis est, 
 Milo was in the senate on that day until it adjourned. 
 
324 SYNTAX. 
 
 HdrdtiUs Cycles imp^tUm hostlum susfXnu% quo3d ceti^l 
 pont&m interrump^rent; Horatius Codes withstood the 
 onset of the enemy, until the i^est (of his comrades) could 
 tear down the bridge (in order that they might, etc.). 
 
 For dum used Conditionally, see § 204, 2, Rem. ^. 
 
 EXERCISE LXVU. 
 Vocabulary, 
 
 aries, -etis, ram. pavor, -or-iSj fright. 
 
 infirmiis, -a, -um, weak* _ se recipere, to recover one's self. 
 
 scapha, -ae, boat. exspecta-re dtim, to wait for anything 
 
 Commiua, -i, Cummiits, to happen. 
 
 Atrebas, -at-is, Atrebatiatu periculum f acere, to make a trial, 
 
 mandatum, -i, order. fuIguratiS, -on-is, lightning. 
 
 ver, ver-is, spring. soniis, -i, sound. 
 
 acerbus, -a, -um, bitter. rusticus, -a, -um, rustic. 
 
 Phocion, -on-iP, Phocion. Suessiones, -um, Sueasiones. 
 
 perpetuo, continually. Boeotii, -5rum, Boeotians. 
 
 Epaminondas, -ae, Epaminondas dementia, -ae, madness, 
 
 (App. I.)- Verres, -is, Verves. 
 
 obsidiS, -on-is, siege. rCaa, -ae, rose. 
 
 sum-5, -e-re, sumps-i, siimpt-um, to take. 
 
 dif-fer-8, -fer-re, dis-tul-i, di-lat-um, to put off, defer, 
 
 in-cip-i-6, -e-re, incep-i, incept-um, to begin, 
 
 in-cid-5, -e-re, ineid-i, incas-um, to fall upon. 
 
 con-sperg-ti, -S-rS, spers-i, -spera-um, to sprinkle. 
 
 prae-sto, -a-re, praestit-i, praestit-iim and praestat-um, to staid before, &< 
 
 superior. 
 at-ting-o, -e-re, attig-i, attact-um, to touch, reach. 
 de-sist-S, -e-re, destit-i, deatit-um, to leave off, cease, 
 bell-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to make ioar. 
 claud-8, -e-rS, claus-i, olaus-um, to shut up. 
 ex-pon-8, -e-re, exp5su-i, exposit-um, to set forth, explain. 
 dc-fervesc-8, -e-re, deferv-T, to subside. 
 
 inter-ced-S, -e-rS, -ceaa-i, -cess-um, to come between, intervenei 
 de-liber-8, -a-re, -av-i, -at-um, to deliberate. 
 de-flu-8, -e-re, de-flux-i, deflux-um, to flow away. 
 com-ple-8, -e-re, complev-i, complet-ura, to filU 
 
TEMl'OEAL PROPOSITIONS. 325 
 
 Translaie into English. 
 
 1. Cum, wheti, since, although, wherene, 
 
 CaesSr c&m id nuntiaMm essH, maturavit 3,b urbS prSfi- 
 cisci.' Qu6d' cttm dnwiadvertisset Caesar, scSphas longariim 
 navium milMbtis' compleri* jussit. Britaiini Commium 
 Atrgbatfim, cttm M eos Caes^ris mandate deferret,^ comprS- 
 hendgrant, St in vinciila conjecSrant. Ciim r6sa,m vldSr&t,^ 
 tiiui incipSrS' ver. arbltrabatiir. O Scerbain mihi' mSmSri- 
 ^m ° temporis illius 6t 18ci, cum hie in me incldit^" cum com- 
 plexes est, conspersitque lacrimis, nSc 16qui prae moerorg p6- 
 tuit. (Mm primi ordlnes hostium transf ixi pilis ooncidissent^^ 
 tamgn aceiTime rgliqui r&istebant. Vlx 6pist6ia,m tua,m 
 legeram, etkn ad me Curtiiis venltP Hannibal jam sicbib&t 
 muros, c&m rSpente in eiim pS,tSfacta porta erumpunV E6- 
 mani. HSmines, cum multis rebtts infirmiores sini," hac re" 
 maxime bestiis praestant, qu8d loqui possunt. AeduT cUm 
 se suaqug &h Helvetiis defendSrg non possint,^^ legates M 
 CaesSrgm mittunt rCgatum" auxilium. Cum vita sinS ami- 
 cis mStus '^ plenS sU,"^ ratio ipsa monSt amicitias comp§,rarS. 
 Quae cUm itS, sint, ad urbSm pr6ficiscamur.'° 
 
 2. Poetquam; Antequam ; Priusquam.' 
 
 Ea, postqu&m Eomae audltd sunt^'' timSr omnes invasit. 
 D6c6m post diebus'^ qvAm CaesSr in Ita,li&m pervenU, 16- 
 giones duae Srant conscriptae. 
 
 (Rule LXXII.) Ant^ dScimtim diSm'' quam vita" dis- 
 cessit, JibSros omnes convocavit. Haec omniS, ante factS 
 
 '?181. 
 
 8 ? 144. 
 
 '= § 135 [a). 
 
 •■' 1 129, Bern. 9. 
 
 » ? 156. 
 
 " § 189, I. (5). 
 
 ' 1 160, Rem. S. 
 
 w ? 220. 
 
 " I 224. 
 
 * 1 194, E'.m. 2 (a). 
 
 " ? 223. 
 
 "gl64, Rem.S{a). 
 
 5 I 222. 
 
 12 I 221. 
 
 « § 160. 
 
 « ? 227. 
 
 " 1 162. 
 
 
 ' 1 194. 
 
 » ? 186. 
 
 
 2S 
 
 
 
326 SYNTAX. 
 
 suut qu&m Verres ItS-liam attigit. Ep2,miii5ndas iion pri'&s 
 bellarS destitit qutim LScgdaemSuSm obsldionS' clausit. 
 
 (Rule LXXIIl.) Gives priiis se dediderunt qudm aries 
 murfim aitigiss&t. AntSquam de re publica dtc&m, exponam 
 br6vit6r consilium meum. Caes3,r priusquam hostes se ex 
 pavorS 6t fuga rMperent, in fines Suessionum exercitiim 
 duxit. Ad haec cognoscenda,'^rii(52M&m Tp&riculuTa J&cirM, 
 Caifim praemittit. AntS videmiis fulgiirationgm qu&m sSnfim 
 audlamiis. 
 
 3. Dum; Donee/ Quoad, 
 
 Diim haec gSnintiir,' Caes&ri nuntiattim est hostes prSpiiis 
 accedSrS.* Lucius, quoSd p3tuit, pont6m defendit. EpJlmi- 
 nondas, cum S,niraadvertSrSt' mortiffirum se vulnfls acce- 
 pissS,* ferrtim in corpSrS continuit quo&d r&iiuntial'&m est' 
 vicissS* Boeotios. L-ati rSgandi sunt* ut vim diffgrant, dUm 
 defervesc&t'' ir^. Caes&r, tit spSitium intercedfire poss6t^ dilm 
 milites convhiirent^ legatis respondit diSm {time) se a,d deli- 
 bSrandtim sumptiirttm. Dtim vivimfls vivamtis." CaesSr 
 Eummae dementiae'" essg judicabS.t, exspectarg d^m hostittm 
 copiae augerentur. Rusticus exspectat dikn defluiW amnls. 
 
 RELATIVE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 230. Relative Propositions are introduced by Rel- 
 ative Adjectives and Adverbs. (For the construction of 
 simple Relative, see § 129.) 
 
 §231. Rule LXXVIL — 1. Relative Propositions 
 take the Indicative when a faxA is stated and th^ Ante- 
 cedent of the Relative is definite; as, CaesUr gqultes quos 
 
 • § 167. s I 222. 9 2 189, 1. (6). 
 » ? 184. « 1 229 (1). w § 133. 
 »?228, iJem. J. ''?229(2). 
 
 ♦ § 194. 8 ? 200. 
 
 * Oiiglit to be asked. 
 
RELATIVE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 327 
 
 LSl>ientls adduxSr^t praemisttj Caesar sent ahead the oav^ 
 airy which Labienus had brought up, 
 
 § 232. Rule LXXVIII.— The (ieneral Relatives 
 quisqy)is, guicumqu^, ^btcumqu^, and the like, take the In- 
 dicative; as, Quidquid est, tibicumquS est, quodcumqug 
 ^g!tt rUnldU HJgndti'iis, Whatever may happen, wherever he 
 may be, whatever he may be doivg, Egnatius wears a smile. 
 
 Remark. — Observe that, in translating, the English idiom often 
 employs the Subjunctive. Of course, the Subjunctive will be 
 employed in Latin, if required by the general conception of the 
 sentence, 
 
 §233, EuLE LXXIX. — Relative Adjectives and 
 Adverljg take the Subjunctive to express Purpose and 
 Result, and to introduce Causal, Concessive, and other 
 relations; as, 
 
 ILegdtoB mUfierunt qui (= ut ii) pa- 
 cem peterent, They sent am- 
 bassadors to {in order that the}/ 
 might) sue for peace. 
 Kon ^8 aHm qui (= iit ego) hoc f a- 
 ciam, I am not such a one as to 
 do this. 
 Mlaerettuimed^pl (=cumtu.) hunc 
 iantHm homtnem facias Inlmz- 
 cum tibf, I pity you in that you 
 make so great a man as this in- 
 imical to you. 
 
 But quipp^ qui sometimes takes the Indicative. (So in Sallust.) 
 
 C Abaolvite Verrem qui (=»cum is) 
 se fateatur pecUnids cepisse, Ac- 
 quit Vorres, although he con- 
 fesses that he has taken bribes. 
 Nulla est tarn facllis res quin diff%~ 
 cUia 8it quam (= si eam) invitua 
 facias, There is nothing so easy 
 as not to prove difficult if you 
 do it against ycur will. 
 
 1. To expresB Purpose {qui= Ut la) : 
 
 2. To express Result {qul= Ut \a) : 
 
 To express Cause {qui = ciim za — 
 the Relative being often preceded 
 by w(, atpote, and quippe) : 
 
 4. To express Concetmon {qui = cum 
 J.): 
 
 5. To express Condition \qm = si is) : 
 
328 SYNTAX. 
 
 Semark —The Subjunctive with qui expresses a Purpose with 
 reference to the^Object of the Sentence (chiefly with Verbs of 
 Sending, Giving, and Choosing) ; a Purpose with reference to the 
 Subject being expressed by iit. Thus, in the example (under 
 1) above, qui pacim p&Urent refers to the Object, legates. If 
 the construction be Passive, then, of course, qui will refer to 
 the Subject; e. g. we can say LegaM missi sunt qui pdcim pSti- 
 rent, the Object of the Active Verb becoming the Subject of the 
 Passive. 
 
 § 234. The Relative with the Subjunctive of Result 
 occurs — 
 
 1. Very frequently after Jrtrfc^mie General Expressions 
 (Positive and Negative) to express a Characteristic of the 
 Antecedent; as, 
 
 Sunt qui dlcant, There are some who say. 
 Nemo est qui non cUpi&t, TJiere is no one who does not 
 wish. 
 
 (Tlie Negative is often contained in a Khetorieal Question, Qwls est 
 qui. Who is there who = nemS est qui.) 
 
 Remark 1. — The poets and some late prose-writers use the In- 
 dicative after sunt qui, irant qui, etc. The Indicative will of 
 course be used when a definite Subject is introduced or a defi- 
 nite fact stated (here est qui = nonnSmS, some body ; sunt qui — 
 nonnulh, some persons ; est Hbt = nonnumqu&m, sometimes) ; as, 
 Sunt qui dicunt implriA Fisonls sUperbQ, barbdros n&quissi p&ti, 
 Some people do assert (I know people who assert) that the barba- 
 rians could not stand the tyrannical orders of Piso. 
 
 Remark S. — To the Subjunctive of Result must be referred the 
 Subjunctive with the Relative in such restrictive phrases as qu6d 
 soi&m = as far as I know; qu6d intillig&m, as far as I see; quSd 
 mtmlntrim, as far as I remember, etc. 
 
 2. After dignus, indignus, Moneus, unHs, and solus; as, 
 Hi hSmines digni non sunt quibusctim diss6rattir, These 
 fellows are not worth arguing with [i. o. such that it 
 should be argued with them). 
 
RELATIVE PROPOSITIONS. 329 
 
 3. After g i{ft?n following a Comparative; as,, Ilajores 
 arbdres eaedebant qu^m quas ferrS mi^&-poss6t, They 
 were cutting down trees too large for a soldier to carry 
 (larger than such as a soldier could carry). 
 
 § 235. EuLE LXXX.— The Eelative takes the Sub- 
 junctive in such clauses as express the words or opinions 
 of some one else and not of the narrator; as, nuntiatum est 
 liquUes qui praemissi essent rSvertissS, Word was brought 
 that the horsemen who had been sent in advance had re- 
 turned. 
 
 Hemark 1. — The Subjunctive is used in a Eelative Clause in- 
 cluded in another Dependent (Subjunctive or Infinitive) Clause 
 expressing a conception rather than a fact. In such cases the 
 Eelative Clause takes the Stibjective complexion of the Sentence 
 and the Mood is attracted into the Subjunctive ; as, TantO, reriim 
 commutatio fadd est, M nostri Uidm qui vulniribUs cSnfecil procii- 
 buissent, proelvUm ridiniegrareni, So great a change of affairs was 
 brought about that our men, even those who had fallen worn out 
 with wounds, renewed the battle. (Here the Eelative Clause qui 
 — prooUbuissent is attracted into the Subjunctive because it is in- 
 cluded in the Dependent (Subjunctive) Clause, &i nostrt — rtdiniS- 
 grdrent). But — 
 
 Bemark S. — Eelative Clauses included in Dependent (Subjunc- 
 tive or Infinitive) Propositions take the Indicative if they con- 
 tain a mere explanation of the narrator, or if a. fa/it is to be em- 
 phasized; as, Caesd/r plr exploratorla certiSr faatiis est, ex ed parti 
 vicl qu&m Gallis concess6r3,t, omnes noctu ditcessisst, Caesar was 
 informed through his scouts that all of them had withdrawn 
 during the night from that quarter of the village which he 
 had assigned to the Gauls. (Here the Eelative Clause qu&m — 
 eoncesstr&t, though included in the Dependent (Infin.) clause 
 ex ea parti omnes — discessissS, is in the Indicative because it 
 is the explanation given by the narrator (Caesar) to the 
 reader.) 
 
 Bemarh 3. — A Eelative Proposition is an Adjective, limiting 
 the Antecedent ; e. g. PuSr qui ligtt = the reading boy. 
 28* 
 
330 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 EXEECISE LXVIII. 
 § 236. Vocabulary. 
 
 dlviniis, -? ; -Gm, pertaining to the 
 
 gods. 
 quo (Adv.), whither, 
 rudls, -e, uncivilized. 
 argutus, -a, -um, aagacioue* 
 fortiinatus, -a, -um, fortunate, 
 praeetS, -on-is, herald^ crier. 
 pecca-re, to do wrong, to sin. 
 coinplures, -a and -ia, very many, 
 
 quite a number, 
 phalanx, phalang-is (ffr. Ace. pha- 
 
 langa, PL phalangas), phalanx. 
 
 adulatiS, -on-Is, flattery, 
 fortuna, -ae, fortune. 
 natus (Part, of nascdr), a eon, 
 aut — aut, either — or. 
 Druides, -um, Druide. 
 fama, -ae, fame, report, 
 praeditus, -a, um, endowed. 
 esuricDS, -ent-is (Part, of esurtrl) 
 
 hungry, 
 quam (Relative Adv.), aa. 
 una (parte underatoodj ^ 170), to 
 
 getker. 
 
 Homerus, -i, Homer. 
 
 com-mitt-8, -e-re, commis-i, commiss-um, to commit, 
 
 ftd-veni-5j -i-re, adven-i, advent-um, to arrive. 
 
 prae-sum, prae-esse, prae-fui, prae-fiiturus, to preside over, 
 
 di-lig-tS, -e-re, dilex-i, dilect-iim, to choose, to love. 
 
 vide-S, -e-re, vid-i, vis-um, to see. 
 
 vide-o-r, -e-ri, vis-uP Bum, to be seen (hence, to seem, appear), 
 
 cense-8, -e-re, censu-i cens-um, to be of opinion. 
 
 re-peri-3, -i-re, reper-T, rSpert-um, to find. 
 
 insiIi-C, -i-r6, insilu-i, , to leap upon. 
 
 re-vell-S, -e-r§, r6vell-i, revuls-um, to tear off. 
 prae-pon-S, -e-re, praep6su-i, praeposit-iim, to prefer, 
 fall-tS, -e-r6, fefell-I, fala-um, to deceive. 
 occid-S, -e-re, occid-i, occas-um, tofallf die. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 (a) Dignus est qui ametur (^ 234, 2), 
 
 (6) Idoneua eat cui res mandetur 
 . (?234,2), 
 
 (c) Docti5c sum quam qui a te docear 
 
 (§234,3), 
 
 (d) QuSd sciam (g 234, 1, Bern. 2), 
 Qu5d meminerim, 
 
 'e) LegdtUs, fit impel at^m erat, 
 JliitM£n transiit. 
 
 He is xoorthy of being loved {that he 
 
 be loved). 
 He is fit to have the business in^ 
 
 trusted to him {that the business 
 
 be intrusted), 
 I am too learned to be taught by y( u 
 
 {than that I be taught). 
 Aa far as I know. 
 Aa far aa I remember. 
 The lieutenant crossed the river, cu 
 
 had ieen ordered. 
 
RELATIVE PROPOSITIONS. 331 
 
 {/) Alter\ lit coepSrant, se recepe^ The other party ^et^e.l^ed a« {in tJie 
 runt, manner in tohich) ther/' had beguji. 
 
 ( Ut in the sense of as is a Relative, in example (c) equivalent to 
 quSd, and the Subject of impSrdiam irSt; in example (/) equivalent 
 to quo mSdo, and limiting coepirant.) 
 
 {g) NemS est qui putet (J 234, 1), There is no one loTio tMnks. 
 
 NemS e«t quin putet (§ 201, Rem. There is no one who does not think 
 3), {bttt thinks), 
 
 (h) An quisquam est ? ( = NemS est), Is there any onet (stronger than 
 
 num^uls). 
 
 Translate into English. 
 
 1. PuEPOSE, Rule LXXIX., 1. — Britanni Druides li^- 
 bent, qui rebiis^ divinis praesint, Aedui legates RomS.ni'' 
 miserunt qui a.\ixilmm a, s^natii' p&t&rent, Legati missi Srant 
 qui'' nuntiarent oppidum expugnatum ess6.^ Galli 16ctim 
 Eon habebant quo se rScip&rent. Caes3,r fiquitatum praemi 
 sit qui" hostium itinSrS, explordrent, 
 
 2. Result, Rule LXXIX., 2 (and § 234, 1, 2, and 3). 
 — NemS t&ra rfidis est M quhn famS, sS,piintiae tttae non 
 pervenerit, Socrates digntis &v&t qui hh omnibus diMgeretUr, 
 Caiiis non sS,tis idonefis visiis est eui tantiim nSgotiiim man- 
 ddretior. Non sumiis ii quibits nihil veriim ess6' videatii,r. 
 Non is Slim qui tanttim scSliis committam, Maj6r siim qu&m 
 cui" possit fortuna nocerg. Argutior fuit JiigurthS, qu3,m 
 qui Micipsae verbis falleretiir. 
 
 3. Cause, LXXIX., 3. — fortunatS adiilescens, qui tiiae 
 virtutis HSmeriim praecpuSm' inven&rts! Peccaviss6'° mih! 
 videSr qui a te diseess&rhn, Omnes laudabant fortunas meas, 
 gwi" natum tali ingSnio" praeditiim h&berSm, 
 
 4. § 234, 1. — S\int qui censeant una animiim 6t corpfia 
 
 1 § 143. 5 ? 194. 9 2 151 (5). 
 
 2 1 154. " 1 129, Rem, 7, " \ 181. 
 
 » i 151, Rem. Z ' ? 181, Rem, 7. " ? 129, Rem. 7. 
 
 « \ 233, Rem, » \ 142. " { 160, Rem. 4. 
 
332 SYNTAX. 
 
 cicddSrS.' ESptrti sunt complures qui in pliSlangSs In 
 slUrent, 6t scuta ina,nibiis rivellSrent. Nihil est qitSd hSmines 
 ta,ni mis&ros'' f&ci&t quim impigtas 6t scSlQs. An quisquSm 
 est gui libertati servitutSm praeponat f NemS est quln^ Bal- 
 bfim stultum" existiniU. 
 
 5. Rule LXXX. — Ariovistfis dixit se obsides quos ab 
 Aeduis haberei non redditurfim.' Caesar nSgavit* se Hel- 
 vetiis quud postulurent dar6* poss6.' 
 
 Translate into Latin. 
 The Britons sent ambassadors to say (§233, 1) that they 
 would return the prisoners whom they had taken (§ 235, 
 Rem. 1). No one of the soldiers, as far as I know, has 
 left his post. This boy has never, as far as I recollect, deceived 
 me. Is Caius (a) suitable (person) to commit your daughter 
 to ? Kings are not too wise to be conquered by flattery, noi 
 too sagacious to be deceived. Some say {there are who say) 
 that the consul is both (et) a liar and a thief. Some thought 
 that the enemy would not besiege the city. Is there any one 
 who doubts that (§ 201, jRem. ^) God rules the world? Is 
 there any one who thinks that a robber will return the booty 
 which he has taken? The townsmen will send the noblest of 
 the state to sue for (ask) peace. The general is worthy of 
 being loved by all the soldiers. The lieutenant, as was or- 
 dered, sent forward the cavalry to sustain the attack of the 
 enemy till the footmen should arrive (§ 229, 2). 
 
 INTEREOGATIVE PROPOSITIONS. 
 
 § 237. Interrogative Propositions are generally intro- 
 duced by some Interrogative word, and contain a Ques- 
 tion; as, Qu\s vSntt? Who comes? 
 
 > ? 194. » § 201, Rem. 3. » g 181. 
 
 » ? 151 (5). * i 196 Ex. (/). 
 
IKTEEEOGATIVE PROPOSITIONS. 333 
 
 Remarh — Questions may be Real or ihey may be Rhetorical 
 A Real Question expects an answer. A Rhetorinal Question does 
 not expect an Answer, but, under the guise of a Question, contains 
 an Assertion. Thus, Have you seen thai famous general f is a Real 
 Question. What is baser than to betray one's country? is a Rhetori- 
 cal Question, expecting no Answer, but conveying the Assertion 
 that Nothing is baser than^o betray one's country. 
 
 §238. Questions are divided into — 
 
 I. The Direct Question. 
 (a) Simple. 
 
 (V) Double or Alternative. 
 II. The Indirect Question. 
 
 I. § 239. EuLE LXXXI.— The Direct Eimple Ques- 
 tion is usually introduced by an Interrogative word, and, 
 as a rule, takes the Indicative; as, QvUs hoofaMf Who 
 did this ? 
 
 Eeview the use of the Interrogative Particles -n&, nonnS, and n&m, 
 § 81, 2, 3, and 4. 
 For Interrogative words, see ?? 88, 91. 
 
 Remark — Sometimes no Interrogative word is used. An 
 Affirmative Question then often expects a Negative Answer ; a 
 Negative Question, an Affirmative Answer. The omission is 
 common in Rhetorical Questions (especially with the Negative) 
 expressing /Surprise, Irony, Impatience, etc. ; as, Pdtert tud condli& 
 Don sentis? Do you not see (you must surely see) that your 
 designs are laid bare? 
 
 § 240. Rule LXXXII.— The Direot Simple Question 
 takes the Subjunctive when (1) Doubt or Deliberation is 
 to be indicated, or (2) a Negative Answer is implied; as, 
 
 (1) QuU dg&mf What am I to do? 
 
 (2) Quls hoc d-abliSt? Who would doubt this ? {Rhe- 
 tor;ical Qriesiion) = NemS hoo dUbUSt, No one woild 
 doubt it. 
 
334 SYNTAX. 
 
 § 241. Rule LXXXIII.— The Blred Double Ques- 
 tion takes the same ]\Iood as the Simple Question, and is 
 introduced by the Particles utrum or -nS in the First 
 clause, followed by &n (annS) or -nS in the Second; as, 
 VosnS Lucium Ddmttmm, &a vos Lucius DSmttiUs desS- 
 rutt? Have you deserted Lucius Domitius, or has Lu- 
 cius Domitius deserted you? 
 
 Sometimes the Interrogative Particles are omitted in the first 
 clause. Usage is fairly presented thus : 
 
 UlrUm dn 
 
 -nS dn 
 
 (In 
 
 ( -m^: generally in Indirect Questions.) 
 
 The consideration of other combinations belongs to more elaborate 
 grammars. 
 
 II. § 242. EuLE LXXXIV.— The Indired Question 
 is the same in form as the Direct, except that it always 
 takes its Verb in the Subjunctive ; e. g. 
 
 Quid tLgisf What is it that you are doing? 
 
 QuaerO quid Agasf I ask what it is that you are 
 doing ? 
 
 Observe that iu the Indirect Question — 
 
 1. N&m loses its peculiar force and means whether; 
 
 2. Si is used in the sense of whether after expressions 
 of Endeavor and Expectation; as, Nonnunqu&m interdiil, 
 saepius nodu, si perrumpSrS possent, condtl sunt, some- 
 times in the day-time, (but) oftener at night, they endeav- 
 ored (to see) whether they could break through. 
 
 3. The combinations of Particles in Indirect Double 
 Questions are the same as in Direct Double Questions 
 (see §241, Jl®"); e. g. I ask whether it is true or false 
 may be expressed? 
 
INTERROGATIVE PROPOSITIONS. 335 
 
 (1) QuaerS utrlim verfim Hn f'alstim sit. 
 
 (2) QuaerS verum-?i2 &n falsiim sit. 
 
 (3) QuaerD veriim &n falsiim sit. 
 
 (4) QuaerS verum falsfim-ng sit. 
 
 4. 0?' not is generally necnS (in Direct Question gen- 
 erally annon) ; as, Is-nS est qu&n quaerS, annon ? Is that 
 the man I'm looking for or notf Nondttni de Eum&nS 
 stdtuSr&t AntlgdnUs, conservarSt eUm necnS, Antigonus 
 had not yet determined in the case of Eumenes whether 
 he should save him or not. 
 
 5. The early writers often use the Indicative in the 
 Indirect Question, especially after die miM, responde, 18- 
 guSrS, and other conversational phrases. 
 
 Bemark 1. — The forms of the Interrogative quis and qui com- 
 bine with nesaiS and are equivalent to an Indefinite Pronoun ; 
 nesoio qwts, nescio quid — &liquis, dliquld = somebody or other (I 
 don't know who), something or other. Used as Indefinites, they 
 do not, of course, require the Subjunctive ; as, Neaeio quls ex me 
 quaesivit,' somebody or other inquired of me. In the same way we 
 find the Indicative after nesciS quomddd = I know not how, mirUm 
 quantum [qu&m)— it is wonderful how much [how) = wonderfully, 
 and other like indefinite expressions. 
 
 Bemark Z. — An often introduces the second clause of a Double 
 Question, the first clause being understood ; as, OHjUm p&oHs est 
 Aoc .*" a,nM61iboei? Whose flock is this ? (Is it somebody else's) 
 or is it that of Meliboeus f 
 
 For Questions in Or&iiS Obdqud,, see J 245, 3 sq.. 
 
 EXEECISE LXIX. 
 § 243. Vocabulary. 
 
 qu5? whither f Delphi, -Brum, Delphi {a city of 
 permnltiim (Adv.), very much. Greece). 
 
 c5nsultuni, -i, » iking determined ; patina, -ae, dieh. 
 
 Abl. on vurpoBC. MSrini, -oriim, the Morini. 
 
336 SYNTAX. 
 
 incertiiS; -a, -um, uncertain. elti-re, to be thirsty, 
 
 vftreiis, -5, -tim, of glaeit. ApollS, -in-is, Apollo, 
 
 ooneaviia, -a, -um, hollow. ab Apolline peterS, to inquire of 
 
 Apnllo. 
 manus ooncava, the hollow of the infans, -ant-is, infant. 
 
 hand. providentia, -ae, providence, 
 
 iinde ? whence ? praestaatia, -ae, excellence. 
 
 cur? lohy? catiniis or -um, -I, iowl. 
 
 deorsum (Adv.), down-hill. fictilis, -e, earthen. 
 
 interroga-re, to aak. casus, -us, chance. 
 
 ab-do, -e-re, abdid-i, abdit-um, to run for concealment. 
 
 af-fer-o, aflfer-re, attul-i, allat-um, to bring forward. 
 
 causam afferre, to bring forward a reason, to explain. 
 
 irasc-5-r, -i, irat-us sum, to be angry, 
 
 iratus, -a, -um (as an Adjective), angry. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quid (J 135 (e) Rem. j^) interest? What difference does it make f 
 Nihil (? 135 (e) Rem. 4) refert or 
 
 interest. It makes no difference. 
 
 Ubf gentium (^134)? Where in the world? {In what place 
 
 of the nations?) 
 NesciS quis cldmavit (§ 242, Rem. Somebody or other (I don't know wbo) 
 i), shouted. 
 
 Translate into English, 
 
 Quisn3,m in horto ambttlSt? Nescio quts in horto amSft- 
 lit. PuSr dicSrS non pStuit quo Ifitrones sese abdldissent, 
 SaepS non utilg"^ est scirS'' quid ftlturiim M, Qualis' sli 
 Snimiis, ipsS Sinimus nescit. Permultiim interest utriim casu 
 dn consults fl&t injuriS,. Caii nSpos-nS &, a,n f iliiis ? In- 
 certum est Caii n6pos-nS swn, 2,n f iliiis. Si sitis,' nihil in- 
 terest utriim &quam b'ibds &a viniim, nSc refert utrtbm sit 
 aureiim ' poctiliim,* &n vitreum, 3,n m^niis conca,vS,. Nonng 
 cSnis liipo* similis est? PuSr patr6m interrOgavit nonnS 
 c3,nes liipis similes essent, PuSr interrSgatiis est Utr'Hm 
 
 ' ? 128, B. 3 § 206. 5 2 144, iJem. 3. 
 
 ' 1 180. * § 130, 1. 
 
INTERROGATIVE PROPOSITIONS. 337 
 
 plui'Ls' patrgm tin matrgm fikh-U. Numquis" infantibiis' 
 irascittir ? InterrCgftt Caius num quis infantibiis IrascaMr. 
 Quo itis, puSri '? In hortiim ? Ariovisto mlriim visQm est 
 quid in ejfls Gallia Caesari* nggotii" essH. Mentiri" h6nest- 
 um-nS sit factu' an turpg, nemS dubit^t. TJnd& legati venis- 
 scnt rex nunquim r6p6rirg p6tuit. An qnisquam diibitat 
 cusu-?ie a,n Dei providentia mundiis r^gatiir? DiJm in his 
 locis Caesar uavitim paraudariim" causa mSrabatur, ex mag- 
 na parts Moriuoriim Sd eum legati venerunt, qui causas 
 afferrent'ciir ci vitas populo Romano bellttm intthlUsU. Nes- 
 ciS quis in horto amblildbat. 
 
 Translaie hito Latin. 
 
 Does any man doubt concerning the excellence of virtue ? 
 The poet asks whether any one dotibts concerning the excel- 
 lence of virtue. Can you explain, my son, why water al- 
 ways _/Zoms down hill? The king sent messengers to Delphi 
 (§ 154) to inquire (§ 233, 1) of Apollo whether he should 
 give his daughter in marriage to Clodius or Glaucus. What 
 difference does it make to a hungry man whether he eats his 
 food out of a golden dish or an earthen bowl ? It makes no 
 difference to the dead whether the king is a wise man or a 
 fool. It is uncertain whether the girl thinks more of (§ 137) 
 her father or mother. It is uncertain whether Balbus values 
 life or honor most (plUrls). It seems wonderful to me what 
 business either you or your father has (§ 146) in my garden. 
 Did Caius kill his brother by chance, or on purpose ? I 
 have not been able to find out whether the injury was done 
 by chance or on purpose. No one knows where in the world 
 Glaucus is wandering. 
 
 '■ i 137. 
 
 * g 146. 
 
 '§186, B. 
 
 >?89. 
 
 5 § 134. 
 
 » § 184. 
 
 »?142. 
 
 ° i 180. 
 
 » 1 233, 1. 
 
 29 
 
 
 
338 
 
 SYNTAX. 
 
 OEATl5 OBLIQUA. 
 § 244. In narrating the words or opinions of another 
 the writer may give either — 
 
 (a) The exact words of the original speaker or writer ; 
 as, Ariovistiis respondtt : " Transii Rhenium non mea 
 spontS." Ariovistus replied: "I crossed the Rhine not 
 of my own accord." 
 
 This is called Oratiu Redd or Direct Discourse; ; 
 
 or he may give — 
 
 (6) The substance of what was said or written, but not 
 the exact words ; as, Ariovistus responds transissfi Rhenfim 
 sese non sua spontfi, Ariovistus replied that he had crossed 
 the Rhine not of his own accord. 
 
 This is called Ordtid Obliqud or Indirect Discourse, and 
 always depends on some Verb of Saying or Thinking ex- 
 pressed or implied. 
 
 § 245. In changing the OratiS Rectd, to the OrdtiS Ob- 
 ligud, the following rules are to be observed : 
 
 1. (a) Principal Clauses, which are in the Indicative in 
 OratiS Recta, are changed to the Infinitive (vnth Sulked 
 Accusative) in OrdtiS Obllqu&. 
 
 (b) All Dependent Clauses (§ 187, 3) in OrdiiS Redd, 
 take the Subjunctive in Oi'diiS Obtiqud; as, 
 
 Oralis Recta. 
 " Obsides quos ab Aeduis hdbeS," 
 inquit ArioTistuB, " non reddHm." 
 
 drain OiBqud. 
 Ariovistus respondit ee obsides 
 quos ab Aeduis haberet non red- 
 dUurum esse. 
 
 CaesSr respondit ee id quSd in 
 Nerviis fecieaet /actuvGm essS, 
 
 " Id f&ciam," inquit Caesar, I 
 " quBd in Nervlis feci." 
 
 S&° Observe (1) that the Verbs of the Principal Clauses are 
 chauged to the Infinitive with the Subject- Accusative — reddSm becomes 
 se reddUurUm esfS and fdcidm becomes se facturilm essi; and (2) that 
 the Verbs of the Dependent Clauses are changed to the Subjunctive — 
 
. ORATIO OCLlQUl. 
 
 339 
 
 ({uos . . . lulbei becomes quos . . . hdberSt; gaSd feci becomes gudd 
 feei&iit. The Subject of the Principal Ch\use is regularly expressed in 
 OrcUiS Obliqud (e. g. se in both examples), though formally lacking in 
 Oralis Redd. 
 
 Bemarh 1. — Sometimes Eelative Clauses are put in the Accu- 
 sative and Infinitive in OraMS ObllquH. This occurs when the 
 Eelative = Wis or n&m is, in which case the Clause has the force 
 of a Principal Clause and is Dependent only in form ; as, Unfim- 
 quemqu6 nostrilm censent phI16s6phi mundi ess6 partSm, ex qim 
 [ = tt ex eo) illiid natura c6ns6qui, etc., Philosophers maintain 
 that each one of us is a part of the universe and that it naturally 
 follows /ro»i this, etc. 
 
 The same construction occurs occasionally in other Dependent 
 Clauses, and is the regular one after a Comparative with quIXm; 
 as, AdMt PompeiUs se priUs ocelsUm m a Clodio qu3,m me vi6la- 
 tiim iri, Pompey adds that he will be slain by Olodius before I 
 shall be hurt (see also J 201, Sem. 1,/). 
 
 Remark Z. — The Indicative is found in such Dependent Clauses 
 in OrdtiS ObliquS, as convey an explanation of the narrator or em- 
 phasize a fact (see § 235, Pern. S) ; also in mere circumlocu- 
 tions. 
 
 2. An Imperative in OrdtiS Redd becomes a Sub- 
 junctive in OratiS ObllquH; as, 
 
 OrdtiS Recta. 
 Praesta qudd recepieti. 
 Perform what you have under- 
 taken. 
 
 drdtio ObRquH. 
 
 Omnes clamant praeataret C[u5d 
 recepisset. i 
 
 They all cry out that he should 
 perform what he had undertaken. 
 
 3. Interrogative Sentences containing Direct Real 
 Questions in OrdtiS ReatH become Indirect in OrdtiS 
 Obllqud, and take the Subjunctive (§242); as, 
 
 OrdtiS Reetd. 
 Qind de praeda faciendum cense- 
 tis ? What do you think ought to be 
 done in regard to tl: e booty ? (Pres. 
 Indic). 
 
 OrdtiS ObHqud. 
 ^Litteras ad sSnatum misit, quid 
 de praeda faciendum censerent. He 
 ♦Tote to the senate (asking) what 
 they thought ought to be done in re- 
 gard to the booty. (Imperf. Subj.) 
 
340 SYNTAX. 
 
 Remark 1- -Ehetorical Questions (? 237, Rem.) that arc in the 
 Indicative in OrdtiS Rectd are changed into the Accuaative with 
 the Infinitive in Urafio ObllquS, if the Subject is of the First or 
 Third Person; into the Subjunctive, if the Subject is of the SeC' 
 ond Person; e. g., 
 
 Si vfitSrls contiimeliae obllvisci vellSt, nUm Stiam riScentiiim 
 injuriariim m6m6 riJim depou6r6 jsossg ? (Si — yii\^,niimpossiim? — 
 Subject Ut Pers.). 
 
 Quid ess& turpiUs quam auctOrfi hoste de summis riibtis ciipCrS 
 consilium? [Quid esiturpiUsf = Nihil est turpiUs — Svibj.SdPej's.). 
 
 Quid tandfim virerentUr aut ciir de sua virtute desperdrent f 
 ( Quid vh-eminl aut car desperaftsf Subjunctive, because the Sub- 
 ject is in the Sd Person in Ordtio Rectd). 
 
 Remark 2. — Subjunctive Rhetorical Questions in Oratio Rectd 
 (J 240) remain as a rule in the Subjunctive in Ordtio OMlqud. 
 Questions of Deliberation invariably retain the Subjunctive. 
 
 4. In Conditional Sentences the following changes 
 occur : 
 
 (a) The Protasis (Supposition), being a Dependent 
 Clause, is changed into the Subjunetive. 
 
 (b) The Apodosis (Conclusion), being the Main Clause, 
 is changed into the Accusative with the Infinitive. 
 
 B®° Of course, if the Conclusion is an Imperative, it becomes Sub- 
 junctive in O. O. {§ 245, 2}. 
 
 (1) In the Simple Condition (§206) the tenses of the 
 Infinitive are Present, Past, or Future, according as the 
 tense of the Apodosis is Present, Past, or Future in 
 OrdtiB Rectd. 
 
 The tense of the Protasis in the Subjunctive depends 
 upon the tense of the leading Verb of Saying, etc. 
 
 (1) Simple Condition: O. R. Si hoc diets, erras, If you 
 say this, you are mistaken. 
 
 (Present) 0. O. Dicit te si hoc dicas, errdr&. 
 (Past) O. O. Dixit te si hoc dicSres, errarS. 
 
OEATIO OBLIQUA. 341 
 
 (2) lu the Condition of Possibility (§ 207), the Present 
 and Perf. Subjunctive of the Apoilosis are changed to 
 the Future Infinitive (or the periphrase fSrS Ht, etc.). 
 
 •If the leading Verb of Saying be a Principal Tense, 
 the tenses in the Protasis remain unchanged ; if it be a 
 Historioal Tense, the Present and Perfect Subjunctive may 
 be changed respectively to the Imperfect and Pluperfect. 
 
 (2) Condition of Possibility : O. R. Si lio'c dieas, erres, If 
 you were to say this, you would be mistaken. 
 
 (Present) O. O. Dicit te si hoc dicds errdtUriim ess&. 
 (Past) O. O. Dixit te si hoc d'lceres; errdturUm essS. 
 
 (3) In the Condition of Unreality (§ 208), the Imper- 
 fect and Pluperfect Subjunctive' of the Apodosis, when 
 active, are changed respectively into the Periphrastic In- 
 finitives -riis ess^, -rits fiiissS; when Passive, they are 
 expressed respectively by the periphrases fiUurfcm essS M, 
 fUuriim f&issS M, with the Imperfect Subjunctive (and 
 this periphrase must be used in the Active if the Verb in 
 the Apodosis has no -r-iis form). 
 
 The tenses in the Protasis remain unchanged no mat- 
 ter what the time of the leading Verb. 
 Thus: 
 
 (3) Condition of Unreality : 0. E. Si hoc dW&res, errares, 
 If you said this, you would be mistaken. 
 
 5. O. Dicit (dixit) te si hoc dieh-es, erraiuriim ess^ 
 
 O. R. Si hoc dixisses, errdsses, If you had said this, you 
 would have been mistaken. 
 
 O. O. Dicit (dixit) te si hoc dixisses, errdturibm f^issi. 
 
 When the Apodosis of the Past Condition of Unreality 
 is in the Indicative (§ 208, Rems. ^ and 3) in OraiiS Rectd,, 
 it is generally changed into the Perfect Infinitive in Ord- 
 
 29 » 
 
342 SYNTAX. 
 
 US Obliqud. Thus, in the two examples given under 
 § 208, Remark S: 
 
 (1) O. R. Praeclare vlc&rdviits, nM ftigientSm LSplf- 
 dtts rScepissgt Antonitim. 
 
 O. O. Dixerunt se- praeclare vioissS, nM filgientem 
 LSpIdus r6cepiss6t Antonitim. 
 
 (2) O. R. CaecInS civGurnvSniebaMr ni primS l6gio se 
 opp6suiss6l. 
 
 0. O. Dixerunt Caecinam ch^oumventUm essS ni primX 
 Ifigio se oppSsuissSt. 
 
 5. Pronouns in Oratio ObliquI. 
 
 Pronouns of the First and Second Persons in Orai'S 
 Jtecid are regularly changed to Pronouns of the Third 
 Person in OratiS Obliqud. Thus : 
 
 (a) Personal: IgS [nos] is changed to forms of the Reflexiva 
 se (sometimes ipsi). 
 til is changed to forms of ilti (?a). 
 (6) Possessive : meils [nosth-] is changed to forms of suits (some- 
 times Gen. of ips^). 
 tuUs {vesUr) is changed to forms of suHs (some- 
 times Gen. of is). 
 (0) Bemonstraiioe: hto)^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^ ^^ .^^ (^^_ 
 tstii) 
 So nunc becomes tUm. 
 [d) Intensive ipsi is retained as an emphatic Reflexive (espe- 
 cially in Contracts). 
 
 6. 43rENERAL OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 1. The tenses of the Infinitive and Subjunctive follow 
 tlie rules already given. (See §§ 190 sq., 195 sq.) In or- 
 dinary Historical Narrative the leading Verb of Saying 
 is Past, and the tenses of the dependent Subjunctive are 
 coasequeutly the Imperfect and Pluperfect. But often 
 for liveliness of narration the Present and Perfect Sub- 
 
5eati6 obliqua. 343 
 
 junctivo are found even after a leading Historical Tense. 
 In long passages we sometimes find the sequence changed 
 from Past (Impei-f. and Plup. Subjunctive) to Present 
 (Present and Perf Subj.) even in the same speech. (For 
 examples, see Caesar, M. G., I., chs. xiv. and xxxi.) 
 
 2. OrdtiS Bectd is commonly introduced by the proper 
 tense of inqudm, inserted after one or more words of the 
 quotation. If the Subject of inqu&m is expressed, it 
 generally follows the Verb. (See examples, §245, IJ) 
 Sometimes Ut ait, ict censSt, etc., are used like inqutt. 
 OrdtiS Obllqud is introduced by the proper tense of 
 diM, dloS, censed, or any Verb of Saying or Thinking. 
 
 EXERCISE LXX. 
 Vocabulary. 
 
 eiipera-re, to overcome. plus (Adv.) posse, to he more power- 
 
 invictus, -a, -fim, invincible. fill. (See § 150, Remarh S.) 
 
 suspica-ri, to suspect. stipendiarius, -a, -um, tributary. 
 
 Spulentus, -a, -um, powerful. propterea quod, for the reason that 
 
 because. 
 
 sub-e5, -i-rS, subi-i, subit-um (§ 111, 9), to go under. 
 izitelI€g-5, -e-rS, intellex-i, intellect-fim, to find out, to know. 
 
 Translaie into English. 
 
 Ariovistiis respondit, 'Aeduos, quSni&m belli fortiin&m 
 tentassent*^ 6t armis sflpSrati essent, stipendiaries' ess6 
 factos : neminSm seciim sinS sua pernicie contendissS : cttm 
 Caes&r vellSt," congrMSretUr:* intellecturttm ^ quid invicti 
 Germani, qui intgr annos quattuordScim tectum non subiis- 
 
 ■ § 198 (6). , f §220, Bern. S. * ? 245, 2. 
 
 ' i 13?, B. I ? 245, 1 (6). 5 ^ 245, 1 (a), 
 
 * For tenldvissent. 
 
344 SYNTAX. 
 
 eent, virtutS (fJlcSrS) possent." DivitiSciia dixit 'pejtls' 
 victoribus Sequanis* <iuS.m Aeduis victis accidissg,* propi&rea 
 gu6d Ariovistiis in eorflm f inibfls conaedissSl, tertianiqufi par- 
 tem ftgri Sequftui, qui essSt optimfls totiiis Galliae,^ occiXpa- 
 vissSL' Consul pollicitus est ' se, postqu&m rex tinSm 16- 
 quendl fecissit," legates auditurttm essg.' Impgrator respon- 
 dit ' se, etsl nondum principiim consili3, eognoviss&t,' t&,m6a, 
 conjuration&n fiSri * suspicari.' Phil6s(5phtis respondit ' n6- 
 gari' lion possfi quin hSmines mortales essent.'* Rex dixit, 
 ' quV CpulentiOr essH, Uiamsi injuriam accipSret,' t&mSn, 
 quiS, plus _posse<,' fiicfirS' videri.' 
 
 Translate into Lqiin. 
 Caesar said {n&gdvU) that he could not give the Helvetii 
 a way through the province, because he feared that (§ 200, 
 Rem. 6) they would do injury to his allies. The scouts an- 
 nounced to Caesar that the cavalry which he had sent for- 
 ward (§ 245, 1, (6)) had been routed by the enemy; that the 
 skirmishers had not been able to cross the river ; that the 
 forces which the Germans had collected would arrive in 
 three days. Word was brought that the footmen, the flight 
 of the horsemen having been seen, had retreated to the 
 mountain. 
 
 (Change the examples in the Latin exercise from OrdiiS 
 Obliqud to OraMS Hecid.') 
 
 1 5 242. 
 
 ' ? 128, item. 6. 
 
 ' ? 142. 
 
 ♦§245,l(o). 
 
 ' ? 134. 
 
 «? 245, 1(6). 
 
 ' ? 181. 
 
 ' ^201, Bern. 2. 
 
 9 J 129, Bern. 3. 
 
 * Depends on se snsplcm'i. 
 
APPEN"DIOES. 
 
 
 
 PAKADIGM. 
 
 Noin. 
 
 Penelope, 
 
 Aeneas, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Penelopes, 
 
 Aeneae, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Penelopae, 
 
 Aeneae, 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Penelopen, 
 
 Aeneilm or -an. 
 
 Voo. 
 
 Penelope, 
 
 Aenea, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Penelopa. 
 
 Aeneil. 
 
 APPENDIX I. 
 
 GREEK NOUNS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 §246. 1. Njuns of this Declension transferred from 
 the Greek end in e (fem.); as and es (masc.). 
 
 Anchlses, 
 
 Anchlsae, 
 
 Anchlsae, 
 
 Anchisen, 
 
 Anchise or 
 
 Anchis3. 
 
 2. Nouns in & transferred from the Greek sometimes have Hn 
 in the Accusative. 
 
 3. Those Greelj Nouns which have a Plural are declined in 
 that number, like mensS,. 
 
 4. The Genitive Plural of Patronymics in es, and of some 
 compounds in -'g^nO, and -cQlci, has -um instead of -arUm. 
 
 APPENDIX II. 
 
 GREEK NOUNS OE THE SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 § 247. 1. Greek Nouns of the Second Declension end 
 in )is (masc. and fem.), and 5n (neut.), commonly changed 
 in Latin into ■& and '0/m. 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Nom 
 
 Delos, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dell, 
 
 Dat. 
 
 Delo, 
 
 Aoo. 
 
 Delon, 
 
 Voo. 
 
 Delg, 
 
 Abl. 
 
 Delo. 
 
 AndrSggos, 
 Androgeo or -I, 
 Androgeo, [-on&, 
 Androgeo or -on, or 
 Androgeos, 
 Androgeo. 
 
 BarbitSn, a lyre. 
 
 Singular. 
 barbiton, 
 barbitl, 
 barbito, 
 barbiton, 
 barbiton, 
 barbito ; 
 
 Plwral. 
 barbit&, 
 barbiton, 
 barbitis, 
 barbito, 
 barbitS, 
 barbitis. 
 345 
 
346 
 
 APPENDICES III. AND IV. 
 
 2. The Plural of Greek Nouns in ds is declined like the Plu- 
 ral of ddmlniU, except that they sometimes have -on instead of 
 -orum in the Genitive. 
 
 3. Greek Proper names in -em are declined like ddmin&s, ex- 
 cept that they have the Vocative in -eu. They sometimes retain 
 the Greek forms in the other cases, viz. Genitive -e6s. Dative -fH 
 (contracted -ex), Accusative -e&, and are of the Third Declension. 
 
 4. Pll&ge is found aa the Accusative Plural of pM&g&s. 
 
 APPENDIX III. 
 
 GREEK NOUNS OP THE THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 § 248. The following paradigms show the most usual 
 forms of Greek Nouns of the Third Declension: 
 
 Nom, 
 
 Gen. 
 
 Dal. 
 
 Ace. 
 
 Voa. 
 
 Abl. 
 
 s. 
 
 Lamp&s, 
 
 p. 
 
 -idea, 
 
 s. 
 
 HeroB, 
 
 p. 
 
 .65a, 
 
 
 ChSlys, 
 
 
 Foisia, 
 
 
 AchiUis, 
 
 
 Orpheus, 
 
 ASr, 
 
 SldS, 
 
 f-5dts, 1 
 \ -idos, J 
 
 •Sdis, 
 -&dos, 
 
 -adSm, 
 
 -oum, 
 
 f -yis, 
 I -yos, 
 [-Is, -i5s, 
 I -eos, 
 [ -IS, -ei, -: 
 I -eos, 
 •e5s, 
 -SriS) 
 
 -5dl, 
 -Sdltbiis, 
 -5!, 
 -oibua, 
 
 -yi, 
 -I, 
 
 -e-ri, 
 
 -adSm, 
 ■ -ada, 
 
 -ades, 
 
 -adaS) 
 
 -oSm, 
 
 -oa, 
 
 -oes, 
 
 -oas, 
 l-ym, 
 
 -yn, 
 
 -im, 
 
 -in, 
 
 -em, 
 
 -eS., -en 
 
 -ea, 
 
 -Sra, 
 
 -Sb, 
 
 -adS. 
 
 -adSs, 
 
 -adibus. 
 
 -OS, 
 
 -51. 
 
 -65s, 
 
 -6ibQs. 
 
 -f, 
 
 -ye or -5. 
 
 -J, 
 
 -i. 
 
 -es, -e, 
 
 -e or -I. 
 
 -eu. 
 
 See g 247, 3 
 
 -8r, 
 
 -5rS. 
 
 §249. APPENDIX IV. 
 
 PERSONAL ENDINGS. 
 
 Singtilar. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Penan. 
 
 Ist. 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 1st. 
 
 2d. 
 
 3d. 
 
 Aclixe. 
 
 -m, 
 
 -s, 
 Iniic. Per/. -stT, 
 
 -t. 
 
 -muB, 
 
 -tis, 
 IndK. Perf. 
 
 -StiB, 
 
 -nt. 
 Indie. Perf. 
 -runt or -rS. 
 
 PoMfoe. 
 
 -r. 
 
 -ris or -rS, 
 
 -trur. 
 
 -miir. 
 
 -mini. 
 
 -ntar. 
 
PERSONAL ENDINGS. 347 
 
 XoTE I. — As we have seen (p. 22), the Personal Endings are 
 Pronominal forms, the stems of which are respectively -me or 
 -mi (of. »ia, mlh^ ; -tve or -te or -ti (cf. tu, te, Hbt) ; -to or -U (cf. 
 w-W\ — originally ma, tva, ta. 
 
 1. ACTIVE. 
 
 (a) The ending of the 1st Pers. Sing, is -m, shortened from 
 original -me or -mi, which is dropped in the following tenses of 
 the Indicative : Present, Perfect Future (only in First and Sec- 
 ond Conjugations), and Future-Perfect, where the ending is -o. 
 
 Memark. — The -m is preserved in the 1st Pers. Sing. Present of two* 
 Verbs : sS,m (and its compounds) and in inqu&m. Cf. Sanskr. as-mi/ 
 Greek (Dor.) kii-jil (ka-jil). In addition to the First and Second Con- 
 jugations, -m Ls dropped in the Future of a few stems in -i (e. g. ibi). 
 
 In the Present Indicative of the First Conjugation the -i represents 
 a blending of -m with the characteristic ; as, Wma-m, 3,mS. In the other 
 Vowel Conjugations the characteristic is preserved; as, mSne-S, audirS. 
 
 (b) The ending of the 2d Pers. Sing, is -s, shortened from 
 original -si (si weakened from -ti; as, aii (Attic) from rii (Doric) ; 
 cf. Latin ta) ; in Sanskr. -d; e. g. bhara-si (fer-s) ; in Greek -m 
 (ka-at) and g {m--&?i-g). 
 
 (o) The ending of the 3d Pers. Sing, is -t, shortened from 
 original -ti (-te). Cf. Sanskr. -ti in a,s-ti; Greek -n in ka-H. 
 
 (d) The ending of the 1st Pers. Plural is -miis (original ma + 
 ei = I and thou = we). Cf. Sanskr. -m,asi and -mas; e. g. bhar- 
 a^mas (ier-1-mits) ; Greek (Dor.) /isg {fkp-o-/isg). 
 
 (e) The ending of the 2d Pers. Plur. is -Us [ti) +si = thou 
 and thou = ye). Cf. Sanskr. -tha, e. g. bhar-a-iAa [fei-tts); 
 Greek re (fip-e-re). 
 
 (/) The ending of the 3d Pers. Plur. is -nt, shortened from 
 original -nti [an (old demonstr. root) + ti = he and he = they). 
 Cf. Sanskr. -nti, e. g. hhax-a.-nti (f6r-u-n<) ; Gieek--vTi {(plp-o-vn). 
 
 2. ENDINGS OF THE PERFECT INDICATIVE, 
 (a) The apparent ending -i belongs really to the stem. 
 (6) In the endings of the 2d Pers. Sing, and Plur., -s-U and 
 -s-Us the -« is probably to be traced to es-i^ (cf. the ending of 
 
348 APPENDIX IV. 
 
 the 3d Pers. Plur. -runt, which clearly arises from sunt) ; the -ti 
 in the Sing , is the earlier pronominal form, weakened into -»i 
 (s) in the other tenses; the -its in the Plural is regular. 
 
 (c) For ending -runt, see above (6). Instead of this, the end- 
 ing -r2 is common in the poets (especially the earlier jjoets) and 
 in poetical prose-writers, but rare in best prose. 
 
 The e before -runt and -rg i.s sometimes shortened in the poets. 
 
 Note II. — ^The Latin Passive is originally and in reality a 
 Reflexive. Its distinctive sign is r, which arises from « (the 
 Reflexive Pronoun se, which originally was not confined to the 
 Third Person). 
 
 1. PASSIVE. 
 
 (a) In the 1st Person Sing, the ending is -r. It is added di- 
 rectly to -0 in such tenses as have that ending; rig-o, rtg-6-r; 
 or it substitutes -m in such tenses as retain the regular ending ; 
 rig-e-bA-m, rig-e-bd-r. 
 
 (b) In the 2d Person Sing, the ending is -rU (-rg)/ rtg-t-'rl-a 
 (arising from rig-i-si-se, rig-i-si-a, reg-e-ri-s, the connecting vowel 
 i changing into e, and s between two vowels becoming r). The 
 si is the original pronominal form seen in the Active, and the 
 final -s is the Reflexive se. 
 
 (c) In the 3d Person Sing, the ending is -tUr; rSg-t-t, rtg-l-tiir 
 (the -t is same as in the Active, u connecting vowel, -r repre- 
 senting Reflexive -s («e)). 
 
 {d) In the 1st Pers. Plural the ending is -mUr, the -s of the Active 
 ending being dropped and substituted by Reflexive -r (for si). 
 
 (e) In the 2d Person Plural the ending is -mini, which is re- 
 garded as the Plural (Masc.) Passive Participle to which forms 
 of essi are to be supplied ; r'&g-i.-m'lni, sc. estis (cf. Greek reru/i- 
 fimioi da'i) ; rSg-a-mim, sc. sitis. 
 
 (/) In the 3d Person Plur. the ending is -ntur, the nt as seen 
 ill the Active,, M the connecting vowel, -r the Reflexive (se). 
 
 Of course these endings belong only to tenses for incomplete 
 action. 
 
 2. IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Note III. — (a) The endings of the Present Imperative are 
 shortened forms of those of the Present Indicative. 
 
 In the Consonant Conjugation, -s of the 2d Person (Sing, and 
 
PECULIARITIES OF TENSE-POEMATION. 34S 
 
 Plur.) is dropped and the vowel -i goes into -2/ rSg-i-s, rtg-S; 
 rSg-l-tis, rtgA-U. So in the Passive Sing.; r^g-S-Hs, rig-i-rt. 
 
 In the Vowel Conjugations, the -a is simply dropped in the 
 Sing., and the Imperative is identical with the Present .stem; 
 dma-s, &ma; but -in the Plural, drnd-Us, dmd-tS. 
 
 Remark. — Four Verbs in the Consonant Conjugation drop the end- 
 ing -S; (Rci, die; dud, due; faciS, fOc; firS, f&r. 
 
 (6) In the Future Imperative Active the ancient ending in 2d 
 and 3d Person Sing, was -od. This -d is a softening of the orig- 
 inal -t, but was very early dropped, leaving simply -o (adding to 
 the Present Indicative forms, 3d Pers. Sing, and Plural) ; rig-l-t, 
 rigA-t-o, rig-u-nt, r&g-u-nt-o ("The use of this form {i-o) for the 
 8d Pers. Sing, was probably due to -t being a characteristic of 
 the Second Personal Pronoun." — Eoby). 
 
 In the 2d Person Plural of the Active, the ending -to-U is 
 simply a doubling of the pronominal form. 
 
 (c) In the Present Imperative Passive the ending for the 2d 
 Person is -rf, representing the Reflexive se. 
 
 The ending of the 2d Pers. Plur. is the same as that of the 
 Indicative. 
 
 In the Future Imperative Passive the -d of the ancient ending 
 -od is substituted by -r (Reflexive se) ; rig-l-t-o(d), rlg-i-t-Sr; rtg- 
 u-nt-o[d), rig-u-nt-dr. 
 
 [d) The 2d and 3d Pers. Sing. Imperative of Deponent Verbs 
 sometimes ends in -minS (cf. Note II., e) in early writers, but 
 this is rare. So in early inscriptions and in early writers we 
 find the Active (Future) Imperative forms used in Deponents; 
 arbUrdto instead of arbttratdr. 
 
 m 
 
 APPENDIX V. 
 
 PECULIAKITIBS OF TENSB-EORMATION. 
 
 Tenses formed on the Present^stem. 
 
 1 250. 1. The tense-sign of the Indicative Future in Verbs of 
 the Fourth Conjugation (-? stems) seems anciently to have been 
 -b, as in a and e stems ; as, vestl-b-o, sol-b-o, instead of vesti&m, 
 seidm. The same contraction also occurs in the Imperfect ; aSj 
 vesfl-b&m. The forms Ib&m and ibo of eo are still retained. 
 
 30 
 
350 APPENDIX vr. 
 
 2. The endings -tm, -Is, etc., in the Subjunctive Present 
 (mood-sign -t) are sometimes found in the earlier writers and 
 in the poets ; as, Mim, idls, MU, idimUs, etc., for idSm, etc. The 
 same mood-sign is always found in the forms slm, sis, etc., vUim, 
 vills, etc., and their compounds. 
 
 Tenses formed on the Perfect-stem. 
 
 §251. The letter v of the Perfect-stem is frequently elided 
 and the first vowel of the ending is absorbed; as, &ma-[v)-istl, 
 &masii; Jle-{v)-Sr&m, fliram. When I precedes v, there is usu- 
 ally no contraction. This is especially the case in compounds 
 of eo; as, r&dil, piril, sUbii, etc. 
 
 3. When the Perfect-stem ends in s, the syllables -is, -iss, im- 
 mediately following it, are sometimes omitted ; as, evastl, evasstm, 
 evastis, for evas-i-stl, evas-ustm, evds-i-sUs. 
 
 4. An ancient Future-Perfect in -so sometimes occurs, from 
 ■which Subjunctive forms in -sim and -s-Jm are formed ; as, rt- 
 cepsS, rScepstm. Sometimes this Future is formed on the Pres- 
 ent-stem; as, h&bessS. 
 
 The forms auMm, faxim, and faxo are retained by the classic 
 writers. 
 
 COMPOUND VERBS. 
 
 5. Compound Verbs generally form their Perfect- and Su- 
 pine-stems like the simple Verbs from which they are derived. 
 Sometimes, however, there is a change of the stem-vowel ; as, 
 hdbe-o, prd-Mbe-o; fdc^i-o, con-fic-i-o ; scand-o, de-scend-S. A 
 reduplication in the Perfect is omitted in compound Verbs ; as, 
 caed-o, cA-cid-i; oc-cld-8, oc-cid-i; but the compounds of do, sto, 
 discS, and posco, and some of those of currO, retain it. 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 THE VAKIOUS FORMATIONS OF THE PERFECT AND SUPINE 
 STEMS. 
 
 § 252. First Conjugalion. 
 
 1. The Perfect and Supine stems are formed, in the First Con- 
 jugation, by adding respectively -v and -t to the Present-stem of 
 the Verb ; as, S,ma,-, &md-v-, hmd-t-. 
 
PERFECT AND SUPINE STEMS. 
 
 351 
 
 2. But— 
 
 (a) The characteristic vowel a is elided in the 1 erfect tenses 
 of a few Verbs (-v passing into -u after a Consoiant), and in 
 such cases is usually changed into % in the Supine; as, er^pOj 
 cr^p-u-ij cr^p'i'tUm, 
 
 (b) The Perfect-stem is formed by reduplicating the initial 
 Consonant with <&; as, d-dr^y dld-u 
 
 (c) Some Verbs seem originally to have reduplicated, but the 
 reduplication has been dropped, the first two syllables blending 
 into one, and the short stem- vowel becoming long; as, Idv-o, 
 Idv-l, for Id-ld-vi. 
 
 3. The following list contains the Verbs which vary from the 
 usual mode of formation : * 
 
 CrepS, orepare, crepui, crepitum, to 
 creak; increpS, -avi or -ui, -atum 
 
 or -itumj discrepS, -uT, ; re- 
 
 crepS, -are, , . 
 
 Ciibo, cubm, cubitum, to lie down. 
 IncubS haa rarely -avi. Some of 
 the compounda inaert m, and are 
 of the Third Conjugation. 
 
 Do, dare, dedi, datura, to give. Com- 
 pounda with monoaytlahic Prepoai- 
 tiona are of the Third Conjugation. 
 
 DomS, domuT, domitum, to tame^ 
 
 FricS, fricuT, fricatum or frictum, to 
 rub; confricS, confricavi, confri- 
 catum. 
 
 Juv8, juvi, jutiim, juvaturus, to help, 
 
 LavS (-are and -ere), lavi and lavavi, 
 lotum, la,utnmf and lavatum, lava- 
 ttlrSs, to wash, 
 
 MicS, micui, jto quiver/ dimioS, 
 
 -avi, rarely -u-i, -at-umj emicS, 
 -ui, -atiim. 
 
 NecS, necavi, rarely necui, neeatum, 
 
 rarely nectum, to hill. 
 PlicS, plieavi and plicui, plicatum 
 
 and plicitum, to fold. ApplicS, 
 
 complies, explicS, impIicS, in the 
 
 same way. The other compounda 
 
 have -av-i, -at-um. 
 Pots, potavi, potum and potatum, 
 
 to drink. 
 Sects, secui, sectum a7id secatum, to 
 
 cut. So also praesectS, rcsScS. The 
 
 other compounda have only see- 
 
 tiim. 
 Son5, sonui, sonltum, soniturus, to 
 
 aound; consonS, esson3, insonS, 
 
 praesonS, -ui, ; resonS, -avi. 
 
 Sto, ateti (for sesti), statum, to 
 
 atand. 
 Toii5, tonui, , to thunder; at- 
 
 ton8, -ui, -itum. 
 Vet8, vetui, vetitum, to forhid. 
 
 § 253. ScGond Conjugation, 
 
 1. The Perfect-stem is formed, in the Second Conjugation, — 
 (a) By adding v to the Present-stem of the Verb, as in the 
 First Conjugation ; as, Jt^-d, fls-jlev-l. 
 
352 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 (b) But in most Veibs the characteristic -e is elided, v pass- 
 ing into -Uj and, as in the First Conjugation, the characteristic 
 passing into I in the Supine; as, mdne-Uy mdnu-i, mdnU-Hm. 
 
 (o) In many Verbs e is elided, and -«, instead of -v, added, 
 with such Consonant changes as euphony may require; as, 
 arde~3, ar-s-t, for ard-si/ auge-o, aux-lj for nugs-l. 
 
 (d) A few Verbs reduplicate the initial Consonant and drop 
 the characteristic -e; as, morde-o, md-mord-l. 
 
 (e) Some Verbs preserve a trace of the reduplication in the 
 lengthening of the stem-vowel in the Perfect, the characteristic, 
 as in the last class, being elided ; as, mdve-Vj mov-lj — perhaps for 
 md-mdv-l; or perhaps the original form was mdv^-v-l, syncopated 
 into movi to avoid having two successive syllables begin with v. 
 All Verbs of the First and Second Conjug,ations which lengthen 
 the stem-vowel in the Perfect have stems ending in v, except 
 video and stdeo. 
 
 2. The following list contains the Verbs of the Second Con- 
 jugation which form the Perfect and Supine stems otherwise 
 than according to §253, 1 (6), that being considered the regular 
 formation, as it is the one which most commonly occurs : 
 
 AboleS, abolevi, abolitum, to destroy. 
 The other compounds of the ohao- 
 lete 61eS are aduleS, adolui {rarely 
 adOlevi), adultum; ex61esc8 {in- 
 ceptive from exoleo), ex61evi, ex- 
 oletum ; deleS, delevi, deletum. 
 
 AlgefS, alsi, « to be cold. 
 
 ArceS, arcui, arotum, to keep off. 
 
 ArdeS, arsi, arsum, to hum. 
 
 AudeS, ausus sum {rarely ausi, from, 
 which ausimi, to dare. 
 
 Auge5, auxif auctum, to increase. 
 
 CaveS, cavT, cautum, to beware. 
 
 Censefi, ccnsul, ccnsum, to he of 
 opinion. Percense5, percenaui ; 
 recenseS, recensui, recensum and 
 receusltum. 
 
 CieS, ciTi, citiim, (t arouse. The 
 compounds with ex and ad are of 
 ike Fourth Conjugation. The pen- 
 
 ult of excitus IS common, and thai 
 of concitus is rarely long. 
 
 CoimiveS, connxvi or connixi, , 
 
 to shut the eyes, 
 
 Denseo, densetum, to he dense. 
 
 D6ce8, ddcui, doctum, to teach. 
 
 Faveo, f avi, fautum, to favor. 
 
 Ferve8, ferbui, or ferv8, fervi, to 
 boil. 
 
 Fle8, flevi, fletum, to weep. 
 
 FoveS, fovl, fotum, to warm. 
 
 FulgeS, fulsi {anteclaasical and po- 
 etic, fulgS, fulsi), to flash. 
 
 GaudeS, gavisiis, to rejoice. 
 
 HaereS, haesi, haesum, to stick; ob- 
 
 Jiaereu, -e-re, , ; so, also^ 
 
 subhaere5. 
 
 Indulged, indulsij indultum, to in 
 dulge. 
 
 Jube8, jussi, jussGm, to order. 
 
PEEFEOT AND SUPINE STEMS. 
 
 353 
 
 Luce?5, luxl, • , to shine; pollueeS, 
 
 polluxi, jolluctum, 
 Lugeo, luxi, luctum, to mourn. 
 ManeS, mansi, mansum, to stay. 
 MiscetS, miscui, mistum or mixtunij 
 
 mistiirus, to mix. 
 Mordeo, momordi, morsum, to hite. 
 MoveS, movi, motum, to move. 
 MulceB, mulsi, mulsuTn, rarely mule- 
 
 turn, to stroke, 
 MulgeS, mulsi, mulsum or mulctum, 
 
 to milk; einulgeS, -ere, , emul- 
 
 sum. 
 Net), nevij netum, to spin. 
 
 PaveS, pavi, , to fear. 
 
 PendeS, pependi, , to hang ; im- 
 
 pendeS, -e-re. 
 PleS {obsolete), plevi, pletum, to fill. 
 PrandeS, prandi, pransum, to break- 
 fast. 
 RideS, riaij risum, to laugh. 
 
 SedetS, pedl, 3essum, to sit; praesi- 
 
 de6, praesSdi, . 
 
 S6Ie8, solitus sum, to he accustomed, 
 SorbeS, sorbul, , to suck up : re- 
 
 sorbeS, -e-rS, j absorbeS, ab- 
 
 sorfaui, rarely abBorpsi, absorptum. 
 SpondetS, spSpondi, spoiisum, , to 
 
 pledge. 
 Strides, strldi, to creak. 
 SnadeSj suasi, suasiim, to advise. 
 TeneS, tenuT, tentum, to hold; per- 
 
 tineS, pertinul, . 
 
 TergeS or terg5, tersi, tereum, to loipe* 
 TondeS, totondi, tonsum, to shear, 
 TorqueS, torsi, tortum, to twist. 
 Torre8, torrui, tostum, to roast, 
 
 Turgeo, tursi, , to swell. 
 
 TJrge3 or urguetS, ursi, , to press. 
 
 VideS, vidi, visum, to see. 
 
 VieS, , vietum, to plait. 
 
 Voveo, vovi, votum, to vow. 
 
 1 254, To these may be added the following Impersonal and 
 Deponent Verbs of the Second Conjugation: 
 
 Decet^ decuit, it becomes, 
 
 liibet, libuit or libitum est, it pleases. 
 
 Licet, licuit or licitum est, it is al- 
 lowed. 
 
 Liquet, liquit or licuit, it is clear. 
 
 Miseret, miseruit, sometimes misere- 
 tur, miseritum or mi&ertum est, it 
 pities. 
 
 Oportet, oportuit, it behooves, 
 
 Piget, piguit or pigitum est, it 
 grieves. 
 
 Paenitet, paenituit, it repents. 
 
 Pudet, puduit or puditum est, *( 
 shames. 
 
 Taedet, taeduit or taesum est, it dis- 
 gusts. 
 
 FateSr, fassua, to confess; diffiteor, 
 diffiteri, . 
 
 Medeor, , to cure, [i>«'y- 
 
 Misereor, miseritus or misertus, to 
 
 Reor, ratus, to think, 
 
 Tueor, tuitus or tutus {the latter 
 Passive), to behold, to gaze atj to 
 protect. 
 
 §255. The following have the Perfect in -m^ but want the 
 Supine : 
 
 Acetijio he sour; candetS, to he white; cane8, to he hoary; SgeS, to want; 
 SmineS, to rise up; floreS, to flower ; liorreS, to bristle; lateS, to lie hidj 
 muced, to he mouldy ; nigreS, to be black; ole8, to smell; pallet, (o be pale j 
 30* 
 
354 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 pateS, to he operi ; sileS, lo be silent; strldeS, to creak; et&deS (etSdivl once) 
 to'be eager; stupeiS, to be stunned; timeS, to fear, 
 
 §256. The following have neither Perfect- nor Supine- si ems, 
 though from some of them Perfect tenses are formed with an 
 inceptive force: 
 
 AegreSj to be aick ; albeS, to be white; areS, to be dry; aveS, to covet; 
 caUeS, to be hard; calve8, to be bald; ceveS, to fawn; clareS, to be 
 bright; clue3, to be famous ; flacceS, to droop; flaveS, (o be yellow; fetetS, 
 to stink; frigeS, to be cold; frondeS, to bear leaves; hebeS, to be dull; 
 lacteS, to suck; langueS, to be faint; lenteS, to be alow; liveS, to be livid; 
 mScetS, to be lean ; maereS, to grieve; nitecS, to shine; oleS, to smell; pol- 
 Ie8, to he powerful; puteS, to stink; renideiS, to glitter; rigeS, to be stiff; 
 riibeS, to be red; 6cate5j to gush out; seneS^ to be old; sordeS, to be filthy ; 
 splendeSj to shine; squaleS, to befoul; sueS, to be wont; tSpett, to be warm; 
 torpeG, to be stiff; tumeS, to swell; ume5, to be moist; vegetS, to arouse; 
 vigeSj to flourish; vireS, to he green. 
 
 VARIOUS FORMATIONS OF THE PERFECT- AND SUPINE- 
 STEMS. 
 
 Tliii-d Conjugation. 
 
 ?257. 1. The Perfect-stem is formed, in the Third Conjuga- 
 tion, — 
 
 (a) By adding -s to the Present-stem, which in this Conjuga- 
 tion is the crude form of the Verb; as, carp-o, carps-%. 
 
 (b) By adding -v to the crude form of the Verb, which has 
 been strengthened by adding -re or -sc. 
 
 These are all originally Vowel Verbs; as, Gre-so-9, orev-l/ 
 pa-sc-o, pav-l; no-so-o, nov-l; s/i-n-o, sw-l; sper-n-S {sp!ir-o by 
 metathesis for spre-o), sprev-i. 
 
 (c) By adding -u (the form which the Perfect-sign -v assumes 
 after a Consonant) ; as, &l-o, d/u-i. 
 
 {d) By adding -w to the Present-stem; as, arcess-rS, arcess-lv-i. 
 
 (e) By reduplicating the initial Consonant; as, curr-o, cU- 
 curr-o. 
 
 (/)• By lengthening the Present-stem, with or without Vowel 
 change; as, ^m-S, em-l; &g-o, eg-l. 
 
 (g) In a number of Verbs (especially Vowel Verbs in -a) the 
 Perfect-stem is like the Present-stem ; as, deH-o, &e&-l. 
 
INCEPTIVE VERBS. 
 
 355 
 
 2. The Supine-stem is usually formed in the Third Conjuga- 
 tion by adding -t, frequently by adding -5, to the Present-stem, 
 
 INCEPTIVE VERBS. 
 ?258. Very few Inceptive Verbs have a Supine-stem, and 
 these take it from the simple *Verb; the Perfect-stem, when 
 used, is also adopted from the simple Verb. In many Incep- 
 tives, especially those derived from Nouns and Adjectives, the 
 intermediate Verb in ed is not used ; as, grdvesc^j from gravis. 
 
 AoescS, S,cui, to grow aonr. 
 
 AegrescG, , lo groio sick, 
 
 Albescfi, , to grow lohite, 
 
 AlescS, , to grow / coalescS, -aluT, 
 
 -alitum. 
 
 Ardesc5, arsi, to take fire. 
 
 ArescS, , to grow dry ; exareseS, 
 
 -arui; «o inarescS, perarescd. 
 
 Augescfi, , to begin to grow, 
 
 CalescS, j to grow warm. 
 
 CalvesctJ, , to grow bald. 
 
 OandescS, candui, to grow white. 
 
 CanescS, , to grow gray. 
 
 Clarcscfi, clarui, to become bright. 
 
 Condormisc5, -dormlvi, to grow 
 aleepy, 
 
 ConticescS, -ticuT, to become silent. 
 
 CrebrescS, crebui and orebrui, to in- 
 crease. 
 
 CrudeseS, crudui, to become cruel, 
 
 DitescS, , to grow rich, 
 
 DulcescS, dulcul, to grow sweet, 
 
 DiirescS, durui, to grow hard. 
 
 ErilescS, evilui, to grow vile. 
 
 ExtimescS, extimui, to fear greatly, 
 
 FatiscS, , to gape. 
 
 FervescS, , to boil. 
 
 FlaceescS, flaccui, to wilt. 
 
 FlorescS, florui , to begin to flourish. 
 
 FraoescS, fraeui, to grow rancid. 
 
 F-rigescS, frixi, to grow cold. 
 
 FrondescQ, frondui, to grow leafy. 
 
 FruticesctS, - 
 
 GelasctS, 
 
 GemiscS, — 
 GemmascS, - 
 GemmesoS, - 
 GenerascS, - 
 GrandescS, - 
 G raves c8, — 
 HaeresoS, — 
 HebesotS, — 
 
 , to begin to shoot, 
 
 -, to freeze. 
 
 —, to begin to sigh, 
 
 , to begin to bud, 
 
 , to become a gem, 
 
 , to be produced, 
 
 , to grow large. 
 
 — , to grow heavy. 
 — , to adhere. 
 -, to grow dull. 
 
 HorrescSj horrui, to grow rough, 
 
 IgnesctS, , to become infiamed, 
 
 IndoIescS, -d51ul, to be grieved, 
 
 Ins5Iescd, , to be haughty. 
 
 Integrasc5, , to grow fresh, 
 
 JuvSnescS, , to groio young. 
 
 LanguescS, langui, to grow languid, 
 
 Lapidesc5, , to become stone, 
 
 LatescS, , to grow broad, 
 
 LatescS, , to lie hid; delitescfl 
 
 and oblitesoS have -litui. 
 
 LentescQ, to become soft, 
 
 LiquescS, licui, to become liquid, 
 
 LucescS, , to grow light, 
 
 Liltesou, , to grow, muddy, 
 
 MaeescS, , "1 _ 
 
 } to grow lean, 
 Macresco, macrui, J 
 
 MadeBcS, madui, to grow wet. 
 
 Marcesc8, , to pine away. 
 
 MaturescS, maturui, to ripen, 
 
 MisSresctS, , to pity. 
 
 MitesctS, , to grov mild. 
 
356 
 
 APPENDIX VI. 
 
 Mollescfi, , to ffjt \o soft. 
 
 MuteseS, , to groxo dumb; obmu- 
 
 tescS, obmiitul. 
 
 NtgrescS, nigrui, to grow black. 
 
 Nltesc8, nitui, to grow bright. 
 
 NotescS, notui, to become known, 
 
 ObbrutescS, , to become brutish. 
 
 ObdormiscS, , to fall asleep. 
 
 ObsurdesctS, obsurdui, to grow deaf. 
 
 OccallescS, , -callui, to grow cal- 
 lous. 
 
 OlcscS {rarely used), adolcscS, ad- 
 olevi, adultum, to grow itp ; ex- 
 filesctS, -Slevi, -Sletum, to grow 
 obsolete; so obsolescS; inQlescS, 
 , -olevi, Slitum. 
 
 PallescS, pallui, to grow pale. 
 
 PStescS, patui, to be opened. 
 
 PavoscS, , to grow fearful. 
 
 Pertimesc8, -timui, to fear greatly . 
 
 Pinguesc5, , to grow fat. 
 
 PiibesoS, pubui, to grow to matu- 
 rity. 
 
 PuerascS, , to attain the age of 
 
 boyhood. 
 
 PutescS, putiu, 
 
 Putrescfi, , 
 
 RarescS, , to become thin, 
 
 KSsipiecu, -BipivTj -sTpii and -sipui, 
 to come to one's self. 
 
 KigescS, rigui, to grow cold. 
 
 >■ to become rotten. 
 
 RubescS, riibuT, to grow ved, 
 
 SanescS, , to become sound; con. 
 
 sanesc8, -sanul. 
 Sencsco, senui, to grow old. 
 
 SentesctS, , to perceive. 
 
 SiccescS, , to become dry, 
 
 SilescS, , to groiP silent. 
 
 S61idesc8, , to groto solid. 
 
 SordescS, sordul, to grow filthy. 
 SplendescG, splendui, to grow bright, 
 
 SpumescS, , to begin to foam. 
 
 SterilesctS, , to become barren. 
 
 StupesctS, , to be astonished. 
 
 SuescS, suevi, suetum^ to become aa 
 
 customed. 
 TabescS, tabui, to waste away. 
 TeneresoS and -ascS, , to grow 
 
 tender. 
 Tepescfi, tepuT, to grow warm. 
 TorpiscS, torpui, to grow torpid. 
 
 TremiscS, , to grow tremulous, 
 
 TiimescS, tumui, "1 
 Tui 
 
 Umesco, , to grow moist. 
 
 UvescS, , to grow moist. 
 
 V3,lesc8, to grow strong. 
 
 Vanesc6, , to vanish; evanescS, 
 
 evani. 
 VeterascS, -avl, to grow old, 
 
 VirescS, , to grow green. 
 
 Vivesc8, vixi, to become alive. 
 
 , tumui, ") , 
 
 > to begin to 
 
 swell. 
 
 § 259. Deponent Verbs of the Third Conjugation. 
 
 Apiscor, aptiis, to get. 
 
 Expergiscor, -perrectus, to waJce 
 
 vp, 
 Fatisc5r, to gape; defeti£*5r, de- 
 
 fessiia. So the other compounds. 
 PruSr, fructiis, fruitus, fruiturus, to 
 
 enjoy, 
 Fungor, functus, to perform. 
 GradiSr, gressua, to walk/, aggre- 
 
 di(5r, aggredi and aggrSdirl, ag- 
 
 gressus; «o progredior. 
 Irascor, iratua, to he angry. 
 Labor, lapsus, to fall. 
 Llc[u5r, Uqui, to flow, 
 LSquCr, locutus, to speak. 
 Miniscor (obs.), comminiscSr, com- 
 
 xnentus, to invent ; reminiscor, to 
 
 reiAember. 
 
DEPONENT VERBS. 
 
 357 
 
 Moriflr, morl, iitrely moriri, mortu- 
 
 us, moriturus, to die. 
 NancisoSr, nactua or nanctus, to oh- 
 
 tain. 
 Nascor, natus, nasciturua, to he horn. 
 Nit6r, nisiis or nixus, nlsurus, to 
 
 atrive. 
 O-bliviseor, oblitua, to forget. 
 Paciscor, pactiis, to hargain. 
 
 Patior, paaaus, to suffer. 
 PrSf iciscOr, profectus, to set out. 
 Queror, questus, to complain 
 Ringor, rinctuSj to ttnarl. 
 Sequor, secutiis, to follow. 
 Tuor, tutus, to protect. 
 Ulciscor, ultus, to avenge. 
 Utor, usus, to use. 
 Vescor, to eat. 
 
 Fourth Conjugation, 
 
 §260. 1. Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation are Vowel- Verbs, 
 the characteristic Vowel being -I. The Perfect-stem is formed — 
 
 (a) By adding -v; as, audiBj audi-audiv-i. 
 
 (b) The characteristic Vowel is dropped in some Verbs, and 
 then -V passes into -u; as, s&li'-^j sdl-u-i. 
 
 (c) By dropping the characteristic and lengthening the stem- 
 Vowel ; as, vM-Oj ven-l. 
 
 2. The Supine-stem is formed by adding -t. In many Verbs v 
 of the Perfect-stem is elided. 
 
 3. In the following list will be found those Verbs which form 
 the Perfect-stem according to the last three methods mentioned 
 above : 
 
 FeriS, , , to strike. 
 
 FerociS, -ivi and ii, to he fierce. 
 
 Fulci5, fulsi, fultum, to prop. Ful- 
 citus occurs. 
 
 Ganni8, , , to hark. 
 
 Gloci5, , fto cluck {^Q a hen). 
 
 GrandiS, , , to make great. 
 
 Hauri^, hauai, haustum (hauaurua, 
 hausturua). 
 
 HinniS, , , to neigh. 
 
 Inepti8_, , , to trifle. 
 
 Paris is of the Third Covjtigationj 
 hut its compounds are of the 
 JFourth; aa, aperiS, aperui, aper- 
 tum ; 80 opperiS; reperiS, reperi, 
 rSpertum; so comperi5, rarely de* 
 ponent. 
 
 AmiciS, -ui or -xi, amictum, to 
 
 clothe. 
 
 BalbiitiS, , , to stammer. 
 
 CaeGuti5, , , to he hlind. 
 
 CambiS (campsi), to exchange. 
 
 Dementis, , — — , to he mad. 
 
 EffutiS, , eflfutitum, to prate. 
 
 E(5, ivi, itiim, to go. The compounds 
 almost always elide v of the Per- 
 fect-stem, redii, etc.; anteeS, -ivi 
 
 or -ii, . ContraeS and postefS 
 
 have no Perfect or Supine. 
 
 FareiS, fa*Bi, fartum and farctum, 
 to pack. The compounds change a 
 into e; referciS, -ferai, -fertum; 
 
 oonferciS, , confertiim; effar- 
 
 ci8 or -fereiS, , effertiiin. 
 
358 
 
 APPENDIX Vn. 
 
 PruriS, , ' , to itch, 
 
 QueS (like e?), quivi, quitunij to he 
 able. 
 
 RauciS, , rausiiin, to be koai'se, 
 
 RugiS, , , to roar. 
 
 SaeviS, saevii, -itum, to rage. 
 
 SagiS, , , to perceive keenly. 
 
 SaliS, salui or salii, saltum, to leap ; 
 as- and de- siliS, -ui, -sultiim ; 
 pro- and trans- sili3, -ui, -ivi, -iij 
 ab-, in-, sub- siliS, -ii, -uij dis-, 
 ex-, re- siU8, -uij eiroum- and 
 praesiliS have no Perfect or Su- 
 pine. 
 
 SaliS, , sSlItum, to aalt. 
 
 SanciS, sanxi, sanctum, and sancl- 
 tS.m, to ratify. 
 
 Sarci8, sarsi, sartum, to patch, 
 SarriS, -ivT, -ui, -itum, to hoe. 
 
 ScaturiS, , , to gush out. 
 
 SentiS, sensi, sonsum, to feel. 
 SepeliS, -ivi and -ii, rarely sepelJ, 
 
 sepultum, rarely -itum, to hnry. 
 SepiS, sepsi, septum, to hedge. 
 SingultiS, , ; alao singulttS, 
 
 , -atum, to hiccup. 
 
 Sitio, -ivi and -ii, , to he thirsty. 
 
 SufBfS, -ivi and -ii, -itum, to funii- 
 
 gate, to ficent. 
 
 TussiS, , , to cough. 
 
 VagiS, -ivi or -ii, to cry. 
 VeniS, veni, ventum, to come. 
 VinciS, vinxi, vinctQm, to hind. 
 
 Deponent Verbs* of the Fourth Conjugation. 
 
 Metior, mensus and metitus, to 
 
 measure. 
 Ordior, orsus, to begin. 
 OriSr, ortus, Sriturus, to rise. Of 
 
 the Third Conjugation, except In- 
 
 fin. Pres, 
 PfiriSr (obs. whence peritus); expe- 
 
 riSr, expertus, to try,- opperiSr, 
 oppertua and opperitus, to wait 
 for. 
 
 P6ti5r, potit&s, to obtain. 
 
 The poeta sometimes use an ludica- 
 tive Present and Subjunctive Im- 
 perfect of the Third Conjugation. 
 
 APPENDIX VII. 
 
 ROMAN MODE OF RECKONING TIME. 
 
 1 261. 1. The Romans divided the natural day (from sunrise 
 to sunset) into twelve equal hours of varying length according 
 to the time of year. The night was also divided in the same 
 way into four equal watches. 
 
 2. The year, according to the calendar of Julius Caesar, was 
 divided into twelve months, as follows: 
 
 JanuariuB, 31 days. 
 
 FebruariuB, 28 " 
 
 Martins, 31 " 
 
 iprllis, 30 " 
 
 Maius, 31 days. 
 
 Junius, 30 " 
 
 Qnintilis, 31 " 
 
 Sextilis, 31 " 
 
 September, 30 days, 
 
 October, 31 " 
 
 NSvember, 30 " 
 
 DScember, 31 " 
 
PROSODY. 359 
 
 3. In early times the yeaa: began in March : hence the names, 
 Quinillis, Sextllis, September, etc. Quintllis and Sextllis were after- 
 ward changed to JuliUs and Augustus, in honor of the first two 
 Caesars. 
 
 4. The day of the month was reckoned from three points, 
 Kalends, Nones, and Ides, which fell respectively on the first, 
 fifth, and thirteenth of each month ; except March, May, July, 
 and October, when the Nones fell on the seventh, and the Ides 
 on the fifteenth. 
 
 5. Any given date was reckoned, not backward from the first 
 day of the month, as with ua, but forward to the next Kalends, 
 Nones, or Ides, inclusive. Thus, the 2d of March was called the 
 " sixth before the Nones of March ;" sextHs [anti] Nonas Mar- 
 tias, or anti di&m sextUm Nonas Martias; the 16th of March was 
 called the " 17th before the Kalends of April," septtmUs d^ctmUs 
 (and) KMendas Apnles, or ant^ diim aeptim&m dk^miim, Kij^len- 
 das Aprlles. The 2d of June was called quartUs Nonas Junids, 
 or anti di^m guartUm Nonas Junids, etc. 
 
 6. In leap-year February had 29 days, the 24th [sextiis Kal. 
 Mar.) being doubled and called bisextUs Kal. Mar. — Hence leap- 
 year was called blsextlHs. 
 
 7. Therefore, to reduce the Eoman calendar to our own, — 
 (a) For a date before the Nones or Ides, subtract the number 
 
 of days from the day of the month on which the Nones or Ides 
 fell, and add one to the remainder. Thus, a. d. VIII, Idus Maids, 
 (15-8) + 1 = 8; May 8th. 
 
 (6) For a date before the Kalends, subtract the number of days 
 from the number of days in the month, and add two to the remain- 
 der. Thus, a. d. XVII, Kal. Jun., (31 - 17) + 2 = 16 ; May 16th. 
 
 8. To reduce our calendar to the Roman, the process will be 
 reversed. 
 
 9. The week of seven days [hebdSmds) was not used in Rome 
 till after the introduction of Christianity. 
 
 APPENDIX VIII. PROSODY. 
 
 Prosody is the science of versification, and belongs 
 father to poetry tlian to grammar. 
 
360 APPENDIX VIII. 
 
 QUANTITY?. 
 
 §262. 1. Tlie quantity of a syllable is the relative 
 time occupied in pronouncing it, a long syllable requir- 
 ing twice as much time as a short one. 
 
 2. A Vowel is long by nature, as du(S; or by posi- 
 tion, as resMi. A syllable that is sometimes long and 
 sometimes short is said to be common. 
 
 §263. Rule I.^ — A Yowel before another Vowel is 
 short. 
 
 So also when h comes between two Vowels, it being 
 only a breathing. 
 
 Exc. 1. FlS has i long except before -h-; as, fiuni, flam, 
 fiertt. 
 
 Exc. 2. E between two i's is long in the Genitive and Dative 
 of the Fifth Declension ; as, f&ciei. 
 
 Exc. 3. A is long in the penult of old Genitives in di; as, 
 auldi. 
 
 Exo. 4. A and e are long in the endings -diUs, -eMs, -eid. 
 
 Exc. 5. r is common in Genitives in 'Us, but in altlriUs it is 
 almost always short; in SMils, long, contracted for dWMa. 
 
 Exc. 6. The first Vowel of Sheu is common ; so that of I/idnli 
 and She. 
 
 § 264. Rule II. — Diphthongs are long. 
 
 Exc. 1. Prae, in composition, is short before a Vowel. 
 Exc. 2. A Diphthong at the end of a word is sometimes made 
 short when the next word begins with a Vowel. 
 
 § 265. Rule III. — Contracted syllables are long. 
 § 266. Rule IV. — A Vowel before two Consonants, 
 a double Consonant, or the letter j, is long by position. 
 
 Note.— A Vowel, other than i, really combines with j, to form a 
 Diphthong. 
 
 JRemark 1. — The Vowel is long by position when one or both 
 the Consonants are in the same word with it; but when both 
 stand at the beginning of the following word, it is common. 
 
PROSODY. 361 
 
 Remarh Z. — A short Vowel at the end of a ^ord before a 
 double Consonant or j beginning the next word is not length- 
 ened. 
 
 Remarh 3. — The law of position is frequently disregarded by 
 the comic poets. 
 
 Exc. 1. Z" is short before/ in the compounds of jilgUm; as, 
 blj&gus. 
 
 Exc. 2. A Vowel naturally short, before a mute followed by a 
 liquid, is common. 
 
 Remark 4. — A Vowel is made long by position in compound 
 words where the former part ends with a mute and the latter 
 part begins with a liquid; as, ab-luo. 
 
 Remark S. — A short Vowel at the end of a word, before a 
 mute and a liquid in the next word, is rarely lengthened, ex- 
 cept in the arsis of a foot. 
 
 Remark 6. — In Latin words only I and r following a mute 
 lengthen a preceding short Vowel. 
 
 § 267. Rule V. — Derivatives retain the quantity of 
 their primitives. 
 
 Exc. 1. Frequentatives from Verbs of the First Conjugation 
 change -a long into -J short; as, elamdt-Um, clamit-o. 
 
 Exc. 2. (as) Some derivatives lengthen a short Vowel ; such 
 as denl from dhitm, personS, from aSn9, humanUs from hSmS, 
 sedUs from s&cUs, laternS, from l&teS, sedes from sMeo, literS, from 
 lino, tegiUa from Ugu, suspicis from susplc3r. 
 
 {b) Some shorten a long Vowel; as, dicax from dieS, dux 
 (dads) from duco, fidea from fld9, l&bo from labSr, lucernd, from 
 luce9, mdlestits from moles, n&to from ndtHm, nOto from notHm, 
 ddiUm from odl, sdpdr from sopis, vMum from vado, vSoo from 
 
 § 268. Rule VI. — Words introduced from the Greek 
 or other languages retain their original quantity; so, 
 also, Latin stems have the same quantity as the cognate 
 Greek ones; as, Dafe&s (Greek dapstoz); vlcUs (Greek 
 o?Jfoc, digammated). 
 
 31 
 
362 APPENDIX VIII. 
 
 § 269. Rule VII. — Compound words retain the quan- 
 tity of their components. 
 
 Exc. 1. Agntt&s and cognUHs from not'is, dejiro and pljlro from 
 juro; hddiS from hoc die; compounds in -diaiXs from dlco; innUbii, 
 pronUbS,, subnilb&, from nubo (but connubiUm has u common) ; im- 
 b^cillus from baciUum; ambltum from ItiXm, but i is short in am- 
 bitus and ambttio. 
 
 Exc. 2. Pro is short in prScelld, prScul, prd/dnUs, prdfdri, 
 prd/egtils, prdftciacSr, prd/UeOr, prdfUgiS, prSfund&s, prdnipoa, 
 prOnepHs, and prStervUs. It is common in procurS, prSfundS, 
 prSpagS, propelW, and prSpino. The Greek pr6 is nearly al- 
 ways short. 
 
 Remark 1. — The inseparable Prepositions dis and rg are short; 
 dl, se, and ve are long. 
 
 Remark 2. — A ending the former part of a compound word ia 
 long ; the other Vowels short. 
 
 Exc. 1. .B is long in sS for sex or semi, and common iu some 
 compounds of flicio. 
 
 Exc. 2. I is long when the first part of a compound is de- 
 clined, or may be separated without altering the sense ; as, 
 guid&m, SgncuUurS,; also in the former part of compounds of 
 die* {bidwUm, miridies, etc.), in iblquS, utrSblquH, and Ibldim, and 
 in Idim when masculine. 
 
 Exc. 3. is long in compounds of contro-, intrS-, retro-, 
 guando- (except quandSqiMd&m), and in Ulioqui. 
 
 INCREMENTS. 
 
 § 270. 1. A Noun is said to increase when in any of 
 its cases it has more syllables than in the Nominative- 
 Singular. A Plural increment is one which belongs to 
 the endings of the Plural number ; while a Singular in- 
 crement always belongs to the stem. 
 
 2. If a word has but one increment, it is the penult ; 
 if two, the antepenult is called the first increment, and 
 the penult the second ; if three, the syllable before the 
 
PBOSODY. 363 
 
 antepenult is called the first, the antepenult the second, 
 and the penult the third; as, 
 
 1 12 12 8 
 
 sermS, Ber-mon-lsj ser-mon-i-bils, it-in-er-i-bus. 
 
 SINGULAR INCREMENTS. 
 
 §271. EuLB VIII.— Increments of the Third De- 
 clension in a and o are long; in e, i, and u, short. 
 
 Remark 1. — There are no singular increments in the Second 
 Declension, stems in r merely dropping the Nominative-ending. 
 Those of the First, Fourth, and Fifth Declensions belong to 
 2263. 
 
 A, 
 
 Exc. 1. Masculines in -&l and -&r (except -e&r and -n&r), 
 with S,nds, mas, vds {v&dis), bace&r, hepSr, jiibdr, lar, neot&r, 
 par, fax, and sal, increase short. 
 
 Exc. 2. Nouns in -s preceded by a Consonant increase short 
 in a and o; as, daps, d&pls; serobs,jcr6bis. 
 
 O. 
 
 Exc. 3. in the increment of neuters is short ; but os [oris), 
 and neuter Comparatives have o long. The increment of &dlir 
 is common. 
 
 Exc. 4. Arbdr, TnXmSr, bos, compSs, impSs, Upus, and praecoai 
 increase short. 
 
 E. 
 Exc. 5. Nouns in -en, -ents (except Hymen) with An& and 
 Nerw, increase long ; also haeres, Kouplls, mansues, merces, quies, 
 IbSr, ver, dlleo or allex, lex, rex, vervex, plebs, and seps. 
 
 I. 
 
 Exc. 6. Nouns and Adjectives in -ix increase long ; but c&lix, 
 coxendix, fUix, fornix, l&rix, nix, pix, sdlix, and strix, increase 
 short. 
 
 Exc. 7. IKs, glis, lis, vis, Nesis, Qulris, Samnis, and vlbex, in- 
 crease long. 
 
364 APPENDIX vin. 
 
 tr. 
 
 Exc. 8. Nour.s in -us (Gen. -urts, -udts, -utis), with fur, frux, 
 lux, Polhix, increase long; but ini^c&s, Ligus, and pious increase 
 short. 
 
 Beinarh S. — Increments in y belong to Greek Nouns. 
 
 PLURAL INCREMENTS. 
 
 § 272. Rule IX. — Plural increments in a, e, and o 
 are long; in i and u, short. 
 
 INCREMENT OF VERBS. 
 
 § 273. 1. A Verb is said to increase when any of ifa 
 forms has more syllables than the Second Person Singu- 
 lar of the Indicative Present Active. 
 
 2. The number of the increment is reckoned as in 
 Nouns (§270, 2); as, 
 
 * 1 12 123 123< 
 
 audiS; aud-i-tiS; aud-i-e^as^ aad-i-e-ba-tis, aud-i-e-bam-i-ni. 
 
 §274. Rule X. — In the increment of Verbs, a, e, 
 and are long, i and u are short. 
 
 A. 
 Exc. 1. The first increment of do is short. 
 
 E. 
 
 Exc. 2. E is short before -r in the first increment of the 
 Present and Imperfect of the Third Conjugation, and in the 
 second increment in -6M« and -btrt. 
 
 Exc. 3. ^ is short before -r&m, -rim, and»-r5, and the persons 
 formed from them. 
 
 I. 
 Exc. 4. / is long before -v or -s in the Perfect-stem. 
 Exc. 5. / is long in the Supine-stem of gaudm, dlvldS, ptW, 
 quaerS, rieensetS, obliviscdr, and Inteusives in -sso. 
 Exc. 6. / is long in the first increment of the rourth Con 
 
PROSODY. 365 
 
 jugation, except -tmMs of the Perfect; also in nmus, nUts, vUi- 
 mus, vihUs, nollto, nSlite, nolitoU. 
 
 Exc. 7. / is common in -ru, -rim&s, -rifls, of the Indicative 
 Future-Perfect and Subjunctive Perfect. 
 
 17. 
 Exc. 8. U is long in the Supine-stem and Future Participle 
 Active. 
 
 PENULTS. 
 
 § 275. Rule XI. — Monosyllabic Perfect- and Supine- 
 stems are long (§ 251, 2 c) ; as, mom, mot'&m (perhaps syn- 
 copated from mdvliUm). 
 
 Exc. (a) Seven Perfect-stems are shx)rt: bib-l, did-i, fld-l 
 (from JindS), sM-l, stit-l, sftt-i, t&l-i. 
 
 Note. — A reduplication is always short : hence the short stems of 
 VOn, dSdi, siStl (for sSstl), and stUl (for slsti). 
 
 (5) Ten Supine-stems are short : <^t-ikn, ddt-Hm, U-Um, lU-&m, 
 quU-Um, r&t-iXm, rM-Um, siU-Hm, M-iim, stUi-Um. 
 So, also, the obsolete fiJMm, whence fUturHs. 
 
 § 276. Rule XII. — (a) Words in -abr^m, -darSm, 
 -dtrUm, -ubricm, -osUs, -dt&m, -ItUm, -ut&m, -udits, -arts, 
 and -elUs, lengthen the penult. 
 
 Exc. GMUs, gUUm, and sd&liis; defi-M&m, pulpttHm, pitortt&m, 
 MtUm. 
 
 (b) Words in -cd, -dd, -gd, -g8, -md, -tus, -U, -?&, -lis, 
 -nd, -nS, -nl, -nis, -d&c, -dtx, -mSx, -rriix, -iSx, and -r&c, 
 lengthen the penult. 
 
 Exc. In -CA, brasstcd, dic&, fiilicS,, manUcS,, pMicS,, per&,c&, 
 seUticH, tUnicli, vdmicS,; in -do, cMS, dlvtdu, Mo (to eat), sSlidS, 
 sp&do, triptdo; in -GA and -go, oHligS,, f'&gS,, pl&gd, idgii, ig6, 
 JigS; in -MA, &mmii, lacrlma, victlmd,; in -ttjs, cdtiis, IdtUa 
 [-^ris], rnUHs, vigWls, anhelitus, digtt&s, grdtuUUs, hdlUUa, ser- 
 vitus, spirUHs, ndtHs, qudtHs, arbHiUs, pHtiis, inclMUs; in -le, 
 m&U; in -lis. Verbals in -tlis and -bills; Adjectives in 
 31* 
 
366 APPENDIX vin. 
 
 dapttlU, grlUAUs, hUmilis, p&rtlis, mugills, strntHs, stA'tHs, strl- 
 gills; in -NE and -Nis, Ani, cdnia, dnis, jUvhtts ; in -NA, bucctnH, 
 fisiAnd, flmlnS., fusdinii, larninU, paginU, p&UnS,, sarcinS,, SjUnae, 
 nundinae; in -lex, cS,l&x, sU&jc; in -mex, r&mix. 
 
 (e) A, e, 0, and u, before -jnM, -mUm, -nus, -nUni, are 
 long. 
 
 Exc. Ol&.nUs, h&mtls, post&mUs, ntmUs; S/nus (an old woman), 
 m&nUs, oceHnHs, ptnUs, tSnUs, VHnUs, dnUs, bdniis, sdn&s, ItXgtXnUm. 
 
 (t£) Words in -ates, -Itls, -oils, -aid, -et&, -dt&, -vid, 
 lengthen the penult, except sMfe, pbUs, ndtd, rOt&. 
 (e) A penultimate Vowel before v is long. 
 
 Exc. Avis, brliiis, gr&vls, llvUs, 6vis; jUvo, l&vo, Svo; S/o&s, 
 cdvUs, fdviis, nHvus, fdv6r, pdvdr, 7idvim. 
 
 § 277. EuLE XIII. — (a) "Words in -&cUs, -fcfe, -Wms, 
 •Wis, -^ImXis; -b&, -bS, -p&, -po; -Hols, -Mas, and -Wi, 
 shorten the penult. 
 
 Exc. Dacits, mirdcUs, BpdcUs; dmiciis, apncUs, flcSs, mendi 
 s&s, pioUs, posticus, pUdlcUs, splcUs, umblllcUs; Idus, fidUs, in- 
 fidUs, nid&s; asil&s, blm&s, limUs, dpim&s, pStrimits, mdtrlmiis, 
 quadrimUs, tnmUs, and the Superlatives imiis and prim&s; glebd, 
 bubo, glubo, llbo, nutiS, scribd, ripS,, cupd, pdpd, pilpd, scopd, repS, 
 piiuitd. 
 
 (b) Diminutives and Polysyllables in -'iilUs, with Verbs 
 in -tnS, -^ndr, shorten the penult, 
 
 Exc. Festlno, sdglnS, prdpino, dplndr, and compounds of dind. 
 
 §278. Rule XIV. — Words in -^nus, except Adjec- 
 tives expressing time or material, lengthen the penult. 
 
 Exc. But mdtuUnHs, rUpentiniis, and vesperUnUs lengthen the 
 penult, and the following shorten it: ac(^niis, QMnMs, ddminHs, 
 f>ldlniis, leiniis, termlnUs, ghnlnUs, cirdlnus, mlniis. 
 
 § 279. Rule XV. — Before final -rd and -rdr, a and a 
 are short ; the other Vowels, long. 
 
PROSODY. 367 
 
 Exc. PerS, sperS, fSro, sSrSr, vdrS, fiiro. 
 
 § 280. Rule XVI. — Before final -r&, -rS,, •rUm, e is 
 short ; the other Vowels long. 
 
 Exc. Austeriis, g&lertig, plgrUs, proclr&s, slr&s, sivlrth, veriis, 
 st&terd,; barb&riis, nUriis, piriis, sc&r'&s, sspHrih, tOrUs, h&rS,, mdr&, 
 
 § 281. EuLE XVII. — Adverbs in -Mm lengthen the 
 penult; those in -1,tSr and -Uiis shorten it. But stdMm 
 (inimediately) is short. 
 
 Remarh 1. — ^Many apparent exceptions to the foregoing rules 
 are covered by §§267, 268, 269. The masculine only of Adjec- 
 tival terminations is given, the quantity of the feminine and the 
 neuter being of course that of the masculine. 
 
 Remark ■^. — Patronymics (Greek) in -tides and -Wis shorten 
 the penult, while those in -ais, -lis, and Bis lengthen it. Nouns 
 in -eiis form Patronymics in -Ides. 
 
 ANTEPENULTS. 
 
 § 282. Rule XVIII.— The connecting Vowels i, o, 
 and u are short ; a is long ; as, vindlentUs, fraudUlenttis, 
 dMmenttim, atrdmenWm. 
 
 § 283. Rule XIX. — A Vowel before -ne^, -weff, -ni&, 
 -niS, -niUs, -ni'&m is long. 
 
 Exc. CaM&neS,, &,ne&, mdneS, mineo, mOneS, UneS, ignSmtniS,, 
 lusdlnitl, vtniS,, Idnis, v&nio, and words in -CfiniUm. 
 
 FINAL SYLLABLES. 
 MONOSYLLABLES. 
 
 § 284. Rule XX. — (a) Monosyllables ending in a 
 Vowel are long. 
 
 (6) Monosyllabic Nouns ending in a Consonant are 
 long; all other monosyllables ending in a Consonant are 
 short. 
 
368 APPENDIX VIII. 
 
 Exc. 1. C)ir,fU, nM,pSl, iftr, 8s {ossis), vlU [vMis), arc short. 
 
 Exc. 2. En, non, eras, plus, eUr, par, are long. So, also, mon- 
 osyllables in c, except nlc (short), and htc and hie (common). 
 
 Exc. 3. Monosyllabic Plural cases and Verb-forms in -as, -es, 
 and -is are long ; but is from sum is short. 
 
 POLYSYLLABLES. 
 A final. 
 
 §285. RiTLE XXI. — A final, in words declined, is 
 short, and long in words undeclined. 
 
 Exc. 1. A final is long in the Ablative Singular of the First 
 Declension, and in the Vocative Singular of Greek Nouns in -at 
 and -es. 
 
 Exc. 2. A final is short in eiil, itd, quid, and pUtd, when used 
 Adverbially ; sometimes also in contra and numerals in -ginta. 
 In posiea it is common. 
 
 E final. 
 
 § 286. Rule XXII. — E final is short in words of 
 two or more syllables. 
 
 Exc. 1. E final is long in the First and Fifth Declensions. 
 
 Exc. 2. Final e in the Imperative Active Second Person Sin- 
 gular of the Second Conjugation is a contraction ; but it is some- 
 times short in cdvB, vdW, lAdM. 
 
 Exc. 3. Final e is long in fire, ferme,. She, and in Adverbs 
 derived from Adjectives of the Second Declension; but it is 
 short in bini, mdtt, infernS, saepi, and auperrii. 
 
 I final. 
 
 § 287. Rule XXIII.— J final is long. 
 
 Exc. / final is common in mlht, Ub%, sibt, ibi, Hbt; short in 
 nisi, gudst, and eul (when a dissyllable). 
 
 O final. 
 
 §288. Rule XXIV. — final, in wmis of more 
 than one syllable, is common. 
 
PEOSODY. 369 
 
 Exc. 1 final is long in the Dative and the Ablatjve, and in 
 the local Adverbs quo, eo, eodem, etc. ; also in omnlno and id, 
 
 Exc. 2. final is short in cltd, dud, illicd, ociS, prdfectd, and 
 mddS, and generally in HgS and hdmd. 
 
 V final. 
 
 § 290. Rule XXY.— Z7 final is long. 
 
 D, li, IT, R, T, final. 
 
 § 291. Rule XXYI.— A Vowel before d, I, n, r, t, 
 final, is short. 
 
 Exc. E is long in lien, Iber, and CelUber. 
 C final. 
 
 .§292. Rule XXYIL— A Vowel before e final is 
 long; but e in dowge is short. 
 
 As, Es, Os, final. 
 
 §293. Rule XXVIII. — As, es, and os, final, are 
 long. 
 
 Exc. 1. As is short in duds, and in Greek Nouns in -Us, -ddts, 
 Exc. 2. Us is short in Nouns of the Third Declension, Class 
 
 III. (? 85); in plriis; and in compounds of & [p5tls, etc.). 
 Exc. 3. Os is short in c'ompBs, impds, and ds (ossis) ; also in 
 
 Greek words in ds. 
 
 ^ Is, Us, Ts, final. 
 
 § 294. Rule XXIX. — Is, us, and ys, final, are short. 
 
 Exc. 1. Is and us are long in Plural cases, and in the Nom- 
 inative of Nouns having a long stem-vowel ; as, miisls, fructus, 
 tellus, Samms. But -bUs of the Dative and the Ablative is short. 
 
 Exc. 2. Contracted final syllables in us and is are of course 
 long ; as, audls for audi-is, friXctus for fructH-is. 
 
 Exc. 3. -ris in the Indicative Future-Perfect and Subjunctive 
 Perfect is common. 
 
 iJmarA. —^The last syllable of a verse (except she anapaestic 
 and Ionic a mUnorl) -may be long or shoft. 
 
370 
 
 APPENDIX VIII. 
 
 VERSIFICATIOK 
 § 295. 1. A foot is a combination of two or more syl- 
 lables. A compound foot consists of two simple feet 
 united. 
 
 2. Tlie simple feet of two syllables are the — 
 Spondee, two long, ; as, seal. 
 Pyrrhic, two short, ^ ^ ; as, bbrii. 
 Trochee, long and short, ~ '"' ; as, gcmdSt. 
 Iambus, short and long, '~'~; as, d&o. 
 
 3. The simple feet of three syllables are the — 
 
 one long and two short, 
 
 two short and one long, 
 
 three short, 
 
 three long, 
 
 short, long, and short, 
 
 short, and long. 
 
 ' } long, 
 
 Dactyl, 
 
 Anapaest, 
 
 Tribrach, 
 
 Molossus, 
 
 Amphibrach, 
 
 Amphim&cer, 
 
 or Oretie, 
 
 Bacchvis, one short, two long, 
 
 Antibacehiics, two long, one short, 
 
 4. The compound feet are the — 
 
 Dispondee, double Spondee, ~ 
 
 Proceleiismatic, double Pyrrhic, "" 
 
 JHtrochee, double Trochee, ^ 
 
 Diiambus, double Iambus, 
 Ionic d majore. Spondee and Pyrrhic, 
 Ionic a minore, Pyrrhic and Spondee. 
 
 Oioriambus, Trochee and Iambus, 
 
 Antispast, Iambus and Trochee, ^ 
 
 £'irst epitrit. Iambus and Spondee, 
 
 Second epitrit. Trochee and Spondee, 
 
 Third epitrit. Spondee and Iambus, 
 
 Fourth epitrit. Spondee and Trochee, 
 
 First paeon, Trochee and Pyrrhic, 
 
 Second paeon, Iambus and Pyrrhic, 
 
 Third paeon, Pyrrhic and Trochee, " 
 
 Fourth paeon, Pyrrhic and Iambus, "~ 
 
 as, corpdrH. 
 as, bSnttds. 
 as, cUp 
 
 as, miran. 
 as. 
 
 as, cep^rdnt. 
 
 as, &mabas. 
 as, feeisst 
 
 as, ac<xpissEnt. 
 as, titUrUtr. 
 as, erildlt^. 
 as, Umavtras. 
 as, confldirUm, 
 as, S,d6lescens. 
 as, cred&litas. 
 as, v&recundUs. 
 as, S/mdverunt. 
 as, vrnpiravl. 
 as, a/Uctorlids. 
 as, fedissefls. 
 as, admdnltiis, 
 as, dmdbills. 
 as, pSirllis. 
 as, c&UrUas 
 
PROSODY. 371 
 
 5. IsochronoM feet are those whose average quantity 
 is equal. Thus, a Dactyl is isochronous with a Spondee ; 
 a Trochee, with an Iambus, etc. 
 
 MBTEB AND VERSES. 
 
 § 296. 1. Metre is the arraugement of syllables and 
 feet into verses. 
 
 2. There are six kinds of metre, named from the 
 fundamental foot employed in each : to wit, Dac- 
 tylio, Anapaestic, Iambic, Trochaic, Ghoriamhic, and 
 Ionic. 
 
 3. A verse is a number of feet arranged in a certain 
 order, constituting a line of poetry. Two verses are 
 called a Distich; half a verse, a Hemistich. 
 
 4. Verses are sometimes named from the author who 
 used them principally ; as. Anacreontic, from Anacreon ; 
 Asclepiadic, from Asclepi&des ; Sapphic, from Sappho, 
 etc., — sometimes from the number of feet or measures 
 which they contain ; as. Pentameter, containing five feet ; 
 Hexameter, containing six feet, — sometimes from the foot 
 chiefly used ; as, Dactylic, consisting chieiiy of Dactyls ; 
 Spondaic, consisting chiefly of Spondees. 
 
 5. A verse wanting one syllable at the end is called 
 catalectic; a verse wanting a whole foot at the end is 
 called brachycatalectic ; a complete verse is called aca- 
 talectic; a verse wanting a syllable at the beginning is 
 called acephalous; a verse having a redundant syllable 
 or foot is called hypercatalectic or hypermeter. 
 
 6. A verse or part of a verse consisting of a foot and 
 a half (three half-feet) is called trihemim^r'is ; consisting 
 of two feet and a half (five half-feet), penthem)knh1s ; 
 consisting of three feet and a half (seven half-feet), hept- 
 
372 APPENDIX VIII. 
 
 hemtmSrts; consisting of four feet and a half (nine half- 
 feet), ennShemlmSrIs. 
 
 7. Scanning is dividing a verse into the feet of which 
 it is composed, or reading it metrically. 
 
 FIGURES OF PROSODY. 
 
 § 297. The figui-es of Prosody are — 
 
 (a) Synalaepha, or the elision of a final Vowel or 
 Diphthong when the next word begins with a Vowel. 
 Thus, SI omnes is read s'omnes; illi intSr se is read ilV 
 intSr se, etc. 
 
 Remark 1. — O, heu, ah, proh, vae, and vah are not elided. Other 
 long Vowels and Diphthongs sometimes stand unelided, and, if 
 so, they are generally short in the thesis of a foot. 
 
 (b) EdhUpsis, or the elision of a final m with the 
 preceding Vowel, when the next word begins with a 
 Vowel; as, 
 
 Monstr-(tZ?rt), horrend-pim), iuform-(?), ingens, cui lumSn Sdemptum. 
 
 Final s was sometimes elided in the same way by the 
 earlier poets. 
 Remark S. — M final, when unelided, is short before a Vowel. 
 
 (c) SynaerSsis, or the contraction of two separate Vow- 
 els into one syllable ; as, d^ndS, fluvi3rikii, tenuis, pro- 
 nounced dlne-de, flUv-yor&m, ten-vHs. 
 
 (d) Diaer&iis, or the separation of one syllable into 
 two ; as, silu/i for silvd; sH^ddent for suadent. 
 
 (e) Systdle, or the shortening of a syllable naturally or 
 by position long ; as, 
 
 Obstilpili, siUirunt comae ; vox faucibfla liaeslt. 
 (/) Diastdle, or lengthening a syllable naturally short, 
 (^f) Synaphdo, or such a connection between thg last 
 
PROSODY. 373 
 
 i?yllablc of one verse and the first of the next, that 
 the former is made long by position, or cut off by 
 synalaepha or ecthlipsis. 
 
 RHYTHM. 
 
 § 298. 1. Bhyihm is the alternate elevation (ar&k) or 
 depression (thesis) of the voice in pronouncing the sylla- 
 bles of a verse. The terms arsis and thesis are also ap- 
 plied to the part of the foot on which this elevation or 
 depression takes place. The arsis of a foot is on the 
 long syllable, and is determined by the fundamental foot 
 of any measure. Thus, in Dactylic measure the arsis is 
 on the first syllable, while in Iambic it is on the last ; 
 therefore a Spondee in Dactylic measure has the arsis on 
 the first syllable, and in Iambic on the last. 
 
 2. The ictus is the stress of voice in pronouncing the 
 arsis of a foot. A short syllable in the arsis of a foot is 
 sometimes lengthened by the ictus. 
 
 3. The caesura of the verse is such a division of 
 the line by the ending of a word as affords a conve- 
 nient and harmonious pause. 
 
 DACTYLIC METRE. 
 
 § 299. I. 1. An Hexameter or Heroic vei'se consists of 
 six feet, the last of which is a Spondee, and the fifth a 
 Dactyl ; but the fifth foot is sometimes a Spondee, and 
 then the verse is called Spondaic: 
 
 LudSrS I quae vel- 1 lem || cSlS,- 1 mo per- 1 mlsit &- \ gresti. Verg. Ae., 1,10. 
 In n6va fert ani-|mus || mu-|tatas | dieSrS | formas. Ov. M., 1,1. 
 Cara,d6-|um s6b8-lle3 II mag-|num Jftvls | incr§-|meiitura. Verg. 
 
 2. The caesura in Hexameter usually occurs after the 
 arsis of the third foot, as above ; frequently, however, it 
 
 32 
 
374 APPENDIX VIU. 
 
 occurs after the arsis of the fourth foot, and there is then 
 a slighter one after the arsis of the second ; as, 
 
 Indg t8-|r6 || pitSr | Aene-|as || sic | orsiis &h \ alto. 
 3. A rapid and spirited movement is produced by the 
 recurrence of Dactyls ; a slow and heavy one, by that of 
 Spondees : 
 
 Atqufi lS-|vem stlpQ-llam || crSpI- 1 tanti | urSrS | flamma. 
 ]ll-(i) in- 1 ter se | se mag- ] na vi | brachia | tollunt. 
 
 IT. 1. A Penkvmder verse consists of five feet, of 
 which the first and second may each be a Dactyl or a 
 Spondee ; the third is always a Spondee j and the fourth 
 and fifth are Anapaests {i. e. two short and one long) : 
 
 Sub qua | nunc rScii- 1 bas || arb-8rS vir- 1 g& fiilt. 
 QuaquS vS- 1 nit mult-as || ac- 1 cipit | am- 1 nls aquas. 
 
 2. It is generally, however, divided into two Hemi- 
 stichs, the first containing two Dactyls, two Spondees, or 
 a Dactyl and a Spondee, followed by a long syllable; the 
 second, two Dactyls, followed by another long syllable. 
 The caesura occurs at the close of the first Hemistich : 
 
 Sub qua | nunc rgcii- 1 bas 1| arbOrS | virg3, fii- 1 it. 
 QuaquS vS- 1 nit mult- 1 as || acclpit | amnls S- 1 quas. 
 
 3. This verse usually alternates with Hexameter, 
 forming what is called elegiac verse. 
 
 III. Aeolio Pentameter consists of five feet, the first 
 being a Spondee, a Trochee, or an Iambus, and the rest 
 Dactyls : 
 
 IV. Phalaecian Pentameter consists of the first half 
 of a I'entameter, followed by a Dactyl and a Spondee : 
 
PEOSODY. 376 
 
 "V. Tetramder a priorS consists of the first four feet 
 of an Hexameter, the fourth being a D:«,ctyl : 
 
 Garrtila | per ra- 1 moa, Svifs | obstrgplt. 
 
 Tetrameter oatalectie wants the last two syllables of 
 the fourth foot. 
 
 VI. Tetrameter a postSriorS consists of the last four 
 feet of an Hexameter, the third foot being either a Dac- 
 tyl or a Spondee : 
 
 Moblll-lbus pS-jmaria | rivis. 
 Menso- 1 rem cOliI- ] bent Ar- 1 chyta. 
 
 VII. Tetrameter Meiurus, or Falisoan, is the same as 
 Tetrameter d postSriorS, except that the last foot is an 
 Iambus instead of a Spondee: 
 
 VIII. Daotylio Trimeter consists of the last three feet 
 of an Hexameter : 
 
 Nigris I aequSri | ventis. 
 
 IX. Archiloehian Trimeter cataleotio consists of the 
 first half of a Pentameter: 
 
 ArbOri- 1 busquS c6- 1 mae. 
 
 X. Daotylio Dimeter, or Adonic, consists of a Dactyl 
 and a Spondee: 
 
 MorS p&l- 1 aestrae. 
 
 ANAPilBSTIC METRE. 
 
 § 300. I. Anapaestic Manometer consists of two Ana- 
 paests : 
 
376 APPENDIX VIII. 
 
 II. Anapaestic Dimeter consists of four Anapaests : 
 
 IA.MBIC METRE. 
 
 §301. I. lamhic Trimeter, or SenariUs, consists of six 
 Iambic feet ; but the Iambus is often replaced by a Spon- 
 dee in the first^ third, and iifth feet. A Tribrach is used 
 instead of an Iambus in any foot except the last ; and 
 the Spondee is replaced by its equivalents, the Dactyl or 
 Anapaest, and sometimes by a double Pyrrhic, in the 
 first foot. 
 
 1. 2. 8. 4. 5. 6. 
 
 There is generally a caesura in the third or fourth 
 foot. 
 
 II. The Choliambus, or axd^cov, also called Hivpo- 
 naatean, from its inventor, HippSnax, is Iambic Tri- 
 meter, or Senan&s, with a Spondee or a Trochee in the 
 last foot. 
 
 III. Iambic Tetrameter, or OctondriUs, consists of 
 eight Iambic feet, varied as in Iambic Trimeter, the 
 caesura usually falling on the arsis of the fourth 
 foot. 
 
 IV. Iambic Tetrameter cataleotic is an Iambic Tetra- 
 meter without the last syllable of the last foot, and in 
 the seventh place there is always an Iambus. 
 
 V. Iambic Trinieter catalectic, or Archilochian, is 
 Iambic Trimeter without the last syllable of the last 
 
PEOSODY. 
 
 377 
 
 foot, biit it does not admit of a Spondee in the fifth 
 place : 
 
 LOcSs I stib xp-|siSm fu-|ntis et | «Spul-|cri. 
 
 VI. Iambic Dimeter, or Arehilochian Dimeter, consists 
 of four Iambic feet, with tlie same variations as Iambic 
 Trimeter. This measure is acephalous when it wants^ the 
 first syllable, and hypermeter when a syllable is added at 
 the end : 
 
 Qui ma-|j6r ab-|sentes | h&bet. 
 Acephahus, At | fides | 6t in-|g6ni. 
 
 Hypermeter, BSde-lgitin | veros | t!(mo-|res. 
 
 VII. Iambic Dimeter catalectio, or Anacreontic, is Iam- 
 bic Dimeter without the final syllable, and with the third 
 foot always an Iambus : 
 
 VIII. The GaUiambus consists of two Iambic Di- 
 meters catalectic, the caesura occurring at the end of the 
 first Dimeter. 
 
 TROCHAIC METRE. 
 
 §302. I. Trochaic Tetrameter catalectic consists of 
 seven Trochees and a catalectic syllable. The first five 
 Trochees, and sometimes the sixth, are replaced by Tri- 
 brachs ; and the second, fourth, and sixth, by a Spondee 
 or its equivalent : 
 
 2. 
 
 s-/ s-^ ^-z 
 
 N-i* S-' 
 
 3. 
 
 4. 
 
 V-^ S>/ N^ 
 \^ --^ 
 
 5. 
 
 6. 
 
 N-/ \-/ 
 
 7. 
 
 The caesura falls upon the thesis of the fourth foot. 
 
 32* 
 
378 APPENDIX VIII. 
 
 II. Sapphic vei-se, so called from the poetess Sappho, 
 consists of five feet, — the first, fourth, and fifth being 
 Trochees, the Second a Spondee, and the third a Dactyl. 
 The second foot is sometimes a Trochee : 
 
 Audi- 1 et ci- 1 ves acti- 1 iss8 | f erriim. 
 
 The caesura falls upon the arsis of the third foot. 
 
 III. Phalaeoian verse, so called from the old Greek 
 poet Phalaecus, consists of five feet, — a Spondee, a Dac- 
 tyl, and three Trochees : 
 
 IV. Trochaic Dimeter caialeotic consists of three Tro- 
 chees — the second being sometimes replaced by a Spondee 
 or Dactyl — and a catalectic syllable. This measure may 
 also be scanned as Iambic Dimeter acephalous (§301, 
 VI.): 
 
 At f I- 1 des 6t I ingS- 1 ni ; 
 
 At I fides I etin-lggni. 
 
 CHORIAMBIO METKB. 
 
 § 303. I. Choriambic Pentameter consists of a Spondee, 
 three Choriambi, and an Iambus : 
 
 Tenta- 1 ris ntimg- 1 roa. | Ut mgllus | quidqnld 6rit | pStl. 
 
 II. Choriambic Tetrameter consists of three Choriambi 
 and a Bacchius. The Iambus of the first foot is some- 
 times replaced by a Spondee : 
 
 Saep6 trans fin- 1 em jactilo | nobllls ex- 1 pSdito. 
 
 III. Asclepiadic Tetrameter, so called from the poet 
 Asclepiades, consists of a Spondee, two Choi iambi, and 
 
PROSODY, 37S 
 
 an Iambus, the caesura occurring at the end of the first 
 Choriambus : 
 
 Maeoe- 1 nas, ata.vis |] editS reg- 1 IbOs. 
 
 This verse is sometimes scanned as Dactylic Pentame- 
 ter catalectic (§ 299, II.) : 
 
 Maece-|nas, at5,-|via || edItS | reglbiis. 
 
 IV. Choriambio Trimeter, or Glyconio, so called from 
 the poet Glyco, is composed of a Spondee, a Choriambus, 
 and an Iambus, the Spondee being sometimes replaced by 
 a Trochee or an Iambus : 
 
 lUi I robiir 6t aes | triplex. 
 
 V. Choriambio Trimeter Gataleclie, or Pherecratio (from 
 the poet PherecrSites), is composed of a Spondee, a Cho- 
 riambus, and a catalectic syllable ; in other words, it is a 
 catalectic Glyconio. The Spondee is sometimes replaced 
 by a Trochee, Anapaest, or Iambus : 
 
 Nigrls I aequ6ra ven- 1 tis. 
 
 VI. A combination of Glyconic and Pherecratio pro- 
 duces Priapean verse : 
 
 VII. Choriambio Dimder consists of a Choriambus 
 and a Bacchius: 
 
 SangulnS vip- 1 Srlno. 
 
 IONIC METRE. 
 
 §304. I. Ionia a mdjorS, or Sot&dio (from the poet 
 Sotades), is . composed of three Greater Ionics and a 
 Spondee. The Ionics are often replaced by Ditrochees, 
 
380 APPENDIX vm. 
 
 and the long syllable of the Trochees by two short 
 ones: 
 
 1. 2. 3. 4. 
 
 II. lonio a, mlno7-S is composed entirely of Lesser 
 Ionics : 
 
 SImiil unctos I TlbSrinis I htimgros la-Ivit In uudis. 
 
 COMPOUND METRES. 
 
 § 305. I. Greater Alcaic is composed of two Iambi 
 and a catalectic syllable, followed by a Choriambus and 
 an Iambus which may be scanned as two Dactyls. The 
 first Iambus is frequently replaced by a Spondee. The 
 caesura occurs after the catalectic syllable : 
 
 VIdes I tit al-|ta || stet uIvS can-|didam. 
 
 II. Dadylico-trochaio Tetrameter, or Lesser Alcaic, con- 
 sists of two Dactyls followed by two Trochees : 
 
 III. Dactylico-trochaic, or Archilochian Heptameter, 
 consists of the Dactylic Tetrameter a prXorS (§ 299, 
 v.), followed by three Trochees; the caesura after the 
 fourth foot: 
 
 Solvltilr I acrls hi- 1 ems gra-|ta vIcS || verls | et Fartvonl. 
 
 IV. Paotylioo-iambic, or Ekgiambus, is composed of 
 two and a half Dactylic feet, followed by an Iambic Di- 
 meter (§301, VI.): 
 
 ScrlbSi-fi 1 ver8lcti-|16s || amo-lrfi per-|cu3suin | grivi. 
 
PEOSODY. 381 
 
 The caesura occurs after the penthemimeris, as in Hex- 
 ameter. 
 
 V. lambico-dactyUo verse, or lambelegus, consists of 
 an Iambic Dimeter (§ 301, VI.) followed by a Dactylic 
 penthemimeris; the caesura occurring after the fourth 
 foot: 
 
 TQ vi- 1 na, Tor- 1 quato | mO ve || consillg | pressS inS- 1 o. 
 
 STANZAS. 
 
 §306. 1. A combination of verses recurring in a cer- 
 tain order is called a Stanza or Strophe. A poem con- 
 taining stanzas of two lines is called Distrdphon; of 
 three lines, Tristrdphon ; of four lines, TetrastrOphon. 
 
 2. A poem consisting of only one kind of metre is 
 called Monooolon; of two kinds, Dicolon; of three 
 kinds, Tricolon. 
 
 HOKATIAN METRES. 
 
 § 307. In the lyric poems of Horace there are twenty 
 different species of metre, used in nineteen different com- 
 binations, which are arranged below according to the 
 frequency of their use: 
 
 1. Two Greater Alcaics (? 305, 1.), one Iambic Dimeter Hyper- 
 meter (§ 301, VI.), and one Lesser Alcaic (? 305, II.), 
 
 2. Three Sapphics (P02, II.) and one Adonic (?299, X.). 
 
 3. One Glyconic (?,303, IV.) and one Aaclepiadic (|303, III.). 
 
 4. One Iambic Trimeter {§301, II.) and one Iambic Dimeter 
 (P01,VI.). 
 
 5. Three Asclepiadics (?303, III.) and one Glyconic (?303, 
 
 IV.). 
 
 6. Two Asclepiadics (2303, III.), one Pherecratic (|303, V.), 
 ttnd one Glyconic (2 303, IV.). 
 
 7. Asclepiadic (303, III.).- 
 
382 APPENDIX vni. 
 
 8. One Hexameter (299, I.) and one Dactylic Tetrameter d 
 posteriori (g 299, VI.). 
 
 9. Choriambic Pentameter (?303, I.). 
 
 10. One Hexameter (2299, 1.) and one Iambic Dimeter (J 301, 
 VL). 
 
 11. Iambic Trimeter (?301, 1.). 
 
 12. One Choriambic Dimeter (§303, VII.) and one Choriam- 
 bic Tetrameter (J 303, II.). 
 
 13. One Hexameter (§ 299, I.) and one Iambic Trimeter 
 (2301, L). 
 
 14. One Hexameter (299, 1.) and one Dactylic Trimeter cata- 
 lectic(§299, IX.). 
 
 15. One Iambic Trimeter (J 301, I.), one Dactylic Trimeter 
 catalectic (2299, IX.), and one Iambic Dimeter (2301, VL). 
 The last two frequently constitute an Elegiambus (2305, IV.). 
 
 16. One Hexameter (2299, I.), one Iambic Dimeter (2301, 
 VI.), and one Dactylic Trimeter catalectic (2 299, IX.). The 
 last two frequently constitute an lambelegus (2305, V.). 
 
 17. One Archilochian Heptameter (2 305, III.), and one Iam- 
 bic Trimeter catalectic (2 301, V.). 
 
 18. One Iambic Dimeter acephalous (2 301, VI.) and one Iam- 
 bic Trimeter catalectic (2 301, V.). 
 
 19. Ionic a minorl (2 304, II.). 
 
 METRICAL KEY TO THE ODES OF HORACE. 
 
 § 308. The following is an alphabetical list of the first 
 words of the Odes, with the number in the preceding 
 section annexed, where the metre is explained: 
 
 Aeli, vetusto No. 1 
 
 Aequam memento 1 
 
 Albi, ne doloas 5 
 
 Altera jam teritur 13 
 
 Angustam, amice 1 
 
 At, deornm 4 
 
 Audivere, Lyce 6 
 
 Bacchum in remOtia 1 
 
 Beatus ille i 
 
 Coelo supinas 1 
 
 Coelo tonantem No. 1 
 
 Cim tu, Lydia 3 
 
 Cur me querelia 1 
 
 Delicta majorum 1 
 
 Descende coelo 1 
 
 Dianam, tenerae 6 
 
 Diffugere nives 14 
 
 Dive, (juem proles 3 
 
 Divis orte bonis 5 
 
 Donarem patSras 7 
 
KEY TO THE ODES OF HOEACE. 
 
 383 
 
 Donee gratus eram No. 3 
 
 Eheu ! fugSces 1 
 
 Est mihi nonum 2 
 
 Et thure et fidibus 3 
 
 Exegi monu men turn 7 
 
 Extremum Tanaim 5 
 
 Eaune, nympharum 2 
 
 Eesto quid potius die 3 
 
 Herculis ritu 2 
 
 Horrida tempestas 16 
 
 Ibis Liburnis 4 
 
 Icci, beatis 1 
 
 Ille et nefaSto 1 
 
 Impios parrae 2 
 
 Inclusam Danaen 5 
 
 Intactis opulentior 3 
 
 Integer vitae . 2 
 
 Intermissaj Venus, diu 3 
 
 Jam jam efficaci 11 
 
 Jam pauca aratro 1 
 
 Jam satis terris 2 
 
 Jam veris comites 5 
 
 Justum et tenacem 1 
 
 Laudabunt alii 8 
 
 Lupis et agnis 4 
 
 Lydia, die, per omnes 12 
 
 Maecenas atavis 7 
 
 Mal^ soluta 4 
 
 Martiis caelebs 2 
 
 Mater saeva Cupidinnm .... 3 
 
 Mercurij- facunde 2 
 
 Mercuri, nam te 2 
 
 Mieerarum est 19 
 
 Iflollis inertia 10 
 
 Montium custos 2 
 
 Motum ex Metello 1 
 
 Musis amicus 1 
 
 Natis in usum 1 
 
 Ne forte credas 1 
 
 Ne sit anoillae 2 
 
 Nolis longa ferae 5 
 
 Nondum subacta 1 
 
 Non,ebur neque lureum , . . ,18 
 
 Non semper imbres . . . . No. 1 
 
 Non usitatQ, 1 
 
 Non vides, quanto 2 
 
 Nox erat 10 
 
 Nullam, Vare, sacra 9 
 
 Nullus argento 2 
 
 Nunc est bibendum 1 
 
 crudelis adhuo 9 
 
 diva, gratum 1 
 
 fons Bandusiae 6 
 
 matrepulchrS, 1 
 
 nata meoum 1 
 
 navis, referent 6 
 
 saepe mecum 1 
 
 Venus, reglna 2 
 
 Odi prof anum 1 
 
 Otium Divos 2 
 
 Parciiis junctas 2 
 
 Parous Dcorum 1 
 
 Parentis olim 4 
 
 Pastor quum traheret 5 
 
 Persicos odi, puer 2 
 
 Petti, nihil me 15 
 
 Phoebe, silvarumque 2 
 
 Phoebus volentem ........ 1 
 
 Pindarum quisquis 2 
 
 Poscimur : si quid 2 
 
 Quae cura Patrum 1 
 
 Qualem ministrum 1 
 
 Quando repostum 4 
 
 Quantum distet ab InS,cho ... 3 
 
 Quern tu, Melpomene 3 
 
 Quem virum aut heroa ,•.... 2 
 
 Quid bellicosus 1 
 
 Quid dedicatum 1 
 
 Quid fies, Asterie 6 
 
 Quid immerentes 4 
 
 Quid obseratis 11 
 
 Quid tibi vis 8 
 
 Quis desiderio 5 
 
 Quis multa gracilis 6 
 
 Quo me, Bacche .,..".... 3 
 
 Quo, quo, scelesti ruitis . , , , 4 
 
384 
 
 APPENDIX IX. 
 
 Rectiiis vives No. 2 
 
 Rogare longo 4 
 
 Soriberis Vario 5 
 
 Septimi, Gades 2 
 
 Sio te Diva potens 3 
 
 Snlvitur acris hiems 17 
 
 Te maris et terrae 8 
 
 Tu ne quaesieris 9 
 
 Tyrrbena regum No. 1 
 
 Ulla si juris 2 
 
 Uxor pauperis Ibyoi 3 
 
 Volox amoenum 1 
 
 Vidcs, ut alta, 1 
 
 Vile potabis ^ . 2 
 
 Vitas binnuleo C 
 
 Vixi puellis 1 
 
 APPENDIX IX. 
 
 FIGURES. 
 
 § 309. Figures of Etymology. 
 
 1. Prosth&is is prefixing a letter or syllable to a word; 
 as, glr-g^nB, gt-gnS, for gSnS. 
 
 2. Paragoge is affixing a letter or syllable to a word ; 
 as, dmariSr for dmdri. 
 
 3. Epenth^sis is the insertion of a letter or syllable in 
 the middle of a word ; as, cer-n-o for oSr-o. 
 
 4. AphaerSsis is cutting off a letter or syllable from 
 the beginning of a word ; as, 'st for est. 
 
 5. Apocdpe is cutting off a letter or syllable from the 
 end of a word ; as, vS for vK 
 
 6. Syncdpe is taking away a letter or syllable from the 
 middle of a word ; as, fer-rS for jer-t-r^. 
 
 7. Orasis is the blending of two Vowels into one ; as, 
 cogS for cd-&gd. 
 
 8. Aiitith^is is putting one letter in the place of an- 
 other ; as, v8lS for vSlS; oUl for illi. 
 
 9. MetatMsis is changing the order of letters ; as, certUs 
 for erelUs. 
 
 § 310. Figures of Syntax. 
 1. Ellipsis is the omission of one or more words in a 
 sentence. It includes — 
 
FIGURES OF SYNTAX. 385 
 
 (a) Asyndeton, or the omission of Copulative Con- 
 junctions in animated discourse; as, copids educU, &oi&n 
 instruct. 
 
 (b) Zeugma, or the connection of a word with two 
 constructions while it is properly applicable to only one ; 
 as, polMoenWir se impiratS, faoturos; se nunquam contra 
 pdpUi&m Eomdnum eonjurdssS. (Here the second Infin- 
 itive Proposition depends not on pollieentur, but on dlcunt 
 implied in it.) 
 
 (o) Syllepsis, or the agreement of an Adjective or Verb 
 with one of several different words, to all of which it 
 equally belongs ; as, mens &nlm, U r&tio, &, consilium in 
 sSnibus est. Sdciis St regS rScepto. 
 
 (d) Prdlepsis, or placing the parts after the whole 
 without repeating, the Verb; as, consules discedunt, 
 alter &d urbSm, altSr to N'&mMi&m. 
 
 2. Pleonasm is using more words than are necessary. 
 It includes — 
 
 (rt) Polysyndeton, or redundancy of Conjunctions; as, 
 ^ p&tSr, St m,dtSr, H libSri. 
 
 (b) Hendi&dys (one-by-two), or the connection of two 
 words by St when one is an attributive of the other ; as, 
 p&tSns St auro for aurels pdtSrls. 
 
 (c) Periphrasis, or a roundabout mode of expression ; 
 as, rSgvnd nocUs for lund. 
 
 3. Hhalliige is a change of construction, or a departure 
 from the established usage. It includes — 
 
 (a) SynSsis, or a referring to the sense rather than the 
 form; as, plebs clamant; SquitaMs qui praemissi grant; 
 med ippiiis causd. 
 
 (b) An&cdluthon, or beginning a sentence in one way 
 
 33 
 
386 APPENDIX X. 
 
 and ending it in another, so that the harmony of its 
 parts is destroyed, 
 
 (c) Antiptosis, or using one case for another; as, nomSn 
 mKhi ArctiirS est, — instead of Arcturus. 
 
 4. HyperbOion is a change in the usual order of words 
 or propositions. It includes — 
 
 (a) Anastrdphe, or inversion of the natural order of 
 words; as, urbSm circUm. 
 
 (6) HystSron prot&ron (hind-part-before), or inverting 
 the natural order of the sense ; as, pdiXr tuus v&M-nS? 
 mvitnef 
 
 (c) Hypalldge, or an interchange of constructions ; as, 
 
 In nOvS fert dntmUs mutatas (BcirS formas 
 CorpOra, 
 
 instead of eorpOrd In nOvds formas mutaM. 
 
 {d) Tmesis, or the separation by intervening words of 
 the parts of a compound ; as, priiis advenift qu&m visiis est. 
 
 APPENDIX X. 
 
 MODELS OF ANALYSIS. 
 
 (As these models are intended for permanent use, they include der- 
 ivation, of which beginners know nothing.) 
 
 1. To analyze a Noun, state — 
 
 (1) What kind of Noun. 
 
 (2) Gender. 
 
 (3) Declension, and Class, if of the 3d Declension. 
 
 (4) Decline it. 
 '(5) Deiivation. 
 
 (6) What case, and why. 
 
 (7) The rule. 
 
 Example.'— ImpgratSr vSnIt. Imp&raUir is a common 
 
MODELS OP ANALYSIS. 387 
 
 Noun, masc, Third, fifth Class ; impSraiSr, impiratorts, im- • 
 pSratori, etc. (throughout) ; derived {lonn-iinp&ro by adding 
 the ending -or, which denotes the Doer, to the Supine-stem ; 
 and impSrU from in and pdrU; found in the Nominative 
 Singular, Subject of vSnit. The Subject of a Finite Verb is 
 in the Nominative. 
 
 2. To analyze an Adjective, state — 
 
 (1) What part of speech. 
 
 (2) Class. 
 
 (3) Decline it. 
 
 (4) Degree. 
 
 (5) Compare it. 
 
 (6) Derivation. 
 
 (7) Case, number, and gender, and why. 
 
 (8) Eule. 
 
 Example.— PastSr est priidens. Prudens is an Adjec- 
 tive of the Third .Class ; priidens, prUdena; prudentis, pru- 
 dentis, etc. (throughout) ; Positive Degree ; priidens, prii- 
 dentidr, prUdentisstmus ; contracted form of provtdens, Pres- 
 ent Participle ot provided, compounded oi pro and video; 
 found in the Nominative Singular masculine, agreeing with 
 pastUr, and forming part of the Predicate. An Adjective in 
 the Predicate agrees with the Subject. 
 
 3. To analyze a Substantive-Personal Pronoun, state — 
 
 (1) What kind of Pronoun. 
 
 (2) What person. 
 
 (3) Decline it. 
 
 (4) What case, and why. 
 
 (5) Eule. 
 
 Example. — Mihl libriim dSdit. Mihi is a Substantive- 
 Personal Pronoun of the first person ; &g^ mei, etc. (through- 
 out); found in the Dative Singular, Indirect Object of dMit, 
 The Indirect Object oj a Verb is in the Dative. 
 
388 APPENDIX X. 
 
 4. To analyze a Possessive Pronoun, state— 
 
 (1) What kind of Pronoun. 
 
 (2) Person (and number of Primitive). 
 
 (3) Decline it. 
 
 (4) Derivation. 
 
 (5) Where found, and why. 
 
 (6) Rule. 
 
 Example. — Pa,t6r nostSr. Nbst&r is a Possessive Pro- 
 noun of the first person Plural ; nosiSr, nodrd, nddritm, etc. 
 (throughout); derived from ?ios; found in the Nom. Sing, 
 masc, agreeing with p&t&r. Adjective words agree with the 
 Nouns which they limit, in gender, number, and case. 
 
 5. To analyze a Relative or Demonstrative, state — 
 
 (1) What kind of Pronoun. 
 
 (2) Decline it. 
 
 (3) Derivation, if derived. 
 
 (4) Antecedent. 
 
 (5) Where found, and why. 
 
 (6) Rule. 
 
 Example. — Puelia quSm vidi. Qu&m is a Relative Pro- 
 noun; qui, quae, qudd, etc. (throughout); reterrmg to puellti 
 as its Antecedent, with which it agrees in number and per- 
 son; found in the Ace. Sing, fem.. Direct Object of vldi. 
 The Relative Pronoun agrees, etc. 
 
 6. To analyze a Regular Verb, state — 
 
 (1) What part of speech. 
 
 (2) Transitive or Intransitive. 
 
 (3) What Conjugation. 
 
 (4) Give the principal parts. 
 
 (5) Derivation. 
 
 (6) Where found (mood, tense, voice, person, and 
 
 number), and why, 
 
 (7) Rule. 
 
MODELS OF ANALYSIS. 389 
 
 ExAMPiJ!. — Imp6rat5r centurioues convScavit. Conv6eavtt 
 is a Verb, Transitive, First; convdeU, convdcdre, eonv6cavl, con- 
 vdcdtiLm; compounded of edn for eitm, and v6e8; found in the 
 Indicative Present-Perfect Active, third person Singular, 
 agreeing with im,pSrdidr as its Subject. The Verb agrees with 
 its Subject in number and person. * 
 
 7. To analyze an Irregular Verb, state the same, with the 
 addition of tlie fact that it is Irregular. 
 
 Example. — Vita, brgvis est. Est is a Verb, Intransitive, 
 Irregular ; siim, ess&, fid, etc. 
 
 8. To analyze an Adverb, state — 
 
 (1) What sort of Adverb. 
 
 (2) What Degree, and compare it. 
 
 (3) Derivation and formation. 
 
 (4) What it limits. * 
 
 Example. — Milites fortitSr pugnabant. ForMSr is a 
 Modal Adverb, Positive Degree ; fortUir, forti^, fortissime; 
 derived from fortts by adding -t&r to the stem ; and limits 
 pugnabant, expressing the manner of the fighting, and an- 
 swering the question "How?" 
 
 9. To analyze a Preposition, state^ 
 
 (1) What part of speech. 
 
 (2) What case follows it. 
 
 (3) Derivation. 
 
 (4) Object. 
 
 (5) What the adjunct limits, and what question it 
 
 answers. 
 Example. — Aedui citra Kheniim habitant. GUrd is a 
 Preposition followed by the Accusative; originally the Abl. 
 Sing. fem. of the Adjective cit&r; having Rhen'&m as its Ob- 
 ject. The adjunct citrd Bhen'&m limits h&bUant, and answers 
 the question "Where?"- -a local limitation. 
 33* 
 
390 APPEKDIX X. 
 
 " 10. To analyze a Conjunction, state — 
 
 (1) What sort of Conjunction. 
 
 (2) Derivation. 
 
 (3) What it connects. 
 
 (4) What sort of Proposition it introduces. 
 
 11. To analyze a Proposition, state — 
 
 (1) Whether Principal or Dependent. 
 
 (2) Class. 
 
 (3) Subject and Predicate. 
 
 (4) What part of speech, if dependent. 
 
 (5) What it limits, and how. 
 
 (6) What question it answers. 
 
 Example. — Veni fit viderSm. Ut viderem is a Depend- 
 ent Final Proposition ; &gd Subject, vtder&m Predicate ; a 
 Noun, Dative of Purpose limiting venl and expressing the 
 purpose of the comitg. It answers the question " Why ?" 
 "To what end?" 
 
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY. 
 
 A or AB 
 
 A. 
 
 a or ab (Prep.), from, hy ; g 120, 2. 
 
 ab-d5, -ere, abdidi, abditum, to run 
 ^or concealment, to hide. 
 
 ab-eS, -ire, abii, Jibitiim, to go aicay. 
 
 absens, -entis (absum), ahtent. 
 
 ab-solv5, -ere, -solvi, sSlutum, to 
 free from, clear, absolve, acquit. 
 
 ab-sum, -esse, -fuT, -futurus, to he 
 away from, to he absent. Mini- 
 mum abfuit, he lacked very little, 
 was very near, 
 
 ab-undS, -are, -avi, -atum, to abound. 
 
 ab-ut5r, -I, -iisus, to abuse, 
 
 ao (Cop. Conj., § 123, Hem. S), and, 
 
 ac-cedS, -ere, -cessi, -cessum, to ap- 
 proach. 
 
 ac-cend5, -ere, accendi, accensum (ad 
 a7id candS), to set on Jire. 
 
 ac-cidfi, -erS, accidi (ad 'a7id eadS), 
 to happen. 
 
 ae-cipi5, -ere, -cepi, -oeptum (ad 
 and capiS), to receive. 
 
 ac-currtS, -ere, -curri, seldom -cu- 
 curri, -eursiim (ad and currS), to 
 run to. 
 
 ae-custS, -are, -avT, -atiim (ad and 
 causS), to bring to trial, accuse, re- 
 proach. 
 
 acer or acria, -is, -e (^ 59, Hem. S), 
 sharp, 
 
 aoerbus, -a, -um, hitter. 
 
 Aobaiaj -ae, Achaia. 
 
 &cies, -ei, edge^ point, line of battle. 
 
 AEDIFICIUM 
 
 acriter (Adv. acer), sharply; g 119. 
 
 ad (Prep., §120, 1), to, at, Boards. 
 
 ad-do, -ere, addidi, additum, to add, 
 
 ad-diic5, -ere, -diixi, -ductum, to lead 
 to or against, to prompt, excite. 
 
 adeo (Adv.), so. 
 
 Adherbal, -alis, u N}imidiaH prince, 
 son of Micipsa' and half-brother to 
 Jugurtha. 
 
 ad-bibeS, -ere, -ui, -itum, to bring to, 
 apply, employ. 
 
 ad-huo (Adv.), as yet. 
 
 ad-itiis, -us, approach. 
 
 ad-miror, -ari, -atus, to wonder, 
 
 ad-mitt5, -ere, -misi, missum, to 
 send forth. Bquo admisso, with 
 his horse at full speed, 
 
 ad-monefi, -ere, -monui, -monitiim, 
 to remind. 
 
 ad-spici5, -erS, -spexi, -spectum, to 
 look at, behold, 
 
 adulatiS, -onis, flattery, 
 
 ad-iilescens, -entis, young, a young 
 man. 
 
 ad-veniS, -irS, -veni, -ventum, to ar- 
 rive. 
 
 ad-ventus, -us, arrival, approach. 
 
 adversSr, -ari, -atus, to object, op- 
 pose. 
 
 ad-versus, adversum (Prep.), against, 
 
 ad-vertS, -erS, -verti, -versum, to 
 turn towards. Participle, adver- 
 sUs, adversum, used as Preposition. 
 
 aedif ioium, -i, building. From 
 391 
 
AEDIFICO 
 
 392 
 
 ANTIOCHIA 
 
 aedifieS, -are, -avi, -atum, ?o build. 
 
 Aeduus, -i, an Aeduan. 
 
 aeger, -gra, -grum, sick, lame. 
 
 Aegimurum, -i, Aegimurtim. 
 
 aequor, -oriSj a level surface, thesea. 
 From 
 
 aequus, -a, -um, level, even, juat. 
 
 aer, -le, air. 
 
 aestas, -tatis, aummer. 
 
 aestimS, -are, -avi, -atum, to value, 
 esteem. 
 
 aetas, -tatis, age^ life. 
 
 af-fer3, -ferre, attulT, allatiim, to 
 bring to. 
 
 Africa, -ae, Africa. Hence 
 
 Africanus, -a, -um, African: a sur- 
 name of Scipio on account of his 
 exploits in Africa. 
 
 ager, &gri, field, land, territory. 
 
 Agesilaiis, -i, Agcsilaua, a distin- 
 guished Spartan king. 
 
 ag-grediQr, -i, -gressus, to go to, ap~ 
 proack, attack. 
 
 agilis, -e, active. 
 
 agmen, -inis, an army on the march. 
 
 agniis, -1, lamb, 
 
 agS, -ere, egi, actum, to lead, drive; 
 (of time), to spend. 
 
 agricSlS, -ae, farmer. 
 
 alS, -ae, wing. 
 
 alScer or -cris, -5, cheerful; whence 
 
 alacritiis, -tatis, eagerness, prompt- 
 netts. 
 
 Alexander, -dri, Alexander, king of 
 Macedonia. 
 
 lilieims, -a, -um, belonging to another, 
 foreign, 
 
 aliquandS, at some time. 
 
 Sliqiiantus, -a, -iim, somewhat greatj 
 considerable ; aliquantuin agri, a 
 considerable piece of ground. 
 
 aliquis, -qua, -qu5d or -quid, some, 
 any, some one j ^ 89. 
 
 filter, otherwise 
 
 aiiQSi -a, - ud (g 56, Rtm. 1 and S), 
 
 another {of many). 
 Allobrox, -br5g-Is, an Allobrogian. 
 al5, -ere, alui, alitiim a}id altilm, ta 
 
 support. 
 Alpea, -ium, the Alps. 
 altSr, -E, -iim (§ 5fi), another {of two)^ 
 
 second. 
 altitudS, -inis, height, depth. 
 altus, -a, -um, high, deep. 
 amans, -antia, fond; (as Noun), 
 
 lover. 
 ambillS, -are, -avi, atum, to walk, 
 am ens, -entis, mad. • 
 
 amicitia, -a.G, friendship ; from 
 amicus, -i, friend. 
 a-mittS, -erS, -misi, -missum, to lose, 
 amnls, -is (§33, Bern. 5, Exc. 2), 
 
 river. 
 am8, -are, -avi, -atum, to love. 
 ani6r, -oris, love. 
 
 amplector, -i, -plexGs, to embrace. 
 ainpliis, -S,, -um, large, ample; am- 
 
 pliQs, more. 
 an (Interrog. Disjunc. Conj.), or. 
 ancilla, -ae, maid-sei^vant. 
 ancora, -ae, anchor. [Borne, 
 
 Ancils Martiiis, -T, fourth king of 
 angustus, -a, -um, narrow. 
 animS,, -ae, breath, life. 
 aniraadverttS, -ere, -verti, -versiim^ 
 
 to turn the mind to, to perceive. 
 iinimS.1, -alis (§39), animal. 
 animiis, -i, mind, aonl. 
 annus, -i, year. 
 anser, -eris, goonc. 
 ante (§120, 1), before. 
 antea, oforetime, before. 
 antenna, -ae, sail-ynrd. 
 antequam (often separated j Temp. 
 
 Conj.), before. 
 Antigdniis, -T, Antigonus. 
 AntiSchia, -ae, Antioch, a city of 
 Syria. 
 
ANTIOCHUS 
 
 393 
 
 EELLO 
 
 Antiocbiis, -i, Antiochua. 
 
 anxius, -a, -um, anxious, uneasy, 
 
 aper, -pn, wild hoar. 
 
 aperiS, -ire, S.perui, apertum, to open. 
 
 ApollS, -inxs, Apollo; ab Apolliue 
 
 petere, to inquire of Apollo. 
 appel]5, -are, -avi, -atum, to call. 
 appetens, -entis, eager for. 
 ap-pr6pinqu5, -are, -avi, -atiim, to 
 
 approach. 
 aptus, -a, -um, Jit, suitable, 
 apud, with, among; (of persons), at 
 
 the houae of in the works of. 
 aqua, -ae, water. 
 aquila, -ae, eagle. 
 ara, -ae, altar. 
 Arar or Araris, -is (§ 33, Hem. 1), the 
 
 Saone, a river of Gaul, 
 aratrum, -i, plough. 
 arbttror, -ari, -atue, to think, eup- 
 
 pose, 
 arbor, -6ris (§38, Exc. 1), tree. 
 arcessS, -ere, -Ivi, -itum, to call, 
 
 bring. 
 Arcturus, -i, Arctnrus, 
 arcus, -us, bow; § 4=8, Hem. ^. 
 arduus, -a, um, high, difficult. 
 argentum, -i, silver. 
 argutus, -a, -um, sagacious. 
 aries, -etis, ram, battering-ram. 
 Ariovistus, -i, a German king. 
 Aristldes, -is, an Athenian, surnamed 
 
 the Just, from his integrity, 
 arma, -oriim, arms. ^ 
 arm6, -are, -avI, -atum, to arm. 
 aro, -are, -avi, -atiim, to plough. 
 ar-ripio, -ere, -ripui, -reptum, to 
 
 seize, snatch up. 
 ars, art-is, skill, art. 
 arx, arc-is, citadel. 
 as, assis, a pound of copper (about 
 
 sixteen and two-third cents of our 
 
 money); in general, a thing of 
 
 small value. 
 
 ascends, - ere, -cendi, -censum, to 
 
 aacend. 
 asinus, -i, aaa. 
 
 asper, -a, -um (g 55, Eem. S), rough. 
 aspiciS, -ere, -spexi, -spectum, to 6e- 
 
 hold, eee. 
 Athenae, -arum, Alhena. 
 Atheniensis, -is, Athenian. 
 atque or ac (Cop. Conj.}, and (§123, 
 
 Rem. S), as, than (§ 123, 11). 
 Atrcbas, -atis, an Atrebatian. 
 atrox, -ocis, savage, cruel, fierce. 
 attingS, -ere, attigi, attactiim, to 
 
 touch, 
 auctoritas, -tatis, authority, influence, 
 audacter (Adv.)j boldly. 
 audax, -acis, bold, daring, 
 audeS, -ere, ausus, to dare, 
 audiens (Participial Adj.), hearing, 
 
 attentive; audiens dicto, attentive 
 
 to orders, obedient, 
 audiS, -ire, -ivi, -itiim, to hear, 
 auge5, -e-re, auxi, auctum, to in- 
 
 creaae, aioell. 
 aureiis, -a, -um, golden, From 
 aurum, -i, gold. 
 aut, or ; aut — aut, either — or, 
 auxilium, -i, aid, help, 
 avaritia,,-ae, covetousneaa. 
 avarus, -a, -um, greedy, covetous. 
 avide (Adv.), eagerly. 
 avxdus, -a, iim, deairoua, eager. 
 avis, -is, bird ; § 33, Hem, ^. 
 avoc5, - are, -avi, -atum, to call 
 
 away, separate. 
 
 B. 
 
 Babylon, -onis, Babylon, 
 
 Balbus, -i, Balbus [stammerer], 
 
 barbarus, -a, -uTn^foreign, barbiroua^ 
 
 be ate, happily. 
 
 beatus, -a, -um, happy. 
 
 BelgSt, -ae, w Belgian. 
 
 bell8, -are, .-5,vi, -atilm, to wm\ 
 
BELLUM 
 
 394 
 
 CEEVU3 
 
 tellQa:, *-i, war. 
 bene (melius, optimc), well. 
 benef icium, -i, beuejit. 
 benignus, -a, -um, kind. 
 bestia, -ae, brute, beast. 
 bibS, -Src, bibi, bibitum, to drink. 
 Uibrax, -actiB, a town in Gaul. 
 biduum, -i, two daya' time. 
 biennium, -i, (too years* time. 
 bipartito (Adv.), in two diviaiona. 
 blandus, -S, -umj fiaitering. 
 Bocchus, -1, Bocehua. 
 Boeotia, -ae, Boeotia. 
 Boeotii, -orum, the Boeotians. 
 bonus, -a, -nva, good. 
 bos, bovis, ox or cow. 
 brevis, -e, short. 
 breviter (Adv.), shortly. 
 Britannia, -ae, Britain. 
 Britanuiis, S,, -um, British; (aa a 
 Noun), a Briton. 
 
 cadaver, -eris, corpse. 
 
 Cadmus, -i, Cadmus. 
 
 cadS, -ere, cecidi, casum, to fall, 
 
 caecus, -a, -um, blind. 
 
 caedS, -ere, cecidi, caesum, to cut, kill. 
 
 caelum, -i, heaven. 
 
 Caesar, -aris, Caesar. 
 
 caespes, -itis, turf. 
 
 Caius, -I, Cains. 
 
 calamitas, -tatis, misfortune. 
 
 calcar, -aris, spur. From 
 
 calx, calo-is, heel. 
 
 campester, level. From 
 
 campus, -1, plain. 
 
 canis, -is, dog. 
 
 canttS, -are, -avi, -atUm, to aing. 
 
 cantus, -us, ainging. [roomy, large. 
 
 capax, -acis, capable of receiving, 
 
 capiS, -ere, cepi, captum, to take. 
 
 sapitalis, -e, of the head, capital. 
 
 captivua, -\f prittnerf captive. 
 
 Capua, -aOj Capua. 
 
 caput, capitis, head. 
 
 carcSr, -eris, prison. 
 
 carmSn, -inis, aong, po6.n. 
 
 carS, carnis, Jlesh. 
 
 carp8, -ere, carpsi, carptum, tophwh, 
 
 Carthaginiensis, -is, Carthaginian. 
 
 CarthagS [or KarthagS), -inis, Car* 
 
 thage, 
 cariis, -a, -um, dear, 
 OassiuSj -i, Caaains. 
 castellQm, -i, tower, fort. 
 CasticUs, -1, CasticHs, 
 castigfi, -are, -avT, -atiim, to chnatiae, 
 castra, -oriim, camp. 
 casus, -us, (I falling, chance. 
 catena, ,-ae, chain, fetter. 
 Catilina, -ae, Catiline, 
 catinus or -um, -i, bo%ol, dish. 
 Cats, -onis, Cato. 
 causa, -ae, reason, cause ; Abl., for 
 
 the sake of (always placed after 
 
 the limiting word). 
 caveS, -ere, cavi, cautiim, to beware. 
 Cecrops, Cecropis, Gecropa, 
 cedS, -ere, cessi, ccssum, to yield. 
 celer or -is, -e, swift. Hence 
 celeritas, -tatis, swiftness. 
 celeriter (Adv.), sxoiftly. 
 celt), -are, -avi, -atum, to conceal. 
 cenS, -are, -avi, -atum, to dine, to aup. 
 censeS, -ere, censui, eensum, to be of 
 
 opinion, to think. 
 censor, -oris, censor, a Roman magis- 
 trate. 
 centum, hundred; §63. 
 centuriS, -Cnis, centurion, captain of 
 
 a hundred men. 
 Ceres, Cereris, Ceres. 
 cerncS, -ere, crevi, cretQm, to per^ 
 
 ceive, see. 
 certamSn, -inis, confeat, atrife, 
 certus, -a, -um, certain. 
 cervus, -i, stag. 
 
CETERA 
 
 395 
 
 COMPLTJEES 
 
 cetera, -iim (Norn. Sing. masc. not 
 
 U8ed)j the rest {of a thing), 
 oharta, -ae, paper, 
 cibiis, -T, food. 
 Cicero, -onis, Gicero, 
 Cimon, -onis, Cimon. 
 Cingetorix, -igiB, Cingetorix. 
 cingS, -ere, cinxi, cinctum, to gird. 
 cinis, -eris, ashes. 
 circiter, about. 
 circum, around. 
 circum-do, -dare, -dedi, -datum, to 
 
 put around, to anrround. 
 eircum-fundo, -ere, fudi, -I'usum, to 
 
 pour around, to surround, 
 circum-veuiS, -Ire, -veni, -ventlim, 
 
 to 8ur7-OKnd. 
 CIS, cttra, on this side of. 
 civilis, of citizens, civil. 
 civis, -is, citizen. 
 civitas, -tatis, state. 
 clamitS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to cry out 
 
 violently. 
 clamo, -are, -avi, -atum, to shout. 
 clamor, -oris, shouting. 
 clarus, -a, -iim, famous^ renowned. 
 classis, -is, fleet. 
 Claudius, -i, Claudius. 
 claud5, -ere, clausi, clausum, to shut. 
 clavis, -is, key. 
 dementia, -ae, mildness. 
 cliens, -entis, client, dependant. 
 Clodius, -1, Clodins. 
 coepi (§ 113, Bern. 1), I begin, 
 cogitS, -are, -avi, -iitiim, to think, 
 
 reflect. 
 cognomen, -inis, aurname. 
 cognoscS, -ere, -novi, cognittim, to 
 
 find outf learn, 
 cogS, -Sre, coegi, coactum, to coUeetj 
 
 bring together, comptl. 
 cSbors, -hortis, cohort 
 cohortor, -ari, -atus, tc enoonrage. 
 coUega, -ae, colleague. 
 
 colligS, -ere, -legi, -lectSm, to a8~ 
 
 semble, gather, collect. 
 coUis, -is, hill. 
 collocS, -are, -avi, -atum, to put, sta- 
 
 tionj place, set vp. 
 colloquium, conversation, conference, 
 colloquor, -ISeutus, to converse. 
 Golo, -ere, colui, cult&m, io cultivate; 
 
 (of the gods), to loorship, 
 color, -oris, color. 
 columba, -ae, dove. 
 com-edS, -onis, glutton. 
 c6m-cs, -itis, companion. 
 comitiiim, -i, o place of assembling ; 
 
 PL elections. 
 commemorS, -are, -avi, -atum, to re- 
 late, 
 com-me6, -are, -avi, -atiim, to come 
 
 and go. 
 com-missiim, -i {Part. o/com-mitt6), 
 
 a thing done, crime. 
 oom-mittS, -erg, -misi, -missum, to 
 
 bring or send together, to commence 
 
 {battle), to commit. 
 Commius, -i, Commiua. 
 commodiim, -i, convenience. 
 com-movetS, -ere, -movi, motum, to 
 
 move, disturb, disquiet, 
 communicatiS, -onis, communication. 
 communis, -ire, -ivi, -itSm, to fortify. 
 communis, -e, common. 
 commutatiS, -onis, change. 
 comparS, -are, -avi, -atum, to bring 
 
 together, acquire, 
 com-pell5, -are, -avi, -atiim, to re- 
 proach, upbraid, 
 com-pello, -ere, -piili, -pulsum, to 
 
 drive together. 
 com-peri6, -ire, -peri, -pertum, to 
 
 find out, ascertain. 
 cora~pIect5r, -i, -plexus* to embrace, 
 compleS, -ere, -plevi, -pletiim, to fill, 
 com-plures, -iiim (^72, 7), a great 
 
 many. 
 
COMI'OS 
 
 396 
 
 CONTRA 
 
 com-p6s. -5tis, having control of, 
 
 comprehends, -ere, -prehendi, -pre- 
 hensuui, to catch hold of. 
 
 compulsus, -a, -Qm {Part. eompellS). 
 
 conatiis, -us, attempt. 
 
 con-cavu8, -a, -um, hollow; manus 
 concava, the hollow of the hand. 
 
 con-ced8, -ere, -cessi, -cessum, to 
 yield. 
 
 con-cid5, -ere, -cidi, fall in battle, 
 perish. 
 
 con-ciliiim, -i, council. 
 
 con-cit6, -are, -avi, -atum, to rouaCj 
 excite, urge on, raise. 
 
 con-cordia, -ae, agreement, concord. 
 
 con-curr5, -Sre, -curri, -cursum, to 
 rtin together. 
 
 con-cursus, -us, running together. 
 
 con-outi5, -ere, -cussi, -cussum, to 
 shake violently. 
 
 con-demn3, -are, -ari, -atum, to con- 
 demn. 
 
 con-do, -ere, -didi, -ditum, to found, 
 build. 
 
 condonS, -arS, -avi, -atQm, to pre- 
 sent, give away. 
 
 con-duc5, -ere, -duxi, -ductum, to 
 bring or lead together. 
 
 con-fer5, -ferre, contuli, coUatum, to 
 bring together, compare. 
 
 con-fici5, -ere, feci,-fectum,(o^rti«A. 
 
 con-fid8, -erS, -fisus, to truat. 
 
 con-firm5, -are, -avi, -atum, to as- 
 sert, estahliuh. 
 
 c6n-fite6r, -eri, -fessus, to confess. 
 
 con-gredior, -i, -gressus, to meet with 
 (in a friendly or hostile sense). 
 
 con-jiciS, -ere, -jeci, -jectum, to 
 throw, hu: l. 
 
 con-juncti8, -5uTs, union, frieudshiji, 
 intimacy. 
 
 con-jung8, -eie, -junxi, -junc^'um, jo 
 unite. 
 
 con-jurati5, -onis, conspiracy. 
 
 con-jiirS, -are, -avT, -atum, to sweat 
 together^ conspire. 
 
 con-jux, -jugiP, husband or wife, 
 
 Conor, -arl, -atus, to attempt. 
 
 conscius, -a, -um, conscious. 
 
 con-£crib5, -ere, -scripsi, -scriptum, 
 to levy, enroll. 
 
 con-sector, -ari, -atus, to pursue 
 eagerly and overtake. 
 
 con-sequor, -i, seeutus, to pursue, at- 
 tain. 
 
 con-serviS, -are, -avi, -atum, to pre- 
 serve, save. 
 
 Considius, -i, Conuidius. 
 
 con-sidS, -ere, -sedi, -sessum, to en- 
 camp, settle. 
 
 con-silium, -i, counsel^ advice. 
 
 con-spergS, -ere, -spersi, -spersum, 
 to sprinkle. 
 
 con-stanter, firmly, persistently. 
 
 con-stat, constabat, constitit, it is 
 evident. 
 
 con-stituS, -ere, -stitui, stitutiim, to 
 determine, put, fix. 
 
 con-suosoS, -ere, -suevi, -suetum, to 
 accustom. 
 
 con-suetudS, -inis, custom, 
 
 consul, -is, consul. 
 
 consiilS, -ere, -siilui, -sultum, to 
 counsel, reflect, consult. 
 
 consultum, -i (Part.), o thing reflected 
 on; Abl., on purpose. 
 
 con-sumo, -§re, -sumpsi, -sumptum, 
 to consume. 
 
 con-temn5, -6re, -tempsi, -teraptum, 
 to despise. 
 
 con-tend6, -ere, -tendi, -tentilm, to 
 strive, contend, hasten. 
 
 con-tinens, -entis (Part. Pres.), hold- 
 ing together, continent. 
 
 con-tinenter (Adv.), continually. 
 
 con-tine6, -ere, -tinui, -tentum, ia 
 hold on all sides, keep in. 
 
 contra, against. 
 
COKTRAIIO 
 
 397 
 
 DEJICIO 
 
 con-trah5, -erSj -traxi, -tractum, to 
 
 draw together, 
 contumelia, -ae, insult, 
 con-veniS, -Ire, -veni, -ventum, to 
 
 come together, aasemble. 
 con-voc5, -are, -avi, -atum, to call 
 
 together. 
 copia, -ae, abundance; PI., /orces, 
 coquS, -ere, coxT, coctum, to cook, 
 cor, cordis, heart, 
 Corinthus, -i, Corinth, 
 corniger, -a, -um, horned. 
 cornu, -us, horn. 
 corona, -ae, crown. 
 corpus, -6ris, bodi/. 
 eor-rigS, -ere, -rexi, -rectum, to set 
 
 straight, correct. 
 oor-rumpS, -ere, -rupi, -ruptum, to 
 
 destroy, corrupt. 
 
 cotidie, daily. 
 
 eras (Adv.), to-morrow, 
 
 Crassus, -i, Grassus. 
 
 creber, -bra, -brum, frequent, 
 
 crebrS {AAy.), frequently. 
 
 cred5, -erS, -didi, -ditum, to believe. 
 
 cremS, -are, -avi, -atum, to burn. 
 
 creS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to create, make. 
 
 crescS, -ere, crevl, cretum, to grow. 
 
 crinis, -is, hair, 
 
 cruciatus, -us, t07'ture, 
 
 crudelis, -e, cruel. 
 
 crudelitas, -tatis, cruelty. 
 
 eubiculum, -i, bedchamber. 
 
 cubile, -is, couch, 
 
 eujus, -a, -um, lohose (§ 88, 3), 
 
 culpa, -ae, fault. 
 
 culter, -i, knife. 
 
 cum, with. 
 
 cum, when, since, although. 
 
 cupiditas, -tatis, lo^iging, lust. 
 
 cQpidua, -u, -um, desirous, eager. 
 
 cupiS, -ere, -ivi, -itum, (( desire. 
 
 cur, why. 
 
 Guraj -ae, care. 
 ?.4. 
 
 curS, -are, -avi, -atum, to care for 
 
 attend to. 
 currd, -€rS, fiucurrl, cursum, to run, 
 currus, -us, chariot. 
 cursus, -us, running, course. [tinel, 
 custos, -odis, keeper, guardian, sen- 
 
 D. 
 
 damn5, -are, -avi, -atum, to condemn, 
 
 Davus, -i, Davua. 
 
 de (Prep, witb Abl.), down from^ 
 
 concerning, of. 
 dea, -ae (§ 18, Bern. 5), goddess. 
 debe8, -ere, debui, debitiim, to owe^ 
 
 ought. 
 de-cedS, -ere, -cessi, -cessum, to de- 
 part. 
 decem, ten; § 63. 
 decet, decebat, decuit (§114), it be- 
 
 comes, it is right, 
 decimus, -a, -um, tenth. 
 de-cliviSj -e, sloping downward. 
 decoro, -are, -avi, -atum, to adorn. 
 decorus, -a, -um, becoming. 
 decus, -oris, honor, dignity, 
 de-decus, -oris, disgrace. 
 de-ditio, -onis, surrender, [render, 
 de-do, -ere, dedidi, deditum, to snr- 
 de-fendS, -ere, -fendi, -fefasum, to 
 
 defend. 
 de-feusS, -are, -avi, -atum, to defend 
 
 diligently, 
 de-f erS, -ferre, -tuH, -latum, to bring 
 
 or carry {from one place or person 
 
 to another), to report, to tell, 
 de-fervescd, -ere, -fervi and -ferbui, 
 
 to boil down, suhsidp.. 
 defessiis, -a, -iim, weary. 
 de-flagr6, -are, -avT, -atum, to burn 
 
 down. 
 de-fluS, -ere, -fluxi, -fluxum, to flow 
 
 down or away. 
 de-jiciS, -ere, -jeci, -jectum, io throw 
 
 down. 
 
DELECTO 
 
 398 
 
 DOMINA 
 
 delects, -arS, -avi, -atum, to delight. 
 
 dele6, -ere, -evi, -etum, to destroy, 
 
 d.c-liber8, -are, -avi, -atum, to delib- 
 erate, 
 
 de-lictum, -i, fault, crime. 
 
 de-Ug8, -ere, -legi, -lectum, to choose. 
 
 Delphi, -orum, Delphi, a town of 
 (5reece. 
 
 Demaratus, -i, Demaratus. 
 
 dementia, -ae, madness. 
 
 de-monstr3, -are, -avi, -atum, to ahow. 
 
 Demosthenes, -is, Demosthenes, 
 
 deni, ten at a time; § 63. 
 
 dens, dentis, tooth. 
 
 densus, a, -um, thich, dense. 
 
 denuntiS, -are, -avi, -atum, to de- 
 nounce, threaten. 
 
 deorsum (Adv.), doton-hill. [aside. 
 
 deponfi, -ere, -p6sui, -itum, to lay 
 
 de-sIlitS, -irS, -silui, -sultum, to leap 
 down. 
 
 de-siat5, -ere, destiti, destitum, to 
 cease. 
 
 de-sper8, -are, -avi, -atum, to de- 
 spair. 
 
 deetino, -arS, -avi, -atum, to fasten. 
 
 de-BtituS, -SrS, -stitui, -stitutum, to 
 desert, 
 
 de-stringS, -ere, -strinxl, -atrictum, 
 to draw. 
 
 de-super {Adv.), from, above. 
 
 de-terre8, -ere, -terrui, -territiim, to 
 scare off, deter, 
 
 deus, -i (§ 24, Hem. S), a god, 
 
 de-venio, -ire, -veni, -ventum, to 
 come down. 
 
 de-TorS, -are, -avi, -atum, to gulp 
 down, 
 
 dexter, -tera, -t£rum or -tra, -trum, 
 on the right, I'ight. 
 
 Diana, -ae, Diana. 
 
 dicS,--are, -avi, -atum, to dedicate. 
 
 dicS, -ere, dixi, dictum, to say, 
 
 dictat&r, -oris, dictator. 
 
 dictum, -i, wvrd, 
 
 dies, ei, day, 
 
 dif-ferS, -ferre, dis-tuli, dl-latUm, t€ 
 
 pnt off, defer, 
 dif-ficilis, -e, difficult, 
 dif-fidS, -ere, fisus, to distrust, 
 dignus, -a, -iim, worthy. 
 di-labor, -i, -lapsus, to fall to pieces. 
 diligentia, -ae, diligence, 
 dl-ligS, -ere, -lexi, -lectum, to love, 
 dimidium, -i, half. 
 di-mitt8, -Sr5, -misi, -missum, to send 
 
 out. 
 Dionysius, -i, Dionysius, 
 di-ripi(5, -ere, -ripui, -reptum, to tear 
 
 asunder, plunder, pillage. 
 di8-ced8, -ere, -cessi, -cessum, to 'de* 
 
 part. 
 discipulus, -i, pHpil, learner, 
 discS, -ere, didici, to learn, 
 dis-cordiS., -ae, disagreement, 
 dis-pliceS, e-re, -plicui, -plicitiim, to 
 
 displease. 
 dis-pon8, -Sre, -pSsuI, -pGsitiim, to 
 
 an'ange, 
 dis-put8, -are, -avi, -atum, to discuss, 
 
 dispute. 
 dis-senti8, -itS, -sensi, -sensiim, to 
 
 differ in opinion, dissent, 
 dis-similis, -e, unlike. 
 diu, -ntius, -utissime (Adv.), long, 
 diiiturnus, -a, -um, lasting, 
 divSs, -itis, 7-ich. 
 
 divid8, -ere, -visi, -visum, to divide, 
 diyinus, -a, -iim, divine. 
 Divitiacus, -i, an Aeduan chief. 
 divitiae, -arum, riches. 
 do, dare, dedi, dS.tum, to give. 
 doceo, -ere, docui, doctiim, to tench. 
 doctrlna, -ae, teaching, doctrine, 
 doctus, -a, -iim, learned. 
 doleo, -ere, -ul, -itQm, to grieve, 
 dolor, -oris, pain, grief, 
 domina, -oe, mistress. 
 
D0MINU8 
 
 399 
 
 EXPONO 
 
 domluua, -i, master. 
 
 d6m8, -are, -ui, -itum, to tame. 
 
 dSmus (§48, Mem. 5), house. 
 
 doneo, until (Temp. Conj.), 
 
 douum, -1, gift. 
 
 dormifi, -ire, -ivi, -itum, to elerp. 
 
 dormitS, -are, -avx, -atum, to fall 
 
 asleep. 
 Druidea, -um, the Druids. 
 dubitatiS, -onis^ doubt. 
 dubitS, -are, -avi, -atum, to doubt, 
 dubius, -a, -um, doubtful. 
 dficenti, -ae, -a (§63), two hundred. 
 duc5, -ere, duxi, ductum, to lead, 
 
 deem, consider, regard. 
 dulcis, -e, sweet, 
 
 dtim, whilej as long as, until. [cus, 
 DumnSrix, -igis, brother of Divitia- 
 duo, -ae, -o, itoo. 
 duplex, -icisj double. 
 duplxctS, -are, -avi, -atum, to double. 
 durus, -a, -um, hard, 
 dux, diicis, leader. 
 
 E. 
 E or ex, out of, from, in consequence 
 
 of, after. 
 e-dicS, -ere, -dixi, -dictum, to issue 
 
 an edict, 
 Sd5, -erS, edi, esum (§ 111, 8), to eat, 
 e-doceS, -erS, -docui, -doctum, to 
 
 teach thoroughly, educate. 
 e-duc-5, -ere, -duxi, -duetum, to lead 
 
 ant. 
 effigies, -ei, image, likeness, 
 egens, -entis, needy. 
 egeS, -ere, egui, to need. 
 egestas, -tatia, poverty, 
 ego (? 78), 7. 
 
 Egredior, -i, egressus, to go out. 
 egregius, -a,'-um, remarkable. 
 e-jici8, -ere, -jeci, -jectum, to cast out, 
 elegans, -antis, luxurious, elegant, 
 eloqucns, -entis, eloquent. 
 
 eloquentiS, -ae, eloquence. 
 em6, -ere, emi, emptiim, (» 6uy. 
 emolumentum, -i, advantage. 
 etS, ire, ivi, itujm, to go. 
 Epaminondas, -ae { A^y.l.), the gi -at 
 
 Theban general. 
 Ephesiue, -a, -um, Ephesian. 
 BphSsus, -1, a city of Asia Minor, 
 epistSla, -ae, letter, epistle. 
 eques, -itis, horseman. 
 equestSr or -tris, -e, of a horse. 
 equitatus, -us, cavalry. 
 equitS, -are, -avi, -atum, to he a 
 
 horseman, to ride on horseback, 
 equus, -i, horse. 
 
 erga (Prep, with Ace.), towards, 
 e-ripi5, -ere, -ripui, -reptum, to res- 
 cue. 
 err8, -are, -avi, -atum, to err, 
 error, -oris, error. 
 esiiriens, -entis, hungry. 
 et, and; et — et, both — and. 
 etiam, also. 
 Etruria, -ae, Etruria. 
 ex (Prep, with Abl.), out of. \tire, 
 ex-cedS, -ere, -cessi; -cessum, to re- 
 exemplum, -i, example. 
 ex-etS, -ire, exii, exitum, to go out, 
 exerceS, -ere, -ui, -itum, to exercise. 
 exercitus, -us, army. 
 exigS, -ere, -egi, -actum, to demand, 
 exiguus, -3,, -Tim, slight, small, 
 existimS, -are, -avi, -atum, (oyud^e, 
 
 think. 
 exitium, -i, destruction. [out. 
 
 ex-pell8, -ere, -piili, -puls«m, to drive 
 expers, -pertis, destitute. 
 expleS, -ere, -plevi, -pletum, to fill 
 
 out, satisfy. 
 ex-plorator, -oris, scout. 
 ex-plorS, -are, -avi, -atum, to search 
 
 out. 
 ex-p5nS, -ere, -p 5sui, -positum, to 
 
 explain. 
 
EXPUGNO 
 
 400 
 
 FRUOE 
 
 ox-pugntS, -are, -avT, -atum, to etorm. 
 GX'Sistti, -ere, exstiti, exstitum, to 
 
 stand out. 
 ex-Bpect5, -are, -avi, -atum, to await, 
 
 look for, 
 ex-uro, -er6, -ussi, -ustum, to hum up. 
 
 facies, -el, form, face, 
 
 facile, easily. From 
 
 facilis, -e, easy. 
 
 facinus, -Otis, deed, crime. From 
 
 faciS, -ere, feci, factum, to do, make, 
 esteem, value. — pluris, to think more 
 of. 
 
 facuItaB, -tatis, means, power, 
 
 falltS, -ere, fefelli, falsum, to deceive, 
 
 fama, -ae, ^antc, reputation, 
 
 fames, -is, hunger, famine. 
 
 familia, -ae, family. 
 
 familiaris, -e, pertaining to the fam- 
 ily ; res fam., property. 
 
 fateor, -eri, fassus, to confess, 
 
 fatIgS, -arS, -avI, -atum, to weary. 
 
 faveS, -ere, favi, fautum, to favor. 
 
 febris, -is, fever. 
 
 femina, -ae, ^ooman. 
 
 femur, -6ris and -inis, thigh, 
 
 f erax, -acis, fertile. 
 
 fere (Adv.), almost, 
 
 fertS, ferre, tull, latum, to hear, carry, 
 acquire. 
 
 ferox, -ocis, fierce. 
 
 fcrreus, -a, -um, made of iron. 
 
 forriim, -i, iron. 
 
 ferus, -a, -irm, wild, savage. 
 
 fessuB, -li, -um, wearied. 
 
 festinS, -are, -avi, -atum, to hasten. 
 
 fictilis, -e, earthen. 
 
 fides, -ei, faith, promise, 
 
 fides, -ium, strings, n lute, lyre. 
 
 f idr*, -SrS, f isus, to trust. 
 
 f Idus, -E, -um, faithful. 
 
 figfi, -5re, fixi, f xua, to fix, fasten. 
 
 f igura, -ae, figure, shape. 
 
 f ilia, -ae, daughter. 
 
 filius, -1, eon. [fefgn- 
 
 fing8, -ere, finxi, fictum, to make^ 
 
 finis, -is, end, limit, honudary. 
 
 finitimus, -a, -um, neighboring. 
 
 f iS, fieri, factus, to become, to be made. 
 
 firmuB, -a, -um, strong, firm. 
 
 fiagitS, -are, -avi, -atum, to demand 
 
 (^earnestly). 
 flatus, -us, blast. 
 
 fleets, -ere, flexi, flexum, to bend. 
 fleS, fiere, flevi, Actum, to weep. 
 fletus, -us, weeping. 
 flocctis, a lock of wool (anything of 
 
 small value). 
 fios, floris, fiower. 
 fluctus, -U8, wave. 
 flumen, -inis, river. 
 fluS, -ere, fluxi, fluxum,'<o^oio. 
 foedus, -eris, league, treaty. 
 folium, -i, leaf. 
 fons, fontis, fountain. 
 forma, -ae, form, shape, 
 formidS, -are, -avi, -atum, to dread* 
 forsitan (Adv.), perhaps. 
 fortis, -e, brave. 
 fortiter (Adv.), bravely. 
 fortitudS, -inis, fortitude, firmness. 
 fortiina, -ae, fortune, 
 fortunatus, -a, -iim, fortunate. 
 fossa, -ae, ditch. 
 frater, -tris, brother. 
 fratricida, -ae, fratricide. 
 fraus, fraudls, deceit. \mur, rage. 
 
 frcmS, -ere, fremui, fremltum, to mur- 
 frenum, -i, VI. -i and -a, bit, bridle. 
 fretus, -a, -um, trusting. 
 frons, frontis, forehead. 
 fructus, -us, fruit. 
 frumentariufl, -a, -um, of com. 
 frumentSr, -ari, -atiis, to forage, 
 frumentum, -i, corn, grain. 
 fruSr, -i, fructus, fruituB, to enjoy. 
 
FKtJSTRA 
 
 401 
 
 ILLE 
 
 frustra (Adv.), in vain. 
 
 fuga, -ae, flight. 
 
 fugiS, -ere, fugi, fugituJa to Jlee, 
 
 fug8, -are, -avi, -atum, to put to 
 
 flight, roH(. 
 fulgiiratifi, -onis, lightning, 
 funditor, roris, alivger. 
 fuag6r, -i, functus, to perform. 
 fur, furis, thief. 
 furfur, -urTs, bran. 
 furor, -oris, rage^ fury. 
 futurua -a, -iim, about to he. 
 
 a. 
 
 Galba, -ae, Galba. 
 Grallia, -ae, Gaul. 
 G-allicus, -a, -um, Gallic. 
 gallina, -ae, hen. 
 Gallus, ~i, a Gaul. 
 gaudeS, -ere, gavisus, to rejoice. 
 gener, -i, son-in-law. , 
 
 generatim (Adv.), hy trihea. 
 gens, gentis, race, family. 
 genus, -eris, kind, race. 
 Germania, -ae, Germany. 
 Germanus, -i, a German, [carry on. 
 gerS, -ere, gessi, gestS.m, to wage, 
 gladius, -1, sioord. 
 glans, glandis, acorn, 
 Glaucus, -i, Glaucua. 
 gloria, -ae, glory. 
 Graecia, -ae, Greece, 
 Graecus, -i, a Greek, 
 grammatica, -ae, grammar, 
 gratus, -a, -iim, acceptable, pU 
 gravis, -e, heavy j severe, 
 graviter, heavily, severely, 
 gregatim, in^floclcs, herds. 
 grex, gregis, flock, herd. 
 
 H. 
 
 hIibeS, -erS, habui, habitfim, to have, 
 
 hold, 
 habits, to have frequently f dweU. 
 3i* 
 
 ileasant. 
 
 haedus, -T, kid. 
 
 haere5, -er€, haesi, hac^ilm, to stich 
 
 Hannibal, -alls, Hannibal. 
 
 Harudes, -um, Harudians. 
 
 hasta, -ae, spear, 
 
 baud, not. 
 
 Helvetius, -i, a Helvetian, 
 
 Hercules, -is, Hercules. 
 
 Herminius, -i, Herminius, 
 
 herus, -i, master, 
 
 hiberna (castra), winter quarters. 
 
 Hibernia, -ae, Ireland. 
 
 hfc, haec, hSe, this. 
 
 hiemS, -are, -avi, -atum,' to winter* 
 
 hiems, -is, winter. 
 
 Hilotae, -arum, Helots. 
 
 hodie, to-day. 
 
 Homeriis, -i, Homer. 
 
 homS, -inis, man. 
 
 honeste, honorably. 
 
 honestus, honorable. 
 
 honor, -oris, lionor. 
 
 bora, -ae, hoiir, 
 
 horreiim, -i, granary, 
 
 bortor, -ari, -atus, to encourage, 
 
 hortus, -i, garden. 
 
 hospes, -itis, guest. 
 
 hostilis, -e, of an enemy, hostile, 
 
 hostis, -is, enemy. 
 
 huraanitas, -tatis, refinement. 
 
 bumanus, -a, -um, human. 
 
 humerus, -i, ehoulder, 
 
 humilis, -e, low. 
 
 bumus, -i, ground. 
 
 I. 
 
 ibT, there. 
 
 idem, eadSm, idem, same. 
 
 idoneus, -a, -um, fit, suitable, 
 
 ignarus, -a, -um, ignorant. 
 
 ignis, -is, fire, D?'"^* 
 
 ignosctS, -ere, -novi, -notiim, to fir- 
 
 ignotus, -a, -um, unknotrn. 
 
 ille, -a, -ud, that, the former, he. 
 
ILLICIO 
 
 402 
 
 INSUETtrS 
 
 illiciS, -ei<;, -lexi, -lectum, to decoy, 
 imber, -brie, rati?, akower. 
 imitor, ari, -atus, to imitate. 
 immaiiis, -e, immensef huge. 
 immemor, -5ris, unmindful. 
 immortalis, -is, -e, immortal. 
 immortalitas, -tatis, immortality, 
 impatiens, -entis, not able or willing 
 
 to beaVf impatient. 
 impedimentum, -i, hindrance. 
 impediS, -ire, -ivi, -itum, to hinder. 
 impellS, -ere, -puli, -pulsiim, to drive 
 
 on. 
 pnperator, s-oris, general^ emperor. 
 imperatum, -i, order. [skilled, 
 
 imperitus, -a, -um, ignorant, un- 
 imperium, -i, command, government. 
 imperS, -are, -avi, -atum, to order. 
 impetrS,' -are, -avi, -atum, to obtain. 
 impetus, -us, attack. 
 impietas, -tatis, undutifulvem. 
 impigSr, -gr3,, -grum, active, 
 imple5, -ere, -plevi, -pletum, (o^ZZ, 
 imponS, -ere, posui, -pfisitum, to put 
 
 upon. 
 imports, -arfi, »avi, -atum, to bring 
 
 in, import. 
 impStens, -entis, unable to restrain, 
 jmprobus, -a, -um, xoiched. 
 imprudens, -entis, imprudent. 
 imus, -a, -um. See inferus. 
 in (with Ace), into, upon; (witb 
 
 Abl.), in, among. 
 incendiiim, a burning, conflagration. 
 incendS, -ere, -cendi, -censum, to set 
 
 on fire, to burn up. 
 incertus, -a, -um, uncertain. [pen, 
 incidS, -ere, incMi, -casiim, to hap- 
 incipid, -Sre, -cepi, -ceptum, to begin, 
 incitS, -are, -avi, -atum, to set in mo- 
 tion, arouse, excite, 
 incola, -ae, inhabitant, 
 iucolS, -Sr§, -colui, to inhabit, dwell, 
 
 live. 
 
 iiicSlumis, -e, unhurt, safe, 
 
 inconditus, -a, -um, rude, uncouth. 
 
 incredibilis, -e, incredible. 
 
 inciisS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to bla7,xe, 
 censure, find fault with, accuse. 
 
 indignus, -a, -um, unworthy. [on. 
 
 in-duc8, -ere, -duxi, ductum, to lead 
 
 indulges, -ere, -dulsi, -dultum, to in- 
 dulge. 
 
 infans, -antis, infant. 
 
 infelix, -icis, unfruitful, unhappy. 
 
 inferS, -ferre, intuli, illatum, (o bring 
 upon, wage upon, inflict. 
 
 inferus, -a, -um, low (§ 72, 4). 
 
 inf initus, -a, -um, boundless. 
 
 infirmus, -a, -um, weak. 
 
 in-flu5, -ere, -fluxi, -fluxum, to flow 
 into. 
 
 infrenS, -are, -avi, -atum, to bridle. 
 
 ingenium, -i, intellect, natural dispo- 
 sition. 
 
 ingens, -entis, huge, [grateful. 
 
 ingratus, -a, -um, disagreeable, «n- 
 
 inimicitia, -ae, enmity. 
 
 inimicus, -i, enemy. 
 
 iniquus, -a, -um, unjust. 
 
 inltium, -i, beginning. 
 
 injuria, -ae, injury. 
 
 in-nascor, -i, -natiis, to spring up. 
 
 innScens, -entis, innocent, 
 
 innocentia, -ae, innocence, purity. 
 
 inSpia, -ae, want, scarcity. 
 
 inquam (§ 113, 4), / eny (used only 
 after one or more words of a quo- 
 tation). 
 
 insidiae, -arum, ambush, snares. 
 
 in-sili8, -ire, -silii and silui, tu leap 
 upon. 
 
 instigS, -are, -avi, -atum, to stir up. 
 
 in-stituS, -ere, -stitui, -stitutum, to 
 arrange, instruct, 
 
 in-struS, -ere, -struxi, -strnctum, ta 
 set in order, draw up, build, 
 
 in-Buetu&, -a, -um, unaa uatomed. 
 
INSULA 
 
 403 
 
 LABOR 
 
 insula, -ae, island, 
 integer, -gra, -grum, sound, unhurt. 
 integratio, -oniSj renewaL 
 intellegS, -ere, -lexi, -lectum, to tm- 
 
 der stand. 
 inter, between, amongj in the midst 
 
 of J inter se, loith or against one 
 
 another ; inter spoliandum, in the 
 
 act of despoiling. 
 inter-cedtS, -ere, -cessi, -cessiim, to 
 
 come betxoeen, intervene. 
 inter-dicS, -ere, -dixi, -diotiim, to 
 
 forbid. 
 interdiim, sometimes. 
 intereS, -ire, interli, interitiim, to 
 
 die, perish. 
 interest. See intersum. 
 in-terf ici5, -ere, -feci, -feetum, to kill. 
 inter-rogS, -are, -avi, -atum, to ask. 
 intersum, -esse, -fui, to be of import- 
 ance, to be betioeen; nihil interest, 
 
 it makes no difference. 
 interus, -a, -um, inward. 
 introduco, -ere, -duxi, -diictum, to 
 
 introduce. 
 in-utilis, -e, useless. \tach, invade. 
 in-vadS, -ere, -vasi, -vasum, to at- 
 in-veni3, -ire, -veni, -ventum, to come 
 
 upon, find, invent. 
 in~ventor, -oris, inventor. [out. 
 
 in-vestigo, -are, -avi, -atum, to search 
 in-vietiis, -a, -iim., invincible. 
 inv-idia, -ae, envy. 
 invitS, -are, -avi, -atum, to invite. 
 invitus, -a, -uni, unwilling. 
 ipse, -a, -um, self. 
 ira, -ae, anger. 
 iracundia, -ae, hasty temper. 
 irascor, -i, to be angry. 
 iratus, -a, -um, angry. 
 iSj ea, id, this, tha^; § 82. 
 isto, -a, -lid, that {of y( urs). 
 ita, thus, so. 
 Italia, -ae, Italy » 
 
 Italici, the Italians, 
 
 Italicus, -a, -um, Italian. 
 
 itaque, and so, therefore, 
 
 item, likewise. 
 
 iter, itineris, journey, march, tj-jy. 
 
 jacio, -e-re, jeci, jaetum, to throw. 
 
 jacto, -are, -avi, -atumj to throw 
 about, discuss. 
 
 jam, noiD, already. 
 
 jecur (§45), the liver, 
 
 jubar, -aris, sunshine. 
 
 jubeo, -ere, jussi, jussum, to order, 
 
 jucundils, -a, -um, delightful, 
 
 judex, -iGis, judge, 
 
 judicS, -are, -avT, -atiim, to judge, 
 
 jugum, -1, a yoke. Tioo spears set 
 upright, with a third laid across the 
 top, were called jugum. 
 
 Jiigurtha, -ae, king of Numidia. 
 
 jumentum, -i, beast of burden, work- 
 horse or ox. 
 
 Juppiter, JQvis, Jupiter, 
 
 Jura, -ae, Jura, a mountaiai. 
 
 jus, 'juris, law, right (usually un- 
 written law, as opposed to lex, 
 statute law). 
 
 jfisjurandiim (§4-5), oath, 
 
 jiistus, -a, -iim, just. 
 
 jiivat, -abat, juvit, it pleases. 
 
 juvenis, -is, young man. 
 
 jiiventus, -tutis, young. 
 
 juv3, -are, jiivi, jutum, jiivaturiis, 
 to help, please, 
 
 K. 
 
 KartbagS, -inis, Oarihage. 
 Kalendae, -arum, the Calends, orjirsi 
 day of the month. 
 
 L. 
 
 Labienus, -i, a lieutenant of GtesaV', 
 labor, -oris, labor. 
 
I.AC 
 
 404 
 
 MARITIMUS 
 
 lac, lactia, milh. 
 LacSdaemon, -onTs, Sparta, 
 IJlcessS, -ere, -Ivi, -itum, to provoke ,' 
 
 injuria lacessere, to injure* 
 lacrima, -ae, tear. 
 lacus, -us, lake. 
 laetus, -a, -um, joi/ful. 
 laniG, -are, -avl, -attiin, to tear to 
 
 pieces. 
 lapis, -idis, stone. 
 largior, -iri, -itus, to bribt. 
 lateS, -ere, latui, to lie hid. 
 latitudS, -inis, breadth, 
 latrS, -onis, robber, 
 latiis, -a, -um, wide, broad. 
 latus, -eris, side, Jiank. 
 laudS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to praise, 
 laus, laudia, praise, glory. 
 lS,v6, -are, lavi, lotum, lautiim, l§,va- 
 
 tiim, to bathe, 
 legati8, -onie, embassy. 
 legatiiS, -i, ambassador, lieutenant. 
 lSgi8, -onis, legion. 
 Ieg8, -ere, legi, lectiim, to read. 
 LSraannuS) -i, the lake of Geneva. 
 Ie5, -onis, lion, 
 Icpus, -oris, hare, 
 levis, -e, light, alight. 
 Iev5, -are, -avi, -atiim, to lighten,re- 
 
 lieve. 
 lex, legis, law. 
 
 libenter (Adv.), willingly, gladly. 
 llbSr, -a, -iim, free. 
 liber, -bri, book. 
 liberi, -orum, children. 
 liberu, -are, -avi, -atum, to free. 
 libertas, -tatis, liberty. 
 licet, licuit, it is allowed, permitted, 
 
 right, latofnl. 
 lignum, -i, wood. 
 lingua, -ae, tongue, language. 
 linter, -trie, boat. 
 Liscus, -i, an Aeduan chief. 
 littSrS', -ae, a lettet (of the alpliabet). 
 
 iTtus, -5ris, shore. 
 locuples, -etis, rich. 
 lociis, -I, PI. -i and -a, place, 
 longe (Adv.), by far. 
 longitudiS, -iniBf'leugth- 
 longus, -a, -iim, long. 
 loquor, -i, locutiis, to speak. 
 Liicius, -i, Luciue. 
 lUdiis, -i, game, play. 
 lumen, -inis, light. 
 luna, -ae, moon. 
 liipiis, -i, wolf, 
 lUx, liicis, light, 
 
 M. 
 MacSdonia, -ae, Macedonia. 
 macto, -are, -avi, -atiim, to sacrifice 
 maerSr, -oris, grief ; prae maerorS, 
 
 for grief (a Preventing Cause), 
 magis, maxime, more, most. 
 magister, -i, master {of a school, eio.). 
 magnanimiis, -a, -iim, greai-souled, 
 
 magnanimous. 
 magnitiidS, -inis, greatness. 
 magnus, -5., -um (majCr, maximus), 
 
 great. 
 malS (pcjiis, pessime), badly. 
 maledlcS, -ere, -dixi, -dictiim, to be 
 
 abusive, revile, curse. 
 malS, malle, malui, to prefer. 
 malum, -i, apple. 
 maliis, -a, -iim, (pejor, peseimiie), 
 
 bad, wickedj evil. 
 maliis, -i, mast of a ship. [mand. 
 mandatiim, -i, a thing entrusted, com- 
 mand5, -are, -avi, -atiim, to entrust. 
 maneo, -er€, mansi, mansiim, to re- 
 
 main. 
 Maniliiis, -S,, -iim, of Manilius. 
 Manlius, -i, Manlius. 
 manus, -iis, hand. 
 Marcus, -i, Mark. 
 mare, -is, sea, 
 maritimus, bordering on the sea* 
 
MARIUS 
 
 405 
 
 MUTO 
 
 Marius, -i, Marius. 
 
 marmor, -oris, marble, 
 
 mSt§r, -tris, mother, 
 
 materfamilias, matron (§45). 
 
 mature (Adv.), quichly, soon, 
 
 maturS, -are, -avi, -atum, to hasten. 
 
 maturus, -a, -um, ripe, 
 
 medioamentum, -i, drug, dose. 
 
 medioiua; -ae, medicine. 
 
 medicus, -i, physician. 
 
 medius, -o,, -um^ middle, 
 
 mSlior, -iis, better, 
 
 membrum, -i, limh. 
 
 memini (§ 113), I remember, 
 
 memor, -oris, mindful. 
 
 memGria, -ae, memory, recollection, 
 
 mendacium, -i, falsehoodf lie. 
 
 mendax, -acis, false, lying, 
 
 mens, mentis, mind, 
 
 mensa, -ae, table. 
 
 mensis, -is, month. 
 
 mentior, -iri, -itus, to lie, 
 
 mercator, -oris, merchant, 
 
 MercuritiS, -i. Mercury. 
 
 merges, -itis, sheaf. 
 
 meridies, -ei, mid-day, 
 
 meritiis, -a, -um, deserving. 
 
 Messalla, -ae, Messala, 
 
 metiSr, -iri, mensus, to measure. 
 
 met6, -ere, messui, messum, to reap. 
 
 metuS, -ere, metui, rarely metutum, 
 
 to fear, be apprehensive. 
 metus, -iis, apprehension^ fear. 
 meus, -a, -um, my, mine. 
 Micipsa, -ae, Micipsa, 
 miles, -itis, soldier. 
 Miletus, -i, Miletus, a city of Asia. 
 milltaris, -e, military. 
 militia, -ae, military service, 
 mille (g 64, Rem. 9), thousand. 
 minime, least, not at all. 
 minor, -ari, -atiis, to threaten, 
 minffr, -us, less. {less, weaken. 
 
 mtnuS, -Sre, minui, minutum,io make 
 
 miror, -ari, -atiis, to wonder. 
 
 mirus, -a, -um, loondtful. 
 
 miser, -a, -um, loretched. 
 
 misereC, -ere, -ui, to pity (generally 
 used impersonallyj § 135, c). 
 
 miserescS, -ere, to pity. 
 
 mittS, -ere, misi, misaum, to send. 
 
 modiis, -i, manner, measure, limit; 
 praeter modum, beyond measure- 
 unduly. 
 
 moenia, -ium, etc., walls, 
 
 mollis, -e, soft. 
 
 moneys, -ere, mSnui, monitum, to ad- 
 viae, remind. 
 
 monile, -is, necklace. 
 
 mons, mont-is, mountain. 
 
 monstrS, -are, -avi, -atum, to show, 
 
 mordeS, -ere, momordi, morsiim, to 
 champ, bite, 
 
 Morini, -orum, the Morini. 
 
 morior, -i and -iri, mortuus, moritu- 
 rus, to die. 
 
 moror, -ari, -atiis, to delay. 
 
 mors, mortis, death. 
 
 morsus, -us, biting, 
 mortalis, -e, mortal, 
 morti-fer, -5, -um, death-bearing ^ 
 
 mortal (g 55, Rem. 2). 
 mortuus, -a, -um, dead. 
 mos, moris, manner, custom, 
 motus, -us, moving, insurrection. 
 moveB, -ere, movi, motum, to move, 
 mulier, -eris, woman. 
 muItitudtJ, -inis, multitude. 
 multus (plus, plurimus), much^ 
 
 many. 
 mundus, -i, world. 
 muniS, -ire, -ivi, -itiim, to fortify, 
 munus, -eris, duty, present, 
 muriis, -i, wall. 
 mus, muris, mouse, 
 mtisa, -ae, muse. 
 musica, -ae, music, 
 mut5, -are, -ari, -3tum, to change. 
 
NACTUS 
 
 406 
 
 OBSIDIO 
 
 N. 
 
 nactus, P.irticiple from nanciscor. 
 
 nam, /oj' (Conj.). 
 
 namque, for indeed. [get. 
 
 nanciscor, -i, nactus and nanctus, to 
 
 narr8, -arc, -avi, -atum, io teU,relate, 
 
 nascor, -i, natus, to he horn. 
 
 natura, -ae, nature. 
 
 natus, -us, hirth. 
 
 nqjita, -ae, sailor. 
 
 navale, -is, dock-yard. 
 
 navigatiO, -onis, navigation. 
 
 navigS, -are, -avi, -atum, to nail. 
 
 navis, -is, ehip, 
 
 ne (Final Conj.), that — notf leat. 
 
 neo (Conj.), neitlierj nor, and not. 
 
 nScessarius, -a, -um, critical, neces- 
 sary. 
 
 nSc8, -arE, -avi, -atum, to murder, 
 kill, 
 
 neglegens, -entis, negligent; Part. 
 Adj. 
 
 neglego, -ere, -lexi, -Icctum, to neg- 
 lect, 
 
 n5g5, -are, -avi, -atum, to deny. 
 
 nSgotium, -i, husiness. 
 
 nemS, -ini, inem, no man, no one. 
 
 nemus, -6ris, grove, 
 
 nepos, -otiB, grandson. 
 
 NeptUnus, -i, Neptune, god of the sea. 
 
 nequS, and not, neither, nor. 
 
 ne — quidem, not, even. 
 
 Nervius, -a, -um, Nervian. 
 
 nesciS, -ir§, -ivi, -itfl.m, not to knoio, 
 
 neuter, -S,, -um, neither {of tico). 
 
 neve, neu, and — not, nor (Nog. Fin- 
 Conj.). 
 
 nidlf ic5, -are, -avi, -atum, to huild a 
 nest. 
 
 nidus, -I, nest. 
 
 nigSr, -S, -lim, hlack. 
 
 nihil (indecl.) or nihilum, -i, nothing. 
 
 nimius, -a, -um, too much, excessive. 
 
 nisi (Cond. Conj.), unless, if not. 
 
 nitor, -i, nisfts or nixus, to strive, 
 
 nobilis, -0, iwhle. 
 
 nobilitas, -atis, nohility. 
 
 noceS, -ere, -ui, -itum, to hurt, 7inrnk 
 
 nolS, nolle, nolui, to he unwilling. 
 
 nomen, -inis, name. 
 
 Don, not. 
 
 nondum, not yet, 
 
 nonne (in Direct Questions, § 81, 4, 
 
 in Indirect Questions), or not, 
 nonus, -a, -um (§ 63), ninth, 
 nos, g 78. 
 
 noscS, -ere, novi, notiim, to know. 
 noster, -a, -iim, onr, ours, 
 n5v€m (g 63), nine, 
 novus, -a, -um, new, late. 
 nox, noctis, night. 
 noxius, hurtful. 
 nubes, -is, cloud, 
 nudS, -are, -avi, -atum, to strip. 
 niidus, -§,, -um, naked. 
 nullus -a, -lim (^ 56), none, 7iot any, 
 num, § 81, 3. 
 Numa, -ae, Ntuna. 
 Numantinus, -a, -um, Numantian, 
 Dumer5, -arc, -avi, -atum, to count, 
 numerus, -i, numher. 
 Niimida, -ae, a Niimidian, 
 Numidia, -ae, Numidia, 
 numquis, § 89. 
 nunc, now. 
 
 nuntiS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to announcet 
 nuntius, -i, messenger. 
 nunquam or numquam, never. 
 
 O. 
 
 6b, for, on account of. 
 
 obliviscor, oblitiis, to forget. 
 
 obscurS, -are, -3,vi, -atum, to obscure, 
 
 ob-s5crS, -arc, -avi, -atum, to heeeecJi, 
 
 obsSs, -Idis, hostage, 
 
 ob-sideS, -ere, -sedi, -sessum, to he~ 
 
 siege, 
 obsidiS, -5nls, siege. 
 
OBSTO 
 
 407 
 
 PARMENIO 
 
 ob-stQj -are^ -stitij -statum, to stand 
 befor€f hinder, prevent. 
 
 ob-trunc(j, -are, -avi, -atum, to slay. 
 
 occasus, -us, going down, setting, 
 
 oo-cidS (ob — caedS), -cidi, -oisum, 
 to cut down, kill. 
 
 oc-cidS (6b — cad5), -ere, -cidi, -ca- 
 sum, to fall, set, 
 
 occults, -are, -avi, -atum, to hide. 
 
 oc-cultus, -a, -um, hidden. 
 
 oc<rtipS, -are, -avi, -atum, to seize, 
 take possession of. 
 
 5ceanus, -i, ocean. 
 
 octaviis, -H,, -um (§ 63), eighth. 
 
 octingentl, -ae, -a (^ 63), eight hun- 
 dred. 
 
 oete (§63), eight. 
 
 dcGlus, -i, €^e. 
 
 odi (g 113, Bern. J), Ihate. 
 
 Sdium, -i, hatred. 
 
 offend5, -gre, offendi, offensiim, to of- 
 fend. 
 
 offieium, -i, duty, service. 
 
 5lim (Adv.), formerly y anciently ; (of 
 the future), some time or other. 
 
 omninS, altogether, wholly, at all. 
 
 omnis, -e, all, every. 
 
 onerarifia, -a, -um, of burden. 
 
 finerS, -are, -avi, -atum, to load, lade. 
 
 QnuB, -eris, burden. 
 
 bperS,, -ae, pains, loorJc, labor. 
 
 6pini5, -onis, opinion, belief. 
 
 Spinor, -ari, -atus, to he of opinion. 
 
 opis (Gen.), of help, strength (§ 51) j 
 gumma Spe, with all one's might. 
 
 oportet, -uit, it is necessary, proper, 
 it behooves. 
 
 oppidanus, -a, -tlm, of a town. 
 
 oppidum, -i, town. \nes8. 
 
 opportunitas, -atis, fitness, suitable- 
 
 opportunus, -a, ~um. Jit, favorable. 
 
 opprimS, -ere, -pressl, -pressum, to 
 press down, put down, suppress, 
 overci Tie, crush, oppress. 
 
 oppugnS, -are, -avI, -atum, to as- 
 sault. 
 
 optimus, -a, -um' (bonus), 'iest. 
 
 Spulens or opiilentus, -a, -um, pow- 
 erful. 
 
 opus, -eris, work. 
 
 opus (indecl.), need, necessity ; opB.8 
 est, it is necessary, there is need. 
 
 oraculum, -i, oracle. 
 
 oratio, -onis, speech, oration. 
 
 orator, -oris, orator. 
 
 orbis, -is, circle ,• orbis terrariim, the 
 world. 
 
 ordS,- -inis, rank, order. 
 
 Orgetorix, -igis, a Helvetian chief. 
 
 origS, -inie, origin. 
 
 ori6r, -iri, ortus, oriturus, to rise, 
 
 OS, oris, mouth, face. 
 
 OS, ossis, bone. 
 
 otium, -1, leisure, ease. 
 
 Ovidius, -i, Ovid. 
 
 ovis, -is, sheep. 
 
 ovum, -i, egg. 
 
 Oxiis, -i, the Oxus. 
 
 pac5, -are, -avi, -atum, to subdue. 
 paenitet, -uit, it repents j paeuit-et 
 
 me-peccati, / repent of my sin. 
 pagus, ~i, canton. 
 paLus, "udis, marsh, bog. 
 paluster, -tris, -tre, marshy. 
 panis, -is, bread. 
 par, paris, equal. 
 
 paratus, -a, -lim, ready, prepared. 
 parco, -ere, peperci, parsi, parcitum 
 
 and parsiim, to spare. 
 parens, -entis, parent. 
 pareS, -ere, -ui, -itum, to obey, be 
 
 obedient. 
 paries, -etis, loall {of a house). 
 pariS, -erS, peperT, partiim, to begetf 
 
 bring forth. 
 Parm6ni5, -onis, Parmenio, 
 
PAEO 
 
 408 
 
 PERVENTO 
 
 j)Si'8, -are, -avi, -atum, to prepare. 
 parriclda, -ae, killer of a father j par- 
 ricide. 
 pars, partis, part; una ex parte, on 
 
 oue side. 
 partim (Ace. of para), partly, 
 parum, minus, minime, little. 
 parvGs, -a, -iim, small, little. 
 passiis, -us, pace; mille passus, a 
 
 mile. 
 paslor, -oris, shepherd. 
 patefaci8, -feci, -factum, to Iny open, 
 
 §107, i?em. i. 
 pateo, -ere, patui, to lie open. 
 pater, patris, father. [t*Zy. 
 
 paterfamilias, § 45, father of a fara- 
 patiens, -entis, capable of enduring, 
 
 patient. 
 patientSr, patiently. 
 patientiS-, -ae, patience. 
 pStina, -ae, dish. 
 patiSr, -1, passus, to suffer, endure, 
 
 permit. 
 patria, -ae, count}-y. 
 paucT, -ae, -S, feio, 
 paulatim, by degrees. 
 pauluB, -a, -uniyUttle; usually in the 
 
 Ace. and Abl. neuter, 
 pauper, -la, poor, 
 paupertas, -atis, poverty. 
 pavor, -oris, trembling. 
 pax, pacts, peace. 
 peccatum, -i, fault, ein. 
 peccfi, -are, -avi, -atum, to do wrong, 
 
 sin. 
 pectus, -oris, breast. 
 peciinia, -ae, sum of money. 
 pgcus, -6ris, cattle, flock, herd. 
 pedes, -\\ls, footman. 
 pedester, -tris, -tre, on foot. 
 pejor, -us (malus), worse, 
 pellis, -i?, skin, hide. 
 pellS, -ere, pepQlI, pulsum, to beat, 
 
 drivCf rout. 
 
 pend5, -ere, pependr, pensGm, to 
 
 cause to hang, to weigh, pay. 
 penes (Prep, with Ace), in the power 
 
 of. 
 pensum, -i, weight. 
 penus, -us, -i, -Sris, storehouse. 
 per, through. 
 per-ciitiS, -ere, -cussi, -cussum, to 
 
 strike through, hill. 
 perdS, -ere, -didi, -ditum, to destroy, 
 
 lose. 
 per-ducS, -5re, -dtixi, -ductum, to 
 
 lead through, extend. 
 per-eS, -ire, -ii, -itum, to perish. 
 per-facilis, -e, very easy, 
 per-fringC, -ere, -fregi, -fractum, to 
 
 break through. 
 perfuga, -ae, denerter. ^ [ceed, 
 
 perg8, -6re, perrexi, -rectum, to pro~ 
 perlculosus, -a, -um, dangerous. 
 periculum, -i, ti-ial, danger; peri- 
 
 culiim facere, to make a trial, 
 perinde (Adv.), exactly, precisely, 
 peritus, skilled, 
 
 permagnus, -a, -um, very great. 
 per-moveS, -ere, -movi, -motum, to 
 
 move thoroughly, alarm. 
 permultus, -a, -um, very much. 
 pernicies, -ei, destruction. 
 perpetuo (Adv.), continually. 
 perpetuus, -3,, -um, unending. 
 Persa, -ae, Persian, 
 per-sequ6r, -i, sectitus, to follow per~ 
 
 severingly, overtake. 
 per-suade5, -ere, -suasi, -suasum, to 
 
 persuade. 
 per-terreS, -ere, -terrui, -tcrritum, to 
 
 frighten thoroughlyj terrify. 
 per-tine8, -ere, -tinui, to reach, ea;- 
 
 tendf pertain, belong, 
 per-turb3, -are, -avi, -atiim, to con^ 
 
 found. 
 per-veniS, -ire, -veni, -ventum, to 
 
 come throughj arrive. 
 
PES 
 
 409 
 
 PRAESTO 
 
 pgs, p6dis, foot. 
 
 pessimus, -a, -iim (maliis), worst. 
 
 petSj -ere, -ivi, -itum, to seek, aak. 
 
 phalanx, -gis, phalanx ; Ace. Sing., 
 -em and -a; Ace. PL, -es and -as. 
 
 PhilippuB, -1, Philip. 
 
 philosfipbiis, -i, philosopher. 
 
 Phocion, -onis, Phocion. 
 
 pietas, -atia, dutifulneBa. 
 
 piger, -gra, -grum, tloWf lazy. 
 
 piget, piguit and pigitum est, it dis- 
 gusts, irks, troubled ; piget me tui, 
 / am disgusted with you. 
 
 pilum, -1, Javelin. 
 
 pirata, -ae, pirate. 
 
 piscis, -is, Jish. 
 
 Pis8, -onis, Piso. 
 
 piiis, -a, -um, dutiful, pious. 
 
 placed, -ere, -ui, itum, to please. 
 
 Plat8, -onis, a Grecian philosopher. 
 
 plebes, -ei and -is, and plebs, plebis, 
 common people. 
 
 plenuB, -a, -um, full. 
 
 pleruroque (Adv.), /or the moat part. 
 
 pliima, -ae, feather. 
 
 plus, pluris (§72, 7), more. 
 
 poctilum, -i, drinkHng-cup. 
 
 poema, -atis, poem. 
 
 Poeni, Carthaginians. 
 
 poeta, -ae, poet. 
 
 polliceor, -eri, -itus, to promise. 
 
 pollicitatiS, -onis, promise, 
 
 Pompeiiis, -i, Pompey, 
 
 pomum, -i, fruit. 
 
 pondiis, -eris, weigtit. 
 
 pon8, -ere, pSsui, pSsitiim, to put, 
 place. 
 
 pons, pontis, bridge. 
 
 populor, -ari, -attis, to lay waste. 
 
 populiis, -i, people. 
 
 porrigS, -ere, jorrexi, Borreotum, Jo 
 stretch out. 
 
 porta, -ae., gate cf a city. 
 
 ports, -are, -av^^fejum, to carry. 
 
 portus, -us, harbor. 
 
 posc8, -ere, poposei, to demand. 
 
 possum, posse, potui, to be able. 
 
 post, after, behind. 
 
 postea, afterwards. 
 
 posteriis, posterior, postremiis or 
 
 postumus, coming after; Comp., 
 
 of leas account, inferior. 
 postquam (Temp. Conj.), after. 
 postiilfi, -are, -avi, -atum, to demand. 
 potens, -entis, powerftd. 
 potentia, -ae, power, ability. 
 potestas, -atis, power, right. 
 p6ti6r, -iri, -itus, to get possession oj, 
 
 acquire. 
 prae, before, in comparifion with, for ; 
 
 prae maerore, for grief. 
 praebeS, -ere, -ui, itum, to furnish. 
 prae-ceptum, -i, precept. Prom 
 praecipiS, -ere, -cepi, -ceptum, to I'n- 
 
 atruct, order, command. 
 praecipitS, -are, -avi, -atum, to hurry 
 
 forioard. 
 praecipue, especially. 
 praeciputis, -a, -um, especial. 
 praeclarus, -a, -um, very distin- 
 guished. 
 praeo5, -onis, crier, herald. 
 praeda, -ae, booty. 
 
 prae-dicS, -are, -avi, -atum, to boast. 
 prae-ditus, -a, -Gm, endowed. 
 praedor, -ari, -atus, to plunder. 
 prae-f iciS, -€re, -feci, -fectum, to put 
 
 over, 
 prae-mittS, -ere, -misi, -missum, to 
 
 send forward. 
 praemium, -i, reioard. 
 prae-ponS, -posui, -positiim, to plaoe 
 
 before, to prefer. 
 praesens, -entis, present. 
 praesidium, -i, garrison, [guished, 
 praestans, -antis, excellent, dietin- 
 prae-sto, -are, -stiti, -stitum and 
 
 statum, to excel. 
 
PRAESUM 
 
 410 
 
 QUAM 
 
 prae-sum, -esse, -fui, to be over, 
 praeter, past, beeides, beyond. 
 praeter-eS, -ire, -ivi, -itum, to pass by. 
 praeter-mittS, -Sre, -misi, -missum, 
 
 to let slip. 
 praeter inodum, beyond measure, uji- 
 
 d\dy. 
 praetor, -oris, praetor, chief, 
 pravus, -a, -urn, crooked, depraved. 
 prem8, -ere, pressi, pressum, to prefta. 
 pretium, -j, price, value. 
 Priamus, -i, Priam. 
 primus, -a, -iim, Jirat. 
 princeps, -ipis, chief. 
 priSr, primiis,/o»'fflC7', sooner. 
 pristinuB, -S, -iim, former. 
 priusquam, before. 
 privatus, a, -iim, private. 
 pro, /or, before. 
 
 probitas, -atis, honesty. [forward. 
 pro-ced8, -ere, -cessi, -cessum, to go 
 prScul, at a distance, 
 pro-curr8, -ere, -ciicurri and -curri, 
 
 -cursiim, to run forward. 
 proditiS, -onis, treachery, 
 proditor, -oris, traitor. 
 proeliiim, -i, battle. 
 prSfeetiS, -onis, departure. 
 prS-ficlsc6r, -i, -fectiis, to set out. 
 pr5-flig8, -arS, -avi, -atum, to dash 
 
 in pieces, 
 pr5-fiigiS, -Sre, -fiigi, -fiigitlim, to 
 
 flee, run away, escape, 
 progenies, -ei, offspring. 
 progrediSr, -i, -gressiis, to go forth 
 
 or forward. 
 pr5-hibe5, -er6, -ui, -itiim, toprevent, 
 
 keep off. 
 prSmissiim, -i, promise. 
 promptiis, -a, -um, ready, quick. 
 pronus, -a, -iim, headlong, bending 
 
 over, 
 prSpe, -ius, proxime, near, nearer, 
 
 next. 
 
 prSperS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to haiten. 
 
 propinquus, -a, -iim, near. 
 
 propior, proximiis, nearer^ next. 
 
 pro-ponS, -ei'e, -pQsui, -positiim, to 
 set up. 
 
 propositum, -i, purpose. 
 
 propter, on accouni of. 
 
 proptcrea, on this account. 
 
 pro-pulsS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to repel, 
 
 pro-sequor, -i, seciitiia, to pursue. 
 
 pro-siim, prodesse, profui, to henefitf 
 to do good, 
 
 providentia, -ae, foresight, provi- 
 dence, 
 
 provincia, -ae, province. 
 
 proxime (Adv.), nearest, next. 
 
 proximiis, -a, -iim, nearest, next. 
 
 prudens, -entis, prudent, 
 
 prudentia, -ae, prudence. 
 
 publicus, -a, -um, public. 
 
 piidSt, piiduit, it shames. 
 
 piidSr, -oris, shame, modesty. 
 
 puella, -ae, girl. 
 
 puer, -i, boy, 
 
 pugna, -ae, fght. 
 
 pugn8, -are, -avi, -atiim, to fight. 
 
 pulche'r, -a, -iim, beautiful (^ 55, 
 Hem. S). 
 
 pulchritudS, -inis, beauty, 
 
 pulvis, -Sris, dust. 
 
 PunTciis, -S., -um, Carthaginian. 
 
 puniS, -ire, -ivi, -itum, to punish. 
 
 purgS, -are, -avi, -atum, to cleanse, 
 excuse. 
 
 piitS, -are, -avi, -atfim, to think, 
 
 PythagSras, -ae(^247), Pythagoras, 
 
 Q. 
 
 quadragesimiis, -a, -uva, fortieth. 
 
 quadraginta (§ 63), forty. 
 
 quaerS, -ere, quaesivi, quaesitiim, ff^ 
 
 seek, ask. 
 quails, of what kind, as. 
 qu&m, thaUf as. 
 
QUAMQITAM 
 
 411 
 
 RErREHENDO 
 
 quamquSlm, although. 
 
 quamvie, however muchj although. 
 quantus, -a, -Gm, hoio great, aa; tan- 
 
 tus — quantus, as great — aa. 
 quasi, aa if. 
 
 quatriduiim, -i, four daya. 
 quattuor (^ 63), four. , 
 
 queror, -i, questus, to complain. 
 qui, quae, quod, who, which. 
 quia (Conj.), because, 
 quicumque, whoever. 
 quidam (^ 89), « certain^ a certain 
 
 one J eome one, some. 
 qmdem, indeed. 
 quin, but that, that, but. 
 quindeciin (§ 63), ^fteen. 
 quingenti, -ae, -a Q QS)jJive hundred. 
 quippe, surely, ainee, 
 quia, g 89 ; quis, § 88. 
 quisnam, § 88. 
 quispiam, "j 
 quisquam, V g 89. 
 quisque, j 
 quiaquis, g B7, 4. 
 quivis, quilibet, § 89. 
 quo, whither. 
 
 quo-ad, to what point, aa long as, until. 
 qudd, because. 
 
 quo-minus {by which the less), from. 
 qudniam, ainee, becauae. 
 quoque, alao. 
 quot, how many, aa. 
 quotannia, yearly. 
 quotidie, daily. 
 quotiens, aa often aa. 
 quum. -i^ee cum. 
 
 R. 
 
 ramua, -i, branch, bough. 
 
 rapina, -ae, plunder, pillage. 
 
 rapi5, -ere, rapui, raptQtQ, to anatch, 
 seize, carry off. 
 
 rapttS, -are, -avi, -atum, (j aeize vio- 
 lently. 
 
 ratiS, -onis, plait, reaaoning, cause, 
 
 Kauraci, -5rura, a tribe of Gaula. 
 
 rebelUfi, -onis, rebellion. 
 
 recens, -entia, recent. 
 
 receptua, -us, retreat. 
 
 recipiS, -ere, -cepi, -ceptiira, to talce 
 
 back, regain, recover ; se recipere, 
 
 to retreat, to recover one's self. 
 rectus, -3,, -um, atraiglit, right. 
 recuperS, -are, -avi, -atum, to recover. 
 reciisS, -arS, -avi, -atum, to object, re- 
 
 pudiate. 
 red-do, -ere, -didi, -ditum, to give 
 
 bade, render, make. 
 red-e8, -ire, redii, reditum, to return. 
 redigS, -ere, -egi, -actum, to reduce. 
 red-integrS, -are, -avi, -atum, to re~ 
 
 neiD. 
 reditus, -us, return. 
 re-ducS, -ere, -duxl, -ductiim, to lead 
 
 back. 
 re-feriS, -ferre, -tiili, -latum, to with~ 
 
 draw. 
 re-fert, retulit, it concerna. 
 ref ici8, -ere, -feci, -fectum, to repair, 
 ■regina, -ae, queen. 
 regis, -onis, region, tract. 
 regnum, -i, kingdom. 
 regS, -ere, rexi, rectum, to rule. 
 ReguluS, -i, Regulue. 
 religiS, -onis, vow, religion. 
 re-linqu8, -ere, -liqui, -lietum, to 
 
 leave. 
 reliquiis, -a, -um, the rest. 
 renuntiatiS, -onis, report. 
 re-nun tiS, -are, -avi, -atum, to carry 
 
 back word. 
 reor, reri, ratus, to auppose. 
 repens, -entis, sudden. 
 repeute, auddeuly. 
 
 repentinus, S, -um, sudden. [out. 
 reperiS, -ire, reperi, repertiim, tojind 
 repeto, -ere, -ivi, -itUm, to seek bach. 
 reprehends, -Sre, -dxj - sum, to rebuke. 
 
IlEPUDIO 
 
 412 
 
 SERPENS 
 
 rcpudiS, -aire, -avi, -atum, to refuse. 
 
 res, rel, thing. 
 
 re-scindtS, -ere, -scidi, -scissum, to 
 cut down. 
 
 rg-sisttS, -ere, -stiti, to resist. 
 
 re-sponde3, -ere, -spondl, -sponaum, 
 to ansicer. 
 
 res publica (§49, Rem. 6), common- 
 wealth. 
 
 rete, -is, vet. 
 
 retineS, -ere, -uT, -tentum, to hold 
 hack, restrain. 
 
 re-velltJj -ere, -velli, -vulsum, to tear 
 off. 
 
 re-vereor, -erl, -itGs, to reverence, 
 
 re-v6c5, -are, -avi, -atum, to recall. 
 
 rex; regis, king. 
 
 Khenus, -i, the Rhine. 
 
 Rhodanua, -i, the Rhone, 
 
 robur, -Sris, heart of oak, strength, 
 
 rSgS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to ask. 
 
 KomS,, -ae, Rome, 
 
 Komanus, -a, -urn, Roman, 
 
 rosa, -ae, rose. 
 
 ruber, -5, -iiin, red. 
 
 rudens, -entis, rope^ cable. 
 
 rudis, -e, rude, uncivilized. 
 
 rumpS, -ere, rupi, ruptum, to break. 
 
 rupes, -is, rock. 
 
 rursiis, again. 
 
 rus, ruris, country. [(ry, rustic. 
 
 rusticus, -a, -iim, living in the coun- 
 
 S. 
 
 Sabini, -orum, Sabines. 
 
 sacer, -a, -um, sacred. 
 
 saoerdos, -otis, priest, 
 
 saepe, often. 
 
 saevus, -a, -um, savage, fierce. 
 
 s3.gitt3>, -ae, arrow, 
 
 8S.gittarius, -i, archer. 
 
 B3,]ar, -3,ri8, t*out. 
 
 salts, -are, -avi, -alum, to dance. 
 
 sS^IflbSr, -briB, -bre, wholcbume. 
 
 salus, -utis, safety, health. 
 
 sanctus, -a, -um, sacred, pure. 
 
 sanguis, -inis, blood. 
 
 sanus, sound, healthy. 
 
 sapiens, -entis, wise. 
 
 sapientia, -ae, toisdom. 
 
 satis, ei/ongh, sn^cient, sufficiently. 
 
 saucius, -a, -iim, wounded. 
 
 saxum, -i, rock, 
 
 scapha, -ae, boat, skiff. 
 
 scelus, -eris, crime, toickedness. 
 
 aci3, -irS, -ivi, -itum, to knoio. 
 
 ScTpiS, -onis, Scipio. \\orite, 
 
 scribS, -ere, scripsi, scriptum, to 
 
 scriptor, -oris, writer. 
 
 scutum, -i, shield. [cede. 
 
 se-ced5, -ere, -cessi, -cessum, to «e- 
 
 8e-cern8, -ere, -orevi, -eretiim, to sep- 
 arate. 
 
 sec.8, -arc, secui, sectum, seoaturus, 
 to cut. 
 
 secum, § 79, 2. 
 
 sScundum, following, according to. 
 
 sScundfis, -5, -iim, following, second, 
 favorable. 
 
 sectiris, -is, axe. 
 
 sed, biU. 
 
 sede5, -erS, sedi, sessilm, to ait, 
 
 sedes, -is, seat, settlement. 
 
 sSdile, -is, seat. 
 
 seditiS, -onis, sedition. 
 
 semper (Adv.), always. 
 
 sempiternua, -5, -um, everlasting. 
 
 senatus, -Us and -i, senate. 
 
 senex, senis, old. 
 
 sensus, -iis, feeling. 
 
 sententia, -ae, opinion; ex sententia, 
 satisfactoj'tly. 
 
 sentiS, -ire, sensi, aensum, to perceive. 
 
 Sequanus, -S,, -um, Sequan. As a 
 Noun, a Sequanian. 
 
 sequor, -i, sScutiis, to follow. 
 
 sermS, -onis, conversation, talk. 
 
 seri>ens, -entis, serpent. 
 
SEEVIO 
 
 413 
 
 SUPEEO 
 
 BerviS, -irS, -ivi, -itCm, to he a slave, 
 serve. 
 
 Bervitiis, -tutis, slavery. 
 
 Berv5, -are, -avi, -atunij to preserve. 
 
 servus, -T, slave. 
 
 sex (§ 63), six. 
 
 BibilS, -are, -avi, -atum, to hiss. 
 
 sic, thus. 
 
 BicQt or sioiiti, as, just as. 
 
 Bidue, -eris, starj constellation, 
 
 signum, -i, sign, signal, 
 
 Bilentiiim, -i, silence. , 
 
 silva, -ae, wood, forest. 
 
 silvestrig or -ter, -e, woody, 
 
 aimili?, -e, like. 
 
 simul, at the same time, 
 
 simul ac, as soon as. 
 
 Bin, hut if. 
 
 sine, without. 
 
 Binguli, -ae, -a, single, one at -a time. 
 
 SinS, -ere, Bivi, situm, to put, permit. 
 
 sinus, -us, gulf, hay. 
 
 BitiS, -ire, -ivi, to he thirsty, 
 
 sitis, -IS, thirat. 
 
 situs, -a, -uia {Part. sinS). " 
 
 socer, -i, father-in-law. 
 
 socius, -i, companion. 
 
 Socrates, -is, Socrates. 
 
 Bol, solis, sun. 
 
 soleS,-ere, solitus, to he used, wont. 
 
 soliis, -a, -um, only, alone. 
 
 solv5, -ere, solvi, sQlutiim, to loose. 
 
 somniis, -i, sleep. 
 
 soniis, -i, sound. 
 
 sSrOr, -oris, sister. 
 
 sors, sortis, lot. 
 
 spatium, -i, room, space, time. 
 
 spectatus, -a, -iim, looked at, ap- 
 proved. 
 
 spectS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to hole at. 
 
 speculatSr, -oris, scout, 
 
 specus, -us, den, cave, grotto. 
 
 spelunca, -ae, cave. 
 
 8per5, -are, -avi, -atum to hope. 
 35* 
 
 spes. -51, hope. 
 
 spoliS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to spoil, rob^ 
 plunder. 
 
 stabulum, -i, fold. 
 
 statim, immediately. 
 
 statu5, -ere, statui, statutum, to 
 place, put, determine. 
 
 statura, -ae, stature, size, height. 
 
 Stella, -ae, star, 
 
 stimulS, -are, -avi, -atum, to goad, 
 
 stimulus, -i, goad, 
 
 stipendiarius, -a, -um, tributary, 
 
 stipendiuro, -i, tax, tribute. 
 
 Bto, stare, steti, statum, to stand, 
 
 strenuQs, -a, -iim, nimble, active, 
 
 studeS, -ere, -ui, to attend to, be eager 
 for. 
 
 studiiim, zeal, desire; PI. studies, 
 
 stultitia, -ae, folly. 
 
 stultus, -a, -um, fooliah. 
 
 suadeS, -ere, suasi, suasiim, to advise. 
 
 siibeS, -ire, -ii, itum, to go under, ap- 
 proach. 
 
 sQbigo, -ere, -egi, -actum, to subdue, 
 
 subitS (Adv.), suddenly. 
 
 subitus, -a, -um, sudden. 
 
 sub-levS, -are, -avi, -atum, to relieve. 
 
 subsequSr, -i, secutus, to follow 
 
 subsidium, -i, reserve, support, help. 
 sub-veniiS, -ire, -veni, -ventum, to 
 
 come to one's assistance, help. 
 succSdS, -ere, -cessi, -cessum, to come 
 
 close up, 
 Suessiones, -um, the Suessionee, 
 sill, ^78. 
 
 sum, essS, fui, futurus, to be. 
 summiis, -a, -um, tJie highest, the top, 
 
 ^72,4^; §128, i?em. 9. ' 
 sumo, -ere, sumpsi, sumptum, to take, 
 supellex, -lectilis, furniture. 
 superbia, -ae, pride. 
 superbus, -a, -um, proud. 
 superfi, -are, -a 7\, -atum, to overcome. 
 
SXJPERSTITIO 
 
 414 
 
 TRIKNNIUM 
 
 fluperstitiS, -onTs, svperatitlon. 
 
 fiuperus, -a, -um, § 72, 4. 
 
 eupplicium, -1, puniehment. [rise. 
 
 surgo, -ere, surrexi, surrectum, to 
 
 sus-cipio, -ere/-ceplj -ceptum, to un- 
 dertake. 
 
 Buspicfir, -ari, -atus, to atiepect. 
 
 eustineS, -ere, -tlnui, -tentum, to sus- 
 tain, 
 
 BuQs, -a, -lim, his, her, its, their, § 80, 
 Mem. 2. 
 
 Syphax, -acis, Syphax, 
 
 Syracusae, -arum, Syracuse. 
 
 taceS, -ere, -ui, -itum, to be silent. 
 
 tacdct, -uit, it wearies, disgusts. 
 
 talentum, -i, talent, 
 
 talis, -S, such. 
 
 t^m, so. 
 
 tamen, nevertheless, 
 
 tametsi, although, 
 
 tandSm, at length. 
 
 tango, -6re, tetigi, tactum, to touch. 
 
 tanquam or tamquSm, as if, 
 
 tantus, -a, -um, bo muck, so great. 
 
 tantiis-dem, -ad€m, -und6m, just as 
 much. 
 
 tardS, -arS, -avl, -atum, to delay, re- 
 tard. 
 
 tardus, -S,, -Um, alow. 
 
 Tarquinii, -orum, Tarquinii. 
 
 Tarquinius, -i, Tarquin, 
 
 taurus, -T, hull. 
 
 tectum, -i, roof. 
 
 telluB, -uris, earth. 
 
 telum, -i, dart. 
 
 temere (Adv.), rashly. [ance. 
 
 tempSrantia, -ae, self-control, temper- 
 
 tempestaa, -tatis, time, weather {good 
 or bad), tempest, 
 
 teniplum, -i, temple, 
 
 tempiis, -Sris, time. 
 
 tSnax, -acis^ tenacious. 
 
 tenets, -ere, tenul, tentum, to hold, 
 
 tents, -are, -avi, -atum, to attempt, 
 
 tenuis, -e, slender, 
 
 tergiim, -i, hack. 
 
 terminus, -i, end, limit. 
 
 terra, -ae, earth, ground, land, 
 
 terreS, -ere, -ui, -itum, to frighten. 
 
 terror, -oris, terror, fright, 
 
 tertiua, -a, -um (§ 63), third, 
 
 testis, -is, witness, 
 
 Thebae, -arum, Thebes, 
 
 Thrax, -acis, Thracian, 
 
 thrSniis, -i, throne, 
 
 Tiberis, -ip, the Tiber. 
 
 time3, -ere, timuT, to fear, 
 
 timidus, -a, -um, cowardly. 
 
 timor, -oris, fear, panic. 
 
 Titus, -i, Tittis. 
 
 toleru, -ar6, -avl, -atum, to endure. 
 
 tondeS, -ere, totondi, tonsum, to 
 
 shear. 
 tSnttriis, -iis, thunder. 
 t6t, 80 mccny. 
 totus, -3., -um, whole. 
 tra-do, -ere, -dldi, -ditiim, to deliver 
 
 over, hand down, 
 tra-jieiS, -ere, -jeci, -jeotum, to ship 
 
 over. 
 trames, -itis, by-path. [across. 
 
 tra-n8, -are, -avi, -atiim, to swim 
 trans, across, heyond. 
 trans-ducS, -ere, -duxi, -ductfim, to 
 
 lead over. 
 trans-etS, -irS, transii, trauBitilm, to 
 
 go across, pass over, pass away, to 
 
 spend, 
 transjiciu. See trajicio. 
 tres, tria (^ 63), thi-ee. 
 tribunus, -i, tribune. 
 tribuS,- SrS, -ui, -utum, to give, as- 
 sign. 
 tribus, -Us, tribe. 
 triduum, -i, three days* time. 
 triennium, -i, three years' time. 
 
TRIGINTA 
 
 415 
 
 VENE]srUM 
 
 triginta (g 63), tMrtj/. 
 
 tripartlto, in three dii inons. 
 
 triplex, -iois, triple. 
 
 tristis, -e, sad. 
 
 Troja, -ae, Troy. 
 
 triicidS, -are, -avi, -atum, to slay, 
 
 butcher. 
 tuba, -ae. trumpet. 
 tueor, -eri, tuitus and tutua, to pro- 
 
 tect. 
 Tullia, -ae, Tallia. 
 CuUianiim, -i, a prison at Rome^ 
 
 built by King Serviue Tulliua. 
 TuUius, -i, Tully. 
 turn, then. 
 
 tumultus, -us, tumult, uproar. 
 tumulus, -i, mound, 
 tunc, then. 
 turba, -ae, crowd, 
 
 turbidus, -a, -um, disordered, muddy. 
 turbS, -are, -avi, -atum, to throw into 
 
 confusion, 
 turbS, -inis, whirlwind. 
 turpis, -e, base. 
 turris, -is, tower. 
 
 tutor, -ari, -atus, to defend, protect, 
 tutus, -a, -um, safe. 
 inuB, -3,, -um (§ 80), thy, thine, your, 
 
 yours. 
 tyrannus, -i, tyrant. 
 
 ubf, where, when. 
 ubique, everywhere. 
 ulciscSr, -i, ultus, to avenge, 
 nllus, -a, -iim (g 56, 1), any. 
 ulteriSr, -iis (g 74, 1), farther. 
 ultimus, -a, -um (g 74, 1), fartheetj 
 
 last, 
 ululo, -are, -avT, -atum, to howl. 
 umbra, -ae, shadow, shade, 
 umquara o?'\in(iuam, ever. 
 Bna (parte), in one place, toyether, 
 undS>, -ae^ wave. 
 
 unde, whence, from which, 
 
 undique, on all sides. 
 
 universiis, -a, -um, all, universal, 
 
 unquam (Adv.), ever. 
 
 unus, -a, -um, one. 
 
 unusquisque, each (§ 89, 8). 
 
 urb9, urbis, city. 
 
 urS, -ere, usBi, ustiim, (o bnrn. 
 
 usiis, -us, using, use, practice. 
 
 ut or uti, that, in order that. 
 
 liter ? -a ? -iim ? which of the two f 
 
 iiterque, -aque, -umque, both, 
 
 utilxs, -e, useful. 
 
 utinam, that ! 
 
 utrimque (Adv.), on both sides, 
 
 litor, -1, usiis, to use. ' 
 
 uxor, -oris, wife. 
 
 V. 
 
 vacS, -are, -avi, -atum, to be unoc* 
 
 cupied. 
 vacuus, -a, -iim, empty. 
 vadum, -i, ford. 
 
 vagSr, -ari, -atus, to wander about, 
 vale6, -erS, -ui, to be strong, well, 
 vallis, -is, valley. 
 vallum, -i, rampart. 
 variiis, -a, -um, various. 
 Varr5, -onis, Varro. 
 vastitas, -atis, devastation. 
 vastfi, -are, -avi, -atum, to lay waste. 
 vates, -is, prophet. 
 vectigal, -alis, tax. 
 vSbementer, excessively, 
 vehS, -ere, vexi, vectum, to carry, 
 vel, or, even. 
 veles, -itis, skirmisher, ' 
 velox, -ocis, swift, 
 velum, -i, sail. 
 veluti, just as, like. 
 venator, -oris, hunter 
 vends, -erS, vendidi, vBn litiim, to 
 
 sell. 
 venenum, -T, poison. 
 
VENETI 
 
 416 
 
 VULTUS 
 
 Veneti, -orum, the Veneti. 
 
 veniS, -ire, veni, Tentum, to come. 
 
 venter, -triB, heUi/. 
 
 ventus, -i, wind, 
 
 ver, veris, spring. 
 
 verbum, -i, word. 
 
 vereor, -erl, -itus, to reverence^ fear. 
 
 vergo, -6rS, versi, to turn, incline. 
 
 Veritas, -atie, truth. 
 
 Verres, -is, Vei-rea {boar), 
 
 versus, -us, verse. 
 
 vert8, -ere, verti, versum, to turn. 
 
 verils, -a, -um, true. 
 
 verutum, -i, javelin. 
 
 vescor, -i, to eat. 
 
 vesper, -i and -is, evening. 
 
 vester, -a, -um, g 80. 
 
 vestigium, -\, footprint. 
 
 vestis, -IS, clothing. 
 
 v£tus, -eris, old, ancient. 
 
 vexillum, -i, Jiag, ennign. 
 
 vex6, -are, -avi, -atum, to vex, harass, 
 annoy. 
 
 via, -ae, wai/. 
 
 vicesimus, -a, -um, twentieth, 
 
 victor, -oris, conqueror. 
 
 victoria, -ae, victory. 
 
 vicus, -i, village. 
 
 vide8, -ere, vidi, visum, to see; Pas- 
 sive, to seem. 
 
 vlgilia, -ae, watch. 
 
 vigil8, -arS, -avi, -atum, to watch, 
 
 vlginti (^63), twenty. 
 
 vinciS, -ire, vlnxi, vinctiim, to bind. 
 
 vincS, -Ere, vici, victiim, to con- 
 quer. 
 
 Tinouliim, -i, chain, 
 
 vinum, -i, wine. 
 
 vi618, -are, -avi, -atum, to injure, mal- 
 treat ; (of a law), to break. 
 
 vir, viri, man, husband. 
 
 VergTlitis, -i, Vergil. 
 
 virg8, -inis, virgin, 
 
 viridis, -e, green, 
 
 virtus, -tutis, courage, virtue, 
 
 vis, utrength, ^ 45. 
 
 vita, -ae, life. 
 
 vitiiim, -i, vice. 
 
 vit8, -are, -avi, -at&m, to shun, e«- 
 eape. 
 
 vttreiie, -a, -vim, made of glass, 
 
 vivo, -ere, vixi, victiim, to live, 
 
 vivus, -a, -um, alive. 
 
 vix (Adv.), scarcely. 
 
 v5c8, -arg, -avi, -atiim, to call. 
 
 v618, -are, -avi, -atum, to fly. 
 
 v618, velle, volui, to will. 
 
 voluptas, -tatis, pleasure, 
 
 volvo, -ere, volvi, voluttim, to roll, 
 
 v6rS, -are, -avi, -atiim, to devour, 
 
 votum, -i, vow. 
 
 vSveS, -ere, vovi, votQm, to vow. 
 
 vox, vocia, voice. 
 
 vulgiis, -i, com7non people. 
 
 vuInerS, -are, -avi, -atum, wound 
 
 vulnus, -eris, wound, 
 
 vultiir, -iiris, vultwe. 
 
 vultiis, -lis, coun^.enance. 
 
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY. . 
 
 ABILITY 
 
 A. 
 
 ahilitif, potestas. 
 ' able [to be), possum. 
 
 abound, abundS. 
 
 about, circiter, de. 
 
 above, super, supra. 
 
 absent, absens; to be abaent, abesse. 
 
 abuse, abuti {use amiaa); maledicere 
 {apeak amisa), 
 
 abusive {to be), maledioS. 
 
 access, aditus. 
 
 accomplish, conf iciS ; for the accom- 
 plishment of those things, ad eas 
 res conficiendas, 
 
 account {on account of), 6b. 
 
 accuse, arguS, accusS. 
 
 accustom, eonsuescS, 
 
 accustomed {to he), s51eS. 
 
 acquire, comparS. 
 
 acquit, absolvS. 
 
 across, trans. 
 
 active, agilis. 
 
 add, adds. 
 
 address, appellare. 
 
 Adherbal, Adberbal, -alia. 
 
 admire, mirSr. 
 
 admonish, rnoneS. 
 
 adorn, deeor5. 
 
 advance, progredior, procedS. 
 
 advantage, commodum. 
 
 aduice, consilium. 
 
 advise, moneS. 
 
 Aeduan, Aeduus, 
 
 affair, res. 
 
 afford, praebe8. 
 
 ANGRY 
 afraid {to be), timeS, metuS, vereSr, 
 after {Prep.), post; (Conj.), post- 
 
 quam, posteaquam. 
 afterwards, postea. 
 against, contra, ad, adverBua. 
 age, aetas. 
 
 agreeable, acceptua, gratus, [-us. 
 agreement, pactum, -ij conventGa, 
 agriculture, agricultiira. 
 aTi ! heu. 
 
 aid {N.), auxTlium. 
 aid { V,), subveniS, auxilium fer8. 
 air, aer. 
 
 alarm, perturb8, permoveS. 
 Alexander, Alexander, 
 all, omnia. 
 allege {aa you allege, etc), by the 
 
 Subjunctive (cf. § 197, ft); to allege, 
 
 dic5, praedicS. 
 allure, illiciS. 
 almost, fere. 
 alone, soliis. 
 already, jam. 
 also, etiam, quSque. 
 altar, ara. 
 although, licet, quamvis, quamquSm, 
 
 etsi, etc. 
 always, semper, 
 ambassador, legatus. 
 ambasay, legatlS. 
 
 ambush, insidiae. [apud. 
 
 among {of things), inter; {of persona, 
 ancient, vetus, antiquus. 
 anger, ira. 
 
 angry, iracundus, irattts. 
 417 
 
ANGEY 
 
 418 
 
 BIG 
 
 angry {to be), irascSr, 
 
 animal, animal. 
 
 announce, nuntiS. 
 
 annoy, vex6. 
 
 another {of two), alter; {of many), 
 alius. 
 
 answer, responded 
 
 any, g 89. 
 
 apiece, expressed by distributive nu- 
 merals (g 63, 1, c). 
 
 Apollo, Apoll8, -inis. 
 
 approach ( F.), aggredior, accedS; 
 {N.), adventus. 
 
 archer, Sagittarius. 
 
 Ariovistue, Ariovistiis, -i. 
 
 arise, orior. 
 
 Aristides, Aristides. 
 
 ai^m ( v.), arm8. 
 
 arms, arma. 
 
 army, exercitSs. 
 
 around, circum. 
 
 arrange, constituS. 
 
 arrival, adventtia. 
 
 arrow, sagitta. 
 
 art, ars. 
 
 aa {Conj.y, quam; aa great — as, tan- 
 tus — quantiisj aa many — aa, tot 
 — quot; just as much — aa, tantus- 
 dem — quantusdem; such — as, ta- 
 lis — qualis. 
 
 ascend, ascendS. 
 
 aacertain, cognoscS. 
 
 ashamed {to be), pudet, § 135, c. 
 
 aaJc, rog5, petS, interr6g8. 
 
 asleep {to fall), dormitS. 
 
 aaaault, oppugnS. 
 
 assert, confirm^. 
 
 assistance, auxilium ; to come to one's 
 assistance, subveni8. 
 
 atrocious, Sttox. 
 
 attach {N,), impStu". 
 
 attack ( v.), oppugnS, aggredioi, 
 
 attempt, tentS, conSr. 
 
 authority, auctSritas. 
 
 auxiliaries^ auxilia, -oriim. 
 
 avarice, avaritia. 
 
 avenge, ulciscor. 
 
 avoid, vitS. 
 
 await, exspectd. 
 
 aioare {all are), constat inter oninca. 
 
 Babylon, Babylon, -oniB. 
 
 back, tergum. 
 
 bad, malus. 
 
 badly, malS. 
 
 Balbus, Balbiis. 
 
 banish, patria pell5. 
 
 barbarian, barb5,rii8. 
 
 base, turpis. 
 
 bathe, lavS. 
 
 battle, proelium. 
 
 be, esse. 
 
 bear, ferS, tolert). 
 
 beat {defeat), pello, vinc5. 
 
 beautiful, pulcher. 
 
 beauty, pulchritiidS. 
 
 because, quod, quia (ciim). 
 
 become, fl5; it becomes, decet.. 
 
 bedchamber, cubiculum, 
 
 free, apis. 
 
 before {Prep.), antej {ConJ.), antS- 
 
 quam, priusquam. 
 beg, r6g8, pettS. 
 begin, coepi, incipiS. 
 behold, conspiciS, aspiciS. 
 behoove, it behooves, 5portSt. 
 Belgian, Belga. 
 believe, credS. 
 benefit, bcncf icium. 
 beseech, obsScrS. 
 besiege, obsidcS. 
 beat, optimus. 
 
 beatoio {labor, pains), SpSram dSrS. 
 between, inter. 
 beware, caveS. 
 Bibrax, Bibrax, -actio. 
 big, magnus, amplus. 
 
RINB 
 
 419 
 
 CHAMP 
 
 hind, vinciS. 
 
 bird, avis. 
 
 birthf natus, -us j before one*8 birth, 
 
 ante aliquCm natiim. 
 bite, mordeS. 
 biting, morsus. 
 hlame, reprehendS, incusS. 
 blind, caecus. 
 blood, sanguis. 
 boar, aper. 
 boast, praediG^. 
 boat, Bcapha, linter. 
 BoechuB, Bocchtis, -i. 
 bodi/, corpus ; nobody, nem5, nuUus ; 
 
 anybody, § 89. 
 hold, audax. 
 
 boldly, audac-iter, audacter. 
 book, liber. 
 booty, praeda. 
 born [to be), nascdr. 
 both, amb5 {both together); uterque 
 
 {both separately); on both sides, 
 
 utrimque ; by both parties, ab 
 
 utrTsque. 
 boundary, finis. 
 boundless, infinitiis. 
 how, arcus. 
 bowl, c§,tinus or -um. 
 boy, puer. 
 brave, fortis. 
 bravely, fortiter. 
 bread, panis. 
 break {a law), vifflS. 
 break through, perfringS. 
 bribe {N-), largitiSj pecunia. 
 bribe ( V.), largior. 
 bridge, pons. 
 
 bridle {V,), infrenS; {N.), frenfim. 
 bring, f erS ; bring word, nunti5 ; h'ing 
 
 back word, renuntiS. 
 Britain, Britannia. 
 Briton, Britannus. 
 broad, latiis. 
 brother, fratcr. 
 
 build, aedif ieare, condS j build ne«% 
 
 nidificS. 
 bull, taurus. 
 burden, onus, 
 hum, incendS, exurS; burn down, he 
 
 burnt down, deflagrS^ 
 business, negotium, res {PI.)* 
 but, s6d, verum, ver8. 
 buy, em 8. 
 
 by, a or 3uh,with Abl.; per, with Ace, 
 by far, longe. 
 bypath, trames. 
 
 Oadmus, Cadmus. 
 
 Caesar, Caesar. 
 
 Gains, Caius. 
 
 calamity, calamitas. 
 
 call, vocare ; call together, convB- 
 
 care; call back, revocare. 
 camp, castra. 
 can, possum, 
 canton, pagiia. 
 capital, caput. 
 captive, captivus. 
 care, cura. 
 
 cares not a straw, flocci non f&cit. 
 carry, portS, ferS. 
 Carthage, CartbagS or KarthagS. 
 Carthaginian, Poenus, Cartbagini- 
 
 ensis. 
 case {this is the), res ita se babet. 
 Catiline, Catilina. 
 Cato, Cats. 
 cause, causa. 
 cavalry, equitatua. 
 cave, spelunca. 
 cease, desistS. 
 centurion, centurii5. 
 certain, certua j a certain one, quidam. 
 certainly {he will certainly come), fiSil 
 
 nbn pSteat quin. 
 chain, vinculum. 
 vhamp, mord«8. 
 
CHANCE 
 
 420 
 
 DEAD 
 
 chance^ casils, fors. 
 change, mutS. 
 
 charactenatic {it is characttnatic of 
 n poor mail), pauperis est. 
 
 chariot, currus. 
 
 chief, princeps. 
 
 children, liberi. 
 
 choose, deligS. 
 
 citizen, civis. 
 
 citi/, Tirbs. 
 
 ciinl, civilis. 
 
 civilization, cultQs, hunianitas. 
 
 claim ( v.), postulS. 
 
 cloud, nubes. 
 
 colleague, col ega. 
 
 collect^ coIIigS, comparS. 
 
 combatant, pugnans, -antis. 
 
 come, venio. 
 
 command^ jubeS, imperS. 
 
 commander, imperatSr, praefectus. 
 
 commence {battle), committS. 
 
 commit {to any one), mandS. 
 
 common, communis; common people, 
 plebs. 
 
 commonwealth, res publica. 
 
 companion, cSmes, socius. 
 
 compel, cogtS. 
 
 complain, qn6r6r. 
 
 conceal, cel6. 
 
 concerning, de. 
 
 concerns, refert, interest. 
 
 concord, concordia. 
 
 condemn, condemntS. 
 
 confer, coUSquSr. 
 
 conference, collSquium. 
 
 confess, conf iteSr. 
 
 eonqner, vincS. 
 
 conscious, conscius. 
 
 conspiracy, conjuratiS. 
 
 conspire, conjuifi. 
 
 consul, consul. 
 
 consult, consuls. 
 
 contend, contendS, cert8. 
 
 contest, certamen. 
 
 continual, perpStuiis. [Gen 
 
 control {unable to), impStens, with 
 
 convenience, commSdum. 
 
 conversation, sermS. 
 
 converse, coUoquSr. 
 
 CQok, coqu8. 
 
 corn, frumentum. 
 
 corpse, cadaver. 
 
 correct, corrigS. 
 
 corrupt, corruropS. 
 
 cost, stare aliqua re. 
 
 council, concilium. 
 
 count, numerS. 
 
 conutenance, vultiis. 
 
 country, terrS, regiS; fines, PI, 
 
 courage, virtus, fortitudS. 
 
 course, cursiis. 
 
 covetous, avariis. 
 
 eoio, bos, vacca. 
 
 cowardly, coward, timidus, 
 
 Grassus, Crassus. 
 
 create, creS. 
 
 crime, scelus. 
 
 cross, transetS. 
 
 crown, corona. 
 
 cruel^ crudelis, atrox. 
 
 cruelty, crudelitas. 
 
 cultivate, c616. 
 
 cup, poculum. 
 
 custom, consuetiidS j according to ci«- 
 
 tom, ex consuetudine. 
 cut, secS. 
 
 cut down, rescinds. 
 cut off, interdict, intordicS. 
 
 D. 
 
 daily, cStidie, 
 
 dance, salt8. 
 
 danger, pSriculum. 
 
 dare, aude5. 
 
 dart, telum. 
 
 daughter, filiS. 
 
 day, dies; to-day, hodie. 
 
 dead, mortuus. 
 
DEAR 
 
 421 
 
 ELOQUENCE 
 
 dear, carQs. 
 
 death, mors. 
 
 debate, dispiltS. 
 
 deceiue, falI8. 
 
 declare, confirmS, praedic8. 
 
 decoy, illicit. 
 
 dedicate, diuS, 
 
 deem, existimS, duc5, habeS, 
 
 deep, altus. 
 
 defend, defendS, defensS, tueSr. 
 
 defer, diflfSrtS. 
 
 delay, moror. 
 
 delight, delectS, juv6. 
 
 Delphi, Delphi, -orum. 
 
 demand, poscS, postulS, flagitS, 
 
 dense, densiis. 
 
 deny, neg8. 
 
 depart, discedS. 
 
 depraved, pravus. 
 
 deprive, prlv8j spoliS. 
 
 depth, altitudS. 
 
 design, consilium, consultum. 
 
 desire {V.), cupiSj (-^.}» eupiditas, 
 
 ciipidS. 
 desirous, avidus, cupidus. 
 despair, desper5. 
 destitute, expers, inops. 
 destroy, dele8. 
 
 destruction ( Part, of deletS, § 191, 3, c), 
 determine, constituS. 
 devoid, vacuus, expers. 
 devour, vorS, dev6r6. 
 dictator, dictator. 
 die, moriSr. 
 
 differ {in opinion), dissentiS. 
 difference {what difference does it 
 
 make?), quid interest? 
 difficult, difficilis. 
 diligence, diligentia. 
 diligent, diligens. 
 disagreeable, ingratus. 
 disagreement, dissensiS, d^sco^dia. 
 disaster, calamitas. 
 discuss, jactS. 
 36 
 
 disgrace, dedecus. 
 
 disgusts, piget, taedet. 
 
 dish, catinus, catinum. 
 
 dismiss, dimittS. 
 
 displease, displiceS. 
 
 dispute, disputS. 
 
 distant {to be), absum, 
 
 distinguished, praestans, praeclarus. 
 
 ditch, fossa. 
 
 divide, dividS. 
 
 do, f aciS. 
 
 do good, prosiim. 
 
 dock-yard, navale. 
 
 dog, can is. 
 
 double, duplex; to double, duplictS, 
 
 doubt, dubitatiS ', to doubt, dubit5. 
 
 doubtful, dubius. 
 
 dove, columba. 
 
 down-hill, deorsiim, > 
 
 draw up, instruS. 
 
 dread, formidS. 
 
 drink, bibS. 
 
 drive, pellS. 
 
 Druids, Bruides. 
 
 Dumnorix, DumnSrix, -igis, 
 
 dust, pulvis. 
 
 duty, offieium, muniis ; it is the king't 
 
 duty, my duty, ^ 133. 
 dwell, habits, inoolS, 
 
 E. 
 
 each, quisque, unusquisque. 
 
 eager, avidus, cupiens. 
 
 eagle, aquila. 
 
 earth, terra, tellus. 
 
 earthen, fictilis. 
 
 easy, f acilis ; easily, facile ; very 
 
 easy, perfacilis. 
 eat, ed8, vescor, 
 
 edict, edictunij to issue anedict, edicS- 
 egg, ovilm. 
 eight, octS, ^ 63. 
 either — or, aut — aut. 
 eloquence, eloqaentia. 
 
ELOQUENT 
 
 422 
 
 FOLLY 
 
 eloquent, eI5quens. 
 
 embaeay, legatiS. 
 
 encanipf castra^ poaS, considS. 
 
 erieonrage, hortor, cohortor. 
 
 end, finis. 
 
 endeavor, Conor. 
 
 endure, ferS, patior, t61er5. 
 
 enemy, hostis. \ 
 
 enjoy, fruSr. 
 
 enmity, iDimicitia. 
 
 enough, satis. 
 
 err, errS. 
 
 especial, praecipuus, 
 
 especially, praecipue. 
 
 establish, confirmS, constituS. 
 
 esteem, aestim5. 
 
 even, etiam ; not even, ne quidem, 
 
 every, omnis. 
 
 evil (Adj.), malusj (N.), malum. 
 
 excellence, praestantia. 
 
 excellent, praestans. 
 
 exchange, mutS. 
 
 excite, ooncitS, excit5, instigS. 
 
 excuse, purgS. 
 
 exercise, exercetS. 
 
 exhort, hortor, cohortor, 
 
 expect, exspectS. 
 
 expel, pellS, expellS. 
 
 explain, cau&S,m afferre. 
 
 P, 
 face, facies. 
 fact (in fact), re. 
 faith, fides, 
 faithful, f idus, f idelis, 
 fall, cadS. 
 fame, fama. 
 family, familia. 
 famous, elarus. 
 far {Adv.), longe. 
 farmer, agricSla. 
 farthing, as, assis. 
 fasten, f IgS, destinS. 
 fatXer pater. 
 
 father-in-law, 65oer. 
 
 fault, culpa, delictum, peccatumj ii 
 
 is my fault, per me stat. 
 favor, f aveS. 
 favorable, secundus. 
 fear, timor, mfitus ; to fear, timeS, 
 
 metuS, vereSr. 
 feather, pluma. 
 feeling, sensua. 
 
 fellow {that fellow), iste hSm3. 
 fertile, ferax. 
 fever, febria. 
 few, pauci. 
 field, ager. 
 fierce, acer, atrox. 
 fiercely, acriter. 
 fifty, ^ 63. 
 
 fight { v.), pugnS; {N.), pugna, 
 fijure, figura. 
 
 fill, compleS, expleS, impletS. , 
 find, inveniS, rcperiS. 
 fine { v.), condemns, mulctS. 
 finish, confioiS. 
 fire, ignis J with fire and sioordf 
 
 ferro ignique. 
 first, primus. 
 fish, piscis. 
 fit, aptus, idoneus. 
 five, §63. 
 fiag, vexilliim. 
 
 fiank, latus; on thefiank, ab later€. 
 fiattertng, blandus. 
 fiattery, adtilatifi. 
 fiee, fGgiS, perfQgiS. 
 fieet, olassis. 
 fiesh, c5rS. 
 flight, fuga. 
 fiock, grex. 
 fiog, verberS. 
 
 fiow, fluS ; fiow into, iafluS. 
 fiower, flos. 
 
 fly, vsis. 
 
 follow, sgquSr. 
 folly, stultitia. 
 
FOND 
 
 423 
 
 HATRED 
 
 fond, amans, cupidus. 
 
 foody cibus. 
 
 fooly foolish, stultus. 
 
 footj pes ; at the foot of a mountain^ 
 
 sub monte. 
 footman^ pSdSs. 
 for {GonJ.), n3,m, enim, etc. 
 for grief {Preventing Gauae), prae 
 
 maerore. 
 for the purpoaCf causa. 
 for these things, 5b has res. 
 forbid, prohibeS, interdleS. 
 force, vis. 
 forces, copiae. 
 forest, silva. 
 forget, obliviscor. 
 form, forma, figura. 
 form a design, consilium capere. 
 fortify, communis, muni5. 
 fortitude, aequus animus, fortitudS. 
 fortune, fortunS,. 
 fo^ir, § 63. 
 
 fratricide, fratricida. 
 free (Adj.), liberj ( F.), liberS. 
 frequently, saepe, 
 fresh, integer, 
 friend, amicus. 
 friendship, .amioitia. 
 fright, pavor, timor, terrSr. 
 frighten, terreS. 
 from, a or Sb. 
 fruit, fructus. 
 fitll, plenus. 
 furnish, praebeS. 
 furniture, supellex. 
 fury, furor. 
 
 G. 
 Galba, Galba, -ae. 
 garden, hortus. 
 gate, porta. 
 
 Gaul, Gallia ; a Gau\ Galliis. 
 general, impSrator. « 
 Germrn, Germanus. 
 Germany, Germania. \ 
 
 gift, doniim. 
 
 gird, cingS. 
 
 girl, puella. 
 
 give, do. 
 
 glory, gloria. 
 
 glutton, comSdS. 
 
 go, e5, prSfioiscor; go out, exefi. 
 
 goad, stimulus. 
 
 God, deus. 
 
 goddess, dea. 
 
 gold, aurfim. 
 
 golden, aureus. 
 
 good, bonus ; to do good, prosum. 
 
 goose, anser. 
 
 govern, reg3, imperS. 
 
 government, imperium. 
 
 grammar, grammatica. 
 
 grandson, nepos, 
 
 great, magniis. 
 
 greatness, magnittidS, 
 
 Greece, Graecia. 
 
 green, viridis. 
 
 grief, dolor, maerSr. 
 
 ground, terra, humus. 
 
 grove, nemus. 
 
 grow, crescS. 
 
 guard, praesidium, custos. 
 
 guest, hospes. 
 
 guidance (e. g. of nature), natUrS 
 
 duce. 
 guide, dux. 
 gulp down, devdrS. 
 
 H. 
 
 half, dimidium. 
 
 hand, manus. 
 
 happily, beate. 
 
 happy, beatus. 
 
 harbor, portus. 
 
 hard, durus. 
 
 haste, properati5. 
 
 hasten, pr5per8, festinS, matiir8. 
 
 hasty temper, iracundia. 
 
 hatred, odiilm. 
 
HAVE 
 
 424 
 
 ISSUE 
 
 havcj tabetS, ess5 with JDtttive, 
 
 TiCf Tiimj is, g 83, 1. 
 
 Tieadj caput. 
 
 \ear, audiS, 
 
 heart} cor, 
 
 heavy J gravis j heavily , graviter. 
 
 heel, calx. 
 
 height, altitudtS, staturfi. 
 
 help, auxilium. 
 
 Helvetian^ HelvetiuS. 
 
 herif gallina. 
 
 hide, abd5j lated. 
 
 Mghj altUs. 
 
 highly {at a high jpHec), magni, § 137. 
 
 hill, coIlTs. 
 
 himself, se, ipsum, 
 
 hinder, impediS, obstS. 
 
 hindrancej impedimentum. 
 
 hold, teneS, habetJ; hold in, contineS. 
 
 home, domus. 
 
 honesty, prSbitas, 
 
 honor, hSnor. 
 
 honorable, honestus. 
 
 hope, spes; to hope, sper8. 
 
 hoiii, cornii. 
 
 horned, oorniger. [ex Squis. 
 
 horse, equus; on horseback, ex equo, 
 
 horseman, equea, 
 
 hostage, obses. 
 
 hour, hora. 
 
 house, domus. 
 
 howl, uIulS. 
 
 huge, ingens. 
 
 human, humantis. 
 
 hunger, fames. 
 
 hungry, esuriens. 
 
 hunter, venator. 
 
 hurl, conjieiS. 
 
 hurt, nScGo. 
 
 hurtful, noxius. 
 
 I, eg5, 
 
 if, SI, 
 
 ignorant, ignarus, insoiiis, imperitus. 
 
 image, effigies. 
 
 imitate, imitor. 
 
 immediately, statim. 
 
 immortal, immortalis. 
 
 immortality, immortalitas. 
 
 impatient, impatiens. 
 
 implore, obseerS. 
 
 import, imports, 
 
 important {it is), interest, 
 
 impossible {it is), fieri non pStost, 
 
 in, into, in, 
 
 incapable of restraining, impotens. 
 
 increase, auge8, cfesc5. 
 
 incredible, incredibilis. 
 
 indulge, indulgeo. 
 
 infant, infans. 
 
 infantry, pedites. 
 
 inferior {of less account), inferiSr. 
 
 infinite, inf initus. 
 
 inflict, inferre. 
 
 inform, certiorem facere. 
 
 inhabit, incolS. 
 
 inhabitant, incola. 
 
 injure, nSceS, injuria lacessS. 
 
 injury, injuria. 
 
 innocent, insons, innocuus. 
 
 insolence, insolentiE. 
 
 instigate, incat6, instigiS. 
 
 instruet, instituS, praecipiS. [est. 
 
 inBtructions were given, praeeeptum 
 
 integrity, prSbitas. 
 
 intellect, ingSnitim. 
 
 intimacy, conjunctiS. 
 
 into, in. 
 
 introduce, introducS, 
 
 intrust, mandt$. 
 
 invade, invadS. 
 
 inventor, inventSr. 
 
 invincible, inviotus. 
 
 invite, invito. 
 
 Ireland, Hibernia. 
 
 iron, ferrum. * 
 
 island, insula. 
 
 issue (^an edict), edicft 
 
JAVELIK 
 
 425 
 
 MAID-SERVANT 
 
 javelitif ptlum. 
 
 journey, it§r. 
 joyful, laetus, jucundus. 
 judge, judex, 
 Jngiirtha, Jugurtha, -ae. 
 Jupiter, ^ 45. 
 Jura, Jura. 
 
 just, Justus, aequus ; juat. as, tan- 
 quam; juat aa if, perinde quasi. 
 
 7ceep, servS; keep in, contineSj Jeeep 
 
 off, pr5hibeS. 
 hei/, clavis. 
 Jcid, liaedus. 
 
 kill, oocidS, triicidS, nSc8, 
 kind, benignuB. 
 kindness, benef icium. 
 king, rex. 
 kingdom, regnum. 
 knife, culter. 
 know, noscS; scid; not to /enow, nesclS. 
 
 LahienuB, LablenuS. 
 
 labor, labor, 
 
 lake, laous. 
 
 lamb, agnus. 
 
 lavie, aeger pedibus. 
 
 laud, terra, ager. 
 
 language, lingua. 
 
 last, ultimus. 
 
 law, lex, jus. 
 
 lawful {it ia), lioet. 
 
 lay waste, vastS. 
 
 lazy, piger. 
 
 lead, duc8j to lead on, adducS, in- 
 duct ; to lead over, transducS j to 
 /eac2ag'a?ns(, adduc8 J to lead back, 
 redueS. 
 
 leaf, fSlium, 
 
 leap ( v.), sali?S; leap upon, insiliS. 
 
 learn, discS. 
 36* 
 
 learned, doct'Sa. 
 
 leave, relinqu5. 
 
 legion, legiS. 
 
 Leman, Lemannua. 
 
 length, longitude. 
 
 leaa, minor. 
 
 let {him), third person, Imperative. 
 
 let {((«), first person Plural, Subjuno 
 
 tive, § 189, Remark 1. 
 letter {of the rt^^Aa6c(), litteraj {epia- 
 
 tle), epistola. 
 levy, conscribS. 
 liar, mendax. 
 
 liberty, libertas. [mentiSr, 
 
 lie {falsehood), mendaciumj to lie^ 
 lie {to lie hid), lateS. 
 lieutenant, legatiia, 
 life, vita, auima. 
 light {Adj.), levis; {N.), lux. 
 like, similis. 
 limbs, membra. 
 line of battle, aciea. 
 lion, le5. 
 
 Liscna, Liscus, -I. 
 little, parvus. 
 live, VIVO, habito. 
 liver, jeciir. 
 
 load, Snus," to load, onerd. 
 lock {of wool), flocciis. 
 long {Adj.), longus; {Ado.), diu. 
 look at, aspiclS. 
 look to, consilld {with Dative), 
 lose, amitttS. 
 
 love, amor; to love, amd. 
 lover, amans. 
 low, humilis. 
 lurk, lateS. , 
 
 hiat, ciipidS, libidtt, 
 lute, fides, -itim. 
 Lycurgus, Lycurgus, -T. 
 
 M. 
 magnanimoua, magnaninili^ 
 maidservant, ancilla. 
 
MAKE 
 
 426 
 
 OFTEN 
 
 tiiaie, faciS, reddu. 
 
 maltreaty viSlS. 
 
 maw, homu, vir. 
 
 Mauliua, Manlius. 
 
 maiijier, modus. 
 
 many, multl; how many, quSt. 
 
 marble, marmor. 
 
 Mark, Marcus. 
 
 marriage, matrimonium. 
 
 marry, in matrimonium ducere. 
 
 maat, malus. 
 
 master, magister, dominus. 
 
 meaiiB, facultas. 
 
 meaaaref metior. 
 
 medicine, medicina. 
 
 memory, memoria. 
 
 merckantf mercatSr. 
 
 Mercury, Mercurius. 
 
 messenger, nnntius. 
 
 Micipsa, Micipsa, -ae. 
 
 mile, mil!c passus. 
 
 Miletus, Miletus. 
 
 m.ilk, lac. 
 
 mind, unimus, mens. 
 
 mindful, memSr. 
 
 miserable, miser. 
 
 money, pecunia, nummus. 
 
 month, mensis. 
 
 mx>on, luna. 
 
 morals, mores. 
 
 more, plus, ampliue, mSgis. [milias. 
 
 mofAcr, mater; o/ a /ami7y, materfa- 
 
 mouniain, mens. 
 
 move, mSveS. 
 
 muck, multus. 
 
 mullet, mugilis. 
 
 multitude, mul^itudS. 
 
 murder, nec6, occid5. 
 
 music, musTca. 
 
 must, § 185. 
 
 my, meuF 
 
 N. 
 naked, nudus. 
 ncme, nomen. 
 
 nation, natiS, gens. 
 
 nature, Datura. 
 
 navigation, navigatio. [quuB. 
 
 Hear (Prep.), prope ; (Adj.), propin- 
 
 necklaee, munile. 
 
 need, opus. 
 
 neglect, neglegS. 
 
 neighboring, f initimus. 
 
 neither [of two), neuter. 
 
 neither — nor, nequ£ — neque, nee — 
 
 neque. , • 
 
 Neptune, NepttinuB. 
 nest, nidus; to build a nest, nidifioS 
 net, rete. 
 
 never, nunquam, ne unquS.m. 
 new, novus. 
 next, proximus. 
 night, nox. 
 nine, § 63. 
 710, nullus. 
 
 no one, nemS, ne — quisquHm. 
 nobility, nobilitas. 
 noble, nobilis. 
 noise, clamor, strSpitus, 
 none, nullus. 
 not, non. 
 nothing, nihil. 
 Numantian, Numantinus. 
 number, numSrua. 
 Numidia, Numidia. 
 Numidian, Numida. 
 
 0! 0! oh! 
 
 that! utinam. 
 
 oath, jusjurandum. 
 
 obedient, dicto andlens. 
 
 obey, pareS. 
 
 obscure, obscurS. 
 
 obtain, p5ti5r, nanciscdr. 
 
 occupy, occup8. 
 
 off, — two miles off, a duobfls, milY- 
 
 bus. 
 q/>en^aepS. 
 
OLD 
 
 427 
 
 PRODUCTIVE 
 
 oldj eSnex ; Jive years old, quinque 
 annos natus. 
 
 oldest, maximus natu. 
 
 on, ID. 
 
 on horseback, ex equo or equls, 
 
 one, uniis ; one of two, alter ; one of 
 viani/f alius {when followed hy an- 
 other). 
 
 opinion, gcntentia. 
 
 opportunity, facultas, potestas. 
 
 oppress, opprimS. 
 
 or, vel, ve, aut, §123, 2. 
 
 oracle, oraculum. 
 
 oration, oratiS. 
 
 orator, oratSr. 
 
 order, imperS, jube8. 
 
 origin, 6rig5. [g 184. 
 
 ought, oportet, Gerundive with esse, 
 
 our, noster; our men, nostri. 
 
 out of, 5, ex. 
 
 over, trans. 
 
 overcome, supertS, vinciS, 
 
 overtake, conscquor. 
 
 ox, bos. 
 
 P. 
 
 pace, passus. 
 
 pain, dolSr. 
 
 pains, opera. 
 
 panic, timor. 
 
 paper, charta. 
 
 parent, parens. 
 
 parricide, parricida. 
 
 part, pars J for the most partf pie- 
 rum que. 
 
 parties {by hotJi), ab utrisque. 
 
 partly, partim. 
 
 pass away, transeS. 
 
 pass hy, praetereS. 
 
 patiently, aequo animS, 
 
 pay, pend5. 
 
 peace, pax. 
 
 people, pSpuliis j common people, 
 plcbs, plebes, » 
 
 perceive, intellegS, animadrertS. 
 
 perish, pere8. 
 
 persuade, persuadeS. 
 
 philosopher, philosophus- 
 
 pirate, pirata. 
 
 pitch cavip, castra ponere, 
 
 pity, misereor, miseret, § 135, v, 
 
 place, locus. 
 
 plan, consilium. 
 
 play ( v.), lildS. 
 
 pleasant, gi^tiis. 
 
 please, placeS. 
 
 pleasure, vSluptas. 
 
 plough, arS. 
 
 plunder ( F.), praedor, dlripiS; (JT.), 
 
 praeda. 
 poet, poeta. 
 point, acies. 
 poison, venenum. 
 Pompey, Ppmpeius. 
 poor, pauper. 
 post, locus. 
 
 poverty, paupertas, egestas, 
 power, potestas, vis. 
 powerful, potens. 
 praise ( V.), laudSj {N,), laus. 
 pray {who, pray?), quisnam? 
 precept, praeceptum. 
 prefer, praeponS. 
 prepare, par5. 
 presence {in the presence of niany)^ 
 
 multiB praesentibus. 
 present, praesens. 
 preserve, servS, conservo. 
 prevent, impedio, SbstE, deterred. 
 prey, praeda. 
 Priam, Priamiis. 
 price, pretium. 
 pride, superbia. 
 priest, sacerdos. 
 prison, career. 
 prisoner, captivus, 
 private, privatiis. 
 productive, f erax. 
 
PEOMISE 
 
 428 
 
 RUN FORWARD 
 
 promise (V.), polliceSr; (N.), pro- 
 
 missum, fides. 
 property (wealth), res familiaris. 
 protect, tiitari. 
 proud, superbus. 
 providence, providentia. 
 province, provincia. 
 provoke, lacessS. 
 prudence, prudentia. 
 prudent, priidens. 
 public, publicus. 
 punish, puniS. 
 2)um8kmcnt, supplicium. 
 purpose, propositum; on purpose, 
 
 consulto. 
 pursue, persequSr, consequor. 
 ^H(jpon8j put into winter quarters, 
 
 in hiberna collocare. 
 put over, praef ici8. 
 Pythagoras, Pythagoras. . 
 
 Q. 
 
 queen, regiDa. 
 
 quickly, celeriter, 
 
 B. 
 
 race, cursus. 
 
 rain, imber, 
 
 ram, aries. 
 
 rampart, vallum. 
 
 rank, ord8. 
 
 reach, ad 15cum pervemrS. 
 
 read, l§g5. 
 
 ready, protnptus, paratus. 
 
 reason (mental faculty), ratifl. 
 
 rehelUon rebelliS.' 
 
 rebuke, reprehendS. 
 
 recall, rev6c3. 
 
 receive, accipiS. 
 
 recent, reccns, 
 
 recollect, meminT. 
 
 redress {to ask), res repetere. 
 
 refinement, btumanitas. 
 
 refrain from, sib! temperare quin. 
 
 region, regif. 
 
 reign {in the reign of), aliquo reg- 
 
 rejeet, rSpudiS. [nante. 
 
 rejoice, gaudeS. 
 
 relieve, lev8. 
 
 religion, rellgiS 
 
 remain, manefi. 
 
 remember, memini, mSmoria, ttneB. 
 
 remind, mSneS, admBneS- 
 
 render, reddo. 
 
 reneic, redintegrS 
 
 repair, ref iciS. 
 
 repent, paenitet, § 135, 
 
 reply, respondeS. 
 
 report, renuntiatiS. 
 
 reproach, compellS. 
 
 reprove, reprehendfl, 
 
 republic, res publica. 
 
 resolve, statu©. 
 
 respect, revereor. 
 
 rest, reliquus, § 128, Rem. 9. 
 
 retard, tard5. 
 
 retire, excedS, se recipSre. 
 
 retreat, recipi8. 
 
 return, rcdcS, reddo. 
 
 reverence, rcvcrcQr. 
 
 reioard, praemium. 
 
 Ithine, Ehenus. 
 
 Rhone, Rhodanus. 
 
 rich, dives. 
 
 riches, divitiae. 
 
 ride, equitS. 
 
 river, flumen, atnnis. 
 
 road, via, iter. 
 
 rohher, praediS, latrS, 
 
 rock, rtipes, saxum. 
 
 Roman, KomaDus. 
 
 Rome, RomE. 
 
 rope, riidens. 
 
 rose, rosa. 
 
 rough, asper. 
 
 rout, fugtS, profligS. 
 
 rule, reg8. 
 
 run, curr8, 
 
 runmforward, procurrS. 
 
SACKED 
 
 429 
 
 SPEECH 
 
 eacredj gS.cer, sanctus. 
 
 Bacrljlce, mactS. 
 
 safcj tutus. 
 
 safety, salus. 
 
 BagaciouBf argutiis, 
 
 sail, velum; to sail, navigS, 
 
 Bailor, nauta. 
 
 Bail-yard, antenna. 
 
 sake, for the sake of, causa. 
 
 8<(me, idem. 
 
 Batisfactorily, ex sententia. 
 
 eatiBfy, expleS, satisfaciS. 
 
 savage, atroXj ferus. 
 
 saue, servS. 
 
 Bay, dicS, inquam. 
 
 scout, esplorator. 
 
 sea, mare. 
 
 search out, explorS, investigS, 
 
 seat, sedile. 
 
 secede, secedS. 
 
 second, seoundus. 
 
 see, vide8. 
 
 seek, pet8, quaerS. 
 
 seem, videor. 
 
 seize, occupS, rapiS, arripiS. 
 
 select, delig5. 
 
 self, ipse, 
 
 sell, vends. 
 
 senate, senatus. 
 
 send, mitts J aenc^ /onoarrf, praemittS. 
 
 sense, sen 9 lis. 
 
 separate, dlvidS, secemS. 
 
 Sequan, SequanuS» 
 
 serpent, serpens. 
 
 servant, serviis. 
 
 serve, serviS.' 
 
 service, officium. 
 
 set, ponS ; set np, collocS proponS, 
 
 seven, § 63. 
 
 seisre, gravis. 
 
 severely, gravitei. 
 
 shade, umbra. 
 
 shame, p&dSr. 
 
 sharp, acer, acutus. 
 
 sheaf, merges. 
 
 shear, tondeSl 
 
 sheep, Svis. 
 
 shepherd, pastSr. 
 
 shield, scutum. 
 
 skip, navis. 
 
 shore, litiis. 
 
 short, brcvis. 
 
 shortneBs, brevitas. 
 
 shout, clamor; to shout, clamS. 
 
 show, monstrS. 
 
 side, latiis, pars. 
 
 signal, signum. 
 
 silver, argentiim. 
 
 sin, peccatiira. 
 
 since, cum, quoniam. 
 
 sing, cants. 
 
 singing, cantiis. 
 
 sister, sSror. 
 
 sit, sedeS. 
 
 six, § 63. 
 
 size, magnitildS. 
 
 skirmisher, veles. 
 
 slave, serviis. 
 
 slavery, servitus. 
 
 slay, trucidS, occidS. 
 
 sleep, dormiS. 
 
 slight, levis. 
 
 slinger, funditor. 
 
 slow, tardiis, piger. 
 
 small, parvus, exiguiis. 
 
 snares, insidiae. 
 
 snatch up, arripiS. 
 
 soldier, miles. 
 
 some, aliquis, quidam, etc., § 89. 
 
 son, f ilius. 
 
 son-in-law, gener. 
 
 soon, mature. 
 
 soul, animils. 
 
 space, spatium. 
 
 spare, parcS. 
 
 speak, 15qudr. 
 
 speech, oratiS. 
 
SPEND 
 
 430 
 
 THROW 
 
 fpei.d, ctinsumS; to spend titnCj EgS. 
 
 spring, ver, 
 
 epoil {booty), praeda. 
 
 spur, calcar. 
 
 stag, cervus. 
 
 stand, stji; to stand out, existS. 
 
 state, eivitas. 
 
 statitre, statura. 
 
 stajf, maneS. 
 
 still {as yet), adbuc. 
 
 stir vp, excitSj concitS. 
 
 stone, lapis. 
 
 storm, tempestas ; to storm, expugnS. 
 
 strength, robur, via. 
 
 stretch {out), porrigS. 
 
 strike, percutiS. 
 
 strip, nud8. 
 
 strong, firmus, validus. 
 
 strongly, vehfimenter, 
 
 studies, studia, PL 
 
 subdue, pacts, d5m8. 
 
 subjugate, subigtS. 
 
 stteh, talis. 
 
 sudden, subitus, repentlnus. 
 
 suddenly, repente, subitS. 
 
 sue for, pets. 
 
 suffer, pJLtior. 
 
 sufficiently, satis. 
 
 suitable, aptuB, idoneus. 
 
 summer, aestaB. 
 
 sun, sol. 
 
 sunset, soils occaails. 
 
 sup, cenS. 
 
 superior, praestanti5r. 
 
 superstition, superstitiS. 
 
 support, sustineS. 
 
 suppose, arbitrSr, Cpinor, existimS. 
 
 suppress, opprimS. 
 
 surrender, dediti^', to suri'ender, tra.- 
 
 do, dedo. 
 surround, circumd^, circumfundS. 
 suspect, Buspicor. 
 sustain, sustineS. 
 sweet, dulcis. 
 
 swell, augcS. 
 
 Bioi/t, celer, veloXj 
 
 swiftly, celeriter. 
 
 swiftness, celentas. 
 
 atcim across, tranS. 
 
 sword, gl3.dius; the sword, ferrum. 
 
 table, mensa. [occtipS, 
 
 take, sum8, capiS; take possession ofj 
 
 talent, talentum. 
 
 talk, lOquor, coUSquSr. 
 
 tame, domS. 
 
 teach, doceS. 
 
 teacher, doctSr, magister, 
 
 teaching, doctrlna. 
 
 teai; lacrima. 
 
 tear to pieces, lani8. 
 
 temper {hasty), iracundi^. 
 
 tempest, tempestas. 
 
 temple, templum. 
 
 ten, § 63. 
 
 tenacious, tSnax. 
 
 tenth, decimus, § 63. 
 
 terrible, atrox, terribilis. 
 
 terrify, perterretS. 
 
 than, quam. 
 
 their, suus, eorum, § 83, 2, 
 
 then, turn. 
 
 ihick, denBus. 
 
 thief, fur. 
 
 thing, res. [more of, pliiris facio, 
 
 think, r66r, cogitS, existimS, piltS; 
 
 third, tertius, § 63, 
 
 thirst, Bitis ; to thirst, siti8. 
 
 thirty, § 63. 
 
 this. Mo. 
 
 though, § 123, 9. 
 
 thousand, mille. 
 
 Thracian, Thrax. 
 
 threaten, minSr. 
 
 three, tres, ^ 63. 
 
 through, per. [transjiciS. 
 
 throw, jaci8, jactd ; throto across. 
 
THRUST 
 
 431 
 
 WALK 
 
 $hru8t through, transf ig8. 
 
 thunder, tSnltru. 
 
 till, dum, doneo, c[uoId. 
 
 time, tempus. 
 
 to, ad, in. 
 
 together, una, oon-, 
 
 too, § 63, Hem. S. 
 
 too much, nimiilm. 
 
 tooth, dens. 
 
 top, summus (mona, e^c), 
 
 torture, cruciatQa.' 
 
 tfnoards, ad, adversiis. 
 
 tower, turris. 
 
 town, oppidum. 
 
 townsTrtan, oppldanus. 
 
 traitor, proditSr. 
 
 transport, transport©. 
 
 treachery, proditiS. 
 
 treaty, foedus. 
 
 tree, arbor. 
 
 tribune, tnbQnus. 
 
 tribute, stipendium. 
 
 triple, triplex. 
 
 trouble, opera, labSr. 
 
 true, verus, 
 
 trumpet, tuba. 
 
 truBt, confidS. 
 
 trusting, fretus. 
 
 truth, Veritas. 
 
 Tullia, Tullia. 
 
 Tally, Tullius. 
 
 tumult, tumultiis. 
 
 turf, caespes. 
 
 turn, vert8. 
 
 twelve, twelfth, ^ 63. 
 
 twenty, two, etc., § 63. 
 
 U. 
 unable, impotens ; to he unable, non 
 
 posse. 
 unaccustomed, insuetus. 
 unarmed, inertnis. 
 uncertaiUf incertus. 
 ttnder, Bnb. 
 
 understand, intellegtS. 
 
 undertake, suscipiS. 
 
 unduly, praeter modiim. 
 
 undutifulneae, impietas. 
 
 uneasy, anxitis, sollioituB. 
 
 unfortunate, infelix. 
 
 ungrateful, ingratus. 
 
 unhurt, integer. 
 
 unjust, iniquus. 
 
 unknown, ignotus. 
 
 unless, nisi. 
 
 unlike, dissimilis. 
 
 unmindful, immSmSr. 
 
 until, dum, donee, quoS,d. [noI8. 
 
 unwilling, invitus ; to be unwilling^ 
 
 upbraid^ compell3. ^ 
 
 uproar, tumultus. 
 
 urge on, eoncitS, incTtfi- 
 
 USBj usus. 
 
 useful, utilis. 
 
 useless, inutilis. 
 
 V. 
 
 vacant (to be), vacS. 
 
 valor, virtus, fortitiidS. 
 
 value, pretium. 
 
 vast, ingens, immania. 
 
 very, valde, maxime ( Super tuttve)* 
 
 vex, vextS. 
 
 vice, vitium. 
 
 victory, victoria. 
 
 village, viciis. 
 
 violate, viSIS. 
 
 violence, vis. 
 
 virgin, virgS. 
 
 virtue, virtus, prSbitaa, 
 
 voice, vox. 
 
 vow, votum. 
 
 vulture, vultur. 
 
 W. 
 
 wage, gero ; wage upon, inf erS. 
 wait for, exspectfl. 
 walk, ambilltS. 
 
WALL 
 
 432 
 
 YOUTH 
 
 toall, murus. 
 wander, errC, vSgSr. 
 want {to be in want of), €ge8. 
 war, beUum. 
 warlike, ferOx, acer. 
 warn, mpneS, admSneS. 
 watchf vigilia j to loatck, vigilS. 
 water, aqua. • 
 
 toave, fluctus. 
 way, via, iter. 
 weak, infirmus. 
 weary, fessus, defessils. 
 toeep, lacnmS, fleS. 
 weight, pondus. 
 well, benej to be well, valeS. 
 what? quid? qui? wAa^, qudd. 
 when, cum. 
 whence, unde. 
 where, ubt. 
 
 where in the world, iiblf gentium. 
 whethgr, num, utrum, an. 
 which f quis? uter [of tioo), 
 whirlwind, turbG. 
 white, albuB. 
 whither, quo. 
 who? qui? quIs? 
 whole, totus. 
 why? cur? quare? 
 wicked, imprSbiis. 
 wide, latuB. 
 wife, uxor, conjuz. 
 wild boar, aper. 
 willing {to be), volS. 
 wind, ventQs. 
 wine, vinum. 
 wing, ala. 
 
 winter, hiemsj to winter {spend the 
 winter, hiSm5. 
 
 winter quarters, hiberD&. 
 
 wisdom, sapientia. 
 
 wise, sapiens. 
 
 wish, v518. 
 
 with, cQm {Prep, toith Abl.), 
 
 without, sine. 
 
 witness, testis. 
 
 wolf, luptis. 
 
 woma7i, mulier. 
 
 wonder, miror. 
 
 wonderful, mirils. 
 
 wood, silva. 
 
 word, verbum j bring word, nuntiS. 
 
 work, opus. 
 
 looi'k-horse, jiimenttim. ' 
 
 world, mundus, orbis terrar0.m. 
 
 worse, worst, pejor, pessimiis. 
 
 worship, col8. 
 
 worthy, diguus. 
 
 wound, vulniis; to wottnd, vuInerS, 
 
 wrath, ira. 
 
 wretched, misSr. 
 
 write, scribtS. 
 
 writer, seriptor. 
 
 wrong {to do), peccS, male faciO. 
 
 Y. 
 
 yard, antenna. 
 
 year, annus. 
 
 yearly, qu5tanni8. 
 
 yesterday, heri. 
 
 yet, tSmen. 
 
 yield, ced8, concedS. 
 
 yoke, jiigiim. 
 
 you, til, Tos. 
 
 young, jilvenis, adiilescens. 
 
 your, tuiis, restSr. 
 
 youth, jiiTentua. 
 
INDEX. 
 
 The references are to sections, unless otTierudse stated. 
 
 a, ace. in, 3d Dec, 46, IV. end. 
 
 a, Greek nouns in, 246, 2. 
 
 a, as stem-vowel of Ist Conjug., 21, 
 v., 2 R. J2 ; 99, 4. 
 
 a (1st) declension, 18. 
 
 a or ah, remark on use of, 120 R. 3 j 
 with abl. after propior, 144 E,. 4 ; 
 with abl. instead of dat. of agent, 
 148 R. 1 ; 185 R. 3 ; with abl. of 
 medaure, 153 K. 3; after ^e(o,^os- 
 tulOf 151 R. 2; with abl. of separa- 
 tion, 160 R. 1 and R. 4; with abl. 
 of meana, 167 R. 6 ; with abl. of 
 origin, 161 R. 1 ; with namea of 
 places, 173, 2; 175 E. 2; with ge- 
 rund, 184 R. 4, IV.; with abl. of 
 agent, 166. 
 
 abesae, 153 R. 3. 
 
 Ablative, relations expressed by, 15 
 (/); 159; ending in -dbils, 18 R. 
 5; in i, 33 R. 2 and 3 ; 37; 38 R. 
 2 and 3; 46, IV.; MR. 2; 61, 2; 
 44 R. ; 61, 3, exo. ; — in e of adj., 
 61,2; in -Mitts, 48 R. 4; of adj. in 
 e, 59 R. 2 ; of pres. part., 61, 2 ; 
 neuter as adv., 117, 6; eo . . . 
 quo, etc., 164 R. 1; after preposi- 
 tions, 120 ; with ex, de for paitit. 
 gen., 134 R. 2; of crime, 136 R. 1; 
 with pi 5 (in defence of ), 141 R. 
 2; Syntax, 159-172; of separation, 
 160; with verbs of filling, 160 R. 
 37 
 
 ABLATIVE 
 
 2; with adj. of fulneas, 160 R. 3; 
 with nUdua, orbua, and Ivher, 160 
 R. 4; of origin, 161; of nlat-erial, 
 
 161 R. 2; of limitation, 162;'wlth 
 dignua and indigima, 162 R. 1; 
 ndtu, 162 R. 1 ; with facio, flo, 
 
 162 R. 2; aententia, etc., 162 R. 3; 
 of compariaon, 70, 2; 163; of ab- 
 stract nouns {ape, etc.) with com- 
 parative, 163 R. 5 ; of difference, 
 164 ; with ante and post, 164 R. 3 ; 
 of cauae, 29, 1 ; 165 ; with expres- 
 sions of trust, 165 R. 1 ; with prae, 
 165 R. 2 ; causa, gratia, 165 R. 3 ; 
 with de after verbs of asking and 
 demanding, 151 R. 2 ; with abesae 
 and diatare, 163 R. 3 ; of agent, 96 
 R. 1 ; 108, 2 ; 166 ; of meana and 
 instrument, 161 ; with m«(J)-, etc., 
 167, 1; with dpijs and «»»«, 167, 
 2 ; of perf. pass, partioip,, 167 R. 
 2 ; with verbs of filling, etc., 167, 
 3; of defi/nite price, l&iyi; of pen- 
 alty, 167, 5 ; of route by ivhicli, 167, 
 5; of victim, 1-67, 5; with nifor, 
 167, 5; with stare, 167, 5; with 
 aasuetHa, etc., 167, 5 ; made vir~ 
 tuts eato, 167, 5 ; of manner or 
 accompaniment, 168 ; with cwm, 
 168 B. 1; to express Eng. "with- 
 out," 168 R. 3; of accompaniment 
 with cum, 168 R. 4; of quality, 
 169; in predicate, 169 R. 1; of 
 
 433 
 
ABOUNDING 
 
 .434 
 
 ADJECTIVES 
 
 place where, 170 j with totua, 170 
 R, 2 ; of time when, 171 ; with hie 
 and illi, 171 B. 2 j to express du- 
 ration of time, 171 R. 6; 153 R. 2; 
 with a preposition, of towns and 
 «7?ia?i ialanda, 175 ; in apposition 
 with the locative, 176 R. 1; 127 
 R. 4j of gerund, 184 R. 4, IV.; 
 Ablative Absolute, 172, 192 ; with- 
 out particip., 192 R. 1; after ntei, 
 192 R. 3. 
 
 Abounding, verbs of, with abl., 167, 3. 
 
 Abstract nouns, abl. of, with com- 
 parative, 163 R. 5. 
 
 -dbua, Dat. and Abl. plu. 1st Dec, 
 18 R. 5. 
 
 dc, vid. atque. 
 
 dc at, 214. 
 
 Accompaniment, abl. of, 168; with 
 cum, 168 R. 4. 
 
 Accnaative, relations expressed by, 
 15 (d) ; in -w or -exs, 30 R. 3 ; In 
 -im, 33 R. 2 and 3; 46, IV.; in 
 -ea, 46, IV. end; in -ia, 46, IV. 
 end; in -a, 46, IV. end; of an 
 adj. used as an adv., 117, 6; af- 
 ter prepositions, 120; 152; as 
 object of a verb, 22, 1; 149, 150; 
 Syntax of, 149-156; as direct ob- 
 ject, 149, 150; ^ith juvd, etc., 142 
 R. 2 ; with caved, thneo, etc., 142 
 R. 5; cognate, 150 R. 1 and 2; 
 with intrana. verba, 150 R. 2; 
 magn&m partSm, %d genUe, etc., 150 
 R. 3; with verbs denoting /eeZiiig', 
 etc., 150 R. 4; with verbs ai amell- 
 ing and tasting^ 150 R. 5; after 
 mcniiju, 135 (6) R.; with recorrfor, 
 135 (6) R.; with imperaonala of 
 pity and shame, 135 (c) R. 1; 
 double accua., 151 (a) ; second ae- 
 cua. after verbs of calling, nam- 
 ing, etc., 151 (6) ; after intranaitive 
 verbs of motion, 152 R. 1; after 
 
 transtttve verbs of mod'on, 152 R. 
 2; of (tme and space, 153; after 
 ahease and distdrS, 153 R. 3; of 
 place whither, 154; ddmum, rua, 
 etc., 154 R. 1 ; of special limita- 
 tion, 155; (?rA:. acci(«., 155 R. 1; 
 with a passive verb in poetry, 155 
 R. 2 ; in exclamationa, 166; with 
 propior and proxlmiia, 144 R. 4; 
 of gerund, 184 R. 4, III.; as subj. 
 of injin., 194 and Rs. ; accns, with 
 infin,, 194 and Rs. ; after verbs of 
 willing, etc., 194 R. 2 (a); after 
 verbs of emotion, 194 R. 2 (6); af- 
 ter verbs ot hoping, promising, etc., 
 194 R. 2 (c); in exclamations, 194 
 R. 2 (rf) ; ace. as subj. of ajj^h. o?»t7- 
 ted, 194 R. 3; adverbial accua. to 
 express degree of importance, 135 
 R. 4. 
 
 Accusing and acquitting, verbs of, 136 
 and Rs. 
 
 Action, complete and incomplete, 95. 
 
 ad, with noun expressing thing with 
 reference to which, 135 R. 4, 4 (end); 
 with verbs of motion, 141 R. 1; 
 with adject, of nsefulneaa, 144 R. 
 1 ; with urbs and oppldum, 154 R. 
 2; before names of places, 154 R. 
 3; 173,1; with ace. o/tj'erujirf, 184 
 R. 4, III. 
 
 arfAuc, 134 R. 3. 
 
 adjectives, of lat and ;Srf jDec, 55-57; 
 in -er, 66, 66 ; of Sd Dec, 69 ; of 
 S endings, 55 ; of j^ endings, 59 ; of 
 i ending, 61 ; position of, 57, 1 ; 58, 
 2; used without a noun, 60 R.; 
 agreement of, 67, 2; 128 and Rs.; 
 with -e in abl., 61, 2 and 3, exc. 1 ; 
 numeral adj., 63 ; comparison of, 
 68; in -Ua preceded by a vowel, 
 comparison of, 1 4:, Al\ adj.proposit. 
 equivalent to a noun, 87, B, 9; ao- 
 cu8. of as an adverb, 117, 6 ; abl 
 
ADJUVO 
 
 435 
 
 ANSWER 
 
 of as an adv., 117, 6; S'^ntajc of, 
 128; in predicate, 128 (B)j agree- 
 ment of adj. in predicate, 1st when 
 the subject nouns are of different 
 genders, 12S R. 2 {a)] 2d, when 
 the nouns denote living heings, 128 
 I{^ 2 (if) J 3d, when things without 
 life, 12S K. 2 (c); 4th, when both 
 combined, 128 R.2 {d); aynesis of, 
 128 K, 4 ; in plural used as nouns, 
 128 R. 6 ; in general expressions, 
 gender of, 128 R. 7; derivative 
 adj. in the place of a possessive, 
 128 R. 11; ^ri7»w«, mediUs, etc., 
 128 R. 9 ; agreement of adj. ex- 
 pressing time, place, and manner, 
 128 R. 10; nolens, volens, etc., 
 128 R. 10; with genitive, 135 (a); 
 with part, (/ei?., 134; agreement of 
 adj. with noun instead of part, gen., 
 134 R.4; with gen. of qualitif, 132; 
 with dative, 144 and Rems; with 
 abl. of quality, 169 ; with com^^e- 
 mentary infinitive, 181 ; with ge- 
 rund, 184 R. 4, II, 
 
 adjUvo, 142 R. 2. 
 
 MuUr, 142 R. 4. 
 
 Adverbs, rule of position, 43, 118, 3; 
 limiting verba, etc., 43; numei-aZ 
 adverbs, 63 ; how intermediate nos, 
 are expressed in numeral adv., 65, 
 7; defined, 117; their division, in 
 regard to form, 117, 2; in re- 
 gard to meaning, 117, 3; deriv- 
 ative adv. how formed, 117, 5 and 
 7; correZaiiwe adv., 117,4; simple 
 case forms of nouns used as, 117, 
 8; adv., from aliUs, 117, 9; adv. 
 formed by -tUs and -tlm, 117, 7; 
 comparison of, 119; irregular com- 
 parison of, 119 R. 2 ; superl, of 
 adv. in -o, 119 R. 1; rel. adv. 
 used Instead of prep, and rel. 
 pron., 129 R. 10; of time and 
 
 place, etc., with gen., 134; to 
 express the degree of importance, 
 135 R'. 4. 
 
 Adversative conjunctions, 123, 3. 
 
 adversUs, 144 R, 2. 
 
 ac (diphthong), 7,2. 
 
 ae, in Locative, IS R. 6. 
 
 aemiilor, 142 R. 4. 
 
 aeqndUs, 144 R. 3. 
 
 aegiti hon%que fdcio, 137 R. I. 
 
 ae8i*»io, 137 R. 2. 
 
 Agent, abl. of, 108, 2, and 166. 
 
 "Ago," how expressed, 164 R. 3 (c). 
 
 Agreement of af//., 128; in pred., 128 
 (B) and Rs.; of verh with subject, 
 126, ay. J* of rel. with antecedent, 
 87, B, and 129. 
 
 -ai, gen. in, 18 R. 2. 
 
 dio, 113, 3. 
 
 -al and -ar, nouns in, 39 and 46, I. 
 and III. 
 
 m-, 91 R. 
 
 dlienas, for dliUs, 56 R. 1. 
 aliquis, 89, 5 and R. ' 
 dliUs, 56,1; repeated, 56 R. 2; for 
 mation of ndv. from, 117, 9; dliiiB 
 
 — alius, 127 R. 6. 
 
 Alphabet, 3; vowels, 4; diphtKongSj 
 
 5; co}i0onranf9, 6. 
 aZ(er, 56,1; repeaieti, 56 R.2; alter 
 
 — alt^r, 127 R. 6. 
 dlterae, 56 R, 3. 
 dlterfUs, for dliUs, 56 R, 1. 
 ambo, 64 R. 3. 
 
 amo, infiected, 101. 
 ampliUs, without qudm, 163 R. 4. 
 — an, in ace. of Gtk. nouns, 246, 2, 
 dn, 123 Rs. 10 and 11 ; 241 ; 242, R. 2. 
 Anacdluthon, 310, 3 (6). 
 Analysis, models of. Appendix X. 
 Anastrophe, 310, 4 (a). 
 dniml (locative), 135 (o) R. 
 anlmo, 168 R.2; 170 R 3. 
 Answer, form of, 81, 5. 
 
AUTE 
 
 436 
 
 CE 
 
 ante, before a numeral, 1 64 B. 3 {a); 
 with abl. to denote how long be- 
 fore, 164 E. 3 (a); with accus. to 
 express how long ago, 164 R. 3 (c). 
 
 Antecedent, 87, B ; indefinite, 87, B, 
 8; 129 E. 2 ; position of, 129 B. 1; 
 attractio7i of, 129 B. 3 ; limited by 
 numeral, etc., 129 B. 6. 
 
 anteqiiUm, 219, 226, 226. 
 
 AntiptoBitt, 310, 3 (c). 
 
 Antithesis, 309, 8. 
 
 Aorist, classification of, 190 j with 
 postqnam, etc., 224 ,* with ante- 
 qudm, priusqiitXmy 225 B. 
 
 apage, 113, 9. 
 
 Aphaereeis, 309, 4. 
 
 Apocope, 309, 5. 
 
 Apodosis, 204. 
 
 Apposition, 36, 127; partitive, 127 
 B. 6,- with part of sentence, 127 
 B. 5 ; expressing character, etc., 
 127 B. 1 ; with Locative, 127 B. 4 ; 
 with forms of diiferent genders, 
 127 B. 9; of gen. of possessive, 127 
 E. 10 and 128 E. 8. 
 
 arguo, l&l B. 6. 
 
 Article, 18 E. 1. 
 
 -d« and -ee, Gk. nouns in, 246 ; gender 
 of, 31 R. 2, 2. 
 
 -a9, gen. pi. of nouns in, 31 Bule 2. 
 
 as (assis), 44 B. exc. 
 
 Ashing (verbs of), 151. 
 
 dssis, geu. of price, 137. 
 
 assue/acio, 181 B. 6. 
 
 Asyndeton, 123 E. 6 ; 310, 1 (a). 
 
 a(, 123, 3 B. 16. 
 
 atque, for quam, 163 B. 7. 
 
 afgae (dc), 123, 1, E. 3; 217. 
 
 atqui, 123,3, R. 17. 
 
 Altra,\tion of, relative, 129 B. 3. 
 
 Attributive, adj., 128. 
 
 aucfffi- est, 194, 2. 
 
 audeo, 109. 
 
 audiOf inflected, 105. 
 
 audits, 192 R. 2. 
 au.f, 123, 2, B. 7. 
 aiKem, 123, 3, E. 13; 123, 11, E. 29; 
 
 207. 
 ave, 113, 7. 
 -dx, nouns in, 31 B. 2, 2; verbals 
 
 in, 135 (o) B. 
 
 belli (locative), 176. 
 -her, nouns in, 3d Dec, 33 B. 1. 
 Birth, participles of, with abl., 161. 
 boni fdcio, aequi bonique fdcio, 137 
 
 E. 1. 
 honiis, inflected, 55. 
 bos, inflected, 45. 
 brevis, inflected, 59. 
 
 C. 
 
 c, proniniciation of, 7 ; a c sound with 
 
 s, 30, end. 
 Calendar, Appendix VII., 261. 
 cdpio, compounds of, 61, 4, exo. 2, 
 cUpUU, 136 E. 2. 
 Cardinal numbers, 63 and 64 and 
 
 Es. 
 carS, inflected, 42 E. 
 Case endings, Js( Dec, 18; J^rf Dee., 
 
 24 ; Sd Dec, 30 ; 4th Dec, 48 ; Sth 
 
 Dec, 49. 
 Cases, 15; Genitive, IZl, S(^,; Dative, 
 
 140, sq. ; Accus., 149, sq. ; Abl., 
 
 159, sq. ; Construction of, 130-171; 
 
 Nomin., 130; Vocative, 158. 
 causa, 165 E. 3; with gen. of gerund, 
 
 184 B. 4, 1 (n); 186, B, n (n). 
 Causal Conjunctions, 123, 5 and Bs. 
 Causal Propositions, 197 and 198 
 
 and Bs. 
 Cause, abl. of, 165. ^ 
 
 Cause, expressed by a noun in appos., 
 
 127 E. 1. 
 cavi, ne omitted after, 200 B. 3. 
 -eg (enclitic), 84 B. 6. 
 
CEDO 
 
 437 
 
 CONJUGATION 
 
 eedS, 113, 10. 
 
 eelu, with two accus., 151; with abl, 
 nnd de, 151 (n) R. 2. 
 
 celur, 151 («) R. 3. 
 
 certiorem dllquem facioy 194, 2. 
 
 ceteriim, 123 R. 18. 
 
 ceil, 214. 
 
 Character expressed by noun in ap- 
 position, 127 R. 1. 
 
 re, 84 R. 6, end. 
 
 circum, compounded with verbs of 
 motion, 152 R. 2. 
 
 Cities, names of, gender, 13, 5, 1. 
 
 cUm, 120, 3, R. 1. 
 
 Classes into which 3d Deo. is di- 
 vided, 30, sq. ; Glass I., 31 ; Glass 
 .//., 33; Class III., Zb; Glass lY., 
 37; Class V., 38, 39; Class VI., 
 41, 42, 44. 
 
 Clauses, Jinal and coitsecutive, 200, 
 sq. ; temporal, 219, sq. ; causal, 197, 
 sq. ; conditional, 204, sq. 
 
 coepi, 113, 181 R. 3; passive form 
 of, 113 R. 1. 
 
 Gofjnate Accusative, 150 R. 2. 
 
 eognlto, 192 R. 2. 
 
 cognomen, 127 R. 7. 
 
 ^cola, compounds of, 18 R. 4; 246, 4. 
 
 Collective Nouns, 34, Rule; 126 (a). 
 
 cdmitor, 142 R. 4. 
 
 Command, expressions Of, 189 R. 1; 
 206 R. 1. 
 
 Commanding, verbs of, with dat., 
 142. 
 
 commutdre, 167, 4, R. 
 
 Comparative Conj., 123, 11. 
 
 Comparative Propositions, 214, sq. 
 
 Comparatives, inflection of, 69 ; mean- 
 ing of, 68, 4 and Rs. 1, 2, 3 ; con- 
 struction, 70 ; with abl. of differ- 
 ence, 164 and R. 2 ; with abl. of 
 comparison, 163; limiting antece- 
 dent of relative, 129 R. 6. 
 
 Comparison of adj., 68, sq. ; irregu- 
 37* 
 
 ?ar, 72 ; defective, 74 ; of adverbs, 
 119 and E. 2; formed by mUglt, 
 74, 2 and 4. 
 
 Comparison, degrees of, 68, 2; sfanc^- 
 arti of, omitted, 163, R. 6. 
 
 Comparison, abl. of, 163. 
 
 comperto, 192 R. 2. 
 
 Complementary infinitive, 181. 
 
 complere, 160 R. 2 ; 135 (rf) R. 
 
 Completed action, tenses of, 95, 
 
 complnres, 72, end. 
 
 Compounds, dat. with, 143 ; of -cola, 
 -gena, IS R. 4; prepositions in 
 composition, 122; 152 R. 1. 
 
 con, in composition, 122 R. ; 143. 
 
 Conative, imperf., 95, II., R. 4 (c). 
 
 Concessions, how expressed, 189, I. 
 
 Concessive, propositions, 210. 
 Concfi5«?ye, conjunctions, 123, 9; 210, 
 
 1,2. 
 Concessive, subjunctive, 211 j 212 
 
 and E.S. 
 Conclusive conjunctions, 123, 6. 
 Condemning, verbs of, 136. 
 condemno, 136 R. 2. 
 Condition, implied in a phrase, etc., 
 
 204 R. 6. 
 Conrf?(io)mZ particles, 123,8; 204,2, 
 Conditional sentences, 204, sq. j in 
 
 0. 0., 245, 4, sq. 
 Conditions, division of, 205 ; simple 
 
 condition, 206 ,* siihj. in simple con- 
 
 dit., 206 R. 2j of poasihilitt/, 207; 
 
 indicative in condit. of pffssibility, 
 
 207 R. 1 ; of unreality, 208; indie. 
 
 in condition of unreality, 20S R. 
 
 2,3. 
 conditione, 168 R. 2. 
 confldo, 142 R. 3. 
 con/it, 113, 11. 
 Conjugation 21, V., 99, sq.; division 
 
 of verbs into, 99, II, 4; para* 
 
 digris of verbs, 100, sq.; how 
 
CONJUXCTIOKS 
 
 438 
 
 DECLENSIOK 
 
 distinguished; 21, V.; 99; peri- 
 phraetiCf 106, II. 
 
 Conjunctionsy 34, 123 ; copulative, 123, 
 1; disjunctive J 123, 2; adversative, 
 123, 3; cojfoborative, 123,4; eati- 
 fla/, 123,5; 197; conclusive, 12^,6; 
 final, 123, 7; conditional, 123, 8; 
 concessive, 123,9; 210; temporal, 
 123, 10; 219; comparative, 123, 
 11; 214. 
 
 Consecutive, prop., 201 nnd R. 
 
 Con»ecutiv€, conjunctions, 201. 
 
 Consonants, division of, etc., 6. 
 
 co7istdre, 161 K. 2. 
 
 Construction, passive, 179. 
 
 Continued, iiction, vid. Tenses. 
 
 Contracting for, verbs of, with ge- 
 rund, 184 K. 4, III. (a). 
 
 coneuesco, 113 R. 2. 
 
 Cojmlaiive, conjunctions, 123, 1; 
 omitted, 123, 1, R. 6. 
 
 cornu, 48. 
 
 Cm-relatives, 91. 
 
 Countries, names of, gender of, 13, 
 6,1. 
 
 Crime or charge, gen. of, 136. 
 
 cul, pronunciation of, 87 (n), 1. 
 
 cujus, as an adj., 88, 3. 
 
 cUm (prep,), with personal pron.,*79, 
 2; with relative provouv, 87, B, 
 5; with abl. of accompaniment or 
 manner, 168 R. 1 and 2 and 4; in 
 composition with dat., 143. 
 
 cwm. (conj.), causal, 198 (c) ; 223; 
 causaLwith the indicative, 198 R. 
 2 ; temporal, 220 ; inversum, 221 ; 
 historical, 222; concessive, 210; 
 temporal in u. conditional sense, 
 220 R. 2. 
 
 es^ cwm, /M?i citm, etc, 220 R, 1. 
 
 cUm- — turn, 220 R. 3. 
 
 cum prlmumj 219, 224. 
 
 ^cumque, -ciinque, suffix, use of, 87 
 (n), 2; /orce o/, 87,3. 
 
 Customary Action, 95, 11.^ R. 4 (o), 
 
 D. 
 
 i?, consonant, 6. 
 
 diimno, 136 R. 2. 
 
 dare, 99, 4, exc. 
 
 i>H/es, 261. 
 
 Dative, as a, case, 15 (c); HO; in 
 -dbUs, 18 R. 5 ; in -iibus, 48; in i 
 {units, etc.), 56; Sj/ntax, 140, sq.; 
 of indirect object, 140; of ad- 
 vantage and disadvantage, 118,2; 
 145; with nomen, 127 R. 7 (c); 
 with transitive verbs, 141; with 
 intra ntiitive vcrhs, 142; with /i do 
 and confidoy 142 R. 3 ; with edveo, 
 cOneSlo, etc., 142 R. 6; with co9n- 
 poiinds, 143; with verbs of taking 
 away, 14M R. 3; with adjectives, 
 144; with prdpior nnd proxlmus, 
 144 R. 4; e/7nc rfwi/tic, 145 R. 1; 
 of reflexive with velle, 145 R. 1 ; 
 of possessor, 146; with csffe, 146 
 and R. 1 and 3; with compounds 
 of esse, 146 R. 1 ; of participles 
 used substantively, 146 R. 4; of 
 purpose or end, 147; verbs with 
 two datives, 147 R. 2; of agent, 
 348; at/, in place of da*., 148 R. 
 1 ; of gerund and gerundive, 184 
 R. 4, II. 
 
 rfe, with a&/. in place of ^jrcw., 134 
 R. 2; with (/erujirf, 184, IV:; with 
 abl. of separation, 160 R. 1; with 
 abl. of vmteriat, 161 R. 2 ; of 
 whence relation, 173, 2; with ahU 
 instead of gen. of crime, 136 R. 
 1 ; after r5g6, etc., 151 R. 2. 
 
 dea, 18 R. 5. 
 
 Declarative propositions, 187, 2. 
 
 Declension of nouns; divisions, 17; 
 IstDec, 18; ^rf i>ec.,24; 5./ Z^ec, 
 30 ; 4th Dec, 48 ; 5th Dec.^ ( 9. 
 
 Declension of adj., 55-66. 
 
DEFECTIVE 
 
 439 
 
 ENDINGS 
 
 Defective DOuns, 51. ' 
 
 Defective comparison, 74, 
 
 Defective verba, 112, 113. 
 
 deflcia, 142 R. 2. 
 
 diflt, 113,12. 
 
 Degree of importance, how express- 
 ed, 135 K. 4. 
 
 Delayiurf, verbs of, 201 R. 2. 
 
 delects, 142 R. 2. 
 
 Deliberative Subjunctive, 189, 1 {d). 
 
 Demanding, verbs of, with gerund, 
 184 R. 4, III. (a). 
 
 Demonetraiive pronouns, 82. 
 
 Deutais, 6. 
 
 Deponent verbs, 1 09 ,* middle, force of, 
 109,5. 
 
 Derivative adverbs, 117, 6 j adj. in 
 place of possessive, 128 R. 11. 
 
 deslno, 131 R. 3. 
 
 deiiB, 24 R. 3. 
 
 dexter, forms of, 55 R. 4. 
 
 Diaresie, 9. 
 
 Diaeretis, 297 (rf)- 
 
 DiartSle, 297 (/). 
 
 -(^IcMS, adj. in, 72, 3. 
 
 dies, 49 ; gender of, 49 and R; 2. 
 
 rfi'r/ims qui, 234, 2; 201 R. 1 (e). 
 
 Diplithonge, 7, 2. 
 
 Direct diticourse, 244. 
 
 Direct qneetionB, 239 and 240. 
 
 Dxaadviintage, dat. of, 145. 
 
 Dinjunctive conj., 123, 2. 
 
 dietdre, 1 53 R. 3. 
 
 Distributives, 63 (c) and p. 90 ; 65 ; 
 for caidinah, 65, 5; singular form 
 of, 65, 6. 
 
 Division of words, 11. 
 
 doceo, 181 R. 6. 
 
 rfomt, 176 and R. 2 ; 48 R. 5. 
 
 dSml betlique, militiaeque, 176. 
 
 in dovio, 176 R. 2. 
 
 domUm, 174; 154 R. 1. 
 
 dSmus, inflection, 48 R. 5. 
 
 doiius and rUs, 173 ; 154 R. 1. 
 
 donee, 219, 228, 229. 
 
 Doubt, verbs of, etc., 201 R. 2. 
 
 rfi(6ifo an, 123, 2, R. 10. 
 
 dubium est, 123, 2, R. 10. 
 
 dtim, 219, 228, 229; in provisos, 204 
 
 R. 4; of /ttir^ose, 229; =" while,'' 
 
 228 R. 1 and 2. 
 dummodo, in provisos, 204 R. 4. 
 f^no, inflection, 64 R. 2. 
 Duration, accus. of, 153. 
 dUrior, 69, 2. 
 Duty, verbs denoting, in Apodo- 
 
 sis, 208 R. 2. 
 
 B. 
 
 e, connecting vowel. Class II., 3d 
 Dec, 33 ; abl. sing., 3d Deo. in, 46, 
 IV. ; e for ei, 5th Dec, 49 R. 3 ; 
 retained in stem of words in ~er, 
 55 R. 3; 26 R. \;. dropped from 
 stems in -erd, 26 ; 55 R. 2 ; e (2d) 
 conjugation, 52 ; 99, 4"; in abl. 
 sing, of adj., 61, 3, exc 1 ; in abl. 
 of names of towns in e, 37, exc; 
 origin of nouns in, 39 [n). 
 
 Ecthlipsis, 297 (6). 
 
 edlnt, in, 8, note. 
 
 edo, 111, 8. 
 
 Effecting, verbs of, 201 R. 1 (6). 
 
 egeo, 135 (rf) and R., 160 K. 2. 
 
 ego, expressed, 78 R. 1 ; 126 R. 5 (d) ; 
 inflection of, 78 ; rule of position 
 for, 79, 3. 
 
 Hs, accus. in 3d Dec, 30 R. 3. 
 
 Ellipsis, 310, 1. 
 
 Emotion, constriction after verbs of, 
 194 R. 2 (6), and 198 R. 3. 
 
 Enallage, 310, 3. 
 
 Endings, personal. Appendix TV., for 
 active voice, 21, V., 2; table of 
 tense endings, pp. 172, 173 ; of 1st 
 Dec, 18; of Sd Dec, 24; of Sd 
 Dec, 30; of 4ti Dec, 48; of Sth 
 Dec., 49. 
 
EMM 
 
 440 
 
 FUTURE 
 
 enim, 123, 4 and R. 20, and 123, 11, 
 
 R. 29. 
 -enn, 192 R. 1. 
 eo (irreg. verb), 111, 9. 
 CO, 12:-;, 6, R. 27, and 200 R. 4. 
 eo — ?«o, 164 R. 1. 
 eo tavtpOref and in eo iemporSf 171 
 
 R. 4. 
 EpetUhcsU, 309, 3. 
 -ec (noun ending), Sd Dee., 26 ; Sd 
 
 Dec, 38-41, 44-^6; o/ adj., 55 R. 
 
 2 and 3. 
 -ev, gender of trees and plants in, 
 
 46 J svperlative of adj. in, 72. 
 eryd, 144 R. 2. 
 eryo, 123,6, R. 27. 
 -Sro, words in, 26. 
 -ea, accus. plu., 46. 
 -e«, gen. pi. of patronymics in, 246, 4. 
 case, inflected, 100. 
 esse, witli dat., 146 and R. 1, 2, 3j 
 
 compounds of, with dat., 146 R. 2; 
 
 gerund witl), 184 R. 4 {b); with 
 
 gen., 133. 
 esti»id, witii gen., 133. 
 eat qui, 201 R. 1 {g); est cMm, 220 
 
 R. 1. 
 est it, 201 R. 1 (rf). 
 e( and que, 34; 123, 1, Rs. 
 e< — e(, 123 R. 1. 
 etenim, 123, 4, and R. 20. 
 etiam, 123, 1, and R. 5. 
 « I/,, 83 R. 1. 
 e( «-;«, 123 R. 4. 
 f/sf, etiumsi, 210 and 211. 
 Etymoloiiy, 2. 
 ex, in place of part, gen., 134 R. 2 j 
 
 with names of places, 173, 2; after 
 
 qnnero, 161 R. 2 ; with ahl. of or, 
 
 ■igin, 161 R. : with gerund, 184, IV. 
 Exclamations, aceus. in, 156; accus. 
 
 tcUh infin. in, 194 R. 2 (rf). 
 Exclamatory propositipns, 187. 
 exsUlo, 109, 4. 
 
 F. 
 fac, 107 R. 1. 
 fac'6, adjective compounds of, 61, 4, 
 
 ex 3. 2; verbs compounded with, 
 
 107 R. 1. 
 fads, with the gen., 133 R. 1 ; with 
 
 the ablative, 162 R. 2. 
 fdma est, 1 94, 2. 
 fames, abl. of, 46, IV. 
 familia, 18 R. 3. 
 fdri, 113, 5. 
 fdfedr, inflected, 109. 
 Fearing, verbs of, 200 R. 6. 
 Feeling, adj. of, with genitive, 135 
 
 {a)R. 
 felix, inflected, 61. 
 Femiuines, of 2(Z Dec, 24 R. 1 ; of 
 
 5(i Dec, 46 ; of ^(7i Dec, 48 R. 5, 
 
 ex. 1, 2, and R. 6, 7. 
 -/er, compounds of, 26 R. 1. 
 fere, position of, 118, 3. A 
 
 ■fero. 111, 6. 
 -ficUs, adj. in, 72, 3. 
 fids, 109, 3 ; case after, 142 R. 3. 
 Filling, verbs of, with abl., 160 R. 3. 
 Final conjunctions, 123, 7. 
 Final propositions, 200. 
 Finite verb, 17. 
 
 /Eo, 109,4; 111,7; with jeii., 133. 
 First conjugation, 101, 102. 
 First declension, 18. 
 fldgito, 151 R. 2. 
 flocci, 137. 
 f6re tit, 196 (6). 
 foris, 176. 
 
 Fourth conjugation, 105. 
 Fourth declension, 48. 
 frug%, comparison of, 72, 6. 
 fruSr, 167, 1 ; gerund of, 184 R. 3. 
 fungor, 167, 1 ; gerund of, 184 R. 3. 
 Future, 21, IV., 3; 95, III.; of par- 
 
 ticip., 98, 3. 
 Future peif., 96, VI. ; of infin, acL 
 
 and pass., 106 R. 4. 
 
FUTUEUM 
 
 441 
 
 HIC 
 
 fUturum eaaSf 195 (6), p. 291. 
 
 g, pronunciation of, 7. 
 
 grtudeof 109, 3. 
 
 Gema, gender of names of, 13, 5, 
 R. 2. 
 
 -genii, compounds of, 18 R. 4 and 
 246, 4. 
 
 Gender, general rules of, 13, 5; nat- 
 ural, 13, 5; grammntlcal, 13, 4; 
 of 1st Declenaion, 18, end ; of 2d 
 Dec, 24 nnd Rs.^ of Sd Dec, 46,' 
 I., II., and III. ; of 4th Dec, 48, 
 end ; of Sth Dec, 49. 
 
 General truth, how expressed, 95- 
 R. 1. 
 
 Genitive, as a case, 15 (&); 20; in 
 -at, 18 R. 2j in -iim, 1st Dec, 18 
 R. 4; -da, let Dec, 18 R. 3 ; -il, 
 contracted into -%, 2d Dec, 24 R. 
 4, end; -uni for -drum, 2d Dec, 
 24 R. 4; in -ium, 3d Dec, 46, p. 
 64; in -%, 4th Dec, 48 R. 2; in 
 -%ua, 56, 1, 2, 3, 4; -i in -ius, short- 
 ened, 56, 1 (n) ; position of, 43 ; 
 partitive gen. and agreement of 
 adj., 58, 3 and R. ;' 134; -ium, 
 gen. pi. of adj., 59 R. 2 and 61, 
 4; genitive with nOmeiif 127 R. 7 
 (6); used instead of appoaition, 
 127 R. 8; Syntax of, 131-37; poa~ 
 aeasive, 131 R. 1 ; auhjecttve, 131 
 R. 2; objective, 131 R. 2; prep, 
 and case instead of obj. gen., 131 
 R. 3 ; of auhatantive pron., 131 R. 
 4; of qnalitif, 332; predicate gen. 
 of possession and quality, 133 ; 
 with aiim, pHto, etc, 133; with 
 facerSf 133 R. 1; neuter pron. 
 inatead of gen, mei, etc, 133 R. 
 3; partitive, 71, 73, 134; agree- 
 ment of partitive word, 134 R. 
 1; with \d, ad\ucj etc, 134 R 
 
 3; objective gen. with adj. and 
 verbs, 135; with adj. of desire, 
 etc, 135 (a); of memory, 135 (6); 
 with verbals in -djc and participial 
 adj., 135 (a) R. ; of^i/y and shame, 
 135(c); of plenty a-nd want, 135 (rf); 
 with refert and interest, 135 (e) ; of 
 crime, 136 ; with damno, 136 R. 2 ; 
 of price, 137; with aesttmo, 137 
 R. 2; supplying place of adj., 
 169 R. 3; of gerund, 184 R. 4, I., 
 etc. 
 
 -^er, compounds of, 26 R. 1. 
 
 Gerund and Gerundive, 98,4; 18.3- 
 185; explained, 183; gerundive 
 instead of gerund, 184; of Utor, 
 etc., 184 R. 3; partial attraction, 
 184 R. 2 ; chief constructions of, 
 184 R. 4 ; genitive of, 184 R. 4, 1 
 '(a); dative of, 184 R. 4, 11, ; accua. 
 of, 184 R. 4, III.; ablative of, 184 
 R. 4, IV.; of intransitive verba, 
 185. 
 
 Giving, verbs of, with gerund, 184 
 R. 4, III. fa). 
 
 Granwiar defined, 1. 
 
 gratia, 165 R. 3 ; 186 (a). 
 
 Greek nouns of ist Dec, Appendix 
 I.; of Sd Dec, Appendix II.; of 
 Sd Dec^, Appendix III. 
 
 Gutturals, 6. 
 
 H. 
 
 h, remark on use in Latin, 3. 
 habed, with genitive, 133 ; with per- 
 fect passive participle, 191, 3 (rf). 
 Happening, verbs of, 201 R. 1 (c). 
 Jiattd scio, 123 R. 10. 
 Having, verba of, with gerund, 184 
 ^ R. 4. III. (a). 
 Heudiadya, 310,,2 (6). 
 Heieroclites, 50, 2. 
 Heterogeneous nouns, 50, 1. 
 h\c, inflection of, 82; use, 84 Rs.; 
 
HINDEEDfG 
 
 442 
 
 INDEFINITE 
 
 with abl. of time, 171 K. 2; as 
 
 antecedent, 88 E. 7. 
 Hindering, Terbs of, 201 R. 5 ; with 
 
 quomlnils, 200 E. 5. 
 Rivtnrical tenses, 190. 
 Jtiatorical prcseut, 190 R. 1; with 
 
 cum, 221 J sequence after, 190 K. 1. 
 "his," "Aef»,"83, 2. 
 Hoping, verbs of, 196. obs. j 194 R. 
 
 2 (c)-. 
 Horace, metres of, 307, eq. 
 Aiar, pronunciation" of, 82 R. 1. 
 hujus, 1^7. 
 humt, 176. 
 
 Hypallage, 310, 4- (c). 
 Ili/perbafoii, 310, 4. 
 JHynteron protgron, 310, 4 (&). 
 
 I. 
 
 -i in a6/. sing., 3d Bee, 46, IV.; in 
 abl. sing, of adj., 3d Dec, 59 R. 2, 
 and 61, 2, and 61,3, ex.2. 
 
 -% conjugation, the, 99, 4. 
 
 -i declension, the, 17 and 30. 
 
 -i in -fu€f shortened, 56 (»). 
 
 -ia, aceus. pi. in, 46, IV.,* «cch8. pZ. 
 of adj. in, 61, 4. 
 
 Id with (yen., 134 R. 3. 
 
 id aetdtiSf 150 R. 3. 
 
 id circo as correlative, 200 R. 4. 
 
 idem, inflection of, 82,4; ="aUOf' 
 83 R. 2. 
 
 UgSnuBy 150 R. 3. 
 
 irf /oct, 134 R. 3. 
 
 trf qndd, 129 R. 8. 
 
 it/ tempovis, 150 R, 3. 
 
 /rfeff, Appendix VII. 
 
 tdoneuB, 234, 2. 
 
 Igliur, 123, 6, and R. 27. 
 
 il in gen., 2d Dec, 24 R. 4. 
 
 -i?t9, super), of adj. in, 72, 2, 
 
 illSj inflection of, 82, 1; use of, 84, 
 3, and R. 1, 2, 5 j with ahh of time, 
 171 R. 2. 
 
 illic, 82, 3. 
 
 -in), accus. of, 3d Dei., 33 R. 1, 2, 
 and 3, and 46, IV. 
 
 -im, in subj. pres., 11 1, 3 (n). 
 
 imhecillua, superlative of, 72, 2. 
 
 Imperative, 94, 4; 189 R. 1 ; in 0. (?., 
 245, 2. 
 
 Imperative propositions, 187, 2. 
 
 Imperfect, uses of, 95, II., R. 4; for 
 plupf. in cundition of vnrealiii/t 
 208 R. 1; use of imperfect inilic- 
 ative in condition of nnreality, 208 
 R. 2 and 3. 
 
 Imperaonal verbs, 114,115; endings 
 of, 114, 3; miseret, etc, 135 (c) j 
 of happening, etc., 201 R. 1 (c)j 
 with iufin., 180 R. 1. 
 
 Impersonal construction in infinitive 
 propositions, 194, 2 [b). 
 
 implere, 135 (rf), R., and 160 R. 2. 
 
 -S», nouns in, 44, 46, III. 
 
 -in into -o, 46, II., 3. 
 
 h} (prep.) with its case instead of 
 part, gen., 134 R. 2 ; to express 
 the penalty, 136 R, 3; with accus. 
 of place whither, its use before 
 names of towns, etc, 154 Rs. ; 
 after adject, of friendlinesn, 144 
 R. 2; with ahl. instead of dat, 
 of poaeeBsinn, 146 R. 6 ; with abl. 
 of'gervnd, 184 R. 4, IV.; its use 
 and omission before namee of 
 towns, etc., 173-176; omitted with 
 totiia, 170 R. 2 ; witli abl. of place 
 tpAere,170; with abl. of time when, 
 to give precision, 171 R. 1. 
 
 In dumO, 176 R. 2. 
 
 in tempore, hi eo tempdrS, 171 R. 4. 
 
 indnls, 160 R. 4. 
 
 Incomplete action, tenses of, 95. 
 
 Indeclinable nouns, 51 (&). 
 
 Indefinite subject, om;ttcd, 126 R, 
 5(&). 
 
 Indefinite verb, syntax jf, 179. 
 
ESTBEFINITE 
 
 443 
 
 ITS 
 
 Indejtmte negdMve expressions, quin 
 with subjunctive after, 201 K. 3. 
 
 Indicative mood, 21, III., 2,- 94, 2, 
 188; in causal propositions, 198; 
 in 0. 0., 245 K.2; use in condition 
 of podaibilitif, 207 E,. 1 ; after nisi 
 forte, nlai vera, 204 R. 3 J use in 
 condition of unreality, 208 Rs. 2, 3. 
 
 indigeo, 135 (rf), R.; 160 R. 2. 
 
 indignus, vid. dignus, * 
 
 Indirect discourse, 244, sq. 
 
 Indirect questions, 238, II. j 242; 
 245, 3. 
 
 tn/erUSf 72, 4. 
 
 Infinitive propositions, 194, sq. 
 
 Infinitive, 21,111.; 9S, 2; eases of, 
 98, 2; subject infin., &Q, 1; ISO; 
 complementary, 86,2; 181; Syn- 
 tax, 180-182: translation of, 195 
 (6) ; witli impersonal verbs, ] 80 K. 
 1; original use of, 180 R. 2; with 
 pardtUs, inauetuH, 181 E-. 1 ; poet- 
 ical use of, to express purpose, etc., 
 
 181 R. 2; with coepi, deshto, 181 
 R. 3; after verbs of poasihility, 
 etc., 181 R. 5; perf. inf. as an 
 object, 181 R. 5; perf. inf. after 
 void, 181 R. 5; as accus. of the 
 thing, 181 R. 6; with verb to he, 
 etc., 181 R. 7; case of complement- 
 ary infin., 181 R. 7 («); historical, 
 
 182 and R.; accus. loitJi infin., 194 
 and R. 2; personal and impersonal 
 construction, 194 R. 1 (a) and (&); 
 after verbs of loilling, etc., 194 R. 
 2 and 195 R. 4 ; after verbs of 
 emotion, 194 R. 2 (6); future after 
 verbs of hoping, 194 R. 2 (c); in 
 exclamations, 194 R. 2 (rf); euhj. 
 of omitted, 194 R. 3; f»me ex- 
 pressed by, 195; in clauses dcr 
 pendent on principal tenses, 195 
 (a) ; dependent on historical tenses, 
 195 (6); with memlni, 195 R. 1; 
 
 fut. inf. pass., 195 R. 2; pass. inf. 
 to avoid ambiguity, 195 R. 3 : re- 
 mark on infinitivp propositions, 
 195 R. 5. 
 
 inflt, 113,13. 
 
 Inflection, 17. 
 
 Initio, 171 R. 3. 
 
 iiiquam, 113, 4, and 245, 6, 2. 
 
 insuetiis, 181 R. 1. 
 
 Instrument, abl. of, 167. 
 
 ?«(er with accus. instead of part, 
 gen., 134 R. 2. 
 
 interest, 135 (e), R. 3, and N. 
 
 Interjections f 124. 
 
 Interrogative pronouns, 88, 1. 
 
 Interrogative propositions to express 
 the thing of importance, 135 R. 4, 
 2; Syntax of, 187, 2, and 237. 
 
 interrogo, 151 R. 2. 
 
 Intransitive verbs with the dativCf 
 142; used transitively, 150 R. 4; 
 with accus, of similar meaning, 150 
 R. 1; verbs of motion, 152 R. 1. 
 
 Intransitive verbs, 93, 7, and 96 R. 2. 
 
 Inversum, cUm, 221. 
 
 -io, verbs in, 107. 
 
 -iS, gender of nouns in, 46, 1. 
 
 ipse, 85 and Rs. 1, 2. 
 
 Ire, 111, 9. 
 
 Irregular verbs, 111; forms of verbs 
 explained, 111, 8 («). 
 
 'Ifi, masc. nouns in, 46, II.; in accus., 
 3d Dec, 30 R. 3. 
 
 Is, 82, 83 ; et m, 83, 2, R. 1 ; in gen- 
 eral expressions as an antecedent, 
 87, B, 7. 
 
 Islands, 174, 175, 176. 
 
 iste, 84, 2, and R. 4. 
 
 istlc, 82, 3. 
 
 ttdque, 123, 6, and R. 27. 
 
 Iter, inflection o.f, 45. 
 
 -itSr, derivative adverbs in, 117, 5 
 ' and R. 
 
 "its," 83,2. 
 
nm 
 
 444 
 
 MINORIS 
 
 iffm, 46, rV. 
 
 -itiff, gen. sing of adj., 56; gen. sing. 
 of pron., 56, 4; vocative of proper 
 names in, 24 K. 2; adj. and na- 
 tional names in, 24 R. 2. 
 
 -IX, nouns in, 31, 2. 
 
 J, remark on, 3. 
 
 jam, 221 K. j with pyef>., 95 R. 3 j 
 
 with imperf., 9b, II., R. 4 (6). 
 jecur, 45. 
 juhed, with ace, 142 R. 2; with inf., 
 
 181 R. 6. 
 juditiio, 162 R. 3. 
 Juppzler, 45. 
 Jure, 168 R. 2. 
 yu« j urandum, 45, 
 juvenis, siiperl. of, 74 R. 1. 
 jiivd, 142 R. 2. 
 
 A, remark on use of, 3. 
 Kalends, Appendix VII. 
 
 Lahiah, 6. 
 laedo, 142 R. 2. 
 laetun, 165 R. 
 Za//o/-, 163 R. 4. 
 Ze(/p, 168 R. 2. 
 LettevH, 3—7. ' 
 
 libh; with abl., 160 R. 4. 
 mst, 212 R. 2. 
 //6rf7, Jh libro, 170 R. 3. 
 ^ce^ 210 and 212 R. 2. 
 Limit of motion exprtused hy dative 
 ^ in poetry, 174 R. 4. 
 Lingnah, 6. 
 Liquids, 6. 
 
 Local adverbs, 117, 2. 
 locative of i«« i)ee., 18 R. 6 ; of ;f rf 
 
 J?ec., 24 R. 6; o^ 3d Dec, 30 R. 4; 
 
 i^yn^aa of, 176. 
 
 ^5ct {Id loci. Id loGdrum)y 134 R. 3. 
 loco, 170 R. 3. 
 longiHa, 163 R. 4. 
 
 M. 
 m as u letter, 6. 
 ntacte virtute eeto, 167, 5. 
 maylH, to form the comparative, 74, 
 
 2 and 4; with jitam, 68 R. 2. 
 magnum parfBni, 150 R. 3. 
 magnv, 137. 
 major, 163 R. 4. 
 mdlo, 111, 5. 
 i!fa»)(er, abl. of, 168. 
 Maftcnline of i«« i?ec., 18, exc. 1; of 
 
 .frf Bee, 46, I. 
 mdierfamVids, 18 R. 3 ; inflected, 45. 
 Material, abl. of, 161 R. 2. 
 mdtririia, 72, 2. 
 maxime, used to form superlatives, 
 
 74, 3, ex. 
 maxXmus ndtU, '74 R. 1. 
 Means, abl. of, 167. 
 medeor, 184 R. 3. 
 mediuB, 128 R. 9. 
 mel, with g'e7*iti(C?, 184 R. 2, 
 fli^miiu, 113 and R. 2 ; with accus., 
 
 135 (&) R.; with infin., 195 (6) 
 
 R. 1. 
 mertdies, 49. 
 
 -met, 78 R. 2 and 80 R. 1. 
 Metathesis, 309, 9. 
 metior, 109. 
 Afefre, 296. 
 
 meUm for mei, 133 R. 3. 
 metis, vocative of mi, 24 R. 3. 
 Middle force of deponents, 109, 5, 
 milia, 64 R. 8 and 9. 
 militiae (dSmi ntilitiaequS), 176. 
 mills, 64 R. 8 and 9. 
 Millions, how expressed, 64 R. 11 
 mhnmus ndtU, 74 R. 1. 
 minor, 163 R. 4* 
 mlnoyiaf 137. 
 
MINUS 
 
 445 
 
 NOUNS 
 
 minus with stii, 204 R. 2. 
 
 mlror, 109. 
 
 miseredrj 135 (c). 
 
 mSsccef, 135 (c). 
 
 Modal adverbs, 117, 3. 
 
 made, 168 R. 2. 
 
 mSneo with gen., 135^(6); inflected, 
 
 103. 
 Months, gender of niimea of, 13, 6, 1 ; 
 
 vid. also. Appendix VII. 
 Moods, 21, II., 1 <a) ; 93, 3 (a) ; 94 ; 
 
 Syntax of, 188, sq. 
 more, 168 R. 2. 
 Motion, 154. 
 Mountains, gender of names of, 13, 
 
 5,1. 
 multdre, 136 R. 2. 
 mutdre, 167, 4, R. 
 Mutes J 6, 
 
 N. 
 
 n of stem dropped, 46. 
 
 i^atrif namque, 123, 4, and R. 20. 
 
 Names of peaces, 173-176. 
 
 Nasals, 6. 
 
 Nations, gender of names of, 13, 
 5, 1. 
 
 ndtu, 162 R. 1, ob. 
 
 va\ici, 137. 
 
 -Tie, enclitic, 81, 1 and 2, and R.; 
 hfclhej 84 R. 6j with an, 123 R. 
 10; in double dependent questions, 
 123 R. n. 
 
 ne, witli subj. to express that which 
 is of importance, 135 R. 4, 3; in 
 prohibitions, 189 R. 1 ; in final 
 claunes, 200 (6) ; after verbs of ad- 
 wonisking, etc., 200 R. 2 ; omitted 
 after cave, 200 R. 3 ; after verbs 
 of fearing, 200 R. 5j in concessive 
 propositions, 210. 
 
 ne non, 200 R. 6. 
 
 nee, 123 R. 4. 
 
 nee is, 83 R. 1. 
 3S 
 
 Necessity, verbs of, in condition of 
 
 unreality, 208 R. 2. 
 necne, 242, 4. 
 Negative adverbs, 117, 3. 
 Negatives, two destroying each other, 
 
 117,10; Q^ purpose and result, p. 
 
 301. 
 «e7nc>, 89, 5, note. 
 nequdni, 72, 6. 
 neque, 123 R. 4. 
 neqite non, 123 R. 4. 
 Tjescio, 123 R. 10; nescio quls and 
 
 qui, 242 R. l._ 
 Neuters in -w« of .^d J?ec., 24 R. 1 ; 
 
 of Sd Dec., 46, III. 
 nt, 204, 2. 
 nlkili, 137, 
 «m, 204, 2 J with aJ2. aheohite, 192 
 
 R. 3. 
 «?«? and sindn, 204, 2, R, 1. 
 nwi /orfe, 204 R. 3. 
 nisi vera, 204 R. 3. 
 "No," how expressed in Latin, 81, 1, 
 
 3, and 5. 
 nolo, 111, 4. 
 nomen, 127 R. 7. 
 Nominative, 15 (^a) j 130, 1 j predicate 
 
 nominative, 67, 3, and 130, 2 anc^ 
 
 3 ; agreement of verb with, when 
 
 persons are diffei-ent, 126 R. 3j 
 
 used for voc, 158 R. 2. 
 non in answers, 81, 5. 
 nonne, 81, 2, R., and 4. 
 HoH nullUft, 117, 10. 
 Hon possHm, 207 R. 2. 
 HOJi g'uo, non quod, with the subjunc- 
 tive, 198 R. 4 J with indie, 198 
 
 R.4. 
 nos, 78 R. 1 ; 126 R. 5 (rf). 
 noseo, 113 R. 2. 
 nostrl and no/ttrilm, 78 R. 3 j with 
 
 omniUm, 78 R. 3, 
 Nouns, 12, 13, 14, (5 ; agreement of 
 
 subj. with verb, 126; Apposition^ 
 
NOVI 
 
 446 
 
 PAEVI 
 
 36 and 127; Variable, 50 ; Httero- 
 geneoiis, 50,1; Heteroclitea, 60,2; 
 Indeclinable, b\ (6); Defective, b\; 
 used as adverba, 117, 8; Greek 
 nouns, Append. I., II., III.; neu- 
 ter adjectives as, 128 E. 6. 
 
 novi, perfect, meaning of, 113 R. 2. 
 
 -ns, adject, in with t/en., 135 R. 
 
 -nt, stems in, 46, IV. 
 
 imrfus, 160 R. 4. 
 
 ••nwiio" = Eng. "without," 168 R. 3. 
 
 nullUa, 66. 
 
 »mm, 81, 3 ; in indirect queationa, 
 242, 1. 
 
 A^Hmiicr, 14 ; of verbs, 21, II., 1 (rf) ; 
 97. 
 
 Numeral adj., 63, 64, 65; with the- 
 gen., 134. 
 
 Humeral adverb for cardinal, 64 
 E. 10. 
 
 nunlidtu, 192 R. 2. 
 
 S, masc. in of 3d Dec, 46. 
 
 o. Declension, the, 24. 
 
 -o, superlative of adv. ending in, 119 
 
 R. 1. 
 oh, 165 R. 4. 
 Object, direct, 22, 4 : 149 ; indirect, 28, 
 
 3, 140 ; object in active becoming 
 
 subj. in passive, 96 R. 1. 
 odl, 113 and R. 2. . 
 Omitting, verba of, 201 E. 2. 
 omnium noatrUm, etc., 78 R. 3. 
 -(7)1, Greek nouns in, 247, 1. 
 omiatua, 160 R. 4, 
 Uplnione, 162 R. 3. 
 oppldum, 154 R. 2; 174 R. 2; 176 
 
 R. 1 ; 176 R. 1 ; summary of 
 
 constructions with, 176 R. 2, 
 
 note 1. 
 Optative Subjunctive, 189, 1 (a), (6), 
 
 (c), (d). 
 5pu8, 167, 2 J with perf. pass, part, in 
 
 ahl., 11>?, 2, R. 2; with (?en., 167, 
 
 2, R. 4. 
 -or, into -i*j', 46, III. 
 " or not" 242, 4. 
 
 Oratio Recta and Obliqna, 244, 245. 
 orhus, 160 E.. 4. 
 Ordinals, 63 (6) and'eo. 
 -08, nom. of, 3d Bee, 41 R. 2. 
 -OS, Grk. nouns in, 247, 2. 
 o«, gen. pi. oHsium, 44 R. 
 ovat, 1J3, 114. 
 
 P. 
 
 ^ae7iein conditions^ 208 R. 2. 
 
 paenitetj 135 (c). 
 
 palan, 120 R. 4. 
 
 Palatalsj 6. i 
 
 Paragoge, 309, 2. 
 
 jDor, gen. pi. of, 61, 4, exc. 3. 
 
 pardtun with the infinitive, 181 R. 1. 
 
 ^a;-s, accus. of 46, IV. 
 
 Participial clause implying condi- 
 tion, 204 R. 6. 
 
 Participial propositions, 191. 
 
 Participles, 98, 1 and 3, 94, 5 ; pres- 
 ent as an adj., 61, 2 ; dative of, 146 
 R. 4: perf. pass, with opus, 167 R. 
 2 ; agreement of, 1 91, 2 (n) and (6) ; 
 forms in -?■«», 191, 3; forms in -rus 
 with verbs of motion, 191, 3 (&); 
 perf. pass, used like a verbal notin, 
 191, 3 (c) ; perf. pass, with haheO, 
 191, 3 (rf)j pres. and perf. in Abl. 
 Abs., 192; nsed without a sub- 
 stantive, 192 R. 2; with verbs of 
 perception, 194 R. 4; with verbs 
 of representatiun, 194 R. 4. 
 
 Particles, division of, 116; adverbs, 
 117; prepositions, 120; conjunct,, 
 123; interjections, 124. 
 
 Partitive genitive, 134 and Rs. 
 
 Partitive Appos., 127 R. 6. 
 
 Parts of speech, 1 1. 
 
 parvi 137. 
 
PASCOE 
 
 447 
 
 poTig 
 
 paacSi; 167, 1. 
 
 Passive oonatruotion, 108, 179 ; voice, 
 
 96; changes froiupass^to active, 
 
 108, 2. 
 Past perfect, 95, 5. 
 pUtiSr, 109. 
 
 Patronymics in -es, 246, 4, 
 pelage, 247, 4. 
 pelagHs (neut.), 24 R. 1. 
 Peninsulas, 1 74 R. 4. 
 per, to express indirect agency, 166 
 
 R. 1. 
 Perception, verbs of, 194 R. 4, 
 Perfect-item, 99, 6; parts of verb 
 
 formed on, 106 R. 2, Append. IV., 
 
 v., VI. 
 Perfeot, tenses of, 47 j perf. stem of 
 
 let Goiij., 47, II.; prea. perf., 47, 
 
 III. ; past perf, 47, IV. ; forma- 
 tion of perf. stem of 1st Conj. ir- 
 
 reg., 47 R. 1 ; perf. stem oiSd Conj., 
 
 b2;ot3d and 4th Conj., 75, 5 ; perf. 
 
 infin. as an obj. after volo, 181 R. 
 
 5; historical perf, \^^ R. 2; perf. 
 
 tenses of passive, 106 R. 5 ; perf. 
 
 pass, part, used as a verbal noun, 
 
 191, 3 (c) ; perf. indie, in condition 
 
 of unreality, 208 R. 2. 
 Perfects, novi and cona%ievl, 11.3 R. 2. 
 Periphrasis, .310, 2 (e). 
 Periphrastic conjugation, 106; infin. 
 
 in unreal conditions in 0. 0., 245, 
 
 4(3). 
 Person, 16. 
 Personal endings, p. 22 ; Appendix 
 
 IV. 
 Personal pronouns, as ethic dat., 145 
 
 R. 1. 
 Personal construction with infin., 194 
 
 R. 1 (a). 
 Persona of verbs, 21, II. (d); 93, 3 
 
 (d). 
 pertaenHm eat, 135 (c). 
 peBBum ddrcj ire, 174 R. 5. 
 
 petdy 151 R. 2. 
 
 pigetf 135 (e). 
 
 Places, names of, 173, sq. 
 
 Place from which a person hails, how 
 expressed, 175 E. 3. 
 
 Plavts, gender of, 13, 5, Rule 2. 
 
 PleoiiaBTn, 310, 2. 
 
 Pluperfect, 47, 95, 5 j indie, in con- 
 dition of uiirealiiy, 208 R. 3. 
 
 Plural, 14; neuter plural as adverb, 
 117, 6 ; sing. subj. and cum with 
 abl. with tt plural verb, 126 R. 1, 
 
 pluris, 137. 
 
 pluB, inflected, 72, 7; qudm omitted 
 after, 163 R. 4. 
 
 poenltet, vid, paenltet. 
 
 .Polysyndeton, 310, 2 (a). 
 
 ;3o^co, 151 K. 2. 
 
 PoBition, of indirect obj., 28, 3 j of 
 subject, 22, 6; of o6jec<, 22, 7; of 
 prep, and its case, 32, 4 ; of g-en- 
 itive, 43 ; of nrf;". and prep,, 58, 2 j 
 of designations of time and place, 
 66,3; of contrasted words, 79,4; 
 of adverbsj 118, 3 ; of cum with 
 personal pronouns, 79,2; of cUm 
 with relative pronouns, 87, 5. 
 
 Positive degree, 68, 2. 
 
 Possessive genitive, 131 and R. 1. 
 
 Possessive adj. in place of genitive, 
 133 R. 3. 
 
 Possessive pronouns, 80; with appo' 
 sition, 127 R. 10. 
 
 Possibility, condition of, 207; in 0. 
 0., 245, 4 (2). 
 
 possHm, inflection of, 111, 13. 
 
 post, 164 K. 3 (a). 
 
 posted, with genitive, 134 R. 3. 
 
 posterUs, 72, 4, R. 
 
 postalo, 151 R. 2, 
 
 Potential subjunctive, 189, 11. 
 
 potior, with abl., 167, 1 ; gerund of, 
 184 R. 3; with genitive, 167 1, R. 
 
 j>i5(w, 74, 1 (»)• 
 
POWER 
 
 448 
 
 PUTO 
 
 Power, verbs of, in unreal condition, 
 208 11. 2. 
 
 jprae with ahh of jtreventing cause, 
 165 R. 2. 
 
 praeditus, 160 R, 4. 
 
 praentolor, 142 R. 4. 
 
 Pieduale, defined, 21, 2 ; predicate 
 noun, 67, 3 ; 130, 3 and R. 1 ; Syn- 
 tax of, 125 R. 3, 4, 5, 7 ; predicate 
 adj., 128 (B) and R. ; ngreement 
 of relative with predicate noun, 
 129 R. 5; predicate in acciie., 130 
 R. 2. 
 
 Prepositiona, 120; with accus,, 120, 
 1; with abl., 120, 2; with accus. 
 and abl., 120, 3; clam used as, 120, 
 
 3, R. 1,* position of teuue and ver- 
 euB, 1 20, 3, R. 2 ; with case in place 
 of part, gen., 134 R. 2 ; in cowpo- 
 eltiov, 122, 143; with names of 
 places, etc., 173, sq. ; original use 
 of, 176 R. 2 ()i), 2 ; repeated, 143 
 R. 1 and 2 ; used with accu«. n/ 
 extent of time, 153 R. 1 ," with ge- 
 rund, 184 and Rs. 
 
 Present stem, 21, V.; II., R. 1 ; 99, 
 3; 106 R. 1. 
 
 Present tense, 21, IV., 1 ; 95 j to ex- 
 press an existing custom or general 
 truth, 95 R. 1 i historical present, 
 95 R. 2; with' Jam, etc., 95 R. 3; 
 participle present, 98, 3. 
 
 /"reseiK-perfect, 95, IV.; treated as 
 historical tense in sequence, 190 
 R. 2. 
 
 Price, abl. of, 167, 4. 
 
 Primary tenses, 190 and Rs. 
 
 princtpio, 171 R. 3. 
 
 prior, use of, 65, 1. 
 
 priusqaam, 219, 225, 226, and R. 1. 
 
 pro, 141 R. 2; with gerund, 184 R. 
 
 4, IV. 
 prdcOl, 120 R. i. 
 Prohibitions, 189, 1 (J) and R. 1. 
 
 Prolepsis, 310, 1 (rf). 
 
 Promising, verbs of, p. 293 ; 194 B. 
 
 2(c). 
 
 Pronouns f 11, II.; not expressed, 23, 
 2 and 3; division of, 77, 2 and 3j 
 SuhHiantivey 78; of^j. itereonnl or 
 poeeesaive, 80 j demonstrative, 8?, 
 83, 84 J inteiiaive, 85 j relative, 87; 
 interrogative, 88; indefinite, 89; 
 correlative, 91 ; 7pA.e» expressed, 78 
 R. 1 ; 126 .R. 5 ; neuter pronoun to 
 express the thing of importance, 
 135 K.4,4; with gerund, 184 Rs. 
 1 and 2; omitted in apposition, 
 127 R. 2; use in, 0. 0., 245, 5. 
 
 Pronunciation, 7. 
 
 prope, in unreal conditions; 208 
 R. 2. 
 
 propior and proxXmus, 144 R. 4. 
 
 propiUs and proxlme, 144 R. 4. 
 
 Propositions, 21, 87, B ; Si/nfnx of, 
 187, sq.; participial, 191; Vj*^n- 
 ?7('ye, 194; causal, 197 ', final and 
 consecutive, 200; conditional, 204; 
 coTicew/ue, 210 ; comparative, 214; 
 iem^ora^, 219 ; relative, 230 ; ni(er- 
 rogative, 237. 
 
 Prosody, Appendix VIII. 
 
 Prosthesis, 309, 1. 
 
 jjroeum, 111, 12, 
 
 Protasis, 204, sq.; how introduced, 
 204, 2. 
 
 prnUt, 214. 
 
 prudens, 61. 
 
 -23S, Gk. nouns in, 31 R. 2, 2. 
 
 -j3(e, 80 R. 1. 
 
 Pronunciation marks, 9. 
 
 Purpose, expressed by noun in ap- 
 position, 127 R. 1 ; dative of, 147; 
 use of infin, to express, 181 R. 2; 
 how to express, p. 278; negative, 
 how expressed, 201 R. 3; ex- 
 pressed by pred. nom., 147 R. 3. 
 
 puto with gen., 133. 
 
QUAEEO 
 
 449 
 
 RECEIVING 
 
 Q. 
 
 quaerOf 151 R. 2. 
 
 quaeao, 113, 6. 
 
 Quality, gen. of, 132 j abl. of, 169. 
 
 quam, 70; omitted, 70, 2j miigis 
 quajiif fiS R. 2 J Buhjunctive of re- 
 sult, after, 234, 3 j used instead of 
 cibL of comparison, 163 R. 1; ac- 
 eus. and injin. after, 245 (6) R. 1. 
 
 quam diu, 219*, 228. 
 
 qudm libet, 210. 
 
 quamqudm, 210, 212; with suhjunc- 
 tive, 212 Rs. 2 and 3; used adverb- 
 ially, 212 R.4. 
 
 quam qui and qudm ut, 201 R. 1 (/). 
 
 quamvia, 210, 212 and R. 2; used ad- 
 verbially, 212 R. 4. 
 
 qnando, 123, 5; 197, 198. 
 
 quandoquldem, 123, 5. 
 
 quantl, 137. 
 
 Quantity, vid. Prosody. 
 
 quantUmvis and qintntumlibet, etc., 
 tenses after, 210, 212 R.2. 
 
 qudel, 214. 
 
 -jweas conjunction, 34, 123 R. 2. 
 
 guei« and quls^ 87 R. 3. 
 
 quemadmodilm, 215. 
 
 Qi(Beft'o7is, 81 ; potential suhjnnct. in, 
 189, II. (6): Syntax of, 237, sq.; 
 direct simple questio'ns, 239, 240 ; 
 direct double questions, 241; in- 
 direct, 242, sq.; in O.O., 245, 3 
 and R. 
 
 qtil, as abl. sing., 87 R. 2. 
 
 qui (relative pronoun), inflected, 87; 
 translation of, at beginning of 
 clause, 129 R. 9 ; =ut %s, 200, 201 ; 
 est qui, sunt qui, etc., 201 R. 1 (g); 
 = cum is, 212; to denote purpose, 
 200, 233 and R.; causal with the 
 indicative, 198 R. 2. 
 
 qui (adj.), 88, 89. 
 
 qui (indef.), 89, 3, 4 and R 1. 
 
 qui vmnes, 134 R. 4. 
 38* 
 
 quid, 123,5; 197 and 198 and R 5; 
 origin of, 123 R. 23. 
 
 quicunque, 87, 3; with the indicative, 
 227, 232. 
 
 quidiim, 89, 6. 
 
 qiiiddm with ex. and abl., 90, 134 R. 2. 
 
 qnimst, 89 ; 89, 6. 
 
 quln, 201 and R. 3; translation of, 
 203. 
 
 qulndm, 88 and R. 1. 
 
 quippe, 123 K. 25 ; quippe qui, 197, 
 198 (c) and R. 2. 
 
 quire. 111, 10. 
 
 5wi«, a6Z., 87 R. 3. 
 
 quis (interrog.), inflected, 88, 2. 
 
 qina (indef.), inflected, 89, 3; vid. 
 also, 89. 
 
 quiandm, 88 and R. 2. 
 
 quiapidm, 89, 7. 
 
 quisqudm, 89, 7. 
 
 qiiieque, 89, 7 ; with a&^ a6a., 127 R. 6. 
 
 quiitqniK, inflected, 87, 4. 
 
 quo, in yi/mi clauses, 200 (6); udn 
 g«o, 198 R. 4. 
 
 g'tfo — eo, 164 R. 1. 
 
 y?(oad,.219, 228, 229. 
 
 quod, 123, 5; how it attained its 
 causal meaning, 123 R. 21; Syn- 
 tax of, 197, 198; ndn quo, non quod, 
 198 R.4. 
 
 quod scidm, quod intellegam, etc., 
 234 R. 2. 
 
 quod 8% aud ni8%, 123 R. 22. 
 
 qndminus, 200 R. 5. 
 
 quonidm, meaning of, 123 R.24; con- 
 structions after, 197, 198, 
 
 quoqne, 123, 1 and R. 5, 
 
 qiidtiens, 219, 227. 
 
 -quUa, comparison of adj. in, 74, 4. 
 
 rdtione, 168 R. 2. 
 Receiving, verbs of, with gerund^ 184 
 R. 4, III. (a). 
 
RECOEDOR 
 
 450 
 
 SIMITL 
 
 recordor, witb accua., 135 {h), Kern. 
 
 re/ert, 135 (e) and Rs. 
 
 Reflexive pronouns, 78 K. 4 ; 80 R. 2. 
 
 'yegu, lOa. 
 
 JieliUive adv., 129 R. 10; 117; to 
 express pnrpooe, etc., 233. 
 
 Relative (pron.), 129; agreement of 
 relative, 129 and Rs.; antecedent 
 in relative sentence, 129 R, 1 ; at- 
 trnction of, 129 R. 3 ; Si/nesia of, 
 129 R. 7; after dlgnHs, etc., 201 
 R. 1 (e); 234, 2; with the iiidic, 
 231 ; general relatives with the 
 indie, 232; adj. and adv. used to 
 express purpose, etc., 233 ; to ex- 
 press resuhj 234, 1, 2, 3; in re- 
 atrictii^e phrases, 234 R. 2 ; with 
 subjunctive to express another's 
 opinion, etc., 235 and R. 1 ; with 
 indie, to express facts, 235 R. 2; 
 withi»c/jc, inO. 0.,245 R. 2: with 
 accus. and infin. in 0. 0., 245 R. 1; 
 = et Is, nam Is, 245 R. 1. 
 
 Relative propositions, 230-236. 
 
 requies, accus. of, 46, IV. 
 
 Reprexentation, verbs of, with the 
 partic, 194 R. 4, end. 
 
 Resisting, verbs of, 201 R. 2. 
 
 res publico., inflection of, 49 R. 6. 
 
 Restrictive phrases, 234 R. 2. 
 
 Result expressed by infln., 181 R. 2; 
 subjunctive of, 201, sq.; with rel., 
 234; negative result, how express- 
 ed, 201 R. 3. 
 
 refS, abl. of, 37, exo. 
 
 i^//e/or?cra; questions, 237 R. ; 239 R.; 
 Ill 0. 0., 245, 3 R. 1. 
 
 Rhythm, 298. 
 
 Rivers, gender of names of, 13, 5. 
 
 ~r5, stems in, 26 (h). 
 
 rdgO, constructions of, 157 Rs. 2 
 and 3. 
 
 Route by which, .170 R. 4. 
 
 -r(, stems in, 31, Rule 2. 
 
 rurl, 176. 
 
 rus, 154 R. 1 ; 174. 
 
 -riis, participles in, translation of, 
 
 191, 3 (a) ; with verbs of motion, 
 
 191, 3 (6). 
 
 S. 
 
 -8, gender of nouns adding to stem, 
 
 without vowel change, 46, II.; 
 
 gender of nouns inserting -e or t 
 
 before, 33 R. 
 salve, 113, 8. 
 satur, forms of, 55 R. 4. 
 sciacitor, 151 R. 2. 
 Second conjugation, 52, 103, 253. 
 Second declension, 24-29. 
 serf, 123, 3. and R. 12. 
 sed quia, 198 R. 4. 
 aendti, 48 R, 2. 
 Sending, verbs of, with gerund, 184 
 
 R. 4, III. 
 ainex, superlative of, 74 R. 1, 
 Sentence, 21, 125,2; simple, 125,7; 
 
 compound, 125, 7. 
 aententid, 162 R. 3. 
 Separation, abl. of, 160. 
 Separation, verbs of, 160. 
 Sequence of tenses, 190, sqq. ' 
 aese for ae, 78 R. 2. 
 aeu, 123, 2 ; aen — aeu, 123 R. 9. 
 Shipa, gender of names of, 13, 5 
 
 R. 2. 
 ai, 204, 2 ; = " whether," 242, 2 ; 
 
 omitted, 204* R. 5; moods with 
 
 compounds of, 211; =" if ever," 
 
 " lohenever," 227 R. 
 Bi non, 204 R. 1. 
 Sibilant, 6. 
 aicut, 215. 
 stmlli'!, 144 R. 3, 
 Simple condition, 206, 206; in O.O., 
 
 245, 4, 1, 1. 
 almiil, treated as \ prep., 120 R. 4. 
 aimul ae {atque), 224, 227. 
 
SIN 
 
 451 
 
 TAMEX 
 
 »?n, 204, 2 and R. 2. 
 
 Bin iuinu8j alitor, 204: K. 2. 
 
 rind, 181 E. 6. 
 
 flT jfat/em, 123 R. 26. 
 
 siyc — fl^ve, 123 R. 9. 
 
 eOleO, 109, 3. 
 
 volilus, 109, 3. 
 
 solus, genitive of, 56. 
 
 Standard of comparison omitted, 163 
 R. 6. 
 
 Stanzas, 306. 
 
 *S'^eni-characteristic8 of nouna, 17 j 
 of verbs, 99, 4j sfems in ~ro, 2d 
 Dec, 26 ; present-ste-m, 99, 3 j 2'^'*" 
 feet-stem, 99, 5 j BK;ji)ie-s<e73i, 99, 
 . 8 ; tenses formed on present, per/., 
 and supine- stems. Append. V. and 
 VI. 
 
 Strophe, 306. 
 
 siib noctem, 171 R. 5. 
 
 Subject, 21, 3 ; 93, 2 ; case of, 22, 3 ; 
 consists o/,^125, 5 ; position of, 22, 
 6 ; of different persons, 79, 1 ; owm'^- 
 ted, 126 R. 5 ; agreement o/', 1 26 and 
 Es. 1-4; of infin. omitted, 130 E. 
 3; 194,2, R. 3. 
 
 Subject,ln6D., 180 and R. 1. 
 
 Subjunctive Mood, use, 94, 3; 189; 
 pres. in -im. 111 (h)j optative, 
 189, I. (a), (6), (c), {d); in com- 
 mands, etc., 189, I. (5); in coiices- 
 sions, 189, 1 (c) ; in deliberative 
 questions, 189, 1 {d); for lat pers. 
 of imperative, 189 R. 1 ; in ^roAi- 
 bilions, 189, 1 (6) and R. 1; in 
 wishes, 189, 1 (a) and R. 2; poten- 
 tial, 189, il. (a), (6), (c); in caMsa? 
 propositions, 198 (6) and (o); in 
 conditions, 206-208; in compar- 
 ative propositions, 216 and R. ; 
 in temporal prop., 222, etc.; in 
 concessive prop., 223 ; in 0. 0., 
 245, sq.; in »t)np?e condition, 206 
 B.2. 
 
 Substantive personal pronounB, gen- 
 der of, 78 Rs. 
 
 Substantive Pronouns, 78. 
 
 Subtractive form of numerals, 64 R. 7. 
 
 sui, inflection of, 78; remarks on, 78 
 R. 4 ; with gerund, 184 R. 2 ; re- 
 ferring to another word than the 
 subject, 78 R. 4. 
 
 sUm, inflected, 100; with gen., 133. 
 
 sunt qui, indie, after, 234 R. 1. 
 
 Bupellex, 45. 
 
 Superlative degree, 68, 5; formation- 
 of, 69 ; of adj. in -er, 72, 1 ; of 
 adj. in -Uis, 72, 2 ; of adj. in 
 -diciis, -flcus, and -volus, 72, 3; 
 formed by maxime, 74, 3 ; ending 
 in -o, 119 R. 1 ; attracted into the 
 relative sentence, 129 R. 6 ; witli 
 gen., 134; to express a very high 
 degree, 68 R. 4. 
 
 Supine, stem of Ist Gonj., 47 R. 2; 
 of 2d Gonj., 62, 3 ; of Sd Gonj., 75, 
 6; of 4th Gonj., lb, 6; of all the 
 Gonj., 99, 8 ; parts of verb formed 
 on, 106 R. 3; vid. Append. IV., 
 v., VI. 
 
 Supine defined, 98, 5 ; in -wm, 186, 
 A; in-M, 186, B. 
 
 suiim for s\n, 133 R. 3. 
 
 suits and sui, use of, SO R. 2 and 3. 
 
 Syllables, 8. 
 
 Syllepsis, 310, 1 (c). 
 
 Si/naeresis, 297 (c). 
 
 Synalaepha, 297 (n). 
 
 Synapheia, 297 {g). 
 
 Syncope, 309,, 6. 
 
 Synesis, defined, 310, 3 (o) ; of adj., 
 128 R.4; of rel., 129 R. 7. 
 
 Syntax, 125-245. 
 
 Systole, 297 (e). 
 
 taedSt, 135 (e). 
 
 tam'en, 123 R, 19; 212 B. 1. 
 
TAMETSI 
 
 452 
 
 UNEEALITY 
 
 lametai, 210, 211. 
 tanquantj 214. 
 
 tmiit, isr. 
 
 Taste, verbs of, 150 R. 5. 
 
 Teaching, verbs of, 151. 
 
 Temporal adverbs, 117,3; conjuno- 
 tiuns, 123, 10; propositions, 219. 
 
 teiiijiuris with id, 134 R. 3. 
 
 Tenses, defined, 21, II., 1 (4); names 
 of, 95; primary and historical, 
 190; sequence of, 190; present, 95, 
 I.; imperf., 95, II.; future, 95, 
 III.; ^i-e«. ;)er/., 95, IV. ; pne( 
 pe./., 95, v.; >(. ^er/., 95, VI.; 
 of participle, 98, 3. 
 
 Tense endings, p. 22, 3 ; pp. 172, 173 ; 
 formation, 250, 1-9, 260 ; peculiar- 
 ities of tense formation. Appen- 
 dix V. 
 
 tinus, position of, 120 R. 2. 
 
 -tlr, nouns in, of Sd Dec., 38 R. 1 ; 
 formation of adverbs in, 117, 5 
 and R. 
 
 testlmonio, 162 R. 3. 
 
 testis est, 194, 2. 
 
 "the- — "the," 164 R.l. 
 
 their, trans, of, 83, 2. 
 
 thing of importance, how expressed, 
 135 R. 4. 
 
 thing with reference to which, how 
 expressed, 135 R. 4, end. 
 
 Third conjugation, 99,4; paradigm, 
 104; deponents of, 109; formation 
 of perf. and sup. stems of, 257. 
 
 Third declension, 30-46; masc. of, 
 46, 1 ; fern, of, 46, II. ; nent. of, 
 46, III.; accns. sing, of, 46, IV.; 
 abl. eing, of, 46, IV.; gen. pi. of, 
 46, TV. ; aecus. pi. of, 46, IV. ; 
 classes of, 30 ; class I., 31; class 
 II., 33 ; class III,, 35 ; cla^s IV., 
 37; class V., 38, 39; class VI., 
 41-44; in-egular }iouns of, 45; 
 nummary of rules of, 46. 
 
 Thotisanda, how expressed, 64 R. 8. 
 
 Threatening, verbs of, 194 R. 2 (o) 
 and p. 293; 
 
 Time, accns. of, 153; abl. of, 171; 
 dnration of, expressed by ahl., 153 
 R. 2; nouns in apposition ex- 
 pressing, 127 R. 1 ; adj. express- 
 ing, construction of, 128 R. 10; 
 Roman mode of reckoning. Ap- 
 pendix VII. 
 
 Tmesis, 310, 4 [d). 
 
 " ion," expressed by comparative, 68 
 R. 3. 
 
 totus, with abl. without In, 170 E. 2. 
 
 Towns, names of, construction with- 
 out prep., 17.3-176. 
 
 trans, compounded with verba of 
 motion, 152 K. 2. 
 
 Transitive verbs, 93, 6. 
 
 Trees, gender of names of, 13, 5, 2. 
 
 -/MS and -tim, adverbs in, 117, 7. 
 
 (u, inflected, 78 ; when expressed, 78 
 R.l; 126 R. 5(d). 
 
 tin, with gerund, 184 R. 2. 
 
 tuiim instead of tui, 133 R. 3. 
 
 TJ. 
 
 -a, gender of nouns in, 48; stem 
 character of 3d Conj., 99,4; su- 
 pine in, 186, B. 
 
 Ubt, 219, 224; of customary action^ 
 227; consecutive, 201 (b). 
 
 abl prinium, 219, 224. 
 
 Ubt cunque with indie, 232. 
 
 -Ubiia, dat. and abl. in, 48 R. 4. 
 
 -urn for 'drUm, 18 R. 4. 
 
 -um, supine in, 186 (A). 
 
 Uncertainty, verbs of, 201 R. 2. 
 
 w)(de, consecutive, 201 (6). 
 
 u»us, inflected, 56, 4; uses of, 64 R. 
 4; followed by jut, 234, 2. 
 
 units quisque, 89, 8. 
 
 Unreality, condition of, 208; in 0. 0^ 
 245, 4 (3). 
 
UR 
 
 453 
 
 VOLO 
 
 -ttr, nouns in, 46, 1. 
 
 uvba, construction before names of 
 ■ towns, 174 R. 2; 175 R. 1; 176 
 R.l. 
 
 -«8 preceded by a vowel, comparison 
 of adj. in, 74, 4. 
 
 -u8, declension of participles and 
 pronominal adj. in, 55 R. 1. 
 
 atf with subj. to express the thing 
 of importance, 135 R. 4, 3; of 
 purpose, 200; preceded by eo, %d 
 circoj etc., 200 R. 4j omiitedf 200 
 R, 3 ; translation after verba of 
 fearing, 200 R. 6j of result, 201; 
 in sense of "as," p. 331; after 
 verbs of willing and wishing, 181 
 R.4. 
 
 Ut ^ '* lolien," 219. 
 
 ut, comparative, 214, 215, 
 
 ilt, utpote, 197 (c), 
 
 at alt, at censet, to introduce 0. R,, 
 245, 6, 2. 
 
 at ne, 200 R. 1. 
 
 at prtmam, 219, 224, 
 
 Ut quisque, 215 R. 
 
 ut si, 214. 
 
 ater, compounds of, 56, 2. 
 
 uterque, with plural verb, 126 R. 1 
 (c). 
 
 utl, comparative, 214, 215. 
 
 atl, atlndTtij 189 R. 2. 
 
 atinani — an, 129 R. 10. 
 
 utor, inflected, 109; with ahl., 167, 
 1 ; gerundive of, 184 R. 3. 
 
 V, remark on use of, 3 R.; to form 
 
 perf. stem, 99, 7. 
 Value, genit. of, 137. 
 vapuloy 109, 4. 
 -ve, 123 Rs. 7 and 8. 
 ve in compounds, 122, 
 vel, 123 R. 8; ="euc«," 123 R, 8; 
 
 with superl., 123 R. 8, 
 
 velim, velleni, 189, II. (a). 
 
 vein with dat. pf reflex., 145 R. 1, 
 
 velut, veiatsi, 214. 
 
 veneo, 109, 4. 
 
 venum %re, dare 174 R. 5. 
 
 Verbal endings, 249, sq. 
 
 Verbals in -dx with gen., 135 R. 
 
 Verbs, 93-115; definition, 93; struct- 
 u,i% 93, 3; transitive, 93, 6; in(ra7i- 
 sitioe, 93, 7 ; finite, 94, 5 ; indefinite, 
 94, 5 ; moods, 94; tenses, 95 ; voices, 
 96; persons and numbers, 97; con- 
 jugation, 99; (a6?e of endings, pp. 
 172, 173 > in -?o, 107; deponent, 
 109; regular, 93, 8; irregular^ 
 111 ; defective, 112 ; impersonal, 
 114; 7-M?e oy agreement^ 126 and 
 Rs. ; omitted, 126 R. 4; loiVA fioo 
 datives, 147; indef. verb, syntax 
 of, 180-186. 
 
 uero, 123 R. 29 and Rs. 14 and 15. 
 
 Ferj!t//jcaij'o)J, 295. 
 
 versus, with zn.or ttcf, 120 R. 2, 
 
 rerwrn, 123 Rs. 14 and 15. 
 
 ue«c5j', with a6^., 167, 1. 
 
 vestr%, vestrUm, uses of, 78 R. 3. 
 
 vestrUm omniam, 78 R. 3. 
 
 veto, 181 R. 6; with accus.f 142 R. 2. 
 
 v^tiift. compared, 72, 2. 
 
 uf, Jb8 R. 2. 
 
 t??7*, ^en/t. of, 26 R. 2. 
 
 wis, inflected, 45. 
 
 vivo, with a&^, 167, 1. 
 
 vlx, 221 R. 
 
 FocaaVe, 15 (e); of mews, rfews, 24 
 R. 3j Syntax of, 158. , 
 
 Vocative ending absorbed in proper 
 names in -ius, 24 R. 2. 
 
 Voices, 96. 
 
 vSlentl in phrase dUquzd mlkt vo- 
 lenti est, etc., 146 R. 5. 
 
 void, inflected. 111, 3; note on its 
 form, 111, 3 (n); perf, infin. after, 
 185 R. 1. 
 
VOLUS 
 
 454 
 
 ZEUGMA 
 
 -vSIUb, oomparison of adj. in, 72, 
 
 3- 
 
 Vowehy 4, 7, 
 
 voe, expressed, 78 E. 1 ; 126 E. 5 (rf). 
 
 W. 
 
 w not in Latin alphabet. 
 
 Wililnrjj icishhig, verbs of, 181; witb 
 subjunct., 181 R. 4. 
 
 Winds, gender of names of, 13, 
 5. 
 
 Wish, expression c f, 7 89, II., 1 (o) 
 and B. 2; mood in, in simple con- 
 dition, 206 R. 1. 
 
 " without," 168 R. 3; translated by 
 quiti, p. 305. 
 
 X. 
 x, remark on use, 3 R. 
 
 y, remark on use, 3 R. 
 Year, 261 ; months, 261. 
 "yes," 81, 1, and 4 and 5. 
 -yx, nouns in, 31 R. 2, 2. 
 
 Z. 
 
 z, remark on use, 3. 
 Zeugma, 310, 1 (6). 
 
 THE END.